an ethnogtraphic study at sma in kapubapten pasar

ISBN: 978-602-60736-0-0 www.dki.p-adri.or.id/prosiding/prosiding4jakarta

PROCEEDING ABSTRACT INTERNATIONAL MULTIDISCIPLINARY CONFERENCE AND CALL FOR PAPER

ACADEMIC COMMUNITY EMPOWERMENT THROUGH INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL PUBLICATION (International Conference and Call for Paper, MoU Multi Campus, OJS Training and Clinic Manuscript for International Journal's Article)

Jakarta, Indonesia January 13-14, 2017

Hosted by: Perkumpulan Ahli dan Dosen Indonesia (P-ADRI) DPD DKI Jakarta-Banten

Published by: UNJ Press

Address: Jl. Rawamangun Muka Jakarta Timur Indonesia www.dki.p-adri.or.id email: [email protected]

i

PROCEEDING ABSTRACT INTERNATIONAL MULTIDISCIPLINARY CONFERENCE AND CALL FOR PAPER

ACADEMIC COMMUNITY EMPOWERMENT THROUGH INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL PUBLICATION (International Conference and Call for Paper, MoU Multi Campus, OJS Training and Clinic Manuscript for International Journal's Article)

Jakarta, Indonesia January 13-14, 2017

x, …..pages, ….cm Copyright Reserved Copyright@2017 ISBN: 978-602-60736-0-0

Person in charge: Prof. Dr. Muchlis Rantoni Luddin, MA. Universitas Negeri Jakarta (UNJ), Jakarta

Dr. H. Achmad Fathoni Rodli, M.Pd. General Chairman P-ADRI Universitas Ma'arif Hasyim Latief (UMAHA), Sidoarjo, Jawa Timur

ii

Chief executive: Dr. Ir. Illah Sailah, M.S. Chairman of the Council P-ADRI DKI Jakarta-Banten

Board of Editor: Prof. Dr. Endry Boeriswati, M.Pd. Dr. Herlina Noldy, M.Pd. Deffi Ayu Puspito Sari, Ph.D. Dr. Yusnidar Yusuf, M.Si.

Executive Editor: Dr. Guntur Saragi, MM Dr. Henny Herawati D., M.Pd. Dr. Siti Nurjanah Dr. Prima Gustiyanti, M.Hum Dr. Nini Ibrahim Sulfikar Sallu, M.Kom, ITIL Sholatia Dalimunthe, SE., MBA. Otto Fajariyanto, M.Kom Prayuningtyas Anggerwardhani, M.Pd. Hestiyani Parai, M.Pd.

Published by: UNJ Press Address: Jl. Rawamangun Muka Jakarta Timur, Indonesia

iii

PREFACE Praise being said to Allah Almighty God for all the grace and guidance that has been given to us all, so the Proceeding of the ADRI 2017 International Multidisciplinary Conference and Call for Papers is completed. The proceeding contains a number of articles and research papers from lectures, teachers, students, researchers and/or observers of the development of science and technology. This seminar is the series of the International Seminar organized by ADRI, the first was held in Lombok, Mataram; the second was held in Surabaya; the third was held in Pontianak. The fourth International Seminar in Jakarta invites four keynote speakers from Japan, Malaysia, Thailand and Singapore. Paper participated in this conference has reached to more than 200 papers. On this occasion we would like to thanks to our Keynote Speakers: 1. Prof. Dr. Mamoru Yamada (Japan) 2. Prof. Dr. Tharek Abdul Rahman (Malaysia) 3. Prof. Dr. Ir. Gatot Priyowirjanto (SEAMEO Bangkok) 4. Prof. Dr. Andrivo Rusydi (Singapore)

In addition to the international conference, this event also conduct inauguration of ADRI DPD DKI Jakarta-Banten, OJS Training and Clinic Manuscript for International Journal's Publication. Hopefully, this proceeding may benefited to all of us, for the development of science, technology, arts, culture and sports. In addition, it is also expected to be a reference for the nation and state-building efforts so that science and technology will become a strong pillar in facing challenges in the future.

Sincerely, Chief Executive

Dr.Ir. Illah Sailah, M.S. Chairman ADRI DPD DKI Jakarta Banten

iv

Table of Contents

Title

Pages

AN OUTSTANDING STUDENT’S WELL BEING Pentarina Intan Laksmitawati PEER COUNSELING : A STRATEGY TO REDUCTION ADDICTS PORN BEHAVIOR FOR STUDENTS IN SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL Santi Widiasari, Fuad Aminur Rahman, Sumini, and Caraka Putra Bhakti INDIVIDUAL COUNSELING TO ARGUE IN SOCIAL MEDIA Erwin Erlangga EFFECTIVENESS THE TRAINING CERTIFICATION OF INSERVICE TEACHER ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF COMPETENCY PROFILE OF SOCIAL STUDIES TEACHER Dadang Iskandar and Acep Roni Hamdani ISLAM NUSANTARA AND ISLAM BERKEMAJUAN RHETORIC IN NEW MEDIA Dini Safitri THE USE OF EDMODO IN LEARNING INDONESIAN IN SMA FATAHILLAH TANGERANG Nini Ibrahim and Deasy Wahyu Hidayati IMPLEMENTATION MATLAB PROGRAM TO TEACH COMPUTATIONAL PHYSICS IN HIGHER EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTION Eka Murdani, Soeharto THE EFFECTIVENESS OF COOPERATIVE LEARNING WITH STRUCTURAL MAKE A MATCH ON ACADEMIC ACHIEVEMENT AND SOCIAL BEHAVIOR: A CASE STUDY AT SMKN 33 JAKARTA Rina Febriana, Vika Wulan Aristya, and Cucu Cahyana IMPROVED INTELLIGENCE KINESTHETIC CHILDREN AGES 5-6 YEARS THROUGH ACTIVITIES OF MOTION AND SONG Elindra Yetti, and Herviana Muanivah IMPROVE THE ABILITY OF READING COMPREHENSION BY USING MEDIA PICTURE STORY BOOK ON CHILDREN'S MENTAL RETARDATION CLASS IV SPECIAL PRIMARY SCHOOL (SLB) IndinaTarjiah and Elin Novelinda THE IMPACTS OF SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL/VOCATIONAL SCHOOL JAPANESE TEACHER TRAINING TOWARD TEACHER‘S PEDAGOGIC COMPETENCE ENHANCEMENT Kardina Pendikarini and Dedi Sutedi OPTIMIZATION OF GAME CHARACTER EDUCATION BASED ON TRADITIONAL PHYSICAL EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH BEHAVIOUR AND EMOTIONAL PROBLEMSTHROUGH LEARNING MODEL QUANTUM LEARNING (NEURO PSYCHOLOGY LEARNING AND LEARNING) THE DEVELOPMENT OF NATIONALITY EDUCATION MODEL FOR CROSS-CULTURAL YOUTH Komarudin, Ubedilah, dan Syaifudin iii

1 4

11 15

22

25

29

33

41

45

48

53

59

TEACHING LEARNING (PEDAGOGY) MODEL OF ENGLISH SCIENCE Nasori Efendi THE LEARNING OF CRITICAL READING AND CREATIVE WRITING (AESTHETIC-RECEPTIVE AND CRITICAL CREATIVE PROCESS IN APPRECIATIVE READING) Titin Setiartin R, Jojo Nuryanto, and Ipah Muzdalipah THE BUSHIDO VALUE IN KANJI LEARNING Lailatul Husna and Dedi Sutedi BIPA READINESS IN THE FACE OF MEA Rosida Tiurma Manurung OPTIMIZATION LANGUAGE LEARNING IN ACHIEVING GLOBALLY COMPETENCE STUDENT Ainur Rohmah VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR LEARNING CORRELATION IN INTERMEDIATE JAPANESE LANGUAGE Imelda STRATEGY, APPROACH, METHOD, AND TECHNIQUE USED IN TRANSLATION LEARNING PROCESS Ninip Hanifah ANALYSIS OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR: WHY THEY CHOOSE PLEASED WITH COSTS EXPENSIVE EDUCATION Nurmawati and Ida Kusnawati Tjahjani ANALYSIS OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR: WHY THEY CHOOSE PLEASED WITH COSTS EXPENSIVE EDUCATION Nurmawati and Ida Kusnawati Tjahjani IS IT TRULY EMPLOYEE COMMITMENT AFFECT EMPLOYEE PERFORMANCE? EFFECT OF EMPOWERMENT AND JOB SATISFACTION TO THE PERFORMANCE OF EMPLOYEES FACULTY OF EDUCATION AND TEACHING OF UIN ALAUDDIN MAKASSAR Ulfani Rahman EDUCATION ON ORAL HEALTH KNOWLEDGE AND ORAL HYGIENE OF JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOLCHILDREN Rikawarastuti, Jusuf Kristianto THE USE OF PHYSICAL PUNISHMENT ON CHILDREN AT HOME Rita Johan THE INFLUENCE OF LEARNING PROCESS EFFECTIVENESS ON EXPERTISE QUALITY IMPROVEMENT IN EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTIONS OF PONTIANAK (A Case Study on Economics Faculty, Muhammadiyah University of Pontianak) Santy Mayda Batubara THE IMPORTANCE OF PROFESSIONALISM TEACHERS AND CHARACTER EDUCATION STUDENTS OF ELEMENTARY SCHOOL IN TWENTY FIRST CENTURY Sita Ratnaningsih IMPROVING SKILL OF SHORT STORY WRITING THROUGH COOPERATIVE INTEGRATED READING AND COMPOSITION (CIRC) Siti Ansoriyah iv

68 73

76 79 83

88

92

97

99

102 109

115

118 120

124

130

EFFECT OF EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES AND PROFESSIONAL TEACHER QUALITY OF EDUCATION SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL IN INDONESIA IN 2010-2014 Siti Nurjanah and Ade Ira Pravita Sari THE INFLUENCE OF LEADERSHIP AND PERFORMANCE ON THE MOTIVATION OF PARTICIPANTS EDUCATION AND TRAINING Soedarto THE STUDENTS’ PERCEPTION TOWARD TEACHER’S REINFORCEMENT IN TEACHING ENGLISH Sri Marmoah and Atik Aprilyanti LITERACY DEVELOPMENT IN EDUCATION SECONDARY CURRICULUM Suherli THE IMPACT OF EMPLOYEE JOB SATISFACTIONS TO WORK COMMITMENT: A CASE STUDY OF MINISTRY OF INDUSTRY IN INDONESIA Dewi Susita and Hania Aminah THE EFFECT OF MEDIA WEB-BASED LEARNING TUTORIAL VIDEO AND LEARNING MOTIVATION TO THE LEARNING OUTCOMES ON TECHNIQUES IN VIDEO PROCESSING SUBJECT AT STATE VOCATIONAL SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL YKPP BONTANG Supari Muslim and Muri Mukhrianto THE IMPLEMENTATION OF PROBLEM SOLVING METHODS IN INCREASING THE CREATIVE THINKING ABILITY Ai Nur Solihat DEVELOPMENT OF LEARNING MODEL FOR DEVELOPING/ IMPROVING/EMPORING STUDENTS TEACHER COMPETENCES BY INTEGRATING AUDIO VISUAL AND SELF REFLECTION Tri Sediyani, Yufiarti, Eko Hadi THE IMPLEMENTATION OF MODEL OF TEACHING SCIENTIFIC ATTITUDE IN SUBJECT MATTER OF SCIENCE AT JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL IN INDONESIA Wahidin THE IMPLEMENTATION OF GENDER-ORIENTED SCHOOLS: AN ETHNOGTRAPHIC STUDY AT SMA IN KAPUBAPTEN PASAR WidyatmikeGede Mulawarman THE INTEGRATION OF ETHNOCHEMISTRY IN CULTURALLY RESPONSIVE TEACHING (CRT) FOR STUDENTS ENGAGEMENT IN CHEMISTRY LEARNING Yuli Rahmawati, Arif Rahman, and Maruni Triwana MACHINE LEARNING APPROACH FOR ANALYSIS OF SOCIAL MEDIA Zen Munawar, Bambang Siswoyo,and Nanna Suryana Herman THE CAUSES FACTORS OF EMPLOYEE TURNOVER INTENTION Zahara T. Rony PERCEPTUAL ABILITY AND COMMUNICATING MOTION INSIDE KINESTHETIC INTELLIGENCE OF DANCE COMPOSITION Dinny Devi Triana1

v

134

140

146

151 155

161

167

174

179

187

190

195 199 208

ROLE NEUROPSYCHOLOGY APPROACH IN ELEMENTARY CLASSROOM FOR GIVING STUDENTS MOTIVATION THROUGH ARCS MODEL Atikah Syamsi and Siti Dewi Maharani A COMPARATIVE STUDY OF STUDENTS’ ACADEMIC ACHIEVEMENT BASED ON ADMISSION SYSTEM OF STATE ISLAMIC HIGHER EDUCATION INSTITUTIONS (PTKIN) IN INDONESIA Abdul Muhid, Kusaeri and A. Hanif Asyhar PRIMARY DESIGN CLASS MANAGEMENT BASED ON SCIENTIFIC LEARNING PROGRAMS Acep Saepul Rahmat and Mulyana THE ROLE OF BOARD FOR NATIONAL STANDARD IN EDUCATION IN REVITALIZING THE SENIOR SECONDARY VOCATIONAL SCHOOLS IN THE CONTEXT OF STANDARD BASED EDUCATION SYSTEM Bambang Suryadi and Yuli Rahmawati RATTAN CRAFTS PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT STRATEGY OF CREATIVE ECONOMY IN PALANGKA RAYA Tresia Kristiana COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGES AND MARKETING STRATEGY ENCOURAGING PERFORMANCE MARKETING OF SMEs Fahruddin Salim STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT IMPLEMENTATION AND BALANCED CRECARD ON MANAGEMENT SYSTEM OF MOSQUE Amin Syukron THE ROLE OF PUBLIC RELATIONS IN ORGANIZATIONS Poppy Ruliana and Angga B. Umbara MINANGKABAU TRADITIONAL CAUSINE: HOW CONSUMER PREFERENCES IN PADANG? Hasdi Aimon, Muhammad Yunus, Violetta Puteri Dhuayu, and Ratna Sari THE MODEL OF HUMANISTIC LEADERSHIP IN DEVELOPING HUMAN RESOURCES IN HIGHER EDUCATION Andi Mursidi, Abd. Basith, and Soeharto COMMUNITY-BASED TOURISM VILLAGE IN SUMBANG, BANYUMAS DISTRICT Muhamad Sulthan COMMUNITY-BASED TOURISM VILLAGE IN SUMBANG, BANYUMAS DISTRICT Muhamad Sulthan THE INFLUENCE OF THE COMPLETENESS OF THE PRODUCT, STORE ATMOSPHERE AND DISPLAY AGAINST THE PURCHASE OF THE PRODUCT IN THE STORE MY SISTER TREND MODE ON GRESIK Chandra Kartika and Soenarmi ISLAMIC MICRO FINANCE: FIGHTING MONEYLENDERS (A Capital Strengthening Efforts for Traditional Market Traders) Sabirin and Jeremia Persadanta DO FOREIGN AND LOCAL OWNERSHIP AFFECT STOCK PRICES IN INDONESIAN CAPITAL MARKETS ? Wihartanto and Prima Naomi vi

212

218

224

229

235

243

247

250 254

259

263

265

267

276

283

USE OF SOFTWARE MENDELEY EFFECTIVENESS RESEARCH IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS FOR PUBLICATION JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL Rohmiati Amini DidinHadi Saputra KNOWLEDGE TRANSFER: A CONCEPTUAL MODEL AND FACILITATING FEATURES IN START-UP BUSINESS Boy I. Pasaribu, Adella Arfianti, Gun Gun Gumilar, Hilda P. Rizanti, and Siti Rohajawati DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEM PEOPLE BUSINESS CREDIT METHOD USING ANALYTICAL HIERARCHY PROCESS (AHP) IN BANK BUKOPIN PADANG BRANCH Idwar and Bonie Kenanga ANALYSIS OF VISITORS PERCEPTION IN TOURISM FARM HOUSE SERVICE QUALITY Yulianto, Resista Vikaliana, Asep Candra Hidayat, and Munir Saputra IMPLEMENTATION EFFECTIVENESS ANALYSIS OF TALENT MANAGEMENT AT TELKOM UNIVERSITY Anthon Rustono and Ratri Wahyuningtyas MANAGEMENT STRATEGIC DEVELOPMENT MARKETING COOPERATIVE IN THE ERA OF GLOBAL Agustin Sukarsono ANALYSIS OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR: WHY THEY CHOOSE PLEASED WITH COSTS EXPENSIVE EDUCATION Nurmawati and Ida Kusnawati Tjahjani DEVELOPING COOPERATIVE OF SUBAK TO IMPROVE AGRIBUSINESS: Case of Subak of Guama, Bali Province Gede Sedana AGRICULTURAL WASTES/ RESIDUES MANAGEMENT FOR ENERGY: POTENTIAL ROLE OF COOPERATIVES Herry Suhermanto THE UTILIZATION OF CRUDE GLYCEROL OF WASTE VEGETABLE OIL BIODIESEL ON PALM OIL GLYCEROLYSIS Siti Mujdalipah, IkaAmalia K, Hasna A, Puji R N, and NastitiSiswi I THE REUSE OF TRADITIONAL MEDIA COMMUNICATION FOR DISASTER PREVENTION (CASE STUDY IN BANYUMAS, CENTRAL OF JAVA INDONESIA) S. Bekti Istiyanto ANALYSIS OF SOCIETY’S PARTICIPATION EFFECT AND TRANSPORTATION’S INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT TO SUSTAINABLE TRANSPORTATION Andi Estetiono EXSPERIMENTAL PHYSIC-CHEMICAL MODIFICATION ON SORGHUM FLOUR AS SUBSTITUTE WHEAT FLOUR Azafilmi Hakiim, Faresti Sistihapsari, and DessyAgustina Sari DEVELOPING COOPERATIVE OF SUBAK TO IMPROVE AGRIBUSINESS: Case of Subak of Guama, Bali Province Gede Sedana vii

289

293

298

303

305

308

313

315

320

334

337

343

348

352

DESCRPTION OF CARIOGRAM BASED ON DIET CONTENTS, DIET FREQUENCY AND PLAQUE AMOUNT ON FOURTH AND FIFTH GRADE SDN 04 KAMPUNG OLO PADANG STUDENTS Dewi Elianora, Intan B.E. Mahata, and Ega Raudhatul Hukma BEHAVIORAL DETERMINANTS of WOMEN AGE 15 – 24 YEARS OLD in HAVING GOOD PERSPECTIVE of MATURE AGE for MARRIED (PUP) in PANCORAN MAS VILLAGE,DISTRICT PANCORAN MAS, DEPOK CITY 2016 Mona Safitri Fatiah and Tri Yunis Miko Wahyono THE ANALYSIS OF POTENTIAL WORKPLACE ACCIDENTS USING HAZARD IDENTIFICATION AND RISK ASSESSMENT METHOD Widhy Wahyani MOBILE LEARNING APPLICATION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER ASSEMBLY TECHNIQUES AS LEARNING MEDIA IN VOCATIONAL HIGH SCHOOL Muhammad Yusro, Jusuf Bintoro, and Eka Dinarya IMPLEMENTATION ADJUSTMENT GUARANTEED TIME SLOT METHOD BASED ON DATA SIZE FOR IEEE 802.15.4 Eppy Yundra DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF FUEL OIL TRUCK MONITORING SYSTEM USING GPS, RFID AND WIRELESS Syufrijal COMPARISON IDENTIFICATION SHAPE LEAVES IN INDONESIA USING EDGE DETECTION SOBEL, ROBERTS, PREWITT, ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION AND RATIO LENGTH AND WIDTH LEAVES Ratnadewi and Dominicus Reynaldi Farada AN IMPROVED CAESAR CIPHER ALGORITHM FOR BETTER SECURITY Johni S Pasaribu INTERACTION BETWEEN MATHEMATICS AND ENGLISH LEARNING: AN OBSERVATION ON TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN ENGLISH TO INDONESIAN EFL STUDENTS AgusRianto and IffiFitriah ISLAM NUSANTARA AND ISLAM BERKEMAJUAN RHETORIC IN NEW MEDIA Dini Safitri AVOIDANCE OF DOUBLE TAXATION AGREEMENT IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES (IN PERSPECTIVE BUSINESS LAW) Musniasih Yulianti and Didin Hadi Saputra HUMAN RIGHTS IN THE LAW OF GENDER PERSPECTIVE (Relation in protection and enforcement) Siti Afiyah ANALYSIS RELATIONSHIP ASEAN AND CHINA REPUBLIC on DRUGS Kinkin Yuliaty Subarsa Putri, and Marisa Puspita Sary CHARACTERISTICS IN THE MARRIAGE REGISTRATION OFFICE OF RELIGIOUS AFFAIRS M. Zamroni CASE STUDY ON VIOLENCE AGAINST AHMADIYYA ADHERENTS IN INDONESIA IN THE REIGN OF PRESIDENT SUSILO BAMBANG YUDHOYONO Agung Yudhistira Nugroho FUNCTIONS OF CUSTOMARY LAW IN MANAGING WATER MANAGEMENT viii

357

360

366

371

376

382

387

391 396

401 404

407

410 414

421

424

WITHIN FARMERS’ ORGANIZATION: Case of Subak Kedua, Denpasar City, Bali Province, Indonesia Putu Dyatmikawati INTEGRITY OF HUMAN RESOURCES AND PERFORMANCE OF THE ORGANIZING ELECTIONS 2017 Meithiana REPRESENTATION OF WOMEN IN MEDIA SITES ONLINE Novi Andayani Praptiningsih EFFECT OF AGING TIME AND MUSCLE POSITION ON ORGANOLEPTIC PROPERTIES OF ONGOLE CROSS BREED MEAT Harapin Hafid, Nuraini, Astriana Napirah, and Inderawati A CASE STUDY ONMAINTENANCE OF OVERHEAT – SPOT WELDINGMACHINE Dessy Agustina Sari, Iksanudin, and Azafilmi Hakiim

ix

427

431 432

442

AN OUTSTANDING STUDENT’S WELL BEING Pentarina Intan Laksmitawati Psychology Undergraduate Program, Semarang State University [email protected]

Abstract. An outstanding student is a multi-sport competition for college students who have ability in academics. Most students assume that outstanding student just as the competition just after the competition was completed, the predicate that faded. As for students who feel weighed down the top predicate is obtained. This research was qualitative research with the purpose of knowing the description of subjective well-being at most high achieving students. The subject in this study was an accomplished student of rank one, two, and three in the Education Faculty of Semarang State University in 2016. Data collection method using interviews. Keywords: Well-being, outstanding student I. INTRODUCTION

competition just after the competition was completed, the predicate that faded. As for students who feel weighed down the top predicate is obtained. On that basis, researchers want to find out how subjective well-being on the outstanding students of Education Faculty in Semarang State University.

Students are a small part of the younger generation of Indonesia who had the opportunity to hone his ability in college. Of course it is desirable that the maximum benefit in education in order to be later able to contribute to its ability to improve the quality of life of the nation of Indonesia which is currently not yet recovered fully from the crisis experienced in the late 20th century. The teachers hope that every student uses his talent and time during the school day so that maximum occurs learning objectives. In line with the efforts of educational enhancement may be noted the issue of the achievement of academic students. Students who have high potentials course has a greater opportunity to achieve expected academic achievement at the level of education that are currently on the journey. This means that when students use his/her potential in optimal, and meet the demands of the academic set, hope is able to achieve optimum academic achievement (Warsito 2009). One of the programs that are initiated by the Government to make their skills in the field of optimizing student academic Achievers are students or abbreviated Mawapres. Student Achievers is a multi-sport competition for college students who have ability in academics. The ability of the tested among others United Kingdom language proficiency, GPA, and scientific papers. To obtain a predicate Student Overachievers, many things to get, like the award as a champion or other awards. The existence of this program, it is expected the students vying to reach achievements extended.Coleman said that individuals who are trying to improve themselves to achieve excellent standards are individuals who have accomplished a boost. Research before showed a significant relationship between the pattern of risk-taking and student academic achievement. Students with outstanding achievements tend to take risk with moderate rates, whereas students with low academic achievement tend to take the risk of high or low. In addition, there is a positive and significant correlation between motifs to Excel with academic student. After obtaining the title of student achievers, students usually be aside. That is, an outstanding student just as the

II. METHODS In this study, researchers dig subjective well-being in students achieving good results with the goal of explaining subjective well-being on an accomplished student based on the experience of the researcher and the object of his studies, so this research is qualitative research. Data collection techniques used are interviews and technical validity of the data used is a triangulation source, namely a technique of checking the credibility of data is done by examining data obtained through several sources. An overview of student achievers profile is that not all students are achievers is indeed clever at birth. However, most students achieving good results are those that utilize the time to learn so that they acquire the accomplishments of the Championship in the race, which is also one of the elements that made them was nominated for student achievers. Nomination of students achieving good results can be obtained by looking at the various aspects, such as the scientific paper, English language proficiency, achievement, and the Championship is a good achievement index. The environment is very influential in achievement. The presence of social support and the support of around makes the students increasingly vigorous in pursuing achievement. Support-the support may come from family, friends, professors, and others who were in the vicinity. Top achievements obtained as an accomplished student, makes students feel proud over himself, but cannot make it complacency to quit get achievement. They increasingly motivated and challenged to always get acheivement in another line and provide some benefits to others. Become an accomplished student making them better known and believed many people because it was judged to have outstanding ability that not many are owned by other students. In addition, graduating students are overachievers, making them often got an invitation to motivate other

1

general students and sharing the science surrounding the world of scholarship. As for being an accomplished student making them have a lot of relationships and establish good relationships with various parties, such as campus officials, organizations, communities, and institutions outside the campus.

3. Aspects ofSubjective Well-Being Ryff (Nursanti 2012) produced a model of prosperity in the form of multidimensional, comprising six functions of positive psychology, namely: a. Self-acceptance The reception is open means being passivity or resignation, but a clear understanding of the events that will be take so that the individual can effectively give a response (Shapiro). b. Positive relationship with sesame Diener and Seligman found that a good social relationships is something that is necessary, but not enough to make a person's subjective well-being. That is, a good social relationships does not make a person had subjective well-being is high but someone with subjective well-being has a high associated social traits. c. Autonomy The main characteristic of individuals who have a good autonomy among others can decide everything alone (self-determining) and independent. He is able to take decisions without pressure and interference of others. In addition, such person has the resilience in the face of social pressure, can be mnegukur behaviors in themselves, and can evaluate themselves with personal standards (Ryff). d. Environmental Mastery Someone who is good in the dimension of environmental mastery have confidence and competence in regulating the environment. He can control various external activities that are in the environment including set up and control the situations of everyday life, forgive the opportunity that is in their environment, as well as being able to choose and create an environment that suits your needs and personal values. e. Purpose in life Individual commitment to the pursuit of the goals of his life will help individuals understand the meaning of life and help resolve the problem. f. Personal growth Personally capable of fully functional is a personal who have a locus of control as a means of evaluation, where a person does not see the others for approval, but evaluate yourself by using his personal standard. g. The physical and mental Health. According to Diener someone satisfied in life is someone who has good mental health, the ha is related to the people who experience the disorder neurosis, which became one of the causes of mental disorder.

III.RESULT AND DISCUSSION 1. Definition ofSubjective Well-Being Subjective well-being according to Ed Diener (Nursanti, 2012) is the scientific name for explaining how people evaluate their lives. People can evaluate his life in terms of global assessment (as will his life satisfaction or feeling satisfied will be alive), in another term to evaluate her life of power (such as weddings and work), or in other terms more sustainable emotional feeling about what is happening to them (feelings, emotions that arise from one's experience and positive evaluation of low levels of unpleasant feelings that emerged from the evaluation of the negative experience of someone). Compton (Nursanti, 2012) argues that the subjective wellbeing is divided into two main variables, namely happiness and life satisfaction. Happiness related to the emotional state of individuals and how the individual perceives himself and his world. Life satisfaction tend to be referred to as a global evaluation of the ability of the individual receives his or her life. 2. Factors ofSubjective Well Being According to Payot&Diener (in Nursati), factors affecting subjective well-being is as follows: a. The culture/character Temperaments are usually interpreted as basic and universal nature of personality, is considered to be the most can be derived and demonstrated as a stable factor in a person's personality. b. The nature Extrovert nature is at a higher level of happiness because it has greater sensitivity towards rewards are positive or have a stronger reaction against the events of fun. c. Other personal chars Other personality traits such as optimism and confidence are associated with subjective well-being. People are optimistic about the future reported feeling more happy and satisfied upon his life. d. Social relationships Positive relationships with others related to the subjective well-being because of the existence of a positive relationship will support social and emotional closeness. Basically it needs to interact with other people is an innate need. e. Social/cultural Influences. The influence of the society that the subjective wellbeing differences can arise because of the difference in the wealth of the country. He further explain that the wealth of a country may give rise to subjective wellbeing is high because usually the rich countries would appreciate the human rights, allow the people living there to age longer and giving democracy.

4. Components ofSubjective Well Being According to Diener (Nursanti in 2012), subjective well-being is divided into two General components, namely: a. Cognitive component The cognitive component is the evaluation of our satisfaction of life, which is defined as an assessment of a person's life. Evaluation of life satisfaction can be divided into: 1) Evaluation of the satisfaction of living globally (life satisfication), namely the evaluation respondents against his life as a whole. Global live life satisfaction

2

was meant to represent the appreciation in general and reflective asrespondents against his life. More specifically, global life satisfaction involves the perception of a person against a state of compare his life with unique standards they have. 2) Evaluation of satisfaction on a particular domain, is the assessment that is made of someone in evaluating domains in life, such as physical and mental health, employment, recreation, social relationships, and family. Both of these are not completely separate components. Evaluation of global in life satisfaction is a reflection of one's perception towards things that are in his life, coupled with how culture affects a positive view of life from someone. b. Affective component In General, the affective component of subjective wellbeing reflects the basic experience in the events that occur in one's life. Affective component of subjective well-being can be divided into: 1) Positive effects Positive effects present mood and emotions that menyangkan like affection. Positive emotions or fun is part of the subjective well-being because of the emotion-emotion reflects one's reaction against events which indicate that life goes according to what he wanted. Aphek positive looks from emotionspecific emotions such as interested and interested in something, joyful, powerful, enthusiastic, alert, proud, passionate, full of determination, thoughtful, and active. 2) Negative effects Effects from pravelensi is a negative emotion and mood are not fun and reflect on the negative response that someone as a reaction against life, health, circumstances, and events that they have experienced. Negative effects look of emotion-specific emotions such as sadness, disappointment, fear, irritability, hostile, shame, anxiety, nervousness, and worry.

c. Extrovertion Ekstrovertion became one of the very significant predictors of subjective well-being. Outgoing individuals have the opportunity to build positive relationships with other individuals at once get reciprocity from other individual so embodied condition of well-being. d. Optimism People are more optimistic with the future feel more language and more satisfied with life. Expectations of positive results not only enhances the mood but also provides a better coping strategy when subjected to stress. e. Positive relationship Individuals are at a positive social relationships associated with high self-esteem, coping with success, better health, and psychological problems. f. A sense of meaning and purpose to life Both the variables measured as religiosity in subjective well-being. Religion gives feelingsmeans for individuals in addition to also support social and tying self-esteem through self-verification process when an individual comes into contact with another individual to share their stories. IV. CONCLUSIONS Top achievements obtained as an accomplished student, makes students feel proud over himself, but cannot make it complacency to quit get achievement. They increasingly motivated and challenged to continue to always get achievement and provide benefits to others.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

5. Predictors of Subjective Wel- Being According to Argyle, Myers &Diener (Nursanti 2012) there are six of these variables associated with happiness and life satisfaction, namely: a. Self-esteem Self-esteem is an important predictor of the pain of subjective well-being. Positive self-esteem is associated with an adaptive function in every sphere of life. High self-esteem provide a number of advantages for the individual include feelings of meaningful and valuable. b. Sense of perceived control Personal control is the belief that individuals can behave in a way to maximize good results or bad results as minimal.

[6] [7]

3

REFERENCES Kamus Bahasa Indonesia Online. kbbi.web.id (diakses pada 12 Juni 2016). Nursanti. (2012). Hubungan Optimismen dengan Subjective Well Being pada Karyawan. Skripsi, Universitas Negeri Semarang. Suprapti, V., & Putri, D. A. (2014). Hubungan antara Self Efficacy dengan Subjective Well Being pada Mahasiswa Baru Politeknik Elektronika Negeri Surabaya (PENS) yang Kos. Jurnal Psikologi Industri dan Organisasi, Vol. 3, No. 3. Warsito, H. (2009). Hubungan Antara Self Efficacy dengan Penyesuaian Akademik dan Prestasi Akademik (Studi pada Mahasiswa FIP Universitas Negeri Surabaya). Jurnal Ilmiah Ilmu Pendidikan, Vol. IX No. 1.

PEER COUNSELING : A STRATEGY TO REDUCTION ADDICTS PORN BEHAVIOR FOR STUDENTS IN SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL Santi Widiasari1),Fuad Aminur Rahman2), Sumini3), Caraka Putra Bhakti4) Email:

Bimbingan dan Konseling, Universitas Ahmad Dahlan [email protected],[email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

Abstract. Pornography has become a serious threat to the country's youth, especially pornography on the Internet, especially teenagers have become victims of the negative impacts of pornography sites, causing addiction for teenagers to watch pornographic movies repeatedly. Teenagers are the future generation, so in need of significant efforts to rescue the Indonesianteenagers and prevent the escalation of pornography addiction. The school is one sector which has an important role to carry out preventive measures for prevention of addiction in students in the Middle School. Social and peer factors can’t be separated with the increasing addiction to pornography to high school students. Peers are factors that greatly affect life in adolescence, because in reality young people in society now spends most of her time with their peers. Teens tend to be happy to tell the matter to their peers because they will feel more comfortable, safe, and their mutual understanding. Noting the importance of the role of peers, the development of positive peer environment is an effective way that can be achieved to support the development of adolescents and reduce juvenile delinquency form especially in the case of addiction to high school students. Based on these descriptions, it would require significant preventive measures to prevent the increasing addiction to pornography to high school students. One effort to do counselors as preventive measures to prevent the occurrence of behavioral addiction to pornography to high school students is to establish peer counseling within the student community. Peer Counseling is a counseling service provided by peers (usually age / level of education is almost the same) that have already given training to become peer counselors is expected to provide assistance either individually or in groups to friend friends who have problems or experience a variety of obstacles in the development of personality and can provide a positive impact to prevent opium behavior pornography to high school students. Keywords: Pornography Addiction, Peer Counseling, Peers I. INTRODUCTION

sites in one minute could bring about 30,000 page (page) pornography (Apriadi, 2013: 232).

Pornography is one of the hot issues

This phenomenon is clearly very worrying

discussed are public, since the emergence of

both for teens, parents and the community.

the discourse Law Against Pornography and

Target the most heavily affected by the media

Porno in early 2006. Law Against Pornography has

defined

pornography

as

and information technology are teenagers. As

drawings,

stated by Desmita (2006: 24) that adolescence

sketches, illustrations, photographs, text, voice,

as a period of change. Changes are very

sound, moving pictures, animation, cartoons, conversation, messages

gestures,

through

or

various

forms forms

prominent in adolescents is the increased

other

interest and motivation toward sexuality, it is

of

strongly influenced by the physical changes,

communication media and / or performing in

especially in the sexual organs and hormonal

public which includes sexual exploitation that

changes that lead to the emergence of sexual

violate the norms of decency in society. The

impulses in the adolescent self. The scariest

presence of widespread pornography can not

thing is when teenagers become addicted to

be separated from the presence of the Internet

pornography because of frequent access to

as a means of disseminating pornography. Porn

4

pornographic materials sourced from the

2.1. The Concept of Pornography Etymologically, pornography means

internet. Even addicts also tend to experience

an article that deals with the problems of

the process of increasing needs, which

prostitution and the writing was mostly in the

ultimately can lead to deviant behavior among

form of fiction (fiction) that the material was

adolescents (Armando: 2004). According to

taken from the sexual fantasies, pornography

the LIPI research cited by Erik (2007), that

usually do not have a plot and characters, but

70% of visitors of Internet cafes throughout

it has a detailed description of the sexual

Indonesia, which access pornographic sites are

activity, often by way of a long and

teenagers aged a dozen years, pulling nearly

sometimes very challenging. Kamus Besar

80% accessed pornographic sites in Indonesia

Bahasa Indonesia (2013) pornography means

are in the university town of Yogyakarta, then

pengambaran erotic behavior with paintings

followed by Surabaya, Jakarta, Bandung and

or writings to arouse lust and reading material

Makassar. For Asean level, the city of

deliberately and solely designed to arouse lust

Yogyakarta occupies a higher position than

in sex. The word pornography, derived from

Manila, Singapore, Bangkok, and Kuala

two Greek words, porneia which means that

lumpur (Anonymous, 2008) Based on the

sexuality is immoral or unethical (sexual

description above can be understood that the

Immorality) or popularly known as adultery,

behavioral problems of addiction, particularly

and said Grafe which means the book or

among adolescents is a national problem that

article. The verb porneuw (porneo) means

must be addressed. Teenagers are the future

doing

generation, so it takes significant efforts to

of ancient Greece, men who commit adultery,

important role to carry out preventive measures

then the term pornoz which means that men

for prevention of addiction behavior in high

who commit immoral sexual practices. No

school students. In the development of

form of feminine word for porn. Said grafh

adolescents, peers have a significant effect, so

(Grafe) was originally defined as a holy book,

we had the idea to create Peer Counseling

but then it just means the book or article.

program or help peers as one of addiction

When the words were put together with the

prevention behaviors increasing in the students School.

Through

(committed

prostitution as well. Apparently in the world

School became one of the sectors that have an

Middle

acts

noun pornh (porne) means adultery or

escalation of pornography addiction behavior.

the

sexual

adultery = commit sexual Immorality) and

rescue the teens Indonesia and prevent the

in

immoral

word porn into pornography, then he means is

Peer

writing or depiction of sexuality is immoral,

Counseling is expected that students were able

either in writing or orally. So often young

to get information about the dangers and

people who pronounce words sexist referred

consequences of addiction and behavior can be

to as porn. By itself writing using words that

an effective way to support the students'

has to with sexuality and taking pictures that

progress in preventing behavioral addiction to

bring the genitals or sexual contact is

pornography in Secondary Schools.

pornography.

Pornography

is

generally

associated with writing and drawing, because

II. Discussion

5

the way that is most commonly found in

1.

exposing the issue of sexuality.

The basic premise underlying peer counseling is that generally people are

2.2. The essence of Peer Counseling

able to find solutions to the difficulties

Corresponding terms used, the peer

experienced, and were able to find how

counselors are not a professional in the field

to achieve their respective goals.

of counseling, but they are expected to be an

2.

The fact that the "counselor" peer is a

extension of the professional counselor.

peer of the counselee provide contact

Basically the help of peers is a way for

between the two. They have the same

students (teens) to learn how to pay attention

life experience that allows relaxes in

and to help other children, and apply it in

exchanging experiences and secrecy

everyday

about what was said and done at the

life

(Carr,

1981).

According Varenhorst (1976: 542) peer

meeting.

counseling is an effort to affect change

3.

There is equality (equality) between the

(intervention) attitudes and behaviors are

"counselor" counselee's age, although

effective enough to help the students who take

their respective roles are different. They

the aptitude to solve problems themselves.

shared experiences and worked side by

Peer counseling is basically a way for students

side.

to learn to pay attention and help other

4.

All of the techniques used in peer

students, and apply it in their everyday lives

counseling to help counselees in gaining

(Carr, 1981: 3). Meanwhile, Tindall and Gray

an understanding and experience of him,

(1985: 5) mendefinisikian peer counseling as

pushing the sources of creativity, helping

a variety of help in interpersonal behavior

counselees aware of the emotions,

committed by individual non-professionals

desires, and needs.

who tried to help others. According to Tindall

5.

The decision about when to begin and

and Gray, Peer Counseling includes helping

end, and where will do peer counseling

relationship done individually (one-to-one

lies in the counselee.

helping

relationship),

group

leadership,

6.

A peer can be someone in the same

leadership discussions, advisory, tutorial, and

situation or condition, or someone with

all human interpersonal activities to assist or

age

help. The term "peer" according to Tindall

background, and the same cultures.

peer,

or

someone

with

the

(1985: 8) is someone who shared experiences,

Peers (peers) are students with a level

values, and lifestyle-precisely fellow ages.

of maturity or less the same age. Peer

Another

peer

counseling is a form of psychological services

counseling as a method, as stated Kan (1996:

deliberate and systematic. Peer counseling

3) "Peer Counseling is the use of problem

allows students to have the skills to

solving skills and active listening, to support

implement the experience of independence

people who are our peers." According to Kan

and the ability to control themselves very

(1996), the principal elements of peer

meaningful for teenagers. In particular, peer

counseling is:

counseling does not focus on the evaluation of

definition

emphasizes

the content, but rather focuses on the process

6

of thinking, feeling and processes of decision-

to provide resources and comparative about

making

peer

the world outside the family. Through peer

counseling contributes to its strong experience

students receive feedback from their peers

required by the teenagers that respect (Carr,

about their capabilities. Student rate anything

1981:

4).

they do, in the sense of whether he is better

Paraprofesonal peer counselors are trained

than his friends, the same, or worse than what

professionals or non tasked with reviewing

other students do. It would thus be difficult to

information from peers in the group. Peer

do in the family because siblings are usually

counselors

of

older or younger (Santrock, 2004: 287).

counselors from service centers (Mamarchev,

Cowie&Wellace (2000: 8) also found that

1981). Meanwhile, according to Tindall and

peer support can help or provide benefits to

Gray (1985) peer counselor is someone who

students who have social problems and family

plays the role of aid in contemporaries.

problems, can help improve the school

processes.

under

In

this

the

way,

supervision

2.3 Reasons to Use Peer Counseling Along

with

the

climate, as well as providing social skills increasing

training. Bernadt, 1999 (in Hunainah, 2011:

encouragement and adolescents need to

88) recognizes that not all of your friends can

interact with friends, either similar or opposite

provide benefits for development. Individual

sex friends, relations peers become very

development will be assisted if students have

important. As stated Laursen (2005: 137) that

friends who are socially skilled and are

peers are factors that greatly affect life in

supportive. While the friends who like to

adolescence. That stance can be understood

impose the will and a lot of conflict will

by the fact that young people in society now

hamper the development (Santrock, 2004:

spends most of her time with their peers

352).

(Steinberg, 1993: 154).

Conformity to peer contain the desire

Intensive interaction and sharing

to get involved in the world of peer groups

most of the time among adolescents is

such as dressing together with friends, and

supported by research Buhrmester (Santrock,

spending most of her time with the group

2004: 414) which show that in adolescence

members.

closeness of relationships with peers increased

towards peers, among others together peers to

dramatically, and at the same time closeness

raise

adolescent

(Santrock, 2004: 415)

relationships

with

parents

Conformity

funds

for

positive

humanitarian

behavior purposes

decreases drastic. Buhrmester research result

Noting the importance of the role of

is corroborated by the findings of Nickerson

peers, the development of positive peer

& Nagle (2005: 240) that in adolescence

environment is an effective way that can be

communication and confidence to parents is

achieved to support the development of

reduced, and turning to peers to meet the need

adolescents. In relation to the advantage

for attachment (attachment).

young people have a positive peer group,

Peers (peers) are students with a level

Laursen (2005: 138) states that positive peer

of maturity or less the same age. One of the

groups allow teens to feel accepted, allowing

most important functions of the peer group is

teenagers to catharsis, as well as allow teens

7

to test the new values and new insights.

achievement and gain satisfaction in social

Further Laursen insists that positive peer

groups (peer society). Another advantage

group provides an opportunity for teens to

according to Gordon, 1956 (in Hunainah,

help others, and encourage teens to develop a

2011: 90) of which is to expand the service

network

and become a bridge between the professional

to

give

each

other

positive

encouragement. The interaction among peers

and

can be used to establish the meaning and

Peer counseling is considered important

perceptions and new solutions. Positive peer

because most adolescents more often discuss

culture which provides opportunities to the

the problem-issue them with peers than with

youth

parents,

to

test

the

effectiveness

of

the

groups

teachers,

they

counselors,

serve.

teachers,

communication, behavior, perceptions, and

subjects or homeroom at school. For issues

values they have. Very positive peer culture

that are considered very seriuspun they

that helps teens to understand that he is not

discuss it with peers, especially friends who

alone in facing challenges. Positive peer

deket or friends. Even if there are teenagers

culture that can be used to help change

who finally told they had experienced serious

behavior and values of adolescents (Laursen,

problems and to parents, teachers, counselors

2005: 138). One effort that can be done to

or guardian class, usually because it has been

build a positive peer culture is to develop peer

forced by the talks and joint problem-solving

counseling

community.

efforts peers deadlocked. Some of the reasons

Some reasons to use peer counseling in

teenagers prefer to talk with peers rather than

schools expressed Varenhorst, (1976: 541)

with older people is partly because among

that:

adolescents have an interest and commitment

1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

in

the

teen

The counselor did not quite have time to

as well as a very strong bond as described

serve all the counselee.

above. Another reason for teenagers feel that

Teachers assume that counselors deal

adults do not understand myself dpatteenagers

with a very widespread problem.

and they are convinced that only his fellow

Students assume the counselor does not

teenagers can understand each other. Such

know himself and counselors do not

circumstances often make teenagers as an

have the time.

exclusive group. closeness, openness and a

Students find it not easy to openly

sense of shared destiny among teens can be an

discuss problems in formal situations.

opportunity

for

Students feel more freely in expressing

adolescent

development

problems to peers.

counseling. on the other hand, some of the

the

efforts

memfalitasi

through

peer

Peer counseling as a peer group

psychological characteristics of adolescence

activity has several strengths. Gordon, 1956

as emotional lability also a challenge to the

(in Hunainah, 2011: 90) says there are three

effectiveness of counseling services.

forces of peer group (peer group), namely (a)

2.4 Peer Counseling Application to Reduces

the need to improve the ability to direct

PornographyAddiction’s Behavior

themselves (self-direction); (B) to satisfy the

Behavior of addiction in adolescents,

need to find a reality; and (c) need for

especially among students need serious

8

attention. Based on the data that has been

secondary

described in the foregoing discussion shows

counseling within the student community.

that Indonesia is at the very alarming situation

According to McWhirter et al., 1993 (in

related to the problem of pornography,

Everts, 2003) peer counseling is a process in

especially among teenagers.Adolescents and

which students are trained and supervised to

young people who in fact acts as a transmitter

perform tasks to help the problem of

of the nation actually involved in addiction to

interpersonal,

pornography. They have a very important role

suggesting alternatives and is involved in

for the survival of the nation. They are the

interactions verbal and nonverbal other

hands of the fate of a nation is determined.

eligible as a function of counseling with the

The future of this great nation relies entirely

counselee

on the efforts exemption of young people

counseling program can help counselors

from the dangers of pornography. Therefore

provide counseling services optimally in an

the problem of addiction in adolescents

effort to prevent behavioral addiction to

deserve special attention by all parties.

pornography on the students in the Middle

Many factors cause the occurrence of

School.

addiction in adolescents, among others, is due

In implementing the program and the success

to hanging out with the wrong friends. It is

of peer counseling for prevention of addiction

inevitable that at the age of adolescence, peers

to pornography on the behavior of students in

become important and significant figures for

high school, then there are several steps that

the individual. Peers have an important role to

must be done by the school counselor. The

support

students

first step to do that is by an election candidate

optimally. Laursen (2005) stated that through

peer counselor. In terms of selection of

the interaction of a group of peers, allowing

candidates for peer counselors, Tindall and

students feel welcome, do catharsis, and get

Gray (1985: 74) states that the activity of peer

the value, understanding, and new views.

counseling program depends on the selection

With the peer group as well, giving the

process of peer counselors. He suggested in

opportunity to the students to help each other

the process of selecting candidates for peer

solve problems and to give each other positive

counselors into account the criteria such as the

impulses. Interactions between peers also

characteristics of humanistic kualiatas warm

possible to display a solutions that is very

conditions, has an interest in activities which

useful for students who are having problems.

support services, acceptable to others, tolerant

the

development

of

school

is

listening,

that

tends

to

establish

offering

same

peer

support,

age.

Peer

Noting the importance of the role of

of differences in value systems, and energetic.

peers, the development of positive peer

The humanistic quality is important for peer

environment is an effective way that can be

counselors as a basis to master the skills that

taken

of

will be learned in the training. Additionally,

adolescents. Exposure above shows one of the

Suwarjo (2008: 77) considers that the

efforts that need to be done counselor as

prospective

preventive measures to prevent the occurrence

following criteria: (1) volunteered to help

of

others; (2) has a volatile emotions; (3) have a

to

support

addiction

the

behaviors

development

in

students

in

9

peer

counselors

have

the

pretty good learning performance or minimal

III.Conclusion The case of pornography addiction

average; (4) able to keep a secret, is another

behaviors in adolescents, especially among

criterion should be the basis of selection of

students continues to increase significantly.

candidates for peer counselors. The

second

provisioning

step,

candidate

peer

Indonesia is currently the situation is very

namely

alarming associated with behavioral problems

counselor.

opium

Prospective counselor debriefing activities are

behavior in adolescents. Peers are factors that

model debriefing peer tutors (peer tutors) that

greatly affect life in adolescence, because in

consists of 20 meeting, for a number of the

reality young people in society now spends

following materials: (1) material orientation

most of her time with their peers. Noting the

of the two meetings; (2) the material relations

importance

help of four meetings; (3) the material basis of communication

skills;

Candidates followed

peer the

peer

briefing,

who

then

given

especially

of

to Peer

high

school

Counseling

students. program

increasing addiction to pornography on the behavior of students in the Middle School.

peer counselor. Berlangsungg meeting of

Peer Counseling Melalaui this activity, it can

counselor

help peers who are having problems or

(Teacher Counseling), it was done in order to

obstacles

run an effective peer counseling. Dougherty &

in

the

development

of

his

personality and can be an effective way to

Taylor, 1983 (in Hunainah 2011) also

support the students' progress in preventing

suggested that evaluated the effect of the

behavioral addiction to pornography on the

program on school climate by using existing

students in the Middle School.

data, such as number counselee seen, the number of program participants, or through

[1]

informal

[2]

teachers

to

done as a preventive measure to prevent the

explore and resolve problems being faced by

with

addiction

(Counseling Peer) is one activity that can be

once a week. The meeting is intended to

interviews

addiction

Therefore,

to schedule a meeting with a peer counselor

guidance

behavioral

making national life and prevent the behaviors

and set a peer counselor. Subsequently made

the

the

school is one sector that has a major role in

the

services. Organizing begins with the divide

under

peers,

pornography to high school students. The

have

opportunity to practice peer counseling

experts

of

reduced forms of juvenile delinquency cases

counseling.

counselors

role

support the development of adolescents and

The third step which is organizing of

the

an effective way that can be achieved to

meetings; (5) tutoring area six meetings. implementation

of

development of positive peer environment is

(4)

management of the behavior of the two

the

among

separated by increasing opium pornography

Foster & Harrison, 1995, stating that the

meetings

especially

teenagers. Social and peer factors can not be

divided into groups of four to six members.

six

pornography,

or

administrative staff. [3] [4]

10

REFERENCES Alwi, Hasan. 2013. KBBI. edisi keempat. Jakarta: Balai Pustaka. Anonim, 2008. Revolusi Seks (Kaum Remaja Ditengah Kegamangan),http://www.worldpress.com, diakses 5 Januari 2017 Armando, Ade. 2004. Mengupas Batas Pornografi, Jakarta: Meneg. Beth, J. C. 2013. The Importance of Promoting the Value and the Role of Peer Counseling among Students in

[5] [6]

[7] [8] [9] [10]

[11] [12]

[13] [14] [15] [16] [17]

[18]

[19] [20] [21]

[22] [23]

Secondary Schools. International Journal of Economy, Management and Social Sciences, 2 (6): 477-484. Carr, R.A. 1981. Theory and Practice of Peer Counseling. Ottawa: Canada Employment and Immigration Commission. Carter, T. D. 2005.Peer Counseling: Roles, Function, Boundaries. ILRU Program. (online), (http://www.peercounseling.com), diakses pada tanggal 28 Oktober 2015 Cowie, H., & Wallace, P. 2000. Peer Support in Action: From Bystanding to Standing by. London: Sage Publication. Dariyo, A. 2004.Psikologi Perkembangan Remaja. Bogor: Ghalia Indonesia. Desmita, 2006. Psikologi Perkembangan. Bandung: PT Remaja Rosdakarya Everts, H. 2003. Peer Counselling And Support. Dalam G. Hornby, C. Hall & E. Hall(Ed.), Counselling Pupils in Schools: Skills and Strategies for Teachers. London: Routledge Falmer. Erik 2007. Kajian Mengenai Batasan-Batasan Pornografi, Jakarta Foster, E.S.,&Harrison. 1995. Peer Helping in The Elementary and Middle Grade: A Developmental Perspective. Elementary School Guidance and Counseling, 30 (2): 94-104. Hill, P. 1993. Recent Advances in Selected Aspect of Adolescent Development. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 34: 69-99. Hunainah. 2011. Teori Implementasi Model Konseling Sebaya. Bandung: Rizqi Press. Kan, P.V. 1996. Peer Counseling in Explanation. (Online), (http://www.peercounseling.com), diakses pada tanggal 28 Oktober 2015. Laursen, E. K. 2005. Rather than Fixing Kids-Build Positive Peer Cultures: Reclaiming Children and Youth. ProQuest Education Journal, 14 (3): 137-142. Mammarchev, H.L. 1981. Peer Counseling. Search light Plus: Relevant Resources In High Interest Areas. Eric Clearinghouse on Counseling and Personnel Services, 52: 211-904. Nickerson, A. B. & Nagle, R. J. 2005. Parent and Peer Attachment in Late Childhood and Early Adolescence. Journal of Early Adolescence, 25 (2): 223249. Santrock, J. W. 2004. Life-Span Development. Boston : Brown Communications, Inc. Steinberg, L. 1993. Adolescence. New York: Mc. GrawHill, Inc. Suwarjo. 2008. Model Konseling Teman Sebaya Untuk Pengembangan Daya Lentur (Resilience). Disertasi Doktor pada PPS Universitas Pendidikan Indonesia Bandung: tidak diterbitkan. Tindall, J. A., & Gray, H. D. 1985. Peer Counseling: In Depth Look At Training Peer Helpers. Muncie: Accelerated Development Inc. Publisher. Varenhorst, B.B. 1976. Counseling Methods. Peer Counseling : A Guidance Program and A Behavioral Intervention, Edited by Krumboltz J.D & Thoresen, C.E. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

11

   

INDIVIDUAL COUNSELING TO ARGUE IN SOCIAL MEDIA Erwin Erlangga Fakultas Psikologi Universitas Semarang [email protected]

Abstract. This study aims to prove that individual counseling is effective in improving social skills notably argued. Subjects are 300 children in the region who have skills Demak arguments in social media is low. Research themes include three things: individual counseling, arguments, and social media. Data obtained based on interviews, observation, and psychological scale shows that 300 children have had a low skill arguments in social media. Based on the experimental results by providing counseling to 300 students as much as 10 times, skill levels increase student argued after being given individual counseling. Indicated by changes in the skill level of the argument before being given treatment (initial evaluation) and after (final evaluation) by 90 points . Researchers in an attempt to test whether there significant using t-test with significance level of 5% shows t = 7.077> table = 2.179. Based on the results of these calculations, shows that the ability to argue students increased after being given individual counseling services. Keywords: Argument Skills, Social Media, Individual Counseling

I.

school that incorporated into the educational curriculum, and one of the skills to argue that is wise in disseminating information, so that later students can actualize themselves in social media with skills arguing that he had. Kaplan and Haelein defines that social media is a group of Internet-based applications that build on the foundation of ideology and Web 2.0 technologies and that allows the creation and exchange of user generated contet while arguments are giving reason to confirm or reject an opinion, while arguing are arguing with each other retain or reject each reason. In the book (Weston 2007: 1) 'argued' means provides a reason or evidence to support a conclusion. An argument is not only a statement about a particular view, and not merely just a disagreement. The argument is an attempt to support a particular view with reasons. Another opinion is also spoken by (Keraf 1981: 3) that "argument is a form of rhetoric that seeks to influence the attitudes and opinions of others, that they believe and finally act in accordance with what is desired by the author or communicator". So in essence, argued a couple of facts in such a way so as to indicate whether an opinion or a certain thing is true or not is poured orally, while the ability to argue is the ability to influence the attitudes and

INTRODUCTION

Basically, the individual human beings as well as social beings. As social beings, individuals must communicate with each other in everyday life. Other people can understand what he's thinking, what he was feeling and what he wants. In today's communication activities, more people are using social media as a means to argue express his opinion, but sometimes not everyone can argue well in the social media causing problems with the self, society and the state. In Circular Kapolri SE / 06 / X / 2015 e of article 28, paragraph 2, which reads "Any person intentionally and without right to disseminate information intended to cause hatred or hostility individual and / or a particular group of people based on ethnicity, religion, race and intergroup (SARA). "and Article 45 paragraph (2):" (2) Every person who meets the elements referred to in Article 28 paragraph (1) or subsection (2) shall be punished with imprisonment of six (6) years and / or a fine of 1,000,000,000.00 (one billion rupiah). "So important is the role of the argument, the argument is not only taught to the children in a family, but also taught in

12

    are practicing argue or express the opinions of the counselee. The purpose of this study is individual counseling services are expected to effectively improve the ability to argue 300 students aged 15-18 in Demak. According to Prayitno and Amti (2004: 288) argues that individual counseling services (individual) is a special service in direct face to face relationship between counselor and client, in a relationship that is a problem the students themselves. This can be realized with the improvement and refinement. Willis (2004: 35) adds that the notion of individual counseling services is the assistance provided by the counselor to a student with the goal of developing students' potential, able to cope with its own problems, and can adapt positively. Individual counseling services appropriate to be used as a form of counseling services and counseling to be given to students who have the ability to argue in social media is still low. So expect optimally students can change and achieve positive improvement after participating in individual counseling activities. Students who participated in individual counseling can directly create a dynamic private practice doing exercises argue, respond to, listen to and to feel. This event is a place to develop themselves in order to learn to argue in a positive and effective.

opinions of others, so that the listener believes and ultimately act according to what is desired by the communicator. Argument is an attempt to find out which view is better than the other. Arguing is a way to explain and defend it by giving reasons and evidence that another person or listener could prepare the mind for yourself. To be able to argue well, a communicator in addition to having to explain the reasons and evidence to strengthen the establishment or opinions expressed, and understand what to talk about, what to say, and how to talk about it, the communicator must also have the courage and conveys regularly arguments submitted in accordance with applicable regulations. Skills argue still considered difficult by students. The difficulty of this argument is reflected in students' ignorance about the ethics of argumentation in social media, the phenomenon of what was discussed, and how appropriate to talk about the phenomenon. Meanwhile, the study argues in social media held less emphasis on training (practice) argued. Even if there workout activity was less effective and engaging for students. In addition, it has not been consistent and comprehensive activities to hone skills of argumentation in social media. If it continues to happen, then the purpose of learning to argue in social media can never be achieved with the result that many people will commit unlawful acts in social media. Therefore, it takes an activity that can lead students to be wise in arguing. A condition in the low ability to argue in social media as experienced by 300 students aged 15-18 in Demak. Students feel not knowing the ethics convey the idea in social media, confused addressing information in the social media and easily provoked mediated social provocation. Low ability to argue in social media on students can not be left alone, because if left students will have problems during speech in violation of the rules of social media and result in criminal penalties. Counseling is an effort of assistance provided by the supervising teacher to students who use the procedures, methods and materials to individual members to argue in social media. Communication is important in the formation of individual personality. With the individual communication can have a good life in the family, school and community, including in social media. Efforts to improve the ability of students to argue in social media can be done by organizing activities of individual counseling services. These activities address topics that are being experienced, give advice and ideas, respond, communicate with each other create the dynamics to develop themselves

I.

Research Methodology.

This study uses quantitative methods. The reason for using a quantitative method for measuring the end result is a number so that decision-making, interpretation of data and conclusions based on figures obtained from the statistical analysis. The final goal of this study was to determine the effectiveness of individual counseling to improve their skills in argumentation rest of the social media. Here, researchers used an experimental method by comparing the full class in the given individual counseling services (experimental class) with classes that are not given individual counseling services (grade control). The researchers used a total population of respondents as many as 300 students. Researchers provide individual counseling 10 times against respondent. According Arikunto (2006: 309) a data analysis technique is a method used to process research data to obtain a conclusion. Technical data used to determine the effect of individual counseling services for children who have a low argumentation skills.

13

    I.

Mechanical T test was used to test the significant differences in means.

Conclusion

Individual counseling services are effective in improving students' ability to argue in social media include sage in response to a phenomenon in social media, using polite language in response to a phenomenon and adults in the act on social media. It is shown from changes in the behavior of students at each meeting individual counseling has led to an increase in the ability to argue in social media better than ever. Additionally known from the results of data analysis showed that t is greater than t table REFERENCES

II. Results and Discussion Based on the results of t-test with significance level of 5% shows t = 7.017> table = 2.179. Thus, means Ha Ho accepted and rejected so that it can be said that the ability to argue in social media 300 students in Demak increased after being given individual counseling services, Based on the pre-test results, obtained data showing that there are some students have low scores. For this reason, researchers are working to develop the ability to argue through individual counseling services. Individual counseling deemed appropriate in developing the ability to argue for several reasons: first views of the general individual counseling goal is to develop students' potential. Individual counseling is effective in improving students' ability to argue, because of the activities of individual counseling that students are encouraged to practice argue. Of these students will gain a variety of experiences, knowledge and ideas. Students can learn to develop values and implement joint measures to reach the topics covered in individual counseling. The result showed that an increase in the development of the ability to argue between before and after individual counseling. Data pre-test of 300 students showed the ability to argue that low and fairly. At the end of the activity, the study provides post-test. Post-test results showed an increase in average scores on the respondent's ability to argue. Researchers in an effort to test whether there significant using t-test with significance level of 5% shows t = 7.077> table = 2.179. Based on the results of these calculations, shows that the ability to argue students increased after being given individual counseling services. Based on the analysis of research data it is said that the treatment of individual counseling that is done is a kind of effective services, especially for students. This is because the study subjects after receiving individual counseling, based on data obtained showed an increased ability to argue with an average increase significantly. Increased ability to argue was marked by students who originally easily ignited emotions while reading news hoax, made a status which leads to SARA and use the word dirty word in response to the phenomenon of social media has changed into selective in responding to a message, and using words that are polite in making social media posts.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

14

Arikunto, Suharsimi. 2002. Prosedur Penelitian Suatu Pendekatan dan Praktik. Jakarta : Rineka Cipta Azwar, Saifudin. 2005. “Penyusunan Skala Psikologi”. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar Hadi, Sutrisno. 1988. Statistik II. Yogyakarta : Fakultas Psikologi UGM. Yogyakarta Andi off set Keraf, Gorys. 1981. Argumentasi dan Narasi (Komposisi Lanjutan III). Jakarta : PT Gramedia Pustaka Utama. Maryudi. 2005. Pintar Berkomunikasi. Jakarta : Restu Agung. Nasution, S. 2006. Metode Research (Penelitian Ilmiah). Jakarta : Bumi Aksara. Nazir, Moh. 1988. “Metode Penelitian”. Jakarta: Ghalia Indonesia Prayitno. 1995. Layanan dan Bimbingan Konseling Kelompok. Jakarta : Ghalia Indonesia. Prayitno. 1995. Layanan Bimbingan dan Konseling. Jakarta : Ghalia Indonesia Prayitno dan Amti Erman. 1994. Dasar-dasar Bimbingan dan Konseling. Jakarta : Rineka Cipta Ruseffendi, E.T. 1994. “Dasar-dasar Penelitian pendidikan dan Bidang Non Eksakta Lainya”. Semarang: IKIP Semarang Press. Soffyan S. Wilis. 2004. Konseling Individual Teori dan Praktek. Bandung : Alfabeta. Surat Edaran Kapolri SE/06/X/2015 Sugiarto, dkk. 2003. “Teknik Sampling”. Jakarta: Gramedia Pustaka Utama Sugiyono. 2005. “Statistika untuk Penelitian”. Bandung: Alfabeta Suharso dan Retnoningsih. 2005. Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia. Semarang : CV. Widya Karya.

EFFECTIVENESS THE TRAINING CERTIFICATION OF INSERVICE TEACHER ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF COMPETENCY PROFILE OF SOCIAL STUDIES TEACHER Dadang Iskandar,1)Acep Roni Hamdani,2) 1)

PGSD FKIP Pasundan University [email protected]

2)

PGSD FKIP Pasundan University, [email protected]

Abstract.This research is carried out from the fact that the competency profile of social study teachers has not been optimal despite they have taken the teacher certification training. There are a gap between the training participant which tend to obtain a welfare improvement and the government expectation which expect to the teacher profile competency improvement. The research objective is to conduct a deep analysis related to the effectiveness of the Teacher Competency Learning and Training (PLPG) implementation to the competency profile of social studies teacher. The quantitative approach with a survey method is carried out in this study while the study design is grouped to the descriptive and verification study. The data is analyzed using Structural Equation Model (SEM) analysis. The Population and sample are 95 social studies teachers who have taken the certification training in district 134 University of Pasundan Bandung in 2012. The result of descriptive analysis shows that the learning process in the teacher certification training has low effectiveness influence to the profile competency of social studies teacher. The instructor is suggested to stress the andragogy learning concept in learning process to achieve the training goal effectively. Therefore, it is also suggested to perform a training implementation result evaluation to be a feedback for the next training implementation. Keywords:Teacher’s Certification Training,Competency Profiles of Social Studies Teachers

I. Introduction

strategies, UNLESS they can hold students to higher performance standards, schools will continue as they are. We must have teachers who are fully professional. But in fact there are many teachers in Indonesia at this time that still can not be said to be a professional. This phenomenon is visible from the unpreparedness of teachers by the time they require to be certified that they can demonstrate their competence. Another phenomenon that indicates the weakness of the professionalism of teachers in Indonesia is the gap between the ideal level in the Act and the realities facing education today. First, almost half of the approximately 2.78 million teachers in Indonesia do not have sufficient competence to teach. Insufficient qualifications and competence to teach in schools. This is confirmed by [7] that: Statistics from the Ministry of National Education (MONE, 2008) indicate that teachers in Indonesia have a are relatively lower level of academic qualification than Reviews those in neighboring nations. More than 60 percent of the total 2.78 million teachers have not reach the level of academic qualification of a four-year bachelor's degree (S1 / D4). In this group of teachers, the majority have either a D2 (two-year diploma) or a senior secondary qualification certificate. Most teachers from this group (about 70 percent) teach in the primary schools. Data from the Ministry of Education shows that more than 65 percent of the total of 2.78 teachers in Indonesia does not meet the requirements for teaching. That condition shows that the quality of teachers in Indonesia still is low.

The position and role of teachers in providing education in schools and the implementation of learning in the classroom is very strategic in improving the quality of education [1]. The role of teachers as well as implementing changes to the implementing learning at grade level are expected to be realized in accordance with the implementation requirements specified learning [2].As noted [3] that, "teachers are the dominant factors being the input in the transformational process of education at schools", which means that the teacher is one of the dominant factors that serve as inputs in the process of transforming education in schools. Poulou also noted that the component has been greatly affects the educational process is a component of teacher [4]. Teachers have a key role in education because everything was prepared in good education facilities, fees, curriculum, learners and the management system of education would be meaningless if they are not given a touch of professionalism by teachers or will be of low quality if teachers are not professional [5]. This is in line with that proposed by [6] that: Nearly all current Efforts reform-defining outcomes and standards, strengthening curriculum, using more powerful teaching and learning practices, redesigning assessment, changing decision-making structuresdepend to some degree on the knowledge and capabilities of teachers. Unless teachers are Able to use high-quality materials and more effective

15

High and low quality of education is also seen from the high and low quality of teachers [8]. The existence of adequate infrastructure may not be able to improve the quality of education directly in the absence of high-quality teachers [9]. Efforts to improve the welfare of teachers rated better able to improve the quality rather than through the provision of infrastructure alone [10]. Therefore, in order to realize improved quality and welfare of teachers, the government issued Regulation of the Minister of National Education of the Republic of Indonesia Number 18 Year 2007 on Teachers Certification enhanced by Minister of Education and Culture No. 5 of 2012 on Teachers Certification; and on July 13, 2007 published decision of the Minister of National Education No. 057 / O / 2007 on the Establishment of Universities Operator Certification for Teachers, which is enhanced by the Minister of National Education Decree No. 022 / P / 2009 concerning Establishment of Universities Operator Certification for Teachers. Empirically, based on the number of studies conducted by several researchers on the effects of teacher certification training to increase their competence, it was revealed that the training was good relative to increase the motivation, interest, competence, and performance of teachers [11]. However, several other studies have shown that teacher certification training is also not significantly improve the competency of teachers [12]. The government has conducted various efforts to improve education by taking a central increased professionalism, quality, and number of teachers [13]. However, the results do not seem encouraging for their various of the implementation, and not involve the teachers in setting its policies [14]. As for the government's efforts to improve knowledge, teaching skills and welfare for teachers, among others: (1) improve their knowledge and teaching skills, the government has sought through various upgrading / teacher training and improving the qualifications of teachers from various levels to S1; and (2) improve the welfare of teachers by increasing salaries and provide functional benefits even several regions provide support incentives for teachers, introduced a system of assessment credit number of teachers for promotion and so teachers over two years can be promoted / class, impose competency testing and certification teachers, and provide professional allowance for teachers who have passed the certification through the portfolio as well as through the Education and training professional teachers (PLPG) for those who did not pass the portfolio. The results showed that the government's efforts seem to have a significant impact on improving the quality of education [15]. This was partly caused by: (1) Various upgrading or teacher training has been less evaluated and monitored the implementation and impact to the bottom level; (2) In terms of teacher qualifications, lack of material deepening of curriculum subjects and a variety of science teacher training and assessment as well as writing Scientific Writing (KTI); (3) The increase in salary and functional allowance, is still not comparable with the basic tasks and functions of the teacher (who should), what more when compared with salaries or allowances of teachers in other countries; and (4) There are a lot of teachers teach subjects

that are not in accordance with the educational background or discipline of science. Of the 267 participants of the training of teacher certification for Social Sciences in 2011 at the University of Pasundan Rayon 134, only 44 (16.48%) teachers have the educational background of Social Sciences remaining 223 people (83.52%) is not background Sciences social (Sergur Rayon 134 in 2011). The phenomena described above indicate that many teachers of Social Sciences instead of the field of Social Sciences. This means that the competence of the teachers of Social Sciences is still relatively low [16]. Low competence in turn may result in low quality of teaching has resulted in low quality of education [17]. To increase the competence and professionalism of teachers attempted through teacher certification, but the result of in-service teacher training certification is not yet satisfactory. This is demonstrated by the performance and ability of teachers of Social Sciences after PLPG that has not shown significant improvement. Based on interviews with teachers of Social Sciences who have followed PLPG, stated that what is obtained from PLPG short-lived. Furthermore, the lesson back to the old habits of origin or where the delivery of the subject matter in a conventional manner. The cause of the return of the habit of teachers in teaching Social Sciences in conventional learning how to be caused by several factors such as: (1) The limited time for studying with a variety of methods to explore the capabilities of the students as the target time must be pursued in accordance with the curriculum; (2) lack of ability of teachers in teaching students to be active students (student centered); and (3) How to study in PLPG less touch needs teacher professionalism. Increased competence of teachers this can be done through education and training teacher certification [18]. Efforts were largely determined by the results of the training. The results of the training itself is determined by various factors implementation of education and training [19]. Various theories about the training that effectively has been often mentioned by experts, including from [20], [21] with the model CIRO, [22], [23], [24], [25] to [26] also [27] , In essence, the training is effective consists of several sequential stages, starting from level 1 called the participants' reactions to the training program, level 2 with regard to the learning that is how much the changes in knowledge, skills and attitudes resulting from the implementation of the training, level 3 related with how much change the behavior of participants of the training in the workplace caused by training, level 4 relates to the result of that is what training benefits for companies that are caused by the training of the participants. Subsequent developments, [25], apply a level 5 which is the return on investment and return on that expectation, and level 6 suggested [26] is a broader contribution that the development potential of training participants in the long term. [27] basically a training program that is effective that: "(1) Based on needs, (2) Aimed at objectives, (3) Scheduled at the right time, (4) Held at the right place, (5) For the right people, (6) conducted by an effective leader, (7) using effective techniques, (8) Objectives are Reached, (9) Participants are satisfied, and (10) the program is evaluated ". It has previously been described by Noe et

16

al. (2000: 210-201) that the framework is an effective training program "Refers to a systematic approach for developing training programs, that presents the six steps of this process: (1) conducting needs assessment, (2) ensuring the employee's readiness for training, (3) creating a learning environment, (4) ensuring the transfer of training, (5) selecting training methods, and (6) evaluating training programs. " Based on the results of previous research and theoretical frameworks that exist regarding the training of the teaching profession, the study of the factors that affect training certification of teachers towards improving the competence of teachers of Social Sciences to conduct an empirical study on participants PLPG Teachers Certification 2012 in Rayon 134, very important to do.

Sciences. Secondary data relating to the value of a written test, the value of peer teaching, and the value of participation, which is obtained from the 2012 teacher certification committee for Rayon 134, used for training outcome variables. As enrichment, engineering interviews with principals and teachers are also planned to be performed. III. DISCUSSION 1. Results Effectiveness Training to Increase Teacher Competency Profile Social Sciences Results of testing hypotheses in the model influence the results of the training to improving the competency profile of teachers of Social Sciences shows that the results of the training does not have a significant effect on raising the profile of teacher competence Social Sciences. This can mean that the training results will not necessarily be able to raise the profile of teacher competence Social Sciences. Training results directly positive effect but not significant increase in teacher competence profile of Social Sciences. This means that empirically the effect of the results of training on teacher competency profiles for Social Sciences insignificant. In other words, the results of the training participants Professional Teacher Education and Training for Teachers Certification 2012 in Rayon 134 can not increase the competence profile of teachers of Social Sciences significantly. Conditions that shows that teachers who get high scores on the cognitive, psychomotor, and affective, do not automatically profile competence is high, likewise, that teachers who get high scores on the cognitive, psychomotor, and affective, not automatically the profile of competence to be low. Thus, the high-low profile of competence is not directly determined by the high and low results of training in scores on cognitive, psychomotor, and affective, but rather is determined by the impact of the implementation of the training itself, which consists of the analysis of training needs, the characteristics of the training participants, environment learning training, training and learning process. That condition shows that the reality is contrary to the principles of functionalist theory proposed Parsons [51] that "Schools are competitive and the best students will go on to the best jobs whereas Weaker ones will have to take low pay and low status work. Schools teach children that it is fair to have different rewards and so they teach children to be competitive ". This means that the form of education and training of teachers is also to be competitive so that teachers who excel and have gained a lot of training will get a job and a better position, while teachers are underachieving and lacking in a lot of training does not necessarily get a job and a better position. The principle of this functionalist theory of teachers because there is research from Berg [52] which showed that "better-educated workers are no more productive than those who are less educated, and in some cases even less productive". Teacher certification program held by the Indonesian government since 2006, is one form of acute kualifikasionisme program. The program refers to the term Dore [52] is a "development impact late". On teacher certification program, educational certificates has become an imperative requirement for teachers to gain entry are securely fixed to be educators with no additional income in

II. METHODS Based on the characteristics of the variables studied, this study was conducted using a survey method [49], which is a method used to reveal the facts of a phenomenon in the field so it can be evaluated based on the reviews the theoretical, as well as various studies conducted previously, to then be withdrawn became an inference about the influence of the components of the training, the training results and their impact on raising the profile of teacher competence Social Sciences junior who follow the training of the teaching profession in 2012 at Rayon 134 (Pasundan University, Bandung). The study design is divided into two parts, namely descriptive and verification. Descriptive method is to provide an overview of the various characteristics of the variables studied form of the training, and raising the profile of teacher competence Social Sciences. Verification method used to describe the relationship of causality (causal) between the variables under study [50]. The population in this study are all teachers of Social Sciences of the Department of Education who participated in training on PLPG Teacher Certification in 2012 at Rayon 134, totaling 97 people, who came from 85 schools (79 junior and 6 SMK) in six regencies / cities in West Java. List of training participants and their institutions of origin can be found in the appendix. In this study, all the teachers as respondents. This means that the sample be saturated samples. Data is returned and can be processed is as much as 95 respondents. Two respondents did not return the instrument as it was out of the teaching profession. Teachers who serve this population only training participants on PLPG Teacher Certification in 2012. The reason for choosing the population of participants in 2012 was different from previous years, namely that the certification system in 2012 has adopted the form of workshops and training courses prior to attending training in teacher certification 2012 participants were required to follow the Initial Competency Test (UKA). Necessary data in this study are primary data and secondary data. The primary data source for this study is the head of junior high school / vocational school teachers follow the training its Social Sciences at PLPG Teacher Certification in 2012 at Rayon 134 (University Pasundan) and 95 teachers who attended the training. The headmaster assess teacher competence profile of Social

17

the form of certification allowances, in contrast to teachers who do not have a teaching certificate. Teachers who obtain the benefits of certification are required to teach a minimum of 24 hours per week. The demands of teaching hours at least 24 hours per week, on the one hand led to an excess of teachers in certain subjects, such as the results of the analysis of the needs of educators conducted by the Directorate of basic education Kemendikbud RI in 2012 teacher of Social Sciences for junior high schools in Indonesia excess of 9999 teachers , This condition is a consequence of the growth of credentialism or kualifikasionisme. In connection with credentialism or kualifikasionisme, [53] states that: What Collins calls credentialism - the process whereby educational systems come to be built around the pursuit of educational certificates for occupational Reviews their value rather than around learning as valuable for its own sake Dore Refers to by the term qualificationism. He Suggests that it is a significant phenomenon in all or most major industrial societies. All (or at least most) contemporary nations have Tus Become infected with what Dore calls "the diploma disease." The diploma disease is a type of vicious circle in the which individuals Become obsessed with the acquisition of diplomas or degrees Because employers Increasingly emphasize such educational certificates in their statements of job qualifications. The two sides feed off each other, and educational certificates Inflate as a result. Referring to the opinion [54] explained that there are two serious conditions that will occur as a result of growth kulifikasionisme, ie there is excess teacher first and second decline in the quality of education. Deterioration in the quality of education characterized by routine dipentingkannya curiosity and creativity. Similarly, in the activities of teacher certification, teachers are more concerned with passing the certification exam and immediately received a teaching certificate to be submitted soon to the government in order to receive benefits educator's certificate. In connection with their teaching competence, [55] stated that teachers who have passed the certification of competence taught him better than teachers who have not passed the certification of teachers. In connection with the motivation and performance of teachers, [56] suggests that the effect of certification to improve the motivation and performance of teachers. The results of this study are also consistent with the results of the study [57] that there are two things that cause results not training can have a major impact for improving the quality of teachers: (1) Training is not based on real problems in the classroom ( unrealistic class problem ). Instructors deliver the same material to all teachers but they come from different areas and resources madrasah conditions vary. Almost all instructors are forgetting the principle of heterogeneity capabilities, facilities, access, and others in the region. In other words, the condition of the madrasah madrasah others not necessarily the same even though it is in an adjacent region; (2) the implementation of the results of training that is not yet fully. Results of a new training program at the level of knowledge, it is not applied in the classroom. This could be

caused by content training material that are oriented so that the theory can not be applied or also in the absence of posttraining monitoring. Training only be considered as the ritual is complete without follow-up and coaching. The influence of teacher certification on teacher performance disclosed [58] that the certification has been able to improve the welfare, dignity of teachers, discipline and pedagogical competence. Certification is not much alter the performance of a teacher: a) the newly received SK, has not dropped his support and b) who retire, c), a teacher who has worked at the institute has been consistently making changes, or no certification, continue to occur both teachers are certified or not. Similarly, the opinion [59] that certification in junior high school teacher who studied in the West Java is very low correlation to the increased professionalism and the quality of learning. However, in spite of that, the model proposed in this study indicate that the training results of the simultaneous influence on improving teacher competence profile of Social Sciences, although not significantly. The result of the training has a positive and significant impact on the improvement of teacher competence profile of Social Sciences, with a note that the results of the training path coefficients directly to the improvement of the competence profile is not significant. 2. Research findings Findings from this study indicate that the training results do not significantly affect the increase of teacher competence profile of Social Sciences. The results of the training itself has not been fully significantly improve teacher competence profile. Once analyzed, the conditions turned out to be sourced from the condition and motivation training participants who tend to only expect to receive the benefits of the teaching profession once they graduate training, without any attempt to raise the profile of competence. The implications of the findings of this study indicate that the implementation of the training is in line with its impact, which is the result of Social Sciences teacher training, but the results of Social Sciences teacher training is not yet fully in line with the impact of increased teacher competence profile of Social Sciences. Based on these findings, it is necessary to evaluate the results of the training by the organizers. In addition, there needs continuous teacher development program post-training certification through a variety of other related training organized by schools, offices, and MGMPs. IV. CONCLUSION Based on the formulation of the problem, the research hypothesis, the results of research and discussion, the conclusion that can be drawn is that this study are consistent with previous research that this study differs from previous research that states that there is influence the results of the training to improving the competence of teachers, because in this study found that the results training did not significantly influence the improvement of teacher competence profile. In particular, the conclusions of the research results can be presented as follows: The results of the training directly no significant effect on raising the profile of teacher competence Social Sciences. This condition indicates that the training results are not yet fully

18

in line with the impact of increased teacher competence profile of Social Sciences. This relates to the functionalist theory that did not go well. That is the hope the training participants with the government's expectations are not in line because students are more likely in increased welfare while the government expects an increase in the competence profile participants of the training with the addition of wellbeing.

Retrieved from http://fkip.unira.ac.id/wpcontent/uploads/2012/05/ JURNAL-PORTAL-3.pdf [12] Badan Perencanaan Pembangunan Daerah BAPPEDA Kabupaten Ponorogo dengan Lembaga Penelitian dan Pengabdian pada Masyarakat Universitas Muhammadiyah Ponorogo, K. (2015). KAJIAN KOMPETENSI SDM GURU DALAM RANGKA MENINGKATKAN KUALITAS PENDIDIKAN DI KABUPATEN PONOROGO*. Jurnal Dimensi Pendidikan Dan Pembelajaran, 3(1). [13] Wahyudin, D., & Susilana, R. (2011). Inovasi Pendidikan Dan Pembelajaran. Kurikulum Pembelajaran, 1–45 [14] Farisi, M. I. (2012). Guru Pintar Online : Sumber dan Ruang Belajar Guru untuk Peningkatan Kualitas Kompetensi dan Profesionalisme. In Simposium Nasional (pp. 1–15). Unesa. Retrieved from http://utsurabaya.files.wordpress.com/2012/06/simpos ium-unesa1.pdf [15] Pradipta, A. (2005). Analisis Pengaruh Pengeluaran Pemerintah Bidang Kesehatan dan Pendidikan terhadap Indikator Kesehatan dan Pendidikan Propinsi- Propinsi di Indonesia (Studi Kasus 26 Propinsi di Indonesia). Jurnal Bisnis Dan Akuntansi, 7, 37–65. [16] Farisi, M. I. (2007a). Refleksi Profesional: Sertifikasi Pendidik dan Standarisasi Profesionalitas Guru. Pamerte: Majalah Dwi Bahasa, 6–12. Retrieved from http://utsurabaya.files.wordpress.com/2010/08/refleks i.pdf [17] Saragih, A. H. (2008). Kompetensi Minimal Seorang Guru Dalam Mengajar. Jurnal Tabularasa, 5(1), 23– 34. [18] Darling-Hammond, L., Holtzman, D. J., Gatlin, S. J., & Heilig, J. V. (2005). Does teacher preparation matter? Evidence about teacher certification, teach for America, and teacher effectiveness. Education Policy Analysis Archives, 13. [19] Constantine, J., Player, D., Silva, T., Hallgren, K., Grider, M., & Deke, J. (2009). An Evaluation of Teachers Trained Through Different Routes to Certification An Evaluation of Teachers Trained Through Different Routes to Certification. Education, 17, 1–7. Retrieved from [20] Kirkpatric, D.L; Kirkpatric, W., & Kirkpatric, J. (2009). Transferring Learning to Results. Berrett-Koehler Publishers & Kirkpatrick Publishing. [21] Carpenter, S. K., Wilford, M. M., Kornell, N., & Mullaney, K. M. (2013). Appearances can be deceiving: instructor fluency increases perceptions of learning without increasing actual learning. Psychonomic Bulletin & Review, 20(6), 1350–1356. Retrieved from http://link.springer.com/10.3758/s13423-013-0442-z [22] Farisi, M. I. (2011). Kompetensi Guru dalam Mewujudkan Pendidikan Berkarakter dan berbasis Budaya. Jurnal Teknologi Pendidikan, 11(1)(ISSN 0854-7149), 23–33. Retrieved from http://jm.tp.ac.id/view/1331224689/mohammadimam-farisi/kompetensi-guru-dalam-mewujudkanpendidikan-berkarakter-dan-berbudaya

BIBLIOGRAPHY [1] Decorby, K., Halas, J., Dixon, S., Wintrup, L., & Janzen, H. (2005). Classroom Teachers and the Challenges of Delivering Quality Physical Education. The Journal of Educational Research, 98(4), 208–221. [2] Louis, K. S., & Marks, H. M. (1995). Does Professional Community Affect the Classroom? Teachers’ Work and Student Experiences in Restructuring Schools. American Journal of Education, 106(4), 532–575. [3] Hoy, Wayne K. dan Miskel, Cecil G. (2001). Educational Administration Theory, Research, And Practice 6th ed., International Edition, Singapore: McGraw-Hill Co. [4] Poulou, M. (2005). Educational psychology within teacher education. Teachers and Teaching: Theory and Practice, 11(6), 555–574. [05] Korthagen, F. A. J. (2010). Situated learning theory and the pedagogy of teacher education: Towards an integrative view of teacher behavior and teacher learning. Teaching and Teacher Education, 26(1), 98– 106. [06] Brandt, R. (1993). 'Overview/What Do You Mean, "Professional"?', Educational Leadership. March 1993, Volume 50, Number 6, Page 5-5. [07] Jalal, Fasli; Muchlas Samani; Ritchie Stevenson; Mae Chu Chang; Siwage Dharma Negara; and Andy Ragatz. (2009). Teacher Certification in Indonesia: A Strategy for Teacher Quality Improvement. Jakarta: Ministry of National Education and World Bank staff and consultants. [08] Clotfelter, C. T., Ladd, H. F., Vigdor, J. L., & Diaz, R. A. (2004). Do School Accountability Systems Make It More Difficult for Low-Performing Schools to Attract and Retain High-Quality Teachers? Journal of Policy Analysis and Management, 23(2), 251–271. http://www.mathematicampr.com/publications/pdfs/Education/teacherstrained 09.pdf [09] Temin, P. (2003). Low Pay, Low Quality. Education Next, 3(3), 8–13. Retrieved from http://eric.ed.gov/ERICWebPortal/recordDetail?accno =EJ667815 [10] Early, D. M., Maxwell, K. L., Burchinal, M., Alva, S., Bender, R. H., Bryant, D., … Zill, N. (2007). Teachers’ education, classroom quality, and young children’s academic skills: Results from seven studies of preschool programs. Child Development, 78(2), 558–580. [11] Farisi, M. I. (2007b). Srtuktur Kompetensi Ilmu Pengetahuan Sosial Seklah dasar dan Pengorganisasian Pengalaman Belajar. Interaksi: Jurnal Kependidikan, 3(3)(ISSN 1412-2952), 1–24.

19

[23] Noe, R.A, Hollenbeck, J.R, Gerhart, B. & Wright, P.M. (2000). Human Resources Management: Gaining Competitive Advantage. (3thed.). New York: Irwin/McGraw-Hill. [24] Decker, P.J. & Nathan, B.R. (1985). Behavior Modeling Training: Principle and Application. New York: Preager. [25] O’Neill, E (2008). An Integrative Awareness Training/Supervision Model (IAM) Infused Within the Counselor Education Curriculum. Ann Arbor, MI: ProQuest LLC, Eisenhower Parkway. [26] Brinkerhoff, R. (2006). Telling Training’s Story: Evaluation Made Simple, Credible, and Effective. San Francisco: Berrett-Koehler. [27] Kirkpatric, D.L. (1959). (1959). Technique for evaluating training programs. Journal of ASTD. 13(11), 3-9. [28]Paek, J. (2005). A study of training program characteristics and training effectiveness among organizations receiving services from external training providers. ProQuest Dissertations and Theses, 192-192 . Retrieved from http://search.proquest.com/docview/305402926?acco untid=133601 [29] Iqbal, M. Z., Maharvi, M. W., Malik, S. A., & Khan, M. M. (2011). An Empirical Analysis of the Relationship between Characteristics and Formative Evaluation of Training. International Business Research, 4(1), 273– 286. [30]Kraiger, K., Ford, J.K., & Salas, E. (1993). “Application of Cognitive, Skill-Based, and Affective Theories of Learning Outcomes to New Methods of Training Evaluation”. Journal of Applied Psychology, 78, 311-328. [31] Smith, G. E., Housen, P., Yaffe, K., Ruff, R., Kennison, R. F., Mahncke, H. W., & Zelinski, E. M. (2009). A cognitive training program based on principles of brain plasticity: Results from the improvement in memory with plasticity-based adaptive cognitive training (IMPACT) study. Journal of the American Geriatrics Society, 57(4), 594–603. [32] Macdonald, M., Lord, C., & Ulrich, D. (2013). The relationship of motor skills and adaptive behavior skills in young children with autism spectrum disorders. Research in Autism Spectrum Disorders, 7(11), 1383–1390. [33] Calvo-Merino, B., Glaser, D. E., Grèzes, J., Passingham, R. E., & Haggard, P. (2005). Action observation and acquired motor skills: An fMRI study with expert dancers. Cerebral Cortex, 15(8), 1243– 1249. [34]Nicholls, D., Sweet, L., Muller, A., & Hyett, J. (2016). Teaching psychomotor skills in the twenty-first century: Revisiting and reviewing instructional approaches through the lens of contemporary literature. Medical Teacher, (August), 1–8. Retrieved from http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/27023405 [35] Kwan, B. M., & Bryan, A. D. (2010). Affective response to exercise as a component of exercise motivation: Attitudes, norms, self-efficacy, and temporal stability of intentions. Psychology of Sport

and Exercise, 11(1), 71–79. Shephard, K. (2008). Higher education for sustainability: seeking affective learning outcomes. International Journal of Sustainability in Higher Education, 9(1), 87–98. [37] Seo, M.-G., Barrett, L. F., & Bartunek, J. M. (2004). The Role of Affective Experience in Work Motivation. The Academy of Management Review, 29(3), 423–439. https://doi.org/10.2307/20159052 [38] Riyadi, I. (2012). Kompetensi Siswa Pada Mata Pelajaran Ips. Strategi Belajar Metakognisi Untuk Meningkatkan Kompetensi Siswa Pada Mata Pelajaran Ips, (82), 28–36. [39] Surya, Mohammad (2007). Psikologi Pembelajaran dan Pengajaran. Bandung: Pustaka Bani Quraisy. [40] Wenno, I. H. (2011). Evaluasi Keterampilan Mengajar Guru IPA-Fisika dalam Kegiatan PLPG Sebagai Peningkatan Profesionalisme Dan Kualitas Pembelajaran. Jurnal Ilmu Pengetahuan Dan Teknologi, 9(Mei 2011), 10. [41] Undang Undang Republik Indonesia No. 14 Tahun 2005 Tentang Guru dan Dosen.30 Desember 2005. Lembaran Negara Tahun 2005 Nomor 157. Jakarta. [42] Gaffar, M.F. (2007). Standar Kualifikasi Akademik dan Standar Kompetensi Guru. Seminar Nasional Pendidikan Profesi-Sertifikasi Guru dan Prospek LPTK. Bandung: UPI. [43]Permendiknas RI Nomor 16 Tahun 2007 tentang Standar Kualifiksi Akademik dan Kompetensi Guru. Jakarta. [44] Kemendikbud.(2005). Undang-undang N0. 14 tahun 2005 tentang guru dan dosen. Jakarta : Kemendikbud [45] Kemendiknas.(2007). Permendiknas RI Nomor 16 Tahun 2007. Jakarta : Kemendiknas [46] Kemendiknas.(2006). Permendiknas RI Nomor 22 Tahun 2006. Jakarta : Kemendiknas [36]

[47] Kemendikbud.(2005). Undang-Undang nomor 20 Tahun 2003. Jakarta : Kemendikbud [48] NCSS. (2007). National Curriculum Standards for Social Studies: A Framework for Teaching, Learning, and Assessment. Silver Spring, Maryland 20910: National Council for the Social Studies. [49]Churchill, G A. & Iacobucci, D. (2005). Marketing Research: Methodological Foundations. Mason, Ohio: South-Western Cengage Learning. [50]Aaker, D.A. (2004). Strategic Market Management. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. [51] O'Dowd (2012). Sociology of Education (Unit 8). Wales: Wales Department of Education. [53] Sanderson, Stephen K. (2010). Makro Sosiologi. Terj. Wajidi, Farid dan Menno, S.Jakarta:PT. Rajagrafindo. [54] Sanderson, Stephen K. and Alderson, Arthur S. (2005). World Societies: The Evolution of Human Social Life. Boston: Allyn & Bacon Longman,. [major revision of Macrosociology.

20

[55] Nasution, Wisnu B. & Arthana, I Ketut Pegig (2010). ‘Pengaruh Sertifikasi Guru Terhadap Kompetensi Mengajar Guru Sekolah Dasar Negeri di Kecamatan Benjeng Kabupaten Gresik’. Jurnal Teknologi Pendidikan Universitas Negeri Surabaya. Vol 10 No 2 - Oktober 2010. [56] Murwati, Hesti (2013). Pengaruh Sertifikasi Profesi Guru terhadap Motivasi Kerja dan Kinerja Guru di SMK Negeri Se-Surakarta. Jurnal Pendidikan Bisnis dan Ekonomi (BISE), 1 (1). pp. 1-10. [57] Pulungan, Intan (2013). “Analisis Kompetensi Guru Pasca Diklat Guru Mata Pelajaran Kimia Tingkat Madrasah Aliyah Se-Sumatera Utara dan Aceh Darussalam”, BDK Medan, Kemenag Sumatera Utara. Tersedia online: http://sumut.kemenag.go.id/file/file/TULISANPE NGAJAR/oumv1363813844.pdf (Diakeses: 28 Maret 2013). [58] Brotosedjati, Soebagyo (2012). ‘Kinerja Guru Yang Telah Lulus Sertifikasi Guru Dalam Jabatan’.

Jurnal Manajemen Pendidikan, Volume 1 Nomor 2, Agustus 2012, 195-196. [59]Koswara, Deni, Suryana, Asep & Triatna, Cepi (2009). Dampak Program Sertifikasi Guru Terhadap Peningkatan Profesionalisme dan Mutu di Jawa Barat. Penelitian Hibah Fundamental UPI. 2009. Tersedia: http://file.upi.edu/Direktori/FIP/JUR._ADMINISTR ASI_PENDIDIKAN/197907232001121CEPI_TRIATNA/LAP_FUNDAMENTAL _Cepi_2009_ADPEND/Banner_Penelitian.pdf. Diakses: 24 April 2013.

21

ISLAM NUSANTARA AND ISLAM BERKEMAJUAN RHETORIC IN NEW MEDIA Dini Safitri UNJ, Jakarta, Indonesia [email protected]

Abstract. The purpose of this study is to provide an overview of the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan which are two major ideas about the identity of Muslims in Indonesia. Both the rhetoric anchored in the two mass organizations of Islam, the largest and oldest in Indonesia. Islam Nusantara rhetoric is the brainchild of Nahdlatul Ulama (NU), and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric is the brainchild of Muhammadiyah. NU and Muhammadiyah wants to spread the values of Islam to the people of Indonesia, but a different way in persuading the people of Indonesia. Both of them, are actively using new media to spread the idea. There are pros and cons about the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara in new media. Nevertheless, the research concludes that both the rhetoric within the framework of national unity, Bhineka Tunggal Ika. Criticism and argumentation rhetoric, is a form of Fastabiqul Khoirot to achieve the Rahmatan Lil Alamin of Islam. Keywords: Rhetoric, Islamic Organizations, New Media I. INTRODUCTION Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric are great ideas on the identity of Indonesian muslims. Both rhetoric came from two largest Islamic organizations in Indonesia. Islam Nusantara rhetoric was delivered by Nahdlatul Ulama (NU) and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric was a product of Muhammadiyah. Those organizations held their national congress on August 2015, NU held their congress first, and then Muhammadiyah had theirs few days later. The 33rd congress of NU were held in East Java city of Jombang on 1st-5th of August 2015 with official congress theme was Meneguhkan Islam Nusantara, Merawat Indonesia untuk Membangun Peradaban Dunia (Strengthening Islam Nusantara, Nurturing Indonesia to Develop Global Civilization). While Muhammadiyah’s 47th congress was held in Ujungpandang, South Sulawesi on August 3-7 2015 with official tagline Dakwah Pencerahan untuk Indonesia Berkemajuan (Enlightenment Movement toward Progressive Indonesia). NU and Muhammadiyah wished to spread the values of Islam to Indonesian people through their respective congressional theme. It is interesting that both organizations seek to persuade Indonesian people by using social media to disseminate their rhetoric.

in the expression of the discourse of Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan. Triangulation method in this research is done by comparing the information or data in a different way by using the method of observation. Observations made to the opinion text from NU’s and Muhammadiyah intellectual elites. III. RESULT Islam Nusantara rhetoric increasingly popular after President Joko Widodo delivers a speech during the opening of the National Conference NU clerics in Masjid Istiqlal (14/6). In his speech, he openly declared his support on the Islamic model of the archipelago, which is a friendly and moderate Islam. But the speech, different views on the new media, especially social media. Many netcitizen that interprets the contents of the speech Joko Widodo, is the implied message that makes Indonesian Muslims can’t be sovereign, because in the name of Islam, according to the agenda should moderate spread of alien ideology of nonMuslims. The agenda, including: 1). Indonesian Muslims will not demand the application of Islamic law, 2). Indonesian Muslims should not criticize the Israeli, 3). Indonesian Muslims should tolerate everything, including tolerate school of thought that is contrary to the teachings of Islam. Criticism of the speech, then extends to the rhetoric criticism Islam Nusantara in new media. The widespread criticism, spurred by some of the events that helped reinforce the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara. Among the events that became a byword in the new media, especially social media, is the reading of the Qur'an with Java style on the Commemoration of Isra 'Mi'raj at the National Palace as well as the circulation of quoting statements from the Minister of Religion, Lukman Hakim Saifuddin (LHS), which calls on Muslims to respect people who are not fasting. Quran reading event with Java style on the Commemoration of Isra 'Mi'raj at the State Palace, reaping a

II. METHOD The paradigm of this study are interpretive. This approach was chosen, because it starts from the phenomenon that the object is built of a particular situation, which is internalized by individuals or particular social group. The method in this study is a rhetorical argument by Stephen Toulmin. This method was chosen for this study to examine the text in a column on New Media, such as website, blog dan sosial media. This method is part of a text analysis method. This study is limited to Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric on the official web NU and Muhammadiyah, because there is competition (contestation)

22

lot of counter reaction. Counter parties say that the horse's bit, does not comply with the rules of the appropriate reading of the Qur'an recitation science, so that it can change the meaning and the meaning of the sentence Qur'an. This peritiwa associated with Islamic rhetoric archipelago, because after the incident, recitation of the Qur'an with the style of Java, followed by the show "Ngaji Qur'an Langgam Java and indigenization of Islam" held by Majlis Sholawat GUSDURian in Hall Green Foundation LKiS in Sorowajan (Wednesday, 05/27/2015). According to the counter, the series of events to reinforce the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara as an act of syncretism, ie confuse Islam with non-Islamic teachings. Reading the Qur'an as part of the teachings of Islam, can’t mixed with a horse's bit of Java, which can violate and change the meaning and the meanings of the words of the Qur'an. Counter parties, has told that Islam is a doctrine that is whole, perfect and pure at the same time. There should be no additional trinkets or the local culture mixed mortar into berfondasi Tawheed Islamic teachings. In the principle of monotheism, syncretism was not given a place and does not know tolerance. Purification of faith is absolute. Meanwhile, the pro against the event, saying that the event is the result of acculturation Islam with Javanese culture. This is consistent with the idea of Islam Nusantara as the idea of Islamic acculturation. Certain values in Islam "adapted" to the cultural heritage. The reason is, when Islam arrived in Indonesia, the existing culture first flourish. Therefore, it should not be eliminated just the culture. Islam is growing in the archipelago is Islam typical of the archipelago with various trinkets culture, which is different from the Islam of the Arab world with different cultures. Among the pros and cons of both sides, there is a third party argued, the definition of Islam Nusantara ala Jokowi unclear. In general, this third party to interpret Islam Nusantara as Islam is more tolerant of the traditions of the archipelago, which in this case should be read as Java. It makes Islam Nusantara is labeled as a syncretic Islam, because torelan against elements of Javanese culture with Hinduism and Buddhism. Another counter reaction against Islam Nusantara rhetoric, is a reaction to quote the statement of Minister of Religion, LHS, which calls on Muslims who were fasting in honor of those who did not fast. Netcitizen the cons say Menag been held hostage foreign agenda, tolerant Islam. The majority of Muslims in the country, must remain tolerant to the value of the minority. LHS rated making statements against Islam majority logic. According netcitizen, logically, LHS as the Minister of Religious Affairs should invite minority of people who are not fasting, respect the majority of Muslims who are fasting Ramadan. But in fact, a call LHS is the opposite. Regardless of the pros and cons netcitizen rhetoric regarding Islam Nusantara, look rhetoric Islam Nusantara spoken a number of elite NU, reaping bustle in new media. On the one hand, the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara, better known by the public. However, speech acts reworded in new media, the author I was ineffective. This is further prolonging the conflict between NU and other Islamic organizations, particularly those assessed by the elite NU as radical Islamic movements. The existence of a conflict

between the elite NU with a number of radical Islamic movements are assessed, it can be seen from the opinion article published in the official web NU. Of the many articles, some of them, even the author of the article directly naming the other Islamic organizations as the Islamic movement that should be dammed because a lot of spreading radicalism to the Muslims of Indonesia. Based on author searches on the official web NU, the idea of Islam Nusantara had long surfaced long before the 33rd congress of NU in Jombang. But the Islamic notion of this massive archipelago in the production and dissemination, primarily through new media, namely in the period ahead NU 33. Unfortunately, management NU diction of the elite, to popularize Islam Nusantara, a lot of criticism. Such criticism, there are many coming from Islamic organizations labeled by NU elite as radical Islamic movements. Interestingly, of the many opinion article produced and distributed at the official web NU, neither of these posts are attacked Muhammadiyah, which is the oldest Islamic organizations that still survive, and also has many members as NU. In fact, the two are giving kudos and congratulations Muktamar support. Islam Berkemajuan to Forward Indonesia In contrast to the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara many reap bustle in new media, Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric is not much addressed reactively by netcitizen. Even the atmosphere of Muhammadiyah Congress is not in dispute like atmosphere NU, making netcitizen many give praise to the Muhammadiyah. Many netcitizen who considered that the theme of Muhammadiyah in the 47th congress, is one way of Muhammadiyah wants to realize Islam Indonesia advanced. This is in accordance with the ideals of the founder of Muhammadiyah, KH Ahmad Dahlan, who say that Islam is a religion berkemajuan as opposed to stagnation, superstition and idolatry that occurred in Indonesia's Muslim population. Islam Berkemajuan movement has pioneered the era KH. Ahmad Dahlan, manifested in the establish form social institutions, such as amil zakat institutions, hospitals, orphanages, and modern schools. The trip set up by these institutions is not easy, since the movement was pioneered in the community who do not have awareness to pay zakat, the communities still rely on traditional healer to cure the disease, in people who still ignore the orphan, the majority of Muslims who debated whether modern schools are infidels or not. This movement is being developed today, notably in formulating ideal educational purposes, which gave birth to the individual who appears as a scholar and intellectual Muslims realize that advanced, has the firmness of faith and science are spacious and robust physical and spiritual. In addition, Muhammadiyah figures are also a lot of praise, because it actively fights for the interests of Muslims. For example, Din Syamsudin, who gets his appreciation for ketokohannya in MUI, especially concerning the MUI Fatwa regarding BPJS. Although the time to reap the pros and cons of the fatwa, but the MUI institutionally in appreciation netcitizen already can issue a fatwa on the issue of Muslims in the realm beyond aqidah, thoughts, daily worship, halalharam goods / services. Netcitizen considered that the MUI

23

Fatwa on BPJS shows that MUI has been able berfatwa regarding state policy, especially in social and economic fields. This MUI netcitizen movement associated with the persona Din, which is in line with the concept of Islam Berkemajuan, the MUI has continued role to a more advanced issues. MUI already can act to protect Muslims from usury dangers that lurk Muslims, contained in state policy. In addition to movement of the leaders of Muhammadiyah, Muhammadiyah movement is institutional, which is also appreciated netcitizen is jihad constitution. This movement, a movement to sue the Act that are inconsistent with the Indonesian state. Here are some laws in contested by Muhammadiyah: 1). Act (Act) Migas No. 22 of 2001 and Law No. 7 of 2004 on Water Resources, 2). UU no. 24 of 1999 on Foreign Exchange Traffic and Exchange Rate System, 3). UU no. 25 of 2007 on Investment, and 4). UU no. 30 Year 2009 on Electricity. Muhammadiyah argues that most of the substance of the law to threaten and harm the public, and contrary to the 1945 Constitution and Article 33 of the 1945 Constitution. Especially for the Oil and Gas Law No. 22 of 2001 and Law No. 7 of 2004 on Water Resources. Muhammadiyah act as initiators judicial review of Law. According Muhammadiyah, Act, assessed as unfavorable to the people's welfare, but would benefit the few and foreign companies. Through the movement, the Muhammadiyah tries to appear leading to straighten Indonesia, as a great nation, free from foreign interference. It is likened to the Jihad. Many of those who tried to approach Muhammadiyah, from giving threats, to provide funding deals CSR as compensation so as not to continue the lawsuit. Alhamdulillah, finally Muhammadiyah 'win over the judicial review of Law No. 7 of 2004 on Water Resources (SDA). The Muhammadiyah movement and is expected to continue to be done, so that the Islamic movement berkemajuan able to bring Indonesia Maju.

give suggestions, feedback, the argument against rhetoric Islam Nusantara in new media. Surely the netcitizen participation, a social movement is one means of public spaces to build communicative action. Meanwhile, Muhammadiyah positions that are outside the coalition government, consistent with a step forward, to produce and disseminate Islam Berkamajuan rhetoric. Based explanation above, the authors conclude both NU and Muhammadiyah, rhetoric movements, remains with the spirit of national unity. In Indonesia, every Islamic organizations, had the idea of Islam recognized the strengths of each, but everything is geared towards the agenda of spreading Islam as a religion that rahmatan lil 'Alamin. Mutual criticism and arguments between Islamic organizations in the archipelago, is nothing but the manifestation of the spirit of the race with Fastabiqul Khoirot, among Islamic organizations in order to feel the presence and emergence. REFERENCES M. Amin Abdullah. (2005) Democracy and Authoritarianism in Islamic Text: The Implication and the Consequences of having Bayani type of Islamic Epistemology in the Political Arena. ICIP Journal,Vol. 2,No. 2 [2] Benyamin Fleming Intan.(2006).“Public Religion” and the Pancasila-Based State of Indonesia: an ethical and sociological analysis. New York: Peter Lang. [3] Abdul Azis dkk. (2006). Gerakan Islam Kontemporer di Indonesia. Jakarta: Diva Pustaka. [4] Raja Bahul. (2003). Toward an Islamic Conception of Democracy: Islam and the Notion of Public Reason. Critique: Critical Middle Eastern Studies, Vol. 12, No. 1. [5] Moh. Nurhakim. (2012). Muhammadiyah dan Agenda Pengembangan Pemikiran Islam dalam Konteks Perubahan Masyarakat Kontemporer. Jurnal Online Metodologi Tarjih Muhammadiyah, Vol. 1, No. 1 [6] Dini Safitri. (2015). Debat Retorika dalam Wacana Islam Nusantara. Jurnal Commlinevol. VI,No. 2 [7] Ibnu Hamad. (2007). Lebih Dekat dengan Analisis Wacana. Mediator,Vol.8,No.2 [1]

Face of Islam in the archipelago Images are framed in the new Media Two brief review above, the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara and Islam berkemajuan in new media, is the result of the writer's observation at a number of websites, blogs and social media accounts. Based on the writer's observation, phenomenon netcitizen more frenzied thrash Islam Nusantara rhetoric and not so reactive response Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric, is a portrait of the face of Islam in the archipelago that is framed in the new media. The presence of the new media as an alternative media louder voice an opinion, makes the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara more frenzied. The bustle, could not be separated from the position of NU, which is currently located in the governing coalition. This makes the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara, is getting attention from both the government and society. From the government side, the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara become a topic of study and research funded under the ministry of religion. Moreover, as the realization of political appointments Jokowi about the NU students to the citizens, the government formally specify a date of October 22 as the day students. While the public's attention, especially netcitizen, is involved participation by netcitizen

24

THE USE OF EDMODO IN LEARNING INDONESIAN IN SMA FATAHILLAH TANGERANG Nini Ibrahim1), Deasy Wahyu Hidayati2) 1) SPs UHAMKA, Jakarta E-mail: [email protected] 2) SPs UHAMKA, Jakarta E-mail: [email protected] Abstract. The use of Edmodo in learning Indonesian language in high school Fatahillah Tangerang, attracts the attention of the author to conduct research on the issue. In particular, this study aims to find out how to use Edmodo in learning Indonesian language in high school Fatahillah Tangerang. This study uses qualitative descriptive method performed on high school students Fatahillah Tangerang. Based on the findings that the Indonesian language learning by using elearning (Edmodo) teachers to easily incorporate the entire program of learning such as learning materials, assignments and assessment mainly student activity automatically. In addition, the views of learners (students) are more interested in learning to use e-learning than conventional. Students are more independent, active, interactive, and responsible for learning activities. Students also get easily learning materials and programs for further learning. In addition, the intensity of the meeting of teachers and students are not deterred their time limits and distance. Ease of use of e-learning applications (Edmodo) assist students in understanding the range of learning, especially in learning Indonesian. In the circumstances, the use Edmodo not always go well, the authors found obstacles in the form of the Internet, not all students have a laptop / computer, hampered the process of uploading the results of the students' work. This, impact on the learning process is ongoing. Based on the results, it can be concluded that the use of Edmodo in learning Indonesian can be performed well. However, the use of Edmodo this should be under the supervision of a teacher so that students do not come out of the corridors of learning Indonesian. Keywords: Edmodo; learning Indonesian I.

INTRODUCTION

Advances in technology in this era brought great influence in the process of learning in education. Now the teacher is not the only facilitator in learning, especially in the 2013 curriculum that requires students to be active, innovative and growing potential. Therefore, the learning system that can be used by teachers can transform a conventional learning into learning e-Learning (Edmodo). Edmodo is a free social networking and safely used by teachers, students and schools for learning principled by Learning Management System (LMS). Edmodo is an interesting application for the teachers and students with a social element that resembles with Facebook but in fact there is a greater value in educational applications based social networking.

  Education is a system in which there is a learning process in which students are able to develop their potential. In line with it according to Law No. 20 of 2003 on National Education System is an education is a conscious and deliberate effort to create an atmosphere of learning and the learning process so that learners are actively developing the potential in which to have the power of spiritual religion, self-control, personality, wit, character, and skills needed him, society, nation and state. Vision national education is the realization of the education system as a social institution that is strong and authoritative to empower all the colors of the Indonesian state developed into a quality human, so capable and proactive answer the challenges of the times are always changing (Ministerial Regulation No. 41 of 2007). In this modern era, the students live in a digital world, one of them with internet access. The development of the internet is increasingly rapidly, nearly all circles and fields using the internet. Based on the data uploaded on the websiteshows that Internet users by 2015 there was an increase every year. It can be described that technological advances and the use of the internet will always evolve from time to time. This can be evidenced also, based on the chart obtained from eMarketer of 2014-2020 states that internet users around the world will continue to grow significantly.

25

Edmodo can also be accessed through mobile and is available for Android smartphones and the iPhone. The more easily to study in the current era. But it also can result in jealousy because only certain circles who can access with their gadgets, while the bottom of the poverty line is still considered not able to have a gadget can be prevented from learning. But hopefully this issue not become an obstacle to modern teaching and learning. Ease of Edmodo is the reason the writer to the testing of ICT based learning Indonesian in the hope that students are more active, independent and responsible in learning activities.

d e

f g

  II. METHODOLOGY The method used in this penelitiam is qualitativedescriptive. The data obtained through actual field, description of data, documentation studies, and literature study as supporting data.

h i

Edmodo trial was conducted in several stages, which include: 1. Stage Introduction 2. This stage is done on Monday, June 13, 2016. At this stage, we assist students in introducing how the application of Edmodo. In addition, students began to be given sample materials, assignments and how to interact with Edmodo. 3. Stage Trial a Materials News b Materials Poetry c Materials Speech d This stage is done on Monday, July 18, 2016. After their introduction stage Edmodo at the beginning, students are directed to join into the learning group consisted of reading the news, read the speech and read poetry. The number of students who join in this study group of 9 people. Students have already started reading the material, understand instructions and interact on Edmodo. Students work without face-to-face with a teacher (at their homes). 1. Final Stage This phase is done on Wednesday, July 20, 2016. At this stage, perform the face-to-face meetings between teachers and students as the research object. Teachers had discussions with students about using Edmodo in learning activities. Students submit a complaint or difficulty encountered in applying Edmodo and teachers give a full description. Based on the phase of the trial Edmodo, here we describe the results of these trials: a Students are familiar with applications faster and Schooogy Edmodo for this application is similar to Facebook, allowing students easy to use. b Through Edmodo students easy to see all the stages of learning materials as a whole, compared with the limited space applications Schoology learning. c Students are more active in learning activities such as students interact with teachers when the lack of

understanding of learning materials. It is inversely proportional to learning in the classroom. When the students did not understand learning materials, students tend to be more silent and waiting for an explanation from the teacher. Students are more interested in participating in learning through Edmodo arguing that learning through this application is not saturated. Students are more independent and responsible tasks are ordered through the application Edmodo Edmodo because students can not see the task at hand (downloaded) by his friend. This is what makes the students more confident with his work. Master's easy to see the progress of their students. The teacher can give an objective value for Edmodo provides applications for the involvement of the student personally. The teacher facilitated the provision of material and discussions with students. Students can see the value of the results of their work. While barriers or difficulties found in this trial, are: a). The lack of availability of internet quotas resulting difficult students to be online simultaneously, download materials and upload the results of the students' work. b). Not all students have a laptop / computer / tablet / android / iphone to access and follow the lessons using Edmodo app. c). The results of the work in the form of video footage is difficult to be uploaded to Edmodo with a big reason the video payload. This causes the students do not get a perfect score. d). Learning with Edmodo app is the same as Schoology application that takes longer than a conventional classroom.

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION 1. PROBLEM Based on the preliminary that has been presented, the authors propose the following issues as how to use Edmodo in Indonesian language learning in high school Fatahillah Tangerang? 2. AIM Based on these issues, this article aims to determine the use Edmodo in Indonesian language learning in high school Fatahillah Tangerang. THEORITICAL REVIEW 1. E-Learning The term e-learning can be defined as a form of applied information technology in education in the form of virtual schools. The term e-learning is used as a term for any technology used to support the efforts of teaching via the internet electronic technology. Therefore, the term e-learning is more appropriately addressed in an effort to create a transformation process of teaching and learning in your school / university into a digital form that is bridged by the Internet technology (Purbo & Hartanto, 2002).

26

E-learning itself has several characteristics as noted by Suyanto (2005) suggests four characteristics of e-learning

Edmodo is a piece of equipment to perform learning by combining some features from the Learning Management System (LMS) and some other features of the Social Network (Social Network), thus Edmodo is an interesting learning facilities and of course easy to use, Edmodo hereinafter known as Social Network Learning (Learning Social Networks). Edmodo was developed based on the principles of group-based classroom management and social media. Edmodo is an important feature of the active support of the communication model of online social facilities, the added features of online teaching materials (online learning material), and evaluating online (online evaluation). Some important features of Edmodo that can be used in developing learning activities are as follows a. Virtual classroom with collaboration group closed system; only those who have a code group that is able to follow classe b. Communication using social media models. c. Learning content management.in the evaluation of learning. Not only has the above features, Edmodo also supports team teaching, co-teacher, and teacher collaboration and access for parents to supervise their children learning activity. 3. Feature Edmodo There are a lot of features offered Edmodo to support the learning process. The following features are contained on Edmodo: a Polling Polling is one of the features that can only be used by the teacher. This feature is usually used by teachers to determine students' responses on specific issues. b Gradebook This feature is similar to the record of student's grade. With this feature, the teacher can assign a value to the students manually or automatically. This feature also allows a teacher to management's assessment of learning outcomes of all students. The assessment can also be exported into a file. In the feature Gradebook, teachers hold full access to these features while students can only view recaps value in the form of graphs and direct assessment. c Quiz Quiz feature can only be made by teachers, while students do not have access to create a quiz. They can only work on the problems quiz given by the teacher. Quiz is used by teachers to provide online evaluations to students in the form of multiple choice, short field and about the description. d Files and Links This feature serves to send a note with file attachments and links. The file is usually air-extension .doc, .ppt, .xls, .pdf and others. e Library With this feature, teachers can upload teaching materials such as materials, presentations, images, video, reference sources, and others. This feature also serves as a container to hold various files and links owned by teachers and students. f Assignment

that consists of: a

Utilize the service of electronic technology, where teachers and learners, learners and students, or teachers and fellow teachers can communicate with relative ease without being limited by matters of protocol. b Utilize the power of the computer (digital media and computer networks). c Using a self supporting teaching materials that can be stored on a computer so it can be accessed by teachers and students anytime and anywhere if the person concerned need them. d Utilizing the schedule of learning, the curriculum, the results of the learning progress and matters related to the administration of education which can be viewed at any time on the computer. Thus, e-learning can be defined as a system of learning which refers to the use of technology information to improve their knowledge and skills with characteristics such as utilizing technology services, take advantage of the advantages the computer, using teaching materials that are independent, and take advantage of learning schedule which can be viewed on a computer, as well as provide facilities that can be accessed by teachers and learners / students personal. 2.

Edmodo Edmodo is one of the many types of Social Learning Networks (SLNs) that circulate in the www world or the world wide web.SLN Here are some examples: a. Einztein (www.einztein.com) SLN is intended for adult learners (higher education) and lifelong learners. b. Sophia (www.sophia.org) m SLN is a directive which provide thousands of academic taught by teachers with a variety of instructional models, and can be followed by a learner with a variety of learning models. c. RemixLearning (www.remixlearning.com) SLN is supported by The Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation to provide a SLN can be adjusted according to taste by schools, libraries, museums, and other institutions. d. Schoology (www.schoology.com) namely the LMS (Learning Management System) that is equipped with SLNs.

27

This feature is used by teachers to assign work to students online. The advantages of this feature are equipped with the deadline, feature attach files that allow students to submit assignments directly to teachers in the form of document files (pdf, doc, xls, ppt), and also the "Turn in" to the item assignment that serves marks that students have completed their task. g Award Badge To give an award to the student or group, usually teachers are using this feature award badges. h Parent Code With this feature, parents can monitor the activity of the learning takes her children. To get the code, parents can get it by clicking the name of the class / group of children in Edmodo or can obtain it directly from the teacher concerned.

REFERENCES [1] [2]

[3]

[4]

 

[5]

IV. CONCLUSION Edmodo app can run well in learning Indonesian on condition of availability of internet facilities and a laptop for each student. In addition, this application is still in the corridor of the supervision of a teacher so that students will not go beyond the material being taught. Edmodo also allows teachers to provide materials and assess students’ activity. Through Edmodo, students are more active, innovative, independent, responsible and confident with all the tasks which have been given.

[6]

[7]

[8] [9]

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

[10]

Schools can use this application in the learning activities for students who have limitations in participating in learning in the classroom. This application is used so that students enjoy the same rights to receive learning materials for the number of students who can not attend by reason of illness, permits, etc.

[11]

28

Allen, Michael. 2013. Michael Allen’s Guide to Elearning. Canada : John Wiley & Sons. Ardiansyah, Ivan. 2013. Eksplorasi Pola Komunikasi dalam Diskusi Menggunakan Moddle pada Perkuliahan Simulasi Pembelajaran Kimia, Universitas Pendidikan Indonesia, Bandung-Indonesia Chandrawati, Sri Rahayu. 2010. Pemanfaatan Elearning dalam Pembelajaran. No 2 Vol. 8. http://jurnal.untan.ac.id/ Ellis, Ryann K. (2009), [online] Available FTP: http://www.astd.org/NR/rdonlyres/12ECDB99-3B91403E-9B157E597444645D/23395/LMS_fieldguide_20091.pdf Febrian, J. (2004). Kamus komputer dan teknologi informasi. Jakarta: Penerbit Informatika. Hartanto, A. A., & Purbo, O. W. (2002). Buku pintar internet teknologi e-learning berbasis PHP dan MySQL. Jakarta: Penerbit PT Elex Media Komputindo Kelompok Gramedia. L. Gavrilova, Marina. 2006. Computational Science and Its Applications - ICCSA 2006: 6th International Conference. Glasgow, UK: Springer. L. Tjokro, Sutanto. 2009. Presentasi yang Mencekam. Jakarta: Elex Media Komputindo. Pranoto, Alvini.dkk. 2009. Sains dan Teknologi. Jakarta: PT Gramedia Pustaka Utama. Romisatriawahono. (2008). [online] Available FTP: http://www. romisatriawahono.net/2008/01/23. Diunduh tanggal 4 Januari 2017. Smaratungga. (2009). [online] Available FTP: http://smaratungga.ning.com. Diunduh tanggal 4 Januari 2017.

IMPLEMENTATION MATLAB PROGRAM TO TEACH COMPUTATIONAL PHYSICS IN HIGHER EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTION Eka Murdani1), Soeharto2) 1,2)

STKIP Singkawang , Singkawang, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. MATLAB program is a program developed by MathWorks which uses a matrix programming language where linear algebra programming was simple. MATLAB program can produce physics equation and simulation if it is used properly and corectly. This study will give some examples how to use MATLAB program in teaching computation physics. First part of this study will give exlpanation and definition what is MATLAB program. The second part of this study will show you how to generate and produce physics equation, graph and simulation using MATLAB in learning physics especially in physics education in higher education institutions. The final part of this study will summarize and conclude fuction of MATLAB program in teach computational physics in higher educational institution. Keywords: MATLAB, computational physics, education collection of regular routines of LINPACK project numeric and EISPACK are either using FORTRAN but is now a commercial product from the Mathworks company, Inc. berkembangan further developed using C++ and assembler language (primarily for the basic functions of MATLAB) (http://www.mathworks.com ). MATLAB provides a range of numerical computation methods for analyzing data, developing algorithms, and creating models. The MATLAB language includes mathematical functions that support common engineering and science operations. Core math functions use processor-optimized libraries to provide fast execution of vector and matrix calculations. MATLAB provides tools to acquire, analyze, and visualize data, enabling you to gain insight into your data in a fraction of the time it would take using spreadsheets or traditional programming languages. You can also document and share your results through plots and reports or u.s. published MATLAB code. MATLAB provides a high-level language and development tools that let you quickly develop and analyze algorithms and applications [2]. MATLAB have some functions to develop simulation tools. Those are the windows, Matlab Comand comand editor and code analyzer. Table 1 shown function of the tools.

I. INTRODUCTION Computer technology has evolved and gives ease of many parties particularly in the areas of life, including education. with the use of computers, humans can increase the accuracy of the dak kefektivitasan a work performed based on computer analysis. A computer can store data and process it in a very large scope. With the development of computer technology, computer program also develops especially useful programs in the field of education especially mathematics and physics. There are many programs that are useful for learning physics. However, teachers also have to understand the use of these programs is primarily in learning physics. In this paper are described the implementation of the program MATLAB on learning physics in college. MATLAB is an abbreviation of the Matrix Laboratory, the first was introduced by the University of New Mexico and Stanford University in the 1970s. this software is indeed used for numerical analysis, linear algebra and the theory of matrices. Currently, the capabilities and features that are owned by Matlab is already much more complete with added toolboxtoolbox which is very unusual. Some of the benefits obtained from Matlab include: Math, Numerical Computation, Simulation and modeling, visualization and data analysis, graphing for both science and engineering, application development, for example by making use of the GUI. This Program can be as the equations of physics and can visualize graphs in the form of 2-dimensional or 3dimensional, which of course difficult if drawn manually, so it is expected to enhance the understanding of the physics of matter are studied [1]. MATLAB (Matrix Laboratory) is a program of analysis and numerical computation language advanced mathematical programming formed the basis of thought using the nature and form of the matrix program is an interface for a

Tabel 1. Important MATLAB Tools Comand Window

MATLAB Editor

Code Analyzer

29

Let you instantly and interactively enter data, call function, display code and program Provide editing and debuggging features using M file. M-file help u to input data before it is used as program code Automatically checks code for problems and recommends modification of program to be correct program

and matrix operations eliminates the need for for-loops. As a result, one line of MATLAB code can often replace several lines of C or C++ code [2]. Physics contents require a nice visualization and display to convey correct understanding. Many software can display and visualize both physics and related mathematics in various forms such as simulation, games, animations or videos [3]. MATLAB Program will help physics to simulate graph, equation and make best simulation to understand some concepts. In this study we will introduce you how to using matlab to make simulation and visualisation in RLC, Movement of pendulum harmonic and Superposition of Waves. This study will show you what is formula which we have to made and how to interprate and analyze code in matlab.

The command window is the window that is opened each time MATLAB run on window above can be done of accessaccess to the command MATLAB by way of typing sequence sequence expression such as MATLAB, access help window and others. If commands already typed and the results displayed on the screen the command window will be stored so it can be done by either using the command diary. Command windows is also used to call Matlab tools such as editors, debuggers or function. The Command Window is the place to run a function, declare a variable, running processes and view the contents of the variable. Figure 1 shows the command window on the MATLAB program.

II.

METHOD

This research is made according to experience in teaching and learning in the class, review some journals, article some literatures and analyzing data and teory of computational physics using MATLAB. We try to make some equation and program in physics into MATLAB. The discussion part will show some analysis using MATLAB in physics learning and teaching.

Fig. 1 Comand Window on MATLAB Program

MATLAB Editor is the window in which a user could menuliskankan programme prior to the run, the Matlab editor dingunakan to help the user enters data and code. Figure 2 shows the MATLAB editor on MATLAB Program.

III. DISCUSSION MATLAB is a popular computer software developed for Mathematical Computations, it is also a high-level language and interactive environtmentthat enables you to perform computationally intensive tasks. One of its most interactive feature stems from the fact that it is a modular program do that it is extremely easy to increase the number of task that can be done by producing toolboxes created by users. Another interestig feature of this software is its simplicity, there are many basic and advanced operation that are already implemented. Therefore, if a user is interested in creating a function for a task that is not a very complex task. This function will already implemented, or at least, it will be easy to implement with a simple combination of other already existing fuctions. Finally the autor reason to have led MATLAB becomes popular tool for physicist, mathematicians and engineers around the world [4]. In view of the characteristics of MATLAB, it will describe the application of MATLAB in Physics Computations.

Fig. 2 MATLAB Editor on MATLAB Program

Code Analyzer is a tool that helps analyze the icon of the program and provide recommendations in writing code to be correct code. Figure 3 shows the Code Analyzer on a MATLAB Program.

According to process learning and teaching in STKIP Singkawang in Computational Physics. We have made some program in physics learning using MATLAB. Those are Movement of Pendulum Harmonic, RLC and Superposition of Waves. A. Harmonic motion of the pendulum Harmonic motion of the pendulum is the first program that we are attempting to illustrate using MATLAB. Of the program we can find out that Matlab can provide illustrations in the form of a graph that is certainly hard to described manually. Figure 4 shows the program M-files that have been created and Figure 5 shows simulation of harmonic motion graphics on a pendulum.

Fig. 3 icon of code analyzer

With the MATLAB language, you can write programs and develop algorithms faster than with traditional languages because you do not need to perform low-level administrative tasks such as declaring variables, specifying data types, and allocating memory. In many cases, the support for vector

30

Fig. 4 M-file of harmonic motion of the pendulum

Fig. 7 M-file of RLC

Look at the series RLC, M-files that are already in the program according to the equation can describe the graph of the current and the voltage on the capacitor and inductor. It helps students understand the function of the rangkain RLC and electrical material because its graph simulation including abstract material. C. Superposition of Waves In the experiment make superposition of wave functions, we try to compress three wave function using MATLAB functions and makes M-files and graphs from the superposition of waves. Figure 8 shows the function M-files on the superposition of waves and Figure 9 shows the graphic superposition of waves.

Fig. 5 graph of harmonic motion of the pendulum in MATLAB

Figure 5 shows the harmonic motion of accurate based on code written in matlab program. This shows that the program matlab was able to describe well the graph of a function or equation physics B. RLC Series RLC has several components such as resistors, capacitors and inductors. The curve of the current and voltage in the circuit shown in Figure 6 and Figure 7 show the M-files from RLC Functions written in MATLAB.

Fig. 8 M-file of Superposition Waves Fig. 6 Curve of Current and voltage in MATLAB

31

REFERENCES [1] B. Cahyono, “PENGGUNAAN SOFTWARE MATRIX LABORATORY (MATLAB) DALAM PEMBELAJARAN ALJABAR LINIER,” J. Phenom., vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 45–62, 2013. [2] K. R. Patel and V. D. Patel, “Physics Simulation of Series Rlc Circuit Using Matlab Computer Program : Study Effect of Variable Component on Frequency Response,” indian J. Res., vol. 4, no. 10, pp. 85–86, 2015. [3] Suthichon Pokonwong and Pornrat, “Mobile Technology in Teaching Physics,” Phys. Educ. Res. unit, vol. 2, no. 2010, p. 2013, 2014. [4] Y. Ding and Y. Song, “The Research on Application of Computer Technology in Physics Education,” 2010 Second Int. Work. Educ. Technol. Comput. Sci., pp. 346–349, 2010. [5] Y. R. Nitza Davidovich, “Teaching engin-eering subjects using MATLAB,” Probl. Educ. 21stCENTURY, vol. 19, no. 2003, 2010.

Fig. 6 Graph of Superposition Wave in MATLAB

Simply put we can simulate functions of physics using the MATLAB program as long as we know the equation of the function of physics who wanted to was changed to M-file into MATLAB. IV. CONCLUSIONS According learning and teaching in Computational Physics at STKIP Singkawang. MATLAB is a veryeffective instrument in the educational process. It offers a simple and powerful tool for analyzing and visualizing results of numerical simulations and measurements. Its universality allows easy understanding of complicated processes in different felds of physics formula, forming a basis for greater success in education [5]. When students develop corresponding physics models and implement original formula or algorithms in MATLAB in different courses throughout the entire course of their undergraduate studies, students gain important experience in solving real and nonstandard physics problems that cannot be solved manually and fast. To physics educator is important to learn MATLAB because MATLAB will help student to understand abstract concept in physics. Graph and simulation in MATLAB when using physics formula, MATLAB will hep student to make a grapf and simulation corectly and fast in order to get easy understanding using fast way. ACKNOWLEDGMENT We would like to thank ADRI which provides template to help all participants writes a journal easily and conducts this international seminar. We would like to thank to STKIP Singkawang which fund all of cost to present this research and some lecturers who give advices to make better idea in this research. Without all of people who support this research, we cannot write this research well and properly.

32

The Effectiveness of Cooperative Learning with Structural Make A Match on Academic Achievement and Social Behavior: a case study at SMKN 33 Jakarta Rina Febriana1), Vika Wulan Aristya 2), Cucu Cahyana) Program Studi Pendidikan Teknologi dan Kejuruan PPs FT UNJ [email protected]

1

2

Fakultas Teknik, Universitas Negeri Jakarta [email protected],3 Fakultas Teknik, Universitas Negeri Abstract.: this research aims to establish the effectiveness of the application for the Cooperative learning model of Learning (CL) with Structural Make A Match techniques on academic and social behavior of student learning. This research uses quasi-experiment method by performing the treatment on group students. The research design used was a pretest-posttest control group design. Data collection is done using posttest and question form. Data analysis for student learning outcomes used Mann- Whitney-test, while an analysis of the friendly behavior of students used descriptive analysis. The results of this research indicate that: 1) the learning outcomes of students in the class who applied the model CL technique Structural Make A March had. Average score increased (delta pre-test and post-test) 7.80, while the class is applied to the method conventional 4.75. Students who stated that the learning model CL technique Structural Make A Match could improve communal behaviors of students at 79,2%, students who are still hesitant with this learning model as much as 11,6% and 9,2% of students stated that this learning model cannot increase significantly the social behavior of students. The implication of the application of this model is the improved aspects of cognitive, affective, and psychomotor students. Keywords: effectiveness, Cooperative Learning, Structural Make A Match, social behavior, the results of the study development is happening in the world of work, I. INTRODUCTION Education is a system where the entire

including

the

development

and

utilization

of

technology and its impact on the demands the skills

educational components are interlinked in integrated

of graduates. (Ivan, 2008).

and functional ties regularly to achieve the goals of

Vocational secondary school (SMK) is part

national education. Vocational education is one of the

of the national education system, where CMS is the

kind and level of education that is part of the national

intermediate level of education aimed at preparing

education system. Vocational education is a kind of

the participants of his protégé to enter employment.

education that have particular characteristics, which

Several factors can be identified as an attempt to keep

is oriented to the preparation of learners for work in a

the sustainability vocational education within the

specific field. For that reason, of vocational education

framework of the preparation of graduates who

cannot be detached from the shake with the world of

comply with the demands of the world of work,

work, because the workforce is considered as a chain

including the preparation of HUMAN RESOURCES,

that cannot be severed from a series of the vocational

curriculum relevance, adjustments and infrastructure

education system. Vocational education was built and

management, vocational education, including the

developed with attention to the needs and situation of

response to the demands of the job skills. The

the workforce to meet the demands of a growing

consequences of these goals demand that the quality

market. Vocational education can't shut down the

33

of the graduates of vocational high schools (CMS)

general, all cooperative learning techniques in this

can be absorbed by the world of work/world industry,

emphasis on the cooperation of students in learning,

and this has become a benchmark of the success of

both in presenting an idea or idea or in completing

the process of vocational education. According to

tasks in hopes of learning atmosphere is created that

Sisdiknas of the ACT No. 2 of 2003 learning is

is more active, effective, and the achievement of

defined as the interaction between educators, learners,

learning objectives.

and learning resources, in particular

learning

The purpose of this research is (1)

the success of the

improving the social behavior of students; (2)

educational process in schools is determined by many

enhance student learning outcomes in particular on

factors, not only determined by the teachers and

subjects of basic Food; (3) producing devices and the

students but also in the selection of appropriate

learning-type structural syntax to make a match.

learning model with the subjects will be taught.

According to Winkel (in Anthony, 2010) learning is

environment because it's

One of the learning models that can

the process in which individuals interact with their

accommodate the role of a teacher as mentioned

environment to get a change in his behavior.

above is a model of learning cooperative (cooperative

Learning is a mental or psychic activity which takes

learning).

to

place in the active interaction with the environment

systems.

produces changes in the knowledge skills and

Cooperative learning, individual learning system

attitudes. The change is obtained by effort (not

where teachers continue to provide information

because of the maturity of) living in a relatively long

(teacher as a Center) and students just listen.

time and is the result of experience. Zainul and

Cooperative learning is learning that focuses on the

Nasoetion (1996 in Anthony 2010) teaching process

use of small groups of students to work together in

is a conscious activity is to make students learn. In

maximizing learning conditions to achieve learning

the context of the learning outcomes of students thus

objectives. This model places emphasis on discussion

in accordance with the purpose of teaching (ends are

or cooperation that facilitates students to exchange

being attained). The purpose of teaching to become

ideas or ideas in the group so that in the process will

potential learning outcomes will be achieved by a

make students more active in learning activities. This

child through their learning activities.

Cooperative

developments

in

learning

existing

arises

learning

due

makes cooperative learning students can cooperate

Therefore, the test results of learning as a

and the presence of active partisan of students.

tool to measure the results of the study should

Teachers as facilitators and tutors will direct any

measure what students are understood in the process

learners towards knowledge true and correct.

of teaching and learning in accordance with the aim

Cooperative learning model has many techniques in

stated in the instructional curriculum. Sudjana (1996,

its application, namely STAD (Student Teams

in Anthony 2010) explains the purpose of teaching is

Achievement Divisions), the technique of Jigsaw, G

the expected capabilities possessed by the students

(Group Investigation), structure technic, Think-Pair-

after completing their learning experience. The

Share, Numbered Heads Together, Bamboo Dancing,

results of a study that measured reflect the goal of

The Power of Two, and the Listening Team. In

teaching. Gronlund (1988 in Purwanto, 2010)

34

teaching purpose is the purpose of describing the

cooperative learning requires the participation and

knowledge skills and attitudes that must be possessed

cooperation of group learning. Cooperative learning

by students as a result of teaching outcomes stated in

can improve the learning of students toward learning

the form of behavior (behavior) that can be observed

better, please help the attitude in some social

and measured. The results of the study are often used

behavior.

as a measure to find out how far a person mastering

Social behavior is an atmosphere of mutual

the material already taught. To evaluate the results of

dependence which is a must to guarantee the

the study required a series of measurements using a

existence of man (Ibrahim; 2001). Krech and

good evaluation tool and qualified. Learning results

Crutchfield, according to Ballachey in Ibrahim

are domain behavior-behaviors that are converted in

(2001), a person's social behavior that appears in the

the process of education. That behavior is divided

pattern

into

manifested with mutual interpersonal relationships.

three

domains:

cognitive,

affective

and

psychomotor.

of

response

between

humans

which

Social behavior is also identical with the person's

According to Soedjadi (in Rusman, 2013)

reactions towards others (Baron & Byrne; in Ibrahim;

the theory of cooperative learning is informing the

2001). That behavior is demonstrated with feelings,

theory of Constructivism. Essentially the theory of

actions, attitudes, beliefs, memories, or respect for

constructivism in learning approach is an approach

other people. A person's social behavior is a

where

and

relatively attitude to respond to others in a way that is

transforming information, check the information with

different. Baron & Byrne in Ibrahim (2001) States

the existing rules and revising when necessary. As

that there are four major categories that make up an

such, education should be able to customize and

individual's social behavior, namely; (1) the behavior

provide support to be able to optimize and evoked

and characteristics of others; (2) cognitive processes;

potentials of students, fostering activity and creativity

(3)

(creativity), and thus ensured the progression in the

Cooperative learning with types make a match (create

learning process. Ratna (in Rusman, 2013) learning

pairs) was first developed by Lorna Curran in 1994.

model was developed from the theory of learning

The model makes this a very good partner to enable

kontruktivisme which was born from the idea of

learners in the learning process. This model is used

Piaget and Vigotsky. Based on the research of Piaget

by educators for the purpose of inviting learners to

who first put forth that that knowledge is constructed

find answers that match the query are already

in the mind of a child. Cooperative learning is

prepared. One of the advantages of the match to

derived from the Cooperative which means working

make a cooperative is a student looking for a spouse

on together with mutual help to each other as one

while learning about a concept or topic, in a pleasant

group or one team. According to Soeprijono (in

atmosphere.

Rahmawati, 2013) cooperative learning is "learning

According to Rusman (2013), the model makes a match (create pairs) is a type of cooperative learning method in. One advantage of this technique is the way learners search for the couple while learning about a concept or topic, in a pleasant atmosphere. The advantages of learning model types make a

students

must

individually

locate

the broader concept which covers all types of group work including forms that more teachers are led by or directed by the teacher. The implementation of

35

environmental

factors;

and

(4)

culture.

The method of research methods used in this

match among others: can improve student learning activities, either in physical or cognitive; because there is an element of the game, this method is fun; improve the understanding of students against the material to be learned and can improve student learning motivation; effective as a means to train students the courage to perform presentations and effectively train your discipline students to appreciate the time to learn. Lie (2008) States that the model of learning type make a match or Exchange pair is an engineering study that gives students the opportunity to work with other people. This technique can be used in all subjects and for all levels of student age. Based on the opinion of the above, it can be concluded that cooperative learning model types make a match is a technique of learning by searching and matching pair/answer between a given problem with answers about a concept or topic in all subjects and grade levels.

research was quasi- experiment method, namely the research function to know how the experiment or treatment against the characteristics of the subject desired by researchers, or want to apply an act or treat in the form of strategies or new working methods or procedures to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the work (Mulyatiningsih, 2012). In this study as a treatment is treatment provided learners with cooperative learning model with structural types make a match. For other classes of learners

through

instructional

models:

with

conventional methods lectures. The following table is a design research by using pretest-posttest control

II. METHODS

group design.

Description: E = experimental Group K = control group X = treatment of experimental class by applying the model make a match Qe1Qk1 = pre test (preliminary test) Qe2Qk2 = post test (final test) Treatment research is done based on the image below: Figure 1. Application Make A Match in Learning In the techniques of data collection, in two

learning. Then it will be seen from the difference

groups of students, good control that applies to

between the control group and the experimental

conventional learning models or experiments that

results by looking at the difference between the

implement cooperative learning model with structural

results of pre-test and post-test. So it can be seen

types make a match will be given a pre-test and then

whether there is a difference between the control

after learning will be given the post-test. The purpose

group and experimental group. Análisis engineering

of the giving of the pre-test is to measure the ability

test data using the Test using t. a t-test on the

of the students while the post-test to measure the

condition that the data should be normal and

extent to which students can absorb the lesson after

36

homogeneous. Therefore it needs to be done and its

results of the experimental class is X 1 = 85,07. The

homogeneity test of normality test data.

lowest value of increased student learning results of

The results of the Study Class Experiment

highest value difference counts 6.67 of 33.3 in

Data obtained from the assessment of the results of

addition, the average value of the increase in the

the study data is the difference

overall study results of the experimental class is X 1

in the value of pre-test and post-test students

= 22, St = raw 8,49 Byway, and the variance S2 =

by applying the model of cooperative learning with

72,22 (see annex). The next frequency distribution

structural types make a match on the experimental

data are improved experimental class where learning

class X Food services SMK 38 Jakarta with sample

outcomes range score (R) is 26.67, the number of

data research as many as 25 students. Based on the

class interval (K) is a rounded 5.61 6 be sought using

data obtained, the lowest value of student learning

the formula (1 K = 2 log n) and the length of the class

outcomes while the highest value of 66.67 96.67 in

interval (R/K) is of a rounded 4.75 into 5 seen in the

addition, the average value of the overall study

table below: experiment of the highest class there is a lower limit on the number of students with as much 25.5 8 people with span difference value of 26-30.

To facilitate interpretation of the data is the difference in the value of pre-test and post-test experimental class students can be described in the following histogram graph:

Figure 2. Histogram Graphs Improved Learning Results Of Experiment Class From the histogram, graph can be seen that the difference in score pre-test and post-test

37

The Results Of The Study Of The Control Class The data obtained from the assessment of the results of learning viewed from the difference between the value of pre-test and post- test students by applying the conventional learning model on the control class X Foodservices SMK 38 Jakarta with sample data research as much as 27 students. Based on the data obtained, the value of the lowest student learning results of highest value while 56.67 amounted to 86.67 in addition, the average value of Figure 3. Histogram Graphs The Results Increase Learning Class Control (X2)

the overall study results of the experimental class is X 2 = 79,75. The lowest value of the difference between the value of pre-test and post-test students amounted to 3.3 while the

From the histogram graph can be seen that the

difference between the highest score of 30 in addition, the

difference between the value of pre-test and post-test control

average difference in the value of pre-test and post-test the

class the highest there is a lower limit on the number of

entire control of the class is X 1 = 15,54, St = raw 8,06.

students with 7.5 as 6 people with difference in the span of

Byway, and the variance S2 = 70,45. The next frequency

8-12 and the value at the lower limit of 12.5 with number of

distribution study results improved data class which controls

students as much as 6 people with span difference value of

the range of score (R) is 26.67, the number of class interval

13-17. Social behavior of the data in this study was analyzed

(K) is a rounded to 6 5.72 sought by using formula (1 K = 2

with Likert scale, where each grain the statement submitted

log n) and the length of the class interval (R/K) is of a

to the respondents were given four answer options: strongly

rounded 4.65 into 5 seen in the table below:

agree, agree, undecided, disagree, and strongly disagree heard score (5-1). The data is processed by using a quantitative description of the analysis is expressed in the

Table 3. Improved Learning Results Frequency Distribution Of The Control Class Lower Upper Absolute Relative Class Interval Limit Limit Frequencies Frequencies 3—7 2,5 7,5 3 11,11111 8—12 7,5 12,5 6 22,22222 13-17 12,5 17,5 6 22,22222 18-22 17,5 22,5 5 18,51852 23-27 22,5 27,5 3 11,11111 28-32 27,5 32,5 4 14,81481 27 100 %

form of a score.

III.RESULT AND DISCUSSION The results of hypothesis testing in this study by using nonparametric statistical test because the test data using the Lilifors test of normality indicates abnormal Gaussian data so using test Mann-Whitney large scale because the data is

To facilitate interpretation of the data is the

more than 20. Mann- Whitney test suggests that H0 is

difference in the value of pre test and post test grade control

rejected which means that there is the influence of the

histogram graph can be described in as follows:

application of the cooperative learning model with structural types make a match against the learning outcomes Basic Boga. With the average results obtained studying students who apply cooperative learning model with structural types make a match of higher 85.07 of learning results of students who apply to conventional learning model of 79.75 calculation result obtained data an average increase in student learning outcomes by applying cooperative learning

38

model with structural types make a match of 10 higher than

with the theories expressed by Rusman (2013). Cooperative

average results improved student learning outcomes by

learning model making pupils develop knowledge where

applying the conventional learning model of learning and

students analyze the answers and questions in the game

results because 15.54 improvements learn more experiment

make a match, abilities, and skills fully in the learning

class high means it can be inferred that the cooperative

atmosphere that is open and democratic, open question is

learning model with type make a match positive effect .

novices alike have the same responsibility in the learning

These results are in line with the results of relevant

and learning not only individually but also teamed up with

research conducted by Dwi Rahmawati titled "influence

his friend about a topic that will be discussed together and

Model of learning Cooperative Make A Match Against the

democratic students were taught to listen i.e. at the time of

results of the Learning process of the Students on the lesson

his friend were passing on information from the game make

31 Highs School Administration in Jakarta," with the

a match the form of the answer to question as well as

average results obtained studying students who apply

students from other groups can listen so they can match the

cooperative learning models make a match (X 1 = 82.78) is

right pair of question and answers received and students also

higher than the results of a study of students who apply to

provide input if there is confusion in the match the right

conventional learning model (X 2 = 75.96) so that the

answers.

positive effect this means that the learning cooperative

Students are no longer as a learning object, but it

structural types make a match can be applied on the lesson in

can also serve as tutor to tutor (peer tutor) for peers in

the field of Boga. This means the cooperative learning of

learning make a match i.e. mutual listening between friends

structural types make a match can be used on all subjects but

and give each other information and match the right

to note the allocation of time used as the structural type of

information so that the purpose of learning can be achieved.

cooperative learning make a match requires the allocation of

So that students will be more responsible in spite of learning

sufficient time for long.

work together in groups but the mastery of learning

The model make a match (create pairs) is a type of

materials is the responsibility of each individual it is in line

cooperative learning method in. One advantage of this

with the theory presented by Isjoni (2012).

technique is the way learners search for the couple while

IV. CONCLUSIONS The low increase in student learning outcomes on

learning about a concept or topic, in a pleasant atmosphere

the control class with the application of this conventional

of fun because students play but responsible while learning

learning model can be seen in the steps of teaching-centered

in learning. Cooperative learning model in the emphasis on

teachers (teacher centered learning) that are less closely

the learning process student-centered learning arena students

understanding in students. On a different class of

more active in learning. Based on the results of the

experiments with the application of the cooperative learning

descriptive analysis of social behavior for data retrieved as

model with structural types make a match, student-centered

many as 41.6% of students stated very much agree that the

learning (student-centered learning) by giving the game a

application of CL can improve social behavior, 37.6% agree,

compatibility card problem or answer about the material

11.6% students expressed hesitation, 5.4% of the States did

covered. Learning structural type CL make a match, helping

not agree, and 3.8% of students stated strongly disagree that

students to become more active, working in teams, and

the application of CL can enhance the social behavior of

responsible. Social behavior data retrieved as many as 41.6%

students.

of students stated very much agree that the application of CL

In cooperative learning by structural type make a

can improve social behavior, 37.6% agree, 11.6% students

match demands the students to be more active in learning

expressed hesitation, 5.4% of the States did not agree, and

and potential student can be further developed so that

3.8% of students stated strongly disagree that the application

students learn and active responsibility in learning in line

39

[5] [6]

of CL can enhance the social behavior of students. Analysis of the value of the results of a study of two groups of

[7]

samples tested using test research hypotheses Mann-Whitey.

[8]

From the results of the calculation, obtained Z accounting of Z table and 2.62 on α = 0.05 of 1.96. From the results of this

[9]

research it can be concluded that reject Ho if Z accounting >

[10]

Z table which means the Ha received, from the data above it can be concluded that the application of the Cooperative

[11]

Learning by Structural type Make A Match can increase in a positive social behavior and the results of study of

[12] [13]

elementary students of SMK Boga Field Expertise food

[14]

services.

[15] [16]

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4]

Depdiknas.(2003). Undang-undang RI Nomor 20, Tahun 2003, about the system of national education. Djaali. Muljono, Pudji. (2007). Measurements in education. Jakarta: Grasindo Isjoni. (2012). Cooperative Learning. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar. Joni, R. (1996). Integrated Learning, Teacher Training Program Papers For Teachers. (Jakarta: Depdikbud)

40

Lie, Anita. (2008). Cooperative Learning. Jakarta: Grasindo. Mulyatiningsih.( 2012). Metode Penelitian Terapan Bidang Pendidikan. Bandung: Alfabeta Peraturan Pemerintah No 19 Tahun 2005 about Education National Standards. Preston, B., & Walker, J. (1993). Competency standards in the professions and higher education : a holistic approach. Canberra : Australian College of education. Purwanto. (2010). Evaluation Of The Results Of The Study. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar Rahmawati, Dwi. (2013). The influences are Cooperative Learning Model to Make A Match Against the results of the student learning process on subjects in the Senior High School 31 Jakarta [thesis]. Jakarta: Faculty Of Economics, Universitas Negeri Jakarta Ridwan, Sunarto (2010). Introduction To Statistics. Prints The Third. Jakarta: Alfabeta. Rusman . (2013). Learning Models. Depok: Rajagrafindo Persada. Slavin, Robert E. (2005). Cooperative Learning Teori, Riset dan Praktik. Bandung: Penerbit Nusa Media. The Ministry of education and culture. (2013). Curriculum 2013 SMK Fiid and Nutrition Programme. Undang-undang RI Nomor 14 Tahun 2005 about Teacher dan Lecturer.

IMPROVED INTELLIGENCE KINESTHETIC CHILDREN AGES 5-6 YEARS THROUGH ACTIVITIES OF MOTION AND SONG Elindra Yetti1), Herviana Muanivah2) 1)

UNJ , Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected] 2)

UNJ, Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. The purpose of this study to describe the process and outcomes of learning through movement activities and traditional songs that can enhance kinesthetic intelligence early childhood. Subjects numbered 15 children. The research method using action research, using the stage from planning, action, observation, and reflection. This study consisted of two cycles, the first cycle consists of 8 meetings and the second cycle consists of 6 meetings. The data analysis technique is qualitative and quantitative data analysis. Qualitative data analysis with measures of data reduction, data presentation, and data verification. Quantitative data analysis with descriptive statistics. The results showed an increase kinesthetic intelligence of children through movement activities and traditional songs, can be evidenced by the average score on the prekinesthetic intelligence 23.00 cycle, the first cycle of the second cycle of 31.06 and 37.80. Keywords: Kinesthetic Intelligence, Movement and Song, early childhood Another study conducted by Stacey N. Skoning (2008), with the title "Movement and Dance in the Inclusive Classroom". This study suggested that activity creative motion used to intervene in children who have limitations both within the limitations of learning, emotional limitations, lack of attention, cognitive limitations, as well as intelligent and talented children. Based on the results of previous studies and exposure to existing problems, it is necessary to research oriented towards improvement of kinesthetic intelligence of children aged 5-6 years (group B). Basically the characteristics of children at the age of 5-6 years is active through fun activities, then one way to develop kinesthetic intelligence early childhood with melakuka movement activities and songs. Kinesthetic Intelligence Understanding kinesthetic intelligence proposed by Gardner (1999: 206) that the characteristics of a smart boy kinesthetic have the capacity to work skillfully with objects, both involving fine motor skills by using fingers and hands and those who exploit gestures or gross motor. This was confirmed by Armstrong (1994: 76), that a child who has a kinesthetic intelligence, then he also has the physical skills specifics such as: coordination, balance, agility, strength, flexibility, and speed, as well as being able to use the fingers as proprioceptive, tactile according to capacity. It is clearly illustrated that children from childhood can already be seen intelligence kinesthetic, because the child is able to use his body movements specifically so in this case, the child will be able to solve the problem through movements that are specific to the capacity problems faced by children using motion body optimally. According Sonowat and Gogri (2008: 54), that a bright child kinesthetic has expertise in transferring their thoughts in hand to create a product. This intelligence includes specific skills such as coordination, balance, strength, agility,

I. INTRODUCTION Early childhood is a sensitive period of child development. In early childhood, children with high sensitivity to the reception of all the data from environmental stimulation. Stimulation of development needs to be given early, because of the sensitivity which is owned by the child is easier to receive a stimulus. Aspects of these developments would be optimal if stimulated in accordance with the stages of child development. The teacher's role in the provision of physical stimulation in children is very important to do, because it can increase the ability of large muscles and smooth muscles in children. Physical development of children in particular is also related to multiple intelligences (Multiple Intelligences), which aims to solve the problem or do something that no value in life. Physical development can be classified into kinesthetic intelligence as it relates to optimizing a wholly owned subsidiary in the use and control of body movements. Based on observations in children aged 5-6 years, especially those in group B, the researchers found that children in group B do not yet have good kinesthetic ability. Of the total number of children in group B of 15 girls, when doing kinesthetic activities, seen almost all children do not have a good kinesthetic ability. This is indicated by: 1) the child is not able to perform coordinated movements, 2) the child has not been able to do the movements of balance, and 3) the child is not able to perform movement skills. According to previous studies conducted by Birsen Ekinci (2014), with the title "The Relationships Among Sternberg's Triarchic Abilities, Gardner's Multiple Intelligences, and Academic Achievement" suggests that the relationship between intelligence with one another. STA based on tests conducted among children in Istanbul Turkey.

41

flexibility, and speed. This intelligence is also related to motion control skills and is able to manipulate objects. According to Connell (2005: 67) that children are characterized as intelligent children are kinesthetic, aware of the world through touch and movement, a special blend of harmony between mind and body, they can control the body by an expert, and they also use the feeling. Those who have this intelligence was involved in sports, dance, gymnastics, cheerleading, art, swimming, and martial arts. Meanwhile, according Lwin et al (2008: 168), that intelligence is used to both mind and body, simultaneously to achieve all desired goals. Child physical intelligence obtained naturally, because since childhood activities many children do outside the home, such as climbing trees, flying kites or chase animals on the farm. Physical ability is obtained without the training of control. Games such as jump rope, hide-and-seek, and play marbles are activities every day, so that such activities provide a natural means to improve kinesthetic intelligence. Based on some of the theoretical basis it can be concluded that kinesthetic intelligence is the intelligence of the child in expressing ideas, feelings, and thoughts skillfully using body movements that can be measured through aspects: 1) flexibility, 2) agility, 3) strength, 4) balance , 5) power, 6) coordination, and 7) skills. Motion and Songs Motion and songs by Brewer (428-429) is an All children deserve a rich musical environtment in the which to learn, to sing, to play, to move, and listen ". Music for children are also useful to help them gain knowledge, learn, play, move, hear, and understand the content of their experience. Characteristics of music in children aged committed with a cheerful, easy to digest, and is familiar with the child's environment. According to Pica (2013: 26), movement and song is maintened that songs, movement, and musical games, are brilliant neurological exercises. It is clear that by providing activities for children that contain elements of music, singing and movement is an excellent activity to train the child's brain. According to Campbell (2001: 300), that the child's movement is not always in harmony with the beat of music in response to a steady rhythm, rhythmic quality, or effect of music as a whole. Early childhood can move fast, slow and stop, or rotating smoothly but they do not understand the relationship between sounds with their motion in time to the music. Kids liked the motion, and happy to do various movements he made his own. Motion is an important tool for children to express themselves through music. Every child can do according to his own ability level. According to Isbell and Rainess (2007: 30) Variety of musical activity that can be enjoyed especially for children is music that has elements of balance. Music is an activity provides sound, rhythm, melody, texture, and shape used to create a song, so that the music included in the domain of cognition and psychomotor domains were effective. Meanwhile, according to Yusep (2012: 107) states that motion, music, and the song is a fun learning tool for young children. It would be very beneficial for children physically and spiritually. Besides fun, movement and songs can also stimulate the development of children. Motion is also closely related to energy. 5-6 years old children have enough energy

to perform various activities, including play using song and movement. Music and movement activities in children can also train the coordination of visual and kinesthetic movement. Based on the theoretical basis that has been described by experts in the above, it can be concluded that the motions and songs for early childhood is a fun activity that can bring natural motion and the rhythm, rhythm and tempo of the song.

II. METHOD The method used is classroom action research (action research), by Kemmis and Mc. Taggart which includes four stages: planning, action, observation, and reflection. Data collection techniques used were observation. Instruments developed through conceptual and operational definitions to explain that kinesthetic intelligence is the score that describes the ability of the child in achieving indicators kinesthetic intelligence. Data analysis technique used is the analysis of qualitative data and quantitative data analysis.

III.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

The results showed that kinesthetic intelligence of children aged 5-6 years (group B) have increased from precycle, the first cycle, until the second cycle. A. Pre-Cycle This initial Asessmen conducted to determine initial conditions kinesthetic intelligence of children aged 5-6 a tender (group B). The results of the initial asessmen for kinesthetic intelligence of children as follows:

Fig 1. kinesthetic intelligence of children aged 5-6 years in pre-cycle Data on the first graph shows the average level of achievement development (TCP) of children at prekinesthetic intelligence cycle for children. The average level of achievement of development (TCP) children in group B at the pre-cycle of 23.00. B. Cycle I Observations on the first cycle was conducted to determine the score obtained child after administration action movement activities and songs, in improving child kinesthetic intelligence. The observation data in the first cycle as follows:

42

relates to many disciplines. The following review of the results of the study, the increase in kinesthetic intelligence through movement and song. From the viewpoint of science education, children have become accustomed to learning activities that use motion and traditional songs with various stimulation either singing, clapping, music, and video to enhance kinesthetic intelligence that involves various aspects of both flexibility, strength, agility, balance, coordination, power, and skill. The conditions according to Piaget's theory of learning in Slavin (2010: 67) were found in the children's learning process will require adaptation, adaptation requires a balance between the two complementary processes, namely assimilation and accommodation. Assimilation and accommodation occur together are complementary to each individual who adjusted to the environment. This process is necessary for growth and cognitive development. Between assimilation and accommodation there should be harmony and called by Piaget with balance or equilibrium. In children group B TK Pertiwi 1 Uloe, they are also going through the stages mentioned above. They need to adapt before they get used to the movement and activities of traditional songs and activities that involve bodily activities so that the percentage score in the second cycle is better or higher than the cycle I. In addition to adaptation, another factor is the interest in the variety of activities and more interactive media. This has to do with the psychology of children in learning. In the first cycle, giving the action has not been accompanied by new activities, while in the second cycle of action given additional interventions via video. It is also a reflection of the improvement actions based on the first cycle that children still looked confused or not yet familiar and getting bored, so that additional diberikanlah, media and tools used, and the atmosphere created is different from the previous cycle. Connected with this is by Throndike in Ahmadi (2009: 89) that the person who is said to have the intelligence to be able to respond to the stimulus it receives well, because it is derived from the results and experience gained through past results. Based on these opinions then, a bright child will receive the stimulus properly obtained from the experience and results of past experience, so that children will learn the stimulus gained both from the past and adapted to the experience of a given stimulus at the present time. Viewed from the standpoint of art, children are given the stimulation of the music, clapping, singing, and video, because it is expected that children are more accustomed to adjust and sensitive to music. Kempt and Dayton opinion about the benefits of media in teaching them the learning process becomes more attractive, the quality of children's learning can be improved, a positive attitude of children towards learning materials and the learning process can be improved. In addition to the provision of additional music also includes one stimulation kinesthetic intelligence development. As experience in motion by Barlin in Mutiah (2010: 169) also enrich the imagination, sense of smell, tool perabanya, hearing, and feeling to form a body movement. Besides, the experience of expressing motion, more children can be patient, wait for other friends in the exercise, do not disturb, laugh or captured. teach children to be responsible in the group, in collaboration with friends, stimulating sensitivity of children, and to

Fig 2. kinesthetic intelligence of children aged 5-6 years in the cycle I Data in chart 2 shows the average level of achievement of development (TCP) of children at precycle to cycle I. Based on the above data, kinesthetic intelligence of children in the first cycle increased. This is shown by the average achieved the development level of achievement (TCP) kinesthetic intelligence of children in the first cycle of 31.06. C. Cycle II Observations on the second cycle was conducted to determine the score obtained child, after the action in the form of motion activities and songs to improve kinesthetic intelligence of children. The observation data in the second cycle as follows:

Data in chart 3 shows the average level of achievement development (TCP) on the second cycle increased. This can be proven acquisition of the average score on the second cycle is 37.80. Based on the analysis of quantitative data obtained by percentage of the total increase of 14.82% observation, it shows there has been a increase in the percentage of children's intelligence kienestetik start pre-cycle, the first cycle, until the second cycle. Based on the analysis of quantitative data obtained by percentage of the total increase of 14.82% observation, it shows there has been a increase in the percentage of children's intelligence kienestetik start pre-cycle, the first cycle, until the second cycle. Kinesthetic activities through movement and songs provide benefits on all aspects of child development, and

43

develop a sense of discipline. Participate in exercises that use motion can give the child a chance to meyalurkan energy that can not be done any other way. The motion that close relationship with music is an expressive gesture and free themselves from tension through rhythmic movements. so that in the handling of children who behave aggressively, rhythmic motion media can channel negative emotions in a way that is more acceptable to the environment, such as dancing etc. It shows the giving or presenting music will help stimulate the child kinesthetic intelligence. In addition to providing music media, on the second cycle also use video as a tool to introduce these activities through media and learning resources other than teachers, so that the second cycle is no different from the previous activity. Motion and traditional song cycle cycled I and II are also many cooperative activities. Improved delivery of these measures had a positive effect, children are more inclined to engage in motion and traditional songs. Besides a basic need for children is good for learning and emotion, because by moving like a dance, as can stimulate a child's readiness to enter further education, because the movement or dance activities that help children explore movement with music that helps children's developmental. Viewed from the standpoint of culture, it greatly affects the development of children's art, because in motion activities and traditional songs in addition to improving child kinesthetic intelligence can also develop its culture. This has to do with the opinion of Gilbert (2013: 165) that the selection of songs for young children should be with words that could be understood son dam gave meaning lyrics to be sung, because in a hiking activity and traditional songs of the children were introduced local culture South Sulawesi through folk songs that can give children an understanding of the meaning contained in the lyrics of traditional songs, especially songs Tulolona Sulawesi. Viewed from the standpoint of social, cooperative or group activities will help children develop interpersonal and intrapersonal intelligence of children. This is in accordance with the opinion of Vygotsky in Slavin (201: 65) that emphasize social interaction as a mechanism for the development of children. Children also berkooperatif when completing the activities provided, of they are able to perform simple movements provided by the teacher. In addition to the activities of the motion and traditional songs that freeing the child explores kinesthetic movement so as to provide opportunities for children to develop the appropriate stage of development. Viewed from the standpoint of the sport, it is associated with learning movement "motor learning". According to Singer (2010: 145) a learning process that has the goal to develop a range of skills that optimal motion efficiently and effectively. It is clear that the motion is an association of training or experience may alter the ability of motion towards the performance of certain skills, because the motion is not only influenced by the factors of maturity but also the process of learning, the kinesthetic activities with motion and songs to help children to move with purpose because in motion activities and songs of children will develop kinesthetic aspects such as balance, coordination, skill, strength, power, agility, and flexibility.

The results of qualitative data illustrate that, a series of administration actions such as activities of motion and a song can improve kinesthetic intelligence of children, because it gives children the opportunity to move and move with the alignment between ideas, thoughts, and motion coordinated, balanced, supple, agile, skilled, strong and power the right. It is as disclosed in Mutiah Swanson (2010: 168) that the motion is a means of expression and divert fear, sadness, anger, pleasure, and so on. Motion is also an expression of liberation from the shackles of helplessness, symbolic, displacemen, or catharsis, especially in children, they express themselves directly and effectively through the motions. Motion to be a very creative when combined with music that diinterpetasikan children according to their own way. However, before the child is able to do this expressive movement, first child must master the variations of body movement. In this way the child can recognize himself and realized the "mood" and specific feelings can be removed through expressive movements. By learning through movement by Piaget in Mutiah (2010: 168) children can learn about themselves and their world. Can be explained that, moving the expression activity of dance, to stimulate the learning-based brain, which can stimulate the readiness of children to basic education further, because the movement or activity dances that incorporate basic movements such as crawling, rolling, spinning usual, and sway, shows, match well for children's development.

IV. CONCLUSIONS Based on the findings and discussion, the results of this study can be summarized as follows: 1) The process of movement activities and songs, can enhance kinesthetic intelligence of children aged 5-6 years (group B). Action motion and songs performed in several stages, namely the initial activities, core activities, and closing activity. 2) The results of the motion and the songs are applied, can enhance kinesthetic intelligence of children aged 5-6 years (group B).

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

44

Amstrong, Thomas. Multiple Intelligences In The Classroom. United State of America: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development, 1994. Brewer, Jo Ann. Introduction To Early Childhood Education Preschool Through Primary Grades. Boston: Pearson, 2007. Campbell, Don. Efek Mozart. Jakarta: PT.Gramedia, 2001. Connel, Dianne. Brain Based Strategies to Reach Every Learner. USA: Scholastic Inc, 2005. Gardner, Howard. Intelligence Reframed. New York: Basic Books, 1999. Isbell, Rebecca T & Shirley C. Raines. Creativity and the Arts With Young Children, Second Edition. USA: Delmar Cangage Learning, 2007. Lwin, May & Adam Khoo, dkk. How to Multiply Your Child Intelligence: Cara Mengembangkan Berbagai Komponen Kecerdasan, Alih Bahasa Christine Sujana. Jakarta: Indeks, 2008. Nurjatmika, Yusep. Ragam Aktivitas Harian untuk Playgroup. Jakarta: Diva Press, 2012. Pica, Rae. Experiences In Movement & Music. Unitted State: Wadsworth, Cengage Learning, 2013. Slavin, Psikologi Pendidikan Teori dan Praktik. Jakarta: Prenada Media, 2010 Sonowat, Reeta & Purvi Gogri. Multiple Intelligences For Preschool Children. Mumbai: Multi-tech Publishing co, 2008.

IMPROVE THE ABILITY OF READING COMPREHENSION BY USING MEDIA PICTURE STORY BOOK ON CHILDREN'S MENTAL RETARDATION CLASS IV SPECIAL PRIMARY SCHOOL (SLB) IndinaTarjiah*, Elin Novelinda Special Education Department UniversitasNegeri Jakarta Email*: [email protected]/[email protected] Abstract: Studies of this class action is aimed at improving the reading skills of mild mental retardation in children's understanding of class IV special primary school.The sample in this study are grade IV SLB B-C Works To East Jakarta, as many as 5 people.The medium used is a media picture story book. Based on data analysis and interpretation of the results of the analysis showed that there are variations in the improvement of the learning results.On initial Ability gets a percentage of 44%, but these results have not been mecapai keriteria ketuntasan 70%.Next cycle I get a percentage of 61% is already starting to show improvement but is not the whole of students achieve the expected success criteria.Then in cycle II get a percentage of 74% and achieved the expected success criteria.These results indicate that the media picture story book can improve the ability of reading comprehension in children of mild mental retardation class IV at SLB B-C Utility, East Jakarta.

Keywords: picture story book learning Media, to improve the ability of reading comprehension.

I. INTRODUCTION Reading is one of the important factors in learning, because through reading one can acquire information, science, as well as new experiences.Reading activity is activity that is required by anyone who tried would like to go ahead and add insight.Lesson reading comprehension in children of mild mental retardation is different with lessons in reading comprehension in school in General.This is because the mild mental retardation children's ability is very limited so that the teaching of reading comprehension in they should be using the right method and an interesting media.The attention of the child in the implementation of learning reading comprehension is very influential towards reading advanced reading comprehension ability, then it really requires attention to low-class teacher, let alone the children of light who have mental retardation below average should be using the proper and appropriate media in the implementation of the lesson, but it really depends upon the factors of teachers who apply it.To be able to carry out in good need for planning, material, method of reproduction or development. In learning a lot of media that can be used by teachers.Because it is currently so much media that can be used in helping the delivery of learning.One of them is by using a media picture story book.Picture story book has the advantage of visual as well as the appropriate characters entertaining, use colors that are very attractive to children.Picture story book was actually quite positive in growing ask read on children, especially on older mild mental retardation.For children who can already read but not understand the content of the story, the media picture story book can help visualize their imagination.As well as

watching television, if done properly and with levels gradually became function for entertainment or to acquire information. Through the medium of a picture story book children can understand the text or Readings found in the story.To be able to carry out learning in both the need for good material, planning methods, media as well as its development.Learning the proper media for reading comprehension in students of class IV a mild mental retardation that is media picture story book.By using the help of a picture story book the media expected students to learn reading skills will be better.Students can follow the lessons in the classroom, students berkomukasi with friends, teachers, family members in the home and the immediate surroundings, then by reading exercises regularly will give you results that are beneficial to the child itself and parents.

II. RESEARCH METHODS This research was carried out at SLB B-C Works To East Jakarta.The time of the research carried out for a little over 1 semester (6 months) that is between the months of January to June 2013 which covers:the submission of proposals, the study of theory, drafting instruments, data collection, data analysis and report preparation.Based on the purpose of the research, then the method used in this research is the Research Action class (classroom action research).The design of this research model PTK according to Kemmis and Mc. Taggart. This research uses the Penellitian class act through several cycles.In each cycle will be performed several stages, namely 1. 2. Planning, actions and observations, 3. Reflection.

45

III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

3 DN 4 GG 5 NF Average

Based on the results of the implementation of the action and research done by two cycles, the study describes the results of observation data to see change students ' ability after given an action by using the media picture story book mild mental retardation in students of class IV B-SLB C Utility, East Jakarta.

Name Of Student

Score Gain

Final Score

The percentage of

1 2 3 4 5

RS SPF DN GG NF

17 15 14 11 10

56 50 46 36 33

56% 50% 46% 36% 33%

13

44

44%

Average

73 70 60 74

73% 70% 60% 74%

70% 70% 70% 70%

From the results of the test cycle II after the given action then value gained an average cycle II of 74% so average value results in cycle II correspond to the criteria that have been set at a minimum ketuntasan of 70%.So the researchers and collaborators agreed to stop research on cycle II.

Table Test Results Early Reading Comprehension Ability No.

22 21 18 22

Grafik Persentase Hasil Kemampuan Membaca Pemahaman 80% 60% 40% 20% 0%

From the table the ability of early reading skills percentage of understanding is still low by using a media picture story book of 44%.The percentage is still below 70% of the success criteria that have been set. Table of evaluation results the ability of Reading Comprehension by using Media story book Bergamabar CycleI Score Final The The No Name Gain Score Percentag expected Of e Level Of percenta Stude ge Ability nt 1 RS 22 73 73% 70% 2 SPF 21 70 70% 70% 3 DN 19 63 63% 70% 4 GG 17 56 56% 70% 5 NF 13 43 43% 70% Rata-rata 18 61 61% 70%

44%

61%

74% Grafik  Persentase  Hasil  Kemampuan  Membaca  Pemahaman

Images. The graph of the percentage of the results of the initial understanding of reading skills, the cycle I and Cycle II Judging from the overall data on the diagram above shows that the process of teaching and learning activities and the percentage of prior actions I cycle up to cycle II suffered an increase in. Learning outcomes students also experience increased enough, though not yet rise significantly. Students acquire early skills RS 56%, cycle I increased to 73% and cycle II obtained 87%.RS students experience increased. Students acquire early on the ability of SPF 50%, cycle I increased to 70%, and the cycle II acquired the 80%.SPF students experience increased.Students and on the ability of the early obtained 46%, cycle I increased to 63%, and 73% gain cycle II.Students DN experience increased. SiswaGG on the ability of the early gain 36%, cycle I increased to 56%, and the cycle II obtain 70%.GG students experience increased. Students acquire early on the ability of NF 33%, and the cycle I increased to 43%, and the cycle II obtain 60%. Though the average class has not shown significant improvement and one of the students who became the subject of the study 1 students have not reached minimum ketuntasan is specified, the researchers together collaborators decided to not continue to cycle III due to the time given by the study doesn't allow for performance of cycle III, but researchers together collaborators agreement for further action are given to students who have not mencapat ketuntasan maximum.The follow-up, in the form of grant of exercise already derived a matter of level of kesukarannya so expect that students can experience an increase in the ability of reading comprehension. In addition, this research was declared successful in obtaining

Based on the results of the evaluation of learning reading comprehension on a cycle I score obtained is greater than on the average score before students get action, i.e. 44% increased to 61%.so the average value results in the cycle I did not correspond to the criteria of the success that has been established of 70%.It can be said on the Icycle percentage cycle I experienced an increase but has not yet reached the minimum ketuntasan criterion has been established by researchers and collaborators.Therefore, researchers and collaborators will carry out further actions on cycle II. Table of evaluation results the ability of Reading Comprehension by using Media picture story book Cycle II No Name Score Final The The Of Gain Score Percentage expecte Studen Level Of d t Ability percenta ge 1 RS 26 87 87% 70% 2 SPF 24 80 80% 70%

46

the average reading skills of understanding using media picture story book meets ketuntasan a minimum of 70%. 100%

activities and the percentage of prior actions I cycle to cycle II experienced a significant improvement and 1 student who became the subject of this research has not yet reached the minimum set, ketuntasan researchers together collaborators decided to not continue to cycle III due to the time given by the study doesn't allow for performance of cycle III researchers, however, along with collaborators, agree to further action given to students who have not mencapat ketuntasan maximum.Further action, in the form of grant of exercise already derived a matter of level of kesukarannya so expect that students can experience an increase in the ability of reading comprehension.In addition, this research was declared successful in obtaining the average reading skills of understanding using media picture story book meets ketuntasan of 70% and an increase in views also from ability of students during the learning process takes place. The advice of the school, the school should provide direction and policy for using media picture story book in learning reading comprehension.The teacher, the teacher should use the media picture story book in learning reading comprehension in children of mild mental retardation class IV, because by using the media picture story book then learning reading comprehension can be more effective. Parents, as a reference in guiding children learning to read in order to be enjoyable by using media picture story book.Subsequent researchers, research results are expected to be useful as input to research further interested to conduct research and to add insight researcher about media use a picture story book that can be used to treat mild mental retardation in student learning reading comprehension.

87%

80% 73% 70% 73% 70% 63% 56% 60% 56% 60% 50% 46% 43% 36% 33% 40%

Kemampuan  Awal

20%

Siklus II

80%

Siklus I

0% RS SPF DN GG

NF

Images. Graph The Percentage Of Student Understanding Of Reading Skills Implementation of the research activities was implemented starting cycle I up to cycle time management II can be used with the most efficient and effective manner, using the media picture story book in learning reading comprehension can improve reading skills of students as well as the interests of students to read so that the impact on the improvement of student learning outcomes that can be seen from the percentage of student learning outcomes persiklus. The efforts made is how implementation of the learning taking place involving the entire students to actively engage in the process of learning activities by developing a framework of thinking students so that each student's understanding of reading skills increased from cycle to cycle I II.

Bibliography Farida Rahim. 2008. Pengajaran Membaca di Sekolah Dasar, Jakarta; Bumi Aksara Ahmad Rofiuddin.1989.Pendidikan Bahasa dan Sastra Indonesia, Jakarta; Depdiknas M.S. Djiwandono. 1996.Tes Bahasa Dalam Pengajaran,Bandung: ITB Dendy Sugono (ed). 2003.Buku Praktik Bahasa Indonesia, Jakarta: Pusat Bahasa. Moh Amin. 1995. Ortopedagogik Anak Tunagrahita, Jakarta: Depdikbud Dirjen Dikti Arief S. Sadjiman. 2006.Media Pendidikan, Pengembangan dan Pemanfaatan. Jakarta; PT Raja Grafinda Persada. Azhar Arsyad. 2007.Media Pembelajaran. Jakarta; PT Raja Grafindo Persada. Ahmad Najib. 1982. Gambar Ilustrasi dan Fungsinya. Jakarta; IKIP Kurt Franz / Berhand Meier. 1986.Membaca Minat Baca. Jakarta; Remadja Karya. Kusmiyati, Pengertian Ilustrasi Gambar. http://5martconsultingbandung.blogspot.com/2010/10/pengertian-ilustrasigambar.html. Diakses pada 1 November 2012, pukul 19.00 Moh. Amin. 1995.Ortopedagogik Anak Tunagrahita. Jakarta; Ditjen Dikti Depdikbud. Muljono Abdurrahman dan Sudjadi. 1994. Pendidikan Luar Biasa Umum, Jakarta: Departemen Penidikan Dan Kebudayaan.

IV. SUMMARY AND ADVICE Overall understanding of the reading skills of students increased despite its increase was not significantly increased.From the results of the overall average percentage data ability of reading comprehension of students obtained on pre action amounted to 44% with an average minimum ketuntasan criterion the entire students of 70%, then the study hadn't and actions need to be. After a given action on cycle I the average ability of reading comprehension of students acquired for 61% the reading skills of understanding that hadn't because it has not yet reached the minimum ketuntasan criterion has been established. The results of the analysis of the cycle II, the percentage of the ability of reading comprehension results 74%, so there is a growing understanding of reading skills.So this picture story book media can improve the reading skills of students.Views of the data in the diagram above shows that the process of teaching and learning .

47

THE IMPACTS OF SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL/VOCATIONAL SCHOOL JAPANESE TEACHER TRAINING TOWARD TEACHER‘S PEDAGOGIC COMPETENCE ENHANCEMENT Kardina Pendikarini1), Dedi Sutedi2) 1) Universitas Pendidikan Indonesia, Bandung, Indonesia E-mail : [email protected] 2) Universitas Pendidikan Indonesia, Bandung, Indonesia E-mail : [email protected] Abstract. This evaluation on the training implementation for Japanese language teachers was conducted to find out the impact of the training and its post implementation by focusing on the enhancement of the teachers’ pedagogy competence. This research utilized qualitative method that is evaluative in nature. The results of the observation and survey show that there was an increase of 50 % on mean on 9 out of 11 aspects that were parts of pedagogical competence assessment criteria. The increase had a significant effect on the training implementation enhancement in general, namely 83-100%. There were some subjects considered hard, as a result additional time allocation was needed. The reason behind this problem was the lack of facilities and infrastructures available in schools. Thus, it is expected that Center for Development and Empowerment of Teachers and Education Personnel (CDELTEP) or PPPTK Bahasa as an institution that organizes Japanese language training can make some improvements such as adding the time allocation on the subjects considered difficult. In addition, CDELTEP needs to conduct monitoring and evaluation regularly on the training participants, i.e. teachers, so that the strength and weakness of the training can be identified. Key Words : Program Evaluation, pedagogy competence, Japanese language teachers I. INTRODUCTION Education quality improvement is constructed from different aspects. Teacher is one of essential determinant aspects that determines in achieving education quality improvement. As a determinant aspect, the government of Republic of Indonesia administer the empowerment and improvement of teachers as stated at the Act Number 14 year 2005 regarding teachers and lecturers, as well as Government Regulation Number 74 Year 2008 regarding teacher. In Government Regulation No. 74 Year 2008, it is explained that teachers are required to perform competences consisting of knowledge, skills and behavior should be owned, internalized and actualized in implementing their profession. The competences required are pedagogical, professional, social, and personality competences. Teachers have opportunities to develop their competencies and training and professional development in the field. One of the efforts to develop the competence of teachers, among others, is through education and training. It is institutionally the main task of Centre for Development and Empowerment of Language Teachers and Education Personnel (CDELTEP) or PPPPTK Bahasa. Training activities are intended to improve teacher quality standards, as confirmed in a comprehensive manner in Government Regulation year 2005 regarding National Education Standards. Trainings held by CDELTEP or PPPPTK Bahasa are intended for teachers of languages, including Japanese teachers. Basic level training for Japanese participants has targeted Japanese teachers at the secondary level education units (Senior High School/Vocational High School), to those who has never participated in the Japanese language training

and with the aim of focusing on improving professional competence and pedagogical Japanese teachers. Pedagogical competence at Basic Level Training for Japanese teachers aims to establish a teacher's ability in designing and developing Japanese learning methodologies that are effective, efficient; achieve the learning objectives; create learning tools and teaching materials; evaluate and analyze the process of learning the Japanese language; and develop learning materials through a language laboratory. Evaluation of basic level training program for teachers of Japanese language high school/vocational school conducted by PPPPTK is still limited to the implementation aspect. Meanwhile, the post-training evaluation is merely conducted to obtain alumni feedbacks of training that show how well the training program in preparing teachers to teach (pre-service), not to obtain the feedbacks in the real teaching practice in the classroom (in-service). From the condition above, we need to know the answers to some problems, such as: (1.) Do the process of education and Japanese language training programs implemented by CDELTEP or PPPPTK Bahasa have an impact in improving the quality of teachers, particularly in the pedagogical competence of teachers? (2). What are the efforts of teachers to implement the results of the training in their teaching-learning activities? (3). What are the stakeholders’ policies in improving the quality of learning and teaching, both policies regarding the coaching of teachers and students as well as in the provision of learning facilities?. From the problem formulations above, the writer uses a qualitative-evaluative method that aims to collect information related to the impact of the implementation of the Basic level Training program for Teachers of Japanese

48

Language organized by CDELTEP or PPPPTK Bahasa and its relation to improve the quality of Japanese teachers' pedagogical competence. The results of this evaluation are expected to be taken into consideration for the providers in the development of quality in further education and training.

No

II. RESEARCH METHODS 

The method used in the evaluation of the implementation of this training is a qualitative- evaluative method. In general, program evaluation is needed to determine the end of a policy program to determine further policy. The focus of this evaluation is the efforts to determine the impact of training on the improvement of pedagogical competence of teachers, as a way of determining the improvement in implementing and the next training.

7

8

III. DISCUSSION A. The Impact Of Training Toward Pedagogical Competence Enhancement For Japanese Language Teachers TABLE 1 THE IMPACT OF TRAINING TOWARD PEDAGOGICAL COMPETENCE ENHANCEMENT FOR JAPANESE LANGUAGE TEACHERS No 1

2

3

4

5

6

Aspects Teacher gives students the chance to be active in teaching Teacher teaches systematically and focuses on materials. Teacher gives students the chance to show their abilities. Teacher evaluates students regularly. Teacher asks about students’ background, interests, and passions. The tells

teacher the

Time

Before After Before After Before After Before After Before

After

Before

Answer

Teacher

Student

Yes

100%

88%

No Yes No Yes No Yes

0% 100% 0% 50% 50% 100%

12% 100% 0% 90% 10% 99%

No

0%

1%

Yes No Yes

100% 0% 100%

86% 14% 98%

No

0%

2%

Yes No Yes

50% 50% 100%

87% 13% 96%

No

0%

4%

Yes No Yes

33% 67% 83%

55% 45% 78%

No

17%

22%

Yes No

50% 50%

74% 26%

9

10

11

Aspects student learning objectives to be achieved in every material being taught Teachers plan learning that can motivate students to learn more. Do you use media that can motivate students? Teachers provide opportunities for students to demonstrate proficiency in the form of different learning interactions (Role Play, Interview, Information Gap, Games, etc ....) Teachers motivate students by directly correcting errors they speak.. Teachers motivate students by displaying the results of students’ learning in the classroom / bulletin / school newsletter, etc.

Time

After

Before After Before After

Answer

Teacher

Student

Yes

100%

97%

No

0%

3%

Yes No Yes

50% 50% 100%

82% 18% 97%

No

0%

3%

Yes No Yes

83% 17% 100%

62% 38% 92%

No

0%

8%

Yes

50%

80%

No

50%

20%

Yes

100%

97%

No

0%

3%

Yes

83%

93%

No

17%

7%

Yes

100%

97%

No

0%

3%

Yes

17%

12%

No

83%

88%

Yes

67%

13%

No

33%

87%

Before

After

Before

After

Before

After

B. Principal Policy in Improving the Quality of Learning Languages 1. Policy in Terms of Infrastructure

49

No 1 2

3

4 5 6

7 8

9

10

TABLE 2 POLICY IN TERMS OF INFRASTRUCTURE Aspek Ans Princi Tea Stud wer pal cher ent Provide language Yes 33% 50% 51% laboratory No 67% 50% 48% Provide language Yes 67% 67% 75% learning media.(If you have, No 33% 33% 21% mention!) Provide conducive 100 Yes 67% 78% classrooms to learn % a language. No 33% 0% 20% Provide students’ Yes 100% 83% 88% textbooks/ learning No 0% 17% 12% materials Enrich books Yes 100% 83% 53% collections No 0% 17% 48% Arrange special Yes 67% 67% 54% program about language learning No 33% 33% 45% enhancement Provide fund to Yes 67% 50% 50% implement program No 33% 50% 48% 100 Provide Yes 100% 76% % opportunities to students to follow language No 0% 0% 24% competition/contest Give financial 83% 83% 63% support for Yes language competition/contest No 17% 17% 36% activities Motivate students Yes 100% 83% 68% to demonstrate learning achievements (in the magazine wall, No 0% 17% 29% during the ceremony, bulletin, etc ....)

No

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2. Teacher Competence Improvement TABLE 3 TEACHER COMPETENCE IMPROVEMENT No 1 2

Aspects Supervise to class regularly Provide suggestions, feedback or ideas in

10

Answer

Principal

Teacher

Yes

67%

33%

No

33%

50%

Yes

100%

50%

No

0%

33%

50

Aspects supervision activities Provide ease of licenses for teachers to follow the training / training Ask the teacher training report the results in writing Ask the teacher presents the results of training in front of fellow teachers Provide curriculum documents for each subject Requiring teachers make instructional administratio n (syllabus, lesson plans, etc.) in an orderly manner. Check for teaching administratio n made teachers regularly Supporting teachers to be active in Teacher’s Association activities. Provide time for consultation on the programs of innovation in schools.

Answer

Principal

Teacher

Yes

100%

67%

No

0%

0%

Yes

100%

83%

No

0%

0%

Yes

33%

33%

No

50%

50%

Yes

100%

83%

No

0%

0%

Yes

100%

83%

No

0%

0%

Yes

67%

50%

No

33%

33%

Yes

100%

83%

No

0%

0%

Yes

100%

50%

No

0%

33%

5. Response of Participants’ Education and Training TABLE 5 RESPONSE OF PARTICIPANTS’ EDUCATION AND TRAINING No Aspects Answer Principal Teacher

3. The Implementation of Teachers’ Language Education and Training Impact TABLE 4 THE IMPLEMENTATION OF TEACHERS’ LANGUAGE EDUCATION AND TRAINING IMPACT No Aspects Answer Teacher 1

Everything can be utilized

2

Mostly

3

Partly

4

Nothing can not be used

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

1

83% 17%

2

3 4

4. Learing materials: easy or difficult to implement TABLE 5 LEARING MATERIALS: EASY OR DIFFICULT TO IMPLEMENT No Aspects Answer Teacher

Listening

easy

difficult 2 Speaking easy difficult 3 Reading easy difficult 4 Writing easy difficult Methodology of Japanese Language Teaching 1 Learning steps easy difficult 2 Introducing basic practice easy difficult 3 Introducing application easy practice difficult 4 Designing learning materials easy and media difficult 5 Analyzing learning materials easy difficult 6 7

Analyzing learning content Evaluation techniques and item test

33% 67% 67% 33% 50% 50% 83% 17% 83% 17% 83% 17% 67% 33% 33% 67% 50% 50%

easy

17%

difficult

83%

easy

83%

difficult

17%

Yes No Yes No

Yes No Yes No

0%

100%

100%

0%

0%

83%

100%

17%

0%

100%

83%

0%

17%

83%

0%

17%

Based on the surveys and interviews that have been conducted, it can be inferred as follows: 1. Training for the basic level of Senior High School/Vocational High Japanese teachers has has good impacts toward the improvement of nine covering aspects of pedagogical competence; Teachers teach systematically and focus on the materials, teachers evaluate students regularly, teachers ask about students’ background, interests, and passions of students, teachers tell students learning objectives to be achieved in each of the material being taught, teachers plan learning to motivate students to learn, teachers use the media to motivate students, teachers provide opportunities for students to demonstrate proficiency in the form of the interaction of different learning, teachers motivate students by correcting directly linguistic errors effectively, teachers motivate students to display their students’ learning products in the classroom, bulletin, or school newsletters. 2. There are two aspects that increase pedagogical competence that have not been convinced as a result of training, namely; Teachers give students the chance to be active in teaching and learning, and the teacher gives students the chance to demonstrate their abilities. But overall it can be concluded that the implementation of the training is high in the amount of 83-100%. 3. Teachers have attempted to implement all materials obtained in training, although there are some materials that are relatively considered difficult to be implemented , namely; listening skills, development of teaching materials and teaching aids, teaching materials analysis, and analysis of the teaching load. This is among other things due to their lack of understanding, lack of time, as well as inadequate infrastructure. 4. The principal policy makers at the school has made efforts to direct the teachers implement the results of the training, although they are still low activity on its appropriateness. The school principal also works to support all activities

Japanenese Language Skills 1

Able to improve the knowledge, skills, and knowledge of language teachers Proportion of training materials can support the competence of language teachers Getting the opportunity to apply the training results The training allocation time is too short

51

related to the development of teacher competence and development of Japanese language in school. In this case, it needs to be improved including the frequency improvement of headmaster in monitoring or supervising teachers. IV. SUGGESTION Based on the results of this evaluation, some suggestions addressed to policy makers related to the competence of teachers participating in the training, such as: teacher educators, facilitators of Japanese language, and principals of teachers/participants joining training: 1. There should be extra time for the complicated materials to apply in schools. 2. There should be regular monitoring and evaluation (end of each year) to teacher training participants, so that the goodness and weaknesses of the programs that have been run can be diagnosed. 3. Keep the awareness of the principal place where the teacher in charge of the training participants, such as conducting regular supervision, carry out administrative checks, and see what is gained by teachers during the training, so that principals can also monitor the progress of the competency of teachers in their schools. REFERENCES [1] Arikunto, Suharsimi, dan Cepi Safruddin Abdul Jabar. Evaluasi Program Pendidikan, Pedoman Teoretis Praktis Bagi Mahasiswa dan Praktisi Pendidikan. Jakarta : Bumi Aksara, 2008. [2] Jack J. Phillips dan Ron Dew Stone. How to Measure Training Results. New York : The McGraw-Hill Companies, 2002. [3] Mulyatiningsih, E. (2014). Metode Penelitian Terapan Bidang Pendidikan. Bandung : Penerbit Alfabeta. [4] Republik Indonesia. Undang-undang Republik Indonesia No. 20 Tahun 2003 tentang Sistem Pendidikan Nasional. [5] Republik Indonesia. Undang-undang Republik Indonesia No. 14 Tahun 2005 tentang Guru dan Dosen. [6] Republik Indonesia. Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia No. 74 Tahun 2008 tentang Guru. [7] Republik Indonesia. Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia No. 19 Tahun 2005 tentang Standar Nasional Pendidikan. [8] Sugiyono. Metode Penelitian Kuantitatif, Kualitatif, dan Kombinasi (Mixed Methods). Bandung : CV. Alfabeta, 2011. [9] Wirawan. Evaluasi, Teori, Model, Standar, Aplikasi, dan Profesi. Jakarta : Rajawali Pers, 2011.

52

OPTIMIZATION OF GAME CHARACTER EDUCATION BASED ON TRADITIONAL PHYSICAL EDUCATION OF CHILDREN WITH BEHAVIOUR AND EMOTIONAL PROBLEMSTHROUGH LEARNING MODEL QUANTUM LEARNING (NEURO PSYCHOLOGY LEARNING AND LEARNING)     Abstract.  Education character is a values ethical, aesthetic, moral, and in particular the culture of the lokal. Education of character shown to children tunalaras with the charecteristics of disturbed behaviour emotional and social. The child’s needs tunalaras characteristic of dysfuntional central nervous system causing the behaviours tend to stray. Optimizing the learning will occur through the contribution of synergies between neuro learning with learning psychology resulting quantum learning mode. The adaptation of the mechanisms able to reduce behavioral disorders in children tunalaras,so the child more controlled side of the emotional and social. Therefore it can concluded that the optimalization of character education based on tradisional games will give the change to the child’s behaviour tunalaras through of the physical education quantum learning Keywords: character education & traditional physical education

conduct disorder / CD (behavioral disorders), 2) oppotitional deviant disorder / ODD (antagonism), 3) type other emotional disorders. Various forms of behavioral disorders can be overcome with sports activities, according Gapin Jennifer I., et al (2013: 7) in the journal study that physical activity (exercise) a positive influence on changes in children's behavior disorders. With behaviour and emotional problems child need special attention because if untreated, it can cause a condition that affects the mindset and behavior of children with behaviour and emotional problems difficult to control. It is as described Sherwood in AkmarawitaKadir (2012: 1), the response to behavioral disorders are untreated will cause stress (pressure), if the body encounters a stressor,your body will activate the response of nerves and hormones to implement measures of defense to reduce stress caused. Sport activities improve the behavior because it affects the hormones and chemicals in neuro(nerve).According to Ratey in RachmahLaksmiAmbardini (2009: 72) explains that physical exercise has a tendency to increase the levels of glucose, serotonin, epinephrine, dopamine. Component chemical substances are known to affect the setting behavior. In connection with these

I.

INTRODUCTION Characters as a form of local wisdom culture of Indonesia is currently experiencing a shift to western culture. Children today no longer much more familiar in Indonesian culture, such as manners of regionalism, regional language, and regional norms in Indonesia. Those problems led to the nation's character education back into an interesting topic of discussion in the year 2010. In this regard, the actual development of culture and national character proposed by the Government of the Unitary Republic of Indonesia (2010: 1) beginning with the 'Declaration of Education Culture and National Character' as a national movement in January 2010, but it also reaffirmed the President's speech at the National Education Day, May 2, 2010. The character education directed at students overall education jenjanng including a special needs child such as child with behaviour and emotional problems. With behaviour and emotional problems child has the characteristics of emotional and behavioral disorders either individual himself or social. AiniMahabbati (2013: 5) explains that children with behaviour and emotional problemsCompletely defined as children with emotional and behavioral disorders which include: 1)

   

53

achievement barriers below the average child of the same age. With behaviour and emotional problems child has a lazy tendency to learn and wants to do things his way. b. Social and Emotional Characteristics Social characteristics of children affected with behaviour and emotional problems emotional characteristics. Social character is usually characterized by causing interference to others, with traits: behavior is not accepted by the environment and usually violate the norm in family, school, peers, and community. Emotional character marked aggressiveness that cause disruption to his friend. c. Physical Characteristics andof Health Physical Characteristicsand Health is not much different with children in general, but if the child aggressiveness high impact on health patterns of eating disorders, sleep disorders, as well as the tendency slob (do not pay attention to health). 2. Physical Education Sport and Health HelmyFirmansyah (2009: 42) defines physical education sport and health activities of learners to improve motor skills and values of a function which includes cognitive, psychomotor, and affective, so that through these activities is expected that learners can grow and developing bodied. Keep in mind that physical education activity seen from three aspects: the cognitive, psychomotor, and affective. The earliest processes of these three aspects, namely cognitive aspects related to brain development in learners. Affective and psychomotor behavior originating motion on whether or not the performance of the brain through the nervous response. That is important for educators to know the performance system neurons (nerve cells) to increase motion psychomotor and affective behavior of learners. The general picture of the effect of exercise on behavior change described as follows:

problems the child's condition has elements ofwithbehaviour and emotional problemsdisability performancein the central nervous system, these disorders affect the aggressive tendencies or temperament. According to AndriKusumawardhani (2007: 124), some researchers in the field of neurobiology and psikofarmalogi perform depth approach on brain function, neurotransmitters, genetics, and neuroendocrine, concluded that serotoenergic and the region of the brain that trigger and directly involved in impulsive behavior and aggressive in patients with conduct disorder , In this regard PamujiSukoco (2016: 4) explains that the character education through traditional games, can serve as a stimulus capable of overcoming (conditioning) children with special needs including with behaviour and emotional problems in repairing of an aggressive nature, opposed, and other behavioral disorders. Based on the background exposure mentioned above, the authors wish to disclose / learning model theoretically examine the application of traditional games as a means of character education in the optimization of the child's behavior changes with behaviour and emotional problems. II. RESULT AND DISCUSSION 1.

Characteristics of Children With behaviour and emotional problems General characteristics of children with behaviour and emotional problems described by Hallahan, et al (2009: 4), that there are four dimensions: 1) Chaos behavior, 2) Often anxious and withdrawn, 3) Less mature, and 4) Aggressive in socializing. Nandiyah Abdullah (2013: 6) provides for the classification of children disruption of social behavior amongchildren, psychotic and neuroticchildren with emotional disorders and juvenile delinquents (delinquent).According to sources in the commission of social behavioral disorders classification can be divided into: (1) with behaviour and emotional problems emotion, which is an extreme deviation social behavior as a form of emotional distress, (2) social with behaviour and emotional problems, in socially deviant behavior as a form of abnormalities in social adjustment because it is functional. More detailed characteristics described IGAK Wardani, et al (2007: 31-32) that the characteristics of children with behaviour and emotional problems into three aspects, among others: a. Academic Characteristics With behaviour and emotional problems child behavior disorders implicated in learning

   

54

nervous system control of the body's biochemical communication. In this regard RachmahLaksmiAmbardini (2009: 68) explains that physical activity involving performance of nerves in the brain electrochemically. Along nerve fibers, the flow of electrical impulses run, due to differences in the levels of ions inside and outside the cell. In nerve synapses to communicate chemically through neurochemicals called neurotransmitters.

Figure 2. How Neural Communication RachmahLaksmiAmbardini (2009: 68) Ratey in RachmahLaksmiAmbardini (2009: 6-7) outlines threeThe main neurotransmitters associated with physical activity, as follows: a. Norepinephrine, works to improve mood, intrinsic motivation, and confidence, the perception, and learning the cellular level. It said acute or chronic physical exercise can improve brain norepinephrine. b. Serotonin, serves to set the mood, impulse control, raises confidence, against the toxic effects of stress hormone levels in height, and improve the learning process in a cellular level. c. Dopamine, physical exercise is said to affect the synthesis, release, and retrieval of dopamine. Dopamine increases for the duration of motor behavior. The greater the intensity, the greater the improvement. Regular exercise can increase the amount of the enzyme that makes dopamine and dopamine employment change in postsynapticmembrane.

Figure 1. Mechanism in General Physical Activity Behavior Change due Laurale Sherwood (2013, 128-136) In figure 1.above are generally described by Laurale Sherwood (2013, 128- 136), generally that physical activity (exercise) managed properly will lead to a series of mechanisms to influence the performance of a centralized organ. Any changes in organ performance can not be separated from the control of the central nervous system(CentralNervous System /CNS).The activity took place as an attempt by the body in response to stimuli as a result of physical activity (exercise). As a result, when the homeostatic system in this state under pressure then the body responds to stressors in the form of negative feedback by activating the mechanisms of other systems, for example, stimulates the secretion of several hormones that specifically have certain roles and functions to help maintain homeostatic condition of the body. In this regard, according to Lakshmi RachmahAmbardini (2009: 6-7) secretion of several hormones such as norepinephrine, serotonin, and dopamine supposed to influence the behavior of physiological changes such as hormone that can both improve mood (psychological). 3. The mechanism of communication between neurons Physical activity involves a series of mechanisms to systematically organ performance is closely linked to the mechanism of the central

4.

Traditional Games AgusMahendra (2007: 4), is a form of traditional games or sport games and activities that develop a habit of certain people. In the further development of traditional games often serve as a kind of game that has a genuine regional characteristics and tailored to local cultural traditions. HakimehAkbari, et al. (2009: 126), traditional games to effectively contribute to the formation of character in learning through manipulative and locomotor movement skills. In this regard, traditional games

   

55

"learning process is explicit from which students in a school community to understand, accept, and act on ethical values such as respect another, justice, civic virtue and citizenship, and responsibility for self and others. education character by Berkowitz and Hoppe (2009: 132) is a deliberate attempt to promote character development of students in the school, the purpose of planting the characters focus on values is to reduce behavioral problems and increase academic engagement in schools.

allegedly able to give a positive effect on improvement of character education in schools. In general, traditional games in Indonesia has begun to experience a shift in thegame. modernAs a result not too many traditional games that still persist or sustainable (awake) until now. Traditional games in Indonesia spread from Aceh to Papua Province. In particular, the traditional game in Yogyakarta and Central Java, suspected to be potentially sustainable (awake) in the community including, gasing, egrang, gobaksodor, patoklele, kasti, jamuran, dancublak-cublaksuweng. 5. Character Education Maya Bialik, et al (2015: 1) explains that the Center for the Study curricula in Boston dividing education in the 21st century into four dimensions of education, among others: a) Knowledge must be able to balance the subjectivity between traditional knowledge and modern, b) Skill has a correlation of cause and effect to knowledge, which skill shows thelevel of a person's knowledge, c) Character related to the behavior in life around. d) Metacognition as part of the process of self-reflection and learning in a good learning by building a threedimensional aspects.

Figure 4. Development of the value of character education in Indonesia Kemendikbud (2016: 5) 6. Discussion (Optimization of character Education through Traditional Games in physical Education Children With behaviour and emotional problems) physical education is divided into three domains, namely cognitive , psychomotor, and affective. the process of the earliest of the three cognitive domains are related to brain development, it is because the behavior of affective and psychomotor movement rooted in whether or not the response performance of the brain through neurons (nerve). The learning-based approach to learningneuro that occursdominant in the left hemisphere of learners. According to Dale H. Schunk (2012: 89), educational practiceapproachneuro learning include: problem-based learning, simulations and role-plays, active discussions, visual appearance, and a positive climate. The second domain is the domain of psychomotor movement through traditional games and the third is the affective domain through character education. In this regard, raiseslearning approach phsycology learning (going dibelahan right brain) where massive game activities traditionally associated with psychological aspects through character education. According Kemendikbud (2016: 5), character education curriculum in 2013 bring as: religious, nationalist, integrity, mutual cooperation, and self-contained. With behaviour and emotional problems child's learning should not only useapproach to

Figure 3. Dimensions of 21st Century Education Maya Bialik, et al (2015: 1) One-dimensional in the 21st century is that in jabarkankakater into six aspects. namely: a) Mindfulness, b) Curiosity, c) Courage, d) Resilience, e) Ethics, and f) Leadership Further Maya Bialik, et al. (2015: 1) describes that character education is about the acquisition and the strengthening of good (quality), values (ideals and concepts), and the capacity to make wise choices for life knowledgeable and developing societies (Maya Bialik, et al., 2015 : 1). Alex Agboola and Kaun Chen Tsai (2012: 164) explains that"theUSA Department ofEducation"defines the character education as

   

56

phsycologylearning,but withapproach. neuro learning It is known that the child's condition with behaviour and emotional problems interruption at the neuron, shown with their children's behavior disorders such as aggressive behavior, opposed, and other behavioral disorders. Therefore, the physical education of children with behaviour and emotional problems optimization can occur if there is a merger between the two approaches learning neuro learning via the left brainandphsycology learning through the right brain. In this regard, according to KushartantiWara (2013: 10) to these two learning that is grounded in the left hemisphere and the right is called the quantum learning.The picture-Based Optimization Traditional Games Character education in physical education as the Figure 5. Children With behaviour and emotional problems follows: Figure 6.ApplicationsModelof Quantum Learning (NeuroLearningandPsychologyLearnin g)through Traditional Games based Character Education In Children With behaviour and emotional problems III. Conclusion Optimization of learning takes place through the contribution of synergies between neuro learning with learning phsycologyproducelearning model quantum learning, Adaptation of these mechanisms can reduce behavioral disorders in children with behaviour and emotional problems controlled so that the child is more emotional and social side. In this regard it can be concluded that the optimization of the traditional game-based character education will give with behaviour and emotional problems Children behavior change through learning modelphysical education quantum learning. REFERENCES

Figure 5. Optimizing the Traditional GameBased Character educationin physical educationChildrenWithbehaviour and emotional problems Educationtraditional game character based on the physical education of children with behaviour and emotional problems can be applied throughmodel of quantum learningfrom compoundAmong models of neuro learning through learning stimulus in the left hemisphereandphsycology learning through stimulus right-brain learning. As for the more detailed applicationdescribed as Figure 6 below:

[1] [2] [3] [4]

[5] [6]

   

57

AgusMahendra (2007: 4). Kids games and RhythmicActivities: Traditional Games. AiniMahabbati. (2013). Children Ortodidacticwith behaviour and emotional problems.Class material. Yogyakarta: PLB FIPYogyakarta State University AkmarawitaKadir(2012). Against Stress Hormone changes.Class material. Surabaya: Faculty of Medicine, University of WijayaKusuma Surabaya AndriKusumawardhani (2007). The Neurobiology of Borderline Personality Disorder: Biological Approach in Impulsive and AggressiveBehavior.Maj. Of doctor.Indon, Volume: 57, No. 4. April 2007. Hlmn. 124. Alex Tsai Chen Agboola and Kaun. (2012). Bring Character Education into Classroom. European Journal Of Educational Research.Vol. 1, No. 2, Pages 163-170. Berkowitz, MW, & Hoppe, M. (2009).Character Education and GiftedChildren.High Ability Studies. Journal Of Educational No20 (Vol.2), 131-142.

[7] [8]

[9] [10] [11]

[12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]

[19]

Dale H. Schunk. (2012). Learning Theories: an Educational Perspective. Translation. Yogyakarta: Student Library HakimehAkbari, et al. (2009). The Effect of Traditional Games in Fundamental Motor Skill Development in 7-9 Year Old Boys. Iranian Journal of Pediatrics, Volume 19 (Number 2), June 2009, Pages: 126. Hallahan, et al. (2009).An Introduction to Exceptional LearnersSpecial Educational 11th.Boston: Allyn& Bacon. IGAK Wardani, et al. (2007).Introduction to Special Education. Bandung: UPI Gapin Jennifer I., et al (2011).The Physical Activity ff Effects on Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder Symptoms: Theevidence.Journal of Preventive Medicine. Vol. 52.No. 70. Pages 1-8 Kemendikbud. (2016). Strengthening Basic Concept of CharacterEducation.Jakarta: Ministry of Education and Culture. Laurale Sherwood (2013). Introduction to HumanPhysiology.Translation. Jakarta: EGC Medical Book Maya Bialik, et al. (2015).Character Education for the 21st Century: What Should Students Learn?, Boston: Massachusetts. Nandiyah Abdullah. (2013). Know Children with Special Needs. Journal MagistraNo. 86 Th. XXV December 2013. 6.Hlmn. PamujiSukoco (2016). Development of Traditional Games in Learning Physical Education.Journal Penjas Indonesia.Vol. 12 No. 1.Hlmn. 4 The Government of the Republic of Indonesia. 2010. The National Policy on Development of National Character Year 2010-2025. Jakarta. LaksmiRachmahAmbardini. (2009). Physical Education and Academic Achievement: Review of Neuroscience. Journal of Physical Education Indonesia. Volume 6, No. 1, April 2009. Hlmn.68 WaraKushartanti. (2013). Application development of neuroscience in Learning Kindergarten.Journal Medikora.Volume 7, No. 2. April 2013. Hlmn 10.

   

58

THE DEVELOPMENT OF NATIONALITY EDUCATION MODEL FOR CROSS-CULTURAL YOUTH Komarudin, Ubedilah, dan Syaifudin Faculty of Social Sciences, Universitas Negeri Jakarta, Jl. Rawamangun Muka, Jakarta, 13220, Indonesia email: [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] abstract: The study is intended to uncover an applicative nationality education model effectively particularly for cross-cultural youth. In terms of methodology, this study used methodological research and development. The place is located in DKI Jakarta which last for 6 months (April to September 2015). The result reveals that nationality education model which has been existed has not been managed systematically, integrated and contextual. As such, an alternative model is looking forward. The nationality education model which is decided by this research is Score-A. Score-A means acronym from spatial awareness (sa); cultural awareness (ca); organization awareness (oa); religion awareness (ra); economic awareness (ea). These main five points become are models that can be translated basic nationality knowledge. Score-A points out on three fundamental sciences which are ontology, epistemology and axiology also it describes an important meaning of nationality which is developed contextually, creative, and reflexive which can grow nationality awareness. Keywords: model development, nationality education, youth, cross-culture. -social), the vertical conflict (politics) as well as separatist movements that occurred after 1998. Some of these reforms is the conflict in Sambas 1999 (Mufid, 2001) and another conflict in Sampit happened since February 18 until early March 2001 (Tomagola, 2002). The conflict in Ambon occurred in several periods: the first, from January to April 1999; the second, from July to December 1999; and the third, from April 2000 to 2002 (Trijono, 2002) and the last on 24 April 2004 during the parade to commemorate the RMS which involve support groups and pro Homeland. The conflict in Poso riots occurred in recent times, the first on December 24, 1998, the second on 16 April 2000 and the third on May 16, 2000 (Moehtadi, 2002) and the sequence of events that occurred until recently. Separatist movement that appears until now has not been completed and one of movement is happening in Papua by the Free Papua Movement (OPM). This movement is fluctuating which is still alarming. The separatist movement that was formally concluded (based on the Helsinki agreement), but latently alarming is what happened in Aceh conducted by the Free Aceh Movement (GAM). Separatist movements on a small scale and temporary due to the thickening of ethnic consciousness (ethnicity) and locality had also occurred in this country, as was the case in South Sulawesi (1999), Riau (1999), even East Java and Madura (2001). Separatism phenomenon was triggered by a constellation of contemporary national politics associated with supporting efforts to support the president or presidential candidate, except Riau, which is driven more by economic factors. Various phenomena indicate dire consequences to the people of Indonesia. The poll by Compass (2002) has revealed Loosening strengthening national ties. The poll showed that nationhood

I. INTRODUCTION The nationality matter for the Indonesian is a problem that was never be solved. The spirit and sense of nationalism peak to the highest point, as shown in the momentum of National Awakening (1908), the Youth Pledge (1928) and the Declaration of Independence (1945). However, at other times it goes down to the point which is very the critical and alarming, even it threatens the disintegration of the nation as seen from the phenomenon of rebellion in these areas in the 50s to early 60s and the rise of separatist conflict and postreform movement of 1998. It this is understandable, because the sense of nationality or nationalism is not permanent, but it is highly dependent on the surrounding conditions. Shabir Ahmed and Abid Karim (1997) have stated that: "... One of the drawbacks of sense of nationhood is its inability to bring people together permanently. It is temporary, and will only appear when there is a threat from outsiders to the existence of the community ". In addition to the views and Karim Ahmed, Hans J. Morgenthau (1997) has highlighted: "The greater the stability of society and a secure feeling of community members, the lesser the possibility for collective emotion to seek distribution in the sense of nationality are that is aggressive, or vice versa." From the two views, it is clear that sense of nationality will flourish when internal and external conditions are conducive to the growth of national consciousness, and vice versa. Related ups and downs sense of nationality, empirically, many contemporary events in the archipelago which have showed symptoms of decline in a sense of nationhood that lead to the disintegration of the nation. It can be seen, both in horizontal conflict (communal

59

was rated by 71% of respondents, weakened. A sense of unity and community commitment to defend the territorial integrity is also considered by most respondents have weakened. Correspondingly, Arbi Sanit in a discussion organized by DPP KNPI on December 31st, 2004 (Media Indonesia, 2004) stated that the construction of Indonesian nationality fragile. Indonesia's national spirit has been owned since 1908, but has not yet become a strong capital and still fragile. He incorporated that although the independence of Indonesia has lasted 60 years, but it has not had a start-up capital as a result of the concept of national state built by the regime crushed replaced by another regime. Case like this nationality can be seen from the horizontal conflicts that occur, such as fighting between communities in the Milky due to a trivial matter that later resulted in two young men died (Kompas, 2013). Apart from these, according to Minister of Social Affairs of the Republic of Indonesia, Salim Segaf Aljufri has said that the problems of regional divisions, equality, the local elections as well as injustices of the law are the causes of the current conflict. He also mentioned that in 2012 there has been a 2883 conflict occurred in Indonesia (Sindo, 2013). Recent phenomenon that shows silting nationality is expressed by Equals Institute through its annual report. The report has revealed symptoms of silting nationality in Indonesian society as intolerant attitude of society, strengthening of identity politics, weakening the institutional capacity and political destroying legitimation and poor alignments political elite to the public (Equivalent Institute, 2008). The national question was also a hot issue in the life of the nation. This is as highlighted by Sutrisno (2004), that the national question could be substantial in living up to the principles of nationalism and national life. This condition is very worrying and therefore requires efforts to develop and organize better nationality. For Indonesia which is very pluralistic and multicultural, national ties are certainly imperative and vital. Without a strong national tie, the Indonesian nation will be fragmented just like the Soviet Union or Yugoslavia. As such, managed coaching nationality, systematically and consistently are needed to be carried out continuously. Concerted effort to foster real nationality has been done since the old order era to the new order. In the new order era the government ever imposed Upgrading P-4 as political education, in which it contained elements of cultivation of a sense of nationhood. However, this pattern failed because it is more verbalistic and directed to the perpetuation of the New Order regime. Therefore, it is necessary to discover another model that is more focused on the effort to plant the national values that can foster a sense of national spirit for the people of Indonesia, especially for the youth through the elaborative and comprehensive studies. An effort to assess the national educational model has been started by the researchers since 2004 when a researcher had worked in Bappenas through consolidation of forms of national bondage. Then it is proceed with the study of a more focused coaching model to examine national ties among the general public in 2007 and among the youth in 2008. The culmination of a series of such studies is on the study who intended to find a national education model with various strategies and supporting materials (curriculum,

teaching materials, and the evaluation model). This is important because national education is an instrument of planting the ideology of nationalism. In terms of Smith (2003) as an ideology, there are three main objectives the development of a sense of nationality / nationalism, namely: national autonomy, national unity and national identity. In the nationalist view, a nation cannot go on without all three components in sufficient degree. Thus as an ideology, a sense of nationality / nationalism serves as a "movement" to achieve and maintain ideological autonomy, unity and identity for a population which the number of its members is determined to establish a nation that is an actual or potential nation (Mufid, 2001). II. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY The method used in this study is research and development. Research and development is a method used to produce a specific product and examines the effectiveness of these products (Sugiyono, 2006: 407) or the steps to develop a new product or improve existing products (Sukmadinata, 2006: 164). The data collection is done by reviewing the relevant literature, review historical documents (audio-visual recording) in the national archives and audio-visual document contemporary events in the TV media as well as interviews with experts, practitioners and the training participant to find the factual model. The instrument used is the documentary record, interview guides, and audio-visual recorder. Meanwhile, the data analysis is undertaken in two ways, namely the qualitative and quantitative analysis. III. DISCUSSION 1. Theoretical and empirical discussion and national education The survival of a nation is determined by the values of nationality possessed by every citizen. Similarly, the Indonesian nation has become a necessity to understand and implement the national values in everyday life. This is imperative since it is a guide of social change which is more rapidly. As a form of concern and responsibility for the development of the concept of nationalism, a wide range of theoretical studies carried out to formulate appropriate national education model. For example Nuraini Asriati study (2013) on "Development of National School Model Secondary Education in Remote Areas, Disadvantaged, and Border Outer West Kalimantan - Sarawak Malaysia" emphasizes the importance of the special education services and empowerment for people in the region of 3T. The substance of education is directed to the material of (1) Living history; (2) Education effort values; (3) Educational life skill; (4) The character education; (5) entrepreneurship education; (6) Education State defense; and (7) Local content. Research Kharis Triyanto Ragin (2015) focuses on "Design-Based National Development Training Insights based on participative in Border Region". In the study, Triyanto explained the importance of the training, empowerment, and mentoring in education nationality for frontier society. Meanwhile, the national educational content provided includes: (1) The establishment of the atmosphere; (2) Development of a participatory motivation; (3) Policy development national awareness on the location / region in

60

struggle on the younger generation; and (5) Outbound. In the Scout Movement, the substance tent nationality, which are: 3 1) National Seminar 2) Night Nationality 3) Fire and Game Appearance Typical Each Region 4) Deliberation between plan 5) Activity of community development (Tree Planting and help manufacture the road) 6) Ship Visits to Dewaruci and Monjaya 7) Outbound Meanwhile, the national education development initiated by civil society is done by NGO, SatuNama that cooperates with Konrad Adenaeur Stiftung. The program was named Civic Education for Future Indonesian Leaders (CEFIL), with the goal of creating future leaders (leaders of NGOs and the general public). The substance of the training delivered includes three levels. See Table 1. Tabel 1. Training substance of CEFIL Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

the transmigration border area; (4) Introduction to the concept of nationalism; (5) The importance of national awareness; (6) secure border areas; (7) Defending countries and implementation of wasbang as part of the rights and obligations of citizens for National Defence in the border areas; and (8) The preparation of an action plan. In contrast to Asriati (2013) and Triyanto (2015) which focuses on community setting border region (3T), the study AM. Rikza Chamami (2015) on national education focuses on the context of religious institutions, namely pesantren. Chamami (2015) assess the importance of "Pesantren national paradigm", where the lodge / hostel to be a locus educationis forging national vision. Through this national paradigm boarding school, students are taught about the dimensions of a character; pattern of togetherness and cooperation strategies; and the dimensions of well-being. Empirically, government agencies and civil society, as well as fostering national education as practiced by the Indonesian National Resilience Institute, through the Deputy Stabilization Values Nationality, LAN RI, Kemenpora, Ministry of Social Affairs, the Scout Movement, and the One Nama-Konrad Adenauer Stiftung. National education developed by the National Resilience Institute and RI LAN relies on methods of training and education. National educational content offered material surrounding the Defense of Pancasila, the 1945 Constitution, the Republic of Indonesia, and Unity in Diversity. Four such material in line with the educational methods listed in the Regulation of the Minister of Home Affairs Number 71 Year 2012 on Guidelines for the National Education Insights. While LAN RI emphasis on material (1) The concept and the notion of the state and nation; (2) Insights nationalities and national integration; (3) The values of struggle, character building, and the resilience of the nation; and (4) Socio-cultural and national insight as a national force. 1 For enhancing the concept of nationalism, Kemenpora conducting coaching adolescents and youth through the Youth Jamboree Indonesia-Bhakti Youth and InterProvincial Youth Ship Archipelago (KPN) / Lintas`Nusantara Adolescent and Youth Maritime (LNRPB). Jamboree youth camp with participants focusing on a very limited, in each municipality / city just 2 people. Meanwhile, KPN / LNRPB focus on the cruise. By doing shipping is expected to grow (1) Increasing youth love of the homeland; (2) Increased national awareness and nationalism youth; (3) Increased maritime value among the youth; (4) Development of an entrepreneurial spirit and the maritime industry among the youth; and (5) Improvement of fraternity and cooperation among the youth. 2 Ministry of Social Affairs and the Scout Movement provide guidance in national education through national camp approach. Substance camp initiated nationality by Ministrt of Social Affairs emphasize the importance of (1) Increased vigilance younger generation to counteract negative ris; (2) Prevention of drug abuse by young people; (3) Effect overcome pornography; (4) Increasing the value of

1. Leadership 2. Universal Values (HAM, Democracy, Gender Sensitivity, Civil Society, Globalization) 3. Social analysis 4. Management of conflict 5. Media 6. Negotiation strategy

1. Human right, Human dignity, Gender justice, and constitution commitment. 2. Economic system and global geopolitics. 3. Gross National Happiness (GNH) 4. Multicultural society 5. Negotiation and lobying Source: Satu Nama dan Konrad Adenauer Stiftung, 2013. Based on theoretical and empirical studies, there are some important notes about the development of national education model in between, first, the absence of an integrated national education model, systemic, and contextual as outlined in the curriculum. Second, the content / material presented are still partial, relatively monotonous and static. The survey showed that as many as 80% respondent matter states not integrated activities and 75% said outbound material is not integrated with the material activity. 4 Third, the national education model is still a mere program and ceremonial. Fourth, the design of aircraft has not been targeted and sustainable. The problem can be seen from the statement as much as 60% of respondents stating that there were no follow-up activities. 5 Fifth, in terms of methodology, either the medium used methods of delivery or materials are less effective, creative, and hard on the evaluation. 3

1. Managing conflict 2. Ecology justice 3. Democratic economic 4. Leadership character needed by Indonesian

Diolah dari data lapangan, 14 Juli 2015 Survei, 04 Juli – 16 Agustus, 2015. 5 Ibid.

1

4

Penelusuran literatur dan diolah dari data lapangan, 9 Juli 2015. 2 Diolah dari data lapangan, 9-12 Juli 2015.

61

From here, the authors raise the idea of national education model that can answer these five problems, through the national education model named "Score-A". National education which is based on the "five core insight" which is spatial awareness (SA); cultural awareness (ca); awareness organization (oa); religion awareness (ra); economic awareness (ea). 2. The model of nationality education offered by : ScoreA Score-A is an acronym of spatial awareness (SA); cultural awareness (ca); awareness organization (oa); religion awareness (ra); economic awareness (ea). These five core insights into models that can translate basis of our national vision. This model is a manifestation of peak consciousness that can generate a variety of reflective and creative experience on nationality rooted Indonesian deepest identity.

assumption, and expectations that organize and integrate a group of people who work together¬-.Larissa A. Grunig, et al, 2002). Reflections on the understanding of the organization, which is highly critical of unity expressed by Soekarno in stanzas of his poem following: “Dentamnya revolusi, jang kadang-kadang berkumandang pekik sorak, kadang-kadang bersuara djerit-pahit, sebagai satu keseluruhan kita dengarkan sebagai satu njanjian, satu simfoni, satu gita, laksana dentumnja gelombang samudera jang bergelora pukulmemukul membanting di pantai, kita dengarkan sebagai satu gita kepada Tuhan jang amat dahsjat (Soekarno, Panca Azimat Jilid 1, 2014). The concept of religious intelligence, is a continuation of spiritual intelligence that have been discussed by Zohar and Marshall (2000). If spiritual intelligence based solely on the meaning of divinity, the religious intelligence is an implementation or embodiment of the meaning. That is, not just know, but the practicing of religion. This is the essence of religious intelligence. Eventually, Score-A concept compounded of the contribution of economic intelligence taken from W. J. Booth thought in his article titled On the Idea of Moral Economy, 1994. hinging on the concept of intelligence economic writings encourage someone to promote economic justice. This is the economic basis of moral or substantive. morality-substantive economic base is the main foundation of the national economy. This base was built by three things, namely, the power of social capital, ethics of solidarity and economic principles of prophetic. The principle of moralitybased economy substantive, dealing with the economic logic of rationality-formalistic in terms of Western culture relying on the benefit and cost; capitalism ethic, and Economic liberalism. 3. Framework model a. Curriculum National education model curriculum Score-A refers to the Minister Regulation Number 71 Year of 2012 on Guidelines for the National Education Insights and elaboration model that is revealed by the researchers. As a model, the national curriculum Score-A considering three basic philosophies of science, namely the ontological, epistemological and axiological. First, ontologically score-A is a national education model integrated, systemic, and contextual. Content / material presented elaborate methods, media, and critical approach to appear comprehension, reflection, and creative moments of the nation or homeland. This creative moments are certainly discovered from the translation Score-A (spatial, cultural, organization, religion, and economic), Indonesia. Second, Score-A models epistemologically studied through the concept of 5 W + 1 H (What, Where, Why, Who, What and How) that the relationship between the five core national vision within the framework of all Indonesia's. Third, in axiological, it is clear that this model is an alternative to existing models that have not been structured, systemic and contextual in conducting training and education nationality. Score-q points out residents learning to love the homeland, spatial awareness of Indonesian, culture of Indonesian, unity of Indonesian organizations, Indonesian

Spatial awareness

Main nationality knowledge

Economic awareness

Religion awareness

Cultural awareness

Organization awareness

Picture 1. Model Score-A (source: conceptualized by authors, 2015). Score Model-A is generated by social scientists, such as, the concept of spatial awareness is taken from Gadner (2003), Shearer (2004), Giaquinto (2007), and Zielniec (2007). According to them that spatial intelligence led to the ability to analyze objects and spaces that represent the world's imagination. Zielniec, (2007) particularly states that the spatial is social construction in which explains the intensity and meaning in social interaction intensive and dialectical in society. According to him, Spatial creates a relationship between knowledge and power. In the context of Indonesia's knowledge and power relations connecting in the concept of our national space as the archipelago state. The concept of cultural awareness is taken of Soon Ang and Linn Van Dyne (2008), Afred Binet (in Sternberg, 1996) and Hilmar Farid (2014). According to Ang and Dyne intercultural engagement to achieve the best result of the fusion between cultures is very important. Meanwhile, according to Farid, culture is not static, but rather a product of the history of the dynamic in the social and cultural space that is concrete. In addition to this, then for Binet, cultural understanding can be learned by at least three aspects which are direction, adaptation, and criticism. Meanwhile, the concept of organizational intelligence is a manifestation that leads to unity of action and goals / objectives. In the terminology of unity there is always a totality of values, symbols, meanings, assumptions, and expectations that are capable of organizing a group of people to work together ("the sum total of shared values, symbols, meaning, beliefs,

62

religious, and Indonesian economic/ economy-economic 4. Raise the idea of a community development model or design a national paradigm cross-cultural version of the substantive of Pancasila.The aim of the national education younger generation. curriculum model of score-A in general is to enhance Meanwhile, the method used is a combination, awareness of nationality and confirmation of national namely speach are supported by media documentaries, commitment for trainee / young cross-cultural order in games, meta cards, critical analysis, cross experience, case everyday life contributed significantly to knit unity of the studies, the scriptorium, simulations, group work, plenary, nation. Meanwhile, the specific objectives include: 1. Provide knowledge and understanding of nationality. and FGD. The approach relying on the resources-based 2. Identify the problems and seek solutions to the problems learning, contextual learning, and work-based learning. of nationalities present. Through this approach the three participants can actively 3. Change the mindset, behavior, and awareness of the participate in each term activity. participants on the importance of its involvement in the development process. Tabel 2. Model of Education Training Curriculum ACTIVITY MATERIAL METHOD AND MEDIA MARKING TIME A. INTRODUCTION 60 minutes 1. Introduction of Participants know and  Speech understand the purpose and exercise  Games objective of national awareness training 2. Introduction  The creation of Meta card Antusiasm and level interaction, of participat communication, activities participation and atmosphere of The Full of familiarity Pleno 3. Contract training  Identification of goals, The willingness of activities expectations, and followthe participants up training activities  Mutually agreed rules signed a contract governing the training to activities complete. B. INSIGHT OF NATIONALITY AND NATIONAL DEVELOPMENT 1. Insight dynamics  Participants understand Insight Dynamics of 90 minutes  Short movie Nationality the dynamics of the Indonesian  Critical analysis Indonesia development of Nationality:  Cross Experience Indonesian nationhood - What does it based on the aspect of mean by spatial, cultural, national insight? organizational, religious, - How the and economic. process of  Analyze the dynamics of development of contemporary Indonesian Indonesian national awareness nationality? - How the orientation and paradigm development of nationality nowadays? - What are the matters appeared in last decade?  Showing and analyzing - Spatial analysis 90 minutes 2. Problems of  Participants understand the main roots of short movie contemporary - Cultural contemporary problems  Game star power nationality analysis of nationality  Critical analysis - Organization  Participants were able to understanding

63



3. Conflict management and institutional arrangements of society

  

4. National Social Development Perspective

 



C. STRENGTHENING COMMUNITY MENTORING SKILLS 1. Empowering and educating people

2. organizing community

3. Build

identify a cause of conflict nationality Participants were able to identify the reality that supports the integration of a nation Participants were able to map the conflict in the community Participants are able to provide a solution to the conflict in the community Participants are able to manage conflict with either Participants can determine the target communities program Participants can formulate community development strategy based on five core concept of nationalism (Score A) Participants are able to design the structure of a harmonious society and integrity

 Participants were able to translate the design and integral development of harmonious society  Participants are able to socialize and integrative design harmonious society  Participants were able to develop a harmonious and integral design community through a program of "national schools" for the community  Participants are able to analyze the challenges and the future of society harmonious and integral design  Participants were able to do community organizing activities  Participants can identify / analysis of the potential and role of stakeholders to create a harmonious society and integrative design  Participants are able to

-

Religious understanding Economic understanding

 critical analysis  Brainstorming through problem tree  Outbound (game conflict and team building)

-

Tree conflicts and identify solutions for problems

180 minutes

 Cross Experience  Simulation design community

Analyze and design a harmonious society and integrative

120 minutes

 Cross experience  Scriptorium  FGD

Stages empowerment and educating the public harmonious integrative

90 minutes

 Contextual learning

10 step organizing harmonious and integral community

90 minutes

 Contextual learning

64

120

Communication and Cooperation with Society

D. NATIONALITY WORKSHOP 1. Cross-Cultural Youth Engagement Strategy in a national paradigm of national development

2. Standard ratings developing national awareness program 3. Coaching Program and the National Pledge

E. EVALUATION OF TRAINING 1. Test of training result 2. Assessment management training

F. FOLLOW UP OF TRAINING

develop their intense communication with the public  Participants are able to encourage cooperation with the community  Participants were able to formulate the type of activity as the entry point of the development of national awareness  Participants were able to formulate an implementation strategy development program effective national awareness

minutes

 Group work  Group presentation  Plenary

 Participants know the techniques and aspects in the assessment of the development of national awareness program  Participants are able to design and interpret the variety of coaching programs national vision  Participants are able to choose and design the priority needs of national awareness training programs to communities in the region  Participants are able to bind themselves through national pledge  Participants were able to review the results of which have been discussed in training  Obtained ratings from participants on the effectiveness of the training  Re-charge training  Establishing alumni association  Creating a communication among alumni

     

Group work Group presentation Plenary

180 minutes

Group work Group presentation Plenary Moment of ceremonial

180 minutes

Assignments

of participation, teamwork, passion / enthusiasm Followup of the national educational training activities include the establishment of the Alumni Association and launching group of FB / WA as a medium of communication and information between members of alumni associations.

b.

180 minutes

60 minutes

Materials National education model of teaching materials Score-A mainly introduces the participants with the basic topics of the five core national awareness both in terms of knowledge, attitudes, and skills. These topics are expected to provide a framework on how generations of Indonesia in the

65

future will be developed, either individually, together, or in the training-level at the next level. In the process of training and education model of Score-A main aim is the process of internalization or processing of inner attitudes, spirituality, and the mentality of the participants, so that after the training they feel ready physically-mind to play the role as the future of Indonesia. For the opportunity to reflect, personal processing, and sharing get a portion of adequate teaching materials and motode presented. Inputs delivered lighter role as the inner processing, not merely to increase knowledge and insight as in previous training. Tabel 3. Teaching Material grating National Education Model Score-A Aspect Description Competency Understand, reflect and display the creative moment itself in accordance with the five core national vision of "Score A" Content 1. Insight Dynamics Nationality of Indonesia 2. Problem of Nationality and Conflict Management 3. Team Building 4. Social Development 5. Making Proposals Social Development Society 6. Workshop Nationality: Present Proposals Social Development Society 7. Pledge Nationality Approaching Constructivist-critical: building awareness of the importance of national paradigm values in an effort to strengthen the sovereignty of self, family, community and nation. Method documentaries, games, meta cards, critical analysis, cross experience, case studies, the scriptorium, simulations, group work, plenary, and FGD. The approach relying on the resources-based learning, contextual learning, and workbased learning. Ssources: Conceptualization by researcheri, 2015. Systematization of teaching materials or training modules relies on the implementing of score-A. Applying is certainly rooted to the three basic principles, namely: First, the principle of ethical-spiritual. Second, the principle of nationality, namely: enforcement of the four pillars of nationality, which consists of Pancasila, the 1945 Constitution, the Republic of Indonesia and Diversity. Point of nationality is becoming very important, because after this nation must necessarily exist in the middle of the association of nations. And third, the 1945 Constitution of the 1945 Constitution is the foundation of national operations can guarantee against political subdivision, nationality, politics and governance suitable for Indonesia. Typical of Indonesian Constitution should also be the basis for the implementation of state and government.

c.

Model Evaluasi To measure the success of the model score-A, then made the evaluation guidelines that have been reviewed and adapted to the conception of the model. The evaluation includes an evaluation of the process and results. Evaluation process to capture and measure the level, tolerance, the resulting work and leadership as measured through checklists / observation sheet and product ratings. Evaluation of the results to gauge their understanding and attitudes nationalities formed, as well as the responsibilities of nationhood, as measured by the test essay, case analysis, and self-projection. Tabel 5. Example of model Score-A shape checklist/ sheet observation MARK No ASPECT 1 2 3 4 1 The ability to look at things another viewpoint 2 Sensitivity keen to see a form and spatial detail 3 The ability to interpret what is implied behind pictures, paintings / photos and maps 4 The ability to re-create the visual aspect of the experience. 5 The ability to transform and modifications to the initial perception of what he saw 6 Engagement between cultures in order to achieve the best result of the fusion between cultures 7 Ability requires its own culture 8 Willingness to popularize the other cultures 9 The ability to transfer experience from one culture to another 10 The ability to build intercultural communication, which involves communication activities and the time of the meeting between cultures 11 The ability to predict what will happen in the process of interaction, both of which will be others and how to behave himself 12 The ability to direct attention and behave in cross-cultural situations 13 Courage to place ourselves in an action against another culture, verbal and nonverbal 14 The ability to capture and handle everything thoroughly with attention to inter-relationships with one another 15 Ability to clarify personal vision in the association of fellow children of the nation 16 The ability to be objective in addressing the differences 17 Capabilities describe together about the future to be achieved as a nation 17 The ability to combine and develop the capacity of a society to achieve the desired ideals as a nation

66

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Farid, Hilmar. 2014. Arus Balik Kebudayaan: Sejarah sebagai Kritik. Pidato Budayaan di Dewan Kesenian Jakarta, dalam http://hilmarfarid.com/wp/arus-balik-kebudayaan-sejarah-sebagaikritik/. Gardner, Howard. 2003. Multiple Intelligences: Kecerdasan Majemuk Teori dalam Praktek. Batam: Inter Aksara. Giaquinto. 2007. Visual Thinking in Mathematics An epistemological study. New York: Oxford University Press. Grunig, Larissa A. and David M. Dozier. 2002. Excellent Public Relations and Effective Organizations: A Study of Communication Management in Three Countries, New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc., Publishers. Kemendagri. 2012. “Peraturan Menteri dalam Negeri Republik Indonesia Nomor 71 Tahun 2012 tentang Pedoman Pendidikan Wawasan Kebangsaan” dalam http://www.unipdu.ac.id/index.php/artikel/download_item/62permen_no.71-2012.doc. Komarudin. 2007. “Ikatan Kebangsaan dan Pembinaannya: Studi di Kalangan Masyarakat Umum di DKI Jakarta”. Laporan Penelitian. Jakarta: Lembaga Penelitian Universitas Negeri Jakarta. _____________ 2008. “Ikatan Kebangsaan dan Pembinaannya: Studi Di Kalangan Masyarakat Umum di DKI Jakarta”, Laporan Penelitian. Jakarta: Fakultas Ilmu Sosial Universitas Negeri Jakarta. Kompas. Konflik di Bima Pecah. September, 2013. Mufid, Ahmad Syafii. 2001. Dialog Agama dan Kebangsaan. Jakarta: Zikrul hakim. Moehtadi, Fathoni. “Konflik Poso: Suatu Anatomi”, dalam Jurnal Dinamika Masyarakat, Vol. 1 No. 1 Juli 2002. Morgenthau, Hans J. 1997. Politik Antar Bangsa, terjemahan. Jakarta: Bina Cipta. Sanit, Arby. “Konstruksi Kebangsaan Indonesia Rapuh” dalam Media Indonesia, edisi 31 Desember 2004. Setara Institute. 2008. Kebebasan Beragama di Indonesia. Laporan Penelitian. Jakarta: Wahid Institute, Setara Institute, dan CRSCUGM. Shearer, C.B. 2004. Multiple Intelligences After 20 Years. Teachers College Record, 106 (1), 2 -16. Sindo. 2.883 Konflik Terjadi di Indonesia Tahun 2012. September 2013. Smith, Anthony D. 2003. Nasionalisme, Teori, Ideologi, Sejarah, Jakarta: Erlangga. Soekarno. 2014. Panca Azimat Jilid 1. Jakarta: Pustaka Populer Gramedia. Sternberg, R.J. 1996. Successful Intelegence, How Practical and Creative Intelligence Determine Success in Life. New York: Plume Book. Sugiyono. (2006). Metode Penelitian Pendidikan: Pendekatan Kauntitatif, Kualitatif, dan R&D, Bandung: Penerbit Alfabeta. Sukmadinata, Nana Syaodih. (2006). Metode Penelitian Pendidikan, Bandung: Penerbit Kerjasama PPs UPI dan Remaja Rosdakarya. Sutrisno, Mudji. (2004). Ide – Ide Pencerahan. Jakarta: Obor. Tomagola, Tamrin Amal. “Bencana Sampit”, dalam Jurnal Dinamika Masyarakat, Vol. 1 No. 1 Juli 2002. Trijono, Lambang. “Prospek Perdamaian di Ambon”, dalam Jurnal Dinamika Masyarakat, Vol. 1 No. 1 Juli 2002. Triyanto, Kharis Ragil. 2015. Merancang Pelatihan Pengembangan Wawasan Kebangsaan Berbasis Partisipasif di Daerah Perbatasan. Denpasar: UPT-P Balatrans. Zielniec, Andrezej. 2007. Space and Social Theory. London: Sage Publication. Zohar, Danah dan Ian Marshall. 2000. Spiritual Intellegence the Ultimate Intelligence. London: Bloomsbury Publising Plc.

Awareness of practicing religion The realization that every person has the right to practice his religion Awareness of admitting the existence of freedom in the exercise of religiosity The practice of religion in daily life in relation to others. Ability to set an example in the practice of religion in the midst of diversity. Awareness of the diversity in religion The realization that natural resources must be used wisely The realization that every person have the right to obtain the same economic life better fairly. The ability to pour fresh ideas for building an economy that can fulfill the lives of many people in social justice

IV. CONCLUSION Model-A national education score represents five cores of intelligence to deliver to the understanding and awareness of nationality. Through the curriculum, teaching materials, and evaluation model presented by systemic, integrated and contextual, we delivered on alternative methods of implementing the national vision. From here, is expected to be growing up ideals of nationalism, patriotism, grounded attitude of defending the country and root among the younger generation of cross-cultural. Governmental institutions, civil society, and especially educational institutions is an important engine that can disseminate and implement these national education model. BIBLIOGRAPHY Ahmed, Shabir dan Abid Karim. 1997. Akar Nasionalisme di Dunia Islam, Bangil: Al-Izzah Press. Anonim. 2013. Civic Education for Future Indonesian Leaders (CEFIL). Yogyakarta: Satu Nama dan Konrad Adenauer Stiftung. Ang, Soon., and Dyne, Linn Van., “Conceptualization of Cultural Intelligence: Definition, Distinctiveness and Nomological Network, in Soon Ang, Linn Van Dyne, M.E (Edited). 2008. 2008. Handbook of Cultural Intelligence: Theory, Measurement and Applications. Armonk, NY: Sharpe.Inc. Asriati, Nuraini. 2013. “Pengembangan Model Pendidikan Menengah “Sekolah Kebangsaan” di Daerah Terpencil, Tertinggal, Terluar dan Perbatasan Kalimantan Barat-Serawak Malaysia”, dalam Prosiding Seminar Nasional 2013 Menuju Masyarakat Madani dan Lestari. Booth, William James “On the Idea of the Moral Economy, in The American Political Science Review, Vol. 88, No. 3 (Sep., 1994), pp. 653-667. Chamami, M. Rikza. 2015. “Pesantren Berwawasan Kebangsaan”, dalam Jateng Pos, edisi Kamis, 27 Maret 2015.

67

Teaching Learning (Pedagogy) Model of English Science Nasori Efendi1) 1)

Wiralodra University

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. The international program of science education has an important role in educating prospective science teachers who have international standards of competence of science teachers. To achieve this role a comprehensive and longitudinal study needs to be done. However, in this study the researcher focuses the study only to find the solutions on the following two questions: (1) How is the teaching learning model of English science done? and (2) Do science students have good academic profile, supported literacy activities, communicative competence, as well as adequate teaching skills to teach English science? Through videotaped classroom observation and distribution of questionnaires, teaching learning model of English science describes some important things in English teaching learning of science for prospective science teachers in Indonesia. Keywords: Teaching learning model, English science language education and science education. Moreover, this study can be valuable information to the language and science teachers and lecturers of science education, stakeholders/educational institutions, and the government especially the Ministry of National Education to provide policies and regulations in determining standardized of language and science education for most Indonesian students.

I. INTRODUCTION Teaching learning English science in science classroom in the empirical practice situations frequently faces some troubles for many students and teachers or even young English lecturers, since the teaching learning of English in this case, still dominate a general English, or a learning of grammar, in conventional ways. While, the need of science students in learning English tends to mastering English science in a proper communicative way. In the process of learning English science text for example, most science students are faced by the difficulties in finding the meaning of scientific terms and vocabularies both in reading and writing skills, let alone in speaking skills. In addition, the knowledge of science and their English communicative competences are limited. This condition is similarly resulted by their lack of variety of teaching learning model in teaching English science. In observing teaching learning of English science, the researcher assumes that English science will give a significant contribution to the student’s understanding of science knowledge and their communicative competence through reading many sources of English scientific texts in the process of teaching learning in the classroom.

II.

METHODS

The purposes of this research are: (1) to know the model of teaching learning English science is practiced; (2) to describe and find out the science students’ academic profiles, supported literacy activities, English communicative competence, and prepared-skills to teaching and learning English science. A. Research Method and Procedure of Research The research method used in this research is a descriptive qualitative case study research method. A qualitative research as mentioned by Magilvy [1] is inquiry in the natural setting, an exploratory study of experience-as-lived and everyday life in the world. The goal of a qualitative study is "to produce a rich description and in-depth understanding of the phenomenon of interest, the cultural or lived experience of people in natural settings" (p. 123). While, case study summarized by Stake (as cited in Denzim) [2] is a part of scientific methodology, but its purpose is not limited to the advance of science. Populations of cases can be represented poorly by single cases or samples of a very few cases, and such small samples of cases can provide questionable grounds for advancing grand generalization. (p.460) In addition, Barone (as cited in Duke and Malettee, 2011) states that a critical characteristic of case study research is that it is a study of a bounded system that could be a child, a teacher, or a classroom. (p.8) In this study, the researcher observes science classroom by videotaped recordings, where teaching learning process

Research Focus This study focuses on the observation of the model of teaching learning English science in science classroom practice. Formulation of Problem In this research, the researcher formulates the problem as follows: How is the model of teaching learning English science practiced? Significances of Study This study will contribute significances for the development of teaching learning English science for

68

of English science occurred. Videotape recording shows the activities of lecturer’s and students’ interactions in English science classroom. These activities are as efforts to give science students good understanding and skills of science subject, pedagogy, as well as pedagogy content knowledge for junior high school science.

7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15)

B. Data and Source of Data The research data are qualitative data and the data source are derived from transcripts of videotape recordings observation in science classroom. Types of data obtained are transcriptions of video including video-captures of classroom interactions, students’ responses to the questionnaires, and transcripts of interviews.

Ability to Use Computers, Internet, Library Social Commitment Participation in Individual Presentation/Discussion Financial Expenses Communicative Competences: Strategic Competence Grammatical Competence Sociolinguistic Competence Discourse Competence

The researcher also conducts videotape-recording in the class where teaching learning process happen. The duration of recording is about 26 minutes. This video captures what the lecturer and the students do in teaching learning process in the class in which a pedagogical learning model is recorded.

C. Technique of Collecting Data Technique of collecting data is by using instruments of observation, questionnaire, and interviews (triangulation). Data collection is conducted through the use of instrumentation such as classroom observation by videotaped recordings.

B. Research Findings Findings from Questionnaires Questionnaire is aimed at finding data of students’ responses. In this observation through questionnaire the researcher would like to know students’ academic profiles, their social commitment, participation in class discussion, literacy activities, and communicative competence, After analyzing students’ responses to the questionnaire, the researcher found some findings as follows:

D. Analysis Data Procedure Data analysis is conducted qualitatively, by observing teaching learning process in science classroom. Then, the videotaped recordings of science classroom observation are transcribed. The respondents are given questionnaires and interviewed. Data of students’ responses of questionnaires and transcriptions of videotape and interviews are classified, interpreted and analyzed. Then, the data are described to answer the formulation of the problem. The researcher categorizes what the lecturer and the students do in teaching learning process in the classroom, and describes the characteristics of model in teaching learning English science. Then, the researcher classifies the strengths, weaknesses, and strategies in preparing teaching learning English science and the ways to encounter the problems of teaching English science.

Finding #1: Academic Profile: Academic Confidence Most of students have good academic confidence that: (1) They are in good rate from high school (85%); (2) They have good self-confidence to graduate with honor (90%); (3) They are able to express own thoughts in oral communication (80%); and (4) They are able to lead group discussion (70%). But, the students recognize that: (1) They still lack ability to teach English science (65%); (2) Only 60% admitted that they are able to solve problem creatively; and Only 65% admitted that they are able to make well informed decision and they capable in solving grammar problem. From the data, it indicates that the science students are well-selected students, in joining the program who are prepared as science teachers that expected to have good academic confidence to be active in various class activities, can solve their problems, able to express their own thought in oral communication, discussion, and graduate with honor from their studies.

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION A. Overview of Research Background In this observation, the researcher enters the class of science (chemistry) of the first semester students, and the lecturer tries to introduce researcher to the students about his observation in class. The students agree to participate in his research. The researcher then, distributes questionnaires to the students and gives time to collect the questionnaires later after finishing the class or a week later. The students are also asked to write their phone number if they are not objected to be contacted. From the distributed questionnaire returned by the students, the researcher collects 20 students’ responses to the questionnaire. The students’ responses are classified and categorized as follows: 1) Academic Profiles: 2) Academic Confidence 3) Academic Integration 4) Academic Commitment 5) Literacy Activity (reading –writing) 6) Time spent on Internet and English publication

Finding #2: Academic Profile: Academic Integration The science students have good motivation and integration in study that: (1) they spend much hours in studying and student’s own researching (80%); and (2) they spend much Hour in meeting with teacher/professor out of class (70). These data indicate that as science students, they spend much hour in studying and researching; meeting with teacher/professor out of class. It means that they have supported academic integration and high motivation in their studies.

69

3) The rate of ability to work with others on school/college/univ. project (90%) 4) The rate of ability to use library resources to get information (50%)

Finding #3: Academic Profile: Academic commitment Science students have good academic commitment on becoming an educated person, getting more enjoyable job, improving study skills, developing intellectually, and gaining college degree as shown below. 1) They have Decision on staying in school/college/univ. based on becoming an educated person (95%); 2) They have Decision on staying in school/college/univ. based on developing intellectually (90%); 3) They have Decision on staying in school/college/univ. based on getting more enjoyable job (90%); 4) They have Decision on staying in school/college/univ. based on improving study skills (90%); 5) They have Decision on staying in school/college/univ. based on gaining a college degree (85%). Their high commitments as science students will support their studies to graduate with honor.

Also, from the data, it indicates that science students need guidance from their lecturer in the case of using media and source of learning or library resources in order to empower their literacy (reading-writing) activities especially in science. Finding #6: Social Commitment Attitudes Most of the students have good commitment on their decision on developing social networks, keeping parents happy, and learning to live and interact with others, and social events. It means that they have good intrapersonal skills (needed by prospective science teacher) as shown below. 1) They have Decision to stay in school/college/univ. based on developing social networks (100%; 2) They have Decision to stay in school/college/univ. based on keeping parents happy (95%); 3) They have Decision to stay in school/college/univ. based on learning to live and interact with others (85%); 4) They have Decision to stay in school/college/univ. based on going to social events (55%); 5) They have Decision to stay in school/college/univ. based on a boyfriend/girlfriend/spouse (25%); 6) They have Decision to stay in school/college/univ. based on staying near to boyfriend/girlfriend/spouse (25%).

Finding #4: Literacy (Reading-Writing) Activity: Time Spent on Internet and English Publication In spending time on Internet and English publication, science students spent much time more in watching movies/film/TV rather than reading English science publication on internet access. It means that they less time reading on publication (less literacy activity). In other words, their literacy activities in reading and writing especially in English science need to be guided by the lecturer. The use of internet, email, online publication, books, and journals are less, as shown from the following data. 1) They spent much time in watching English movies/film/TV (85%); 2) They spent much time in using English by phone, Internet, Email (60%) ; 3) They spent much time in reading English (science) publication on Internet access (50%); 4) They spent much time in reading English book/journal/newspaper (40%).

From the data, it was not found strong reasons for science students to have decision for their private or individual purposes besides study. Finding #7: Participation in Individual Presentation/Discussion As prospective science teachers, in presenting and discussing an issue, science students are quite good in participating to become presenter in group discussion, in proposing questions and answering questions in the class discussion (necessary for prospective science teacher). But, they lack time preparation before discussion. Moreover, they just need little time for responding the audience as shown below. 1) Frequency in participating in proposing questions (65%) 2) Frequency in participating in answering questions (65%) 3) Frequency in participating to become presenter in group discussion (60%) 4) Time spent preparation before presentation/discussion (40%) 5) Time spent in delivering presentation/discussion (35%) 6) Hour spent in answering discussion questions/responding audience’s questions (20%) From the data, it was found that the most activities conducted besides lecturing in science class are discussion and presentation.

From the data, it indicates that the lecturer needs to provide much time and various literacy (reading-writing) in science activities for their students to involve themselves in reading and writing, and even doing research activities in science. Finding #5: Literacy (Reading-Writing) Activity: Ability to Use Computers, Internet, and Library Science students have good ability in using computer (computer literacy) for completing school/college works, but they are not interested in using library resource to get information (reading-writing). It means that the use of internet for searching information and for only completing tasks, attract the students more than visiting library as shown by the data below. 1) The rate of ability to use computers in completing school/college/Univ. works (90%) 2) The rate of ability to find information over the world wide web (90%)

Finding #8: Financial Expenses Attitudes In the case of spending money for buying books or cassette, IPSE students less spend money on buying books and cassette as shown below.

70

1) Much money spent on buying English Cassette/Video/CDVD (35%) 2) Much money spent on buying English books/journals/newspapers/magazines (35%).

1) The rate of ability to understand and produce connected, coherence speech in conversation (85%) From the data, it indicates that the students recognize themselves to be able to practice conversation by using English.

From the data, it means that the financial expenses attitudes of science students for buying English audio-video media and English books/journal, etc. are low and less awareness of providing reading sources (providing reading sources is necessary for prospective science teacher) for their learning (teaching) needs. It seems that the lecturer should support them and motivate them by giving them the assignments/tasks in which the students will spend their money and time by providing books, journals, or other learning sources.

Findings from Video-Taped Recording Video-taped recording is conducted in the science class (Chemistry) where teaching learning occurs. The classroom activities observed in this research are focused on: how teaching learning (pedagogy) model of English science is conducted; how does the lecturer provide the skill of science subject, literacy pedagogy, as well as pedagogy content knowledge for the students; how does the lecturer provide the students prepared-skill in teaching learning science in English as integrated subject; how does lecturer provide the students to teach science in English and provide ability to do research and develop innovation in science teaching; and find out lecturer’s and students’ strategies to meet those competencies. Also, this video-observation observes science lecturers’ profiles, a single lecturer-participant of science subject (Chemistry lecturer) as the sample. Meanwhile, science students as the respondents are only small-scale of 20 students who join the classroom. The following pictures of video-captures are sample of conventional teaching learning conducted in science class. Picture 1.

Finding #9: Communicative Competence: Strategic Competence For science students’ communicative competence (necessary as prospective science teacher), they have good ability and strategy in solving communication problems and recognition and breakdown communication problems. It means that they have good interpersonal skill as shown on Finding #9-12. 1) The rate of ability in solving communication problem (80%) 2) Recognition and breakdown communication problem (80%) From the data, it indicates that most students are able to communicate each other and solve their communication problems. Finding #10: Communicative Competence: Grammatical Competence Science students have good ability in solving grammatical problem in speaking. It means that they are able to communicate each other grammatically in speaking. 1) The rate of ability in solving grammatical problem in speaking (70%) From the data, it indicates that in the context of using English science in speaking in the class, science students seem having no handicaps in grammar. Finding #11: Communicative Competence: Sociolinguistic Competence Science students have good ability in using and responding language appropriately in interaction with people as shown below. 1) The rate of ability in using and responding language appropriately in interaction with people (80%) From the data, it indicates that science students have good language competence in communication socially better than grammatical problem solving.

Fig. 1 Teaching learning process in English science class

Finding #12: Communicative Competence: Discourse Competence Science students have good ability to understand and produce connected, coherence speech in conversation.

When the teaching learning happens, the lecturer is explaining the materials in the class by presenting material through projector media, while the students are listening the lecturer’s explanation. Sometimes, the students ask the

71

lecturer a question. This conventional model happens in science class. This is the way the lecturer tries to provide the skill of science subject by giving lecture in class and explaining the material (Chemistry).

IV. CONCLUSIONS Teaching learning model of English science based on the observation conducted shows that the programs are well conducted in the process of teaching learning science in conventional model by using English as the official language in class. It means that the conventional models should be changed by a new attractive and dynamic model of teaching learning English science.

Finding #13: Lecturer’s Profile Based on one-shot observation through video, the lecturer has Master of Science qualification degree and has conducted and experienced teaching science by using English for years. The lecturer presents materials through power point (projector) presentation. Sometimes, the lecturer asks the students some questions and then, re-explains the materials in English. Most activities conducted by the lecturer are explaining the materials by using the English language in front of the class. From this observed activity, it indicates that the lecturer provides the science students the skill of one of science subjects (Chemistry subject) and provides science students an implicit self-example model of how to teach science by using English. (The lecturer teaches Chemistry subject by using English language as official language.)

REFERENCES [1]

[2] [3] [4]

[5]

Finding #14: Students’ Performance and Competence Based on the observation through video, the students are the first semester of science class (Chemistry) students. They enter the class before the lecturer comes. They just sit on the sequencing seats, face to face near the lecturer position in front in the classroom. Some of them enter the class lately. While waiting their lecturer, the students are communicating each other about themselves and their lecture. The students still possess good academic confidence, commitment, integration, and communicative competence, although their literacy activities in term of especially in reading-writing English sources and English science are limited. Still, they are ready to learn and perform better in the classroom.

[6]

[7] [8] [9]

[10]

Finding #15: Pedagogy Model of Classroom Activities The pedagogy model of classroom activities based on the observation is limited to the practice of teaching learning science by using English as the introductory language in conventional model. But, the researcher admitted that it was not found comprehensively yet for all the class of science practice in teaching learning science. It was also not found yet that the students’ active interactions and participations in class discussion and presentation, even in science laboratory practice. It seems that the students are not active yet critically, asking or answering questions enthusiastically by using English to their lecturer (as it was recognized that the students are first semester students). They just listening and receive explanations from the lecturer.

[11]

[12]

[13]

72

JK.Magilvy. and E.Thomas, Scientific Inquiry. A First Qualitative Project: Qualitative Descriptive design for Novice Researchers. Retrieved from https://www.researchgate.net/publication /26862776_A_First_Qualitative_Project_Qualitative_Descriptive_De sign_for_Novice_Researchers, 2015. N.K, Denzim, Y.S. Lincol, The Sage Handbook of Qualitative Research. Third Edition. USA: Sage Publication, Inc, 2005. L. Chapuis, Pedagogy. Embedding Learning Technologies, Module 1, Australian Capital Territory. Education and Trainind. Retrieved from http://www.principals.in/uploads/pdf/Pedagogy.pdf, 2003 R. Goldbort, Writing for Science, The Most Comprehensive Writing Guide Available for Science Students and Professional Researchers. Retrieved from: http://www.ice.uib.cat/digitalAssets /250/250574_Writing-for-Science.pdf, 2006. H.A. Gyroux, Critical Pedagogy and the Postmodern/Modern Divide: towards a Pedagogy of Democratization. Teacher Education Quarterly. Winter, 2004. S. Hendayana, A.Supriatna, and H. Imansyah. Indonesia’s Issues and Challenges on Quality Improvement of Mathematics and Science Education. Indonesia University of Education, Indonesia. Available at: http://aadcice.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/e/publications/sosho4_1-04.pdf, 2009. F.L.Hill.Pedagogical and Andragogical Learning. Retrieved from: http://www.authorsden.com/visit/viewarticle.asp?AuthorID =3256&id=1416, 1999. NSTA, National Science Teachers Association NSTA Position Statement. Science for English Language Learners. Retrieved from: http://www.nsta.org/about/positions/ell.aspx, 2017. V.C.S. Rao, English for Science and Technology: A Learner Centered Approach. Retrieved from: http://www.espworld.info/Articles_42/Documents/Rao.pdf. English for Specific Purposes World, ISSN 1682-3257, www.esp-world.info, Issue 42, Vol. 15, 2014, 2014. Z. Salim, The irony of science education in Indonesia. Retrieved from: Http://www.thejakartapost.com/news/2012/01/21/the-ironyscience-education-indonesia.html, 2012. T. Shiverdecker, Reading through the lens of Inquiry. Journal of Adolescent Literacy in Practice. February 2009. Available at: http://www.ohiorc.org/orc_documents/ORC/Adlit/InPerspective/200 9-02/in_perspective_2009-02, 2009. R.A. Valeeva, O.V. Baykova, and A.K.Kusainov, Foreign Language Professional Communicative Competence as a Component of the Academic Science Teacher’s Professional Competence. ERIC Database (EJ1092224) Retrieved from http://files.eric.ed.gov/fulltext/EJ1092224.pdf. International Journal of Environmental & Science Education, 2016, 11(3), 173-183, 2016. G.Venkatraman & P. Prema, Developing a Set of Competencies for Teachers of English in Engineering Colleges. Retrieved from: http://www.esp-world.info/index.html, 2009.

The Learning of Critical Reading and Creative Writing (aesthetic-receptive and critical creative process in appreciative reading) Titin Setiartin R 1), Jojo Nuryanto 2), Ipah Muzdalipah3) 1)

FKIP Universitas Siliwangi Tasikmalaya E-mail: [email protected]

2)

FKIP Universitas Siliwangi Tasikmalaya

3)

FKIP Universitas Siliwangi Tasikmalaya

Abstract. Listening and viewing results are often considered limiting imagination, dulling feeling and causing the passive mind. The reality of threatened literary existence in increasing technological life (listening viewing devices) especially in children and adolescents (students) has never been comparable to literary existence. Learning outcomes (post reading activities) provides the opportunity for students to channel desires, ideals, love, longing, concerns, and thoughts in the form of student creations. Keywords: learning, critical with Joice and Weil [1] the synectic sub clump based on creativity psychology of Gordon ((Joice & Weil) [1]; Arends [2] ; and Satrock [3] say that metacognitive activities develop cognition as an active, critical, and creative process. Joyce & Weil [1] state that the purpose of teaching is to help students gain information, ideas, skills, values, ways of thinking, the tools to express themselves. Curriculum 2013 has the conceptual framework of learning activities in the realm of attitudes acquired through the activity of receiving, running, cherish, appreciate and practice. The realm of knowledge gained through the activity of remembering to apply, analyse, evaluate, and create. The realm of skills acquired through observing, asking, trying, and reasoning, presenting, and creating activity. The learning process is in line with the teaching of information processing with synectic strategies that encourage students to cultivate, dig up the information included in this category is learning to solve the problem, critical thinking, and develop creativity (Slavin) [4] . The process of learning in the educational unit must be held in an interactive, inspiring, fun, challenging, motivating the students to actively participate and provide enough space for innovation, creativity, and independence in accordance with their talents, interests, and physical and psychological development of learners (Permendikbud, No 65 Tahun 2013). The conceptual framework of the curriculum in 2013 had a very close attachment to the concept of learning model processing information presented Joyce & Weil, synectic strategy Arends opinion and Slavin. At the practical level, this attachment appears in the realm of the standard skills through observing activity, ask, try, reasoning, presenting, and creating. This is line with the appreciative learning reading strategies (process) aesthetic-

I. INTRODUCTION Listening and viewing results are often considered limiting imagination, dulling feeling and causing the passive mind. The reality of threatened literary existence in increasing technological life (listening viewing devices) especially in children and adolescents (students) has never been comparable to literary existence. Mind retention and reader imagination or story listeners that are narrated in the same communication situation certainly are larger than the influence of listening-viewing products. In reality, we also have rejection power toward the products. Therefore, we do not need to think that ‘the defeat’ of literary books by the devices will exactly happen. It depends on our culture attitudes. In strategic context, it’s proper if the space and chances for students to take care of creative texts are prepared in order to make their orientation is not only to the practical devices. Deflection orientation that are relied on thegrounds of science and technology progress that exclusively tends to abandon the creative text and put it on a mere secondary and subordinate role, undoubtedly important to be straightened with a number of possible alternatives.. The literary works are also wonderful utterances that share us some important ‘spiritual food’. The literary text is also a reality where humans are happy to rest his soul that is not clear. In literature, the experiences of humanity laid off. Appreciative Reading lesson has the same characteristics to the information processing lesson characteristics that focusing on creative-critical reading activity. This learning process focuses on digging, understanding, reacting, criticizing, evaluating and appreciating and also comprehending fully and enjoying. In line

73

receptive critical-creative. Learning outcomes (post reading activities) provides the opportunity for students to channel desires, ideals, love, longing, concerns, and thoughts in the form of student creations. II.

the text. Along with receptive process, the reader explores the world of imagination hermenetically. Reception is an interpretation of audience (listeners, viewers, readers) toward a literary work. Readers’ feelings also affect their critical thinking. Subsequently, “resepsi adalah sebuah pendekatan yang digunakan untuk memahami karya sastra melalui penerimaan pembaca, baik pembaca yang sezaman dengan penulis, maupun yang berturut-turut pada sesudah masa penciptaannya” (Teeuw)[7] which means that reception is an approach used to understand the work through readers’ reception either from the readers in the same period with the writer or in the following period more.“…various conventions or expectations are brought into play, connections are posited, and expectations defeated or confirmed. To interpret a work is to tell a story of reading.” (Culler) [8]. Vodicka considers that in literary work there is an empty free space which can be filled by the readers’ social condition, meanwhile Jausz views horizon of expectations will enable reception and its process inside the readers toward the literary texts. Relevant to reception theory, Iser [9] utters a concept related to text, reader, and its interaction. It is found that there is a dialectic connection among text, reader, and its interaction. Then, Iser [9] name it as aesthetic response because though the attention is pointed around the text, perception and imagination are directed in order to carry out the acclimatizing and distinguish its focus. In aesthetic response theory, the interaction can be observed through the terms of implied reader, literary repertoire, and literary strategies. Implied reader is a model, role, and standpoint made reader as a real reader arranging the meaning of the text. Repertoire is a set of social, historical, and cultural norms used to read message presented by text, and it is a whole familiar field of the text in a form of references to other older literary works. In literary theory, readers try to explore writer’s imagination full of passion, happiness, tension, and joy. The key point from the concept introduced by Jausz is ‘rezeptions und wirkungsästhetik’ or reception and response. According to him, readers are the one who appraise, enjoy, interpret, and understand the literary works. According to the other experts (Iser, Culler, Selden, and Segers), reception approach has some outlines such as: (1) start from the relationship between the literary text and the readers’ reaction; (2) concretization meaning of the text through readers’ response in accordance with the horizon of expectations; (3) readers’ imagination occurs through the familiarity with literature, the ability to understand the circumstances in the present and the past; and (4) through an impression, readers can affirm their response toward a literary work.

METHODS

Literature review is one of the methods that exist in the research. The theory underlying the problem to be investigated can be found doing a literature study related to the problem studied. Researchers can obtain information about the research in connection with the problem studied. Review of the literature on the take from the study literature review. The study of literature is the study of how data collection with the study riview of literature books, records and reports reated to the problem studied. Activities preparation of the literature riview has the objective to collect information about scientific studies, in the from of theorytheory, method, or approach that is ever growing and has been documented in the from of boks, journals, manuscripts, notes, recording history, the documents contained in the library. III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION A. Reading Comprehension Appreciative-Receptive Aesthetic Critical-Creative “The literary work is an aesthetic object that can evoke the aesthetic experience of the reader. Appreciators (readers) to assess the literary works of literature based aesthetic criteria...” (Wellek) [5], The reader aesthetic experience will be obtained from the interpretation in the process of reading receptive. Furthermore, Segers [6] states that it is methodologically aesthetic reception trying to start new directions in the study of literature because it holds that a literary text should be studied so that raises the reader reaction. In his words, Segers mapped reception aesthetics into three main sections, namely (1) the general concept of aesthetic reception, (2) the practical application of aesthetic reception, and (3) the position of the aesthetics of reception in the tradition of literary studies Aesthetics in literature plays a very important role. Beauty, according to Plato (Teuw) [7] is in the realm of ideas. Art as a thing of beauty for centuries the basis of aesthetic doctrine. Jausz (Teuw)[7]argues that beauty is definitely not affordable by humans. However, the beauty can be approached through the world thoughts and ideas with the ideal harmony. Western aesthetic is consequence in devoting philosophical art and ethics. Thus, aesthetics give perspective to the study of literary semiotics. The development of an absolute aesthetic, the object is located on the artwork while the aesthetic experiences are in the audience (listeners, viewers and readers). Universally, aesthetic theory becomes into an approach to literature. Therefore, the aesthetic approach is becoming the place in the literature research. Aesthetics in a literary text becomes the authors’ media in drawing readers into the imaginative-creative world. When the imagination of the reader tries to explore a text, the reader tried to approach the aesthetic values. The approach to a literary text is not limited to approach the semiotic symbols. However, the reader seeks reception the overall content of

B. Creativity Process in Appreciative Reading Learning “Creativity is a condition, an attitude, or a mental situation which is special, and it cannot be formulated. Creativity is a mental activity which is very individually, and it is also an essential self-freedom manifestation.” These lines mean “In art, creativity can be showed on factual reality which is revealed by art work through extrinsic aspect (moral, social, politics, technology, psychology, etc.) and also through the aesthetic tradition (intrinsic aspect) of the art. The art work as

74

a part of art product can be said as writer’s creativity product.”However, it needs to be understood that according to contemporary vision, imagination is not only an individual process, but also trans-individual one in other word is an imagination imagined by other people.” Therefore, a literary work is a critical-creative product of a writer toward real life (phenomenon) seen and felt by him/her. Creativity has a broaden interest. It will interest a new experience and it react easily to new alternatives about once condition. The reaction can be form as pretension to try, changing which has been done; the new idea and perspective will practice critical thinking. The features creativity in critical reading literature gives an opportunity to be creative, for appreciative or expressive purposes. It can be appreciative purpose because the literature texts usually come from the interpretation of the author about live. Some reasons should be developed in appreciative reading instruction. First, it is approach to practice students’ interpretation to find out the meaning of folklore. The aesthetic and receptive processs in appreciative reading become the basic for students to transform texts. Second, the aesthetic and receptive approach have some main points; a) the correlation of literature texts and the reaction of the readers; b) to find a concrete meaning of the text through reader’s reaction based on their need; c) readers’ imagination can be determined by the familiarity with literature, the capability to understand the condition in the past and present; and d) through impression, the readers can give the response to the text they read. Allan Paivio (Santrock)[3] said that in the instruction of appreciative reading, memory is saved into two ways: as a verbal code or an image code through mind. The more detail an image code, the better memory to encourage students to use imagination to memorize verbal information. According to the theory of creativity in literature, this model is oriented to the theory of reading literature and the theory of teaching and learning appreciative reading which is oriented by students centre. The steps of appreciative reading through aesthetic-receptive process and critical-creative process are shown to the scheme below.

Appre ciator

Process Aestheticreceptive, critical-

Story (litera ture

5) 6)

7) 8)

9) 10)

11)

story. Analyzing intrinsic elements such as character and characteristic, setting, plot, theme and message. Phase 3: Discussing Intrinsic Elements The students discuss the intrinsic elements (character/characterization, setting, theme, plot, message, moral value, social, and education). Then, the students do the worksheet and make a planning to transform story text. The step to transform a literary work to image or visual are: (1) planning (2) arranging scenario (3) the lay out of image, narration and words. Phase 4: group discussion In this step, the students give the comment to the pictures story from other group. The students discuss the features of pictures story with the character by guiding from teacher. Phase 5: Arranging and Editing Picture Story In this phase the students revise and edit the picture story based on the comment and suggestion from other group and teacher. This activity is done until the practical schedule end. Phase 6:Publish the result

IV. CONCLUSIONS Appreciative reading with aesthetic-receptive criticalcreative strategy consists of 6 phases. The first instructional activity is introduction to the model. The core instructional activity consists of 3 phases. The cores of instructional activity consist of 3 phases (phase 1 until phase 3). The activities of students group work in doing the worksheet and making a plan to transform story text: (a) Planning, (b) arranging the scenario, (c) the lay-out of picture, narration and words. The students arrange the picture based on the plot story. The last activity, the students and teacher reflect the instructional process and the teacher give post-test to the student. The appropriateness between the steps from the teacher and students activity are based on instructional model of transform folklore story to picture story. The appropriateness of evaluation tool in assessment (1) the capability of students in appreciative reading as aesthetic -receptive and criticalcreative activity; (2) the capability to transform folklore text story through picture story, as a activity product; and (3) the capability to develop the character.

Creati on produ ct

Fig. 1 Scheme of aesthetic-receptive process and critical-creative process

REFERENCES [1]

The instructional process of information processing family is an effective model in appreciative reading instruction with aesthetic-receptive critical-creative. This model can be applied and implemented in the instruction of transformative folklore text through pictures story. The processes are as follow. 1) Phase 1: the introduction to the text 2) The students get the information about what will be discussed and the procedure to do it. The teacher gives the story and explains how to transform the text 3) Phase 2: analysing the structure of the text 4) The students do appreciative reading from the teacher by using fragmentary, summary, and simple

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

75

B. Joyce, et al, Models of Teaching. New York: Allyn and Bacon, 2001. R.I.Arends, Learning to Teach. Belajar untuk Mengajar. Buku Dua Terjemahan, Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar, 2008. J.W. Santrock, Psikologi Pendidikan. Educational Psychology. Buku1. Jakarta: Salemba Humanika, R.E. Slavin, Psikologi Pendidikan Teori dan Praktik. Jilid 2. Terjemahan. Jakarta: PT Indeks, 2011. R. Wellek. dan A. Warren, Theory of Literature. New York: Harcout, Barance and Company, 1956. R.T. Segers, Evaluasi Teks Sastra. Diterjemahkan oleh Suminto A. Sayuti. Yogyakarta: AdiCinta, 2000. A.Teeuw, Sastra dan Ilmu Sastra: Pengantar Teori Sastra. Jakarta: Pustaka Jaya, 1998. J. Culler., Literary Theory A Verry Short Introduction. New York: by Oxford University Press Inc,2000. W. Iser, The Act of Reading. Baltimore and London: The Johns Hopkins University Press, 1987.

The Bushido Value In Kanji Learning Lailatul Husna 1), Dedi Sutedi2) 1)

Universitas Pendidikan Indonesia, Bandung, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

Universitas Pendidikan Indonesia, Bandung, Indonesia Email: [email protected]

Abstract. Bushido that taught by Japan’s samurais has moral values in the life’s aspect and Japanese people always use Bushido values in daily life. Samurai is Japanese’s noble’s servant who has duty for protecting his master and obedient his master’s orders. Bushido was taught by samurai through some certain approachs so that Bushido values can go into Japanese people themself until now. In kanji learning, teachers can transfer Bushido values that samurai had indirectly and students especially Japanese language students are able to copy all positive things from Bushido values upon Indonesia people’s character. Keywords: Bushido, Samurai, Kanji Learning, Character

A. BUSHIDO Bushido was coming from 武士(bushi) that is knight and 道(dō) that is path. Bushido (武士道) is knight’s path that guiding samurais and Japanese people’s ethics code. Bushido is a ethics code that used to guide and make people morally and virtuous. Bushido was often pointed to samurais whom are highclass society in Japan industry era. Nitobe said that: 武士道は一言でいえば「騎士道の現律」武士階級の 「高い身分に伴う義務」である。“if it said in single word, Bushido is knight’s path regulation, a duty that brought samurais to the high social position”. Bushido has a position in Japanese people’s life greatly, it always used on multiple thought elements. Since 1882, imperalism charter was given to armies for bracing up Bushido spirit in war. From that time Bushido spirit always used in deciding rule. Bushido ethics code spread when Tokugawa era, when samurais worked as farmer so Bushido precept can be accepted to farmers society. Each samurai spreaded Bushido with different ways. When Meiji era, samurais society was removed and most of samurais did have job. Most of samurais worked as seller or laborer. Bushido is a moral system so the precept contains moral ethics. Bushido concept was from Buddha, Zen, and Shinto. Zen was from Confusionism that has precept about humanity so Bushido could be accepted to people. Bushido taught moral ethics with the centre on humanity. Nelvita [2] said that moral ethics value was: 1. 義 (Gi -integrity): keeping ethics and honesty on Samurai has to keep good attitude, totality, and honesty. Totality is appertaining life’s aspects, especially thoughts, words, and act. Honesty in samurai is a resolute ethics when will kill and when will die so long as their convinced was truth (Gultom) [4]勇 (Yūbraveness): faced up to difficulty

I. INTRODUCTION Education is one of human’s tools to get knowledge. Ary Ginanjar Agustian said that bookish people without character resembling samurai without Bushido (Rafiek) [1]. Those statement has proven an importance of character which bookish people must be has. Bushido is path “knight” that is ethics system or gallance’s moral rule that apply in samurais especially Japanese feudal era (12-19 century) (Nelvita) [2]. So, Bushido is a value or precept that samurai has containing Japanese knights’ ethics and moral. Bushido gave positive effect indicate 8 values in it, those are 義(gi)integrity, 勇 (yū)-braveness, 仁 (jin)-greatfulness, 礼 (rei)respect, 信 (makoto)-honesty and sincerity, 名 誉 (meiyo)reputation, 忠 義 (chūgi)-loyalty, dan 悌 (rei)-respecting to elders and appreciating tradition (Nelvita) [2]. Samurais must know and capable to do Bushido value in their daily life so they can transfer to other people. Through that approach, Bushido values spread to all Japan. Bushido’s term and samurai are not strange words for Japanese language students. Generally, Bushido value was told on bellesletters that applied by samurais in their era. Truthfully it was not only samurai who are able to apply Bushido values, Ary Ginanjar Agustian stated Bushido has be implemented well and has become personality system for every Japanese person (Nelvita) [2]. So, Bushido values is reflected from people’s words and attitude in life aspects such as in learning activity. For Japanese language students who have understood more about Japanese language and Japanese people’s moral values, Bushido can be applied in kanji learning. Writing learning of China’s character that adopted to Japanese language writing system containing Bushido values. Habein said that kanji is a visual picture, cannot be taught with ear, it is a way of student to get speak ability (in Novianti) [3]. Through Bushido values, writing kanji can be understood with seeing and rewriting has meaning and another purpose.

76

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Braveness was one of samurai’s character and attitude. Samurai has to be ready to face all risks included putting life on the line to defend truth. Now “... this braveness can be seen from Japanese people attitude in defending their society” (Gultom) [4] 仁 (Jin-greatfulness): loving fellow, affection, and sympathy In spite of samurai was a knight who often used sword in working, but he has to be a merciful and charitable man “... with supported from power to help and protecting” (Gultom) [4]. 礼 (Rei-respect): respecting to others Samurai has to keep Bushido ethics everywhere and anytime. Nitobe (in Gultom) [4] said that a samurai has raised with duty value and proffession feature or their status, respect is a private magnificence that applied their souls. Respect is not only to elders and master, but it also to guest and others. 信 (Makoto-honesty and sincerity): honesty and sincerity Samurai’s word is a seriousness and truth guarantee. Nitobe said that a samurai has an orientation, he needs high truth and seriousness consciously more than sellers and farmers. Samurais did not lie and say something bad about others. 名 誉 (Meiyo-reputation): keep self-honour and magnificence A samurai has to keep his honour and his master’s honour with doing all Bushido ethics consistently. If a samurai did mistake, he has responsible to do harakiri (suicide) with seppuku (cut his stomach) because of embarassing his master. 忠義 (Chūgi-loyalty): loyal to one master and teacher Samurai’s loyalty was expressed when his master faces trouble and did not permitted to leave his master. Samurai’s life was dedicated to serve his master and he has to sacrifice it to keep his master’s reputation. 悌 (Tei-serving elder person): respecting elders and tradition Samurai respected and cared to elders, master, and forefathers. They have to know their familytree and did not think about their-self. They have to focus to respect and serving their master and elders.

there are must be joined with another kanji character or followed with hiragana character. That sort of thing is one of reasons why Japanese language is difficult to learn. Other than that, one kanji character can be interpreted as one word, but sometimes it is a part of another vocabulary that has different meaning, because in kanji character there were two ways of reading, there were kun-yomi (Japanese version) and on-yomi (Chinese version) (Sutedi) [6]. In kun-yomi one kanji usually followed with hiragana, and in on-yomi kanji contains consolidation of two or more kanji. In kanji learning, students have to able to read, write, and understand the kanji meanings. Windra Swastika and William Prathama Nugraha [7] said that it is not like another foreign languages that are using alphabet, in Japanese language learning students are not only study about vocabularies and grammar, but need to memorize kanji meaning to understand and read sentences in Japanese language (2013, p. xv). Through kanji writing order rule, it can be used to reduce mistake in writing stroke. Yang said that writing kanji order should be naturally, not forced or not stiff. Than, look at writing speed and kanji form size to make it easier to understand about that kanji (2013, p. 3). Kanji is understood by writing, because one kanji character has multiple ways of reading so if students don’t understand the sentence context and knowledge about kanji character, they cannot understand a whole sentence in Japanese language. II. RESULT AND DISCUSSION A. BUSHIDO VALUES IN KANJI LEARNING 1. 義 (Gi-Integrity), students have to be resolute about what they believe, when they write kanji they don’t be permitted to be doubt, so some mistakes in writing could be accomplished. 2. 勇 (Yū-Braveness), students have to be brave and be ready to face. That braveness has meaning brave in calm. When students are facing troubles in learning kanji, what have to do is calm and leisurely. 3. 仁 (Jin-Greatfulness), students have to possess greatfulness attitude, charitable, and caring to another people. In learning activity, students have to care to another friend who had been around mistake and help them, except in examination time. 4. 礼 (Rei-Respect), language students have to understand more how to speak to elder, so respect value is always applied especially to teachers when they are in school. 5. 信 (makoto-honesty and sincerity), a good student is an honest student. The students who do kindness to another and themself. In learning activity, students do not be permitted to lie such as do not obedient kanji writing order. 6. 名 誉 (Meiyo-reputation), students has to be able to keep their reputation, their familiy’s, and their campus upon their profession, as students they must study more especially in kanji learning so they can understand another Japanese language lesson. 7. 忠 義 (Chūgi-Loyalty), students’ loyalty is could be seen from their submission to teachers. In kanji

Bushido has spread and still exist on Japanese people’s soul. Period of samurai system and Japan isolation for about 250 years from outside world made Bushido perceivable well. Muhammad (in Uningasri) [5] stated that with various consideration, Bushido had been processed internally in cultural and coming in Japanese people’s character. Bushido spirit is Japanese people’s spirit that made Japan became develop country with raise moral values to be a life vision in life aspects. B. KANJI LEARNING Kanji is one of lessons that must be learned to Japanese students in college. Sutedi [6] explained that kanji characters are symbol characters, there were stand-alone,

77

8.

learning, students submit to rules that is like kanji writing rule correctly. 悌 (Tei-Respecting Elder and Appreciating Tradition), students have to respect elder and always appreciate tradition so they can develop education quality with raise people’s moral values. In kanji learning, students have to follow tradition in writing kanji

[4]

[5]

B. BUSHIDO VALUES IN JAPANESE LANGUAGE EDUCATION In Japanese language Bushido values are in multiple learning applied aspects. Bushido that was learned by samurais did not only about war, but also contained art and culture such as literature, calligraphy, ceramics art, tea ceremony, and soon. In Japanese language education, Bushido values could be seen in polite language lesson and students’ loyalty in following school rules. According to Bushido values that samurais has to respect to elders and tradition, so the students have to follow that Bushido values. Besides, Bushido values can be developed to be an inspiration to follow the lead of heroism and braveness. Bushido values also can give an inspiration to students and support them to make a belleslettres. The teachers can take Bushido values to develop Japanese language subjects and development teaching materials. Japanese is one of develop nations that arose from defeated, but Japanese people has built a good country by appreciating moral and tradition. Therefore, the students can copy Japanese people to protect Indonesia’s moral values, tradition, and character.

[6] [7] [8]

REFERENCES [1]

[2]

[3]

M. Rafiek, Belajar Pendidikan Karakter dari Bushido Samurai Jepang dan Implikasinya terhadap Pembelajaran Bahasa dan Sastra Indonesia. (Skripsi). [Online]. Program Studi Pendidikan Bahasa, Sastra Indonesia & Daerah. Banjarmasin: Universitas Lambung Mangkurat. Available: http://eprints.unlam.ac.id/id/eprint/351. 2011. Nelvita, Nilai Bushido dan Penyimpangannya dalam Dwilogi Novel SAMURAI Karya Takashi Matsuoka. Tesis. Online. Sekolah Pascasarjana Universitas Sumatera Utara. Medan. Available: http://repository.usu.ac.id/xmlui/bitstream/handle/123456789/47902/ Chapter%20II.pdf?sequence=4. 2011. N. Novianti, Analisis Makna Kanji yang memiliki Bushu Chikara yang berhubungan dengan Kekuatan. (Skripsi). [Online]. Departemen Sastra Jepang. Jakarta: Universitas Bina Nusantara. Available:

78

http://library.binus.ac.id/eColls/eThesisdoc/Bab1HTML/2011200357 JPbab1/page.html. 2011. A. Gultom, Etika Bushido dalam Novel Shiosai Karya Yukio Mishima. Medan: Universitas Sumatera Utara. Available: http://repository.usu.ac.id. 2009.K. Arumsari, Analisis Pengaruh Konsep Bushido pada Tentara Kamikaze dalam Film Letters From Iwojima Karya Clint Eastwood. (Skripsi). [Online]. Departemen Sastra Jepang. Jakarta: Universitas Bina Nusantara. Available: http://library.binus.ac.id/eColls/eThesisdoc/Bab2/2008-1-00146-JPBab%202.pdf. 2008. T. Uningasri, Analisis Peranan Semangat Bushido dalam Pembangunan Pendidikan Jepang Pasca Perang Dunia II dan Relevansinya dalam Pembelajaran Sejarah SMA KELAS XI. (Skripsi). [Online]. Fakultas Keguruan dan Ilmu Pendidikan. Universitas Negeri Surakarta. Available: http://eprints.uns.ac.id/24941/3/K4410061_bab2.pdf. 2016. D. Sutedi, Dasar-Dasar Linguistik Bahasa Jepang: Edisi Revisi. Bandung: Humaniora. 2011. W. Swastika and W. P. Nugraha, 200 Kanji yang Paling Sering Digunakan. Yogyakarta: ANDI. 2013. W. Yang, Faktor Penyebab Kesalahan Penulisan Kanji Sesuai Hitsujun: Studi Kasus pada Mahasiswa Semester Empat Jurusan Sastra Jepang Binus University dan Universitas Nasional. (Skripsi). [Online]. Departemen Sastra Jepang. Jakarta: Universitas Bina Nusantara. Available: http://library.binus.ac.id/Collections/ethesis_detail/2013-2-00690-JP. 2013.

BIPA Readiness in The Face of MEA Dr. Rosida Tiurma Manurung, M. Hum 1), Maranatha Christian University 2) E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. We must be ready to meet the MEA in 2015, namely the commencement of the era of free trade knows no boundaries and borders. Today, there was a shift of interest culture of America and Europe to Asia as a new force. Thus, knowledge of Asia was desperately needed. Indonesia must be able to capture the opportunities that exist to the provision of BIPA's Industry Foreign including its human resources that need to equip themselves with the knowledge of the language and culture of Indonesia. So, when a foreign power is active in Asia, in particular Indonesia, we also take part or participate. By introducing the Indonesian language and culture to foreign speakers, we can position as a partner in the context of the balanced and mutually beneficial position. Judging from the context of the region, we can see that the Asia and Indonesia will become increasingly important. Thus, to meet MEA in 2015, the Indonesian community in 2015 in the context of South-East Asia needs to be realized. Similarly, in a global context, if we are able to provide and facilitate foreign speakers with BIPA designed for the benefit of industry, Indonesia is likely to increase the range of cooperation in a global context Keywords: BIPA, multilingual studies, MEA in 2015, BIPA for industry who have multiple languages. Such communities occur for several ethnic helped shape society so ethnically plural society can be regarded as masyarakat majemuk (Sumarsono and Paina Partana) [1]. Their language development of monolingual later became bilingual and eventually became multilingual due to several factors. Development of communication technology, globalization, the rapid education of the language led to the society needs of language shifted and the languages become mixed as the time progressed.

I. INTRODUCTION We must be ready to meet the MEA in 2015, namely the commencement of the era of free trade that know no boundaries and borders. Today, there was a shift of interest culture of America, Europe, and Japan to Indonesia as a new force. Thus, knowledge about Indonesia was badly needed. Indonesian society must be able to capture the opportunities that exist by doing business in the form of investments and the provision of human resources. So, when Indonesia contributes in the international world, we also can take part or participate. By knowing and getting to know the culture of Indonesia, our position as a partner in the context of the relationship will be in a balanced and mutually beneficial position. Judging from the context of the region, we can see that the area of Indonesia and Indonesia is getting more and more important. Thus, to meet MEA in 2015, the readiness of BIPA Teaching with focal point on foreigners as human resource working in the industry needs to be crystallized. Similarly, in a global context, if Indonesia take the opportunity, then companies or partner that invest in Indonesia will flourish much more. If we are able to provide the correct implementation of a teaching BIPA, it will add an interest of learning to the teachers in industry. Understanding the importance of Indonesian culture, including language multilingual, is an attempt to accommodate the evolving needs. From BIPA, we can see the distinctiveness, diversity, behavior, and the richness of Indonesian culture that can be studied and used as a reference to put into practice by the local human resources in order to improve quality of life. BIPA becomes an alternative in providing human resources that competent to represent the culture of Indonesia. BIPA is a multilingual study. Multilingual is a phenomenon that appears in people

II. METHODS Literature review is one of the methods that exist in the research. The theory underlying the problem to be investigated can be found doing a literature study related to the problem studied. Researchers can obtain information about the research in connection with the problem studied. Review of the literature on the take from the study literature review. III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION Multilingual Studies Itself It can not be denied that Indonesia is a nation that is multilingual (Chaer) [2] because in addition to using the Indonesian language, we are also using hundreds of regional languages. In the development of the language, we need to understand how the multilingual was modeled in the study and education so as to bring the benefit of both theoretical and practically in life known as multilingual studies that can be accommodated through BIPA. Multilingual competence is the ability to be active and use language more than two languages (Sumarsono) [1], whereas multilingualism is a symptom in an individual or society characterized by the ability or the habit of using more than

79

one language (Kridalaksana) [3]. The term is also multilingual and development related to the monolingual, namely human resources only master one language and bilingual, ie HR master two languages, which theoretically is a result of contact language (Chaer) [2]. Multilingual is a symptom that appears as the implications of language contact in an open society accepts the arrival of others outside their community. so that they make contact between languages. The ability was usually occur because people who have multiple languages form the new community so plural multilingual society is formed. In general, there are several causes of multilingual between migration factors, namely the displacement of the population that extends so mingling with other groups. Second, in the process of colonization, namely the control of one nation to the other tribes to use their language. Third, the federation and the fourth, the rise of the influence of the border region. In a multilingual society whose mobility is high, community members will tend to use more than two languages in his life, either fully or in part, in accordance with their needs. Communities around the world who use one language only about thirteen percent. The rest, a community use at least two languages. Indonesian people do not fall into that category because the Indonesian people in general mastering two or more languages, namely the regional languages and Indonesian. Indonesian children who have been educated already be referred to as multilingual as they are already using some of the language in part or whole. Multilingual language competence is highly dependent on their opportunities to use different languages in life. The more opportunities, the better fluency of various languages will be built either.lpp According to Thomason [4] the use of language contact is an event of more than one language in the same place and time. The use of this language does not require speakers to speak fluently as bilinguist or multilinguist, but communication between speakers of two different languages were already categorized as contact events language. Factors that cause the occurrence of language contact, according to Thomason [4], which is the meeting of two groups that move into an empty area, migration of one group to another group area, the practice of exchange, their close cultural ties amongst old neighbor, their education or so-called "contact study". Judging from the factors of contact two language groups, the two groups are not indigenous groups so that each other is not invaded or penetrated their respective territories. Antarctica, as a place where there is no human population that settled there, is an example of language contact. Scientists from around the world to perform mutual language contact in camp as long as they are there. Displacement may occur in peace or war, for example, the displacement of certain groups to conquer and control the territory of the original occupants. For example, initially the Indian community for the arrival of Europeans with friendly, and vice versa. However, the Europeans then willing to have American ground so that when the number of those who come are already quite a lot, they held the subjugation of native populations. This language contact events are not all going through a process of mutual hostility can occur

through the process of trading, the spread of religious mission, and intermarriage natives and Europeans. Factors their labor exchanges can encourage sociolinguist to make a distinction between the voluntary or forced to move. The difference is certainly affecting their attitude towards the destination country and ultimately common language contact. Factors language contact tells us that we are not looking for the origin of their contact, because it must have happened a long time ago when groups of neighbors. Contact language is one result of the merging of the annual (for defensive purposes) on a number of tribes suku mountains in the northwest United States when they moved to the valley to hunt buffalo. Language contact also occurs as a result of intermarriage. Furthermore, this could also occur as a result of trade conducted between neighboring groups. Multilingual widely used as a medium in a variety of disciplines, such as telecommunications, social, cultural, and sebagainya. Multilingual symptoms at this time is an issue of growing importance to the surface because of the presence of multilingual will determine the survival in a multicultural society. With multilingual resources, role in many fields it is easier to be taken in various areas of life. BIPA Language studies, including BIPA, emphasis on the student's' ability to express language functions in line with the goal of language study that develop communicative competence as stated by Hymes. Communicative competence language speakers according to Hymes is mastery instinctively that belongs to the speakers to use and understand natural language (appropriately) in the process of communicating or interacting with other human resources, and in conjunction with social context (Stern, 1983: 229 in Chaer) [2]. Hymes (in Dardjowidjojo) [5] propose four parameters to include communicative competence, namely: (1) Whether (and to what degree) Formally something is possible; (2) Whether (and to what degree) something is feasible; (3) Whether (and to what degree) something is Appropriate; (4) Whether (and to what degree) something is in fact done. BIPA effectiveness that emphasize on the function of the language is determined by a language teacher. Language teachers demanded to be able to apply the communicative approach which, according to Littlewood in Chaer [2], is a teaching approach that integrates the functions of language and grammar. He explained that the communicative teaching BIPA provides systematic attention to those aspects of the functional and structural language to then assemble them into a complete communicative view. Structural view of language focuses on grammatical system; whereas functional view focuses on the meaning contained by the forms of linguistic. Aside from that, language teachers also demanded attention to the principles of language studies. Lado (1979) in Chaer [2] put forward a number of principles, which include (1) most of the time the students used to practice and practice using the language and (2) develop a positive attitude towards the language learned. These two principles are considered highly relevant to the purpose and the communicative approach to language study above. Language teachers should also pay attention to the principles of

80

teaching BIPA is directly related to aspects of the study of writing, vocabulary, speaking, reading, and language (Department of Education) [7]. In connection with the study of the language, in the for Handbook Teaching and Learning Activities proposed several alternatives, which among other things stated that his training multilingual take place in phases with cascading pre-communication activities and then communication activities (Department of Education) [7]. The principle of the study was in line with the opinion of Littlewood [6]. BIPA Importance is also related to the results of studies showing a positive effect on the child. Various studies as stated Hoff (2005) shows that if children are taught correct for multilingual learning at an early age as a whole can stimulate a child's development. Other studies have shown that children who learn multilingual early age are usually more successful in life because it was used to dealing with a variety of languages and the languages into communication media when children become adults and enter the world of work. We agree that the benefits of multilingual learning at an early age include everything from increasing the ability of creativity and children have a greater understanding of the culture. According Chaer and Agustina [8], in a multilingual society there would be a second language teaching (and possibly third). In fact, a second language can be the national language, the official language of the state, regional official language, or even a foreign language (not the native language of the indigenous natives). The following may be determined several factors that can realize the success of BIPA, the motivational factors, age, and formal presentation.

from the activities carried out; (8) toward attitudes toward the target activity. Gardner and Lambert (in Chaer) [2] says that motivation has two functions, namely, integrative and instrumental function. Integrative function ie. if the pushing human resource motivation to learn a language for their desire to communicate with people speaking it or be a member of the language community. Instead, the motivation to work is instrumental if the motivation pushing human resource BIPA have the willingness to learn it for a beneficial purpose or because the impulse to obtain a job or social mobility in society that language. b. Age Indicators There is the assumption that learning a second language, children better and successful than in the adult human (if starting from zero alike). It is shown that the addition to the motivation factor, was the age factor also contributes to the success of learning a second language. Children seem to be easier to quickly understand, whereas HR adults seem to be more difficulty in acquiring a second language proficiency levels. From the results of research conducted by some experts (Chaer) [2], it was concluded that the factor of age (age) are not separated by other factors, as an influential factor in the teaching BIPA. Age differences affect the speed and success of learning a second language on aspects of phonology, morphology, and syntax, but does not affect the acquisition sequence. c. Formal Study Type As in the preceding discussion, that in this type of BIPA there are two types, namely naturalistic and formal types in the classroom. Formal type, meaning that everything is already prepared better. With their teachers, organized matter, curricula, methods, media, learning, etc.. These factors affect the speed and success in acquiring a second language because of various factors and variables have been prepared and held intentionally so that the goal will be quickly met. In Chaer [2], Rofi'udin stated that classroom interaction is part of BIPA formally potentially influence the speed of second language acquisition which resulted in the absorption of input into the intake.Teaching BIPA directed to learning authentic (authentic learning),which is a learning approach that allows students to explore, discuss, and build significantly concepts and relationships, which involves real problems and projects that are relevant to the student (Donovan, Bransford & Pallegrino, 1999). In addition, the use of authentic materials (authentic-materials) will greatly assist learners, especially for those who are not familiar with Indonesian altogether.

a. Their motivation It can not be denied that if we want to learn a second language, then what is needed is the encouragement, desires, or goals to be achieved. It will be different when compared to HR without based urge, desire, and purpose or motivation. According KBBI [9], motivation is the impetus that arise in SDM consciously or not to perform an act with a specific purpose. So, basically teaching BIPA motivation in the form of encouragement that comes from inside the learner that caused him to have the strong desire to learn a second language. Motivation can be defined as the power (energy) of human resource which may cause the level of persistence and enthusiasm in carrying out an activity, whether sourced from within the individual itself (intrinsic motivation) and external individuals (extrinsic motivation). How strong is the motivation of the individual will determine much of the behavior of the display quality, both in the context of learning, work and life more .. The study of motivation has long had a special attraction for educators, managers, and researchers, particularly those related to interest efforts to achieve the performance (achievement) of human resource. Ma'mun [10] suggested that in order to understand the motivation of individuals can be seen from several indicators, including: (1) the duration of the activity; (2) frequency of activities; (3) the persistence of the activity; (4) grit, tenacity and ability in facing obstacles and difficulties; (5) devotion and sacrifice to achieve goals; (6) the level of aspirations to be achieved by the activities carried out; (7) the level of qualification achievement or product(output)were achieved

BIPA for Industry In the era of globalization, the presence of foreign workers in various fields of work can not be avoided. For the local work force ready to face competition by enhancing the required quality. According to him, labor mobility between countries of ASEAN to the service sector in the framework of the integration of AEC comes into force 2015. Therefore Indonesia strategic location which can be a gateway between the continent north of the equator and the south, it is not

81

surprising that many foreign SDM come to Indonesia, especially with will be the opening of free trade. HR foreigners who flocked to Indonesia profession ranging from industrial workers to the economic consultants. Would be very helpful if they obtain teaching BIPA. This is a great opportunity and potential that should be utilized by the teaching BIPA. BIPA Teaching study is to facilitate and accommodate the human resources needs of foreigners who want to speak Indonesian and wish to know the culture of Indonesia. Therefore, mastery or competence can facilitate HR BIPA interested to know and understand the culture in which they work. From the competence of BIPA, it is known uniqueness, distinctiveness, diversity, work ethic, behavior, and the richness of Indonesian culture can be studied and used as a reference to put into practice by HR foreigners in an effort to improve the quality and qualifications and to become human resources ready to use in a business or industry in the workplace MEA 2015. BIPA Competence HR foreign besides can be applied in industry in Indonesia, can also be used for teaching the language, students of language and culture, or staff at foreign embassies in Jakarta. Multilingual competence can be an alternative to provide the HR who know Indonesian culture as well as one excellent step to prepare for the MEA, 2015.

4) BIPA was studied because the motivation to obtain a job or social mobility in the communities in that language. 5) BIPA's success depends on the motivation factor, age, and formal presentation. 6) BIPA competence can facilitate foreign human resources in Indonesia are interested to know and understand the culture of Indonesia in order to take part in the world of work in the context of MEA, 2015. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

IV. CONCLUSIONS Based on the above discussion, the research concluded as follows. 1) Development of communication technology, globalization, the rapid education of the language led to the needs of society and the progress of time-shifted indirectly mix between languages. 2) With multilingual resources, role in many fields it is easier to be taken in various areas of life. 3) BIPA learning is learning that stimulate the improvement of language skills and creativity acquired speakers for a broader understanding of the culture.

[13] [14]

82

Sumarsono and P. Partana, Sosiolinguistik. Yogyakarta: Word, 2002. A.Chaer, Psycholinguistics: theoretical studies. Jakarta: Rineka Reserved, 2009. H. Kridalaksana, Dictionary of Linguistics. Jakarta: PT Gramedia, 2008. S.G.Thomason, Language contact. Edinburg: Edinburg University Press Ltd, 2001. S. Dardjowidjojo, Psycholinguistics. Jakarta: Yayasan torch Indonesia, 2003. .Littlewood, Communicative Language Teaching; An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985. Department of Education, Handbook for Teaching and Learning Activities, 1993. A. Chaer, and A. Loenie, Sociolinguistics: IntroductionEarly.Jakarta: Rineka Reserved, 2010. Language Center of National Education Indonesian dictionary. Jakarta: Language Center, 2008. A. Ma'mun, Psychology Education. Jakarta: Teen Rosda paper, 2001. C. Alwasilah, Sociology of Language. Bandung: Angkasa, 1985. H.D.Brown, Principles of Learning and Teaching. San Fancisco: Pearson Longman, 2007. Paulston and Tucker, Sociolinguistic the Essential Readings. USA: Blackwell Publishing Ltd, 2003. I.D.P. Wijana and M. Rohmadi, Sosiolingustik Study of Theory and Analisis.Yogyakarta: Student Library, 2010.

Optimization Language Learning in Achieving Globally Competence Student Ainur Rohmah 1) 

Abstract. Transformation of technoloy, economy and social occur in rapid way. This influence all of education fields. Foreign language learning is one of the fields that is influenced by this situation. To meet this situation students need extensive and deep knowledge of everything in the world and skill to get in touch with people in various culture and countries. They need these to make them become responsible and useful citizens in this global era. To realize it, they need competent teachers and appropriate instructions in their classroom. So the students will be globally competent students and then globally competent citizens. In language learning the students have to have five standars for foreign language that is set out in five areas known as five’s C. They are Communicating, Culture, Connecting, Comparing and Community. This paper will discuss again the existence of five’s C in language learning.. Keywords: language learning, global competence should know and be able to do as they study and learn to communicate in languages beyond English”. It refers to what a student should know and be able to do at different levels of proficiency. In addition, beginning in the 1990s, the language teaching profession in the US adopted a standards- based approach to language education. Whereas, it focuses on a student’s proficiency with the approach has important implications for both curriculum and assessment. Meanwhile, the standards are correlated with five broad goal areas, referred to as “ The Five C’s”. Furthermore, the Task Force of the National Standards in Foreign Language Education Project (2006), citied in National Capital Language Resource Center [3] described that: “The Five C’s are communication, cultures, connections, comparisons, and communities. These goals focuse on how language is used in real-life situations; they assume that students learn a language so that they can use it. To work within the standards framework, you as a language teacher, need to keep the following perspective mind. What will the students gain-by the end of this lesson, this thematic unit, this year- in communication ability, cultural knowledge, understanding of the nature of language and culture, and ability to use the language to acquire information and participate in the communities where it is spoken?” When the students can use language skill in real-life situation and the teacher as a language teacher can keep the following perspective mind, be sure that students become optimally prepared for participation in a global world. In strategic context, it’s proper if the space and chances for students to take care of creative texts are prepared in order to make their orientation is not only to the practical devices. Deflection orientation that are relied on thegrounds of science and technology progress that exclusively tends to abandon the creative text and put it on a mere secondary and subordinate role, undoubtedly important to be straightened with a number of possible alternatives.. The literary works are also wonderful utterances that share us some important

I. INTRODUCTION A language that is recognized and understood by people everywhere. Moreover, in many parts of the world that language has been established, English. According to Crystal [1], “ Englis is a global language”. English is the language globalization. Everywhere, anywhere today and most certainly tomorrow, English is to be present in the life of every citizen around the globe. In fact wherever we go, we see English signs and advertisements. Whenever we enter to the restaurants or hotels in another country, English as a main tool to communicate likes they will understand English and there will be an English menu. It means that people all over the world are trying to learn English so that they may compete globally. Recently, it could be avoided that so many countries were needing to talk to each other so much. The people wished to travel to many places in the world. The statements above are the answer from the question of “ Why do we need a global language?”. Meanwhile, Crystal [1] asserts that there are some dangers of a global language: 1) it will make people lazy about learning other languages, or reduce their opportunities to do so, 2) it will hasten the disappearance of minority languages, or- the ultimate threat- make all other languages unnecesarry, and 3) a pearson needs only one language to talk to someone else- other languages will simply die away. It means that it’s important for us to face up to these fears and to recognize that they are widely held. And when a language dies, so much is lost. Moreover, the world experiences unprecedented change, lives of individuals in all aspects of society have become related with what is happening locally, nationally, and globally. The future that students will face about things from what could have been imagined in the 21th century. Where at the time, America has been the world’s most powerful country and they have brought the English language to other countries in the world. According to Aoki [2]“The students

83

‘spiritual food’. The literary text is also a reality where humans are happy to rest his soul that is not clear. In literature, the experiences of humanity laid off. Appreciative Reading lesson has the same characteristics to the information processing lesson characteristics that focusing on creative-critical reading activity. Curriculum 2013 has the conceptual framework of learning activities in the realm of attitudes acquired through the activity of receiving, running, cherish, appreciate and practice. The realm of knowledge gained through the activity of remembering to apply, analyse, evaluate, and create. The realm of skills acquired through observing, asking, trying, and reasoning, presenting, and creating activity. The process of learning in the educational unit must be held in an interactive, inspiring, fun, challenging, motivating the students to actively participate and provide enough space for innovation, creativity, and independence in accordance with their talents, interests, and physical and psychological development of learners (Permendikbud, No 65 Tahun 2013). The conceptual framework of the curriculum in 2013 had a very close attachment to the concept of learning model processing information presented Joyce & Weil, synectic strategy Arends opinion and Slavin. At the practical level, this attachment appears in the realm of the standard skills through observing activity, ask, try, reasoning, presenting, and creating. This is line with the appreciative learning reading strategies (process) aesthetic-receptive criticalcreative. Learning outcomes (post reading activities) provides the opportunity for students to channel desires, ideals, love, longing, concerns, and thoughts in the form of student creations.

Fig. 1: Kachru’s 1985 circles

Based on figure 1 above, in the inner circle there are some countries such as Britain, Us, Australia etc. Where English is the primary language, dominated by the mothertongue varieties. It is a model refers to the traditional bases of English. And the outer circle contained countries where English had become an official or widely- used second language. It connsists of the earlier phases of the spread of English in non-native settings, where the language has become part of a country's chief institutions. This included India, Nigeria, Singapore, Jamaica, etc. Finally, the expanding circle represented those countries where English learnt as a foreign language such us Italy, Brazil, Rusia, China, Polandia, etc. English is taught as a foreign language as the most useful vehicle of international communication. It can see that how the proportion of native and non-native speakers has already in the last few decades. Furthermore, the varieties of English used could be seen for every circle that the inner circle is said to be norm providing. The English used in the outer circle is considered as normdeveloping. And The English used in the Expanding Circle is regarded as norm dependent. It can assumed that English as a global language.

A. What is English? English is an international English, in this globalization era. It’s the official language in a large number of countries. That is a lot of people to meet and speak to. ‘English’ is a West Germanic language that was first spoken in early medieval England and is now a global lingua franca. It relates to Harmer [4] states that English as a Lingua Franca (ELF). Although the reality of global or world English(s) has caused some people to become very interested in what actually happens when it is used as a lingua franca- that is between two people do not share the same language and for whom English is not their mother tongue. In addition, English is the most commonly spoken language in the United Kingdom, the United States, Canada, Australia, Ireland, and New Zealand, and is widely spoken in some areas of the Caribbean, Africa, and South Asia. It is the third most common native language in the world, after Mandarin and Spanish.

C. World English education Around the world English is taught in a bewildering variety of situations. In many countries for the first appears in the primary curriculum, but many colleges or universities in those and other countries continue to find that their participants to use it are insufficiently competent in English use. Graddol, citied in Harmer [4] points out that good English is an entry requirement for much tertiary education in a global market where English give the user a ‘competitive advantage.’ There are some countries taught English in private language schools and institutions all over the world and even in specialised English villages, where students live in English- only environment. Moreover, the term CLIL (Content Language Integrated Learning) as a growing trend now, where in secondary schools, a subject is taught through the medium of English (a situation which is common in some bilingual schools), the language and the subject are taught side-by-side. Besides those explanation, there are many situations as a thought-out where English is studied not just for some unspecified general purpose, for example academic purposes (EAP/English for Academic Purpose) or as English for business. Business English learning and teaching has grown rapidly over the last 20 years. Therefore, it takes place

B. English as a global language Kachru (1985), citied in Harmer [4] described that the world of English in terms of three circles; the inner circle, the outer circle and the expanding circle. It could be seen in figure 1.

84

before students enter commercial life or during their life in the business world. From the beginning, English language teaching is in transition, likes at school it has taught general English, and for whom many of teacher exams. For example in Indonesia English subject as one of four subjects should be exemined on the final exam at junior high school. And when we discussed about CLIL as a standard model in secondary schools, likes the demand for private top-up learning may diminish. But if students come from primary education with a good working command of English, they will be competent English speakers by the time they get to university level. Based on the situations and the conditions above, from now may have to think more carefully about what is most appropriate for the student needs at the time. According to Graddol’s words in Harmer [4] “... may have to think more carefully about what they teach and what ‘added value’ they can offer”. Moreover, Jenkins suggested that we need to expose our students to the reality of world English (Harmer) [4]. As students become more advanced, the students should be made more and more aware of the different Englishes on offer. However, we will have to ensure that they are not swamped by diversity, but rather guided gently into an appreciation of the global phenomenon that is English.

integration of world language standards into the planning and delivery of curriculum, instruction, and assessment. Here not only for students but parents, teachers and the broader community are joined together to achieve it. E. Five C’s of World Language Education The purposes and uses of world languages are as diverse as the students who study them (Aoki) [2]. As we know in globalization era, many people compete each other to achieve their success. Therefore, for some students study foreign language in hopes of findings a rewarding career in the international marketplace or government service. Others are interested in the intellectual challenge and cognitive benefits that accrue to those who master multiple languages. And still others they think that it’s fun, whereas they can speak another language but they can or know learn their cultures too. One of the approach world language study, have something to fulfill a graduation requirement. Whereas the standards task force identified five goal areas. They are Communication, Cultures, Connections, Comparisons, and Communities—the five C’s of world language education. It is displayed in figure 2.

D. Language Learning Harmer [4] states that the language we speak or write is governed by a number of rules and styles. In daily life to convey the meaning of our context or to transfer the information have, we always use language as a mean to communicate each other. Nowdays, there are some choices about the language they use based on what they want to say, what medium they are operating in, how text are typically constructed in such situations, what grammar they can use and what words and expressions they can find to express their meanings. Because there are many medias provide in the technology are today. They can choose their expression by writing or speaking, texting or emailing. Likes text messaging has developed in the shortest possible space, more formal letters are written out in full, in emails we will often use constracted forms. Children are not taught language, nor do they set out to learn it conciously (Harmer) [4]. Rather they get it subconciously as a result of the massive exposure to it which they get from the adults and other children around them. It’s that simple that the children instinct and mental capability will born with act upon the language they hear and transforms it into a knowledge of the language and an ability to speak it. Language learning is broadly defined as developing the ability to communicate in the second / foreign language. And in achieving globally competence students, the National Standards for Learning Languages Preparing for the 21st Century, available from the American Council on the Teaching of Foreign Languages prepared students to know and be able to do as they study and learn to communicate in languages beyond English. Especially, the purpose is to provide strong support for students, parents, teachers, and the broader community by guiding the alignment and

Fig. 2 The five C’s of world language education

F. World Languages Learning Standards The five “C” goal areas (Communication, Cultures, Connections, Comparisons, and Communities) stress the application of learning a language beyond the instructional setting. The goal is to prepare learners to apply the skills and understandings measured by the Standards, to bring a global competence to their future careers and experiences. Based on Washington State K-12 World Languages Learners devides languages learning standards into eleven standards in five goal areas (Aoki) [2]. They are as follows: 1. Communication Communicate effectively in more than one language in order to function in a variety of situations and for multiple purposes. 1.1. Interpersonal Communication: Learners interact and negotiate meaning in spoken, signed, or written conversations to share information, reactions, feelings, and opinions. 1.2. Interpretive Communication: Learners understand, interpret, and analyze what is heard, read, or viewed on a variety of topics. 1.3. Presentational Communication: Learners present information, concepts, and ideas to inform, explain, persuade, and narrate on a variety of topics using

85

appropriate media and adapting to various audiences of listeners, readers, or viewers.

G. Globally Competence Global competence describes a body of knowledge about world regions, cultures, and global issues, and the skills and dispositions to engage responsibly and effectively in a global environment. According to NEA (2010) global competence refers to the acquisition of in-depth knowledge and understanding of international issues, an appreciation of and ability to learn and work with people from diverse linguistic and cultural background, proficiency in a foreign language and skills to function productively in an interdependent world community. The above definition contains four basic elements. They are as follows: 1. International awareness. This constitutes the knowledge and understanding of world history, socioeconomic and political systems, and other global events. This awareness includes the understanding that local and national can have international implications. An individual who is aware of the broader world environment also recognizes that an individual’s action can affect others byond one’s own borders. 2. Appreciation of cultural diversity. This entails the ability to know, understand, and apreciate people from other cultures along with the capacity to acknowledge other points of view about pressing world issues. Awareness and appreciation of cross-cultural differences,and the willingness to accept those differences opens doors for opportunities to engage in productive and respectful cross-cultural relations. 3. Proficiency in foreign language. The ability to understand, read, write and speak in more than one language enhances cross-cultural communication skills. The knowledge of additional language opens doors to the understanding of other cultures and people who speak those languages. 4. Competitive skill. The ability to compete globally entails the acquisition of extensive knowledge of interntional issues. To be able to compete, students need high-level thinking skills that enhance creativity and innovation. Students who gain a through understanding of the economic, social and technological changes taking place across the globe enhance their ability to compete in the worldwide market place. Based on the explanation above, it can be concluded that global competence is the ability to understand and take action toward current global issues. Devlin states that the globally competence student has to have: 1) Knowledge of and curiosity about the world’s history, geography, cultures, environmental and economic systems, and current international issues. 2) Language and cross-cultural skills to communicate effectively with people from other countries, understand multiple perspectives, and use primary sources from around the globe. And 3) A commitment to ethical citizenship.

2. Culture Interact with cultural competence and understanding. 2.1 Relating Cultural Practices to Perspectives: Learners use the language to investigate, explain, and reflect on the relationship between the practices and perspectives of the cultures studied. 2.2 Relating Cultural Products to Perspectives: Learners use the language to investigate, explain, and reflect on the relationship between the products and perspectives of the cultures studied. 3. Connection Connect with other disciplines and acquire information and diverse perspectives in order to use the language to function in academic and career-related situations. 3.1 Making Connections: Learners build, reinforce, and expand their knowledge of other disciplines while using the language to develop critical thinking and to solve problems creatively. 3.2 Acquiring Information and Diverse Perspectives: Learners access and evaluate information and diverse perspectives that are available through the language and its cultures. 4. Comparison Develop insight into the nature of language and culture in order to interact with cultural competence. 4.1 Language Comparisons: Learners use the language to investigate, explain, and reflect on the nature of language through comparisons of the language studied and their own. 4.2 Cultural Comparisons: Learners use the language to investigate, explain, and reflect on the concept of culture through comparisons of the cultures studied and their own. 5. Communities Communicate and interact with cultural competence in order to participate in multilingual communities at home and around the world. 5.1 School and Global Communities: Learners use the language both within and beyond the classroom to interact and collaborate in their community and the globalized world. 5.2 Lifelong Learning: Learners set goals and reflect on their progress in using languages for enjoyment, enrichment, and advancement. Nowdays, no or less understanding about culture has big influence for a country to do cooperate, negotiate and compromise with another country in the world. One of the solution by promote cultures and its differencies. The aims are introducing and showing about it, then another countries can know and understand. Therefore in this occasion English as a foreign language has a good role as a key to open the world.

86

II. CONCLUSIONS If teachers want to prepare students for success in a globally world, students had better optimize language learning well in facing the development of globalization era. Based on the previous discussion, there are five C’s goal areas where these five goals define the purposes of language learning. It is  the Standards for Language Learning in the 21st Century.   Five C’s goal become a standard for the learners to native or non native speaker in the world. Moreover, these standards can assist teachers in creating learning tasks that will move students toward language competence. When the students can use language skill in real-life situation and the teacher as a language teacher can keep the perspective mind, be sure that students become optimally prepared for participation in a global world. REFERENCES [1]

[2] [3] [4] [5]

[6]

D. Crystal, English as a Global Language. (online). accessed on http://globalteachinglearning.com/standards/5cs.shtml, on Sunday, 1st August 2016), 2003. M.A. Aoki, Washington State K-12 World Languages Learning Standards(Version 1.3), 2015. ACTFL, Standards for foreign language learning in the 21st century (3rd ed.). Yonkers, NY: National Standards in Foreign Language Education Project, 2016. J. Harmer, The Practice of English Language Teaching(4th ed). Longman, 2007. C. Goldenberg, Teaching English Language Learners. (online). (accessed on ttp://www.aft.org/sites/default/files/periodicals/goldenberg.pdf, on Sunday, 1st August 2016.. A. Moelle. Journal: Building intercultural competence in the language classroom. University of Nebraska-Lincoln.

87

Vocabulary and Grammar Learning Correlation in Intermediate Japanese Language Imelda 1) 1)

Hasanuddin University, Makassar, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Learning vocabulary is one point to support the language abilities that are listening, speaking, reading and writing. This study focused on the correlation of vocabulary and grammar learning of intermediate student, Japanese study of Hasanuddin University. By including 26 corresponds, the author conducted statistical analysis Spearman coefficient correlation test method. This test was established to understand the great correlation among variables, in this research, the variables were Vocabulary and Grammar. The intermediate students of Japanese study in Hasanuddin University got grammar score of 56,128, meanwhile, the vocabulary score of 45,266. The grammar score is higher than the vocabulary score. However, correlation between vocabulary and grammar is on intermediate that is 0.418. To increase the vocabulary knowledge of the intermediate student, the points that need to be prepared beside letter are particle, word changing, word colocation, verb, and sentence context. Mastering on those hopefully can increase the correlation between vocabulary and grammar. Keywords: correlation, vocabulary, grammar, supported point, achievement as equivalents for concepts which they can already express in their native language. Tarigan [4] said that the Second Language Acquisition, mother tongue (L1) and foreign languages are equally requires a process of language acquisition which is done by a child naturally and learning in the classroom (in this case the students taught by teachers as a substitute of the parents). During the acquisition, there would appear many errors made by learners, including ignorance of the meaning of foreign language vocabulary, the word incompatibility with context sentences, etc. Interference in foreign language acquisition is more likely due to input of their mother tongue language learners. Edward and Rebecca [5] said that most students who study a foreign language, it initially will be influenced by the native language and then gradually will begin to be accurate and structured. Tarigan [4] further said that basically foreign language learners will be able to know and understand the vocabulary of concreteor tangible than the abstract vocabulary. The difficulty usually arises in the use of the word in a sentence for example verb tenses and formation in or the use of vocabulary in the context of the sentence. Okabe [2] said one of the factors that might block or delay the vocabulary acquisition of foreign language learners is their capability to handle and understand the learning burden. According to Nation, “The learning burden of an item is the amount of effort required to learn it. Understanding the burden is simple than learning new words that are taught and learned. Yachi Michiko [6] said that in terms of second language communication acquisition, it is generally understood as a vocabulary competence. The understanding presupposes that if someone ever used a language other than his mother language then any one may have a similar experience in the language. Furthermore, bilingual related studies explain more about the ability to speaking this case vocabulary

I. INTRODUCTION The Study about vocabulary is not as common as the study of grammar and Japanese studies. However, Indonesia started to develop the study about vocabulary. In 2014, ASPBJI (Indonesia Nihongo Kyouiku Gakkai) held a seminar about Vocabulary Education, Vocabulary Acquisition of Japanese Language Education. At the same time, there was correction of vocabulary and word or go/tango which was misunderstood. It is important as the starting point to see the vocabulary and part of vocabularies become a research theme such as synonym, lexical word and etc. The vocabulary studies cannot be separated in Japanese learning. Soepardjo said that four skills are listening, speaking, writing, and reading skills become a last target in Japanese language learning [1]. The vocabulary learning is important in achieving those targets. If the understanding about vocabulary, grammar and kanji is weak, then those four skills will become low. This study focused on the correlation between vocabulary and grammar Japanese in an intermediate Japanese study student in Japanese study of Hasanuddin University. The objective of this study was to map the problem which are experienced by the intermediate students (level 3 students), and produce Japanese learner which is able in vocabulary and grammar. Pikulski (Okabe)[2] defined, "vocabulary acquisition sequal to knowledge acquisition. There is no question that people who have large speaking vocabularies". Furthermore Okabe said that by mastering on the vocabulary, the learner can have the ability of speaking, listening, reading and even writing. The more learners master on vocabulary, the greater the second language learner understand the target language. Rivers [3] stated exessive vocabulary learning early in the course gives students the impression that the most important thing about learning a language in accumulating new words

88

ability. “第二言語でのコミュニケーションの際、一般に さゆう 「語彙力」と呼ばれるものが理解を大きく ,左右 することは、自分の母語以外の言語を使わなければな らない状況を体験したことがある者ならば、誰もが経 験したことがあるだろう。また、「語彙力」から言語 能力が分かるということもバイリンガルに関する研究 から明らかとなっている。（Ono, 1994) Further more,in 1987, research on the acquisition of vocabulary in language acquisition are categorized into four (Read, 2009 in Yachi Michiko) [6]“(1) キーワード法や学習者の第一言語の翻 訳がついた単語リストなどを使った体系的な語彙学習。 （2）読解活動や聴解活動を通して学習者が出会うコン テクストの中で新しい語の地域を独特していく偶発付 随的語彙学習（incidental vocabulary learning）. (3) 新 しい語に学習者が出会ったとき、コンテクストからの 手がかりをどのように使って新しい語の意味を推測し ているか。（４）コミュニケーションを行っている場 面で未知の語に出会ったとき、学習者が用いるコミュ ニケーションストラテジー”. Based on the four types of research about word acquisition, then Yachi Michiko [6] summarized the types of research in acquisition of vocabulary growing abroad as research any vocabulary knowledge of learners through methods of psychology, research about the differences in input knowledge of learner's mother tongue (L1) and foreign languages learning, which object in particular is a difficult language acquired in the acquisition of word( 語 ), the research about fault acquisition words of the mother tongue of the learner, the research about the error rate of the acquisition grammatically of Japanese competence as well as the research process of the acquisition of vocabulary who was appeared on the natural condition of learners. (1)心理学的手法を用いて、学習者の語彙知識を探ろう とするもの（谷口他 1994；小野 2001；一二三 1996）, （2）研究対象とする語を習得困難な語に限定し、学習 者と母語話者の語彙知識の違いを探ろうとするもの。 （杉村他 1994；松田 2000a、2000b、水口 2002）（3） 文法的制約を受ける語の習得度の違いを日本語能力の 違 いから 研究 したも の。 （佐藤 ・藤 井 1999；寺 田 2001）（4）学習者の自然な状況での産出の元に、語彙 さぐ 習得課程を ,探るもの。（生田 2001；松本 1997） （5）語彙習得に影響を与える要素を実験、観察などを 通して探るもの。（横山 2001；谷内 2001). Read (2002) in Yachi Michiko [6] gives three questions about the acquisition of vocabulary systematically, that is (1) どのような語の特徴が学習難易度を決めているか. At this question, Yachi Michiko gave examples of Ellis and Beaton’s research (1993) that in terms of the psychology, the learner will be easy or difficult to obtain vocabulary because they are influenced by several factors, such as writing, pronunciation, lexical as well as the length of a word, similarity of word sound（２）機械的な暗記よりも高価 的な方法は何か。このような疑問点が出されているが、 実際に単語リスト等を使った体系的語彙学習は有効な のであろうか。ここから、次の問題を設定することが

89

で き る だ ろ う 。 This question was written by Michiko Yachi [6] by quoting a research from Hulstijn (1997) that the learners who just memorize vocabulary are not effective because it can not last long in the memory. Therefore, Schmitt and Schmitt (1995) argumented it needs to be assisted with the key words in the form of a note book that contains vocabulary, pronunciation, use in a sentence, and even to the point of writing kanji (Yachi Michiko) [6]. First language learner (L1) like learners from Indonesia who recognize Roman alphabet letters and study Japanese as their second language (L2) are likely to face difficulty not only from new words, but from Japanese characters which are hiragana, katakana and kanji as well. Furthermore, Okabe [2] states, “Japanese language learners in the beginner’s level struggle to understand and memorize words in Japanese while intermediate learners utilize on the words they are already familiar with to express a main word that is not yet encountered when it comes to communication. Long term goal of studying the language requires a learner to continously learn, be familiar and recall vocabulary.” Yamashita Kyo [7] divides the vocabulary of learning into intentional learning and incidental learning. The former one is a learning that aims at acquiring vocabulary directly, as for the latter one is a direct learning to obtain secondary vocabulary through learning that are not focusing on vocabulary learning such asdokkai and choukai. 語彙学習は意図的語彙学習は語彙の学習を目的とする 直接学習であり、付随的語彙学習は読解や聴解など語 彙学習以外の学習を通して副次的に語彙の習得がなさ れる面接的学習である。 Yamashita Kyo [7] further states that incidental vocabulary learning done through a contextual understanding is a series of educational activities in a holistic manner that will improve other learnings. II. METHOD This study used a quantitative method. It took place in Japanese Literature Studies Program, Hasanuddin University, using 26 respondents of third semester students who took Intermediate Japanese class. This study used multiple choice test instruments done for an hour, in which the questions tested to students were based onMinna no NihongoChukyuu Itextbook (chapter 1 - 6).Researchers created two categories, the first category focused on test of vocabulary (verb/Doushi) based on JLPT vocabulary and the second categories focused on grammar (vocabulary) oriented on how it is to make an appropriate sentence. The results of the test were then classified based on number of true and false answers and the relevance of respondent’s vocabulary and grammar knowledge. In this study, a statistical analysis was performed by incorporating Spearman’s correlation coeficient test. This test was conducted in order to determine how close the relationship between vocabulary variable and grammar variable. Criteria for decision-making in Spearman correlation coefficient test namely are if the value of Sig. 0.05, there is no significant correlation between variables.

Interpretation of Correlation Coeficient Value

13

53.846

Above av.

14

65.385

Above av.

15

61.538

Above av.

16

76.923

Above av.

0,00-0,20

Very low correlation

0,21-0,40

Low correlation 17

61.538

Above av.

0,41-0,60

Moderate correlation

18

65.385

Above av.

0,61-0,80

High correlation

19

50

Above av.

0,81-1,00

Perfect correlation

20

46.154

Above av.

Fig. 1 Interpretation of Correlation Value

21

30.769

Below av.

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION

22

0

Below av.

To obtain an overview of the collected data, it is necessary to review the minimum, maximum, average, and standard deviation of all the data. The following table is the descriptive statistics of the obtained data:

23

57.692

Above av.

24

34.615

Below av.

25

0

Below av.

26

46.154

Above av.

Std. Deviation Vocabulary 26 ,00 76,92 45,2663 19,43911 Grammar 26 13,33 86,67 55,1282 17,84453 Fig. 2 The average score obtained by the student in grammar question N

Min

Max

Mean

Fig. 3 Table of vocabulary mastery

Out of 26 students, there are 16 students who scored below average. They become majority in about 61.54% of the total respondents, and the rest 38.46% are they who score above average in vocabulary questions. Of the 16 students, there are two who did not get any correct answer on vocabulary question. If we pay closer attention, half of the students got their answer correct, but when faced with sentence context question, the word 取る (take) in the form of ~させてもらえませんか(あの端を＿＿ところで、車 を止めてください), most of them got wrong answer due to mistake in changing the verb (97%).Furthermore, the students when choosing the verb 渡る (cross) appear to have difficulties because the words are not understood, and the collocation of word 端 (bridge) itself.They tend to choose verbs 歩 く (roads),even though the answers are not appropriate in the context of the sentence. Next, in the sentence 自然を守るために, これ以上森の木をほしい __, available verbs are 切りないで (wrong usage), 切らないで, 切って (inappropriate for the context of the sentence), 切ら なくて (not acceptable forthe pattern above). In this kind of situation, most of the students would choose verb 切って. Researcher assumes that the learner tends to choose verb and the change ~ te because they are affected by pattern ~ tehoshii that mostly appears in Minna no Nihongo II textbook in the positive form. And then, in 先生に明日まで レポートを出すように __ question, students had not been able to distinguish between passive and active verbs. Actually, this matter can be detected by the presence of clue on passive verb particle thatis に. As for the matter of ラッシューを __ ために, 毎朝, 6 時半に家を出て会社に 行く and question どうすればこの地球から戦争を __ こ とができるのだろうか。, both of them presented さける

The data shows that there are students who cannot get any correct answer on the vocabulary questions. The average score obtained by the students in grammar questionsis comparatively higher (55,128) than that in vocabulary questions (45.266). Standard deviation value indicatesthe variety of student’s mastery over vocabulary and grammar. For further details regarding mastery of vocabulary and grammar, please take a look toward this following table: Resp. Number

Vocab. Score

Average Score

Category

1

23.077

Below av.

2

38.462

Below av.

3

23.077

Below av.

4

30.769

Below av.

5

53.846

Above av.

6

38.462

Below av. 45,266

7

50

Above av.

8

73.077

Above av.

9

46.154

Above av.

10

38.462

Below av.

11

57.692

Above av.

12

53.846

Above av.

90

*. Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level (2tailed). Fig. 5 The results of Spearman correlation coefficient test

and な く す verbs which were already learned by the students, but still around 74% of them gave incorrect answer. Resp Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Grammar Score 33.333 13.333 20 86.667 86.667 80 60 66.667 66.667 66.667 66.667 66.667 66.667 60 53.333 60 60 53.333 46.667 40 40 46.667 60 46.66667 40 46.66667

Average Score

Description

The above table reveals the value of Sig. is 0,.33. The value is smaller than 0.05,therefore it can be concluded that there is a significant correlation between the vocabulary and grammar variables. The correlation coefficient is 0.418, so it can be categorized in moderate correlation category.

Below av. Below av. Below av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Above av. Below av. Above av. Above av. Below av. Below av. Below av. Below av. Below av. Above av. Below av. Below av. Below av.

55.128

IV. CONCLUSION Based on the discussion above, the acquisition of grammar is amounted to 56.128, while the vocabulary items amounted to 45.266. Grammar acquisition is comparatively higher than the one from vocabulary. Even so, the correlation between vocabulary and grammar is at moderate correlation coefficient that is 0.418.In addition, intermediate vocabulary and grammar acquisition seems very diverse. Respondents have not been able to master new words and those sort of words are rarely used by the respondents. Furthermore, the ability to recognize the pattern of passive, causative sentences, and the use of particles collocated with verbs is still in adequate. Thus, vocabulary acquisition still needs to be improved and variety of exercises such as reading, doing exercises, writing and listening is essential. REFERENCES

Fig. 4 Table of grammar mastery

[1]

For mastery of grammar, there were 14 respondents who scored below average. The percentage is about 53.85% of the total respondents while the remaining 46.15% scored above average. Comparing between the percentage of respondents who scored above average on vocabulary and grammar question, the latter’s percentage (46.15%) is comparatively higher than the former’s (38.46%). In grammar 動詞勧誘形とおもう (, ~ ようとしたら, and pattern なくてはなりません, there are 77% errors occurred. Errors that occurred are mainly caused byDoushi verb which is used in basicpresent form (dictionary form) present and not the verb ~ ou (kanyuukei). As for 動詞たがります grammar, students who choose the right answer are about 84%. Spearman Vocab. 's rho

CorrelationCoe fficient Sig. (2-tailed) N Grammar CorrelationCoe fficient Sig. (2-tailed) N

Vocab.

Grammar

1,000

.418*

.

.033

26

26

.418*

1.000

.033

.

26

26

[2]

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

91

Djojok, Soepardjo. Japanese Vocabulary in Japanese Learning (Original Title: KosaKata BahasaJepangdalamPembelajaranBahasaJepang).Semarang: Semarang Dian Nuswantoro University. 2014. Okabe, Rowena. Integration of Instructional Strategies for a meaningful Japanese Vocabulary Acquisition. A journal of vocabulary aquisition. Semarang Dian Nuswantoro University. Semarang. 2(2) 106-107. 2014. Rivers, Wilga. Teaching Foreign Language Skills. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 1968. Tarigan, H.Guntur. Pengajaran Kosa Kata. Bandung: Angksa Pura. 2011. Edward David dan Rebecca M. Valette. Classroom Languages and English languages. London :Horacourt Brace Pulisher. 1977. Yachi, Michiko. Dai ni gengo toshite goi shuutoku kenkyuu no gainen. Nihongo to Japan: Nihongo kyouiku Janaaru. 2002. Yamashita, Kiyo. Effects of extensive reading on reading attitudes in a foreigner. __. Japan. 2012. (http://nflrc.hawaii.edu/rfl/October2013/.../yamashita.pdf, tanggal 15 Oktober 2015)

STRATEGY, APPROACH, METHOD, AND TECHNIQUE USED IN TRANSLATION LEARNING PROCESS Ninip Hanifah Akademi Bahasa Asing Borobudur Jakarta email: [email protected] Abstract The objectIve of this study was to understand comprehensively the strategy, approach, method, and technique of translation learning in the Foreign Language Academy of Borobudur, Jakarta.The study used qualitative ethnographic method.The data were collected through observation, interview, and documentation.The study indicates that the translation learning uses varieties ofstrategies, approaches, methods, and techniques.The strategy used is strategy of motivating students to learn, the approaches used are bottom-up and structural approaches, the method used are grammar translation method (GTM)anddirect method as well as methods which are oriented at Source Language (SL) and Target Language(TL).The techniques used are code switching and code mixing in which the students understand the translation learning more esily.The translation must be adapted to theculturalcontextof the source language. The students still made grammatical errors and had difficulty in translating idioms, for they hadn’t really understood the techniques of translation yet.The lecturer tended to translate the texts directly. She tended to use translation products than the process itself Keywords: ethnography, strategy, approach, method, technique I. INTRODUCTION Most textbooks used in the university environment in Indonesia is still written or published in foreign languages (especially English) but, on the other hand, the state of library and the ability of scholars and students in Indonesia to read English texts tend to be less adequate. This is likely due to their lack of ability to understand English. This situation has made the translation of books from sources in English into Indonesian become the need of the academic community.The activity of translation of foreign languages, especially English into Indonesian or vice versa, is becoming increasingly important in the future for the development of science and technology in Indonesia. Given the importance of translation as a means of teaching of science and technology,as a medium for cross-cultural communication, as well as a field of study that is interesting for language teaching, the strategies, approaches, methods, and techniques of learning need to be investigated. Skills of translating (written text) associated with two (of four) basic skills of language, namely reading and writing, as revealed by Johan (1988: 11), that in addition to understanding the text reading, also demandedgood mastery of Indonesian language,therefore translation can clearly understood by readers, but it does not shift from the meaning of the English text phrase which is translated. However, in fact it is not enough to conclude that if the person is capable of reading comprehension in English well and is also able to write in Indonesian quite good, or vice versa, it is not guaranteed that the person will be able to translate well. There are several other aspects that need to be of concern, among others, cross-cultural understanding, effectiveness and efficiency of sentences, grammar mastery of both languages, and understanding of the context and situation, as well as the understanding of linguistic diversity adequately. The important one, they have to be skillful in using strategy, approach, method, and technique in translation process.

Translation is a process that is not simple but it is complex, in the process of translating the text, translators need to pass through various stages, and in each stage there is often a complex issue that must be faced and solved. To improve the effectiveness and quality of teaching translationsubjects, it is necessary to get ideas to solve various problems and obstacles. Apart from analyzing the materialsof library, a qualitative research method of ethnography is the usual way and effective enough to uncover and solve various problems. The purpose of this study is to understand the strategies, approaches, methods and techniques of translations learning which are used as important elements in the process of translation. II. METHOD The research focus is the translation learning process in ABA Borobudur Jakarta, with subfocus: strategies of translation learning in the class, approach used in the study of translation, the learning method used in the translation, andthe technique utilized by lecturer in translation learning.This research data are in the form of field notes of observations ranging from campus environment, translation learning activities organized in the classroom or implemented by utilizing the campus environment. Field notes were also obtained from interviews with informants namely the English translation lecturer and the students. Another field notes are documents owned by English Department of Foreign Language Academy Borobudur, textbooks of translation courses, and students’ records or students’ works. The method used in this study is ethnography. According to Creswell (2008: 373) ethnographyis a qualitative research procedure to describe, analyze, and interpret a group related to culture on the pattern of actions, beliefs, and an evolving language. Core understanding of this ethnography is a cultural. To understand the evolving

92

culture, ethnographers researchers specifically taking the time to interview and collect documents concerning the study group. Qualitative-ethnographic study will describe the characteristics of a group or society as a subject studied. This study examines human behavior in natural situations from the perspectives of culture. According to Spradley (1980: 3) Ethnography is the work of describing a culture. The central aim of ethnography is to understand another way of life from the native's point of view. It means that ethnography tends to describe the culture and its aspects. The knowledge gained was used to interpret and find the behavior of the studied subjects, in this case the lecturer of translation who is involved in teaching and learning in the classroom.

equivalence achievement of message effect between the text of target language (TLT) and text of the source language (SLT) to the readers. In other words, the effect perceived by SLT readers should be equivalent with the effects experienced by TLT readers. (http://resources.transbahasa.com/2013/09/27/seri-teori-2teori-penerjemahan-nida,diakses 6 Juli 2015). The translation process needs to be understood by prospective translators so they can determine important steps in carrying out their duties. The translation process can not be separated from the mandate transfer and expression in TL by considering the style of language. As said by Suryawinata (1989: 48) that the translation is a complex process, so it is with learning translation. There are many other aspects that must be solved in addition to the language problems and then drilled to the students. Ordurari stated that if language were just a classification for a set of general or universal concepts, it would be easy to translate from a SL to a TL; furthermore, under the circumstances the process of learning a L2/second language would be much easier than it actually is. The difference between an SL and a TL and the variation in their cultures make the process of translating a real challenge. Among the problematic factors involved in translation are such as form, meaning, style, proverbs, idioms, etc. (http://www.translationjournal.net/journal/41culture.htm, diakses10 Januari 2017). Moentaha (2006: 9-10) stated that the translation process is the transformation of a text from one language to another language without changing the content of the original text. The translation process can take place due to the units of language: morpheme (the smallest unit of speech ), words, a series of words (word group, wordcombination, collocation), sentences (singular and plural) and text/discourse (unit of the largest language), Relevant research conducted by Hanna Suteja and ordurari which emphasized on matching theoretical foundation of the nature of language learning and the nature of translation itself, either from a foreign language into Indonesian and vice versa. Students still have many difficulties in using the strategies, approaches, methods, and techniques. Ordurari in his paper aims at scrutinizing whether there exists any point of similarity between those procedures and strategies and to identify which of those procedures and strategies seem to be more effective than the others. Sanjaya (2008: 126) states that strategy is a plan that contains a series of activities designed to achieve specific educational objectives. Learning strategies according to him are: (1) a plan of action, including the use of methods and utilization of various resources/strengths in learning, (2) a strategy designed to achieve certain goals. Before determining the strategy, it needs to formulate clear objectives that can be measured, because the goal is the spirit in the implementation of a strategy. Strategy is planning to achieve something, while the method can be used to implement the strategy. To reach the goal, the plan and the methodthat is going to teachin translation learning should be clear. According to Suryawinata and Sugeng Haryanto (2003: 67) translation strategies is a tactic of translator to

III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Translation, both oral and written, give more emphasis on the meaning or message delivered. Whether the translation results are obedient to shape their source language or not is not fundamental, the most important thing is the translation has the intent and meaning exactly the same/equivalent with the message of the source language. So there are accordances and similarities between source language (SL) and target language (TL) message, where the message constructed in target language reasonably printed to be accepted by target language users. Messages in target language is not measured by source language users. Ridwan stated that, translation is not merely replace the activities of the source language text (SLT) into the target language text (TLT), but rather should be seen as an act of communication, not just a collection of words and sentences. Translators need to see the translation of the two approaches, namely the process and products, as well as the need to be equipped with the intellectual tools such as capability in the source and the target language, knowledge about topic of the translation, application of personal knowledge, skills, and practical devices, that is the use of a reference source as well as the introduction of the immediate or indirect context. . (http://ridwanbahasa.com/2013/03/27/penerjemahan-prosesmetode-prosedur-teknik/, diakses 6 Juli 2015). The language translation involves the business of delivering a message from one language into another language, or alteration of source language to target language. The form of language is meant by the word, the lexicon search, grammatical structure (phrases, clauses, paragraphs , and others), either orally or in writing, as an act of communication. The shape is a process of human activity in the field of language (analysis), the result is a text for translation (synthesis) in which the meaning must be maintained to keep the same. The message in the diverting discourse will be comparable or correspond with the message on the original discourse which is in accordance with the cultural context of source language. Nida opinion quoted by Ridwan cited in the "Seriestheories of translation" defines translation as a process to reproduce the message equivalence in the target language, firstly in terms of meaning and secondly in terms of shape. The equivalence reproduced is a natural equivalence that has the same or closest message to the target language. Therefore, the main objective of translation is the

93

translate words/group of words or sentence in case the sentence can not be broken down into smaller units to translate. Differences in language systems and culture between SL and TL resulting non-equivalence. To overcome this difficulty, the translators using translation strategy. Translation strategy is part of the translation process and applied during the translation process taking place, both at the stage of SL text analysis as well as on the stage of transfering TL messages. Vinay and Darbelnet cited by Enani in “Seri teori (4) Vinay dan Darbelnet-Trans bahasa”, explains that there are several techniques used in translating text without classifying it in the form of structural or semantic. Among the techniques are: borrowing, calque, literal translation, transposition, modulation, equivalence and adaptation (https://www.google.co.id/?gws_rd=ssl#q=strategi+penerje mahan+vinay,diakses 6 July 2015). According to Hartono (2009: 27-35) procedure is the same with strategy, which is used by the translators to solve problems in the process of translation by the translator's own goal. Procedures/ strategies of translation are: 1) Shifting shapes/transposition/shift, 2) Meaning Shifting /modulation, 3) Naturalization 4) Contextual Equivalece, 5) Annotated Equivalence, 6) Addition, 7) Reduction (substruction), and 8) Authorized Translation. In achieving the learning objectives of translation, the lecturer used various strategies, approaches, methods, and techniques.Strategy. To prepare the students to learn, the lecturer said‘hello’ in starting and ending the lecture.This is one of the strategies in learning. In translation learning, lecturer used a strategy of transposition/shift shape of which is the repetition of adjectives in Indonesian 'bagus-bagus' of English adverbs 'beautifully' which explains the subject of plural pronominal in English 'The houses' contained in the sentence " Houses in Jakarta are built beautifully" (Rumah di Jakarta bagus-bagus). Similarly for the English form of adjective + noun (beautiful woman) into Indonesian form of a noun + adjective (wanita yang cantik). According to Anthony (in Brown, 1994), approach is the assumption concerning with the nature of teaching and learning languages. Approach is used to describe how a person obtains knowledge of the language studied. According to Roy Killen (in Sanjaya, 2008) there are two approaches to learning,teacher-centered approach and student-centered approach. Method is the practical realization of an approach. Thus, the method is an overall plan in preparing teaching materials using the procedure/specific strategies in determining the types of activities, the role of teacher and learner, the subject matter, as well as a model syllabus used. Therefore the method according to Brown (1994: 14) is a variety of procedures and techniques. Techniques are implementasional. Technique is a method or specific activity that is applied in the classroom and adapted to the method and approach. It determines forms of activities, the selection of strategies and techniques that will be used to help students learn translation in the classroom. Translation approach is a way of translator approaching the task of translation, the approach applied will affect the ways of tackling the problem of translation where it will also affect the quality of the translation. Baker and

Newmark expressed two translation approaches, namely bottom-up approach and top-down approach. The bottom-up approach is used when the translator started with the lingual unit which is smaller than text (words, phrases, clauses, or sentences). Top-down approach is used when the translator started from a higher level (text) to a lower level. One form of lecturers's attention to students is to know the activities of students both on-campus and offcampus, this attention is a form of lecturer's participation to student activities, as cited by Larsen (2000: 150) of Wallerstein (1983) which states that the purpose of this participatory approach is to help students understand the power of social, historical and cultural that affect their lives. Before explaining the translation of the phrase, the lecturer asked the students about the past tense verb in the sentence. Keep in mind that the simple past tense is used to indicate a repetitive activity or habit, takes place at a certain moment, sometimes the activities take place successively in the past. In Indonesian, the differences of event don’t change the predicate form in a sentence, but simply add a description such as 'today, yesterday, the first' and so on. Thus when a sentence in English with various forms of time but without the time information, the translation has to add Indonesian adverb of time. For example the translation of past tense sentence: I went to Bali (sayadulupergike Bali) and the present tense sentence: I go to Bali (sayapergike Bali). The learning approach used is to provide feedback to students so that students are encouraged to find their own answers to questions given by the lecturer, so he does not give direct answers when students could not answer. This situation is in line with the opinion of Larsen (2000: 67) which specifies that:"The teacher works with the students in getting them to self-correct. Students are not thought to learn much if the teacher merely supplies the correct language ...If the students are unable to self-correct and peers cannot help, then the teacher would supply the correct language, but only as a last resort”. When a student cannot answer questions regarding the verb form of 'go' into a verb form of 'went', lecturer then remind them to provide two forms of the verbs (regular and irregular verbs), therefore the students can remember and be able to answer by saying 'irregular verbs!'. From the results of structured interviews, the lecturer says that the translations used bottom-up approach, namely from the easiest to the more difficult level, as well as used structural approach. Bottom-up approach is used when the translator started with the smaller lingual unit than the text (words, phrases, clauses, or sentences). According to Baker, bottom-up approach is more easily applied or followed by those whose mastery of linguistic is still low. Translation method is a way/translation process which is performed relating to the purpose of translation. According to Newmark (1991: 4-5) method is the principle that underlies the way we translate, which come from the shape or type of translation. Methods divided into two: 1) which is oriented in source language (SL) and 2) which is oriented in target language (TL). There are four which is oriented in source language (SL emphasis) : 1) word-for-word translation (the order in sentences is maintained and vocabulary translated one by one with the most general sense without considering the

94

context), 2) literal translation (grammar construction is amended as close as possible with the equivalence in the TL, the vocabulary translated one by one without considering the context, 3) faithful translation (translation stays faithful retaining the content and form of SL, 4) semantic translation (translation is more flexible, adapted to his readers, did not fully follow/loyal to the source language text. While which is oriented to the target language (TL emphasis) also consists of four parts: 1) adaptation (a form of translation that comes closest to the target language), 2) free translation, 3) idiomatic translation (translation by producing messages in source language text, use more everyday languages and expressions that do not exist in the source language), and 4) communicative translation (translation by diverting the contextual meaning rightly of the source language text as well as observing the principles of communication that can be understood by the readers). In teaching of translation, there is no single method that is used by lecturers to achieve the learning objectives of translation. Seen that lecturers using a variety of methods that refers to a variety of translation. When lecturers realized that the method currently in use are not responding to the translation is being taught and lacking the motivation of student learning, the lecturer will move on to other methods that can be applied in the classroom. The important thing is that the methods arouse interest of students to learn. Lecturers are free to determine their own teaching methods. This is in line with the opinion of Larsen and Freeman (2000: 182). A particular method cannot, therefore, be a prescription for success for everyone. Each method has its strengths and weaknesses, relativist believe, but they are not equally suited for all situations. Different methods are suitable for different teachers and learners in different Contexts.From the results of structured interviews, lecturers says that the learning method of translation used GTM (Grammar Translation Method), Direct Method, and methods which are oriented on SL and.TL. According to Larsen and Freeman (2000: 17), the basic purpose of learning foreign language in the GTM is that students are able to read literature, learn the rules of grammar and vocabulary of TL. The method used by lecturers of translation can be oriented on SL or TL depending on the context. Translation techniques are practical things, different methods and normative strategies, which is directly related to the practical stepsand problem-solving of the translation. The practical problem is related to a variety of language problems, among others, (1) text functions, (2) style, (3) functional diversity, (4) dialects, and (5) the special problems need practical handling like idioms and metaphors. Idiomatic expression, including simile, metaphor, proverb, phrasal verb is often difficult to translate. the translation technique according to Choliludin (2007: 33-44) is to let the word as the original by writing the word between quotation marks, for example, "yuppie", then the word is given a literal explanation within brackets as well as using the phrase non-idiomatic translation. When the idiom in SL has no equivalence in TL, it should not be imposed to translate. The translation must be reasonable and uncover the original text message without dumping or addition that has a

natural and easy shape. Technique is also in line with the approach. In other words, the technique is a description of the method, while the method is the elaboration of an approach. Code switching is one manifestation of the use of language by a bilingual, ie. the use of more than one language by a bilingual-spoken by choosing one language code and adapted to the circumstances (Hudson, 1996: 5153). Code-mixing is a form of the use of other languages in a bilingual.In explaining translation learning, the lecturer often usedtechnique ofcode switching and code mixing. The code switching from English into Indonesian or vice versa, which meant that students can understand the meaning of words/phrases of English that is used as the communication between the lecturer and the students in accordance with the context of the sentence. Students will be accustomed to hearing such phrases and understand it, so that interaction goes smoothly. In teaching translation of phrase level, lecturer requires the ability and higher skills than on teaching translation of word level. Lecturer using a variety of techniques in which a technique to translate idioms is different with techniques to translate common phrases, and the techniques of borrowing/lending word, like the word 'lobby' in SLtranslated into TL without changes, that remains 'lobby'. In addition to translating idiom in the sentence of 'rain cats and dogs' , it cannot be translated word by word as translating the simple general sentences, which is in Indonesian means'hujankucingdananjing'. It does not make sense. Actually the sentence has the figurative meaning of 'heavy rain'. Translation Learning requires professional lecturers who are able to plan, control class with the strategies, approaches, methods, and techniques that are appropriate and effective, so that teaching and learning activities implemented properly. The strategy used is the shift shape, structural approach and participatory approaches, GTM and Direct Method and methods oriented on SL and TL, a variety of learning techniques such as code switching-codemixing and re-explanation and technique of translation ' borrowing '.

Conclusion Translation lecturer shall know the strategies, approaches, methods, and techniques in order to obtain an equivalent translation. It is impossible for the translator to produce a good translation if he does not understand the elements of the translation and is not able to apply them correctly.The lecturer has not fully implemented these elements in the teaching of translation yet.The lecturer tends to translate text directly, he is more concerned with the product to the process.

Recommendation Translation learning inthe Foreign Language Academy of Borobudur, Jakarta(ABA) needs to be better improved, a portion of the exercise and practice of translation using strategies, approaches, methods, and techniques need to be increased in order to create maximumtranslation learning model. Hopefully that it can be used as guidelines, especially for teaching translation in ABA

95

Borobudur, and generally for community of language users. To facilitate the translation method, the lecturer needs to use gaming techniques, especially to translate idioms and proverbs.

Larson, Mildred L. Meaning Based Translation: A Guide to Cross-Language Equivalence. Boston: University Press of America Inc,1984. Moentaha, Salihen. Bahasa dan Terjemahan: Language and Translation the New Millennium Publication. Jakarta: Kesaint Blanc. 2006. Nababan, M. Rudolf. TeoriMenerjemah Bahasa Inggris. Yogyakarta: PustakaPelajar, 2003. Nadar, F.X. “Ulasan: Ihwal Penerjemahan dan Riset dalam Terjemahan”. Humaniora: Jurnal Budaya, Sastradan Bahasa Fakultas Ilmu Budaya Universitas Gajah Mada, Volume 21, Nomor 1, Februari 2009. Newmark, Peter, About Translation. Great Britain Longdunn Press Ltd, 1991. Rini, Julia Eka. “Difficulties in Translating Texts for Beginner Translator Students”. k@ta: a biannual publication on the study of language and literature, Volume 9, Number 2, Desember 2007. Surabaya: English Department, Faculty of Letters, Petra Christian University, hh. 169-178. Sanjaya, Wina. Strategi Pembelajaran: Berorientasi Standar Proses Pendidikan. Jakarta: Kencana, 2008. Spradley, James P. Participant Observation, New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1980. Suryawinata, Zuchridin&SugengHariyanto. Translation: BahasanTeori&PenuntunPraktisMenerjemahkan.Yogy akarta: PenerbitKanisius, 2003. Suteja, Hanna.”The Students’ Attitude Towards Peer Reviews in a Translation Class”. Polyglot: JurnalIlmiahFakultasIlmuPendidikanUniversitasPelita Harapan. Vol. 6 No. 1 Juli 2012, h. 26. http://ridwanbahasa.com/2013/03/27/penerjemahan-prosesmetode-prosedur-teknik/ (diakses 6 Juli 2015). http://resources.transbahasa.com/2013/09/27/seri-teori-2teori-penerjemahan-nida (diakses 6 Juli 2015). (https://www.google.co.id/?gws_rd=ssl#q=strategi+penerje mahan+vinay (diakses 6 Juli 2015). http://www.translationjournal.net/journal/41culture.htm (diakses 10 Januari 2017).

DAFTAR PUSTAKA Atma, H.M.D. Perkaya Inggrismu dengan Ungkapan (Peribahasa) Asyik. Jogjakarta: Diva Press. 2010. Brown, H. Douglas. Teaching by Principles, an Interactive Approach to Language Pedagogy. Englewoods Cliffs: Prentice Hall, 1994. Buku Pedoman Penulisan Tesisdan Desertasi: Program Pascasarjana Universitas Negeri Jakarta. Jakarta: PenerbitPascasarjana, 2012. Choliludin. The Technique of Making Idiomatic Translation. Jakarta: Kesaint Blanc, 2007. Creswell, John. Educational Research: Planning, Conducting and Evaluating Quantitative and Qualitative Research, Third Edition. Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Merril Prentice Hall. 2008. Emzir, Metodologi Penelitian Kualitatif Analisis Data: Model Bogdan & Biken, Model Miles & Hubermann, Model Strauss & Corbin, Model Spradley, Analisis Isi Model Philipp Mayring, Program Komputer N Vivo. Jakarta: RajawaliPers Divisi Buku Perguruan Tinggi PT Raja GrafindoPersada, 2010. Hartono, Rudi. Teori Penerjemahan: (a Handbook for Translators) Inggris-Indonesia, Indonesia-Inggris. Semarang: Cipta Prima Nusantara Semarang. 2011. Hudson, Richard A. Sociolinguistics. Second edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.1996. Johan, A.Ghani. Reading & Translation: Pelajaran Membaca dan menerjemahkan Bahasa Inggris. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar bekerjasama dengan Universitas Ahmad Dahlan Yogyakarta. 1998. Larsen, Diane and Freeman. Techniques and Principles in Language Teaching, second edition. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000.

96

ANALYSIS OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR: WHY THEY CHOOSE PLEASED WITH COSTS EXPENSIVE EDUCATION Nurmawati 1) Ida Kusnawati Tjahjani 2) 1)

University 45, Surabaya, Indonesia [email protected]

2)

Universitas 45, Surabaya, Indonesia [email protected]

Abstract.This study aims to determine the factors that influence consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Collecting data in this study using questionnaires, with a sample of 100 people taken by accident sampling and multiple regression analysis.Beresearchresultsrdasarkanon the analysis of the effect of various attributes individually, it can be seen that each - each of variable quality, facilities variable and variable costs have a significant influence on consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Among these variables, quality attributes are the variables that most influence. However, when seen in the four variables simultaneously, then all these variables have a significant influence they deserve as a predictor variable. For simultaneous analysis results can be seen that together or simultaneously, the four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because the F ratio of 37.271, with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 is not significant as independent variables in education but if together four variables are significant as predictors. Keywords: Consumer Behavior, Accident Sampling, Regression Analysis, Estimator Variable andVariablePredictors I. INTRODUCTION Many service agencies in Indonesia which is engaged in various fields, one of which is education. Education is one of the most important priorities for most people and is one of the service agencies are always sought after by consumers. Therefore, many educational institutions are competing to attract the consumers to choose the institution. Competitive conditions such as education that occurs at this time, require that a consumer must act selective when choosing educational institutions. Most of the people have hope to be able to continue their education of at least graduated from high school / vocational school, therefore, to produce the next generation of quality required good handling and precise. An education should rely on technological advancement and customer satisfaction as well as prioritizing service to customers, thus requiring costly. School is an institution designed for the teaching of students with teacher supervision. Schools have an important role in enhancing the intellectual development since the school is a second place for children to seek knowledge and develop skills or talents. Good schools and in accordance with the character of the child and will be able to guide your child toward a better future. Thus choosing a good school and in accordance with the character of the child is very important. There are many factors that influence parents in choosing SMA / SMK, include internal factors of parents, the school or the internal environment, such as: the income of parents, school programs, facilities, location, and cost. Need to do some research to find out why consumers choose education / schools at high cost. in obtaining customer satisfaction to fulfill his wish, someone must have a specific reason. From the description above, it can be determined that the main problem is "How consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost". The

goal of theof this study are: (1) to identify factors that influence consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. (2) to identify the most dominant factor in choosing educational costly II. METHOD Based on theresearch method is a survey carried out among populations large and small, the data studied are data from a sample taken from the population, so the found events relative, distribution and relationships between variables sociological or psychological. (Sugiyono, 2007: 7). Based on their explanations level which is a descriptive study was conducted to determine the value of an independent variable, either one or more variables(independent)without making comparisons, or connect between one variable with another variable. (Sugiyono, 2007: 6). Based on the type of data and the model data analysis which is quantitative research. Quantitative data is data that form of words, sentences, schematics, and pictures. (Sugiyono, 2007: 14). Population and sampling population in this study is the education at a high cost. Parubak (2004) explains that, the choice of respondents was taken usingmethod, accidental samplingwhich is determined by chance in the sense that all users of education at a high cost. Data analysis technique used is the analysis of factors, with a sample of 100 people. DATA COLLECTION TECHNIQUES

Interview (interview) is a dialogue conducted by the interviewer (the interviewer) to obtain information from interviewees (interviewer).Researchers used the free interview that the interviewer is free to ask about anything, but also remember about the data that will be collected. Questionnaire (questionnaire) is a number of written questions that are used to obtain personal information from respondents about, or things he knew. Researchers use the

97

enclosed questionnaire, which already provided the answer questionnaire so that respondents can just choose.

Y = - 3.604 + 0,554x1 + 0, 44x2 +0,46x3+0,0075x4 X1 X2 X3 X4 2 r 0.238 0.1616 0.1596 0.0005 prob (0.00001) (0.00012) (0.0001 (0. 9495) t 5.13 4.024 3.993 -0.069 Fratio:37.271 Prob:0.000001 Multiple R:0.830 Based on the results of the regression analysis, we can know the role of each variable separately motivation of the decision to choose education with expensive fees are variable quality significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost which is indicated by the t value (5.13) is greater than the value t table (1.685) with the magnitude of the effect of 0.554. As for the variable facilities, significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (4.024) is greater than the value t table (1.685). and have the effect of 0.44. Variable fees are set for education is a variable that significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (3.993) is greater than the value t table (1.685) .Variabel locations in education does not significantly influence the decision choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (0.069) is smaller than the value t table (1.685). Results of the analysis showed that simultaneously together or simultaneous four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because nlai F ratio of 37.271, with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 not as significant as independent variables in education but if together four variables are significant as predictors.

DATA ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES

Data analysis method used was the factor analysis with SPSS for windows. Malhotra (1996) explains that the factor analysis is a group of procedures that are used to reduce or summarize data. MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS Multiple linear regression analysis used in this study to determine the influence of consumer perception towards education at a high cost which is reflected in the three variables, namely variables brandimage,cost and facilities. Multiple regression analysis is used to determine the relationship of independent variables on the dependent variable, as proposed by Sugiyono (2007) that the multiple linear regression analysis is used by researchers, when the researchers intend to predict how the situation (rise and fall) the dependent variable (criterion), if two or more independent variables as predictors factors manipulated (ups and downs of the value). THE THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK Based on a literature review that has been presented, the framework is the decision to choose education with expensive fees as follows: a. Quality b. Facility

The Decission to choose Education at a high costs

c. Cost d. Location

1.

2.

Independent Variables (free) as a consumer motivation. Someone chose education at a high cost, because such education has attributes that meet individual needs so as to encourage consumers to enroll in the school. The study attributes identified as benefits are sought to meet the desire for better education are as follows: a. Quality b. Facility c. Cost d. Location Dependent Variable (affected) as the variable behavior of consumer behavior is a manifestation of consumer preference in choosing education at a high cost.

V. CONCLUSION 1. Based on thean analysis of the effect of various attributes individually, each found that the variable quality, facilities variable and variable costs have a significant influence on consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Among these variables, quality attributes are the variables that most influence. However, if viewed four variables simultaneously then all these variables have a significant influence they deserve as a predictor variable. 2. For simultaneous analysis results can be seen that together or simultaneous four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because nlai F ratio of 37.271 with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 is not significant as variables influence in education, but if together four variables are significant as predictors. REFERENCES

POPULATION AND SAMPLE

population in this study is consumers who choose education at a high cost. In this study, the number of samples to be studied there were 100 respondents to themethod. accident sampling IV. ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION of this analysis is used to examine the relationship between independent variables and the dependent variable is the variable characteristic of education at a high cost to the consumer behavior in choosing education with a model that has been determined, the results are as follows:

[1] [2] [3]

98

KotlerPdan Gary Amstrong. 2001. Prinsip-prinsip Pemasaran. Jakarta: Erlangga Sugiyono, 2007, MetodePenelitianBisnis, CetakanKesembilan, Penerbit CV Alpha Betha, Bandung Schiffman, Leon G dan Leslie L. Kanuk. 2004. PerilakuKonsumen. Jakarta: Indeks.

Analysis of Consumer Behavior: Why They Choose Pleased With Costs Expensive Education Nurmawati 1), Ida Kusnawati Tjahjani 2) 1)

University 45, Surabaya, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

Universitas 45, Surabaya, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. This study aims to determine the factors that influence consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Collecting data in this study using questionnaires, with a sample of 100 people taken by accident sampling and multiple regression analysis. Beresearch resultsrdasarkanon the analysis of the effect of various attributes individually, it can be seen that each - each of variable quality, facilities variable and variable costs have a significant influence on consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Among these variables, quality attributes are the variables that most influence. However, when seen in the four variables simultaneously, then all these variables have a significant influence they deserve as a predictor variable. For simultaneous analysis results can be seen that together or simultaneously, the four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because the F ratio of 37.271, with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 is not significant as independent variables in education but if together four variables are significant as predictors. Keywords: Consumer Behavior, Accident Sampling, Regression Analysis, Estimator Variable and Variable Predictors Need to do some research to find out why consumers choose education / schools at high cost.

I. INTRODUCTION Many service agencies in Indonesia which is engaged in various fields, one of which is education. Education is one of the most important priorities for most people and is one of the service agencies are always sought after by consumers. Therefore, many educational institutions are competing to attract the consumers to choose the institution. Competitive conditions such as education that occurs at this time, require that a consumer must act selective when choosing educational institutions. Most of the people have hope to be able to continue their education of at least graduated from high school / vocational school, therefore, to produce the next generation of quality required good handling and precise. An education should rely on technological advancement and customer satisfaction as well as prioritizing service to customers, thus requiring costly. School is an institution designed for the teaching of students with teacher supervision. Schools have an important role in enhancing the intellectual development since the school is a second place for children to seek knowledge and develop skills or talents. Good schools and in accordance with the character of the child and will be able to guide your child toward a better future. Thus choosing a good school and in accordance with the character of the child is very important. There are many factors that influence parents in choosing SMA / SMK, include internal factors of parents, the school or the internal environment, such as: the income of parents, school programs, facilities, location, and cost.

FORMULATION OF THE PROBLEM in obtaining customer satisfaction to fulfill his wish, someone must have a specific reason. From the description above, it can be determined that the main problem is "How consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost". RESEARCH OBJECTIVES The goal of theof this study are: 1. To identify factors that influence consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. 2. To identify the most dominant factor in choosing educational costly Ujang Sumarwan [1] states that: consumer behavior is all the activities, actions, as well as a psychological process that encourages such action at the time before buying, when buying, using, spent produkdan services after doing the above matters or activities evaluated. Philip Kotler and Kevin Lane Keller [2] states consumer behavior is the study of how individuals, groups and organizations select, purchase, use, and how goods, services, ideas, or experiences to satisfy their needs and desires. Nembah F. Hartimbul Ginting (2011: 33) defines consumer behavior is an individual act in meperoleh, use and dispose of goods and services the economy, including the decision-making process before setting actions.

99

Meanwhile, according to Supranto & Nandan Limakrisna [3] defines the behavior of consumers as a dynamic interaction between cognition, affect, behavior, and environment in which humans carry out exchange activities in their lives. Schiffman and Kanuk book Sumarwan Ujang [1] defines an election decision as an act of two or more alternative options. A consumer who wanted to do a choice he should have alternative options. According Ujang Sumarwan [1] that: the consumer's decision to decide to purchase or consume certain products will be preceded by the introduction of measures needs, the time, the situation changes, the ownership of the product, product consumption, individual differences, the influence of marketing, information retrieval, search internal and external search. Kotler and Armstrong (2001) states that, perception is the process whereby a person select, organize, and interpret information to form a meaningful picture of the world.

Multiple Linear Regression Analysis Multiple linear regression analysis used in this study to determine the influence of consumer perception towards education at a high cost which is reflected in the three variables, namely variables brandimage,cost and facilities. Multiple regression analysis is used to determine the relationship of independent variables on the dependent variable, as proposed by Sugiyono (2007) that the multiple linear regression analysis is used by researchers, when the researchers intend to predict how the situation (rise and fall) the dependent variable (criterion), if two or more independent variables as predictors factors manipulated (ups and downs of the value). THE THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK Based on a literature review that has been presented, the framework is the decision to choose education with expensive fees as follows:

II. METHODS Based on theresearch method is a survey carried out among populations large and small, the data studied are data from a sample taken from the population, so the found events relative, distribution and relationships between variables sociological or psychological. [4]. Based on their explanations level which is a descriptive study was conducted to determine the value of an independent variable, either one or more variables(independent)without making comparisons, or connect between one variable with another variable [4]. Based on the type of data and the model data analysis which is quantitative research. Quantitative data is data that form of words, sentences, schematics, and pictures [4]. Population and sampling population in this study is the education at a high cost. Parubak (2004) explains that, the choice of respondents was taken usingmethod, accidental samplingwhich is determined by chance in the sense that all users of education at a high cost. Data analysis technique used is the analysis of factors, with a sample of 100 people.

1. Independent Variables (free) as a consumer motivation. Someone chose education at a high cost, because such education has attributes that meet individual needs so as to encourage consumers to enroll in the school. The study attributes identified as benefits are sought to meet the desire for better education are as follows: a. Quality b. Facility c. Cost d. Location 2. Dependent Variable (affected) as the variable behavior of consumer behavior is a manifestation of consumer preference in choosing education at a high cost. POPULATION AND SAMPLE

population in this study is consumers who choose education at a high cost. In this study, the number of samples to be studied there were 100 respondents to themethod. accident sampling

DATA COLLECTION TECHNIQUES Interview (interview) is a dialogue conducted by the interviewer (the interviewer) to obtain information from interviewees (interviewer).Researchers used the free interview that the interviewer is free to ask about anything, but also remember about the data that will be collected. Questionnaire (questionnaire) is a number of written questions that are used to obtain personal information from respondents about, or things he knew. Researchers use the enclosed questionnaire, which already provided the answer questionnaire so that respondents can just choose.

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION of this analysis is used to examine the relationship between independent variables and the dependent variable is the variable characteristic of education at a high cost to the consumer behavior in choosing education with a model that has been determined, the results are as follows: Y = - 3.604 + 0,554x1 + 0, 44x2 +0,46x3+0,0075x4

DATA ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES Data analysis method used was the factor analysis with SPSS for windows. Malhotra (1996) explains that the factor analysis is a group of procedures that are used to reduce or summarize data.

r2 prob t

X1 0.238 (0.00001) 5.13

F ratio: 37.271 Prob : 0.000001 Multiple R:0.830

100

X2 0.1616 (0.00012) 4.024

X3 0.1596 (0.0001 3.993

X4 0.0005 (0. 9495) -0.069

Based on the results of the regression analysis, we can know the role of each variable separately motivation of the decision to choose education with expensive fees are variable quality significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost which is indicated by the t value (5.13) is greater than the value t table (1.685) with the magnitude of the effect of 0.554. As for the variable facilities, significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (4.024) is greater than the value t table (1.685). and have the effect of 0.44. Variable fees are set for education is a variable that significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (3.993) is greater than the value t table (1.685) .Variabel locations in education does not significantly influence the decision choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (0.069) is smaller than the value t table (1.685). Results of the analysis showed that simultaneously together or simultaneous four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because nlai F ratio of 37.271, with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 not as significant as independent variables in education but if together four variables are significant as predictors. IV. CONCLUSIONS 1. Based on thean analysis of the effect of various attributes individually, each found that the variable quality, facilities variable and variable costs have a significant influence on consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Among these variables, quality attributes are the variables that most influence. However, if viewed four variables simultaneously then all these variables have a significant influence they deserve as a predictor variable. 2. For simultaneous analysis results can be seen that together or simultaneous four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because nlai F ratio of 37.271 with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 is not significant as variables influence in education, but if together four variables are significant as predictors. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Suwarman. Ujang, Perilaku Konsumen Teori dan Penerapannya dalam Pemasaran, Bogor: Ghalia Indonesia, 2011. Kotler, Philip and Kervin Lane Keller, Marketing Management 13th Edition, (Alih bahasa: Bob Sabran), Jakarta: Erlangga, 2009. Supranto, J dan Nandan Limakrisna, Perilaku Konsumen dan Strategi Pemasaran, Jakarta: Mitra Wacana Media, 2007. Sugiyono, Metode Penelitian Bisnis, Cetakan Kesembilan, Penerbit CV Alpha Betha, Bandung, 2007 KotlerP dan Gary Amstrong, Prinsip-prinsip Pemasaran. Jakarta: Erlangga, 2001. Malhotra, Naresh, K., Marketing Research An Applied Orientation, Prentice-Hall International, Inc., New Jersey, 1996. Schiffman, Leon G dan Leslie L. Kanuk, Perilaku Konsumen, Jakarta: Indeks, 2004.

101

IS IT TRULY EMPLOYEE COMMITMENT AFFECT EMPLOYEE PERFORMANCE? Postgratuated Faculty at Sangga Buana University.Phone Number. +06227275489. Fax.+6227202841 Jl.PHH.Mustopa No.68. Bandung. Jawa Barat.Indonesia. Abstract. One of the crucial debates arises when employees reduce their performance. The goal of this research is to describe the influence of employee commitment towards employee performance at Bandung Dr.M.Salamun Hospital. Research method is quantitive method and collect data by quessioner, interview , observation and documentation. The variables was employee commitment as the independent variables, the dependent variable was employee performance. Data have been analyzed through multiple regression, and partial correlation techniques.The result of this research showed that employee commitment influence the employee performance. The influence of employee commitment toward employee performance is positive it means that the more higher commitment the more higher the employee performance. The hypothesis which has been proposed, has been tested for its truth. The factors concerning employee commitment will influence employee performance. The result has showed that the mean of employee performance is 0.5310 or the grade variation of employee performance is 53.10 percent depending on employee commitment variation. A implication of this finding is that encouraging The Manager so that can be strongly expected to enhanch the employees performance for servicing people . Keywords: Employee commitment and employee performance

I.

information can spread quickly, which will supports individual’s increasing knowledge, especially in health knowledge. Therefore causing much higher demands to healthcare industry, in accordance with the emerging of civil-society organization focus in health that gives education to society, helps patients and their family, medical practice regulations, and will impact on every health workers so they will try to increase communication and work capability held by institution where they work in order to give optimum service. So that hospitals always give optimum services to the patients and their family, they need healthcare workers that can give optimum service.So the quession now is it truly employee commitment affect employee performance .

INTRODUCTION

1.

Research Background Competition and globalization in this decade affect every sector, not only impact the manufacturing industry but also impact the healthcare service likes hospital. Facing the global, regional, and national changes on every aspects especially the high rate of economic growth and the increasing welfare of upper middle class, Indonesia is an interesting market for the private sector, domestic and global in healthcare industry, including hospital procurement. Therefore need support from human resources. To be able to obtain the conformity of national objective in health development which is that every citizen attains optimal health level and has productive live socially and economically, needed a change in hospital paradigm including government deregulations or supporting and unhampered regulations, hospital leadership must have an advance, creative, and innovative vision, human resources must be professional, fully involved, and attached in every effort continously to perfecting the whole process and outcome, while fully comprehend and institutionalize “patient oriented” and “public oriented” philosophy. Facing the facts about healthcare services that happens in Indonesia, therefore it can not be denied that the old paradigm about healthcare services must be changed into absolutely fine services, with zero complaint, and exceeding patient need. Hospital as a service industry, must develop and increase its status from social oriented to quality oriented which is based on patient needs, this requires sustainable and continous improvement effort on products, services, human resources, process, and environment so that the healthcare in Indonesia can always exist. With modern technology, communication process and

2. a.

Research Theory Employee commitmen Employee commitmen gotten from latin word “committere” means to c, menombine, united, trust and perform (Snyder, 2004:97), according to Robbins organizational commitment is degree to which an employee identifies with a particular organization and its goal a wish to attain membership in the organization (Robbins, 2012:69). organizational commitment is a condition which someone to identify himself to certain organization with its objective and regard to organization members (Robbins, 2012 : 142) or Organizational commitment also meant as psychological relation among individual with organization, include envolve in work, loyality, and trust to organizational values. In this context there are three process and phases of commitment : obey, identification, and internalization. First, Someone obey to recieve influence from other people so that can obtain something from others , as incentive or salaries. Second, to identify someone to recieve influence so that can obtain happyness relation. Third, to internalize someone to find that organizational values can give incentives (Reilly in Sopiah,

102

2008 : 156 Employees commitment is attitude or individual psychological relation and indicated by trust and receive toward values and objective of organization (Allen dan Meyer,2012). Meyer and Allen (2012:65) develope three model organization commitment yaitu: (a) affective commitment, (b) continuance commitment, and (c) normative commitment. As below: Efective comitment yaitu a part of organizational comitment to stress the important between employees values and objective and organization objectivei. And show the loyality of employees pekerja toward organization demostrated emosional and focus to organization objective. (b)Continuous commitment is part of organization commitment which employees will stay or move organization because of loss and profit reason. (Normative commitment is part of organization commitment which employee stay in organization because of there is obligation. b. Performance Many theorists give the concept of performance Gibson, Invancevich & Donnelly (1997:118), said that performance is the degree of achievement to do the job or task and the ability to achieve the planned objective Mathis & Jackson (2012:78) states that performance fundamentally is what is performed or what is not performed. Performance influece to constribute in organization as Output,quqlities, time , work attendant. Organization performance has relation to what organization is got in a certain periode Bernardine dan Russell (2012 : 147) said that : Performance is defined as the record of outcomes produced an a specific job function or activity during a specific time period. Whereous Bernardine & Russell (2012 : 333) said there are six the performance values charachter be measured consist of ;1)Quality : The degree to which the process or result of carrying out an activity approaches perfection, in terms of either conforming to some ideal way of performing the activity or fulfilling the activity’s intended purpose. (2)Quantity : The amount produced, expressed in such terms as dollar value number of units, or member of completed activity cycles. (3)Timeliness: The degree to which an activity is completed, or a result produced, at the earliest time desirable from the standpoints o{ both coordinating with the output of others and maximazing the time available for other activities. (4)Cost effectiveness : The degree to which the use of the organization’s resources (e.g., human, monetary, technological, material) is maximized in the sense of getting the highest gain or reduction in loss from each unit or instance of use of a resource. (5)Need for supervision : The degree to which. performer can carry out a Job function without either having to requiring supervisory assistance or requiring supervisory intervention to prevent an adverse outcome. (6)Interpersonal impact : The degree to which a performer promotes feelings of selfesteem, goodwill, and cooperation among coworkers and subordinate. According to previous descripe it can be conclude that performance is what individual or groups a result

produced or acvieve quatitative or qualitatively to do the job or task responsiblely. c.

Theoretical Framework Hospital always wish better performance from employees by prepare good employee commitment. So it can be formulated the correlation of employee commitment to employee performance as it can be looked at research paradigm below ;

Comitmen t

Employe e Perform ance

1. Affective Commitme nt

1. Quantity of work.

Gambar: 2.9 Research paradigm d. Research Hypothesis Based on the problem formulation and premis can be obtain the hypothesis below ; There is influence of employee commitment toward employee performance. II. METHODS Data were analyzed using descriptive statistics and inferential statistics. Population and sample is using simple sample, The location of research is in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital at Jl.The population of this research are 118 persons and sample are 20 personsas respondents . a. Sources and Data Collection The type of data consists of a primary data source and secondary data source. Primary data sourced from responses to questionnaires and interviews. While the secondary data for this research was obtained from various sources. Data collection was using questionnaires to make the research instruments and methods of interviewing the resource persons who are competent in the subject area. b. Methods of Data Analysis The method of analysis used in this study is using multivariate regreesion technique . c. Data collecting technique To get the data were used quessioners and interview d. Instrument validitas dan reliabilitas testing The measurement testing of data collecting instrument, the instruments nmustn be tested so that can be used the quessionersby using product moment correlation, and if the score of correlation is high , it can be used in this research. To know the score of correlation can be used

103

correlation formulation below; (Sudjana.1987): Table 4.1 Validity dan reliability testing of comitmen quesioners Num Validity Miscella Num Validity neous ber of Index ber of Index State State ment ment Item 0,696 Valid Item 0,487 1 16 Item 0,539 Valid Item 0,844 2 17 Item 0,564 Valid Item 0,783 3 18 Item 0,468 Valid Item 0,048 4 19 Item 0,514 Valid Item 0,379 5 20 Item 0,652 Valid Item 0,586 6 21 Item 0,742 Valid Item 0,687 7 22 Item 0,697 Valid Item 0,684 8 23 Item 0,695 Valid Item 0,669 9 24 Item 0,668 Valid Item 0,757 10 25 Item 0,749 Valid Item 0,658 11 26 Item 0,830 Valid Item 0,545 12 27 Item 0,772 Valid Item 0,448 13 28 Item 0,692 Valid Item 0,638 14 29 Item 0,547 Valid Item 0,784 15 30 Reliability Coeficient (Alpha-Cronbach) = 0.950

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION 1.

Respondent condition It has been explained in research methodology (Chapter 3 ) , the subject of research and research respondent are Dr.M.Salamun hospital personels. Dr.M.Salamun hospital Bandung has 118 personels Bandung. The research samples as respondents are 20 persons. Research condition condition according to education can be showed in the table 1; Table 1 Frequencies distribution by education level Of 20 respondents

Education level Frequencies Low 7 Intermediate 10 High 3 Total 20 Source: Research results Data

Persentage 0.35 0.50 0.15 100.00

Based on the upper table that the low education level are 7 persons or 0.35 %, intermediate education level are 10 persons or 50.00 % berpendidikan sedang and the hig. education level are 3 persons or 0.15 % 2.

Resarch result Here is represented the results of research about the influence of commitment toward employees performance at Bandung Dr. MM.Salamun hospital . It will be represented in to three parts ;( 1) Research data validity and realibility results testing ; ( 2 ) research variable descriptive condition ; ( 3 ) Hypothesis Testing a Validity dan Reliability test Before the results of research quessioner data be analyzed , the first done validity dan reliability test toward research measurement tools to prove that the used tools has validity dan reliability to measure what should be measured, to test the quessioners can measure sharp nad exactly for what should be measured in this research. Validity testing used the product moment correlation which the statement said valid if point of statement correlation coefficient  0.30 (Kaplan-Saccuzzo,2005;141). Further more reliability used alpha –cronbach method and the results is stated reliability if reliability point of statement correlation coefficient  0.70 (KaplanSaccuzzo,2005;123). Here are the validity and reliability testing of each quessioners

b

Miscella neous Valid Valid Valid Tidak Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid

Deskriptive Analysis of research variable Data Data condition of research results can be used to enrich discusion, from data condition of respondent responsecan be known how is the respondent response toward researched each variable indicators. So that easy to interpretate research variable, It be done categorization toward the score of respondent response. According to Cooper & Schindler (2006;467) for data ordinal atau interval/ratio data which has asimetris distribution Centre measurement can be done through range distribution of quartel. At this research the categorization respondent response mean score can be used used quartel score by ; Minimum score (1) – Quartel I (2) :Low/worst/Never Quartel I (2) – Quartel II(3) : Lack/Seldom Quartel II (3) – Quartel III (4) : Enough/Often

104

Quartel III (4) –Maximum Score (5) : High/Good/Always

20. Feel axiest if let the work although it has been given agreement. Continuous commitment

c

Employees comitmen Employees comitmen at this research measured by using 3 dimension and operasionalised to 30 statement points, but because there is 1 statement point is not valid so the data which is shown the data from 29 the valid statement points. Here is categorized data respondent response mean score toward each statement point on the employees commitment variable. Table 4.3 Recaputulation of employees commitment respondent response mean score Statement Mean Category score 1. The equillebrium among 3.40 Enough own value and hospitals values 2. The equillebrium among 3.50 Enough own objective and hospitals objective 3. Trust to hosoital 3.90 Enough 4. Hospital oriented 5. Emotional trust to hospital 6. Employees feel that hospital is their life part 7. Self confidence to relate with hospital 8. Felt that Dr.M.Salamun hospital, Drive their future life 9. Readiness to work all time in Dr.M.Salamun hospital 10. Readiness to give physical and psychological potential to Dr.M.Salamun hospital. Afective commitment 11. Love to Dr.M.Salamun hosoital from material emosional aspect benefits 12. Love to Dr.M.Salamun hosoital from economic emosional aspect benefits, 13. Readiness to work all time with present works 14. Readiness to work all time with present job in Dr.M.Salamun hospital. 15. Feel pity if work more late 16. Feel pity if work is not finish perfectly. 17. Work in present job although there is another job can give better offer. 18. Work in present job although there is another job can give better offer.the bigger conpensation from other corporate.

3.80 3.60 4.10

Enough Enough High

3.95

Enough

3.65

Enough

3.90

Enough

4.20

High

3.80 3.80

Enough Enough

3.55

Enough

3.90

Enough

3.90

Enough

3.55 3.60

Enough Enough

4.10 3.85

21. Obligation feel to live in Dr.M.Salamun hospital. 22. Obligation feel to work together in Dr.M.Salamun hospital. 23. Not to leave Dr.M.Salamun hospital although there is offered the better conpensation 24. Not to move from Dr.M.Salamun hospital to others although there is offered the work satisfaction. 25. Obligation feel to work in Dr.M.Salamun hospital all time.. 26. Obligation feel to workvery hard in Dr.M.Salamun hospital all time. 27. Feel illness if leave Dr.M.Salamun hospital. 28. Feel illness if leave Dr.M.Salamun hospital if there is other better job is offered . 29. Feel to work consistently in Dr.M.Salamun hospital if there is other better job is offered . 30. Feel to work consistently in Dr.M.Salamun hospital although there is not condusive in internal hospital. Normative commitment Grand Mean

3.40

Enough

3.74

Enough

3.55

Enough

4.25

High

3.80

Enough

3.70

Enough

3.80

Enough

3.95

Enough

3.60

Enough

3.90

Enough

4.00

Enough

3.90

Enough

3.85 3.80

Enough Enough

At table 4.3 can be looked that counting results grand mean respondent response score of employees commitment is 3.80 and the interval 3 – 4. So then can be concluded that most the employees in Dr.M.Salamun hospital has high level commiment. And if it is looked from dimension, shown that respondent response mean score toward three dimension is in enough level. d

Employees performance Employees performance at this research measured by using 5 dimension and operasionalised to16 statement . Here is categorized data respondent response mean score toward each statement point on the employees performance variable.

High Enough

105

Tabel 4.4 Recaputulation of employees performance respondent response mean score Statement 1. The work has been done by employees suit to standard 2. The time used to work by employees are siut to standard. 3. Accureteness of work has been done according to standard. 4. Perfectness of work has been done according to standard. 5. Knowledge and skill of employees is suit to the job . 6. Understanding of employees is suit to the job. 7. Capabilityof employees to develope new idea and solution to finish the work. 8. Employees capability to adapt the change and learn or adapt to his Works. 9. kemampuan karyawan untuk bekerja sama dengan rekan sekerja 10. Employees capability to work together with supervisor and Friends. 11. Employees consiousness to apply the procedure and hospital policy. 12. Employees consiousness to apply the suudenly hospital policy from management. 13. Employees anthusiasm to do the Challenge Works. 14. Employees responsibility to work the bigger job. 15. Employees capability and progress to work, leadership, socialization and performance . 16. Employees capability and progress to work, in deep integrity. Grand Mean

Mean score 3.75

Hypotesis testing Further more according to the objective of this research, to test the influence of commitment toward employees performance, so it is done the relevant quantitative analysis to use simple linier regresi. By mathematic it shown the relation of commitment toward employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital can be illustrated below ; Y = a + bX +  Notes: X = Comitment Y = Performance a = constanty b = regresion coeficient (slope) f Corelation analysis Correlation analysis is used to measure how strong the correlation among commitment with employess performance. The type correlation used to measure the strengtgh of correlation amang commitment with employees performance, it shown the relation among commitment with employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital can be illustrated below ; Table 4.5 Correlation among commitment with employees performance Correlations Perfor Commitment manc e Pearson Performa 1,000 ,729 Correlation nce Commit ,729 1,000 ment Sig. (1-tailed) Performa . ,000 nce Commit ,000 . ment N Performa 20 20 nce Commit 20 20 ment

Category Enough

4.00

Enough

3.85

Enough

3.55

Enough

3.90

Enough

3.65

Enough

3.65

Enough

3.75

Enough

4,30

e

High

4,10

High

4,25

High

4,25

High

4,00

Enough

4,00

Enough

3,75

Enough

3,80

High

3,91

Enough

As clearly shown in table 4.3 that the correlation coeficient score among commitment with employess performance is 0.729. Means the relation among commitment with employees performance is measured is0.729 , it shown that the relation of commitment with employees performance is strong in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital. e. Simple linier regression analysis

At table 4.3 can be looked that counting results grand mean respondent response score of employees commitment is 3.91 and the interval 3 – 4. So then can be concluded that most the employees in Dr.M.Salamun hospital has good enough level commiment. And if it is looked from dimension, shown that respondent response mean score toward three dimension is in enough level.

1). For testing influence of commitment toward employees performance is used simple linier regression analysis. Based on data analysis results use software SPSS 20 for windows Obtain the regression results below

106

Table 4.6 Regression analysis results Coefficientsa Model

1

(Constant)

Unstandardiz ed Coefficients B Std. Error 1,46 ,548 4 ,644 ,143

commitmen t Dependent Variable: Performance

Standardized Coefficients

t

Sig.

2,673

,016

4,514

,000

Table 4.7 Determinant coefficient Model Summaryb Model R R Adjusted R Square Square

Beta

,729

1

,72 ,531 ,505 9a a. Predictors: (Constant), Comitment a. Dependent Variable: Performance

As clearly shown in table 4.3 that determinant coefficient score (R Square) is0.531 show that 53.1% employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital can be explained by employees commitment, In the others words that employees commitment make influence 53.1% toward employees performance, whereas recidu is 46.9% the influence outside of employees commitment .

As clearly shown in table 4.6 that the regression coefficient ( commitment ) has positive symbol means more employees commitment high so the employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital become be better and contrary , more employees commitment low so the employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital become be worse

. f.

Significant testing Proving the employees commitment influence significantly toward employees performance so it is done for testing by statistics hypothesisi below:

Ho :  = 0

Ha:  0

Std. Error of the Estimate ,35562

IV. CONCLUSIONS

the employees commitment does not influence significantly toward employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital. the employees commitment influence significantly toward employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital.

Analysis and discussion of research produce the research findings that; To do and to finish works proved employees commitment as the potential which owned by employees to relized the employees performance. So employees commitment is the very important factor in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital.Maximum performance can be achieved by employees commitment in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital, A implication of this finding is that encouraging The Manager so that can be strongly expected to enhanch the employees performance for servicing people .

Based on the analysis results in table 4.6 can be looked that tCal score of employees commitment is 4.514 with significancy score < 0.001

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT I am grateful to Mr Muhammad Arsyad for his help in reviewing this paper.

Further more ttable score on significant level 5% ( = 0,05) and freedom degre (n-2) = 18 is 2,101. Because of tcal (4.514)  ttable (2,101),so on alpa 5% decided to tefuse Ho so Ha accept,means it has significant influence of employees commitment toward employees performance. This testing results show empherical prove that more high employees commitment make employees performance more high in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital.

REFERENCES [1] Benardine, HJ. & Russel. 2013. Human Resources Management. Singapore, McGrow-Hill. International Edition. [2] Cascio, Wayne F. 2013. Psychology in Human Resources Management. 5th Edition. Upper [3] Saddle, River, New Jersey : Prentice Hall, Inc. [4] Decenzo, David A and Stephen P. Robbins. 1999. Human Resources Management. Sixth Edition. New York : John Wiley & Sons, Inc. [5] Dessler, Gary. 2000. Human Resources Management. Eight Edition, Prentice Hall International, Inc. California. [6] H. Hadari Nawawi. 2001. Manajemen Sumber Daya Manusia: Untuk Bisnis Yang Kompetitif. Cetakan Keempat. Gajah Mada University Press.

g.

Determinant coefficient After tested and proved the influence employees commitment toward employees performance in Bandung Dr.M.Salamun hospital. Determinant coefficient (R-square) is coefficient to use for measuring the contribution of independent variable toward dependent variable change. Determinant coefficient score which obtain by analysis result use software SPSS 20 for windows illustrated below

107

[7] Dessler, Gary. 2000. Human Resources Management. Eight Edition, Prentice Hall International, Inc. California. [8] Davis, K j. dan Werther W B. 1996. Human Resource and Personnel Management. Third Edition. Mc.Graw Hill International Edition. [9] Dessler, G. 2003. Human Resource Management. Ninth Edition. Ney Yersey: Prentice-Hall. Inc. [10] Mathis, R. L, dan Jackson, J.H. 2003. Human Resource Management. 10th Edition, Ohio: Thompson South-Western.

108

EFFECT OF EMPOWERMENT AND JOB SATISFACTION TO THE PERFORMANCE OF EMPLOYEES FACULTY OF EDUCATION AND TEACHING OF UIN ALAUDDIN MAKASSAR 1)

Ulfani Rahman

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. This study aims to determine: 1. An overview of empowerment, job satisfaction and employee performance; 2. Effect of empowerment on employee performance; 3. Effect of Job Satisfaction on employee performance; 4. Effect of empowerment and job satisfaction on employee performance of FTK of UIN Alauddin Makassar. This type of research is quantitative methods. The research location is FTK UIN Alauddin Makassar. A total of 67 employees who are the subject of research and the study population. Data collected through the Empowerment Scale, Job Satisfaction Scale and Performance Employees Scale, and then reinforced by interviews. Then the data were analyzed using descriptive and inferential statistical techniques. The formulation of the first and second hypothesis analyzed by simple linear regression. and third hypotheses were analyzed by multiple linear regression. Research results through descriptive statistical analysis showed that employee empowerment, job satisfaction and employee performance including high category. Then, through inferential statistical analysis is the analysis simple and multiple linear regression showed that: There is a positive and significant impact on the performance of the employee empowerment and a significant. Furthermore, there is a positive and significant impact on the performance of job satisfaction of employees. While the third hypothesis shows the results are positive and significant effect of empowerment and job satisfaction on employee performance,. The coefficient of determination which implies that 32% of the variability of employee performance variable (Y) is described by empowernment and job satisfaction. Keywords: Empowerrment, Job Satisfaction, and Employee Performance leader and every leader will be held accountable for the lead. "(Bukhari). The hadith suggests that performance or achievements of the work is the work achieved by a person in performing duties in accordance with the responsibilities given to him. Mangkunagara [1] states, the factors affecting performance is the ability (ability) and motivation factors (contained in job satisfaction). Capacity could be interpreted as giving the responsibility to employees who are expected to become a guide for him to perform, unless they have a low awareness to improve the quality of her work, it is impossible to have the expected results. When employees feel less helpless in accomplishing its tasks, it usually works just routine and settle obligations without having more demands to develop the organization. Moreover, if less get a nice atmosphere in the works, such as the lack of appreciation from superiors or colleagues' salaries are not in accordance with the job. It expressed satisfaction in the work that is not felt. All these matters are the seeds of the birth of responsibility performance or low work performance. On the one hand an employee in need of work, but work demands with the results obtained are not impartial. Condition job satisfaction will be achieved when the job can drive a strong motivation to achieve better performance. Job satisfaction was allegedly very influential on employee performance. According to Gibson, et al [2] clearly

I. INTRODUCTION Human resources in an organization has a very vital role as a motivator organizational wheel. Thus, each organization would strive to improve the performance of employees in order to achieve organizational goals that have been set. Various ways taken to improve employee performance. The existence of employees who have good workability into something that should be fostered and continue to be developed, because many found employees working without having the responsibility of a high or a low performance that can not succeed in the mission of the organization. In fact, when referring to the hadith of Rasulullah SAW that no one in this world who live without being held accountable. 'Abdullah bin' Umar said, "I heard the Prophet SAW said:" Each of you is a leader, and every leader will be held accountable for the lead. Imam is a leader who will be asked for accountability for the people. A husband is the leader and will be held accountable for his family. A wife is a leader in the domestic affairs of her husband, and will be held responsible for affairs of the household. A helper is a leader in the affairs of his master's property, and will be held responsible for functions such responsibilities. "I suspect Ibn 'Umar said:" And the man is the leader of his father's property, and it will be held responsible. Each of you is a

109

illustrates the reciprocal relationship between performance and job satisfaction. On the one hand say job satisfaction lead to improved performance so that workers who are satisfied will show good performance. On the other hand it can occur job satisfaction due to their performance or work performance so that workers who perform well will get satisfaction. This unsatisfactory state, if it continues without proper care, it will disrupt the process of academic services at the Faculty is supposed to do. Therefore, it is interesting to study the problem in seeing what is so much less look good leadership further.

a. Dependent Variable: SK a. Dependent Variable: SK In Table 1 column B obtained constants b0 = 24.267, regression coefficient b1 (SE) = 0.513. Simple linear regression equation is Y = 24.267 + 0.513. As for price statistic for variable coefficient empowerment is this = 4.776 and p-value = 0,000: 2 = 0,00 1.96. Similarly, the X2 form of motivation showed t count> t table is 6.639> 1.96. The independent variable X1 (Leadership) and X2 (performance) simultaneously tested by F test strong and significant influence on the dependent variable Y (Performance Officer), since F count> F table (614.059> 3.07).Results of regression equation y = 2.254 + 0.411 X1 + 0.541 X2. The diversity of variable Y is influenced by the diversity of variables X1 and X2 for the remaining 91.7% 8.3% influenced by other factors.This was due to factors leadership and performance indispensable and always needed to obtain an increasemotivationofparticipants education and training. Keywords: leadership, performance,motivation  important role related to the fulfillment of the public transport services. Therefore, the performance demanded fulfillment of transport services providers and managers of transportation services, the Human Resources (HR) professional quality. To achieve qualified human resources in the Ministry of Transportation, the required human resource development are sustainable. The development is intended to do through education and training to improve the competence and ethical professionalism. In relation has been designated by Government Regulation No. 51 of the Human Resources in the Field of Transport which includes the Education and Training in the Field of Transport, hereinafter called the Training and Transport is organizing teaching and training in order to improve the knowledge, expertise, skills, and attitude formation behavior source human resources needed in the management of transportation.Human Resource Development Centre of Transport Apparatus organizational unit is part of Human Resources Development Agency of Transportation, the Ministry of Transportation. Transportation Development Centre Apparatuses have the task and delivery functions of Administrative Training in the Ministry of Transportation (PM.189 tahun2015). But in terms of the process of education and training of personnel can not be separated from the problem of motivation is influenced and performance and there is a relationship influence the leadership and motivation of human resources to run the organization, as well as statements HadariNawawi (1998: 42) that humans require organization and vice versa organizations require human, which is the driving force, without human organization will not work. To that end, the need to reform management leadership and motivation are able to contribute to improving the competence of the ASN in the Ministry of Transportation. With the change in leadership management and motivation will be the realization of the integration in improving the ability of the Ministry of Transportation Apparatus that support the tasks and functions of the unit organizations participating in education and training in an

I. Introduction The work unit The Ministry of Transportation is an element of government as policy makers in the transport sector which in practice can not be separated on performance goals Ministry of Transportation conducted through three stages: (1) Identification of 27 (twenty seven) Key Performance Indicators (KPI) of the thirteen (13) Goals ; (2) Measuring the gains of each KPI (in percentage) through a comparison of the realization of the target; and (3) the gains of each KPI is calculated based on the achievement of the performance of each group of activities to achieve the targets that have been set. Correspondingly, the work program has been poured into the Strategic Plan of the Ministry of Transportation including the Strategic Plan 2015-2019. Ministry of Transportation Strategic Plan 2015-2019 period is the third segment of a five-year LongTerm Plan of Transportation (RPJP), so expect the period 2015-2019 Strategic Plan of the Ministry of Transportation will facilitate economic growth throughout the region, especially to improve competitiveness as cost reduction efforts logisti. (Strategic MoT: 2005-2025). In order to support these policies, the necessary human resources are formidable. Human resources in this case is the State Civil Apparatus (ASN) which is an integral part in the management of the Indonesian government. To that have passed Law on Civil State Apparatus No. 5 of 2014 in the article shall include the type of status and position of the State Civil Apparatus (UU No. 5 of 2014: Chapter III). Correspondingly, in order to support national development, so as to support the national defense strong and realization archipelago insight nationals, it is necessary to unite the archipelago including through the reliability of the national transportation system, namely the sectors of Transportation (land, rail, sea and air) has a role dimensionlessvery vital and strategic for national development, given its nature as a driver and the driver of the various aspects of community activities and the smooth wheels of government. To that end, the government's policy in the management of the transportation plays an

140

effective, efficient, transparent and accountable, professional, productive and accountable. Increased motivation must also be coupled with the professionalism of leadership and performance. For leadership serves as directing the activities of the work undertaken by program staff executing tasks. Through the leadership of the weight, then the employees / staff can improve performance, as well as employee / staff must have the motivation that is able to mobilize all the potential ability to increase the duties and responsibilities in improving organizational performance through competency development in education and training at the Center for Resource Development human Apparatus of Transportation. As the development of quality human resources, that will manage the agency well too. Management here is the management of all fields of work, including the care and planning. How to improve and develop human resources with education / training, either through on-the-job and off the job training. Noting the above description, to know how to influence the leadership and performance of the motivation of education and training at the Transportation Development Centre Apparatuses, it is necessary to study. 1. Identification of problems In any implementation of research generally depart from problems that require discussion or resolution. According to Nasution (1995: 11), "the problem is the formulation of some of the questions thrown to be solved or a settlement that is vague, brief, including concepts used". Essentially, the problem is the gap between expectation and reality. The main problem is the research has not increased motivation of participants in education and training as expected. It is influenced by various factors such as education and training, leadership, performance, ability, experience, organizational climate, other means of support. 2. Scope of problem Based on the identification of the above problems, the authors limited to three (3) variables with a focus on leadership and performance of the independent variables and the dependent variable motivation of education and training in Human Resource Development Centre of Transport Apparatus at The Ministry of Transportation. 3. Formulation of the problem Based on the identification of the above problems, the problem in this research is formulated as follows: a. How much influence leadership training on employee performance in education and training participants in the Human Resource Development Centre of Transport Apparatus? b. How much influence the performance of the motivation on education and training participants in the Human Resource Development Centre of Transport Apparatus? c. How much influence leadership training and performance of the motivation of education and training in Human Resource Development Centre of Transport Apparatus? 4. Research Objectives and Purpose

This research was conducted for the purpose of preparing the Scientific Writing as requirements for the implementation tasks trainer key element in professional development environment of traninerin Human Resource Development Centre of Transport Apparatus. The purpose of this study was to: a. Knowing, understanding and analyzing the influence of leadership on the performance of education and training participants. b. Knowing, understanding and analyzing the effect of the performance of the motivation of education and training in education and training participants. c. Knowing, understanding and analyzing the influence of leadership and motivation at a time or simultaneously on the performance of education and training participants. Furthermore, the utility expected from this research are: a. Usability research theoretically, is expected to add to the repertoire of science education research, the concept of leadership, employee performance and motivation of education and training. b. Practical usefulness of the research, is expected to provide input for the work unit object of research focused on increasing motivation of education and training. Moreover, it can also provide additional information for advanced research related to the same problem.

II. Research Methodology Design Research collection of quantitative data consist of primary data and secondary data and operational data is a variable which the independent variable. The first independent variable in this study is the leadership that the score obtained by measurement using a questionnaire that describes the performance of employees at the agencies. The population in this study were all participants in the education and training of the Center Human Resources Development for CommunicationsAparatus. There are two conditions that must be met in the sampling procedure, namely: representative sample (represent) and the size of the sample should be sufficient. To meet these two conditions used statistical approach in taking good sample size, by determining the error or errors are tolerated in the sampling. In this study sample is determined through a formula Slovin (Rachmat, 1996: 100), namely:

n=

N (d)2 + 1

From the above calculation, then the resulting sample in this study amounted to 120 personsfrom 150 person which consis of participant education and training Procurement of Government Goods and Services. As for the procedures and data collection techniques used by means of questionnaires and documentation Spreadlike studying various regulatory and books related to the study.Furthermore, for the method of data analysis used descriptive and inferential statistical analysis, and analysis scheme would hypotheses.

141

Statistical Performance N 120 Valid 0 54.8509 Missing 53.5000 Mean 50.00 Median 6.2912 Mode 39.5793 Std. Deviation 24.00 Variance 43.00 Range 67.00 Minimum Maximum

III. Result of Research and Discussion In relation to research carried out in the education and training of participants, the technical data collected in this study, is to deploy a list of questions (questionnaire) to the samples or the respondent who has been determined as many as 120 copies. From the questionnaire distributed all questionnaires can be collected, so the number of copies of the questionnaire were analyzed as many as 120 copies. In this statement the list contains statements that refer to the three research variables, namely Variable Leadership (X1), Variable Performance (X2) and motivation (Y). 1. Data Analysis and Testing Hypotheses

a. Leadership variable (X1) Leadership variables examined in this study, the results of computer calculations obtained: Statistical leadership N Valid Missing Mean Median Mode Std. Deviation Variance Range Minimum Maximum

Distribution Frequency Data Performance

120 0 54.8596 53.0000 63.00 6.0234 36.2810 23.00 45.00 68.00

Valid

For a description of the results of research data variable frequency Leadership (X1), can be presented in a frequency distribution as follows: Distribution Frequency Data Leadership Valid

45.00 46.00 47.00 48.00 49.00 50.00 51.00 52.00 53.00 54.00 55.00 56.00 57.00 58.00 59.00 60.00 61.00 62.00 63.00 64.00 68.00

Cumulative  Frequency Percent Valid Percent Percent 4 1.8 1.8 1.8 6 5.3 5.3 7.0 4 3.5 3.5 10.5 6 5.3 5.3 15.8 6 5.3 5.3 21.1 9 7.9 7.9 28.9 8 7.0 7.0 36.0 14 12.3 12.3 48.2 5 4.4 4.4 52.6 5 4.4 4.4 57.0 2 0.9 0.9 57.9 2 0.9 0.9 58.8 2 1.8 1.8 60.5 3 2.6 2.6 63.2 4 3.5 3.5 66.7 8 7.0 7.0 73.7 5 4.4 4.4 78.1 6 5.3 5.3 83.3 15 13.2 13.2 96.5 4 2.6 2.6 99.1 2 0.9 0.9 100.0 120 100.3 100.3

45.00 46.00 47.00 48.00 49.00 50.00 51.00 52.00 53.00 54.00 55.00 56.00 57.00 58.00 59.00 60.00 61.00 62.00 63.00 64.00 68.00

Cumulative  Frequency Percent Valid Percent Percent 4 1.8 1.8 1.8 6 5.3 5.3 7.0 4 3.5 3.5 10.5 6 5.3 5.3 15.8 6 5.3 5.3 21.1 9 7.9 7.9 28.9 8 7.0 7.0 36.0 14 12.3 12.3 48.2 5 4.4 4.4 52.6 5 4.4 4.4 57.0 2 0.9 0.9 57.9 2 0.9 0.9 58.8 2 1.8 1.8 60.5 3 2.6 2.6 63.2 4 3.5 3.5 66.7 8 7.0 7.0 73.7 5 4.4 4.4 78.1 6 5.3 5.3 83.3 15 13.2 13.2 96.5 4 2.6 2.6 99.1 2 0.9 0.9 100.0 120 100.3 100.3

c. Motivation variable (Y) Motivation variables examined in this study, the results of computer calculations obtained: StatisticalMotivation 120 N 0 Valid 54.7368 52.5000 Missing 50.00a Mean 6.0573 Median 36.6912 Mode 23.00 Std. Deviation 45.00 Variance 68.00 Range Minimum Maximum

b. Variable Performance (X2) Performance variables examined in this study, the results of computer calculations obtained:

142

From the data processing research with the aid of computer calculation program SPSS version 11 obtained t value of 4.829 while the amount of t table with degrees of freedom (df) 120 on the α (0,05) 1,96. Thus the t (4.829)> t table (1.96), so that Ho refused and H1 accepted, as shown in Table 4-3 below: Coeficients

Distribution Frequency Data Motivation Valid

45.00 46.00 47.00 48.00 49.00 50.00 51.00 52.00 53.00 54.00 55.00 56.00 57.00 58.00 59.00 60.00 61.00 62.00 63.00 64.00 65.00 66.00 68.00

Frequency Percent Valid Percent 2 1.8 1.8 2 1.8 1.8 4 3.5 3.5 11 9.6 9.6 7 6.1 6.1 13 11.4 11.4 11 9.6 9.6 7 6.1 6.1 5 4.4 4.4 2 1.8 1.8 3 2.6 2.6 2 0.9 0.9 3 1.8 1.8 2 0.9 0.9 2 1.8 1.8 10 8.8 8.8 7 6.1 6.1 13 11.4 11.4 4 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 3.5 3 0.9 0.9 2 0.9 0.9 1 0.9 0.9 120 100.1 100.1

Cumulative  Percent 1.8 3.5 7.0 16.7 22.8 34.2 43.9 50.0 54.4 56.1 58.8 59.6 61.4 62.3 64.0 72.8 78.9 90.4 93.9 97.4 98.2 99.1 100.0

Unstandardiz ed Coeficients Model B

Std. Error

Stand ardize d Coefi sients Beta

Correlations t

Sig. Zero orde r

Part ial

1.(Con 2.52 1.517 1.6 .09 stant) 4 .085 .409 64 9 .940 .41 Leader .411 .081 .562 4.8 .00 .949 7 ship .541 29 0 .53 Motiva 6.6 .00 3 tion 39 0 With proven t count> t table, it can be stated that leadership and significant positive effect on the of education and training participants. 5. t test for Hypothesis Two The second research hypothesis proposed is: there is an influence on the performance of participants Motivation on education and training, or the mathematical formula can be described as follows Ho : b1 = 0 : there is no influence on the Performance variables on motivation education and training participants. H1 : b1 # 0 : there is a variable effect on the Performance on motivation in education and training participants. If point of thitung>ttabel, so hence Ho refused and H1 accepted. From the data processing research with the aid of computer calculation program SPSS version 11 obtained t value of 6.639 while the amount of t table with degrees of freedom (df) 120 on the α (0,05) 1,96. Thus the t value (6.639)> t table (1.96), so that Ho refused and H1 accepted. With proven t count> t table, it can be stated that the motivation of the performance on education and training participants. 6. t test for Hypothesis Three The third research hypothesis proposed is:there are significant variables and Performance Leadership jointly positive and significant impact on the motivation of education and training, or by the following formula: Ho : b1 = b2 = 0 : there is no influence of Leadership and Motivation together on the Performance of the education and training participants.

2. Test Requirements Analysis For the purposes of testing the normality of the data, carried out in two ways: created histogram for the distribution of standardized residuals, and graphed Normal Probability Plot on every model. To obtain accurate results, calculations are performed with SPSS version 11, a result the researchers pointed out as follows: Based on chart illustrating the relationship between the value predicted by Studentized Delete Residual, it appears that the distribution of data around the zero point and did not seem the existence of a certain pattern on the distribution of the data. Thus the regression model complies with the requirements specified. 3. Hypothesis Testing In this study, the hypothesis proposed to identify and analyze the effect of the three variables, namely: a. The first hypothesis to determine the effect on the performance leadership variables on education and training participants. b. The second hypothesis to determine the effect on the motivation of performance variables on education and training participants. c. The third hypothesis to determine the effect of variables of leadership and performance on the motivation of the participants of education and training. 4. t Test for Hypothesis One Ho : b1 = 0 : there is no influence on the Performance Leadership variables on education and training participants. H1 : b1 # 0 : there is a variable effect on the Performance Leadership on education and training participants. If point ofthitung>ttabel, so hence Ho refused and H1 accepted.

143

Part

.13 2 .18 1

H1 :

one or both b1 # 0: there is an influence of Leadership and Motivation together on the Performance of the education and training participants. If the value of F count> F table, then Ho is rejected and H1 accepted, as seen in Table below: Tabel : ANOVA Sum of Model

Square

df

s 1.

Regres

F

Sig.

2

1901.2

614.0

.00

33

11

16

59

0a

343.67

8

3.096

2

12

4146.1

0

al Total

Square

3802.4

sion Residu

Mean

That mean : a. Each increase of 1 scores leadership variables affect the increase in variable performance score of 0.411 with the assumption that work motivation variable is constant. b. Each penigkatan 1 score motivation variable influence on the increase in variable performance score of 0.541, assuming constant Leadership variable / fixed. 9. Discussion Referring to the results of analysis of the effects on the Performance Leadership and Motivation in education and training participants, need to be discussed further existence of each variable as follows: a. The effect on the performance of leadershipon education and training participant. Based on the results of the research with the help of data processing calculation program SPSS version 11 obtained t value of 4.829 while the amount of t table with degrees of freedom (df) 120 on the α (0,05) 1,96 thus the value t count> t table, so Ho: rejected, H1: accepted. Although the results of hypothesis testing has proved their leadership influence on the performance significantly, but should continue to be taken innovative steps and constructively in order to improve performance through a variety of approaches. b. The effect on motivation performance in education and training participants. Based on the results of the research with the help of data processing calculation program SPSS version obtained t value of 6.639, while the amount of t table with degrees of freedom (df) 120 on the α (0,05) 1,96 thus the value of t> t tab, so Ho: rejected, H1: accepted. Although the results of hypothesis testing has proven the influence of motivation on performance is significant, but the need continues taken steps inovatifasi and constructively in order to improve performance in education and training participants. c. The ffect of Leadership and Performance together to Motivation From the results obtained by the data processing calculated F value of 614.059, while the amount of F table with degrees of freedom (df) 2 and 113 in the α (0.05) of 3.07. Thus F count> F table, soHo: rejected, H1: accepted. In other words, the better the application of good leadership is accompanied by a high motivation, it will also increase the performance of the education and training participants. In addition, the views of the coefficient of determination seen that, it turns out the degree of variation of 91.7% performance in education and training participants caused by Leadership and Performance is the dominant factor in increasing motivation, which is only 8.3% Motivation is influenced by other factors in this study were not analyzed.

05 From the data processing research with the aid of computer calculation programs obtained SPSS calculated F value of 614.059 while the amount F table with degrees of freedom (df) 2 and 120 in the α (0.05) of 3.07. Thus F count (614.059)> F table (3.07), so that Ho refused and H1 accepted. With proven F count> F table, it can be stated that the Leadership and Performance bersam both the motivation. 7. The coefficient of determination (R2) The coefficient of determination used to determine the level of diversity variael bound Y (Performance) caused by the difference in the independent variable X1 (Leadership) and independent variables X2 (Performance). With the help of computer processing of research data is based on the calculation of SPSS version 11 was obtained R2 value of 0.917. This means that the diversity performance of 91.7% due to the diversity of leadership and performance, while the remaining 8.3% is caused by other factors not examined. Model Summaryb Mode

R

l

R

Adjuste

Std.

Durbin

Squar

dR

Error of

-

e

Square

the

Watso

Estimat

n

e 1

.958

.917

.916

1.7596

1.942

a

a. Predictors : (Constant), Performance, Leadership b. Dependent Variabel : Motivation 8. Multiple Regression Equations Multiple regression equation is a regression model to see the effect of variable Leadership (X1) and Performance (X2) the motivation variable (Y). From processing computer based calculations SPSS version 12, is obtained:Ŷ = 2,254 + 0,411 X1 + 0,541 X2

144

From the description above, it can be said that the better leadership with high motivation, it will improve the performance of education and training of participants, in addition, is expected to give a good contribution to the process of improving the performance of employees in education and training participants,

c.

IV. Conclusions and Recommendations 1. Conclusions a. Leadership has a significant influence on the

REFERENCE Annonimous, Peraturan Pemerintah Nomor 51 Tahun 2012, tentang Sumber Daya Manusi Di Bidang Transportasi. Annonimous, Peraturan Menteri Perhubungan Nomor PM.189 Tahun 2015 Tentang Organisasi dan tata Kerja Kementerian Perhubungan. Annonimous,Renstra Kementerian Perhubungan tahun 2015-2017. Annonimous, Undang-undang Nomor 5 Tahun 2014, tentang Aparatur Sipil Negara Annonimous, Peraturan Pemerintah nomor 1101 Tahun 2000 tentang Pendidikan dan Pelatihan Pegawai Negeri Sipil. Ahwood, M. dan Dimmoel, S. 1999. Manajemen Personalia. ITB. Bandung. As’ad Mohammad, 2000, Psikologi Industri Cetakan Keempat, Yogyakarta : Liberty. Hasibuan, S.P, Malayu, 1999, Organisasi & Motivasi : Dasar-dasar Peningkatan Produktivitas Jakarta : Bumi Aksara. Hersey, Paul dan Blanchard, K.H 1998, Management of Organizational Behaviour Utilizing Human Resources New Jersey, Prentice Hall. Martani, Huseini dan Lubis, Harri, 1987, Teori Organisasi : Suatu Pendekatan Makro, PAU Ilmu-Ilmu Sosial-UI. Nasution. 2000. Didaktik Azas-azas Mengajar. Jakarta : Bumi Aksara. Robbin. P. Stephen, 1995, Teori Organisasi, Struktur Desain dan Aplikasi, Edisi Tiga, Jakarta : Arcan.

motivation and education and training participants. In other words, the better the performance of education and training participants. This is consistent with the calculation results SPSS that t for X1 (Leadership)> t table. b. Motivation and significant influence on the performance of education and training participants. In other words, the higher the motivation the participants' training, the better their performance. It is based on the results of data processing obtained t value for the variable X2> t table. c. Leadership and Motivation jointly and significant influence on the performance of education and training participants. In other words, the better the level of Leadership with high motivation, the better anyway. This is consistent with the results of data processing in which the value of F count> F table, so that Ho refused and H1 accepted. d. The coefficient of determination (R2) of 0.917, meaning that 91.7% of the diversity of education and training participants performance caused by the diversity of Leadership and Motivation, while the remaining 8.3% caused by the other factors in this study were not analyzed further.

2. Recommendations a.

b.

carrying out its duties and functions as the executor of activities or can be said as a control in implementing work mechanism applies, so as to improve employee performance. Therefore, it ought motivation to do really apply the principle of transparency. Need to do further research on other suspected factors can affect the motivation of education and training, so that the results can be more representative again.

Given the high influence on the motivation of leadership education and training, the need for concrete measures to maintain the existing level of leadership; even should continue to be improved. This is done by running and doing a good leadership to protect subordinates and remains responsible for all activities undertaken by the officers / employees. his study shows the influence motivation on education and training participant. Motivation can be defined as the process of observation of the conduct of all activities that can be responsible for the results obtained. Thus, the motivation to do should be seen as an activity that is very helpful in

145

THE STUDENTS’ PERCEPTION TOWARD TEACHER’S REINFORCEMENT IN TEACHING ENGLISH Sri Marmoah1) Atik Aprilyanti2) Batanghari University, Jambi [email protected], [email protected]

Abstract. Students get motivation from parent and teacher. In the world of education, teacher is a key to motivate students because students spend more time in school.Teacher needs reinforcement skill to motivate them. One approach to acquiring this information is to improve our understanding of what the students themselves perceive toward teacher’s reinforcement. The purpose of this research was to analyze the perception of teacher’s reinforcement in teaching English. The research design is descriptive qualitative research. The data were collected through observation, interview, and documentation. Based on the observation result the English teacher does variation component of reinforcement, except token reinforcement. Based on the interview result, the English teacher does the reinforcement skills in the classroom as well as possible. Student’s perception that teachers reinforcement has positive effect. Finally, student’s perception toward teacher’s reinforcement is positive perception because students feel positive effect based on goal of reinforcement. Key Words: Reinforcement, Perception, Teaching English. I.

INTRODUCTION Motivation is complex power, encouragement, strength need, and maintain the desired activity to achieve personal (Hoyt & Miskel in Abdul Rahman Shaleh. 2009:184). Students get motivation from parent and teacher. In the world of education, teacher is a key to motivate students because students spend more time in school. Teachers need reinforcement skill to motivate them. In reinforcement, teachers give compliment such as teachers say good, excellent, or to give reward such as tropi, pens or something can make student enjoy learning. The technique of reinforcement is teachers use variation reinforcement such as teachers use verbal (good, excellent), raise thumb, patting student’s shoulder, etc. Purpose of reinforcement is to increase students’ motivation and increase students’ attention to learning process. Reinforcement is very imfortant to create condusive class, students get optimal process learning and control behaviour students. Teacher’s reinforcement has an effect for the students. The perceived of students are different from the other students. Students look, feel, and hear what is teacher’s reinforcement is then the students interpret and give the sense. This is called perception. Perception is process individual to give sense about environment or around him (Makmun, 2013:62). Students perceive how teachers give reinforcement on them. Each student has different perception that is influenced by internal factor such as physiological, attention, interest etc and external factor such as motion, power of stimulus. The process of perception is stimulus received through the organs senses (sight, hear, touch) which is then interpreted, that individuals understand and perceive the stimulus that he receives. That mean, student has different perception to other student. Based on this case researcher wants to know how is student’s perception of teacher’s reinforcement at the tenth grade of SMA 03 Kota Jambi.

II. DISCUSSION Based on the observation and the interview result the researcher found how student’s perception at the tenth grade students of SMA N 03 Kota Jambi. It will be describe below: Based on the observation in five meetings that English teacher rarely provides reinforcement before lesson start. Teacher provides reinforcement, such as verbal reinforcement, proximity, activity reinforcement and gestural reinforcement before study start. Teacher never does contact and token reinforcement before lesson start. Teacher always provides reinforcement during the learning process. The teacher rarely used activity, proximity reinforcemet at the end of the lesson. Teacher never did verbal, gestural, contact and token reinforcement at the end of the lesson. Based on the observation that teacher uses verbal, gestural, proximity, activity and contact reinforcement. Teacher uses verbal, gestural and activity reinforcement at the end of the lesson. Teacher does not token reinforcement before lesson start, process or the end of the lesson. Teacher seldom uses word verbal reinforcement before the lesson start. Teacher always uses the word verbal reinforcement in the process learning. Teacher uses word verbal reinforcement such as good, very good, right. Teacher never uses the word verbal reinforcement at the end of the lesson Teacher usually says “very good” to praise the student. Teacher sometime says " right" to praise the student. Teacher rarely says "thankyou" when praising the student such as when students finish to take the rubbish in the class and teacher compliment about the class is clean. Teacher praises students with word verbal reinforcement when the student can answer correctly teacher’s question. Teacher never uses the sentence verbal reinforcement at the end of the lesson. Teacher never uses the sentence verbal reinforcement before lesson start. Teacher rarely uses sentence verbal reinforcement on while activity in the learning process. Teacher says “you are right” and “that's

146

good” to praise the students. Teacher says sentence verbal reinforcement when students can answer correctly. Teacher never uses sentence verbal reinforcement by the end of the lesson. Teacher says sentence with smiled and rise thumb. Teacher does not say name of student when the teacher said word or sentence verbal reinforcement to prised the student. Teacher does individually compliment. Teacher immediately provides reinforcement when the student can answer correctly. According to Uzer Usman (2013:83) said that reinforcement should be obvious to anyone who indicated because otherwise it would be less effective reinforcement. Therefore, teachers must first mention the name of the student and then looked at his face and then the teacher gives reinforcement Teacher sometimes uses gestural reinforcement at the beginning of the lesson. Teacher always uses gestural reinforcement on while activity in the learning process. Teacher uses gestural reinforcement such as smile, thumb rise and gave applause. Teacher always give smile when compliments the students or ask students to answer questions. Teacher often gives applause the students and rarely gives rise thumb. Teacher never does gestural reinforcement at the end of the lesson. Teacher uses gestural reinforcement accompanied by verbal reinforcement. The teacher gives smile instantly to students who can answer teacher’s question. Teacher gives rise thumb to individually. Teacher gives applause then followed by other students. Teacher sometime gives smile then said good or very good then rises thumb then gives applause. Teacher always uses proximity reinforcement. Teacher often walks to close students before the study start. Teacher always walks to close the student in the learning process and sometimes the teacher walks to close the student at the end of lesson. Teacher walks to close student when students want to ask the teacher, the teacher asks the students, teacher listens the student’s answer, teacher looks at and examines student’s work. Teacher provides proximity reinforcement, such as walks close to the student. The teacher walks to close the student individually and sometimes in group. Teacher walks close to the student when the teacher asks student so that students were more focused to listen the teacher's questions. The teacher walks to close to the student when the student asked to teacher because sometime that class was noisy. Teacher walks to close the student with smiled. Based on the observation in five meetings that teacher never gives activity reinforcement before the lesson start. Teacher often gives game during the learning process and often at the end of the lesson. Teacher uses activity reinforcement such as guessing and magic trick. Teacher asks a student show to magic trick in front of class when student finish learn in the class. Magic gives students are happy. So, that the learning process becomes very enjoyable. The teacher asks to play magic at the second meeting on Friday, the first and second hour. Teacher also gives guessing at the end of the lesson. Teacher asks student to answer teacher’s guessing. Student feel enjoy because students try to answer it. In a meeting teacher has two variation of game.

Based on observations during five meetings that teacher never uses contact reinforcement such as teacher pats student’s shoulder before the lesson start. Teacher often pats student’s shoulder in the learning process. Teacher never pats student’s shoulder at the end lesson. Teacher pats student’s shoulder when student make noisy in the class and rarely pats student’s shoulder for compliment. Students immediately stop fussing and focus back to the teacher. Teacher rarely praises the student by saying good or very good with accompanying pats student’s shoulder. Based on observations during five meetings teacher never gives token reinforcement to students who can answer the teacher's questions correctly at the start before learning, during the learning process or at the end of the lesson. Based on the observation in the pre, while and post activity it shows that teacher’s reinforcement in teaching English at the tenth grade of SMA N 03 Jambi was good. Teacher always gives verbal reinforcement. Teacher also uses gestural reinforcement, such as a smile, rise thumb and gives applause. Teacher also sometimes uses the contact reinforcement praise students who are accompanied by verbal reinforcement. But, the teacher always uses the contact reinforcement for negative behavior such students make noisy in the class. Teacher always uses proximity reinforcement when the students wants to ask, examines students’ work , when the teacher wants to ask and when teacher listens to the student’s answer. According to Buchari Alma, (2012:41 said that there are six component in reinforcement : 1. Verbal reinforcement. Example of verbal reinforcement. Words verbal: teacher says good, very good. Sentences verbal: teacher says that's a good or you are right. 2. Gestural reinforcement. Gestural reinforcement is shown through facial or other limbs. Such as smile, teacher gives applause, and rises thumb. 3. Proximity reinforcement such as teacher walks to close the student. 4. Contact reinforcement, example teacher pats student’s shoulder 5. Reinforcement activity, example: teacher does the game or fun activity for students. 6. Token reinforcement. Based on the explanation above the researcher analyzes that teacher uses verbal, gestural, proximity, activity, and contact reinforcement. Teacher uses five components reinforcement but, based on Buchari Alma component reinforcement has six. Teacher does use token reinforcement. Teacher reinforcement is a good because teacher has uses five components reinforcement to students, teacher also provides students immediate reinforcement. Teacher also gives reinforcement soon when the student does good behaviour. Based on the observation the researcher concludes that result in the reinforcement English teacher does the verbal reinforcement component relate to the teacher praised such as the word "good" or "very good" with a smile and a pats student’s shoulder and gives applause.Teacher also uses a reinforcement component guessing game to the students. That means teacher does variation component such as

147

verbal, gestural, proximity reinforcement, contact, activity and teacher does not token reinforcement. Based on the result of the interview of the student at X.4 Science the tenth grade of SMA N 03 Kota Jambi that clearly show us that teacher uses word verbal reinforcement. Teacher always says “good” to praise students when students can answer questions correctly. Teacher ussually says “very good”. Teacher sometime says “very nice”,”right”and“thankyou”. Students say that the teacher praises the students as verbal reinforcement when answering questions correctly. Students argue that when a teacher praises the students with verbal reinforcement word. Students become excite because they feel successful, student feel active to answer question. Students to follow English lessons. Students proud about the teacher’s compliment. Students get spirit and motivate to study, students assume the teacher is someone who has a good personal. But, unlike F9 who said "I am Happy and I proud" and researcher asked "why?. Informant just said "Nothing". She feel happy and proud without any definite reason. The researcher concludes that the students’ perception toward teacher’s word reinforcement is positive perception because the students feel effect for them. Such as students get motivation and spirit to answer and study lesson, student get positive thinking about their teacher and their ability. But, F9 just feel happy and usually maybe F9 not focus or maybe her condition is not fit. Teacher rarely uses sentences verbal reinforcement to praise the students, the students says that the teacher praises the sentence "clap your hand to your friend", "you are right", "that's right", "you are smart. Students say that when a teacher praises that sentence, the students are happy with the answer. Students also feel to have a good communication with the teacher has good personal. Students get motivation and spirit to learn. But, unlike F4, F6, F7, F8, F9 and F12 which say that teacher never praises the sentence but, only words verbal. The researcher conludes the students’ perception toward teacher’s sentence verbal reinforcement is positive perception because the part of student feel positive effect for them. Sucha (Sc) as student get motivation to study English, student has positive thinking because they close to their teacher, teacher has a good personal and a good communication. Based on the interview show that teacher uses gestural reinforcement such as expressions and body movements when praising students. Teacher uses gestural reinforcement such as smile, gives applause and rise thumb. Students find when look at teacher’s the expressions and body movements. Students feel happy and proud because the answer is appreciated, students get motivation to learn and answer questions from the teacher, students were able and to felt smart to other friends, students feel that the teacher has good personal, students feel be diligent answer questions, students feel comfortable in the learning process, the students want to answer the question again, students feel that the teacher is someone who is fun and easy going. Student feel that they close to teacher, students feel enjoy it, the students attempts to answer the teacher's questions quickly. Teacher gives expressions and body movements such as clapping and rise thumb when students can answer the questions correctly. The researcher concludes that

students’ perception toward teacher’s gestural reinforcement is positive perception because students have positive effect for their selves. Such as student get motivation to study and answer question, student has positive thinking about their teacher and their ability, student has initiative to answer quickly than his friend. Based on interview shows, teacher provides proximity reinforcement such as teacher walks to close the student, teacher ever walks to close the students when students to ask, teacher listens to students' answers, teacher asks the students, students sleep in class, the teacher checks the work or task of student, student is sick. Teacher walks to close to the student when the teacher explains the lesson. F1 says he is nervous when teacher look at his work in the class, F8 says nerveous when teacher asks her to forward in front of the class. F3 and F12 say nerveous when teacher asks him, F11 says when teacher walks to close student who ask teacher is not polite because students should walk to close teacher. F7 says what the teacher does is ussuall and not effect when teacher walks to close student for asking. Teacher asks students to come forward class. Teacher walks close to the student when teacher wants to check homework and assignments. Students feel nervous and uncomfortable when the teacher approaches the student’s noisy and then they control their self. Students become active within in the class. Students feel happy and proud because they can answer it. Students are happy when teacher listen to the answer question. Students feel ignored by teachers when students are ill in the class. Student nervous when teacher walks to close sudent when ask the students. Students pay attention to the teacher when the teacher explains leasson. Students do complete homework at home. The researcher conludes that the students’ perception toward teacher’s proximity reinforcement is positive perception because average for them says it has positive effect for them such as students get motivation to learn, student can control themselves, students pay attention to teacher, student has positive thinking for them. May be, F1, F8, F3, F12 that they nerveous because they scare about their answer is false. Based on interviews that teacher uses activity reinforcement such as guessing and magic trick. Teacher does game when conditions are students bored, sleepy, and tired because after SMA N 03 performing arts activities. Teacher invites to play the game at the beginning and end of lessons or when the teacher comes late. Students are happy because learning is fun, not tired, not sleepy. Students become spirit and motivate to learn English subject. Students easy to memorize the vocab. F9 says that she is happy to play the game but there is no effect on the game because she does not understand about the game was provided by the teacher. The researcher concludes that the students’ perception toward teacher’s activity reinforcement was positive perception because students got motivation, students easy to learn English lesson. Except, F9 does not feel effect because she does not understand about game. Based on interviews that teacher uses contact reinforcement. Teacher rarely pats student’s shoulder. The teacher pats the student’s shoulder when the student noisy in class, teacher praises students who can answer questions correctly, students sleep in class and teacher want to asked them. Student feel shy when teacher patted their soulder

148

when they are noisy in the class. Students focuse again to teacher’s lesson. F5 informant says " nervous and scare about teacher’s question so, we should focus on the teacher's questions ". F6 said that he feel close to the teacher. F7, F8, F9, F10 says that teacher never pats their shoulder as praise or reprimand. So,the students’ perception toward teacher’s contact reinforcement is good because average of students said it has effect for them. Such as student can control themselves when they are noisy in the class. Teacher sometime used contact reinforcement for not good behaviour of students and rarely to prises students. Based on interviews shows that teacher does not use toke reinforcement. Students say that teacher never gives token reinforcement. However, F3 says that once that the teacher gave him candy when he can answer questions. F5 says just once teacher gave candy to him. According to Buchari Alma (2012:40), the goal of reinforcement is to increase the students 'attention to the teacher, to facilitate the learning process, or raise students' motivation, self control in learning, directing students to a way of thinking that is a good or a private initiative. Based on the explanation above the researcher analyzes that the English teacher already does variation reinforcement because teacher’s reinforcement has effect to student learning in process. Students’ perception toward Teacher’s reinforcement is positive perception. Effect reinforcement is students become motivate to learn, students can lead to better ways of thinking, lead to behavior learning of verbal sentence produktive. Effect of reinforcement is directing students thinking positive. Effect of gestural reinforcement is directing students good way, motivating students, facilitate student learning, increase students' attention, the student has a personal initiative. Effect of proximity reinforcement is improving students' attention, cause productive learning behavior. Effect of reinforcement activity is to facilitate the process of learning, stimulating students, creating learning behavior produktive. Effect of contact reinforcement is to control disruptive behavior. There is not effect for token reinforcement to students because teacher does not token reinforcement. Based on the interview result the researcher concludes the students’ perception toward teacher's reinforcement are positive perception. Because, students feel positive effect. Teacher can make student feel easy to learn, enjoy, motivate to learn and controled of students’ behaviour. Teacher has arrangement level what component reinforcement teacher is used in the class. First, teacher used verbal reinforcement such as word reinforcement.Teacher said good, very good, right. Second, teacher uses proximity reinforcement such as teacher walked close students. Third, teacher uses gestural reinforcement such as smile, rise thumb and give applause to students. Fourth, teacher uses contact reinforcement, such as patting student’s shoulder. Teacher patted student’s shoulder just for male. Fifth, teacher used activity reinforcement, such as game guessing or asked student showed magic trick. Sixth, teacher never uses token reinforcement. Based on the interview result, the researcher concludes that students also feel another effect. F1 feel nervouse when teacher walks close to examine his working or assigment. F5 feel nervous and scare when teacher walks close to ask her because she feel something wrong with her.

F11 feel shock when teacher pats his shoulder so, he does not concentrate about what the teacher’s question and he felt that is not polite when teacher walked close to him for listen his question. Because, that should student walked close teacher when student asks teacher. III. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTION After the discussion, we can conclude that students’ perception toward teacher reinforcement at the tenth grade students of SMA 03 Kota Jambi is positive perception because the student feel good effect toward teacher’s reinforcement. Teacher does variation reinforcement. Teacher uses verbal, gestural reinforcement, proximity reinforcement, activity reinforcement and contact reinforcement. Teacher does not token reinforcement. Student feel get motivation to study, student can control behaviour, student feel easy to learning English , student has positive or student give attention to teacher in the learning process. Teacher uses principles of reinforcement such as variation, teacher gives reinforcement directly. After analyzing the data and making the conclusion, the researcher provides suggestions in how the reinforcement at the tenth grade students of SMA N 03 Kota Jambi. IV. SUGGESTIONS To be more effective in his/her teaching, it is suggested that a teacher should: Firstly, the teacher should has a wide knowldge about the reinforcement and it can be implemented in process learning. Secondly, teacher should have the ability relate to creating and maintaining of optimal condition for learning process. Thirdly, hopefully the teacher shouldn’t forget to run variation reinforcement, should use principle of reinforcement. Fourth, the teacher should run his role as a teacher to support student’s motivation and he should have a good relationship with their students. Finally, another researcher should research about condition of student in learning. REFERENCES Alma Buchari, 2012. Guru Profesional .Bandung:Alfabeta. Arikunto,Suhaimi, 2006. Procedure Penelitian Suatu Pendekatan Praktik.Jakarta: PT Asdimahatya C.Richard Jack and S.rodgers theodore,1999.Approach and Method in Language Teaching a Desciption and Analysis.USA:Cambridge University. Harmer J,2007. The Practice of English Language Teaching. New York: Pearson Education Limited. Henry,James & Daniel, 2011. Pschology. Newyork: W.W.Norton & Company Jenkin James,2010.TEFL Uncovered.United Kingdom:i-to-i. J.Moleong Lexy, 2013.Metodologi Penelitian Kualitatif .Bandung:PT Remaja Rosdakarya. John W. Cresswell, 1994. Research Design Qualitative & Quantitative Approach. New Delhi: SAGE Publication. Khairani,Makmun,2013. Psikologi Umum.Yogyakarta:Aswaja Pressindo. Kumaravadivelu,2006.Understanding Language Teaching from Method to Post Method .New Jersey: Larence ErlbaumAssociates. Maxom Michelle, 2009.Teaching English as a Foreign Language for Dummies.England: Wiley. Mulyana,deddy,2012.Ilmu Komunikasi.Bandung: Rosda. Nunan David,1992.Research Method in Language Learning.USA:Cambridge University Press. Rahman,Saleh Abdul,2009.Psikologi .Jakarta:Kencana. Sugiyono,2012.Metode Penelitian Kuantitatif Kualitatif dan R&D.Bandung: Alfabeta. Usman Moh.Uzer ,2013.Menjadi Guru Profesional.Bandung: PT Remaja rosdakarya.

149

Weny,dita, 2013. Membangun Persepsi Positif siswa terhadap layanan Bimbingan dan konseling melalui teknik modeling Thesis. Semarang: PGRI W. Tuckman Bruce, 1972. Conducting educational Research. America : Harcourt Brace Jovanoich,INC.

150

LITERACY DEVELOPMENT IN EDUCATION SECONDARY CURRICULUM Suherli (University of Swadaya Gunung Jati Cirebon) Abstract: The development of civilization in the 21st century requires a different perspective in education. The development of technology and information torrential can not be anticipated by obstructing its use in education. A lot of knowledge and science that is conveyed through the media technology development, hard to resist. The development of civilization must be a challenge for educators to prepare superior resources and become a winner in the global competition. The curriculum is a whole view of the need for the Indonesian nation prepares Human Resources excellence, productive, and competitive in the future. Indonesian nation must be a nation that is able to compete with other nations in the world, a nation of critical, innovative, and creative and a nation that has a high literacy to be able to make Indonesia as an independent and sovereign nation. The development of literacy learners is very urgent and emergency for inclusion in the revised curriculum. The curriculum contains a draft of a new social order that must be competitive with other nations. Hope that is then poured into the design objectives, content, materials, and ways of learning, or so-called curriculum for primary and secondary education in order to prepare the nation to compete with stand upright and parallel. Keynote: Literacy, Education Secondary, Curriculum A. Introduction In preparing for the Indonesian nation superior human resources planning is needed very mature and thorough. One of the efforts is the realignment of the curriculum of primary and secondary education and higher education. Curriculum is a set of plans and arrangements regarding the objectives, content, and teaching materials and methods used as an inspiration for the organization of learning activities to achieve educational goals. In other words, the curriculum is one of the tools to prepare students to have the skills to live in accordance with the conditions of life today and for the future. Improvement and enforcement of Curriculum 2013 in primary and secondary education is done in order to equip learners with the competencies they are expected to live a life in the 21st Century In this era required Human Resources (HR) who have skills in the realm of attitudes, knowledge, and skills holistically. They will be the Indonesian human resources able to compete with other nations in the calculation of predictive demographic and global economic developments in 2030 required skilled human resources as much as 113 million whereas currently only fulfilled 55 million. Therefore, such a condition becomes a particular challenge for teachers to prepare superior human resources through the development of literacy. In the future, human resources, Indonesia is expected to compete with other countries in the World Trade Organization (WTO), the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) Community or MEA, Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) and the ASEAN Free Trade Area (AFTA) that this challenge may not be ignored. In addition, the challenge life nation as citizens of the world must be better prepared to Indonesian people not to be a nation that is in the lower level. For it can be done through education should equip learners to enable the study of UNESCO's four pillars, namely learning to know, learning to do, learning to live together in peace and harmony and

learning to be. Therefore, the curriculum should be able to encourage the achievement of positive behavior of learners and prevent radicalism attitude. In participated globally, our learners aged 15 years (SMP / MTs and SMA / MA / SMK has participated in the measurement of literacy skills of reading, literacy mathematical and scientific literacy organized by the Program for International Student Assessment (PISA). Measurement this is done on a regular basis, once every three years to states that are willing to measure. the timing of the measurement for 120 minutes with samples 8000-10000 students from 350 schools, both public and private. Based on the measurements by PISA our students have increased scores for reading literacy, but when compared with countries that were measured precisely this ability always was at the bottom. this means that the learning associated with the ability to read (in Subjects Indonesian) needs to be improved, because our students have always been at the bottom of the country- countries measured. Measurement reading literacy oriented capabilities: (1) reading comprehension; (2) use the readings; and (3) reflect in writing. Reading literacy score of the measurement results can be seen as the following table: MEASUREMENT OF PISA READING LITERACY No Year Score Order ∑ country 1 2000 371 39 41 2 2003 382 39 40 3 2006 393 48 57 4 2009 402 57 65 5 2012 396 61 64 6 2015 397 69 76 Note: Adapted from various sources Students must obtain competence we think high-level (high order thinking skills) to resolve the problem with critical thinking, innovative, creative, to live with other human beings in peace and harmony (to live together in

151

peace and harmony). Our students must be coupled with students of other countries in applying the standard of reading literacy. Thus, our students must have the literacy skills to read not only reading comprehension but also should be able to use these readings as well as to reflect the content of reading into writing. By looking at the data presented by the PISA reading literacy as above, it seems necessary to re-orient learning Indonesian in primary and secondary education. It seems that all teachers in primary and secondary education must have special attention to the development of literacy learners. To support this, the Curriculum 2013 in Subjects Indonesian has been revised, one of which on the development of literacy learners. Literacy is derived from the word literacy means literacy, literacy or proficiency in reading and writing (Teale & Sulzby, 1986; Cooper, 1993: 6). Definition of literacy based on the context of use is declared Baynham (1995: 9) that literacy is the integration of listening skills, speaking, writing, reading, and critical thinking. James Gee (1990) defines literacy from the ideological standpoint discourse stating that literacy is a fluent mastery of a secondary discourse. In providing such conceptions, James Gee uses the premise that literacy is a skill that is owned by someone in the form of activities to think, speak, read, and write. Stripling (1992) states that "literacy means being Able to understand new ideas well enaught to use them when needed. Literacy means knowing how to learn ". This understanding is based on the basic concept of literacy as literacy so that the scope of the range in all efforts made in the understanding and control of information. From the view of the social sciences, Robinson (1983: 6) states that literacy is the ability to read and write well to compete economically in full. Further explained that literacy is the ability to read and write are associated with success in the academic community, so that literacy is a device that is owned in order to reap success in the social environment. National Assessment of Educational Progress defines literacy as the ability to read and write performance is required throughout life. A legal expert believes that literacy is a competency in understanding the discourse, both as a reader and as a writer so as to reveal the person as educated professionals who not only apply to for learning but applying it good forever. Based on some of the descriptions in advance it can be stated that literacy is (1) the ability to read and write; (2) based on the use of literacy means the ability of integration between listening, speaking, reading, writing and thinking; (3) ability to be ready for use in mastering new ideas or how to learn; (4) device capabilities as supporting their success in academic or social environment; (5) the ability to read and write performance is always necessary; (6) an academic competency in understanding the discourse professionally. In the current development of the concept of literacy is associated with a variety of human life, hence the terminology of science literacy, technology literacy, social literacy, political literacy, business literacy, literacy follownegative, and so on.

The curriculum was developed with the foundation of philosophical, juridical, and sociological excellent to prepare human resources of Indonesia in the future. Indonesian curriculum developed a draft of the objectives, content, teaching materials, as well as ways of learning in primary and secondary education. Curriculum 2013 is expected to develop literacy through learning Indonesian nation through the development of reading, writing, and critical thinking are supported by the Literacy Movement Schools. 1) Development of Core Competence Attitude The curriculum was revised in 2013 that stipulated that the competence development attitude, good attitude, spiritual and social attitudes conducted a follow directly. Learning core competence (KI-1 and KI-2) conducted through the eyes of Religious Education and Budi Character and subjects PPKn. Meanwhile, the development of attitudes in learning Indonesian in the K13 starting from Basic Competence (KD) learning of KI-3, followed by KD at KI-4, and as an accompanist effect developed KD of KI-1 and KI2 relevant. For example, to write poetry didn’t learn without preceded by an understanding of the content of poetry and literary structure of the poem, as well as aspects of language used poetry. Therefore, learning to write poetry is integrated with learning to understand the content of the poem, structural and linguistic aspects of poetry. However, the lesson that way not by "telling", but instead uses a scientific approach, which encourages students to find their own. Furthermore, the attitude of teachers to reflect the development of spiritual and social attitudes based on the interpretation of the poem. To find the "understanding" is, students learn to develop the ability to listen to poetry readings or ability to recite poetry, learn to identify the elements of poetry, identifying diction (word choice) and connotative meaning and understanding of the context of the poem, so understanding of students in poetry very complete. From this understanding continued with the development of creative abilities of expression and literature and teach them to be honest, not same as poems by others (plagiarism), and taught how to respect other people's work. 2) Alignment Competence Basic competence is developed from core competencies, consisting of Spiritual Attitude (KI-1), Social Attitudes (KI-2), Knowledge (KI-3), and Skills (KI-4). Competence is in line with the development of capabilities in learning which include affective, cognitive and psychomotor. In the development of KD there are some materials that in view of the development of language and compose will lead to verbalism students and dominance in the low level of cognitive development. Therefore, in addition to the order, systematic, and the level of difficulty of teaching materials linier ranging from the ability of students in basic education (SD / MI-SMP / MTs) to secondary education (SMA / MA and SMK / MAK) so that the teaching materials language and compose balanced and sustainable. In some KD repairs related to the material scope and sequence of material that is consistent with the view of linguistic and science education. If only rely on the scope of linguistics but neglects consideration of education for learners, the direction of learning does not match the initial

II. Literacy Development Efforts

152

expectations. Therefore, improvement K13 primarily on coherence at the level of material vertically and horizontally education level coherence each lesson. It is very visible on the alignment of KI and KD Indonesian with other subjects in Primary School / lower grade (1-3) thematically, as well as the alignment of KD for SD / MI grade advanced (4-6) with SMP / MTs, and SMA / MA / SMK / MAK. In understanding the framework of KI-KD at K13 many educators have difficulties, so the purpose of learning the changes are not as expected. Therefore, to facilitate users, especially teachers in understanding and developing the framework KD K13 presented in detail and biting between KD of KI-3 with KI-4. Thus, the development of KI KD-4 must be reached through learning KI-3 first. Presentation is decomposed and coupled between KD of KI-3 and KI-4 is expected to make it easier for teachers to understand the K13. 3) Learning Process Thinking Similarly, the learning process that otherwise should always use 5M (observing, questioning [not ask], gather information, reason, and communicate) was revised, as the approach is not the only one that is used and not to be procedural. Therefore, in learning Indonesian 5M should coincide with the Pedagogic Model consisting of (1) Establish the context; (2) Examining the model / example; (3) Constructing guided; (4) Constructing independently. Thus, to produce work, learners do not always have to be in the form of work or discussion group, because that stage is only one form of self-construct heading ability. In addition, in presenting the material must consider: usefulness of content, communication functions, develop cognition and culture relevant to the learners. This consideration should be done in learning Indonesian to students of primary and secondary education. Learning procedure each subject according to the characteristics of K13 is the approach to scientific thinking. If previously, the learning is done by telling the students, then the K13 turned into guiding learners to find their own. Basically the scientific approach used to develop their own learning and to train students' critical attitude towards facts and phenomena. Thus the learning procedure, the teacher is no longer "tell" but directs the activities that can be done learners to "find out". Learners gain knowledge through the steps of the scientific method: asking questions, observing the facts, filed a temporary answer, examine the facts, summarized answers, convey findings. 4) Developing Literacy via Basic Competence In addition, the development of literacy is explicitly embodied in the Basic Competence in KI-3 and KI-4 in Indonesian subjects. Pouring literacy development activities in Indonesian subject competence in the hope of no activity that teachers and learners that lead to increased literacy. The development of literacy, such as basic competence Indonesian Lessons for SMP / MTs (numbers 1-14) and for SMA / MA (numbers: 15-28): 1) Examine the structure, language, and the text content of the report on the observation that in the form of knowledge books are read or heard (3.8) 2) Present a summary of the text of the report on the observation that in the form of book knowledge orally and in writing with attention to the rules of language or verbal aspect;

3) Find the elements of two fiction and two nonfiction books (books enrichment) is read 4) Make a mind map / synopsis of the contents of two nonfiction books (books enrichment) and two fiction books read 5) Examine the relationship of the elements in both fiction and nonfiction books (books enrichment) were read; 6) Presenting the content in response to both fiction and nonfiction books (books enrichment) were read; 7) Exploring and find information from the two books of fiction and two nonfiction books (books enrichment) were read; 8) Make a concept map / flow lines of two fiction and two nonfiction books (books enrichment) were read; 9) Review the elements of both fiction and nonfiction books (books enrichment) were read; 10) Present response to both fiction and nonfiction books (books enrichment) were read orally / writing; 11) digging the elements of two fiction and two nonfiction books (books enrichment) were read; 12) Make a concept map / flow lines of two fiction and two nonfiction books (books enrichment) is read 13) Examine the relationship between the two elements of fiction / nonfiction read; 14) Present response to both fiction and nonfiction that reads; 15) Mention the key points of two nonfiction books (books enrichment) and a book of fiction (novels) are read; 16) Develop an overview of two nonfiction books (books enrichment) and a summary of the novel being read; 17) Analyze least two fiction and one nonfiction books (books of knowledge enrichment) is read; 18) Commenting at least two books of fiction and one nonfiction books (books of knowledge enrichment) that have been read 19) Find the key points of the fiction book (book collection) is read; 20) Prepare reports on the key points of the fiction book (book collection) is read; 21) Find the key points of two nonfiction books (books of knowledge enrichment) is read; 22) Exhibiting personal impression of one nonfiction books (scholarly books or books enrichment) is read in the form of a short explanatory text; 23) Analyze the message of the two books of fiction (novels and books of poetry) and one non-fiction books (books enrichment) were read; 24) Prepare a review of the message of the two books of fiction (novels and books of poetry) that are associated with the present situation; 25) Assess the contents of two books of fiction (short story collection or a collection of poetry) and one non-fiction books (books enrichment) were read; 26) Prepare reports on the results of discussions of books on the topic 27) Identify the values contained in two books of nonfiction (enrichment) and a book of fiction (drama) are read; 28) Writing a reflection on the values contained in nonfiction books (books enrichment) and fiction (drama) were read.

153

Thus the development of literacy has been incorporated into the basic competencies contained in subjects Indonesian based Curriculum 2013. 5) Development of Reading Literacy It is very essential in efforts to develop literacy is a literary movement School (GLS). This reading literacy development requires the students to read 15 minutes before school starts, but instead of reading textbooks, but books enrichment, both the enrichment of knowledge, skills, and personality. On Curriculum 2004 has determined the number of books students should read, but because it is not incorporated into the learning, habituation it is often ignored by teachers. On SBC was expressed about the need to read a number of books, but because it does not result in a charge as a result of learning, this ability becomes ceremonial return. At K13 learning literacy reading is done and put in KD should be billed by the teacher as learning outcomes. Students SD / MI who have otherwise been thoroughly studied Indonesian language if they had read at least 6 books, other than textbooks. The books in question are books enrichment of knowledge, skills, and this means affection. Since students are in grade 4 literacy should be able to read at least 2 books, so that by the sixth grade he would have been able to read 6 books. Meanwhile, for students of SMP / MTs should have read at least 12 books, so that at each grade level should read at least 4 book titles or two titles each semester. Similarly, for high school students / MA / SMK should have read at least 18 books. Development of reading literacy is incorporated into KD so that educators can measure the read performance of learners. Educators can also apply various theories of reading to students, for example, apply SQ3R, PQRST, and other reading strategies are developed based on the results of the study in accordance with the capabilities and the development of our learners. The impact of the development of literacy reading is expected to also encourage educators to become educators learners, so that they will diligently read as diligent students reading to find information about strategies and learning model that can improve the ability of learners in each subject. So expected to grow the ecosystem good education, as well as with the publication of the book. They will continue to be encouraged to improve quality reading books. The development of literacy reading books, other than textbooks this in order to provide the foundations of literacy to them, in order to equip them with literacy needed in life. It was not the target of achieving the number of books to be read, but to accustom them to read and empowers them to think critically based on the insight that can be developed through reading activities. The students should have the literacy skills environment, spatial literacy, mathematical literacy, technology literacy, cultural literacy, social literacy, and other aspects that come into contact with the lives of young people in the future. The development of literacy skills have been developed in the late educational institutions, however, we should be able to start from now in order human resources of Indonesia which is expected to be achieved. III. CLOSING Such a glimpse of the need for the development of literacy through education by teachers in order to prepare

superior human resources and competitive. Preparation of the curriculum as a lesson plan by the government do in order to prepare the people of Indonesia in the future. The government's efforts to be a tit for tat with the efforts of the teachers in a leading sector in preparing Indonesian literary nation. Without careful preparation of human resources, Indonesia will again be a nation by other nations. Indonesia is a nation independent so that in the international arena need to have parallels with other nations in all aspects of life. This setup can only be done through education. The curriculum is a whole view of the need to prepare human resources of Indonesia in the future. By looking at the data "demographic bonus" that in the years 2030-2045 the Indonesian nation will require human resources productive age are very large, so they need to be given the ability and skill as a superior human character and noble character. Indonesian nation must be a nation that is able to compete with other nations in the world, a nation of critical, innovative, and creative and a nation that has a high literacy to be able to make Indonesia as an independent and sovereign nation. The development of literacy learners is very urgent and emergency for inclusion in the revised curriculum. The curriculum contains a draft of a new social order that must be competitive with other nations. Hope that is then poured into the design objectives, content, materials, and ways of learning, or so-called curriculum for primary and secondary education. In the context of the development of literacy, it seems necessary literacy movement that is not only a slogan but in the form of real activity and be implemented immediately so that our nation can catch up with other nations to compete by standing straight and parallel. REFERENCES Baynham, Mike. (1995) Literacy Practices: Investigating Literacy in Social Contexts. London: Longman. Bloom, Benjamin S. (1979) Taxonomy of Educational Objectives. London: Longman Group Limited. Cooper, J.D. (1993) Literacy: Helping Children Construct Meaning. Boston Toronto: Hougton Miffin Company. Gee, James (1990) Social Linguistics and Literacies: Ideology in Discourse. London: Falmer Press. Majid, Abdul. 2014. Implementasi Kurikulum 2013: Kajian Teoretis dan Praktis. Bandung: Rosda Karya Peraturan Menteri Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan Nomor 24 tahun 2016 tentang Kompetensi Inti dan Kompetensi Dasar Pelajaran pada Kurikulum 2013 untuk Pendiikan Dasar dan Menengah. Puskurbuk Balitbang Kemdikbud. 2014. Bunga Rampai Kajian Pembelajaran dan Penilaian dalam Kurikulum 2013. Jakarta: Puskurbuk. Ranard, A. Donald dan Margo Pfleger (1993). Language and Literacy Education for Southeast Asian Refugees. Dalam Eric Digest [On Line] Vol. EDO-LE-93-06, September 1993; 5 halaman. Tersedia: http://edu.NCLE-CAL/html [02 Februari 2001]. Robinson, Jay L. (1983) “The Social Context of Literacy”. Essay dalam Patricia L. Stock Essays on Theory and Practice in the Teaching of Writing. USA: Boynton Cook Publisher Inc.

154

THE IMPACT OF EMPLOYEE JOB SATISFACTIONS TO WORK COMMITMENT: A CASE STUDY OF MINISTRY OF INDUSTRY IN INDONESIA Dewi Susita1), Hania Aminah2) 1)

UNJ , Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected] 2)

UNJ, Jakarta, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Number of employees of the Ministry of Industry more in the productive age, expected to increase job commitment, and it shows that employee commitment Ministry of Industry looks still low, so that researchers feel challanging to know how to improve the employees’ commitments, so that the aim of this research is to study the causal relationship between employee job satisfactions to work commitment. Survey was conducted in this with 189 sample of employees selected randomly. The data has been analyzed by path analysis. The findings of this research concludedd that: (1) there is a positive and significant effect of job satisfaction to work commitmen in employee of ministry of industry. So, the conclusion of this research is by increase the employee commitment need to increase job satisfaction it self, by some innovative ways. Keywords: employee job satisfaction, work commitment research objectives include: To investigate whether job satisfaction effect on employee commitment to the Ministry of Industry.

I. INTRODUCTION In facing competition every organization including government organizations should have a core competence, and ready to face the challenges of a unique environment of complex and volatile. (Cohen, S, Eimicke, W, 2008). Individual competencies is also worth noting that the very survival of the organization. This is supported by the opinion of Lans, Biemans and Mulder (2008), which says that the core competence of the organization can be achieved if people who live in it have individual competencies (Lans, T, Biemans, H and Mulder, M (2008). Core competence reflected the commitment of each individual, where the commitments are affected by one of them is job satisfaction. this is supported by the theory advanced by Clugston and Lum et al (2000) which says that there are significant job satisfaction on commitment. Number of employees of the Ministry of Industry more in the productive age, expected to increase job commitment, but according to data from 2014, shows that employee commitment Ministry of Industry looks still low, due to the activities carried out is lower than the available budget, which in 2014 only reached by eighty-eight percent. This is evident from some of the attitudes of employees, among others: (1) More work is based on the provisions of the existing course, and less creative, because it lacked the challenge (2) Lack of funds and time given cause employees less do the practice to their work and commitment of the employees still less because of the work being done only to the extent of an administrative nature. (Eris, Y, 2007). In connection to the above, the researchers are interested in researching further to know and be able to get an answer to the extent of the link between job satisfaction (job satisfaction), the commitment (commitment) of employees in the Ministry of Industry, arguing some

II.

LITERATURE REVIEW

A. Commitment The commitment of individuals in the organization is the degree to which a person devotes attention, ideas, and responsibilities in order to achieve organizational goals. This is supported by the opinion of Colquitt (2008) are: organizational commitment is defined as the desire on the part of an employee stays a member of the organization. While Adam. J and Jones, WH (1999), stating "Commitment is defined as the extend to which an individual Believes in the veracity and utility of his or her actions, and may be contrasted with the debilitating sense of alienation that results from feelings of powerlessness and resignation in the face of stressful events”. Newstrom dan Davis (2010) viewed from other side that, Organizational commitment is the degree to which an employee identifies with the organization and wants to continue actively participating in it. Sedangkan menurut Benkhoff (1997) Commitment is the degree to which emloyees care about, and contribute to, organizational success. Another notion mentioned by Robbins and Judge (2010), among others: Organizational commitment is defined as a state in which an employee identifies with a particular organization and its goals and wishes to maintain membership in the organization. Feelings of pleasure to work as noted above, is also confirmed by the opinion of Gary Blau (2011), among others, as follows: “Commitment is affective commitment refers to one’s emotional attachment to an occupation, (I want to stay): normative comitment is a person’s sense of obligation to remain in an occupation ( I should stay):

155

while continuance of commitment refers to the individual’s assessment of the costs associated with leaving one’s occupation (I have to stay).” Shaw, Delery & Abdulla (2003), Gibson (2008), view commitments as The result of invesments or contributions to the organization, or psychological approach, in which commitment is depicted as a positive, high-involvement, high-intensity orientation toward the organization. Furthermore Luthans (2008), McShane and Von Glinow (2007), Wagner and Hollenbeck illustrates the commitment is more compact, which have a strong desire to remain a member of certain organizations, the desire to strive and have a certain belief, acceptance of the values and goals organization. In addition there is also a sense of partisanship commitment to organizational goals, the feeling of involvement in the tasks of the organization, a sense of loyalty to the organization.

1) The Work it self; responsibility, interest, and growth, 2) quality of supervision; technical help, and social support, 3) relationship with co - workers, 4) Promotion opportunities, chances for further advancement;, and 5) Pay, Hypothesis Model specifications can be Described above hypothesis in statistical hypothesis to be tested in this study items, namely: testing positive work motivation (X), on commitment (Y). Subjects and Measures The population in this study were all employees the echelon IV in the Ministry of Industry, which consists of nine (9) of the Directorate General (with the two characteristics are studied, namely: job satisfaction and commitment. The number of samples for research purposes, using the formula Slovin order to obtain validity generalization. From 358 population obtained a sample of 189 respondents. How to determine the respondents conducted with a random sample proportional (proportionall random sampling). samples trials to test the research instrument used 30 employees. this was done to determine the validity and reliability of research instrument. he data used in this study consisted of, primary data directly from the object observed in this study are employees of the Ministry of Industry. Secondary data were obtained indirectly through other sources, generally in the form of archives, journals, books and so forth supporter. Research conducted on two research instruments, ie measuring instruments are comprised of the dependent variable and independent variables. The dependent variable was the commitment (Y), while the independent variables include job satisfaction (X). Based on these instruments collected data in the form of a questionnaire in the form of respondents with a scale interval Likert scale of 1 to 5. This questionnaire was developed by based on the conception that includes conceptual definitions, operational definition, and grid research instruments. The research instrument is tested and analyzed. Analysis of research instruments was conducted to test whether the instruments used in this study met the requirements for a good measuring tool. Analysis of the research instrument consisting of validity and reliability. From the definition of a conceptual and operational definitions of variables commitments obtained indicator (1) the desire to remain in the organization (2) the desire to be actively involved in the organization, (3) the desire to contribute to the success of the organization, (4) the desire for identification with the goals and vision of the organization , (5) the desire to remain in the organization, (6) the desire to stay opted in charge of the organization. Based on the test of the validity of the use of correlation technique product moment of 32 items for the variables are 1item invalid (drop) and 31 statement item instrument commitment variable (Y) meet the requirements or the results of trials found as many as 32 items declared valid and 1 grain otherwise drop ie number 23. From the calculation of reliability by using Alpha formula

B. Job Satisfaction Employee job satisfaction is an important thing to consider in achieving organizational goals. This is supported by Greenberg, J & Baron, R & Newstrom and Davis (2002) who found job satisfaction have a positive impact on the achievement of work objectives and Job satisfaction is a set of favorable feelings and emotions with the which employees view Reviews their work. Job satisfaction is an effective attitude a feeling of relative like or dislike toward something. This is supported by the opinion of Wexley and Yulk, Robert P. Vecchio, 2006) defines job satisfaction, "Job satisfaction is emotional reactions to employment experiences are Inevitable. One's thinking and feeling toward work ", whereas job satisfaction according to Schermerhorn, Vroom in Luthan is as follows:" Job satisfaction is the degree to which individuals feel positively or negatively about Reviews their jobs". The same opinion was also expressed by Qolquitt, Lepine and Wesson, Luthan, 2008) that Job satisfaction as a pleasurable emotional state the resulting from the appraisal of one's job or job experiences. It represents how you feel about your job and what you think about your job, and Ivancevich, Kanopaske and Matteson, Robbin, S (2008) found, "Job Satisfaction an attitude that workers have about Reviews their jobs. It results from their perception of the jobs". The next development of job satisfaction expressed by Wagner & Hollenbeck, 2007) which says that "Job satisfaction as a plesurable feeling that result from the perception that one's job fulfills or Allows for the fulfillment of one's important job value". This is reinforced by the opinions Kreitner, R and Kinicki, A (2008) which says that: "Job satisfaction is an affective or emotional response toward various Facets one's job. This definition implies job satisfaction is not a unitary concept. Rather a person can be are relatively satisfied with one aspect of his or her job and dissatisfied with one or more other aspects. The above understanding is reinforced by Jennifer and Gareth, Schemerhorn and Gibson, et al (2008), which identifies five aspects contained in job satisfaction, namely: the five Facets of job satisfaction measureb by the JDI are

156

Croncbach obtained that the instrument has a commitment to high reliability. From the definition of a conceptual and operational definitions of variables job satisfaction derived indicators: (1) the job and the task at hand, (2) the remuneration salary / honoraria, (3) the opportunity promotion obtained, (4) position and the position given, (5) working standards are set, (6) working conditions, (7) the recognition of the work and (8) the support of colleagues. Based on the validity of the test using product moment correlation technique for variable X 3 are invalid item (drop) and 30 items from 33 statement instrument job satisfaction variables (X) satisfy the requirements of validity. Calculation of reliability by using the formula Croncbach Alpha coefficient reliability of the instrument for job satisfaction variables 0.93 then in accordance with the classification criteria of reliability values, it can be said that job satisfaction instrument has high reliability.

are low, less than 0.8. To test the assumption multikoleniaritas used Pearson Correlation. Heteroscedasticity test aims to test whether the probability distribution is considered interference remains the same for the entire value of the variable values of the independent variables called homokedastisitas. Test white with Eviews program used to test heterokedastisitas. This assumption test aims to determine whether a regression model occurred inequality of residuals from one pangamatan to another observation. Uji Hipotesis Hypothesis: testing positive direct satisfaction (X), the commitments (Y) Ho :ß ≤ 0 Ha :ß >0

influence

job

RESULTS a. Descriptive Data Description of the data in this section include commitments instrument data (Y), which is referred to as the dependent variable is job satisfaction (X). Description of each of the variables are presented in succession starting from the variable Y, X

III. METHOD OF ANALYSIS a. Descriptive Analysis Descriptive analysis is a calculation of the average price of arithmetic (mean) and standard deviation of scores between the two variables. The calculation results are described in the list of the frequency distribution of each variable as well as visualized in the image or graphic hitrogram. Based on the known value of the raw data processing respectively for the mean, median, mode, standard deviation, range, minimum, maximum, and the coefficient of variance, then made the distribution of frequencies is visualized through tables and graphs histogram. b. Inductive Analysis Inductive or inferential analysis to draw conclusions based on the results of the processing of the data obtained by sampling techniques. Data collected through research instruments were analyzed using descriptive statistical analysis techniques and inferential statistics (Chourmain.M, 2008). Descriptive statistical analysis is used to provide an overview of each of the variables that can be measured (observable). Multiple regression analysis aimed to determine the influence of some of some of the independent variables commonly called X, and so on with the dependent variable is called Y (Ginting 2008: 191). he classical assumption of this study is the normality test and test and test multicolinearity heterokedastisitas. Testing normality test conducted for the statistical analysis of parametric assumptions that must be possessed by the data are normally distributed. This study uses the Jarque-Bera test for normality assisted with program Eviews significant level (α) = 5% with a confidence level (df) by 95%. Data will be normal distribution when the Jarque-Bera value greater than 5% .. Test Multicollinearity aims to test whether the regression model found the level of correlation between the variables free (independent). A good regression model was happening correlation between variables free (independent)

Job Satisfaction Data of job satisfaction scores range between 30 to 150 theoretical and empirical score range between 90 to 150. The result of the calculation of the data obtained by an average of 116.81; standard deviation of 10.67; variance of 113.886; The median is 115; and the mode of 111. Of the 189 samples can be classified into 9 classes, 3 score instrument ranges between 90-96, or 1.59%, 9 at intervals of 97-103 or 4.76%, 39 with intervals of 104-110 or 20.63% , 57 with intervals of 111-117, or 30.16%, 39 with intervals of 118-124, or 20.63%, 27 with intervals of 125131, or 14.29%, 8 people with intervals of 132-138 or 4, 23%, 3 at intervals of 139-145, or 1.59%, and 4 people with intervals of 146-152, or 2.12%. Work Commitments Data of work commitments scores range between 31 to 155 theoretical and empirical scores range between 76 up to 155. The result of the calculation of the data obtained by an average of 127.40; standard deviation of 13.81; variance of 190.7204; median of 126; and the mode of 124. Means that of 189 samples can be classified into 9 classes, 4 score instrument ranges between 76-84, or 2.12%, one person with an interval of 85-93, or 0.53%, 2 at intervals of 94-102 or 1.06 %, 2 at intervals of 103-111, or 1.06%, 33 with intervals of 112-120, or 17.46%, 87 with intervals of 121-129, or 46.03%, 22 with intervals of 130138 or 11 , 64%, 20 with intervals of 139-147, or 10.58%, and 18 people with the interval 148-156 or 9.52%.

157

TABLE I SUMMARY OF DESCRIPTIVE ANALYSIS

Employee Job Satisfaction 116,81 0,78 115 111 10,67 113,886 60 90 150 22078 189

Description Mean Standard Error Median Mode Standard Deviation Sample Variance Range Minimum Maximum Sum Count

Work Commitments 127,40 1,0 126 124 13,81 190,720 79 76 155 24079 189

The regression equation Y = 49.69 + 0,67X, Retrieved Fhitung = 67.18 is greater than Ftabel3,89 at α = 0.05 and Ftabel6,77 at α = 0.01 for dk (1: 187). Because Fhitung> Ftabel the regression equation is expressed very significant. For the linearity test, obtained Fhitung = 1.32 is smaller than the Ftabel1,46 at α = 0.05 and Ftabel1,69 at α = 0.01 for dk (45: 142). Because Fhitung ttable 2.33 at α = 0.01 and thus it can be stated that the correlation between Y and X are very significant.

Testing Requirements Analysis Data The use of parametric statistical work on the assumption that the data of each study variable to be analyzed form a normal distribution. The testing process requirements analysis in this study is a condition that must be met for technical use regression included in the group of parametric statistics can be applied for the purposes of testing the hypothesis. Data used in formulating regression model should meet the assumption that these data come from a population that is normally distributed. The assumption of normality basically states that in a regression model should be normally distributed. From the test results using Lilliefors test. In this test test these assumptions in this study carried out by testing the normality of the estimated regression error seventh research will be analyzed Lhitung value smaller than the value of commitment Ltabel then spread the data on job satisfaction comes from normally distributed population. Research hypothesis testing was conducted using regression analysis techniques. From the data results of calculations for modeling regression equation between commitment and satisfaction, obtained by regression constants a = 49.69 and the regression coefficient b = 0.67. Thus the relationship model of simple linear regression equation is Y = 49.69 + 0,67X.

Hypothesis testing The results after analyzing the model used as the basis for answering hypotheses and draw conclusions in this study. Explanation to answer the hypothesis can be described as follows: Direct Impact Positive Job Satisfaction (X) of the Commitments (Y) H0: ß ≤ 0 H 1: ß > 0 H0 is rejected, if tcount> ttable. From the calculation of regression analysis, the direct effect of job satisfaction (X) of the commitment (Y), with a value of 4.978 while the value thitung ttable at dk = 185 for α = 0.05 by 1.96. Therefore tcount greater than the value t table then Ho is rejected and H1 accepted, thus job satisfaction (X) has positive influence on commitment (Y) can be accepted. From the analysis of the hypothesis produced findings that job satisfaction is a positive direct effect on commitment. Based on these findings we can conclude that increased job satisfaction will lead to increased commitment.

TABLE II ANOVA To Significance and linearity of regression in Equation Y on X

Sumber Varians

Dk

Jumlah Kuadrat (JK)

Total

189

3103571

Regresi a Regresi b/a Residu

1 1 187

3067715,56 9476,35 26379,09

9476,35 141,07

Tuna Cocok

45

7771,42

172,70

Galat

142

18607,67

131,04

df: degrees of freedom JK: The sum of squares RJK: Average number of squares **: Significant regression (F count> F table) at α = 0.01 ns: be linear regression (Fhitung 0,05 then the data is distributed normal and if significance score is (sig) < 0,05, then data is not distributed normal.

170

TABLE VI RESULTS NORMALITY TEST VALUE PRETEST AND POSTTEST

Kolmogorov - Smirnova Statistic df ,173 17 ,179 17 ,171 17 ,124 17 ,164 17 ,145 17 ,207 17 ,153 17

Group 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

Pre PS Post PS Pre control Post control

In this research, normality test was done to know whether pre test result and post test result is distributed normal or not. Normality test was done by KolmogorovSminov test which is analyzed with SPSS 21. The testing criteria is if significance score is (sig) > 0,05 then the data is distributed normal and if significance score is (sig) < 0,05, then data is not distributed normal. Homogeneity test Homogeneity test is done to check whether the scores have homogeny variety or not. The testing criteria is i(sig)> 0.05, then the data is homogen. Based on the homogeneity test, for pretest and posttest experiment class and control class, it show that the significance is (sig) > 0.05. Which means that the data is homogen. TABLE VII TEST OF HOMOGENEITY OF VARIANCES

Pre PS Post PS Pre control Post control

Levene Statistic ,517 1,102 1,406 ,006

df1

df2 1 1 1 1

TABLE IX SECOND HYPOTHESIS

N-Gain PS N-Gain Conventional

,477 ,301 ,244 ,937

TABLE VIII FIRST HYPOTHESIS

Pre PS Post PS

35 35

Average

Correlation

t

Pvalue

0, ,419

-17,758

0,000

19,6857 40,4571

The Numbers Of Student 35 37

Average

t

Eta Squared

Pvalue (2tailed)

0,606

0,000

0,2578 0,0364

10,421

In Table 9 The average value of N-Gain for method problem solving is greater than the average value of N-Gain control classes are 0.2578 and 0.0364. These results suggest that the ability of creative thinking of students who studied with the problem solving methods is significantly higher than students who are taught using conventional teaching method. This supported by the data in Table 9. Gauge t value to the value of 10.421 to the value of significance test (2tailed) 0.000. That is, H0, the test results significantly. Improving the ability of creative thinking of students studying teaching methods problem solving higher than the control classes are taught using conventional teaching method. The second research hypothesis is accepted. The gauge of the effect of the use problem solving methods to improve students’ ability to think creatively in economic subjects indicated by Eta Square value of 0.606. That is an increase in creative thinking abilities of students in economic subject by 60.6%.

Result of Hypothesis Test The first hypothesis is about the improvement found in students’ creative thinking skills using problem solving method after the treatment. Data analysis was done by SPSS 21 program. The summary can be seen from Table 8.

The Number of Student

Sig. ,122 ,177 ,242 ,379 ,177 ,319 ,104 ,071

is an increase in creative thinking abilities of student problem solving methods after treatment. The second hypothesis is that there are differences increase creative thinking abilities of student problem solving methods and conventional teaching methods after treatment. Data processing was performed using SPSS 21.0. Summary of the processing results can be seen in Table 9.

Sig. 33 33 33 33

Shapiro - Wilk Statistic df ,915 17 ,925 17 ,933 17 ,945 17 ,925 17 ,940 17 ,911 17 ,901 17

Sig. ,185 ,153 ,198 ,200* ,200* ,200* ,052 ,200*

Discussion of Research Result (the qualitative value of the use of problem solving and data were added) The Comparison of Students’ Creative Thinking Abilities Before and After Using Problem Solving Methods From the research there are difference increase creative thinking abilities of students using problem solving method before and after treatment. This is evidenced by the results of the posttest experiment class problem solving method at 40.45 from pretest results that only amounted to 19.68. While the control class that uses the conventional method results of a pretest posttest at 23.21 at 19.83. This situation

In Table 8., it appears that an increase in the average value of pretest to posttest average value that is equal to 40.4571 19.6857 become. Such increase shows that the use of problem solving methods can enchance students' ability to think creatively. This is supported by the data shown in Table 8 that the gauge of the correlation value of 0.419 and gauge t arithmetic is -17.758 with P-value less than 0.05. That is, the first hypothesis can be accepted that there

171

shows that there are a significant increase of the experiment class as expected. Based on the results of data processing using SPSS 21, the effect of the use of problem solving methods to improve students' ability to think creatively of 60.6%, these figures suggest there is a significant improvement in the ability of creative thinking of students by using problem solving method. Because of using problem solving methods, students not only listen to the explanation of the teacher alone, but are required to be able to identify and formulate problems and find alternative solutions, so as to conclude an alternative to solve the problems that it faces. Students gain a variety of experience in solving a problem, which requires students to be able to construct or generate ideas and concepts in economics lesson. As revealed by Sanjaya (2010: 220) that: Problem solving can help students to develop new knowledge and responsibly in the learning they do. In addition, that solution can also be pushed to perform well against its own evaluation results and the learning process.

the teacher. Guidance teachers during these discussions will also enhance the pleasure of the subjects submitted by teachers, thus increasing the motivation of students to further explore the curiosity of the material that is being taught. Data from questionnaire responses provided by the teacher to the students about the opportunities provided by the teacher to the students to ask questions about the material that is poorly understood and back annotation of teachers about the results of group discussions in a way that is easily understood (item 11 and 13) shows the results of 100% and 91, 4% of the 35 students who answered "yes". These results indicate that teachers should provide the opportunity for students to ask questions about things that are poorly understood, so students do not misunderstand the concept and the material being taught teachers. Lack of opportunities given to students to ask the teacher can lead to the achievement of the concept and the material on the students were only partially or not as expected. Explanation returned by the teacher about the results of group discussions in a way that is easily understandable to be able to improve memory students about the material results of discussions, more than the explanation of the result of proper discussion will encourage students to discover and define concepts, theories, nor the correct ideas about the material or problems given and to encourage students to be more active and creative thinking in solving a problem.

The problem solving method is seen as the new method for the student’ and is not a boring method, moreover if it is supported by the use of fun media or other teaching aids. Students will be motivated to better understand and explore the subject matter of economics. The interest of students towards economic subjects will be able to enhance the students' ability to think creatively. As revealed by Momon Sudarma (2013: 48) that the learning model that stimulates students to be able to think critically and creatively one of them is a model based learning problem solving (problem solving based learning). The result of questionnaire about the implementation about implementation of the method used by teacher during the teaching process and the use of teaching aids or fun media (questionnaire items 3 and 6) shows a quite high result of 85.7% and 80% of 35 students who answered "yes". It means that teacher is required to be smart in choosing and using in the interesting method for the students so it can reduce students’ boredom during the teaching learning process. The use of interesting teaching aids or media must be done to increase the curiousity, interest, motivation, and especially to improve students; creative thinking skill once they decide an alternative to solve the problem they face. Data from the questionnaire responses provided by the teacher to the students about the problem set by the teacher to delve curiosity of students to the problems submitted and the guidance of teachers to students while discussions were taking place (questionnaire items 7 and 10) showed similar results, namely 85.7% of 35 students who answered "yes". It means that the problem set by the teacher to the student should be the kind of problems that can dig up the curiosity of students to the problem. Problems must be given to issues relating to daily life that may be experienced by students so that students are required to think more creatively in order to seek to find alternatives and choose the most appropriate alternative and suitable for the problem. Guidance teachers during these discussions are very important in order to explore the ability of students in looking for alternatives and determine the appropriate alternative to solve the problem of

IV. CONCLUSION Generally, from the research result it can be the concluded that the implementation of problem solving methods is a learning method that can be used to in improving the students' creative thinking skills. Specifically, based on the research question, proposed hypothesis, research result, and explained description, it can be concluded that : 1. The improvement is found in students’ creative thinking skill who use problem solving before and after the treatment. It means that problem solving method can improve the students’ creative thinking skills in economics subject. 2. There are different improvement found in the students’ creative thinking skills who use problem solving and conventional learning method after treatment. It means that students’ creative thinking skills who use problem solving is higher than the students’ creative thinking skills who use conventional learning method. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

172

S. M. Metev and V. P. Veiko, Laser Assisted Microtechnology, 2nd ed., R. M. Osgood, Jr., Ed. Berlin, Germany: Springer-Verlag, 1998. Adji, Wahyu. (2007). Ekonomi Untuk SMA/MA Kelas X. Jakarta: Erlangga. Ahmadi, Abu dan Joko Tri Prasetya. (1997). SBM Strategi Belajar Mengajar Untuk Fakultas Tarbiyah Komponen MKDK. Bandung : Pustaka Setia. Amir, Taufiq. (2010). Inovasi Pendidikan Melalui Problem Based Learning Bagaimana Pendidik Memberdayakan Pemelajar di Era Pengetahuan. Jakarta: Kencana. Arikunto, Suharsimi. (2010). Prosedur Penelitian Suatu pendekatan dan Praktek. Jakarta : Rineka Cipta.

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]

[19] [20] [21] [22] [23]

[24]

--------------------------. (2013). Dasar-Dasar Evaluasi Pendidikan Edisi 2. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara. Djamarah, Syaiful Bahri dan Aswan Zain (2002). Strategi Belajar Mengajar. Jakarta : Rineka Cipta. Djarwanto Ps. (1996). Mengenal Beberapa Uji Statistik Dalam Penelitian. Yogyakarta : Liberty. Filsaime, Dennis K. (2008). Menguak Rahasia Berpikir Kritis dan Kreatif. Jakarta: Prestasi Pustakaraya. Fisher, Robert and Mary Williams. (2004). Unlocking Creativity. British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data. Gulo, W. (2002). Strategi Belajar Mengajar. Jakarta : Grasindo. Hamza, & Kimberly G. Griffith. Fostering Problem Solving & Creative Thinking in the Classroom: Cultivating a Creative Mind!. Tersedia [Online] : http://www.nationalforum.com/ Helmut R Lang, and David N. Evans. (2006). Models, Strategies, and Methods For Effective Teaching. Pearson Education. Jack R. Frankel dan Norman E. Wallen. (1993). How To Design And Evaluate Research In Education Second Edition. The McGraw Hills Companies. Kementrian Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan. (November 2012). Pengembangan Kurikulum 2013. Tersedia [Online] : http://www.kemdikbud.go.id. KOMPAS ONLINE. Tersedia [Online]: http://www.kompas.com Kusnendi. (2013). Skala Pengukuran dan Teknik Analisis Data Dalam Penelitian Non Eksperimen dan Eksperimen. Bandung: Universits Pendidikan Indonesia. Kyung Hee Kim. The Creativity Crisis: The Decrease in Creative Thinking Scores on the Torrance Tests of Creative Thinking. Tersedia [Online] : http://kkim.wmwikis.net/file/view/Kim_2011_Creativity_crisis.pdf Lorin W. Anderson dan David R. Krathwohl. (2010). Kerangka landasan Untuk Pembelajaran, Pengajaran, dan Asesmen. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar. Majid, Abdul. (2013). Strategi Pembelajaran. Bandung: Rosdakarya. Matt Baker, Rick Rudd, Carol Pomeroy. Relationships Between Critical and Creative Thinking. Tersedia [Online]: Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. Mulyasa, E. (2013). Pengembangan dan Implementasi Kurikulum 2013. Bandung: Rosda Karya. Noer, Sri Hastuti. Kemampuan Berpikir Kratif Matematis dan Pembelajaran Matematika Berbasis Masalah Open-Ended. Tersedia [Online] : http://www. ejournal.unsri.ac.id

[25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32]

[33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [38]

173

Paul Eggen dan Don Kauchak. (2012). Strategi dan Model Pembelajaran Mengajarkan Konten dan Keterampilan Berpikir Edisi Keenam. Jakarta: PT. Indeks Permata Puri Media. Richard I. Arends. (2007). Learning To Teach Belajar Untuk Mengajar Edisi Ketujuh. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar. Riduwan. (2012). Pengantar Statistika. Bandung : Alfabeta. Rusman. (2010). Model-Model Pembelajaran Mengembangkan Profesionalisme Guru. Jakarta : RajaGrafindo Persada. S, Alam. (2006). Ekonomi Untuk SMA dan MA Kelas X. Jakarta : ESIS. Safari. (2008). Analisis Butir Soal. Jakarta : Asosiasi Pengawas Sekolah Indonesia, Departemen Pendidikan Nasional. Sanjaya, Wina. (2011). Strategi Pembelajaran Berorientasi Standar Proses Pendidikan. Jakarta: Kencana. Siregar, Eveline dan Hartini Nara. (2010). Teori Belajar dan Pembelajaran. Bogor: Ghalia Indonesia. Siswono, Tatag Yuli Eko. Upaya Meningkatkan Kemampuan Berpikir Kreatif Siswa Melalui Pengajuan Masalah. Tersedia [Online]: http://tatagyes.files.wordpress.com/2009/11/paper05_problemposing. pdf Sudarma, Momon. (2013). Mengembangkan Keterampilan Berpikir Kreatif. Jakarta: PT. Raja Grafindo Persada Sugianto. (2012). Mengolah Data Bisnis Dengan SPSS 20. Jakarta: Elex Media Komputindo. Sugiyono. (2012). Metode Penelitian Kuantitatif, Kualitatif dan R&D. Bandung: Alfabeta. Suyono, dan Hariyanto. (2011). Belajar dan Pembelajaran Teori dan Konsep Dasar. Bandung : Rosdakarya. Torrance, E. Paul. (1995). Why Fly A Philosophy of Creativity. Ablex Publishing Corporation. Yamin, Martinis. (2012). Desain Baru Pembelajaran Konstruktivistik. Jakarta: Referensi.

DEVELOPMENT OF LEARNING MODEL FOR DEVELOPING/IMPROVING/EMPORING STUDENTS TEACHER COMPETENCES BY INTEGRATING AUDIO VISUAL AND SELF REFLECTION Tri Sediyani 1), Yufiarti 2) Eko Hadi3) 1)

UNJ , Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected] 2)

UNJ, Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected] 3)

LP3I, Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. This study aims to develop a model of learning by integrating multimedia and audio-visual self-reflective learners. This multimedia was developed as a tool for prospective teachers as learners in the education of children with special needs to reflect on their teaching competencies before entering the world of education. Research methods to develop models borg and gall for the development of multimedia audio-visual products are integrated. The technique of collecting data through observation, interviews in getting a needs analysis as a method for developing learning models. The results showed that students courses Teaching Competency Development with audio visual multimedia capabilities integrated with self-reflection can help teachers teach students to develop their competencies in special education with disabilities and children with special needs. Keywords: Development Model, teaching competence, Audio Visual, special education, disabilities.

I. INTRODUCTION The world of education is a world that continues to experience growth. Increase of population, increasingly also increased the number of children who need an education. Some children are born with different needs compared to normal children in general. Their condition may have a physical disorder or developmental delays, learning disabilities, mental illness or even children with very high level of intelligence. To be or a teacher of children with special needs , must pass several debriefing special education. Special training is intended for those who want to have career in the field of education. Someone who has character with a high level of patience, sincere love children with special needs students as difficult as any condition, will be fit to be a teacher The child with special needed . Patience, creativity, and ability to organize a good indispensable. Especially to mention is the ability to understand the differences between individuals with one another, and also the ability to motivate children with special needs is a very important factor determining the success of a teacher for children with special needs. Often those who have the ability to identify and appreciate the slightest achievement of children students will more easily to the task of being a teacher for children with special needs. But of course, an educator must have a basic background of teacher education, but to be successful the necessary have intuition and patience. State University of Jakarta as one of the institutions which produce educators. Educational institutions image as one of the producers campus that teacher actually becomes an important role as a highly qualified human resources form.

Development of Teaching Competence is one of the compulsory courses for student teachers at the Institute of Educational Personnel . This course shaped course which weighs 2 credits practice and performed as a prerequisite to follow the Field Experience Program , Professional Teacher Education . Originally course it has the name Field Experience Program , a name change done from the academic year 2010/2011. Changes motivated by Act No. 14 of 2015 on teachers and lecturers, Government Regulation No. 74 Year 2009 on Professional Education Program for Teachers, which confirms that the teacher is a professional position are required to have academic quality with minimal education diploma S-1 / D-IV, and a certificate of education through professional education. In order to determine the ability of prospective teachers in teaching it is necessary to equip the professionalism of teachers and peer teaching practice to see the ability to teach prospective teachers. No activity in peer teaching self-reflection from the video recorded at the time they teach, but they do not know that they are being recorded practice activities. Reflection may sound like a lot of work, but preservice teachers like you report that they value and benefit from reflecting on teaching (Richert, 1990). Refection holds both immediate and long-term benefits for you as a teacher. Even now, reflection can enchance your learning about teaching and increase your ability to analyse classroom life, enable you to monitor yourself, and stimulate your personal and professional growth. (Cruickshank, Jenkins & Metcalf 2006) Development of teaching competence is a compulsory subject in education courses outstanding. This course prepares students to be able to manage learning from

174

the planning, implementation and evaluation, especially in children with special needs. We don’t doubt that teachers are always trying to develop their own practice, but it is difficult to claim that these development processes based on focused practice have been studied systematically. A systematic approach means that the researcher’s insight menurut Postholm and Tiller in (Postholm & Moen 2011) is focused on activities in practice, and it is insight that represents the systematic part of the work. The teacher is a professional job that requires four competencies, namely : 1) The ability of professionals, 2) Ability pedagogical, 3) social skills and 4) personal ability. With the competence that teachers will do the best for students and for education. Teachers can formulate a research question like this without any input from researchers. However, whether this research question is created incooperation with researchers or by teachers working on their own, our experience indicates that it must be created ‘‘from below’’ and ‘‘from within’’ (Postholm & Moen 2011) Professional teachers are able to develop the ability to teach a pleasant and qualified, motivated, and ensure students can learn and every time learning. Traditional learning is an activity occurring at the classroom where teachers deliver learning material to students. Because of dependence on teachers, students should attend in every learning process and can’t access learning material anytime and anywhere. (Astra, Nasbey, & Nugraha 2015) All requires earnestness and sincerity are part and effective teaching. Another capability that is the reflection allows us to learn and experience. Reflection allows teachers to describe and think about what they are doing, know in advance the way out issues of class and professional experience, continuous and personal development. Research to advise that the Reflection associated with effective teaching, especially in the habit of teaching, classroom management and teacher expectations. In general, this course is a micro-teaching activities naturally implemented gradually.With the emergence of digital technologies, technology has become an indispensible part of educators and students live, changing the way teachers and students interact and learn in a technology-rich environment. (Baran, Chuang, Thompson, 2010) Students had fairly high expectations that they would benefit from digital media learning going into these courses, with 68% reporting strong or very strong agreement for expectation of a positive learning experience. At the end of the course, 58% reported that media used in the courses positively affected their learning experience.(Tabor,S W and Minch, R, P 2013).

The focus of the evaluation include : 1) content, 2) instructional design. Revised product / the main program. This revision will be conducted in accordance with the input or correction of the evaluation results. 2.2 R & D Developed Model Model studies Research and Development Borg and Gall in 1998. There are three stages: introduction, development and implementation. Regional development in the research of R & D (Research and Development) is one area that has several stages in the planning process of a product. The term R&D work (research and development work) indicates that there are at least two processes that occur at the same time; practice both explored and developed (Postholm & Moen 2011). According to Clarence Schauer defining an instructional development planning is common sense to identify learning problems and seek solution by using a plan for the implementation, evaluation, testing, feedback, and the result.(Suparman 2011) In the area of research and development are complex relationship between the use of technology and theory that encourages both the design of the message and its learning strategy. Seels & Richey, that regional development can be explained by the presence of: a) message that is driven by the contents ; b) learning strategy that is driven by the theory ; c) the physical manifestations of technology hardware, software, and learning materials. (Seels 2000) Regional development in technology education rooted in media production and can be organized into four categories: (Seels 2000) (1) The development of printing technology (2) audio- visual technology is a way of producing and delivering the material using mechanical equipment and electronic messages to present audio and visual. (3) Development of computer-based technology means producing and delivering materials by using a device that originates in the microprocessor. (4) Integrated Development of integrated technology is a way to produce and deliver materials by combining several types of computer-controlled media. Research and development is a systematic effort to make or create a program or system that is expected to achieve the learning objectives and the end result of a process of developing a product. 2.3 Development of Teaching Ability The ability to analyze the curriculum, determining the theme of learning, formulate conformity between the standards of competence and basic capabilities and indicators and learning target to select and organize the material, determine methods or learning strategies, learning resources / media / props learning, preparing the assessment, classroom management, to allocate time, designing lesson plans, designing instructional materials and conduct peer teaching. That is, it can’t replace the teacher because it can only teach things which is recorded on, and this makes the learning foreign language attractive. It is certain that the teacher’s as effective as the video film in teaching through video, because he is the only person who enables learners to comprehend what they watch and hear by using some of

II. METHODS In Research Research and Development using the method of observation, interviews and documentation 2.1 Evaluation and Revision Model Early trials (small classes), audio- visual learning model field project program-based SEL evaluated by a friend of one class and observer.

175

the communicative techniques. The teacher can be a controller, an assessor on organiser, a prompter and a participant as well. (ÇAKIR 2006) Microteaching is practicing and applying the appropriate teaching skills. In this unit there are four microteaching lesson that is expected to help implement and refine the capabilities and attributes of the professional educators. Microteaching implemented in phases : The first focuse on how well you convey the attributes that professionals about effective teachers, planning, use, and evaluate the lessons in question within a lesson is short and brief, provide clear instructions to the students to ideas or concepts in a way that can be easily understood by them. Reflective teaching in practice to make more prudent implementation Teaching is an experience that condition with happines, shock, frustration and pleasure. The use of reflective subjects each contain a reflective teaching objectives, the resources you need to find a target and a description of how to measure student learning and satisfaction. “A teacher is person change with the responbility of helping other to learn and to behave in diffrent ways” That’s why teachers are professional jobs that require special skills results of the educational process conducted by teacher colleges

emergence of exchange of opinions, demands, and values , (2) allowing occur mutual communication, (3) learning environment expected the atmosphere that's fun and challenging, (4) prioritize the role of learners, (5) adults will learn if his opinion is respected, (6) of adult learning is unique, (7) the need for mutual trust between the mentor and the learner, (8) adults generally have different opinions, (9) adults have intelligence that is diverse, (10) the possibility of a variety of learning styles, (11) adults learn to know the pros and cons, (12) the orientation of adult learning centered on life real, and (13) the motivation comes from himself. Direct Instruction is knowledge about how someone did something. The method used in this model is the more dominant FAQ methods, methods Lectures, and others. This model should be packed involve multidirectional interaction. Problem Based Instruction is a method taught by the fact that the developing or under the existing problems would follow the discussion and problem solving. III.RESULT Theoretical studies on model CPT Audio-Visual PKM Learning Approach, basically a type of learning management and development conducted on the above learning. opinian component is essentially how to manage and develop a learning component in a design that is planned by watching the actual condition of the supporting elements in the implementation of learning to be done

Table 1. Instrument Evaluation Practices Peer Teaching Learning Criteria Based on a. Asking the student presence (absence). Phase Pre Instructional b. Asking earlier material (appersepsi). c. Giving students the opportunity to ask about the subject matter that has not been mastered. d. Repeat the material that was previously. a. Explaining the purpose of teaching to 2 Phase Instructional be achieved by students. b. Explain the subject matter to be discussed. c. Discussing the subject that has been written. d. Give concrete examples, questions, tasks on each subject material covered. e. Using tools (media) instruction to clarify the discussion on any subject matter. f. Summing up the results of the discussion of all the subject matter. a. Asking questions about all aspects of 3. Evaluation and the subject matter covered. follow-up Phase b. Repeating a lesson that can not be answered. c. Giving assignment (PR) to enrich the knowledge. d. Notice that the subject will be discussed in the next lesson. Source : Instruments Research Subjects CPT by Nana Sudjana in Suryosubroto (2002 : 36-37)

No 1

Table 2. Standard Design of Model Competence Practice Teaching (CPT) used Audio Visual No Study Materials Needed 1. Development of observation instruments to Literatur school with special needs 2. Development of observation instruments to Literatur& school with special needs Observation 3. Development of raw instrument Literatur & Observation 4 Observations to special needs schools Observation 5 Implementation of appropriate observation Observation and interview studies, assess appropriate case studies, discussions preparatory teaching practice with the team of researchers. 6 Learning model development CPT Literatur review (conceptually) 7. Evaluation Lecture of CPT Instrument Evaluation

Teaching Children with Special Needs Specific learning disability doesn’t include learning problems that are primarily the result of visual, hearing, or motor disabilities, of mental retardation, of emotional disturbance, or of environmental, cultural, or economic disadvantage. (Grünke & Cavendish 2016) Teaching children with special needs are closely related to the assessment or monitoring before determining the appropriate learning for the child. Every child with special needs have different characteristics even though they have similar shortcomings. Learning disabilities result from impairments in one or more processes related to perceiving, thinking, remembering or learning. These include, but are not limited to:

Stage Learning Process in higher education includes learning that occurs in a person who is learning progresses through six stages, namely : (1) motivation, (2) attention to the lesson, (3) accept and remember, (4) reproduction, (5) generalization, and (6) carry out the task of learning and feedback. Suprijanto (2005:40) Learning for students already lead to adults learner. Characteristics of learning that distinguishes between student learning and the student can be considered from the characteristics of adult learners among others : (1) allow the

176

language processing; phonological processing; visual spatial processing; processing speed; memory and attention; and executive functions (e.g. planning and decisionmaking). (Calder 2016) For success, individuals with learning disabilities require early identification and timely specialized assessments and interventions involving home, school, community and workplace settings. The interventions need to be appropriate for each individual’s learning disability subtype and, at a minimum, include the provision of: specific skill instruction, accommodations, compensatory strategies; and, self-advocacy skills. Official definition of learning disabilities. (Adopted by the Learning Disabilities Association of Canada January 30, 2002, and Re-Endorsed on March 2, 2015. (Calder 2016)

No

2.

3.

4.

IV. DISCUSSION 4.1 Prosedure Use of Audio Visual Media Any software, or collection of software components, that authors can use to create or modify multimedia content for use by other people, is a multimedia authoring tools Sethi, 2005 (Babiker 2015). Audio-visual media that contain messages in auditory form that can stimulate the mind, feelings, concerns, and the ability of students to study teaching materials. The declared video outcome categories are divided into two styles; the outcomes that can be described in terms of specific learning objectives and the outcomes achievable with video usage that address (Winslett 2014) Audio-visual media is the media used to help with not only listened but can be seen visually. Students interested and motivated to learn the material more. The audio visual media is the media contain messages in auditory form that can only be heard and be able to create for the listener 's imagination. Media that projected can be still images (still pictures) and moving images (motion picture) can provide a snapshot of every activity that were photographed. The images were meant to be eye-catching; the sight of students socially engaged serves both an emotive and pragmatic function. The images were coloured, centrally framed and designed to enhance inspiration and dedication to the website. Films and pods were also available through links on the website, representing academic work in other modes (moving images and speech) (Åberg, Ståhle, Engdahl, Knutes-Nyqvist 2016). 4.2 Learning Audio visual as a Self Reflection In the process of learning to improve themselves in the practice of CPT then later aired video footage to be evaluated friend of one class of each learner, then they watched their videos back Competence Practice Teaching (CPT) after that they did Self Reflection to correct deficiencies in peer teaching.

5.

6.

7.

analysis Introduction

Needed

CPT participants Field Observations

Audio Visual Media

Audio Visual Media

Audio Visual Media

Audio Visual Media Competence Competence Competence Audio Visual

4.3 The Process of Develop Model of Competence Practice Teaching CPT module created for the implementation of this learning activity during conventional means in learning activities is still common, the lack of media support learning. It required a learning innovation with the help of audiovisual media and the need for self-reflection to assess the participants' ability Competence Practice Teaching. Discussion Competence Practice Teaching at the beginning of learning activity of CPT needed introduction / CPT discussion of learning materials, and manufacture of instrument observations, interviews, assessment, and assessment / evaluation PKM practice: Peer teaching practice with the camera recorded, using hidden action cam Evaluation at class: Video recordings peer teaching practices rotated and displayed for evaluation and improvement, then the results of the final evaluation obtain satisfactory value The Observer : Observer have a team composed of 2 experts in accordance with the study of duty to observe and assess

Table 3 Design Development Model CPT Audio Visual Large Classes No Stage Instrumen Needed 1. analysis Introduction PKM module created for the implementation of this learning activity during conventional means in learning activities is still common, the lack of media support learning. It required a

Stage Instrumen learning innovation with the help of audio-visual media and the need for self-reflection to assess the participants' ability CPT Discussion Competence Practice Teaching (CPT) Instrument At the beginning of learning of Teaching activity of CPT needed Learning introduction / CPT discussion of learning materials, and manufacture of instrument observations, interviews, assessment, and assessment / evaluation Competence Practice Teaching practice Peer teaching practice with the Instrument camera recorded Evaluation Lecturer Evaluation at Class Video Video recordings peer teaching capture practices rotated and displayed procedures for evaluation and improvement, then the results of the final evaluation obtain satisfactory value The Observer Instrument Observer team composed of 2 Evaluation experts in accordance with the study of duty to observe and assess Self Reflection Reflection Video footage taken of each learner, then they watched the video again at home Modul 1. Chapter 1. Teacher Design Professionalism Disabilities Modul School 2. Chapter 2. Ability to Teach Teachers Disabilities School 3. Chapter 3. Teaching Skills Teachers Disabilities School 4. Chapter 4. Development of audio visual needed Competence Practice Teaching

Empirical Database, Library Database

177

Self Reflection: Video footage taken of each learner, then they watched the video again at home

V. CONCLUSION Based on the research that the development of teaching competence coaching model using media Audio Visual conceptually formulated and available used. Preliminary results showed that the competence to teach students using the conventional PKM module is still low, especially in the ability to assess (assessment). Furthermore, the study continued to make a coaching module teaching competencies based on Audio Visual. The results of this study suggested: (1) Learning PKM using audio-visual media to allow students to identify the weaknesses and strengths, (2) In the practice of teaching and can improve. Develop learning modules Teaching Competency Development (CPT). REFERENCES [1]

Fig 1. Development model of Competence Practice Teaching

[2]

4.4 Contents of the module First phase: Analysis Introduction : PKM module created for the implementation of this learning activity during conventional means in learning activities is still common, the lack of media support learning. It required a learning innovation with the help of audio-visual media and the need for self-reflection to assess the participants' ability PKM Second Phase: Discussion PKM: At the beginning of learning activity of PKM needed introduction / PKM discussion of learning materials, and manufacture of instrument observations, interviews, assessment, and assessment / evaluation Trird phase: PKM practice : Peer teaching practice with the camera recorded

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8] [9] Fig 2. CPT Practice with hidden camera recorded

Fourth Phase: Evaluation at class : Video recordings peer teaching practices rotated and displayed for evaluation and improvement, then the results of the final evaluation obtain satisfactory value Five Phase: The Observer : Observer team composed of 2 experts in accordance with the study of duty to observe and assess Six Phase : Self Reflection. Video footage taken of each learner, then they watched the video again at home. Seven Phase : Modul with 4 chapter inside. Chapter 1. Teacher Professionalism SLB, Chapter 2. Ability to Teach Teachers SLB, Chapter 3. Teaching Skills Teachers SLB, Chapter 4. Development of audio visual needed PKM.

[10] [11]

[12]

178

Postholm, M., & Moen, T. (2011). Communities of development: A new model for R&D work. Journal Of Educational Change, 12(4), 385-401. doi:10.1007/s10833-010-9150-x ÇAKIR,I (2006) The Use Of Video As An Audio-Visual Material In Foreign Language Teaching Classroom. Journal Of Distance Education (TOJDE) October 5 (4) Article 9 (67-72) Babiker,M. A. B., (2015) For Effective Use of Multimedia in Education, Teachers Must Develop their Own Educational Multimedia Applications, Journal Of Distance Education (TOJDE), October 14(4),62-68 Åberg, E.S., Ståhle, Y., Engdahl,I., Knutes-Nyqvist, H. (2016) Designing a Website to Support Students' Academic Writing Process, Journal Of Distance Education (TOJDE) January, 15(1), 33-42 Tabor, S. W., & Minch, R. P. (2013). Student Adoption & Development of Digital Learning Media: Action Research and Recommended Practices. Journal Of Information Technology Education, 12203-223. Winslett, G. (2014). What counts as educational video?: Working toward best practice alignment between video production approaches and outcomes. Australasian Journal Of Educational Technology, 30(5), 487-502. Astra, I. M., Nasbey, H., & Nugraha, A. (2015). Development of an Android Application in the Form of a Simulation Lab as Learning Media for Senior High School Students. Eurasia Journal Of Mathematics, Science & Technology Education, 11(5), 1081-1088. doi:10.12973/eurasia.2015.1376a Calder Stegemann, K. (2016). Learning Disabilities in Canada. Learning Disabilities -- A Contemporary Journal, 14(1), 53-62. Grünke, M., & Morrison Cavendish, W. (2016). Learning Disabilities Around the Globe: Making Sense of the Heterogeneity of the Different Viewpoints. Learning Disabilities -- A Contemporary Journal, 14(1), 1-8. Seels, Barbara B. dan Rita C Richey, Teknologi Pembelajaran, Definisi dan Kawasannya, Terjemahan Dewi S.Prawiradilaga, Raphae, Jakarta: UNJ, 2000 Suprijanto, Pendidikan Orang Dewasa “Dari Teori Hingga Aplikasi”, Jakarta: Penerbit Bumi Aksara, 2005. Iqbal, M. Hasan. Pokok-Pokok Materi Metodologi Penelitian dan Aplikasinya. Penerbit Ghalia Indonesia : Jakarta, 2002

THE IMPLEMENTATION OF MODEL OF TEACHING SCIENTIFIC ATTITUDE IN SUBJECT MATTER OF SCIENCE AT JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL IN INDONESIA Prof. Dr. Wahidin, M.Pd1) 1)

IAIN Syekh Nurjati Cirebon, West Java, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. The scientific attitude is important for students developed in schools to support of spiritual and social attitudes that are listed in the curriculum 2013. Scientific attitude of students will not appear suddenly, if it is not constructive directly by the teacher. The learning models of scientific Attitude, is done with six steps namely; 1) formatting the Group (group), 2) designing the program activities, 3) producing products, 4) getting an understanding, 5) internalizing the scientific attitude, and 6) conducting an assessment of attitude. Qualitative indicator appears as a lot of the results of the study which is characteristic of the attitude of the scientific domain with objective, systematic, logical and empiric. This learning can build models of thinking patterns (mindset) of students and scientific attitude of the students. However, the average test results scale attitude shows instead that these models did not differ significantly between the experimental and control classes. There needs to be a follow-up study to refine the model of teaching scientific attitude. Keywords: model of learning, scientific attitude, spiritual attitude, social attitudes, and mindset

I.

attitude, such a scientific attitude, social attitudes, including the spiritual attitude. Example; how the concept of science can increase the confidence of students against the laws of nature?, how teachers improve students' beliefs explanation of the creation of this universe? how to practice honesty and objective train science students? Because attitude is based on the understanding that is the basis of the formation of consciousness and behavior of students (Joice, 2009). The problem in this research is how the teachers' skills in designing, implementing and evaluating scientific attitude in students learning in school. The target is to optimize the learning achievement of learning outcomes for all learning domains, namely cognitive, affective, psychomotor and creativity. Teachers in the learning process is expected to use the community and the environment as a learning resource effective and touching human dimension. Signs that should be a concern of teachers is the local knowledge (cultural values, religion, and beliefs) and local potentials that exist in society. Finally teachers are able to analyze the factors that influence the success of learning scientific attitude in science learning in junior high school students one grade 7 Cirebon? The purpose of this study to reveal the teachers' skills in designing, implementing and evaluating student learning scientific attitude in school. To validate the model of learning scientific attitude in optimizing achievement of learning objectives domain of cognitive, affective, psychomotor and creativity. Revealing the skills of teachers to use the community and the environment as a learning resource that is effective and touching human dimension. Revealing the teachers' skills in using local knowledge (cultural values, religion, and beliefs) and the local potential that exists in the community.

INTRODUCTION

Education is the only way of improving intellectual, attitude, awareness and good behavior. During this time the school is less attention to posture as a result of learning, size and assessments including structured learning process as well as the attitude is not the domain of knowledge and skills. Attitude is important, but the attitude of the learning process in the school teachers have received less attention. Therefore, it is natural that various social problems arise in the community. Social problems that arise in the community, largely due to the low intellectual level, attitude and awareness. The results showed that the intellectual level is closely related to attitude, behavior, and student awareness (Hasan Langgulung 1990; Fishbein & Ajzen 1975; Brehm & Kassim 1990; Sax 1980; Ashaari, 2001; Bruce & Weil 1985; Mar’at 1982; Robert et al. 1995; Hendri in Robert et al. 1995, and Wahidin, 2004). The phenomenon is considered to be difficult for teachers in curriculum implementation in 2013 was the achievement of Core Competence attitude (spiritual attitude / core competences (KI.1 and social attitudes / KI.2). Learning this attitude "new thought", because the SBC in 2006 does not explicitly as in 2013. Curriculum Aspects of attitude is believed to be an important part that contributes greatly to the dignity of students in his life. But, how to effectively reach the target? The teachers find it difficult to carry out planning, even the process of evaluation of learning attitude. During this time, teachers implementing the learning attitude as "not programmed" even if teachers know the standards of graduation (SKL) attitudes in the curriculum. Teachers are not accustomed to "presenting" concepts in integrated subjects for students to accomplish a certain

179

II. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY The second design is a qualitative study designed to analyze the qualitative data scientific attitude, local knowledge and local potential. The results of the analysis and description of the quantitative research, qualitative research as a basis perform like; thinking patterns, the factors of taste, a process of internalization attitude, local knowledge, local potential and scientific attitude indicator assessment as learning targets. Setting the research done by considering the condition of the informants in the school environment. Research model of learning scientific attitude in learning science at school related to patterns of interaction, the concept of science, attitude indicator, patterns of thinking, the taste factor, motivation and environmental factors as a learning resource for science teachers and students Creswell (2002) and Bungin (2007). The linkage was integrated into the mindset of an objective, empirical, logical and systematic in accordance with the characteristics of science. Data collection is used in the table below; Table 1 Theory, Data, Informant and Subject

This research was conducted to science teachers and students of Junior High School (SMP) 1 in Cirebon City. Reasons sampling in the city of Cirebon, because Cirebon values cultural unique, historical valuable potential national with various Islamic cultural sites nationally recognized so Cirebon become spiritual tourism destinations nationwide. This research approach is a mix method, the data obtained is the data is quantitative assessment attitudes of students as a result of learning, and the data is qualitative namely teachers' perceptions, and behaviors that reflect scientific attitude of students as a result of learning using learning model attitude based on local wisdom and potential local Creswell (2014). Qualitative data analysis reinforces the description of the results of quantitative data analysis to study more meaningful. Population and sample in this research is a science teacher and students in grade 7 who have implemented the curriculum of 2013. The research sample is determined by purposive sampling SMP 1 Cirebon. Teachers SMP 1 Cirebon already technical guidance curriculum of 2013. The sample class that will be used as a control group and the experimental class is class 7, which randomly assigned simple.

No. 1

This research was conducted through several stages; (1) Designing learning with teacher preparation through study lesson plan (RPP); (2) Improving the RPP; (3) The testing model for model validation teaching scientific attitude, and (4) Conducting model of teaching scientific attitude. The scientific attitude learning model used in this study adopted the results of the study Wahidin (2015) as follows;

2

Fig.1 Model of Teaching Science Attitude

Treatment

Experiment

Model of Teaching Science Attitude Conventional

Control

Post Test X1 X2

Sample Purposive Random sampling Purposive Random sampling

Data Attitu de scale test results

Informant junior high school students

Subject Indicator scientific attitude, Curriculum (2013) 54 and 2013, No. 65 and 66 ( 2013)

Intervi ew result

Science teacher and junior high school students

Indicator : Learning science, patterns of thinking, a sense, the process of internalizati on, local knowledge, awareness, attitudes, habits, ratings scientific attitude

Table above explains that the quantitative data collected through an attitude scale tests. While the qualitative data through observation (video teaching) and the results of in-depth interviews with teachers and qualified students. Techniques to improve the quality and limitations of this study used a model Guba (in Krefting, 1990) using four levels of trust: credibility, transferability, dependability, and confirmability. For quantitative data analysis, this research involves the scientific attitude indicator that is logical, empirical, systematic and objective which is the result of learning. Overall the data will be analyzed by using a different test to measure the research hypothesis, the pattern Posttest Only Control Group Design. In the early stages of pre-testing that is testing the data distribution normality and homogeneity of

The first design is related to quantitative research (Creswell, 1994, James Millan, 2001) as follows; Group

Theory Attitude Kaiser 2000; Marzano, 1985; Stanehouse, 1975; Mar’at 1982, Fishbein, M. & Azjen, I. 1975, Bruner, 1960) Scientific attitude of local knowledge, local potential and attitude (Aenon Mohd. & Abdullah. 2000, De Bono, 2000, Kirby, R. & G. Jeffery, R.G. 1999)

and and

Note: X1 = Test attitude scale (experimental group) X2 = Test attitude scale (control group)

180

variance on each cell research. Then the data were analyzed in order to validate the accuracy of information from informants in the form of raw data (transcriptions, images, field data, and so on), process and prepare data for analysis, read the entire data, coding data in the form of themes and descriptions, then connect some predefined theme / descriptions were to do the interpretation and concluded

– Need the synergy of learning attitude at all levels of education from elementary school up to university is the demands of the curriculum, and – Exemplary attitude in the learning process is important, the attitude is not enough by example as already a perception at this time, but the attitude still taught like domain of cognitive, behavioral students who demonstrate an attitude indicator is controlled in the process of learning and assessment.

Cultural diversity adds to the wealth of potential students to co-exist and inter-cultural resonance in the process of transforming scientific attitude. Students and teachers are more likely to conduct collaborative scientific attitudes through social interaction and ways of thinking that transformed the teacher to the students. SMP 1 Cirebon, as State schools with capital from the government capital in the form of DIPA and capital potential that exists in it, supported by community conditions Cirebon city with various ethnic groups (Chinese, Javanese, Sundanese) and religion (Muslim, Christian, and Hindu Buda). In addition, the views of parents' backgrounds, quite varied as children's State officials, politicians, businessmen, teachers, professors, traders, chaplain and even ordinary people and laborers.

Teachers teach reasoned difficult due to the attitude of "no attitude in the test". This expression is a mindset, a culture of formality is already a part in the life of our society. This is what needs to get the attention of stakeholders on the attitude of students in school education. Although there is no specific exams attitude, the attitude is not the exam requirements, but the attitude is important. The teachers know that there is in the book, the assessment report cards, in the document "good behavior" and attitudes needed in a variety of things included in the determination of one's position. If the attitude of the students obtained naturally, is not conditioned in a planned in the learning process, the student learning outcomes will continue to limp forever.

A. Teacher perception toward implementation of curriculum and learning model of teaching science attitude

Teachers' perceptions of the competence of the attitudes of students in the school curriculum is quite diverse, among others; 1) lack of attention, 2) are subjective, and 3) the attitude is not in the exam, 4) sometimes assessment methods student attitudes enough to see a good student, a good gauge, 5) attention to the student that "rogue" done with counseling and 6) the difficulty assessing the attitude because the number of students is too much. There are some things that need to get an understanding and perceptions of teachers, namely; – Attitude domain as important as the cognitive, psychomotor and creativity means need to be taught, – Attitudes taught by teachers in the integration of the subjects not just nurturant effect so that teachers can intervene to students, – The assessment must be made to each student (together with other domains), – Every indicator of attitudes in the curriculum should be measured success, – Build the same perception among students and teachers when learning took place, – Building awareness to students in the achievement of learning outcomes – Perception of students "fuss" when learning is an indicator of the failure of teachers to manage the classroom needs to be revamped,

181

B. The achievement of the scientific attitude of students as a result of learning Results observation appears on the scientific attitude as a student learning outcomes at each stage of the process / learning activities are as follows; • Activity groups – Open behavior – Behavior to accept the realities of life – Behavior to accept the facts – Behavior to cooperate – Behavior to accept differences – Behavior to communications with others – Behavior to honest – Behavior to will do for the common good • Activities designed the program – Responsibility for work – The success of the group – Compliance with the guide work / student worksheet – and books (reference) – Bring up the idea of completing a task together • Conducting activities program – Attitude cooperation – Respect for others and curiosity about the material to be delivered – Dare to reveal the attitude of ideas and answer questions – Acceptance of the current shortage of criticism and suggestions when presenting the results of discussions – With respect and provide an opportunity for friends to uncover ideas and communicate when a presentation is done

– Attitude meticulous in writing data – An objective attitude in cooperating • Products – Attitudes to cooperate – Attitude honest in collecting data – Respect the work – The attitude of openness – The attitude of responsibility – Respect the opinions of others – The attitude of togetherness in action do the job – Attitudes to achieve the target to be obtained – bold attitude and convey ideas • Understanding – An open attitude – Attitude to accept – Willing to share experiences attitude / demeanor would give – Attitude to would ask – Attitude to choose and make decisions – Curiously – Courage uncover ideas and concepts (group presentations) • Internalization of scientific attitude Teachers pay attention to the behavior and attitudes of the students one by one outside the classroom indirectly (be especially difficult with so many reasons students), including the process of teaching attitude; – Schools implement literacy program (every Saturday) and the Qur’an (Monday up to Friday) morning for all students,  student presentations in front of the other students on the book that has been read  Some teachers tutor each student group – The behavior of the students in the cafeteria, during a visit to the teachers' lounge, in the mosque, in parks, and in other places that can be monitored The above findings appear in the students, although not uniformly carried out by each individual student, but the indicator that appears in the learning activities.

Based on the chart above 4.1 can be described that in general students acquire scientific attitudes as a result of learning. The attitude of the students there is a difference between the attitude domain objective, empirical, logical and systematic. But, for almost the same control class. Experimental class, it turns out an average of test results obtained attitude highest objective domains than others. While the scientific attitude and systematic logical domain is relatively low. These figures can be explained, that the junior high school students grade 7 is still dominated way of thinking objectively and empirically while the use of conceptual thinking is logical and systematic is still low. At almost the same control class, due to the general students of SMP 1 Cirebon, many extra and intra curricular who already support the improvement of students' scientific attitude. In addition, students of SMP 1 Cirebon mostly students of upper middle class (from the academic aspect) is the students' choice ". It also includes parental background, only a small portion coming from the village, and classified as disadvantaged families. Student life at home and in the environment already familiar with the life of a heterogeneous, open, working together, in groups in various activities, collide into an argument, and logical thinking, for example in making synopsis of book literacy program every Saturday. Additionally out bond activities, students are invited to get along and live in a society performance a village camp outside the city a few days. Including participating in inter-school competitions city level so that they become accustomed to compete. Therefore, SMP 1 Cirebon becomes school references several other schools because of the experience, achievement, and school age were classed as "old school", even school community votes "favorite". Many alumni who already holds merit and holds the State policy to give special attention to the development of schools stretcher

C. Description achievements of scientific attitude of students Comparison of scientific attitude domain obtained as a result of the attitude scale tests, the experimental class and control class can be described as follows;

Based on the results of the test, the average score scale attitude control class higher than the experimental class. This shows that the use of models of learning attitude had no effect on students' improvement of scientific attitude. However, qualitatively indicate a change in attitude during the learning process of the behavioral aspects of curiosity, mutual respect among fellow students, uncooperative, and many more as described above. So, in general scientific attitude control class is different from the scientific attitude experimental class students (quantitatively). In Qualitative experimental class

Graph 4.1 Comparison Test Result of Scientific Attitude Domain

182

showed distinct liveliness, and indkator attitude looks of behavior appears more experimental class than the class kongtrol. Indeed this is one drawback, quantitative measurement of attitude. There are several indicators that are difficult to measure the attitude scale tests. For example, respect for the opinions of others, being honest in collecting the data, the attitude of responsibility in tasks and so is difficult to measure the attitude scale tests. While going through the observation is very clearly seen when they were discussions in the learning process in the classroom. Therefore, there are differences in the average score of the test results occurred between experimental class control class. Activities the students taught conventionally, as ever more dominant teachers in classroom activities, students learn more listening, writing, accept duties of teachers. While the activities of the students taught using model scientific attitude is to work together in groups to design course materials, discussion completed the work program, the presentation together and finally agreed on the cooperation. All processes in the experimental class, it was students dominant compared to the control class, so qualitatively the experimental class did a lot of things that are scaling up of the scientific attitude. At that point, there is a possibility that the statements in the attitude scale test was answered by students to answer more normative than in accordance with reality and self-confidence. Indeed, there is no problem, because that way of thinking and it shows the students' attitude indicator. However, it is recognized that learning model of scientific attitude is necessary to evaluate and revalidate in some way and will be retested again.

learning scientific attitude (syntac or process steps of learning), the improvement of the quantitative aspects of the assessment instrument, including components into students' scientific attitude indicator. In this context, the attitude indicator is difficult to measure quantitatively such as respect for the opinions of others, responsibility, and curiosity is not necessary to test the student attitude scale because the statement did not conform to the activity when the process is done in the learning process. This means that the things that are qualitative need to be observed and conducted interviews to students. Several reasons can be concluded that; 1) teachers feel reluctant to pass up the learning model because out of habit, 2) learning model used attitude an effort to empower students; 3) students are not accustomed to work independently and think objectively, critically, with integrated social interactions with subjects; 4) the number of groups of students learn too many 44 people per class, while laboratory equipment, books, worksheets, and other devices are still limited; 4) to develop the students' awareness of self in learning is still low; 5) The teacher has not been used to submit a discussion of teaching materials designed by students, worry even the concept is not achieved; 6) cooperation has not become habitual ways of learning in school, so the teacher concerned materials teaching materials are not achieved; 7) system still dominates in the individual assessment of education in schools; 8) value is still the main goal of learning, not a cultural awareness and knowledge are built; 9) National Examination (UN) is still the target of achieving curriculum while thinking skills are nurturant effect; 10) learning attitude is still the second target, the main concern is the students master the concepts in accordance with the target school exams.

D. Hypothesis Test This study uses the null hypothesis that "there are no significant differences in the average score of the test results scale scientific attitude of students between classes taught by learning model with a scientific attitude that is not". 5.11 The data table below shows the results of hypothesis testing analysis of the average score of attitude scale test results show the difference between the scientific attitude of students taught using learning model with no scientific attitude is as follows;

E. Skills teachers use local knowledge and local Potential There are three parts that may be done is related to potential local, local cultures and school policies. The third part is an important point that needs to be done with a creative teacher. Why, because not all schools have the complete learning tool. Therefore, these findings can serve as a best practice for other schools, about learning science in school. References of student attitudes acquired through learning in the form of local wisdom. This method may be more touching humanity student. In this study conducted on a science teacher in grade 7 so that both local potential is concerned with teaching of science, while the local culture and policy at school is the same for all subjects. Here is an example of the creativity of teachers and students in implementing school policies in SMP 1 Cirebon;  Local Potential – Preparing materials practicum students  Water, bucket and glasses  Materials that are around the school – Enable students themselves  Students bring the tools and materials from home  Matches, Books and LKS – Equipment using thrift  aqua bottle – Existing equipment around the school  A tool in the lab like the thermometer

Table 4.1 shows that the test results null hypothesis (Ho) in the study accepted that there is no difference in the average score of the test results scale scientific attitude of students who are taught by a model of teaching scientific attitude with classes that do not. This means that the use of model of learning scientific attitude has no influence toward achievement scientific attitude of students. This finding is very beneficial for the development of future learning model. This means that this model still needs to be refined and adjusted to the frame material and the appropriate syntax. Aspects of improvement starts from the skeleton model of

183

 Infocus, beaker, classrooms and environment • Local Culture – “competition of arts” between classes each year – Performing arts folk songs – Performing clothing area – Inter-class sports game – There is a space for dialogue with the guidance counselor and the vice principal of student – Subjects Languages Cirebon – Following the cultural competitions Cirebon – The school building colonial era (the city government's policies should not be restored) is part of the cultural heritage – Culture working on school assignments – All religions in school (as a student) • School policy – Reading of Qur’an before entering hour lesson every day (Monday - Friday) – Activities literacy students each day (Saturday) – The calling parents if there is a problem students – Camper (out bound) annually for new students (out bond) – Use a different school uniform every day – Snack in the school cafeteria without servants, honesty canteen – Enrolled at the right time – Ratings attitude of students by every teacher and report to the coordinator teachers – competition of arts between classes each year – Send the art team competitions in provincial and district levels with corporate sponsors, such as banking and hospitality. Based on the school's ability to use the environment in the form of local wisdom that is interesting to be used as reference material for other schools. Especially the potential of cultural and school policies that support the development of a scientific attitude of students. Attitude domain scientific objectivity, highly supported by aspects of local potential, local cultures and school policies as a learning resource. Junior high school students are still dominant thinking concrete that objective domains still dominate. For example, the school's policy of literacy activities students every Saturday strongly supports the improvement of students' knowledge and understanding.

so do not have time to do a good learning process to students individually. The development of a scientific attitude is very necessary, not only the attitude of spiritual and social attitudes that have been evident in the curriculum in 2013 is also difficult to implement. The response he thought teachers scientific attitude is in addition to the second position in the 2013 curriculum, whereas scientific attitude is part of the attitude in the curriculum. No need to feel burdened again by a scientific attitude. The response of teachers to term scientific attitude just seemed at the originally was feeling heavy, so he said that "demands maximum learning results is a lot, so now it's tired teacher" including the attitude of this. Religion and discipline has become an integral part of the school program. In the town of Cirebon religious education has been entered into in the regulation of local government. So the school is not too heavy, even junior high school as one Cirebon is already included in the school development program through lectures every day for all students. So if students do not follow him including undisciplined. Some teachers said that aspects of skills and attitudes deemed it "not so important". This right is shown with their lessons to students. Assessment and learning processes challenge the skills and attitudes are not integrated manner according to the demands of the curriculum. In other words, the implementation of the curriculum related to the domain attitudes remain under-emphasized compared to the cognitive domain.

–

III. DISCUSSION The results showed no difference in the average score of the test results attitudinal scales between the experimental class and control class. In qualitative learning process show many behavioral attitudes in the experimental class. However, quantitative analysis results showed the train turns control class average score of attitude scale test results higher than the experimental class. So the null hypothesis is accepted, then the use of the model of learning scientific attitude had no effect on students' attitudes significantly. However, the reality of students from the observation and recording of students conveniently indicates many things related to the students' attitudes. This is in line with the views of Allen (1980) that the formation of attitudes in a person, it can happen very diverse and with different dimensions, both perceptions, beliefs, responses and habits. As the findings in this study, that the scientific attitude of students emerged as a result of learning gained by observation. Each syntac performed on the learning process of students exhibiting behavior that characterizes the scientific attitude. This is consistent with the view Fisbein and Ajzen (1975) that the behavior is directly proportional to the attitude and some other variables that support it. Syntac student behavior at first form a group that is "open, except reality of life, accept the facts, cooperation, accept differences, communication, honest and willing to do something for the common good 'is good manners are important. The success in increasing the skills and behavior of students towards subjects and cognitive aspects of students depending on the attitude of students.

F. Skills teachers develop the capacity of students in learning science Educational intervention in the form of policy development attitude and creativity of teachers. Improvement of educational services was done in collaboration with parents, all teachers in schools and local governments. These programs are made because the target schools that support government policy. Program improvements were made to curriculum development, teacher resources and technical policy of the school. Teachers feel heavy with this condition because of the number of teaching hours should be 24 hours, daily attendance, the number of students up to 44 people per class,

184

Syntac second is designing program activities of the student and the teacher shows the behavior of "responsibility in work, motivation success of the group, adjusting to guide the work, and gave rise to the idea of completing a common task" is a form of acceptance of the received message the students. The attitude of the students affected by this form of communication teachers and students during the learning process is done. Syntac next activity program, students in this stage of the cooperation of teachers and students in groups. The above findings relevant also with a view Schiffman and Kanuk (2008) that attitude is a tendency to learn to behave in a way that is favorable or unfavorable to a particular object. Attitudes appear, in syntac supporting the scientific attitude indicator is difficult to measure in a quantitative method. The views RK Merton (1957) emphasizes to importance for formulate a development pattern education institutions oriented to the development of scientific attitude that is commonly used by scientists. Such as objectivity, open-mindedness, not bias, curiosity, suspend judgment, critical thinking, and rationality is commonly used by scientists. In syntac produce products found there are several indicators that show that the scientific attitude; uncooperative attitude, honesty in collecting data, respect for the work, an attitude of openness, an attitude of responsibility, respect for the opinions of others, togetherness in action doing the work, attitude to achieve the target to be obtained, bold attitude and convey ideas. The view that the scientific attitude that is required for the development of scientific behavior of a person, have an impact on productive behavior. Scientific thinking of students of scientific attitude, then the result is success in learning. Cognitive, affective and psychomotor needed in the framework of developing a scientific attitude. For example, scientific attitude is diligent (not bored conduct an investigation, is willing to repeat the experiment results are dubious, will not stop doing activities if not yet finished, the things he wanted to know he was trying to work carefully). Then open attitude (open attitude is seen in the habit of going to listen to opinions, arguments, criticism and statements of others, although ultimately opinions, arguments, criticism, and testimony of others is not acceptable because it did not agree or are not appropriate. This kind of attitude is capital for the development of a permanent understanding and skills in students. Observation of the scientific attitude of students is concerned with understanding can be described its findings in syntac get an understanding that; being open, receptive attitude, attitude, willing to share experience / attitude willing to give, willing to ask attitude, attitude to choose and make decisions, curiosity, and courage to uncover ideas and ideas (group presentations). This is consistent with the view Schiffman and Kanuk (2008) that attitude is a tendency to learn to behave in a way that is favorable or unfavorable to a particular object. As a conclusion that the attitude to learning outcomes influence each other, as revealed that attitudes have a strong influence on behavior and student learning. That attitude helps students feel what happened and provide guidance to the behavior itself so that it can help explain what happened. Therefore, the learning process oriented

attitude formation there should be a phase that is doing intenalisasi attitude. When a teacher observations of the scientific attitude of the student, the student attitudes internalization process. The phenomenon showed that; – Teachers find it difficult to pay attention to individual students, including in the process of teaching attitude – Schools make literacy and the Qur’an every morning for all students – Students presentation in front of the other students on the book that has been read – There is a teacher tutor each student group that coaching students in extracurricular activities – Observing the behavior of students in the classroom and outside the school environment This phenomenon shows that the need for improvements to programs relating to learning outcomes, especially the attitude that is the field of curriculum development, student capacity, the competence of teachers and school culture. IV. CONCLUSIONS Teachers understand the need for local culture (values, religious norms, customs and local knowledge) is good to be protected, conserved and transformed to the students in learning at school. Teachers recognize and understand that students need to have an attitude ilmah, minimal gesture contained in the curriculum in 2013 (spiritual attitudes and social attitudes). But the teacher felt the difficulty of implementing the learning attitude in school because of many factors that influence it. Family and community environment is more dominant than the school, in addition to the difficulty is the number of students is too much and the obligation to teach 24 hours per week was it was quite tired. Potential students are high enough to receive learning including scientific attitude, motivation, academic potential, parental background, local government policy support, financial support, and society in general is very high. The present challenge is the environmental community and social media, making it difficult for the student's educational process. Through learner teacher, MGMPs, and in-house training, the teacher is the ability to prepare teaching materials and make the learning process. The findings of this study, there was no significant different average score attitude scale test results between students who are taught by learning model with the attitude that no junior high school students one grade 7 Cirebon. But qualitatively scientific attitude indicator shows the number of students going on. Needs improvement model (syntac) that simplify the learning process Implementation internalization scientific attitude in the SMP environment is very varied, and is fundamental to the development of students' attitudes. The shape is a regular activity of the Koran every day, every Saturday literacy, arts and sports games each semester, and the use of school uniforms with 4 different models every week so as to build together a school culture. Factors affecting the learning success of scientific attitude is first learning model that is used in accordance with the needs of students, according to the material the material taught, involving students as subjects, neighborhood support as part of the internalization of attitudes, the

185

Krefting, L. 1991. Rigor In Qualitative Research; The Assesment of Trust Worthiness. Ontario: Occupational Ther aphy Journal of Research Vol 45 No.3 Hasan Langgulung. 1990. Integrated personality and integrated education: psycho-socio-spiritual approach. Dlm. Ghazali Basri. An Integrated Education In A Multi-Faith And Multi Cultural Country, hlm. 48-53. Kuala Lumpur: Syarikat Alat Tulis. James H Mc. Millan, Sally Schumacer. 2001. Research in Education. Longman New York Joice, Bruce, Marshal Weil, Emily Cahoun. 2009. Model of Teaching. (terjemahan). Pustaka Pelajar Kaiser, L. 2000. Spirituality and the Physician Executive: Reconciling the Inner Self and the Business of Health Care. The Physician Executive. 26(2). March/April. Kirby, G. R. & Jeffery, R.G. 1999. Thinking. Ed. ke-2. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Mar’at. 1982. Sikap manusia, perubahan serta pengukurannya. Jakarta: Ghalia Indonesia. Marzano & Kendall. 2007. The New Taxonomy of Educational Objectives. Second Edition. A Sage Publications Company. Thousand Oaks. California. Marzano, 1985 Mohr, W. 2006. Spiritual Issues in Psychiatric Care. Perspectives in Psychiatric Care. 42(3):174-183. Mahmood Jasim Alsamydai, Husam Mustafa Alnaimi & Dima Mousa Dajani. 2015. Using Fishbein Model To Measure Individual’s Attitudes Toward Electronic Communication Means. Department Of Marketing, Faculty Of Economic And Administrative Science, AlZaytoonah University Of Jordan, Jordan. Muhamad Nur. 2000. Keterampilan berfikir, sikap mental, dan alih ilmu pengetahuan dan teknologi, media pendidikan dan ilmu pengetahuan. Malang: PT. Danar Wijaya, Yayasan Universitas Brawijaya. Muhammad Idrus. 1980. Sikap Mental Masyarkat Gunung Kidul (Studi Pada Masyarakat Desa Banyu Suco Kecamatan Playen Kabupaten, dan Desa Giri Suko Kecamatan Panggang Daerah TK II Gunung Kidul, Yogyakarta Mulyasa. 2014. Implementasi Kurikulum 2013. PT Rosdakarya, Bandung Neuman, W.L. 2006. Social Research Methods, Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches, Boston Novak, J. D. & Gowin. D. B. 1980. Learning how to learn. Cambridge: University Press Sax, G. 1980. Principles of educational and psychological measurement and evaluation. Ed. ke-2. Belmont: Wadsworth Publishing Company. Stephen R.Covey. 2002. The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People. PT. Gramedia Utama. Jakarta Sugiharto, Bambang. 2005. Integrasi Ilmu dan Agama: Ilmu dan Agama dalam Kurikulum Perguruan Tinggi, Mizan Media Utama, Ujung Berung, Bandung. Supardan, Dadang. 2015. Teori-teori Belajar dan Pembelajaran. Yayasan Raharja. Bandung Suyitno, Amin. 1997. Pengukuran Skala Sikap Seseorang Terhadap Mata Pelajaran Matematika. Semarang: FMIPA IKIP Semarang. Wahidin. 2015. Sains dan Agama: Rekonstruksi Integrasi Keduanya. PT. Ombak. Jogyakarta. Wahidin. 2004. Peta Vee, Peta Konsep dan Kemahiran Berfikir dalam pengajaran Kimia di SMA. Disertasi. Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Bangi. Wan Mohd Nor Wan Daud. 2007. Budaya Ilmu (Satu Penjelasan), Adiwarna Utama, Kuala Lumpur. Wawan Arifien. 2012. Guru Juga Manusia. Mitra Edukasi. Bandung Bronowski (1978), Diederich (1967) and Whaley & Surratt (1967). Taken from The Kansas School Naturalist, Vol. 35, No. 4, April 1989 http://www.k-state.edu/biology/pob/modern_attitudes.html http://www.answers.com/Q/What_is_scientific_attitude

availability and utilization of local potential, potential students, and time used. In addition the appropriate evaluation tools and teacher who wants to carry out in a responsible manner. Then a common perception among teachers and parents of the need attitude taught directly ACKNOWLEDGMENT Wahidin born in Ciamis West Java, Indonesia in 1965. As Professor of chemistry’s education since 2008 is a program graduate Ph.D of Science Education in National University of Malaysia (UKM) Bangi, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia. This time as a lecturer of organic chemistry and biochemistry at the Department of Biology at IAIN Syekh Nurjati Cirebon, West Java. Experience as a teacher since 1986 untill 1999 as a chemistry’s teacher at senior high school (SMA) in Ciamis, West Java. The books has been published are the field of education, general chemistry for university, chemical bonds, chemistry’s book for senior high school (SMA), Research Methodology, and the new book the Integration of Science and Religion and work's papers related to science education. Another experience as a consultant the ADB project for the Ministry of Religious Affairs in 2009 up to 2011 and so on. REFERENCES Ahmad Faiz Zainuddin, 2016. Spiritual Emotional Freedom Technique (SEFT) http://www.terapiseft.net/tentang-seft-indonesia/penjelasanseft Allen, D. E., Guy, R. F & Edgley, C. K. 1980. Social psychology as social process. Belmoni, Cal.: Wadsworth Publishing Company. Anion Mohd. & Abdullah Hassan. 2000. Kursus berfikir untuk kolej dan universiti. Kuala Lumpur: PTS Publications and Distributors. Sdn. Bhd. Ashaari Muhammad At-Tamimi. 2001. Mengenal diri melalui rasa hati. t.tp. Giliran Timur. Astrow, A., Pulchalski, C., and Sulmasy, D. 2001. Religion, Spirituality, and Health Care: Social, Ethical, and Practical Considerations. American Journal of Medicine. 110:283-287. Badi, Jamal dan Tajdin Mustafa, 2011, Creative Thingking An Islamic Perspeective. IIUM Press, Kuala Lumpur Malaysia. Bloom. 2000. (1956). Taxonomy of education objectives: the classification of educational goals, the cognitive domain. New York: Longman Bloom, B. S. 1956. Taxonomy of education objectives: the classification of educational goals, the cognitive domain. New York: Longman Bloom, B. S. 1956. Taxonomy of education objectives: the classification of educational goals, the cognitive domain. New York: Longman Bruner, J. S. 1960. The process of education. Cambridge: Harvard University Press Creswell. 1994. Research Design Qualitative and Quantitative Approach. Sage Publications. International Education and Professional Publisher. London Gagne, Robert, M. 1985. The Conditions of learning and theory of instruction. Tokyo: Holt, Rinehrt and Winston. Holt-Saunders International John W. Creswell. 2013. Research Desaign, Pendekatan Kualitatif, Kuantitatif dan Mix. (Terjemahan). (3th ed). Pustaka Pelajar. Jogyakarta Fishbein, M. & Azjen, I. 1975. Beliefs, attitude, intention and behavior: an introduction to theory and research. Philippines: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.

186

THE IMPLEMENTATION OF GENDER-ORIENTED SCHOOLS: AN ETHNOGTRAPHIC STUDY AT SMA IN KAPUBAPTEN PASAR WidyatmikeGede Mulawarman1) Universitas Mulawarman WidyatmikeGede [email protected] 1)

Abstract. The focus of this research is the implementation of gender-oriented schools in Kabupaten Paser, which has the following characteristics: (1) The System of School Management: the leadership culture in schools is still dominated by male teachers, while in fact the number of female teachers is higher. (2) Teaching and Learning Process: There is a gender bias in learning materials in all levels of education, for example in Indonesian Language, Social Science, Civics, and Illustration subject. These learning materials are mostly published by Erlangga and Tiga Serangkai. In general, the human resources in education do not understand the concept of gender, as the result there will be a negative impact due to the gender bias. (3) The Role of Community through School Committee: The number of female representative in school committee is still low due to the structure of committee, such as the chairman and vice chairman, is dominated by male. Keywords: Gender-oriented School, Ethnography I. INTRODUCTION Background of the Problem Kabupaten Paser is one of the ten regions/towns that have been implementing a Socialization of Gender-oriented School in 2010. This socialization was held in front of the headmasters and teachers from elementary school, junior high school, and senior high school. The aim of this socialization is to improve knowledge and as the outcome, the participants will implement gender-oriented in teaching learning process. However, still there is a gender inequality, for example female students usually have lack of courage to state their opinion. This may be due to the parents’ habit when they suggesttheir daughter not to speak too loud, but in gentle voice. In contrast, their son may speak loudly. This suggestion will remain in children mind, as the result female students tendto shy to state their opinion, thus unconsciously it will develop the silent culture in schools. If this condition continues,there will be a gender inequality that will not benefit female students and will be an obstacle in the human developmentqualityespecially in education. This research focused on the implementation of gender-oriented in senior high school by considering the students’ age that more ready and easier to understand the concept of gender and also supported by the indication that the higher of education level, the lower of female involvement. The data presented in this paper will show the gender inequality in the implementation of gender-oriented schools. For example, the classroom setting is important to improve the effectiveness of teaching and learning process. There are several things that have been done in order to make the school tidier, for example by arranging furniture incertain position in the classrooms and laboratories, using illustrations/pictures on the wall, choosing a good quality of tables and chairs, and other physical infrastructure. However, there are schools that find it difficult to organize the classroom due to the limited facilities or the higher ratio of student in the classroom, as the resultthe sitting position

unable to be changed. These conditions also makethe students centered learning is hard to be achieved. Another difficulty is the teachershave no right to choose the furniture. Regardless ofthese limitations, innovative teachers have to find a way to organize the classroom to bemore conducive to the growth of male and female students’participation. In general, most of the teachers have not payattention to the equality of opportunity and treatment to students with different gender througha classroom setting. As have been mention before female students, due to the influence of social culture, generally do not like to state their opinion loudly. The sitting positions that put them in the back or in the corner of the classroom will make them keepquiet and will influence their achievements. The traditional classroom setting, all seats face forward, will not supportthe students-centered learning environment that believed as a very suitable approach to improvestudents’ active participation in the classroom and their achievements. Based on the data above, then the question is: Is there any gender issue in education in Kalimantan Timur, especially in Kabupaten Paser? 2. Focus and Formulation of the Research Based on the gender issues above, this research Gender oriented School: An Ethnographic Study in Kabupaten Paser focus on what, how, and why there is a gender oriented high school in Kabupaten Paser? Furthermore the main focusthis researchis divided into four subfocus. The first subfocus deals with the question:how is the political will of the Kabupaten Paser government to the implementation of gender-oriented schools in Kabupaten Paser. The second subfocus dealswith the question: how is the management of gender-oriented schools in Kabupaten Paser? This question is the second subfocus because it may be an indicator of the characteristics of gender-oriented schools. This subfocus may be divided into four parts, which related to 1) the description of the school culture, 2) the

1.

187

human resource management, 3) schools’ facilities and infrastructure, and 4) budget/funding. The third subfocus deals with the question: how is the process of teaching learning in gender-oriented schools in KabupatenPaser? This third focus is related to 1) lesson plan, 2) learning materials, 3) learning method, 4) learning environment, 5) teachers/educators, 6) and the assessment of learning outcomes. The fourth subfocus deals with the question: how is the community participation in actualizing the genderoriented schools in Kabupaten Paser? This fourth subfocus is related to the community involvement both male and female in school activities and school committee, have a balanced in terms of access, roles, and responsibilities, and participate in the control function, take decision, and receive equal benefit.

III. DISCUSSION Based on the research findings, it may be concluded that gender-oriented school is one of the gender mainstream program in education that attempt to achieve gender equality in education (gender-responsive education). As one of the mainstream programs, gender-oriented school is not familiar by school community in Kabupaten Paser. Four senior high schools as the setting of this research (SMAN I, SMKN II, SMKN III, and SMKN IV) have not implemented the gender-oriented school program due to the headmasters have not arranged the budget for genderresponsive in curriculum, syllabus, lesson plan, and especially in the objective andprocess of teaching and learning. The implementation of gender-oriented school in Kabupaten Paser may be described as follow: a. The System of School Management: (1) Based on the result of field survey in four schools−SMAN I, SMKN I, SMKN II, and SMKN III −there are still found problems in the management of education, such as the leadership culture is still dominated by male teachers, in fact the number of female teacher is higher.

II. METHOD This research is qualitative research with ethnographic as a method. In collecting the data, the researcher used participative observation, in-depth interview, and documentation. In analyzing the data, the researcher used Spradley Model, which is an analysis of domain, taxonomy, componential, and theme.

M 31 21 26

F 46 33 29

Level of Education Master Bachelor degree (S1) degree (S2) M F M 27 41 4 19 31 2 21 22 2

14

22

16

Number of Teacher SMAN I SMKN I SMKN II SMKN III

20

Teaching Period

Position 4A

< 20 years

>20 years

F 3 3 1

M 20 20 16

F 34 34 12

M 3 3 5

F 12 12 9

M 10 10 19

F 14 14 28

M 21 21 7

F 32 31 1

-

7

2

7

12

4

1

10

21

(2) In General the human resources (teachers)do not understand the concept of gender in learning materials, they tend to think that it is not urgent thing, but if it remains in students’ mind it will influence their behavior. c).The Role ofCommunity through School Committee The low representation of female teachers in school committeedue to the structure of committee for example chairman and vice chairman is dominated by male teachers. This condition will influence school decision making where the structure of committee is mostly dominated by male teachers. This will also influence the decisions that unable to accommodate the female needs and aspirationat school which are different with male.

(2) The planning of school facilitiesand infrastructure are not designe do fulfil the specific needs of male and female,even though there are school facilities that separate male and female. For example,the toilet for male and female, prayer room is separated by using curtain for male and female. Butstill,ablution facility and medical room are not divided, for example in SMKN III. (3) The management of human resources in schools are not gender-responsive, for example the opportunity to get a scholarship is mostly used bymale teachers, and the schools are not sensitive to take affirmative action as a mechanism in order to force female teachers to take advantage of scholarship opportunity. As the result, the lower percentage of accredited female teachers than male teachers because their level of education is under the bachelor degree. b. Teaching and Learning Process (1) There is still a gender bias in the learning materials in senior high school/ vocational high school (SMA/SMK), especially in text or discourse materials for example in several subjects such as Indonesian Language, social science, civics, and illustration. These learning materials generally taken from textbooks published by Erlangga and Tiga Serangkai.

IV. CONCLUSION Based on the data analysis with the research focus is the implementation of gender-oriented school in Kabupaten Paser, there are the characteristics as follow: a. The System of School Management: the leadership culture in school is still patriarchal, dominated by male teachers, while in fact the number of female teachers is higher. b. There is still a gender bias in learning materials especially in the Indonesian Language, Social Science, Civics and Picture Illustration subject, so it is required teachers who understand the concept of gender-oriented

188

c.

in order to integrate the concept of gender-oriented in various learning materials. The low representation of female in school committeedue to the structure of the committee, such as the chairman andvice chairman, is dominated by male.

districs and cities in Kalimantan Timur Province may implement the program of gender-oriented school. REFERENCES Ahnaf, Arizal, dkk. 1998. Pemantauan Perkembangan Kesejahteraan Rakyat:Pemanfaatan Data Survei Sosial Ekonomi Nasional dan Data SosialKependudukan Lainnya. Jakarta: CV Rioma. Alwasilah, A. Chaedar.2002.Pokoknya Kualitatif: Dasar-Dasar Merancang dan Melakukan Penelitian Kualitatif. PT Dunia Pustaka Jaya. BPS. 1994. Indikator Sosial Wanita Indonesia 1994. Bainar, 1998. Wacana Perempuan dalam Keindonesiaan dan Kemodernan. Jakarta: PT Pustaka Cidesindo. Budi Santoso. 1992. Citra Wanita dan Kekuasaan Jawa. Yogyakarta: Kanisius. Bungin, Burhan. 2007. Penelitian Kualitatif. Jakarta: Kencana Prenada Media Group. Denzin, Norman K dan Lincoln, Yvonna S (eds). 1994. Handbook of QualitativeResearch. Thousand Oaks, London and New Delhi: Sage Publications. Faqih, Mansoer. 1997. Penyadaran Jender: Buku Panduan untuk Pekerja. Jakarta: ILO Indonesia. _____________. 1999. Analisis Gender dan Transformasi Sosial. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar Offset. Hadjar, Ibnu. 1996. Dasar-Dasar Metodologi Penelitian Kualitatif dalam Pendidikan.Jakarta: PT Raja Grafindo Persada. Iskandar. 2008. Metodologi Penelitian Pendidikan dan Sosial (Kuantitatif dan Kualitatif). Jakarta: Gaung Perkasa Press. Kodiran. 1986.Nilai Anak dan Wanita dalam Masyarakat Jawa. Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan Direktorat Jenderal Kebudayaan Proyek Penelitian dan Pengkajian Kebudayaan Nusantara Bagian Jawa. Mulyana, Deddy. 2001. Metodologi Penelitian Kualitatif. Bandung: Remaja Rosdakarya. Momsen, Janet Henshall. 1991. Women and Development in Third World. London and New York: Routlegde. Moleong, Lexy J. 1993.Metodologi Penelitian Kualitatif. Bandung: Remaja Rosda Karya. Mosse, JC. 1996. Gender dan Pembangunan. Yogyakarta: Pustaka Pelajar dan Rafika Anisa. Muhadjir, Noeng. 2000. Metodologi Penelitian Kuantitatif Edisi IV.Yogyakarta: Rake Sarasin. Notosusanto, Smita & E Kristi Purwandari. (Penyunting). 1997. Perempuan dan Pemberdayaan. Jakarta: Program Studi Kajian Perempuan PPS Universitas Indonesia. Saparinah Sadli. 1994. “Konsep Kemitrasejajaran Laki-laki dan Perempuan” MakalahDisampaikan pada Pusat Studi Wanita Palangkaraya, 1 Desember 1994. ______________. 1999. Metodologi Penelitian Berperspektif Perempuan dalam RisetSosial. Program Studi Kajian Wanita. Program Pascasarjana UniversitasIndonesia. Soetrisno dan Rita Hanafie. 2007. Filsafat Ilmu dan Metodologi Penelitian. Yogyakarta: Penerbit Andi. Soewondo, Nani. 1984. Kedudukan Wanita Indonesia dalam Hukum dan Masyarakat.Jakarta: Ghalia Indonesia. Wibawa, Samodra; Purbokusumo, Yuyun; dan Pramusinto, Agus. 1994. Evaluasi Kebijakan Publik. Jakarta:PT Traja Grfindo Persada. William N.Dunn. 2003. Pengantar Analisis Kebijakan Publik. Terjemahan Fakultas ISIPOLYogyakarta: Gadjah Mada University Press.

V. RECOMENDATION Based on the research findings, the researcher compiled the following recomendations: 1) The policy makers should explicitly support the acceleration of the implementation of gender mainstream (the institution internal instruction to all work units to implement the gender-responsive activities) in the field of education.This policy, as a reflection of political support from that relevant field, and/or to embodied in the vision and mission and the education development program that is genderresponsive. 2) Kabuaten Paser Education Office shouldhavea section in charge and responsable for the implementation of gender mainstream mechanism in the field of educationin the education istituti on in order to improve the quality of education that is gender responsive. 3) The gender-oriented school program has to be implemented in all educational institutions from elementary, secondary, and even higher level of education. The Gender Research Centre of Mulawarman University along with Provincial Education Departement of Kalimantan Timur plan to implement the Model of Gender-oriented School in nine districs/cities with Kabupaten Paser as the pilot project. 4) To implement the model of gender-oriented school model, the human resources and all educational components should be gender responsive. The headmaster, teachers, educators,school committee, parents, and community as the human resources, and all components in education field such as curriculum, teaching materials, facilities and infrastructure in teaching and learning process should be gender responsive. 5) The decision makers in school environment ranging from planning, arranging, implementation, monitoring, and evaluation have to accommodate the interests of male and female human resources. 6) Refer to President Instruction no.9 in 2000 on Gender Mainstream in National Development, schools start from elementary, secondary, to higher level in ten

189

THE INTEGRATION OF ETHNOCHEMISTRY IN CULTURALLY RESPONSIVE TEACHING (CRT) FOR STUDENTS ENGAGEMENT IN CHEMISTRY LEARNING Yuli Rahmawati1), Arif Rahman2), Maruni Triwana3) 1), 2),3)

Chemistry Education Study Program, Universitas Negeri Jakarta E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. The overall aim of this longitudinal study is to develop culturally responsive teaching approach through integration ethnochemistry in chemistry classrooms. The teaching approach is focusing on exploring culture and indigenous knowledge in Indonesia from chemistry perspectives. Ethnochemistry looks at the culture from chemistry perspectives will create culturally responsive teaching for developing students’ cultural identity and students’ engagement in chemistry learning. There are limited research and data in exploring Indonesia culture which has around 300 ethics from chemistry perspective. Students come to the chemistry classrooms from different cultural background; however their chemistry learning disconnected with their culture which lead to students’ disengagement in chemistry learning. Therefore this approach focused on students’ engagement within their differences. This research was conducted in SMA Negeri 2 Tangerang through qualitative methodology with observation, interviews, and reflective journals as data collection. The results showed that the integration of ethnochemistry in Culturally Responsive Teaching approach can be implemented by involving 5 principles which are content integration, facilitating knowledge construction, prejudice reduction, social justice, and academic development. The culturally Responsive Teaching has engaged students in their chemistry learning and developed their soft skills which are integrated ethnochemistry model were development of softskills such as the ability to work together, responsibility, curiosity, social awareness, creative, empathy communication, and self confidence. Students found that the learning experiences has helped to develop their chemistry knowledge and understand the culture from chemistry perspectives. Keywords: culturally responsive teaching; ethnochemistry; chemistry learning I. INTRODUCTION Indonesia consists of more than 17.000 islands, with around 6000 of them inhabited, and has five major islands (Java, Sumatera, Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Irian Jaya islands) (Leom, Acedo, and Utomo, 2002). Indonesia is one of the most populous countries in the world with 224 million, with 60% lives on Java, the smallest of the five major islands. Indonesia also has 300 ethnic groups that speak more than 250 dialects, with Bahasa Indonesia as the national language. These ethnic groups have different cultures which influence the way they think and behave. Currently, Indonesia students grow up with different cultures which influence the set of values and beliefs, including in their learning. The process of globalisation and cross cultural interactions among ethnic groups in Indonesia creates different cultural identities and loss their first cultural identity. In chemistry learning, western knowledge dominant in every level of curriculum and students learning which lead to students disconnected to their cultural background. It leads to students’ disengagement in chemistry as culture is central to learning and motivation. Thus, in education, they develop multicultural classrooms by embrace culturally responsive teaching. One of the main aims of chemistry education in Indonesia curriculum 2013 has key points on developing students’ scientific inquiry through connected, engaged, and meaningful chemistry learning in relation to National

character. Scientific inquiry refers to the activities through which students develop knowledge and understanding of scientific ideas, as well as an understanding of how scientists study the natural world. One way to integrate the scientific inquiry with students cultural background in relation to national character is employing the culturally responsive approach with ethnochemistry. Culturally responsive (or relevant) teaching has been described as "a pedagogy that empowers students intellectually, socially, emotionally, and politically by using cultural referents to impart knowledge, skills, and attitudes" (Ladson-Billings, 1994). Integrated program will be involved main aspects in education which are students’ learning, teaching models, and teacher competences. In addition the curriculum 2013 embrace student-centre learning in accordance with the background, characteristics, and the ability of students' prior knowledge (Ministry of Education and Culture, 2013). It also developing meaningful learning experiences. There are several problems in chemistry learning which are students less engagement in chemistry learning since their found difficulties in understanding abstract concepts and its relation with daily lives which lead to students disengagement in chemistry learning (Marsita, 2010) Teachers should be able to implement the learning process that takes into account differences in cultural background and student characteristics. Differences in cultural background and the character of such background

190

knowledge, learning styles, age, level of maturity, scope of interest, socio-economic environment, intelligence, academic achievement, motivation, culture, etc. (Sardiman, 2011). The differences in cultural background and character of students, teachers are not only able to understand the diversity of cultural background and students’ character, but also use it as a resource for teaching and learning for bringing chemistry close to their lives. Therefore this study explored the implementation of Culturally Responsive Teaching in chemistry learning.

between teachers and students can be one of convenience for students to obtain information and integrate the contents of the subject matter. The following statement of the students related to learning they experience and their assessment of the teacher during lessons. “The teacher is very nice and friendly. She is highly appreciated our answer” (Reflective Journals, February 4, 2016) Based on the results, students found the teacher developed a good relationship between teachers and students have been there so that students feel appreciated by the teacher. The teacher was also holding high expectation by encouraging students to achieve learning objectives and motivate the students. “Teachers must always bring the spirit of 'you can do it'. Its easy to ask questions and we enjoy the learning” (Student Interview, March 3, 2016) Based on the results students who have not achieved the objective, have always received encouragement and expectations of teachers so that students can and understand the material being taught. Teachers must believe their students for their ability in learning and hope that students can bring valuable experience in the classroom (Hernandez, Morales, & Shroyer, 2013). This is the communication through the high expectations from teachers to students so students can achieve the learning objectives.

II. METHOD The qualitative method was employed in the study with observation, interviews, reflective journals, and documents analysis as data collection. This research was conducted at SMAN 2 Tangerang in year 11. The study consisted of three stages: the first stage is that the preliminary research stage for understanding the context by conducting classroom observation, understanding of the cultural background of students, grouping the cultural background of students, interviews with the chemistry teachers), developing articles chemistry with reviewing by the experts, then implementing in chemistry classroom by employing Culturally Responsive Teaching approach. At the end of the classroom, students developed the ethnochemistry project. III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION The study results show the process of integration ethnochemistry in CRT approach in the context of chemistry learning. By employing Hernandez, Morales & Shroyer (2013) basic principles, the researchers worked with the teachers to integrate these for engaging the students. Students’ engagement showed in both hard and soft skills development. A. The Cultural Responsive Teaching Approach The Culturally Responsive Teaching (CRT) which is applied in this study refers to the approach created by Hernandez, Morales & Shroyer (2013) which consists of five main categories, namely content integration, facilitating knowledge construction, prejudice reduction, social justice, and academic development.

2. Facilitating of Knowledge Construction Hernandez, Morales & Shroyer (2013) describes the model of culturally Responsive Teaching in facilitating of knowledge construction is constructing knowledge based on students’ prior knowlede. In this context, teacher provided students the culture context in their lives. "I read the article which helped work on the problems, not only about the chemistry, but also the culture. Its close to my lives" (Interview Student Interview, February 11, 2016) The statement above shows that the students understood both from the standpoint of chemistry and cultural meanings in the article. Students discussed with their friends about Betawi tradition. According to Gay (2000), learning with culturally Responsive Teaching is the use of cultural knowledge, prior to making the learning experience can be more relevant and effective for students. It can be used to introduce new concepts. It is also important to assist students in learning to be critical, independent thinkers who are open to other ways of knowing. According to Hernandez, Morales & Shroyer (2013), CRT can help students to become critical and reflective thinkers, understand, and represent information provided. In this context, teachers communicate with the language that students understood. Teacher also appreciated students’ questions which leading to students’ selfconfidence. It makes students became more confident in expressing their opinion and better in chemistry learning. Teachers act as facilitators in group discussion activities, monitor the activities of each group. Teachers also acts as a consultant and mediator for students learning.

1. Content Integration The integration of the learning material was employed by provide learning materials associated with the daily life of students and associate culture that related to chemistry curricula. The example of articles are Roti Buaya and Dewi Sri from Betawi and Javanese culture. Students found engaging in their chemistry learning as stated bellow. "It gave motivation to learn chemistry since its applied in everyday life" (Reflective Journals, February 4, 2016) Students found the relation of chemistry concepts that they leant with their daily lives. Then when they read the articles, the students found their awareness of understanding of their culture from different perspectives. The teacher provided task for students to asking about Dewi Sri to their parents which lead to cultural understanding from their own family. In the content integration, teacher was fostering positive teacher-student relationships. Teachers build a comfortable learning environment and building positive relationships

191

motivation, and most strongly improved are their soft skills. Among the soft skills, the nation's culture and character education are related to graduate competences from Curriculum 2013. 1. Working together The value of working together can be seen when all the members to work together in completing tasks, such as to answer questions and work on project tasks. If I didn’t work together, the task will not be completed quickly so that the tasks given to work together and help each other. (Reflective Journal, February 24, 2016) Based on the above statement either through interviews or reflective journals the students that they feel has been cooperating with each other. They also learnt to understand and appreciate each others.

3. Prejudice Reduction In prejudice reduction, the teacher developed the positive student-student interactions by implemented cooperative teaching model such as Jigsaw, STAD, and Think Pair Share. "I worked in group and conducted the project, we developed good relatioships with other friends” (Student Interview, March 3, 2016) Students engaged in active discussions within a group. Teachers provided time for the students to interact with their peers in positive interactions. It also helped them to improve communication skills. The prejudice reduction in the classroom also performed by teachers in creating enjoyable learning environment to make students become excited in learning participation. The teachers were always willing to answer questions from students without discrimination which make students felt comfort, happy, and engaged in the lesson.

2. Empathy Communication The attitude of understanding, empathy, tolerance and sensitive to the others feelings that can occur in this learning environment as the impact of prejudice reduction. “I learnt to develop my empathy communication when working with my friends, I realised that I should respect others opinions” (Reflective journal, February 24, 2016) Based on the students' responds that there are attitudes of empathy and understand each other. Grouping students based on the differences in gender, achievement levels, and ethnic group have made students develop their empathy with others. Attitude to listen and respect others’ opinions are the characteristic of empathy as stated by Goleman cites the opinion that empathy has a characteristic of which is able to accept the other person's perspective, is able to listen to others, and sensitive to the others’ feelings.

4. Social justice The social justice can be raised in a culturally responsive learning environment Teaching (CRT) is to encourage students to ask questions and/or challenge to show their status quo. In this means, students can develop an awareness to be more critical of their status in a multicultural learning environment. The teacher asked the students to learn their indigenous language, most of them used Javanese language as they came from Java, then its also related to the article of ethnochemistry about Dewi Sri. In this context, the teacher challenged the students to move from their comfort zone and understand their own cultural identity. 5. Academic Development It is important to provide opportunity for students to achieve academic success. In this context, the teacher created opportunities in the classroom by using variety of learning methods. Variation learning method is conducted through the implementation of cooperative teaching methods such as jigsaw, STAD, TPS, and TSTS. "The role of teachers was excellent in facilitating learning because the teacher's role is different from our usual classroom. We usually listened to the teacher, but now we have more freedom in our learning” (Interview, March 3, 2016) Based on the respond from the students, the teachers have implemented learning method that is different from the usual learning methods. The cooperative learning models has stimulated students to develop their academic ability and learning motivation. The teacher also created the group based on their differences of learning achievement, sex (gender), learning styles and ethnic backgrounds. The students preferred heterogeneous discussion groups. Meanwhile, when students are grouped by the same ethic group, the students responded positively for the formation of these groups since it helps them to have better understanding of ethnochemistry topics. After implemented this approach, the students’ engagement in chemistry learning started to improve as the discussion bellow.

2. Social Awareness Socially conscious attitude shown by the students during the learning. Attitude to be sensitive about the existence of others and interdependence is seen especially when the discussion as students following statement. "Now I often communicate with friends who I never close with, we tried to know each other" (Students Interview, February 11, 2016) Based on the statements of students both from interviews or reflective journals, students indicated that their communication frequency with classmates becomes more often than usual. They stated that they become more used to talk, get to know their friends’ character which leading to be good at working together. 3. Self-Confident The academic development and social juctice during the learning have an impact on the students that the students developed their self-confidence to express their opinions and talked to their friends. “The approach has helped me to improve my selfconfidence, especially in group discussion” (Reflective Journal, February 24, 2016) Based on the results, the teaching approach which is implemented has helped students to develop their selfconfidence. The confidence of the students appeared when

B. Students Engagement in Culturally Responsive Teaching The students’ engagement was showed both in their understanding of chemistry concepts, their learning

192

discussing in groups such as the courage to express opinions and convey information held to his friends.

The ethnochemistry has stimulated their curiosity. Not only about the chemistry concepts, but also the tradition.

4. Responsibility The implications of culturally responsive learning has stimulated students to develop their responsibility. The learning process that was often using cooperative discussions has engaged them in understand the task objectives to be completed. Each of us developed the self-responsibility in order to quickly complete the task. We tried to talk to others who are not responsible for and participate in group tasks. (Reflective Journal, February 24, 2016) Most of the students in the above statement stated that after participating in the chemistry learning, they have a sense of responsibility. They must be responsible to participate in completing the tasks. Attitude and behavior of people to carry out their duties and obligations, that they should do to ourselves, community, environment (natural, social and cultural), country and God Almighty show their sense of responsibility (Ministry of Education and Culture, 2013).

7. Knowledge Development The students usually chemistry from textbook and followed the teachers instruction. In bringing the culture along to chemistry concepts has helped them to develop their knowledge. It has given them the new way of chemistry learning. “I found that when the chemistry associated with the culture, so new insights about cultures along with chemistry concepts" (Student Interview, February 12, 2016) Students come to know about the contents of chemistry such as chemical reactions, energy, and the process. It has been developed their knowledge about traditions from various regions in Indonesia. The students engage in the process of seeing, hearing, and find out for themselves in developing and understanding the knowledge.

5. Learning Motivation Most students look more enthusiastic in the chemistry leaning. The learning motivation as the ability of students to motivate themselves to achieve success in learning has been stimulated in this learning. “I become more motivated, keep tell myself that 'I must be getting better. If I showed my friends perform better, its motivated myself” (Student Interview, March 2, 2016) Based on the above statement when grouping students based on their level of achievement, its stimulated their motivation to learn chemistry, they tried to perform well in the group. The motivation is also stimulated by integrating ethnochemistry in the learning. "Because we know the application of chemistry concepts in everyday life, we are motivated to know more. Even, chemistry seems to be difficult, but its related to everyday life" (Students Interview 14, March 2, 2016) The ethnochemistry has stimulated the students learning motivation by describing the chemistry concepts are applied in the cultural traditions which make students more interested in chemistry learning. Students stated that they was more interested in studying chemistry because it is more exciting and interesting with stories combined with the culture.

8. Cultural Understanding The implementation of content integration has committed to not only developing cognitive value, but also aims to develop cultural value and character of students. One is the value of patriotism. Statement following students show their patriotism after following integrated with the learning culture. "Certainly, we are Indonesia, but when exploring our own cultural background, its has stimulated me to maintain my culture and share to others” (Student Interview, March 15, 2016) "I feel grateful that we have been given a favor all manner what so and we have to preserve our culture." (Student Interview, March 3, 2016) Students explained that they become more loving Indonesia culture. Their tried to understand and implement cultural and the character values of the students as a way of thinking, loyalty, care and high appreciation of language, physical environment, social, cultural, economic, politics and nations. 9. Creativity Culturally Responsive Teaching has impact on the development of creativity and creative thinking to solve the problems. Students thought to generate new way as stated bellow. We always think to produce an innovative use of creativity that we have. (Reflective Journal, February 24, 2016) The statement shows that the students show their creativity while solving a problem. The issue gained while working on tasks assigned by the teacher. Students do the work critically and creatively. Students attempt to give the best and different from the other groups. Students also stated that during the lesson the teacher assigns students to develop their creativity, which is the project tasks.

6. Curiosity The integration of ethnochemistry was the new things in chemistry learning. Thus the students keep developing their curiosity by searching different cultural practices which is related to chemistry concepts. Here is the statement of the student who showed curiosity towards the material covered. "So I would like to know how to make Roti Buaya, I want to immediately put into practice, 'is it true that the chemicals used can be shown to make Roti Buaya?. Learning about rice from Dewi Sri’s story, its interesting, is it chemistry inside the rice” (Student Interview, February 10, 2016)

IV. CONCLUSION The Culturally Responsive Teaching culturally integrated ethnochemistry has been implemented in chemistry learning by integrating the basic principles of content integration,

193

facilitating knowledge construction, prejudice reduction, social justice, and academic development. The students showed their engagement in chemistry learning by showing their ability of working together, empathy communication, social awareness, self-confident, responsibility, and creativity. The learning experiences has stimulated their learning motivation and curiosity in order to develop their knowledge of chemistry and culture. The implementation of Culturally Responsive Teaching stimulated students’ awareness of the role of chemistry in everyday life, especially in their culture that also affects their cultural understanding. In applying this approach, teacher should have creativity and ability of preparing the learning resources for students, especially in ethnochemistry topics. This approach also provides opportunity for parents to participate in students learning as part of learning community.

dengan Menggunakan Two- Tier Mulptiple Choice Diagnostic Instrument. Jurnal Inovasi Pendidikan, Vol. 4, No.1: 512-520. [3] Sardiman. 2011. Interaksi dan Motivasi Belajar Mengajar. Jakarta: Rajawali Pers. [4] Gay, G. 2000. Culturally Responsive Teaching: Theory, Practice, andResesarch. New York:Teachers College Press. [5] Ladson, G. dan Billings. 1995. Toward Culturally Relevant Pedagogy. American Educational Research Journal, Vol. 32, No. 3: 465-491. [6] Hernandez, C. M., Amanda R. Morales dan M. G. Shroyer. 2013. The development of a model of culturally responsive science and mathematics teaching. Cultural Studies of Science Education, Vol. 8, No. 4: 803-820. [10] Bonner, E. P. dan Thomasenia L. Adams. 2012. Culturally Responsive Teaching in The Context of Mathematics: A Grounded Theory Case Study. Journal of Mathematics Teacher Education, Vol. 15 : 25-38. [11] Padron, Y. N., Waxman, H. C., dan Rivera, H. H. 2002. Educational Issues and Effective Practices for Hispanic Students. Chapter: Narrowing the Achievement Gap, Issues in Children’s and Families’ Lives. Springer. Hal. 131-151. [12] Yusuf, S. 2006. Psikologi Perkembangan Anak dan Remaja. Bandung: Remaja Rosdakarya. [13] Kementrian Pendidikan Nasional. 2010. Pengembang Pendidikan Budaya dan Karakter Bangsa. Jakarta.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT We would like to thank to Ministry of Research, Technology, and Higher Education for the grant, Universitas Negeri Jakarta, Lecturers, Teachers, and Students for their support. REFERENCES [1] Departemen Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan. 2013. Salinan Lampiran Peraturan Menteri Pendidikan Dan Kebudayaan Nomor 69 Tahun 2013 Tentang Kerangka Dasar Dan Struktur Kurikulum Sekolah Menengah Atas/Madrasah Aliyah. Jakarta: Depdikbud. [2] Marsita, S. K. 2010. Analisis Kesulitan Belajar Kimia SMA dalam Memahami Materi Larutan Penyangga

194

MACHINE LEARNING APPROACH FOR ANALYSIS OF SOCIAL MEDIA Zen Munawar1), Bambang Siswoyo2), Nanna Suryana Herman3) 1)

Phd. Student , UTeM, Melaka, Malaysia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

Phd. Student , UTeM, Melaka, Malaysia E-mail:[email protected]

3)

Phd. Supervisor , UTeM, Melaka, Malaysia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Use of connection to the Internet network generally occurs in social media applications, or often called social networks. Even the exponential increase in internet use are also present in social networking sites, as users often use the Internet on social networks as well as the various types of social networks that have an impact on the amount of data used to be regarded as Big Data. Exposure of Big Data are also presented briefly so that the reader can understand and follow from the groove in this paper. Mechanical analysis on large data has been increased at this time, the literature presented to support that data analysis techniques should also be conducted on a social media network. This paper contains information about the literature regarding the data analysis techniques and algorithms that are large in social networks. At the end of the paper presented also use means the use of algorithms for large data in social networks. Keywords: Social Media, Big Data, Hadoop, Machine Learning Algorithms

of the disciplines of Computer Science who studied how to make a machine has an intelligence. Machine Learning for working with social network data: detecting fraud, predicting clickthru patterns, targeted advertising. There are a variety of different algorithms based learning Machine has been used for text classification task for example k-Nearest Neighbour (k-NN Algorithm) [15], Bayesian algorithm [9], Support Vector Machine (SVM) [7], Neural Networks [3], and Decision Trees [14]. Big Data is defined as, “data that exceeds the processing capacity of conventional database systems. The data is too big, moves too fast, or doesn’t fit the strictures of your database architectures. To gain value from this data, you must choose an alternative way to process it.” [5] Very large datasets, often called big data, has become a common thing in the study in all fields including human behavior in social media. Lately the scientific study conducted by researchers has been revolutionized by Big Data [17].

I. INTRODUCTION

Nowadays social media has become an important part of social life. The data that flows on online social media has the volume and size of data, social media enable governments and organizations to engage people while allowing consumers to make an informed decision. In large data processing take place some constraints such as volume, velocity, variety and veracity [20]. Organization of big data analysis for large volumes of data, this occurs due to changes in how to manage the business [19]. Data processing different sized compared with data processing for small, medium, technique and analysis with the help of special equipment needed in order to produce better decisions. Not all organizations produce large-sized data, for organizations that generate large amounts of data, perform data analysis, semantic web analytics to obtain a Return on Investment. There are several examples of the analysis of big data to optimize processes such as understanding the target customers bismnis, education, automation in the automobile industry and agriculture [18]. Machine Learning is a scientific field that contains about learning machine to be Intelligent. To have an intelligence, machine must be able to learn. Machines can learn under different circumstances namely, Supervised, Unsupervised and Reinforcement [13]. Machine Learning is one

II. RELATED WORK

A few years ago, there has been extensive investigation and rapid progress in particular on the automatic hierarchical classification. Most studies adopt a top-down model for classification. M.-Y. Kan and H. O. N. Thi. [14]; there are four structures in text classification: category virtual tree, the tree of categories, virtual categories

195

directed acyclic graph and a directed acyclic graph category. Social networks like Face book, WhatsApps, Twitter, LinkedIn etc. using large amounts of data vary in a short time. The Social Media Data Needs The implementation of big data analysis for the review produce information Which Means For information consumers. A. Social Media

Social media is one of the most important components of electronic commerce and information management [12]. Online social media change the model of the broadcast media dialogue in a social media dialogue. Through online social media, users can upload photos, videos, music, pictures, and text to share ideas, feelings, opinions, and experiences with other members. Social networking sites, online forums, instant messaging services, and smart phone platform has grown exponentially, so that the widespread use of social media.

Fig. 1 Big Data Management

Big data analysis techniques include predictive analytics, data mining, statistical analysis, complex SQL, data visualization, artificial intelligence and natural language processing. Analysis of structured data and unstructured social networks leads to social network analysis [6 Jonathan magnuson]. Basis of Big Data Management begins with the capture and organize relevant data. data analysis to understand what's happening, predict what will happen. A deeper analysis means a new analytical method for deeper insights. [8] "Big Data" is the Data Management & Analytics market opportunities driven by the needs of new markets. In-Database Analytics Data Mining no use Big Data Hadoop connector for combining data and DBMS for in-depth analysis. Also there is a need to re-use the SQL skills to apply data mining techniques deeper or re-use skills for statistical analysis. Everything is all about "Big Data" is not a mass of data RAM. This is how learning predictive relationship between the concepts of knowledge and business activities are conducted [22]. Hadoop projects mature and business intelligence (BI) tools support improved data analysis of the complexity of implementation will reduce, but the early adopter competitive advantage will also be reduced. risk technology implementation can be reduced by adapting the principles of the existing architecture and patterns for new technology and needs change rather than resist it. [2]. As Big Data Analytics Software Apache Hadoop is a platform big-data processing is "an open source software project that enables distributed processing of large data sets on clusters of commodity servers" [21]. Apache Hadoop is open source, and as a pioneer of fundamentally

B. Big Data Analytics

The world today can not be separated from the role of data because all built on a foundation of data. One implementation is the Internet network is currently the information-gathering platform is very large because social media interactions online. On the Internet every second will be added to the data. With their big data then needs to be more structured data management, such as the industry in the field of telecommunications, and financial services. Business organizations require the system to be optimized to manage and contain this unstructured data into the database, so it can be effectively provided and analyzed. Data analysis should be done quickly with business objectives.

196

decide based on the output of the analysis of social media. Iteration is a key aspect of machine learning techniques. Repeat this aspect will create a system to independently adapt to a new set of input because they will continue to have multiple datasets.

new way to store and process data. Hadoop can manage various types of data from different systems: both structured, unstructured, log files, images, audio files, as well as communication records. Apache Hadoop has two main subprojects: MapReduce and the Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS).

Machine learning algorithms that has played a major role in the analysis of social media including Decision tree learning, Naïve Bayes, Nearest Neighbor classifier, Maximum Entropy method Support vector machine(SVM), Dynamic Language Model classifier, linear regression and logistic regression , Simple logistic classifier, Bayes Net and Multilayer Perceptron.

C. Machine Learning and Social Network Analytic

Machine learning techniques, is the process of imparting knowledge to every machine to learn about the system with a set of input / dependent variable and the desired output.All paragraphs must be indented. Machine learning techniques will be classified under the categories of Decision tree based, linear and logistic regression based and neural network based. Machine learning can perform learning under three modes. They are Supervised, Unsupervised and Reinforcement learning techniques [11].

Decision tree learning uses decision trees to predict the values of a target variable and relate the same to the observations of that variable. There are two types of trees can be built using a decision tree learning mechanism namely, classification trees and regression trees. In social network analysis, decision tree learning has been used to profile users based on their relationship with other users, and depending on the decision tree is obtained, the grouping of users [6]. Two important algorithms : top down, greedy search through the space of decision trees are ID3 and C4. 5 [1]. Support Vector Machine, a machine learning algorithm works with labeled training data and output the results to a hyper plane. Linear and logistic regressions are approaches predominantly utilized in predictive analytics. Multivariate logistic regression models estimated at which the transformation of information about the dependent variable becomes a continuous variable limited progress. Multilayer perceptron is a class of Artificial Neural Network (ANN), which works on the principle of feed forwarding and create a model input and output variables that are used for machine learning. The application of multilayer perceptron can also be found in the context of social network analysis to classify the social community based on social media data.

There are various types of Machine Learning Algorithms: Support Vector Machines (SVM), K-Nearest Neighbour (K-NN), Generalized Instance Set (GIS). Support Vector Machine is a machine learning technique based on statistical learning theory. SVM algorithm proved to be very effective in dealing with high dimensional feature space, the most challenging problems of other machine learning techniques due to the so-called curse of dimension. K-NN is different from teaching methods to build an overview, an explicit target function as an example of training that is provided. In this method, there is a family called Memory-Based Learning learning algorithm or sample-based as kNN and Rocchio. They algorithms only store samples for their training or change the training example to some other object before storing. Generalized Instance Set (GIS) [4]; is an algorithm like for this idea. GIS selective replacement of positive and negative training documents right in the pool training documents to eliminate some of the noise in the training set. It automatically selects the positive examples show representative and generalization. III. ANALYSIS

Having discussed about the general theory of social media, big data analytics, and Machine Learning and Social Network Analytic in the previous section of this paper, this section will concentrate on analysis of linkages through these theories as providing details of the techniques of machine learning as aptly applied to social media. If the data used social media to an important decision, it is necessary to process large datasets obtained from social networks using machine learning techniques. Using this technique will help organizations to predict a particular situation and

IV. CONCLUSIONS

In this paper, the necessary information in big data in social network analysis and machine learning have been analyzed, though not so deep. This paper is expected to provide an opportunity for other researchers to further clarify in particular on the same domain. This paper discusses the importance of social media, big data analytics and machine learning analytics and social network in

197

[5]

E. Dumhill, “What is big data?”, 2012 , http://strata.oreilly.com/ 2012/01/what-is-big-data.html [6] E. Trandafili, M. Biba, A. Xhuvani, “ Profiling Social Network Users with Machine Learning”, BCI, September 2013 pp. 14-20. [7] F. Sebastiani. Machine learning in automated text categorization. ACM Computing Surveys, 34(1):1–47, March 2002. [8] For Big Data Analytics There’s No Such Thing as Too Big The Compelling Economics and Technology of Big Data Computing, White Paper, March 2012, By: 4syth.com, Emerging big data thought leaders [9] H. Guan, J. Zhou, and M. Guo. A class-feature-centroid classifier for text categorization. In 18th International World Wide Web Conference, pages 201–201, April 2009. [10] Jonathan Magnusson, “Social Network Analysis Using big Data technology”, Uppsala Universitet, January 2012 [11] K. L. Du, M. N. S. Swamy, “Neural Networks and statistical Learning, ” Springer-Verlag London, 2014. [12] Lai, L.S.L. and E. Turban, “Groups Formation and Operations in the Web 2.0 Environment and Social Networks,” Group Decision and Negotiation, Vol. 17, No. 5:387-402, 2008. [13] Lloyd Allison, “Types and classes of machine learning and data mining”, Proceedings of the 26th Australasian Computer Science Conference, Vol. 16, Page No. 207-215, 2003. [14] M.-Y. Kan and H. O. N. Thi. Fast webpage Classification using URL features. In Proceedings of the 14th ACM International Conference on Information and Knowledge Management, pages 325–326, New York, NY, 2005. ACM Press [15] P. N. Bennett and N. Nguyen. Refined experts: improving Classification in large taxonomies. In Proceedings of the 32nd International ACM SIGIR Conference on Research and Development in Information Retrieval, pages 11–18. ACM, 2009 [16] S. M. Metev and V. P. Veiko, Laser Assisted Microtechnology, 2nd ed., R. M. Osgood, Jr., Ed. Berlin, Germany: Springer-Verlag, 1998. [17] Smart Health and Wellbeing. Computing Community Consortium. Spring 2011. [18] Tania Cerquitelli, Silvia Chiusano, MirkoKampf, “Special Session on Big Data: New Trends and Applications”, BigData 2013. [19] Will Dobbie, Roland G. Fryer, Jr. “Getting Beneath the Veil of Effective Schools: Evidence from New York City. ” NBER Working Paper No. 17632. Issued Dec. 2011. [20] www. ibmbigdatahub. com/infographic/four-vs-big-data [21] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Apache_Hadoop [22] http://bigdataarchitecture.com/

the first part along with the increasing importance of analyzing social media data grows utilize big data and machine learning algorithms. The next section discusses various parallelization framework in the form of Hadoop in the context of social network analysis. Various machine learning algorithms applied in the field of social data analysis is discussed in the third section of this paper. With this discussion, the scope of integration between big data and machine learning techniques to the analysis of social networks has widened. Various performance enhancement techniques with machine learning algorithm modifications in the scenario are configured and comparative performance optimization for different classes of graph databases when used in the analysis of social networks are becoming the main job for the next researcher.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

REFERENCES B. Hassina, A. Merbarha, H. EZZ, Kouri, M. ERRITALI, “ A Comparative study of decision tree ID3 and C4. 5”, International Journal of Advanced Computer Science and Applications special Issue on Advances in Vehicular Ad Hoc networking and Applications pp-13-19. Big data: The next frontier for innovation, competition, and productivity. James Manyika, Michael Chui, Brad Brown, Jacques Bughin, Richard Dobbs, Charles Roxburgh, and Angela Hung Byers. McKinsey Global Institute. May 2011 C.-C. Huang, S.-L. Chuang, and L.-F. Chien. Liveclassifier: Creating hierarchical text classifiers through web corpora. In Proceedings of the 13th International Conference on World Wide Web, pages 184– 192, New York, NY, 2004. ACM Press C. Castillo and B. D. Davison. Adversarial web search. Foundations and Trends in Information Retrieval, 4(5):377–486, 2010.

198

The Causes Factors of Employee Turnover Intention Zahara T. Rony Universitas Bhayangkara Jakarta Raya [email protected]

Abstract. The purposes of this research are to find out and to dig up the causes of the so-called employees’ turnover intention. The study was conducted in the television industry Trans7 as a solid and successful in Indonesia, but had high worker turnover intention during the period 2010 to 2012.From collected data, the voluntary turnover dominated by GenY. This research was applied by the utilization of the qualitative method, collecting data through interviews, observations. Data obtained from the former employee, the employees is still working and were conducting exit interviews and also the employees moved to work then rejoined in Trans7. Research pinpoints that employees’ turnover intention is due to both internal and external factors. Internal factors consist of work-life balance, political office, leader, career path, and salary. External factor is the accessibility to get a lot of chances in the labor market with many alternatives. This study shows that Trans7 do not maximized sustainable talent engagement strategy Keywords: intention voluntary turnover, work-life balance, political office, leader, career path, salary, Gen-Y

I. INTRODUCTION Turnover having been undergoing recently in companies has affected badly on companies’ health. The higher turnover, the more work replacement (Ongori: 2007:49-54). Thisproblems are becoming serious as it will bring loss to the companies if turnover rate rises Zheng (2010: 4148). Turnover eventually becomes the last option for an employee since the condition may not go as expected. It meant the individual stopped playing a role in the company and left the relevant areas of the company Robbins dan Judge (2007: 28). A turnover intention is a mental decision prevailing between an individual’s approach with reference to a job to continue or leave the job Jacobs and Roodt (2007: 229-248). Turnover intention has long been under research by considering numerous viewpoints because it gives rise to several negative effect leading to decreasing personality of a company (Harris: 1982), (Klasen: 1999). Turnover remains an interesting phenomenon as written on Michel & Steiner (1997) in the journal of the impact of employee turnover on the efficiency of the organization as well as on M. Naeem Tariq (2013:702) which is still under research by DongHwan Cho and Jung-Min Son (2012:24) in the journal of “Job Embeddedness and Turnover Intentions: An Empirical Investigation of Construction IT Industries” revealing that the lower rate of carrier satisfaction, the lower rate of employees’ job satisfaction. This drives to the higher rate of turnover intention. Mehrasa Heydarian and Soroosh Abhar in the journal of “Factors Contributing To Employees Turnover Intention”, 2011 in Malaysia, reveales factors of employee turnover that cover commintment of

organization, P-O Fit, job satisfaction and work stress. Employee turnover brings about negative impact either directly or indirectly. Directly, it affects to significant costs i.e. advertising, interview, hiring, orientation and education. Indirectly, it affects moral, productivity, reputation, and organization sustainability as well as the fatigue pressure on the left employee (Hinkin dan Tracey:2000:84). The companies will lose their memory along with employees’ leaving and their social capital having been created among employees in a given period of time Ongori (2007:51-52). The turnover immensely affected industrial sector in the U.S. after it had severed loss approximately US $1 billion per annum from 1973 to 1983 (Bloomquist dan Kleiner : 2000:7-8). Around 16.8% employee turnover takes place in companies in the U.S. each year, therefore they have to bear loss as many as 1.5 hours off the salary the companies have to pay (Aamodt, 2007). Statistical data of Department of Manpower of the United States reads that employees will have survives to work only for 1.5 years (Forbes, edisi 19/3/2014). Among of them who resign belong to potential employees (Sherif & Tri M.: 2016:1). Employee turnover rise also took place in Trans7, a private national television corporation in Indonesia, within a period of 2010-2012. A study in 2014 noted that turnover keeps increasing on young, potential, experienced and executive-level employees. It indicated that a problem occurred in the human resources management in Trans 7. Once a problem remains unresolved in terms of man prower planning, there comes another burden on seeking substitutes. It is not that easy to recruit employees who meet the needs in one time. Employee shortage in a team affects program or product quality.

 

199

Data of study (Zahara, 2015) demonstrates a comparison of number of employees between the recruited and resigned within 2010-2012. In 2010, there were 226 recruited employees and 175 resigned ones. In 2011, there were 279 recruited and 209 resigned. In 2012, there was a decrease and an increase in same time in the number of recruited that was 228 and the number of resigned that was 241 respectively. The data also shows that 450 resigned employees ages 20-25, 147 ages 26-30, 80 ages 3135, 30 ages 36-40, and the remaining 18 ages above 40. The data also figures out that the resigned was dominated by young empolyees having relatively short work period and belonging to generation Y (Gen Y). Gen Y are people born between 19812000 Cran (2014:9). Gen Y is generation of facebook and twitter. Regarding the fact addressing turnover intention, the writer is willing to analyze and investigate factors leading to turnover intention of Trans7 employees.

structured and unstructured. The observation was performed observing numerous activities i.e. socialization, performance appraisal, exit interview process, meetings and discussion forum. A persistent and continous observation was conducted to investigate specific element with regards to the situation under research, and to discuss with some managers of Trans7. Next stage, data reduction that included selection process, focus on simplifying and transforming rough data reading from onsite written records. Data was reduced manually and organized by several ways i.e. building matric or resource table, organizing material/data, reading overall data, dividing or sorting data into segments, labelling the segments into codes, and making reflective records regarding pehnomena causing voluntary turnover in Trans7. The overall system of research methodology above explained can be ilustrated in a research desighn as follows:

II. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY This qualitative research was conducted in 2014 by employing a case study research, learning a case phenomenon in a real context in Trans7 in terms of employees’ turnover factors in 2010-2012. The research was intitiated by checking all secondary data, and analyzing it by describing the collected data with the absence of generalization. The object describet was a case study of employees’ turnover causes at television industry of Trans7 which has been established since 2006 and developed as a big corporation with a total of 1,691 employees since 2012. The researcher informally selected 3 (three) participants as co-researchers consisting of Assistant Manager Human Resources Development, Senior Staff Recruitment, Supervisor Training & Development. They have knowledge about phenomenon under research and access to data resource. They also help search data, review perception, viewpoint and analyse the research as well as give critical thinking, and interpret findngs. A pre-elementary interview with several credible and competent internal parties in Trans7 was conducted to determine four types of informants i.e. Trans7 employees, Ex-Trans7 employees, employess under exit interview process, and employees having moved out and joined back (out-in). Twenty six employees were selected as informants by means of purposive and snowball sampling technique. Interview, observation and documentation study were used for data collection. The interview covered

Figure 1. Turnover Intention Research Design RESULT OF RESEARCH AND ANALYSIS Causes of Turnover of Trans7 Employees

 

200

The causes of turnover experienced by Trans7 employees in period of 2010-2012 invloved individual internal factors i.e. values, motivation, perception, sacrifice, and attitude. Others involved individual internal factors such as gen y, young age, work period, and status. The company’s internal factors also contribute to these causes i.e. life balance (wlb), political office, salary, opportunity to develop career, leadership followed with external factors such as ease of leaving and job alternative. Work life balance has been the most job dissatisfaction factor of all. Work life balance is one’s ability to balance between time, work demand and personal needs, family, Porter C, Bingham C, dan Simmonds D (2008: 388). Most informants discusses about work life balance (wlb). Out of 69%, the employees belong to gen Y who are susceptible to wlb problem. The difference of Gen Y from other generations is that they have never experienced economic crisis. They show “work hard, play hard” attitude as a strict distinction between their work and life after work. They prioritize an accurate working hour calculation. Some of them consider that work life balance is a difference between working hours and hours to spend life at home. They are really concerned about work life balance particularly when they are under stress at work. Owing to the fact the employees are dominated by gen Y with short-time working period, some work life related problems seem to have appeared within less than a year and this results turnover. They complain about full and irregular working hours. Some work is accidentaly and urgently delegated even on Saturdays and Sundays. The working hours remain too flexible with 12 average housr a day. Such condition above is also felt by newly wed couple who feel they have limited time for their family. Working in Trans7 has taken up most of their time. The informants implicitly suggested that they do not understand the character of television corporation which produces its own program, therefore it takes longer time to coordinate, hold meetings and other activities. Work life balance management in Trans7 indicate that maturity, commitment, and job responsibility of the employees have not shown a good rate as the direct superior has not successfully and effectively monitor and manage this problem so that it arises conflict. They become inconvenient and consider moving out or quitting a job, Robert Kreitner dan Angelo Kinicki (2010 : 155). Work life balance condition needs a leader who understands the situation and way of

communication as well as coordination with various levels of generation especially Gen Y. Work life balance is a concept for employees’ welfare amd work performance of the organization. The role of the management is required to set up precise strategy and tactic because work life balance may not meet people’s satisfaction. In additioin to work life balance, another factor of turnover is politcis in office. Result of the research shows that this political office some informants feel rises in less than two year period of working after they have received their position. They start having this feeling when their direct superior compares their work, and talks behind their back. This political office may be triggered by the management attitude playing favorite with particular groups of employees so that it creates deeper gap and further conflict amongst the groups. These groups are considered the young when they have their position and belong to Gen Y. They feel this condition inconvenient because they are so dynamic that bureaucracy boundaries hardly limit their action. This generation enjoy working in a team. Gen Y is relatively far more idealistic, their motives are driven by passion, and their activities are supported by modern ways. They are oepn to critiques and positive feedbacks, Smarty. et. al. (2013: 84). Thus, they are not accustomed to matters risking conflicts as they are suceptible with political office. They think that political office is negative and brings about restlessness and job dissastifaction contributing to resignation, Stephen Robbins (2003:523). The conflicts frequently appear when they have to work under pressure and meet lots of targets, Richard (2011: 483) though they are unavoidable. On the contrary, the political office can be considered either positive or negative in this era of competition nowadays, Ivancevich et. al., (2013:213). The leader’s role becomes crucial to prepare the team in order to confront with the constructive political office to promote individual and team work performance. Confronting skill will have to be prepared before a leader candidate is posted in a new position. This is useful for one to anticipate the political office more wisely and will not bear any loss to any parties, Husen S (2013: 31). Communication or socialization, a training on generation and personality differences becomes highly urgent to anticipate the emergence of the political office by avoiding subjective thought, Cheryl Cran (2014: 94). Furthermore, there are job dissatisfaction fators that include salary, career, and leader.

 

201

Salary has been one factor causing turnover, especially for the employees who have not worked completely for three years. Some informants think that the company has not compensated proper salary in return for work load. Yet, they recieve lower for the same load. They think that the corporation implements the same standard calculation for the given salary as the other television corporation though it demands for far different output. Other television corporations do not emphasize inhouse production. Some employees consider money as work motivation to determine turnover, Luthans (2006 :270). It can denied that the higher compensation rate, the higher employees’ work motivation and expectation eventhough a salary rise can only motivate until the following rise, Ramlall (2003 : 63-72). In reverse, when employees do not accept salary as expected, it will result turnover, Flinkman et. al. (2007:43). This explains that salary has been a crucial problem for employees to have worked for less thatn three years. They compare between work load and received salary. The management of the corporation has not yet reviewed completely to create effective compensation program in order to attract, maintain, motivate (Appelbaum, 2000), give reward (Hay, 2005) to employees and performance that support achievement and cope with the entire mission and strategy of the organization. Compensation factor has not seemingly counted for internal and external fairness. Internal fairness relates payment with work relative value so that the employees deserve proper salary. Internal fairness guarantees that a job with bigger responsibility deserves higher compensation than that of lower responsibility. This internal fairness will secure the process of setting up the fairness in the company. In terms of external fairness, there exists competitive factor. It means that the corporation has to pay as much as the other employees in other same level corporations receive so that they will earn effective compensation that involves performance, loyalty, skill, and responsibility. Wibowo (2013:134) argued that salary has been the very basic needs for every employees. A proper salary drives employees work motivation. The bigger salary employess receive, the less intention they have to move out since they will feel be more appreciated and secure for having their needs well fulfilled, Milkovich (2008:9). In addition to salary, career factor has been an issue. Based on the explanation of the informants, Trans7 has not provided a maximum career path development of specialists. Some of

them argue about the absence of dual career path that is a sequence of career in dual paths or is usually called technical career like cameraman, lightingman, audioman, make-up man, wardrobe. These paths are importance to accommodate specialist instead of general/structural career if they want to receive a special reward. The dual career path is provided for the specialists who also want to give their contribution to the company supported by their specialty. By having this path, their career is still open for structural position and can reach higher level at the same time. Dual career path is expected to retain talented professsionals who feel that they have no career opportunity in an organization so that they are under career plateu, a condition in which one remains stuck to a career position which is unlikely to further develop, or a stagnant condition, Dewi Hanggraeni (2012:112). The unavailabiliy of dual career path in the period result turnover, Bradley Hill (1992 : 11), in spite of the potentials one has as a specialist. This may not come to a surprise, Wibowo (2012:132-134), suggested that employees will feel dissatisfied if their performance is not acknowledged or appreciated. This is because the organization does not give employees an opportunity to promote their career and learning growth. In other words, dual career path has been an important consideration for the corporation to accommodate each employees’ preference to self development for designated position. Some informants conducting turnover is due to a bossy leader who easily angers for no reason, does not position himself as a work partner and creates a gap. A bossy leader can initially receive a result of the work as expected upon his employees, but in time, he will fail and gain lower productivity. On the other side, a leader with concern and understanding on his subordinates’ condition may confront several drawbacks at the beginning, but he will better succeed in a long-term period of time. The result of the research suggested that the leader insists on implementing old ways to solve new problems in an organization or company. They are not adaptive and flexibel yet. The leader fails to psychologically support his subordinates through his behavior and expression and to know their quality and ability. In fact, the leader is supposed to a key to triggering job satisfaction. Job satisfaction relies on the leade’s behavior toward his employees Colquit et. al. , (2010:100). Employees satisfaction will increase when the direct leader is an understanding and

 

202

friendly person, gives compliment for good performance, listens to employees’ opinions, and shows personal interest in their matters. To create an optimal productivity, a leader has to first be willing to show his supporting behavior, particularly when dealing with Gen Y. The generation demands for the opportunity to speak up, they consider all members of the company are a team, therefore they speak to the leader like a work partner or friend, Ethics Resources Center (2009:46). The causes of turnover is closely related to wlb, career path, perception, sacrifice, and attitude. In relation to work life balance, data of the research demonstrated that the majority of employees mov out becuase they want to have happiness for themselves and their family by giving the best quantity and quality of time. It similarly happens to problems of political office and leader when the principle is not in line with how the direct leader interacts and coordinates with the job. It is deepened by inconvenient condition due to the negative competition gap. In terms of career path, they will find a way to accomplish higher position they think it a pride. These values result from their self-dialogue to determine what is important and what is no. To meet personal life goals, the values become the principle step. When they are confident with their goals, the values give rise to motivation Ivancevich (2007:98). Motivation triggers them to do activities leading to designated problem solving Kreitner and Kinicki (2010:212). The following process is the emergence of perception. When employees confide their perception, they will be influenced to seek another job. The informants feeling the political office perceives that they will get stressed if they have to survive in the company. Unfortunately, this perception does not go with the one revealed by employees having problem with wlb, salary, and career which has not met their expectation. They believe that it would not be that simple to make a quick change upon the condition in order to be as expected. Their perception to work for a new company is the best, Kreitner dan Kinicki (2013:185). The following stage in individual internal factor after perception is sacrifice. In this stage, the informants to have made turnover have calculated the benefit and loss either material or non-material being owing to leaving for another job. What they earn in a new company unfortunately does not compare, Besich (2005:8). They are also well informed by their partner and social media about perceived alternative employment opportunities, the availability of alternative job outside the

organizational environment. This confides them to decide on their intention to move out. Price & Mueller ( 2006 : 255), Udechucke ( 2006: 18). Result of evaluation on values, motivation, perception, sacrifice decides them to make a turnover, in which it is a realization of the attitude, Schermerhorn, Hunt, Osborn, and UhlBein in Wibowo (2012:50). Result of the research shows that age and working period also affects turnover. Having joined a television corporation and felt inappropriateness with their intention, especially having no engagement due to short working period make them free to make up their mind and move out. The fact shows that they want to work for this corporation though the job or organization is not in line with what they expect. Turnover rate tends to get higher on young age employees because they always try new things on the job as noted by Flinkman (2009:41). Young employees dare to risk although the selected company is not in accordance with what is expected. They have no big responsibility, are always passionate to face challenges, and have no burden when resigning within less than one year working period. External factors which can cause turnover and should be the focus are ease of leaving and job alternative, Heneman dan Judge (2009:674). The development of industries like television, banking, construction and television insurance service has now vastly progressing so that it opens a number of offers and options in various positions as well allows employees to find a job easily. Trans7 as one national private television in Indonesia succeeded to create programs the viewers love therefore it increases sales, receives award from various national and international foundations. This corporation also has the highest leader with good quality. They frequently win a reward; the owner’s big name makes Trans7 popular. The external informants said that exemployees of Trans7 have good competence. It is not surprising that a lot of them were accepted to work in another company with tempting compensation without having to apply for the job. Trans7 has a good employer branding so that it eases informants to get a job and this condition results increasing rate of turnover in Trans7. III.THEORETICAL STUDY Meyer defines turnover intention in the journal written by Aondoaver Ucho, Terseer Mkavga, Ike E. Onyishi (2012: 378) as one’s desire to seek alternative job opportunity in other

 

203

organizations/companies. Turnover intention is a significant predictor for individuals to make turnover, Chang (2009 : 419). Long (2012:576) noted that turnover intention is defined as a prediction rate applied to employees certainly leaving their companies in short whilst turnover is defined as employees’ resignation in an organization Zheng et. al. (2010:18). Stone (2005: 819) emphasized that turnover is a process of individual shifting; employees leaving thier companies to be substituted by others. Robbins and Judge (2007:28), added that turnover is a permanent resignation, either voluntarily or not, of an organization. Price (2012:1-2), suggested that turnover is an individual lmovement to cross membership border of their current company. And Jacobs and Roodt (2012:4) noted that turnover is an individual mental decision of an employee to select, proceed, or leave a job for another company. A theory claimed that tunrover intention is caused by individual internal factors i.e. values, motivation, perception, sacrifice, and attitude. Values are considered the deepest foundation, reference and motivation driving motor, perception, sacrifice and individual attitude. Ivancevich (2012:140) stated that values are stable and evaluative confidence showing one’s preference on result and action in every situation. Values functions as moral guidance driving to motivation of decision and action. Schwartz’ theory of values as quoted by Kreitner and Kinicki (2013:154-157) emphasized that values have motivational properties and arises conflicts. Schwartz declared that values are related to attitude, job satisfaction, turnover, work performance and contra productive behavior. In addition to values, factors resulting turnover arise due to motivation. Luthans (2006:270) suggested that motivation is a process directing behavior or a drive realizing goals, whilst Robbins and Judge (2007:166) mentioned motivation as strength one has to voluntarily influence destination, intensity, as well as behavioral persistence. In relation to work sphere, Herpen, Praag and Cools (2003:23-25) in the journal of The Effect of Performance Measurement and Compensantion on Motivation stated that there is an empirical support in the chain amongst job dissatisfaction, the absence of motivation, and inclination to quit a job. In the meantime, the emergence of perception is also an individual internal factor taking part in the turnover. Kreitner dan Kinicki (2013:185) defines perception as a cognitive process allowing humans to interpret and

understand situation and condition surrounding them. Menurut Robbins (2010:170) stated that perception is a process of which individuals make use to manage and interpret their sensuous impression in the attempt to giving a meaning to an environment. Various impressions may emerge in relation to employees’ intention to leave for another company, including Perceived Alternative Employment Opportunities, a perception of looking for alternative job, Michael & Spector (2010:18). March dan Simon dalam Gerhart (2010:18) argued that the condition of workforce market affects the perception on employees’ intention to move out which eventually leads to turnover. When perception process occurs in individual internal factor, a consideration appears from the individuals called sacrifice-Sacrifice is one indicator of job embeddedness. Sacrifice is either a tangible or intangible good things to be given up by employees if they are willing to leave the organization, Besich (2005:8 ). The presence or the absence of sacrifice will suggest individuals to determine their attitude. Kreitner dan Kinicki (2013:160) defined the attitude as inclination learned to consistently respond in either a pleasing or unpleasing way toward a particular object. An attitude is an opinion, in correlation with reasoning consciously. Schermerhorn, Hunt, Osborn, and Uhl-Bein in Wibowo (2012:50-51) emphasized that an attitude is inclination to give either a positive or negative response to someone or a thing in an environment. Menurut Ivancevich (2013:87-90) argued that an attitude is a determinant of behavior because both relates to perception, personality, feeling, and motivation. Factors of employees’ turnover intention are strengthened by the presence of individual internal force, Gen Y employees, age, work period and status. Jan Kristesen (2008: 74) stated that Generation Y (Gen Y) is an official term originated from the U.S., when there were 78 millions babies born in between 1981 to 1998. The time was the initial period of computer revolution and the beginning of recalling awareness of the power of information. Social and technological awareness are also present in the era. This generation has high expectation and confidence to the future, enjoys dynamic and fast moving life. It can be said that infatuation on technology begins from this generation. Eileen Blass (2010:3) defined generation Y as follows: Generation Y also tend to be more self-confident, questioning of the status quo, very mobile, looking for self development, high-performing and accepting of change as a given. They also

 

204

demand work life balance, and are willing to reinvent themselves as needed to move on the next challenge. Eilenn remarked that generation Y needs self development, high work performance and accepts given changes. They also want a balance in working time used to experience the challenge. Meanwhile, Octa Media Djalal in Human Capital magazine edition #1 November-December 2012 submitted a research by Institute of Leadership & Management with Ashridge Business School on Generation Y. The research concluded that generation Y are looking forward to working for a company applying a good system and enabling them for self development, giving good return and having clear coaching process. Another individual internal factors are age and working period. Flinkman (2009: 41) argued that young age employees have higher turnover rate than the elder ones. They alos have btter opportunity to get new jobs. Mobley (2000:131) strengthened that employees’ turnover intention depends on short age and working period. Other factors resulting employess’ resignation emerge from the company’s internal factor itself. They are work life balance, political office, as well as disastifaction (salary, career, and leader). Porter C, Bingham C, and Simmonds D (2008:388) remarked that work life balance is one’s ability to balance work demand and with personal needs and family. Porter C, Bingham C, and Simmonds D study on work life balance (2008:387) pointed out that life balance and work have been significant factors to grab new opportunity working in another company or quitting job. Simard (2011:18) emphasized that Gen Y may not only need work life balance covering work and family life, but also consider it as an activity off the work life such as social and personal life. Work and family are a place where humans spend most of their time, and they are closely related to one’s life fulfillment. Political office is one internal factor causing turnover. Hoda Lacey (2003: 35) stated that the political office occurs because of potential resource in the work place, and combination of many elements dand protagonista or different behaviors. While John M. Ivancevich et. al. (2013:213) defined political behavior as a behavior lying off the normal system of power, defined to give benfit for individuals or sub units. Another factor of turnover is job dissatisfaction toward salary received. Colquitt, LePine, Wesson (2011:100) remarked that employees would like to have their salary as much as they expect. Similarly, Herpen et. al. (2002) suggested that a

fair, proper, clearly unmderstood by all employees and well controlled compensation system will build employees’ perception toward the organization where they work for and develop themselves. Salary is the most basic needs for every employee; therefore a proper salary can motivate employees’ performance. The bigger salary employess receive, the less intention they have to move out since they will feel be more appreciated and secure for having their needs well fulfilled. On the other side, the lower salary employees receive, the higher turnover intention it seems to be. Thus, the salary is worth giving in return for the employees sacrifice to the company. . Milkovich (2008:9). Furthermore, employees will meet satisfaction if their performance is well acknowledged or appreciated by having the organization offer opportunity for career improvement and learning growth Wibowo (2012:132-134). Career process and development must confide employees to be more transparent and secure. The company can develop its career model in accordance with company’s characteristic and needs. One of them is fulfilling the needs for Dual Career Path which is implemented when one has been on the level of career position which is unlikely to develop or under stagnant path, Dewi Hanggraeni (2012:112). And Bradley Hill (1992 : 11) noted that a company can provid Dual Career Path system to prevent turnover. In addition to salary and carrer path factor, leadership drives turnover intention. Kreitner dan Kinicki (2013:467) defined leadership as an individual process that affects others to gain collective goals. With a view to meeting company’s goal and employees’ satisfaction, Colquitt, LePine, Wesson, (2011:107-110) said that a leader shoud be an understanding and friendly person, give compliment for good work performance, listen employees’ opinions, and shows personal interest in employees matters. Leaders today experience challenges to become the leader of generation Y along with its significant growth. A survey from Ethics Resources Center (2009:46) demonstrates that 51% fo gen Y demands a leading figure who can be a coach/mentor for developing their ability and promoting their career. It is expected that this leader be a problem solver, inspirator, as well as director for gen Y. Also, this leader is expected to be confident and a friend to discuss about their privat of work problems. Above all, another supporting factor emerging is influenced by exernal environment

   

205

i.e. ease of leaving, job alterntive as noted by as Heneman dan Judge (2009:674). Ease of leaving is the easiness of leaving job due to profitable condition of workforce market so that this will ease employees seek a job whereas job alternative is the availabity of job offer for employees regardless of job application.

[4]

IV. CONCLUSION AND SUGGESTION A. Conclusion It can be concluded that the causes of voluntary turnover intention in the period of 20102012 were internal and external factors. Internal factors include worklife balance, political office, leader, career path, and salary. External factor includes the easiness of winning the opportunity in workforce market. The growth of the company and the employees’ learning to gain competence as well external condition grow incredibly fast eventhough it is not in balance with a recent proper pattern and strategy particularly in the managing the engagement young and potential employees who are mostly dominated by gen Y. Trans7 has not created a sustainable talent engagement to the maximum.

[6]

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

B. Suggestion Understand and learn character Gen Y well in every level of leadership. Build compensation strategy reflecting individual updated to be credible and effective. Provide dual career path system/ functional in addition to structural. Evaluate worklife balance and personal life policy Conduct a periodical review on exit interview and stay interview Conduct a periodical research and survey employee engagement, minimally once a year to derive new formula to retain to performers. Change leader’s mindset to become adaptive and able to change in line with the demand of the age.

[5]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

[12]

[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18]

[19]

REFERENCES [1]

[2] [3]

Aamodt, M. G. . Industrial or organisational psychology: An applied approach. BelmontCA: Wadsworth Cengage Learning. 2007 Appelbaum, S.H. and Mackenzie, 1996 : Compensation in the year 2000 : pay for performance. Besich, J. “Job Embeddedness Versus Traditional Models of Voluntary Turnover: A Test of Voluntary Turnover Prediction”. Published Disertation. University of North Texas: 2005

[20]

[21]

 

206

Bloomquist, Michael J. Dan Brian H. Kleiner, 2000, “ How to Reduce Theft and Turnover Through Better Hiring Methods”, Management Research News, Vol.23 No. 7/8 Bo Z, W,. Kaur, S., Zhi, T. A critical review of employee turnover model (1938-2009) and development in perspective of performance. African Journal of Business Management Vol. 4(19), 2010. Chang, Hsin-Yun. “Employee Turnover: A Novel Prediction Solution with Effect Feature Selection. Wseas Transactions on Information Science and Applications. 2009 Colquit, Wesson. Organizational Behavior Second Edition. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2011. Cran, Cheryl. 101 Tips Mengelola Generasi X, Y, & Zoomer, Jakarta: Kepustakaan Populer Gramedia, 2014. Daft, Richard L. Era Baru Manajemen : New Era of Management. Jakarta : Salemba Empat, 2010. Eileen Blass, Working Succesfully with Gen Y, Manpower Group. 2010 Ethics Resource Center. “Millenials, Gen-X, and Baby Boomers: Who’s Working at Your Company and What Do They Think About Ethics?”Suplemental Research Brief (National Business Ethics Survey) (Online). (http://ethics.org/files/u5/Gen-Diff.pdf, 2009. Flinkman, M. et. Al., Explaning young registered finnish nurses’ intention to leave the profesion : a quisitionnaire survey, International, Journal of Nursing Study. 2006 Gerhart, B. Voluntary Turnover and Alternative Job Opportunities. Journal of Applied Psycohology Vol 89. 1989. Gibson, et. al. Organisasi Edisi Kelima. Jakarta : Erlangga. 2010. Hanggraeni, Dewi. Manajemen Sumber Daya Manusia. Jakarta: Lembaga Penerbit FEUI. 2012. Hanza S, Raditya., Ingarianti T, Muji., Kematangan Karir dengan Intensi Turnover pada Karyawan, Malang 2015 Hay Group, 2005. Remuneration Management. The Hay Group Management Limited. All Right Reserved. Herpen M, v., Praag M, v., Cools, K. The Effects of Performance Mesasurement and Compensation on Motivation. Tinvergen Institure Discussion Paper vol 48(3). 2003. Hussain T. dan Asif, S. Is Employees’ Turnover Intention Driven by Organizational Commitment and Perceived Orgnizational Support. Journal of Quality and Technology Management. Volume VIII, Issue II, December 2012. Hwan Cho, Dong dan Jung Min Son, “Job Embeddedness and Turnover Intentions: An Empirical Investigation of Construction IT Industries”, 2012. Ikwukananne I. Udechukwu. The Relationship Beetween Job Satisfaction, Organizational Commitment, Intentions To Quit, and Perceived Alternative Employment in The Assesment to Employee Turnover : Study of Correctional

[22] [23] [24]

[25]

[26] [27]

[28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]

[35] [36] [37] [38] [39]

[40] [41] [42]

Officers. Nova Southeastern University, Ford Lauderdale, Florida. 2006. Heneman & Judge, Staffing Organization (New York: McGaw- Hill, 2009 Hill R, Bradley. Dual Career Paths: Recognizing the Technical Contributor. 1992 Hinkin, T. R., & Tracey, J. B. The cost of turnover: Putting a price on the learning curve [Electronic version]. The Cornell Hotel and Restaurant Administration Quarterly, 2000 Holtom, B. C., & O’Neill, B. S. Job embeddedness: A theoritical foundation for developing a comprehensive nurse retention plan. Marquette University, Wisconsin. 2004 Ivancevich J, M., Konopaske, R., Matteson M, T. Perilaku dan Manajemen Organisasi Jilid 1. Jakarta: Erlangga 2007. Jacobs, E. & Roodt, G. (2007). The development of a knowledge sharing construct to predict turnover intentions. Aslib Proceedings: New Information Perspectives, 59(3), 229-248. Kreitner R, dan Kinicki A. Organizational Behavior. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2010. Kristensen, Jan. Recruiting and Retaining Generation Y. Msc. International Business Economics, Aalborg University. 2008 Lacey, Hoda How to Resolve Conflict in the Workplace. Jakarta: PT Gramedia Pustaka Utama, 2003. Lincoln S, Y,. dan Guba E, G. Naturalistic Inquiry Beverly Hills,CA : Sage, 1985. Luthans, F. Perilaku Organisasi Edisi kesepuluh. Yogyakarta: Andi, 2006. ---------------, Organizational Behavior: An Evidance Based Approach. United States: McGraw-Hill, 2011. Martins, E., & Martins,R (2002), An Organizational Culture Model to Promote Creativity and Innovation. SA Journal of Industrial Psychology (Vol.4 No. 28) pp 58-65. Milkovich, George and John Bourdreau. Human Resource Management. 8th edition. 1997. Mobley W, H. Pergantian Karyawan: Sebab Akibat dan Pengendaliannya. Jakarta: PPM, 2011. Ongori, H.A., A Refiew of Literature On Employee Turnover. African Journal Business Management. Academic Journals. 2007. Porter C., Bingham C., dan Simmonds D., Exploring Human Resources Management. New York : MCGraw Hill. 2008. Ramlall, S., Managing Employee Retention as a Strategy for increasing organizational Competitiveness, Organizational Applications, Applied H.R.M Research, 2003. Robbins S, P dan Judge T, A. Perilaku Organisasi : Organizational Behavior. Jakarta: Salemba Empat, 2008. Robbins, Timothy A Judge, Organizational Behavior 12th (Canada : Pearson Education, 2007. Smarty Mukundan, Dhanya M, Dr. K P Saraswathyamma. A Study the Conflict

Resolution Styles of Generation Y Students in Indian Contex International Journal of Global Business, 2013 [43] Tariq M, Nareem., Ramzan M., Riaz A. The Impact of Employee Turnover on the Efficiency of the Organiztion. 2013. [44] Ucho, A., Mkavga, T., Oniyishi I, E. Job Satisfaction, Gender, Tenure, and Turnover Intentions among Civil Servants in Benue State. Interdisciplinary Journal of Contemporary Research in Business. March 2012. [45] Wibowo, Perilaku Dalam Organisasi. Jakarta : Rajagrafindo Persada, 2013.

 

207

PERCEPTUAL ABILITY AND COMMUNICATING MOTION INSIDE KINESTHETIC INTELLIGENCE OF DANCE COMPOSITION Dinny Devi Triana1 Universitas Negeri Jakarta [email protected]

Abstract. This study aims to determine the variables that have a correlation with kinesthetic intelligence of arranging dance. As we know, kinesthetic intelligence is indispensable for some psychomotor skills, in this case of dance or organize dance. Therefore, we need to know the difference of kinesthetic intelligence for dancers and choreographers to kinesthetic intelligence (choreographer). The method used by the correlational approach to determine the relationship between variables in perceiving and communicating motion. The population of college students majoring in Dance UNJ with purposive sampling so that kinesthetic intelligence can be measured properly.The results obtained by the magnitude of relationship between the ability to perceive motion with the ability to communicate movement in the amount of 3.85, while the ability to perceive motion is correlated good enough, just acquired -0.314 and correlation between the ability to communicate with the motion kinesthetic intelligence obtained -0.133. The ability to perceive motion associated with the cognitive level, it still seems to be less observed, because in general, choreographers pay more attention in movement explore skills. Thus by kinesthetic intelligence for arranging dance, the ability to perceive motion needed more than the ability to communicate motion or do explorations motion. Based on the results of this study, we can conclude that for students who will choose his profession as choreographers or choosing the final task in the form of dance work required ability to perceive motion. Similarly, for the subjects related to the dance arrangement (choreography), should be more emphasis on the ability to perceive motion, because these capabilities relate to the ability to think good also. Keywords: communicate & Communicating

208

I. INTRODUCTION

factors which have a strong relationship, then need to test against intelligence kinesthetic of all the two sides.

Perceive motion is the integration of physical function which coordinate between the brain as an information and control center, where the information is received and processed and then transferred by motor neurons into motion. The ability to perceive motion included into the cognitive expressed in the form of body language or movement. Indeed, the ability to perceive stimulation can be able to interpret, making it easier to make decisions when facing the environment. Excitatory nerve receives to observe a wide variety of motion in an effort to develop the ability perceptual and depends on the ability to perceive information. For a choreographer this ability is very needed, but often overlooked, because in general choreographer gives more focus on the exploration or the exploration of movement and are only concerned with purely aesthetic elements. Capabilities needed to organize a dance motion perception because when there is an information from the outside which is captured as a response to the motion, then the motion becomes wonderful, has the characters even has meaning. Based on the opinion of Rahantoknam (1968) in Dwiyantoro (2009: 65), which describes the process of information processing in the psychomotor consists of two processes, namely 1) the perception of the information provided, 2) the decision to perform motor skills (motor). Perception is the process of collecting, selecting, uniting, organizing and interpreting information. Dance is a communication tool that is expressed through movement, therefore the motion should have meaning and can be understood by appreciators. Thus,beside the ability to perceive motion, choreographer must be able to communicate in the form of dance in order to understand its meaning. According Baroody (1993) there are five aspects of communication, one of them related to the motion is a representation (representing) are: (a) a new form as a result of the translation of an issue, or idea, (b) the translation of a diagram or physical models into symbols motion or words. (c) translation of those words into a table, chart or graph. Representation can help explain a concept or idea, and make it easier to obtain problem-solving strategies. The ability to explain concepts or ideas are part of the demands of choreographers to create dance works. Choreographers and dancers have in common of its expression, that is in performing rhythmic and beautiful movements, as well as requiring intelligence which is almost the same in kinesthetic intelligence. As quoted Gardner Grow in a working paper that the conviction of a dancer has the ability to capture direct actions, feelings or the dynamic capabilities of others without the help of words or images (2011: 1). Stefanakis (2002: 2) explains in detail that: Indicators of kinesthetic intelligence can be seen from 1) how the body is used to express, resolve or produce a settlement of the problem, 2) how when someone must perform an action that must be solved through the motion, and 3) how to demonstrate skill development movement skills physically, Thus,there two kinds of method to distinguish the two professions, such as the ability to perceive motion and the ability to communicate motion. For that, need to know the

II. METHODS To predict how the variable influence the ability to perceive motion, and the ability to communicate motion, with intelligence kinesthetic, then any variables were tested with partial correlation of the dependent variable, so it will be known the most powerful relationships between these variables. Multiple correlation test was used when the ability to perceive motion, and ability to communicate motion jointly affect the kinesthetic intelligence The data was collected through non-test in the form of observations by providing observation sheet instruments. Instruments observation sheet consists of instruments: 1) kinesthetic intelligence, 2) perceive motion, 3) communicating motion. Sampling in this study used purposive sampling method. Samples were selected based on certain considerations, while consideration was taken based on the purpose of the study (Singarimbun, 1989: 168-169). Samples was taken from the population that has the properties and characteristics that match the specified criteria. The number of samples was set at 17 people, and taken by the population of students who have taken the course knowledge of dance composition and choreography II, totaling 26 people, so at about 80% of the number of population. The technique of taking the number of samples are taken by the formula (Bungin, 2005: 105):

N 2 Nof ( dsamples )  1 is sought n = number n

Description:

N = Total Population d = Value-precision (determined by 90% or a = 0.1) III.RESULT AND DISCUSSION Results of testing the hypothesis previously tested the prerequisite studies and it shows that each variable has a normal distribution and homogeneous data, with the normality test results: 1) Normality Test Error Estimated regression of Y on X1 obtained Lcount value = 0.0848, 2), Normality test Error Estimated regression of Y on X2 obtained Lcount value = 0.1092. Furthermore, Linearity Regression Testing and Regression Equations Significance Kinesthetic Intelligence (Y) over the ability to perceive motion (X1) the results of calculations for the preparation of the regression model between kinesthetic intelligence with the ability to perceive motion obtained regression constant a = 112.903 and the regression coefficients b1 = -0.278. Based on the calculation, then the form of variable kinesthetic intelligence relationship with the variable ability to perceive motion can be demonstrated by the regression model Y = 110.540 - 0,249X1. The regression model showed that for each increase or decrease one's ability to perceive motion unit score (X1) will be followed by an increase or decrease in kinesthetic intelligence scores (Y) equal to a constant -0.278 112.903. Thus, it can be

209

concluded that the regression model Y = 112.903-.278 X1 is not significant but has a linear relationship. Linearity Regression Significance Test and Regression Equations Kinesthetic Intelligence (Y) on Communicating Ability Motion (X2) the results of calculations for the preparation of the regression model between kinesthetic intelligence with the ability to communicate the motion obtained by regression constant a = 104.880 and b3 regression coefficient = -0.151 with the model equation Y = 104.880-.151. The regression model showed that for each increase or decrease of one unit communicates motion score (X2) will be followed by an increase or decrease in kinesthetic intelligence scores (Y) equal to a constant -0.151 at a constant 104.880. This means that the regression model is not significant. Thus, it can be concluded that the regression model X2 is not significant but has a linear relationship. Furthermore, the hypothesis testing results obtained: 1) Direct Positive Impact X1 to Y (the ability to perceive motion directly influence Kinesthetic Intelligence). The hypothesis that in the test were: H0: β31 ≤ 0, H1: β31> 0. Based on the data analysis, obtained by the path coefficients X1 to X3 (β31) at = -0.355 at a price t = -1.024 0. Based on the analysis of data, obtained by the path coefficients X1 to X2 (β21) of 0.678 at a price t = 3.570> 2.110 at significance level α = 0.05 and coefficient P-value less than 0.05 (0.003 0.05) the hypothesis was rejected, means there is no significant influence between variables simultaneously free of bound variable. Based on the analysis result, obtained that the value of F count of 22,087, while the value of the significance of the occasion was 0,000. The value of the significance is attained after consulted with the degree of freedom that is used by 0.05 found significant value smaller than the value of the degree of freedom (0,000 < 0.05), based on the testing, then the proposed hypothesis can be accepted, means free variable that consists of the completeness of product (X1), Store Atmosphere (X2) and Display (X3) simultaneously affect significantly to repurchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. Partial Influence Test (t) T test (partial test) is to know the influential (significant) or not of each product completeness variables (X1), Store Atmosphere (X2) and Display (X3) to re-purchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. Testing the hypothesis test done the statistics t test, with the steps as follows : If the value of the significance for the t count is smaller than the value of α (0.05) (significant < 0.05) the hypothesis accepted, means there is a significant influence among the variables free partially of bound variable. If the value of the significance for the t count greater than the value of α (0.05) (significant > 0.05) the hypothesis was rejected, means there is no significant influence between free variables partially against the variables bound Test results are Partially (t Value count) Coefficientsa Model Unstandar Standar t Sig. Correlations dized dized Coefficien Coeffici ts ents B Std. Beta Zer Part Part Erro oial r ord er 10, 1,8 5, ,00 (Constant) 412 77 54 0 7 The ,69 ,13 ,693 5, ,00 ,00 ,40 ,401 Complate 1 8 00 0 2 1 Product 5 1 (X1) Store ,55 ,15 ,557 3, ,00 ,07 ,27 ,275 Atmosphe 5 8 51 0 4 5 re (X2) 0 ,43 ,14 ,443 3, ,00 ,00 ,21 ,212 Display 8 6 00 1 4 2 (X3) 3 a. Dependent Variable: Pembelian Ulang (Y)

Influence Product completeness of re-purchase Results partially hypothesis shows that the completeness of variable product (X1) affect significantly to re-purchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. Then the value of the greatly enhanced Correlation Partial on the completeness of variable product (X1) of 0,275. It shows that the influence of the variables Completeness Product (X1) to re-purchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik of 0,275 Mode or 27.5% farmers%. So that proves that the completeness of product (X1) affect significantly to re-purchase (Y), which means the better the completeness of existing products and customers prefer to purchase products in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode than buying products in other shops. The results of the analysis of the data showed that the completeness of product (X1) have positive and significant impact on the re-purchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. This is due to the store my sister Trend Gresik Mode seeks to meet the needs of customers and consumers feel the needs that they want met. According to Kotler and

Table 6. Partial Influence Test (t). Interpretation Results the influence of the completeness of the product, Store Atmosphere and Display to re-purchase based on

271

Keller (2009:72) define the diversity of products is the collection of all products and goods that offer specific sellers to buyers. According to Tjiptono (2005:73) in the Fure (2013:275) diversity products is product availability/diversity of products with the appropriate number and in a very precise location. The existence of the diversity of products can provide the freedom for the consumer to determine the choice of products to be purchased as an effort to fulfill the needs and desires. Therefore, the existence of diverse product on a store will be able to affect or provide customer satisfaction on the buyer and can cause re-purchase.

Display Influence to re-purchase Based on the testing of the hypothesis that the coefficient value of the Display variable (X3), obtained the value of t count 3,003 with the level of the significance of 0.001. Thus partially Display variable (X3) affect significantly to repurchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. The Display variable (X3) become variables the third stage of its influence to re-purchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. Then the value of the greatly enhanced Correlation Partial on the Display variable (X3) of 0,212. It shows that the influence of the Display variable (X3) to repurchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik of 0,212 Mode or 5,5 billions%. The display has a significant impact on the purchase decision, where most influence in May from the influence of the dimensions of modularity, this is due to the fact that from the perspective of marketer of a store or travel can have a number of securities is expected to customers. One of them is to help shape the direction and duration of consumer attention, so that increase the possibility of purchase for products that may be overlooked the atmosphere of the store can also bring certain emotional reactions from consumers. In other perspectives that modularity has a function to adjust the placement of the display boards so that customers or visitors who come to the store my sister Trend Gresik Mode will directly see how the display styling products that are marketed by the store my sister Trend Gresik Mode and can feel the comfort and finally do pembeilan. Then with the existence of the match between the display boards with products that are displayed cause the impression of its own for consumers. According to Willian J. Schultz is quoted in the book Buchari Alma (2009:189) define display the effort to encourage the attention and consumer interest in the store or goods and encourage the desire to buy through the attraction of vision direct visual appeal). According to Dian and Jony (2012:145) display is one of the media used the company to attract customers to buy a product. With the display interesting, companies can room products or introduce its products to consumers. Display (styling goods) very important role to attract buyers that only limited to view product, impact is expected from the display is the existence of the value of purchase (payment) against corporate profit or an increase in the number of transactions periodically (Hefry, 2012:19).

Influence Store Atmosphere to re-purchase Based on testing the hypothesis that variable value Coefficient Store Atmosphere (X2), obtained the value of t count 3.510 poin with the level of the significance of 0,000. Thus partially variables Store the Atmosphere (X2) affect significantly to re-purchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. Then the value of the greatly enhanced Correlation Partial on the variables Store the Atmosphere (X2) of 0,401. It shows that the influence of the variables Store the Atmosphere (X2) to re-purchase (Y) in the Store my sister Trend Gresik of 0,401 Mode or 40.1%. Store the atmosphere is one of the important elements that there is a factor of the atmosphere of the store, because by doing Store atmosphere that is true, a retail entrepreneurs get the expected consumer behavior. Store the atmosphere inviting entry or cause customers away from the store when customers see the atmosphere in the store through the window or the entrance. Styling shop that both will be able to invite consumers to betah around longer and spend more money. Therefore a retail entrepreneurs should be able to do the styling store with good and right so that the purpose of consumers reached. Gilbert in Jodie Foster (2008:61) define store atmosphere is a combination of physical messages that have been planned, store atmosphere can be described as the changes to the environmental planning purchases produce special emotional effect that can cause the purchase action. According to Purwaningsih (2011) In Made (2014:2) store atmosphere is a physical characteristics that is very important for each retail business, this role as the creation of comfortable atmosphere in accordance with the desires of consumers and make the customers satisfied and want to linger long in the store. Store the atmosphere is not only able to provide a pleasant purchasing environment atmosphere only, but can also give added value to the product sold. In addition, store atmosphere will also determine the image of the store itself. The image of a good shop can ensure the survival of the company to survive against the competition in the form the loyal customers (Nofiawati, 2014:56). One of the powerful weapons to win the game in the business is Store atmosphere. By creating Store the atmosphere is good and comfortable, will stimulate consumers to make purchases in the store. Store the atmosphere that is owned by the Sister Shop Mode Trend Gresik interesting and influential in the decision to repurchase consumer, which can be seen from the results of the existence of a positive and significant impact between the Store atmosphere to re-purchase.

IV RESULT AND DISCUSSIONS

According to Nurhayati in Maruto (2015:2,130), repurchase interest is the desire and consumer action to repurchase a product due to the presence of customer satisfaction is accepted as cool of a product. The brand which is inherent in the heart of the customer will cause the customer to continue the purchase or re-purchase. While Sari (2009:4) stated, "Consumers formed an assessment of the purchase of the diet will have a tendency to buy from the same manufacturer. The desire to buy the as a result of this satisfaction is the desire to repeat the experience of the good and avoid the bad experience. The completeness of the product or product variations is not a new thing in the world of marketing, where this strategy many used by practitioners of marketing

272

practitioners in the activity of the launch of its products. According to Kotler (2009:72), product variations as separate experts in a brand or product line can be differentiated based on the size of the price, appearance or characteristics. While according to Tjiptono (2008:97), the item is a special unit in a brand or product line can be differentiated based on the size of the price, appearance or other attributes. Usually called also stockkeeping units or product variations. According to Raharjani (in Mulyani, 2009:104) product diversity is the completeness of goods sold and the availability of goods. Each company has its own way of styling store atmosphere. This is done in order to create convenience for the consumer. Store the atmosphere can be a characteristic of that differentiates the company to the other. In addition, any store must have innovations to design his shop with the best possible so that have a difference with the other store. Because this will make the display of the store better compared with other store. If a store wants to reach the target market, let the management of the store can determine how the display form store atmosphere, in order to attract consumers who became the goal. Store the atmosphere can help retailers and provides information about the services provided and goods that offered. Store the atmosphere is the other elements in the warehouse store weapons. In addition store the atmosphere is a physical characteristics that is very important for each retail business, this role as the creation of comfortable atmosphere in accordance with the desires of consumers and make consumers want to linger long in the store and not directly stimulate consumers to purchase (Purwaningsih:2011) In Made (2014:2), while according to Meldarianda (2010:103) "the atmosphere of the store (store atmosphere) is a combination of physical karateristik shops such as architecture, layout, lighting, displaying, color temperature, music, flavors thoroughly will create the image in the minds of consumers". According to Kusumowidagdo (2010:19) variables store the atmosphere is measured with the indicator as follows: design shop which attract, lighting lamps in the appropriate store, air quality in the store, decoration in the store, the strains of the soft music in the store, texture shop that delicious viewed, flavors refreshing shops, cleanliness pool store, fitness floor space alocation with design store, product display are interesting. Normal Display is displaying products only with the normal business only, e.g. with how to hang the products with hanger. On the contrary, special display is displaying products with a special business, namely with the number of goods that enough and placed in certain places that strategic and prominent. This activity is usually accompanied by an incentive to store. Display or more known with styling products is one of the media used the company to attract customers to buy a product. With the display that attracts companies can room products or introduce its products to consumers. According to According To Willian J. Schultz is quoted in the book Buchari Alma (2009:189) define display the effort to encourage the attention and consumer interest in the store or goods and encourage the desire to buy through the attraction of vision direct visual appeal). While the display definition according to Jodie Foster (2008:72) is the desire to buy something that is not driven by a person but driven by the attraction, or by vision or by other feelings.

Usually the consumer will view and select, so one way to sell a product is to let the candidate who will buy the product will see, grope, taste, riding, etc. IV. CONCLUSIONS Based on research about the influence of the completeness of the product, store atmosphere and display against the purchase of the product in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode, then obtained the conclusion as follows : The completeness of the product, Store Atmosphere (the atmosphere of the store) and Display (styling product) simultaneously affect significantly to re-purchase products in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. This shows that the better the influence of the completeness of the product, Store Atmosphere and Display, then interest re-purchase products in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode will also high. The results of the test the hypothesis that partially can be concluded that the completeness of the product, Store Atmosphere (the atmosphere of the store) and Display (styling product) partially significant effect against the purchase of the product in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. Individually that the completeness of the product, Store Atmosphere (the atmosphere of the store) and Display (styling products that is done by the management, then will affect the re-purchase consumers in the Store my sister Trend Gresik Mode. REFERENCES [1]

Aaker, David, 1991, Managing Brand Equity; Capitalizing on the Value of Brand Name, Free Press, New York. [2] Albertus, Ferry Rostya Adi and Yoestini. 2012. Analysis of the influence of the price of the product quality and service quality to Customer Satisfaction Case Study at Waroeng Special Sambal Branches Lampersari Semarang. Diponegoro Business Review. www:Eprints.Undip.Ac. /Journal Albertus Ferry Rostya Adi. Accessed on May 18 2015. This 1. [3] Adi, R. P. 2013. The influence of product quality and Fairness price of loyalty with consumer satisfaction as the Intervening variable. Management Analysis Journal 2 (1) (2013). ISSN 2252-6552 [4] Andriani Kusumawati. 2011 & Buchari Alma 2009, Analysis of the influence of Experiential Marketing To Customer Satisfaction and Customer Loyalty: Cases Hypermart Malang Town Square (MATOS). An Academy Marketing Management Modem. Vol. 3 No.1 January - June 2011. ISSN 2085-0972 [5] Arikunto, Suharsimi. 2010. Research procedure a practical approach. Jakarta : Renika Copyright Notice [6] Dann and Dann, Competitive Marketing Strategy (Australia: Pearson Prentice Hall. 2007),p.80 [7] Dantes, Nyoman. 2012. Research Method. Yogyakarta : CV. Andi Offset. [8] David, Aaker, 1991, Managing Brand Equity; Capitalizing on the value of the Brand Name, Free Press, New York. [9] David L.Kurtz, Principle of Contemporary Marketing, 14th Edition (China: South Western: 2010),p.316 [10] Doyle, Peter. 1998. Marketing management (4th ed.). New York: Mc Graw Hill [11] Edwards, D. 2002. Delight: Introduction to a New Metric and New Way of thinking, Fandy Tjiptono, 1997. Marketing strategy. The second edition, ANDI, Yogyakarta.

273

[12] Fandy Tjiptono, 2001, marketing strategy, Edition 1, Publisher Andi, Yogyakarta. [13] Fandy Tjiptono, 2004, marketing strategy, Edition 2, Publisher Andi, Yogyakarta. [14] Fandy Tjiptono and Gregorius Chandra. 2011.Service, Quality and Satisfaction. Edition 3. Yogyakarta: Publisher Andi [15] Finn, Adam. 2011. Customer Delight: Distinct Construct or Zone of Nonlinear Response to Customer Satisfaction?. The Journal of Service Research 15(1). [16] Francis Buttle, Customer Relationship Management: Concept and Tools(Malang: Bayumedia Publishing. 2007),p.29 [17] Gentile, C., Spiller, N., & Noci, G. (2007). How to sustain the Customer Experience: An Overview of experience Components screened Co-create Value With the Customer. European Management Journal, 25(5), pp. 395-410. [18] Gary Armstrong and Phillip Kotler, Marketing: An Introduction, Ninth Edition(USA : Pearson Prentice Hall. 2009),p.8 [19] Ghozali, priests. 2013, Multivariate Analysis Application with IMB Program SPSS 21, Dipenogoro University Publishers Agency, Semarang [20] Handi Irawan D. 2008 & Hefry, 2012., Smarter Marketing Moves : Build Superiority through Information and Communication Product, published by PT Elex Media Komputindo, Gramedia Group, Jakarta [21] Hawkins,Consumer Behavior: Building Marketing Strategy, Eleventh Edition(New York: McGraw-Hill Companies Inc. 2010),p.23 [22] Hermawan Kertajaya, 2004, Hermawan Kertajaya on Marketing Mixed, Jakarta. Gramedia Pustaka [23] Hal Holbrook MB, EC Hirschman - Journal of consumer research, 1982 - jcr.oxfordjournals.org [24] Horwitz, F.M. and Neville, M.A. 1996, "Organization Design for Service Excellence: A Review of The Literature", Human Resource Management, Vol. 35 No. 4, pp. 471 -92 [25] J. Suprapto, 2006 & Jodie Foster 2008 "Metode riset in Marketing". Jakarta: Rineka Copyright. [26] Keiningham, L. et al. 2004. The Role of Customer Delight in achieving Loyalty, Online), [27] Keller Kevin Lane. 1998, Strategic Brand Management : Building, Measuring and Managing Brand Equity, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. [28] Keller, L. 1993. How to manage the brand equity. Jakarta: Gramedia Pustaka [29] Hermawan Kertajaya. 2003, "Empathy Has Significant Contribution In Service Case Studies on Spa Martha Tilaar". An Academy Martha Tilaar Group, it.27-28. [30] Koo, D. M. 2003. Inter-participating undp store images, store satisfaction and store loyalty among the Korea discount retail patrons. Asia Pacific Journal of Marketing and Logistics, 15 (4). [31] Kotler, Phillip and Gary Armstrong took. 2001. The principles of Marketing, vol. 2, 8th edition, Erlangga Publisher, Jakarta. [32] Kotler, Philip, and Garry Armstrong took, 2005, the basics of Marketing, Prenhallindo, Jakarta. [33] Kustini.2007, Applying Experiental Marketing. The Journal of Business and Economic Research Vol 7,No.2.UPN Veteran "" East Java. [34] Kwong, Kenneth, K., and Yau, Oliver, H.M. 2002. "The Conceptualization of Customer Delight: a Research Framework". Asian Pacific Management Review 7 (2), 255266. [35] Lovelock, Christoper and Jochen writz. 2007. Service Marketing. New Jersey. USA: Pearson

[36] Lovelock, Christoper and Jochen writz. 2011. Service Marketing. New Jersey. USA: Pearson [37] Mario lawyer Christo Pesoth. 2015. The influence of product quality, Packaging and Brand Image of Customer Oriented On Dunhill tobacco company in the city of Manado. EMBA Journal Vol.3 No.3 Sept. 2015, this.1101-1112. ISSN 230311 [38] Martilla and James, J.C., (1977), Importance-Performance Analysis. The Journal of Marketing 41, 13-17 [39] Mascarenhas, A. et al. 2004. Customer Value-Chain Involvement for Co¬creating Customer Delight. The Journal of Consumer Marketing 21(7): 486-496 [40] Matthias Gouthier Andreas Giese and Christopher Bartl. 2012. Service excellence models: a critical discussions and comparison. Marketing Department, EBS Business School, Oestrich-Winkel, Germany [41] Nguyen, N., & as recorded, G. 2001 & Nofiawati, 2014, Image and reputation of higher education institutions in students' retention decisions. The Journal of Educational Management, 15 (6). [42] Ferrell O.C and Michael D. Hartline, Marketing Management Strategies, Fifth Edition (Canada: South Western, 2011),p.377 [43] Oliver Richard L., Roland T. Rust, Sajeev Varki, Customer delight: it began under, findings, and managerial insight Original Research Article Journal of Retailing, Volume 73, Issue 3, Autumn 1997, Pages 311-336. [44] Paul J. Peter and Jerry C. Olson, Consumer Behavior and Marketing Strategy, Ninth Edition (New York: McGraw-Hill Companies. 2010),p.387 Ibid,p. 387 [45] Phillip Kotler and Gary Armstrong, of the Principles of Marketing, editions of the twelve, Volumes1 (Jakarta: Erlangga Publisher, 2008),p.16 [46] Phillip Kotler, et al. Marketing Management :s Asian perspective, Fifth Edition (Jurong: Pearson Education South Asia. 2009),p.136 [47] Philip Kotler. 2008. The principles of marketing. The Twelve edition, Jakarta: Prenhallinda. [48] Philip Kotler and Keller K, Kevin. 2008. Marketing Management (Twelve Edition). The third print. Jakarta: PT. The Index. [49] Purwaningsih (2011) & Made (2014:2) customer loyalty in the hotel industry: the role of customer satisfaction and image", International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, Vol. 12 Iss: 6, pp.346 - 351 [50] Reliable,Nehemiah ( 2010). Analysis of the influence of the Experiental Marketing On Customer Loyalty ( Case Study : "Waroeng Special Sambal cab.Sompok -Semarang").bachelor theses S1 Program Faculty Of Economics of Diponegoro University [51] Scshmitt, Bernd H, 1999, Experiential Marketing: How To Get Consumers To Sense, Be, Think Act and relate to Your Company and Brands. New York : The Free Press [52] Schmitt, Bernd H, 2003, Experiential Marketing: How To Get Consumers To Sense, Be, Think Act and relate to Your Company and Brands. New York : The Free Press [53] Sumadi, Euis Soliha. 2015. The Effect of the Bank Image And Trust On Loyality Mediated By Customer Satisfaction. Management Dynamics Journal Vol. 6 No. 2, 2015, pp: 121132. ISSN 2337-5434 [54] Sudjana. 2005. The statistics method. Bandung : Tarsito [55] Sudjana. 1989. The statistics method. Print the 5. Bandung. [56] Sugiyono. 2009. Qualitative and quantitative research method. Alfabeta. Bandung. [57] Sugiyono. 2010. Business research method. The fifteenth print. Alfabeta. Bandung. [58] Sugiyono. 2011. Business research method. Bandung: Alfabeta.

274

[59] Sugiyono. 2012. The quantitative research method , qualitative research and R n D Bandung: Alfabeta.

[60] Tjiptono, 2005, Qualitative and quantitative research method. Jogyakarta.

275

ISLAMIC MICRO FINANCE: FIGHTING MONEYLENDERS (A Capital Strengthening Efforts for Traditional Market Traders) Sabirin1), Jeremia Persadanta2) 1)

Universitas Padjadjaran, Bandung, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

Universitas Padjadjaran, Bandung, Indonesia E-mail:[email protected]

Abstract. Capitalization in business is very important because if we don’t have enough capital on our business, it can limiting our business movement, especially for traditional market traders, limitation of capital can hold up the opportunity to gain the optimal revenues to maintain the viability of their business. However because some factors, like complicated administration if they have to borrowing money from a bank or micro financial institutions, whether is principled convensional or sharia, at the end of this condition made traders from traditional market trapped in informal financial institution, that is rentenir (loan sharks) or also known as moneylenders. Inovation is needed to developing mikcro sharia financial institution to a primary source of capital for traders at traditional market so they will be spared from bondage moneylenders who would trouble them in the future. Apart being an easy primary source for their capital, the participants will also get mentoring and empowerment program, so that their business continuity can be assured. This paper discusses the development model of "Islamic microfinance institutions" Islamic Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders). The method that used in thin research is explorative descriptive by analyzing the right strategy to developing micro sharia financial institution in Indonesia. Islamic Micro Finance : Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) is a commercial institution that also prioritizes social functions. Islamic Micro Finace : Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) is providing financing acitvity to the participants to start a business with the more easy requirements and provide mentoring and empowerment program, so that business continuity can be guaranteed and traders would be free from the practice of moneylenders (Loan Sharks). Keywords: Capital, Traditional Market Traders, Moneylenders, Micro Sharia Financial Institutions Traditional market is a reflection of populist economic therefore the traders in traditional market should be given the easier way to access the capitalization source. Economic actors in traditional markets especially the traders in traditional markets are the driver of Indonesia economic wheel from informal sector. The existence of them is depended on sources of capital that can support the fluency in providing their goods. However, limited access for traditional market traders to get capital financing with low interest, has became a factor for declining of the number of traditional market in Indonesia, apart from other factors such as the negative image of traditional markets among the public, poor market conditions, incomplete facilities, the quality of products that don’t meet the standards, and uncomfortable environments. Traditional market traders are a safety net for the national economy. Even though, in fact traders in traditional market are often faced with the difficulty to access capital from formal financial institutions, such as bank and others. The government has attempted to overcome this condition, with issuing a financing type called Kredit Usaha Rakyat (KUR). However, due to several factors, such as the complexity of the administration, make traders is traditional market prefer to go to informal financial institutions, which are actually more expensive than formal financial institutions (Hidayati, 2014). Informal financial institutions that are currently easily found in traditional markets are loan sharks or moneylenders.

I. INTRODUCTION 1.1. Background Research The existence of Financial Institutions is needed to support the capital in real sector, which is one of them is in the form of bank either in the form conventional or sharia principal. But the concept of banking itself has not been able to fully the micro, small, medium enterprises (UMKM) like the traditional market traders or also known as populist economic actors. The inability of Banks to touch this sector causing the traditional market traders having shortage of capital resources. Capitalization is important in business because the lack of capital can limit the space for business activities, especially for traders in traditional markets, limited capital may lead them to difficulties to achieve the optimal levels of income in order to maintain the viability of their business. Unfulfilled capital requirements causing reduction of traditional markets in Indonesia. In 2007, the number of traditional markets in Indonesia amounted to 13.550 markets. But in 2009 and 2011 there is a decrease of the number of traditional markets, where in 2009 the number of existing traditional market amounted to 13,450 and in 2011 amounted to 9.950. In 2012, according to trade ministry survey results there is an increase the number of markets, although it’s not significantly, the number of traditional market in Indonesia become 9.559. Naturally this situation has led to economic imbalance in market and then creating new unemployment’s in Indonesia.

276

An economist from the University of Medan, M Ishak, said, high public demand for funds or financing especially for working capital, making the loan sharks will still grow rapidly throughout 2014. Besides, it’s easier to get funds as well as administrative processes are easier when compared to apply for financing in banking. Moneylenders in the view of Indonesian’s society have a negative stigma, because it’s contains elements of interest or riba. That statement similar to that delivered by Plato (427-347 SM) in his book “Laws” that curse interest and see it as despotic practice. In Islam, financial transaction with rentier system is one of the transactions that are forbidden. Prohibition of this transaction have been clearly be delivered by Allah in Quran in Al-Quran surat Ali-Imran verse 130 which mean : O people who believe! You shall not eat Riba with a double and fear Allah and that you may prosper. Apart from all the negative stigmas, moneylenders’ services are still needed by the society, especially for small traders for running their business. The advantages to borrow some money from moneylenders are without complicated requirements, fast to withdrawing the funds, and no need for a guarantee in any forms. The advantages that offered by moneylenders make them still growing rapidly. And succeed making others financial institutions existences like Banks that owned by government or by public, including Sharia Bank, micro financial institutions can’t completely able to eliminate the existence of riba transactions in Indonesia. Moneylenders often make the lower middle class of society as their target, because these people are the most vulnerable groups due to lack of educations, and have difficulty to have accessibility in banking institutions or other formal financial institutions, that makes them easily fooled by moneylenders. Its looks like the moneylenders are helping them but in fact they ensnare them. As a result, their lives have not changed, as if trying but no increase in prosperity. That’s why the practice of moneylenders should be resisted. Moneylenders practice as the solution of capital sources problem is still accepted in traditional market, that’s why this problem should be a concern of all parties. Where the system of moneylenders is perceived disadvantages but still used, which is mean that moneylenders system have an unique thing that make this kind of transaction still accepted. But actually capital financing through the services of moneylenders only provides a solution for the short term only. Capital is easy to obtain, but in the long term traders in traditional market will be faced with high interest of the loan and will ensnare their financial condition. In many places traders were trying to make moneylenders as their capital sources, but it actually worsens their condition. For example the traditional market traders in Tangerang, the high interest from their loans actually makes traders in this market continue to lose money. In other Area, in Sudimoro sub region adjacent with Trengalek region, market in in Bandar sub region dan Tegalombo adjacent with Pongoro and market in Donorojo sub region that adjacent with Mid Java Province, there lot of the practice of moneylenders masquerading as savings and loan cooperatives (KSP), interest charge at those areas is very high with average about 10%, and if the traders and if the traders late in paying they will be fined.

Of course this problem can’t be allowed, solution to this problem is absolutely necessary. As a country with a Muslim majority population, it should be sharia-based microfinance institutions to show their strength, and became the answer to every problem of capital sources issues, so that bad habits of the traders in traditional market to asking for help from moneylenders can be reduced then disappear by itself.On this basis it is necessary to do further analysis, in order to then create a solution in the form of a new system in accordance with Islamic principles and so then this solution can be replacing moneylenders system. The new concept is also expected to make Islamic microfinance institutions established with the optimal performance as an effort to create sustainable financial sources for its participants. The mindset that says that it is easier to deal with loan sharks or other types must be changed. Islamic microfinance institutions should be able to encourage and support the micro, small and medium enterprises, in this case, especially the traders in traditional markets so that they remain able to work, and productive. And for Islamic microfinance institutions themselves they expected to improve their competitiveness and maintain their existence as an Islamic microfinance institution at the forefront. 1.2. Formulation of the problem Nowadays, Islamic microfinance institutions in Indonesia continue to grow, this along by the establishment of other supporting policies. But the development of Islamic microfinance institutions have not been able to surpass the development of other Islamic non-bank financial industry such as sharia insurance, the Islamic capital market, sukuk and Islamic mutual funds. Therefore, it needs a new breakthrough in managing Islamic microfinance institutions to make it more productive and capable of extending the range of beneficiaries of funds that will be rolled out. Accordance with the phenomenon described above, it is very important for Islamic microfinance institutions to increase their scope, by doing such things as ease the complexity of administration, which is still an obstacle. Islamic microfinance institutions have to support the micro, small, and medium enterprises, especially for traditional market traders who need a source of capital to carry out their trade or business activities. A similar program has previously been carried out by government of Bandung, which provides loans to the needy without interest that is “Fasilitas Kredit Melati” the concept of this facility is a banking product, and in practice implemented PD. BPR Kota Bandung. However, the advantages are retained by the management body of Islamic Micro Finance : MELATI (Fighting Moneylenders) because it is based on sharia principles. The problems in this research are: How is the work patterns of Islamic Cooperation Agency MELATI (Fighting Moneylenders) based on increased ease of access to capital for participants in an effort to help traders in traditional markets in order to avoid the practice of moneylenders? 1.3. Research purposes The potential of Islamic microfinance institutions and traditional markets in Indonesia are very large, and must be utilized optimally, innovation in managing it becomes a

277

necessity. One innovation in Islamic microfinance institutions in order to create a climate of healthy capital resources for traditional market traders is through the governing body of Islamic microfinance institutions based on increased ease of access to capital for traditional traders to avoid the practice of moneylenders. The purpose of this research is: To determine the operational concept of Islamic microfinance institutions in this case that is micro finance Melati as a source of capital for traders in traditional market.

traditional traders as a strategic economic group should be oriented towards empowerment, so that to form independent and strong local economic actors through Microfinance Institutions especially Islamic Micro Finance Institutions. Strategies to strengthen the capital of traditional market traders must be based on an understanding of the characteristics and weaknesses attached to it. One alternative to strengthen the position of traditional market traders is by encouraging partnerships. Partnership is expected to generate added value (economic and social) that will strengthen the structure of the national economy. In order to create these partnerships, Islamic microfinance institutions have to participate actively to strengthening the traditional market traders by becoming their capital source. In this context, the Islamic microfinance institutions besides providing an easy access to financing, they can also facilitate traditional market trades by providing market information, encouraging strategic alliances, and provide assistance for managing traditional market traders business. Expectations from those things are no more traders in traditional expecting capital sources from moneylenders which is just able to resolve their problem for short term, and then prosperity that they dreamed not will go real. At the end this step expected to able to narrow the space from moneylenders and by the time this moneylenders system will disappear by itself. Islamic Micro Finance Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) is an innovation that tries to offer the Islamic Micro Finance institution in Indonesia. So far, we know that in general Islamic microfinance institutions have an activity to become a source of capital in society, but unfortunately there is no added value for this activity, Islamic microfinance institutions also still have one problem that is Islamic microfinance institutions have not been able to reach the needs of society so that there are still people, especially traders in traditional markets who choose moneylenders as their capital sources. Through Islamic Micro Finance Melati (Fighting Moneylenders), participants or clients not only gain capital resources but also get other facilities such as empowerment and assistance in starting and running their businesses, in this case the traders in traditional markets. This move is a positive acceleration of the operational principle of Islamic Micro Finance, collecting funds and distributes benefits. Islamic Microfinance Organization Structure: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders)

II.

METHODO LOGY The method that used in this research using a descriptive exploratory approach to analyze the appropriate strategy in the management of Islamic microfinance institutions that address specifically for traders in traditional markets in Indonesia. Researchers are a key instrument, data collection is done by triangulation (combined), data analysis is inductive, and research results further emphasize the significance rather than a generalization. Data were analyzed not for accept or reject the hypothesis (if any). In this study the facts analyzed by relating, comparing, developing the thoughts so that it will be resulting a general conclusion that can apply more generally in a particular scientific field. This research use secondary data in the form of approach to the study of literature. The approach to theories or concepts was done by according it to several sources, such as books, scientific journals, online news portals and search on-line literature. All existing ideas are combined in one framework arrangement. Limitations of this research are focused on the development and innovations of Islamic microfinance institutions as a source of capital for traders in traditional markets to make have an easy access to capital sources. Development and innovation is limited to the operational management of Islamic microfinance institutions either in the accumulation (funding) and the distribution of funds (lending). This research is compiled to explore the phenomenon that occurs by combining the concept and operational management institution Islamic microfinance institutions, as institution or institution in the commercial and socialreligious. In analyzing the problem, we first do the analysis of the problems and then associate the problems that occur in the field and find its solution by using the schema and the right concept. In order to obtain scientific answers, this research done by considering several stages that’s are presentation of evidence or facts (skeptic), pay attention to relevant issues (analytic), and objectively weighing the stage for logical thinking (criticism).

DPS

Manager / Head of

III. DISCUSSION 4.1. Islamic Micro Finance : Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) The existence of micro, small, and medium enterprises, especially traders in traditional markets is a form of economic life for most people in Indonesia. This position has put traditional market traders as the main thing to get attention, especially in terms of capital. The development process of traditional market traders are manifestations of economic development that becomes very important. The development efforts and strengthening of the potential of

Operations Divition / Services

Acco untin g

Investa tion Divisio

Empowerm ent

In management of Islamic Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) have at least four divisions under the manager or head of that division, that is operating division, accounting division, division of investment and empowerment division. Each division has an important role

278

in developing Islamic Microfinance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders). The main task of operating and service divisions is looking for participants in this case traders in traditional markets. From the search, the acceptance of participants will create ready funds reserved as savings for participants and that funds that will be rolled out to participants itself as a source for capital for them. Capital not only given to the participants only, who are not participants, will be served if they apply for capital sources as well. Furthermore, the accounting division responsible for managing the financial of institution, this arrangement is implemented through the separation of each fund accounts. The separation is done based on the characteristics of each account, so it will make a different accounting treatment. Investment division has a function to perform fund development that come sourced from participant’s contributions in the form of direct contribution or other, of course the basis for this division is a healthy investment, low risk to fail, and in accordance with Islamic principles, so there are no worries for the participants about sources fiqih law. Empowerment division has a function to analyzing participants business that will be financed by the Islamic Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders), mentoring function and other functions related to empowerment was intended to make sure that funds expended remain productive and secure continuity of business. Distribution Patterns of Working Capital

to increase the benefits that will be obtained by the participants. Financing period starting from 12 (twelve) months up to sixty (60) months with the financing platform for starters up to 25 million and will continue to increase in accordance with the development of sharia pension fund management body. Traders can make filing capital by individuals and groups. Filing can be done with a group with a minimum of four and maximum of eight people. Filing Traders can make filing capital by individuals and groups. Filing as a group can be done with a group with a minimum of four and maximum of eight people. After his/her business run and gain a profit that divided by profit sharing agreement, then the rest is owned by the clients. With this type of management mechanism, so not only active managers needed to welfares the participants, because the participants itself need to be active, productive, independent, and freed from moneylenders net. Distribution Patterns of Investment

Furthermore, the investment division wills invest in sectors that are allowed by sharia, which means that the type of investment chosen is healthy and safe on economic considerations and also in accordance with the sharia principle. Managers can invest by buying productive assets, or make a type of business that would not conflict with sharia principle. As for the purchase of productive assets eg car, motorcycle, home store, then the benefit that come from its, Sharia pension fund organization will rent benefits in accordance with the agreement of Ijarah, and the income that earned will be used as a source of income divided by the managers themselves and to increase the amount of benefits or savings that will be gained by the participants. Means in this case the manager will manage the funds that his already collected from participants' contributions, then distribute the profit with profit sharing agreement to the participants in the form of additional value to be gained by the participants. Both patterns between investment and empowerment must be regulated as good as possible so that the operational Islamic Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) can continue to operate, the empowerment with distribution should be in ideal proportions. So that operating expenses can be covered from the investment not from participants contributions, because funds must be maintained so that the value is not decrease. The pattern of the work of Islamic Microfinance Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) can be seen from the following scheme.

The funds obtained through the contributions made by each participant shared proportionally, firstly to ujrah as a source of income for managers; second, the benefit is a savings that will be obtained directly by the participants, third, the funds used for development programs and investment that will be profit sharing will be an addition to the benefits for the participants. Contributions or premiums paid by participants using Hibah agreement, then to ujrah obtained between the manager and the participants will use ujrah wakalah bil agreement. Further on empowerment by the management will using mudharabah agreement, musyarakah agreement and Ijara agreement with the principle of profit sharing. So every participant who received empowerment funds must to start their business. This empowerment fund come in the form of loans that have no interest charge, clients is obliged only to return the principal debt and profit sharing that come from the carried out in accordance with business accordance with the agreement. The revenues for this profit sharing will be used

279

Islamic Microfinance Work Scheme: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders)

5.

The funds that come from the profit sharing account will be used to cover operating and financing expenses that is not returned due to failure to pay.

Providing Working Capital Scheme and Mentoring

Informations : 1. Participants will apply for financing to Islamic Microfinance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders), empowerment division will conduct the review and mentoring. Mentoring will be given is in the form business seminars, coaching clinics, and consulting for preparation of financial statements for the business. 2. From guidance and coaching that performed by empowerment division will generate good business and well-developed personality in terms of ability to manage the business. After that the financing ready to be given. 3. Agreement that used is mudharabah or musyarakah 4. Once the funds given and businesses goes, then it will be monitored by empowerment division continually to make sure the business will have long time life cycle.

Information: 1. The operations and services division will be looking for participants in this case, traders in traditional markets. After serving registration of participants operating divisions also arrange payment of contributions that will be paid by each participant, then operating divisions will hand over the contribution to the accounting division, then accounting division will record it in different accounts. 2. After separation conducted by the accounting division, funds that inputted to contribution accounts will be divided into benefits or savings account and also will be submitted to the investment and empowerment division. Both of this division that will take full responsibility for funds developing. Investments divisions will perform purchasing and investing on productive sectors that later the result will be divided in accordance with profit sharing agreement, Empowerment division will provide working capital to participants and also act as consultant with purpose to mentoring the clients so that their business will be clear in sharia and have a long life cycle, with hope to create active traders and freed from moneylenders entrapment. 3. In investing, Islamic Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) will use two kind of agreement called mudharabah and ijarah. And for capital distribution Islamic Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) will use mudharabah and musyarakah agreement, in the form of full partnerships. 4. From these types of transactions would generate profit sharing that come from investment profit and business profit and its mean it will gain principal loan payment. For Profit Sharing then will be filled into profit sharing account and for Principal Loan Payment will be filled into benefit or savings account

4.2. Management Strategy Analysis To ensure the success and sustainability management of pengelolaan Islamic Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders), there is need to make a strategy to ensure the success and sustainability management with considering internal and external factors. It can be done with some of the following steps: 1. The Procedure is not complicated Submission of application for financing is not complicated by a variety of files that must be filled. 2. Easy terms for submission Simply by filling the desired form and the officer will immediately take care of it. 3. Supported by society Establishment of Islamic microfinance institutions is a form of activity that is carried out in order to provide business assistance, efforts to improve the welfare, business partnership, which aims to liberate traditional market traders from enticements of moneylenders. 4. Intensive assistance officers Officers will also assist clients in managing their business, in order to minimize clients go to bankruptcy. 5. More personalize service

280

The services provided will be familiarity with the greeting between officers and customers and among clients and clients 6. Increase / expand the spread and the number of customers This strategy is highly depend on the strength of the institution, can them provide easy and complicated administrative or not. During this time the potential of microcredit has not done well by commercial banks, so that the great potential is still a land of "new markets" that can be optimized. 7. Positioning as an Islamic Financial Institutions that prioritizes service Providing friendly and warm service to clients and it is not owned by the commercial banks because banks were very busy with their customers and fro, so that aspect of kinship becomes dormant. 8. Sells society empowerment program With the main objective to reduce traders that ensnared by moneylenders, so the opportunity to keep growing between traditional market traders will be even greater. 9. Educate the clients Educating clients with Islamic microfinance institutions services with profit sharing system is one of the solutions. 10. Penetrate the market more aggressively This thing required sales force that can be assigned for marketing financing products, as well as savings products in order to increase capital financing. 11. Selection of the Right Location Need to select place that is close to clients, in this case traditional markets. With this mean will be easier in monitoring, providing an understanding of Islamic transactions, simplify the billing and the most trivial is to grow good emotional relationship between clients and the manager. 12. Adding the capital with government capital loans Need to be prepared at any time if there was surge clients ask for financing or for customers who want to ask for money he kept. If this happens, it would require huge funds to increase capital. Funds from the government are quite possible to get, either at the level of central government and local government because actually there are funds that are allocated for community empowerment. Besides government funding is relatively cheap and can be the perfect solution. With all of these steps and with good synergy, it will be created traders in traditional markets, which is free from the entrapment of moneylenders. The mindset that borrows from the moneylender much easier will disappear by itself. Additionally it will be created Islamic microfinance institutions that are more desirable by society.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

[1] [2]

[3] [4] [5] [6]

[7]

IV. CONCLUTION 1. Design of Islamic Micro Finance : Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) will create Islamic microfinance institutions that easy in providing financing for capital is particularly suited to address the problem of many traditional market traders that trapped by moneylenders.

[8]

281

Working capital that distributed is a working capital with only the recovery of principal loan and profitsharing system so that the traders who use this capital will not be charged with excess returns because these loans are free from elements of interests. The organizational structure and management scheme of Islamic Micro Finance : Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) is not complicated so it will be easier to be realized Islamic Micro Finance : Melati (Fighting Moneylenders) can be an example for other Islamic microfinance institutions, so that Islamic microfinance institutions can be the prime choice for micro businesses to find sources of capital, especially the traditional market traders. SUGGESTION Should be emulated by other Islamic microfinance institutions, since this concept is an effort to make Islamic microfinance institutions become the primary choice of traders to find sources of capital, and will liberate the traditional market traders of practice moneylender can be deadly businesses The traders should be aware of the losses they would bear if they chose moneylenders as their capital sources. Although moneylenders provide easiness, but high interest rates will actually make these traders have difficulty to gain profit from their business. The Islamic microfinance should make populist approach to win the hearts of traders. Moneylenders always have a good social interaction with their clients, and then there is no harm in Islamic microfinance institutions to adopt this manner, as would be done by the Micro Finance: Melati (Fighting Moneylenders). REFERENCES Ahmad Hasan Ridwan. BMT & Bank Islam : Instrumen Lembaga Keuangan Syariah. Bandung:Pustaka Bani Quraisy. 2004. Ananda. 2011. Analisis Perkembangan Usaha Mikro dan Kecil Setelah Memperoleh Pembiayaan Mudharabah dari BMT At-Taqwa Halmahera di Kota Semarang [Skripsi].Semarang (ID): Universitas Diponegoro. Damsar, Sosiologi Ekonomi, Rajawali Press, 1997. Djazuli, Yadi Janwari. 2002. Lembaga-lembaga Perekonomian Umat. Jakarta: RajaGrafindo Persada. Esack, Farid. 2000. Membebaskan Yang Tertindas, penj. Watung A. Budiman. Euis Amalia. Keadilan Distributif Dalam Ekonomi Islam : Penguatan LKM dan UKM di Indonesia. Jakarta : Rajawali Pers. 2009. hlm. 75 Hidayati, Bunga. 2014. Peran modal sosial pada kontrak pinjaman Bank Thithil dan implikasinya terhadap keberlangsungan usaha (Studi pada pasar blimbing Kota Malang). Jurnal Ilmiah, Vol. 2, (No.1): 1-16. Indrawati, Toti dan Indri Yovita. 2014. Analisis Sumber Modal Pedagang Pasar Tradisional di

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

[14] [15] [16] [17]

[18] [19]

Kota Pekanbaru. Jurnal Ekonomi, Vol. 22, (No.1): 1-8. Kartono Drajat Tri, , Pasar Modal Tradisional (Analisis Sosiologi Ekonomi terhadap Rentenir) 2004 Mitra Global Training Center, 2013, Pelatihan Dimasa Purnakarywa (Manajemen Persiapan Menghadapi Masa Purna Bakti), Yogyakarta. Moleong, Lexy J. 2004. Metode Penelitian Kualitatif. Bandung: Remaja Rosdakarya. Muhammad. 2000. Lembaga-lembaga Keuangan Umat Kontemporer.Yogyakarta: UII Press. Navis Mar’atus Syawalia, 2015, Preferensi Pedagang Pasar Tradisional Terhadap Sumber Permodalan (Studi Pada Pedagang Pasar Merjosari, Kecamatan Lowokwaru – Kota Malang). Jurnal Ekonomi. Paidi, Strategi Persiapan Masa Pensiun Bagi Para Karyawan, STIE Dharma Bumiputera Jakarta, 2014. Peraturan Otoritas Jasa Keuangan Nomor /Pojk.05/2014. PINBUK, 2004. Manajemen Operasional Baitul Maal wat Tamwil. PINBUK Press, Jakarta Puspitasari H. 2012. Akses UMKM Terhadap Pembiayaan Mikro Syariah dan Dampaknya Terhadap Perkembangan Usaha (Kasus: BMT Tadbiirul Ummah, Kabupaten Bogor) [Skripsi]. Bogor (ID): Institut Pertanian Bogor. Rika Eliana Konsep Diri Pensiunan, Program Studi Psikologi Fakultas Kedokteran Universitas Sumatera Utara, Sumatera Utara, 2003. Saputra, A.Aji, Multifiah, dan Asfi Manzilati. 2012. Praktik Bank Thithil dan Implikasinya Menurut Pandangan Masyarakat Muslim Wilayah Perkampungan Bethek Kota Malang. Tesis

tidak diterbitkan.Malang: Program Pascasarjana Fakultas Ekonomi dan Bisnis Universitas Brawijaya Malang. [20] Soemitra Andri, 2014, Bank dan Lembaga Keuangan Syariah, Jakarta : Kecana Prenamedia Group. [21] Sri Murwanti dan Muhammad Sholahuddin, 2013, Peran Keuangan Lembaga Mikro Syariah Untuk Usaha Mikro Di Wonogiri : Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta, Jawa T engah [22] Sugiyono, Metode Penelitian Kuantitatif, Kualitatif, dan R&D. Alfabeta, Bandung, 2008 [23] Suhrawardi.K.Lubis, Hukum Ekonomi Islam, Jakarta : Sinar Grafindo, 2000 [24] Veithzal, Rivai dkk. 2007. Bank and Financial Institution Management. Jakarta: PT Raja Grafindo Persada. Online : [25] Dinas Komunikasi dan Informatika Bandung, 2015, Online: http://portal.bandung.go.id/kreditMelati, diakses tanggal 6 Juni 2016. [26] Elvidaris Simamora, 2014, Rentenir Akan Tumbuh Pesat, Online: http://medanbisnisdaily.com/news/read/2014/0 2/05/77027/rentenir_akan_tumbuh_pesat/#.Ve pc6_idwil. diakses tanggal 8 Juni 2016. [27] Koko, Rentenir Resahkan Pedagang Pasar Tradisional, Online : http://www.bidikkasus.com/rentenirresahkan-pedagang-pasar-tradisional/, diakses tanggal 8 Juni 2016. [28] Maharani Esthi, 2014, Jumlah Pasar Tradisional Semakin Menurun, Online: http://www.republika.co.id/berita/ekonomi/ma kro/14/10/02/nct8ag-jumlah-pasar-tradisionalsemakin-menurun, diakses tanggal 6 Juni 2016.

282

DO FOREIGN AND LOCAL OWNERSHIP AFFECT STOCK PRICES IN INDONESIAN CAPITAL MARKETS ? Wihartanto1), Prima Naomi2) 1)KPEI,

Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected] 2)Universitas Paramadina, Jakarta, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

_________________________________________________________________________________________ Abstract: Investors in Indonesian capital markets comprise foreign investors and local investors whose securities ownerships recorded electronically. Presumably, investor ownership strongly affects movement of stock prices. Capital market experts and observers have different opinions as to the impact of securities ownership by foreign investors. Some are of the opinion that securities ownership by foreigners does have impact on the price others state no impact. This study has the purpose to observe the impact of securities ownership by investors on stock prices on IDX. This study used the monthly data on securities ownership for the period of January 2015 up to December 2015 from all shares listed on IDX. The result of study indicates that change in the securities ownership by foreigners has significant negative impacts on change in stock prices, ownership by local investors has significant positive impact on change in stock prices. Meanwhile, by sector, securities ownership by foreign investors has diverse impacts on stock price change.

Key words: investor ownership, foreign investor ownership, local investor ownership, stock price change

are investors that have Indonesia citizenship, while foreign investors are investors with foreign citizenship or other than Indonesians (Law of the Republik of Indonesia on Capital Investment, 2007). Viewed from the value of stocks listed in the Kustodian Sentral Efek Indonesia (KSEI) or Indonesian Central Securities Depository in the period of 2015, foreign investors had assets with the value higher than local investors do, i.e. on average 64% of the value of circulating shares. The following is data that describes securities ownership by investors both foreign investors and domestic investors. Foreign fund flow is an accumulation of funds owned by foreign investors entering Indonesia. Foreign fund flow has definition different from foreign net buy and foreign net sell. Foreign net buy and foreign net sell refer to the daily-based value, while foreign fund flow is an accumulation of foreign net buy and foreign net made by foreign investors. For example, on the first day a foreign investor performs net buying amounting to 10 (ten) and on the second day he/she performs another net buying amounting to 10 (ten) and on the third day this investor makes net selling amounting to 50 (fifty), thus the flow of foreign fund is -30 (negative thirty or net sell 30). The value is obtained

INTRODUCTION

Capital market plays a crucial role in the economic development of a country including Indonesia. Indonesian capital marketis one of effective facilities in mobilizing funds from investors to be subsequently channeled to productive activities. In 2015, Indonesia’s investment climate was attractive due to among others the impact from newly elected government. Cut of fuel oil (BBM) subsidy carried out in the preceding year also plays a role in boosting the optimism related to government’s infrastructure projects, in this case encouraging flow of foreign funds to Indonesia one of which through Indonesian capital markets. As in emerging markets in general, Indonesian capital markets offer higher risk premium thus giving higher expected returns compared to developed markets (Salomon and Grootveld, 2003). This causes investors from developed market countries see Indonesian capital markets as an alternative to invest their portfolio. Therefore, investors in Indonesian capital markets consist of two types, namely domestic investors and foreign investors. Domestic investors

283

from the accumulation of the first day, second day and third day’s transactions amounting to (10 + 10 + (30)). Table 1. Value of stocks by ownership (in trillion rupiah) Local Asset

Foreign Asset

No.

Month

1

Jan 2015

1,045.10

1,882.35

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Feb 2015 Mar 2015 Apr 2015 May 2015 Jun 2015 Jul 2015 Aug 2015 Sep 2015 Oct 2015 Nov 2015 Dec 2015

1,065.94 1,077.81 1,005.59 1,037.58 997.07 989.82 940.34 888.66 936.03 919.33 965.99

1,969.52 2,021.23 1,852.84 1,898.18 1,799.96 1,757.71 1,643.13 1,524.04 1,631.04 1,610.58 1,701.86

Total

2,927.45 3,035.45 3,099.03 2,858.42 2,935.77 2,797.03 2,747.53 2,583.47 2,412.71 2,567.06 2,529.91 2,667.85

Source: www.ksei.co.id

sectors, namely; 1) Agriculture; 2) Mining; 3) Basic Industry and Chemicals; 4) Miscellaneous Industry; 5) Consumer Goods Industry; 6) Property, Real Estate and Building Construction; 7) Infrastructure, Utilities & Transportation; 8) Finance, and 9) Trade, Service & Investment. Each company share listed and traded on IDXwill be identified and classified into one of the nine categories. This categorizationis intended to ensure that the investors can easily identify the businesses for each share that become their investment portfolio. Each industrial sector has certain level of securities ownership by different foreign investors, and there are allegedly several industrial sectors that have high foreign ownership level, which will have an impact on change of the stock prices. This study also wishes to identify which sectors may be affected by foreign ownership. LITERATURE REVIEW

Ownership of securities by investors is a separate issue in discussion on market. Choe, Kho, & Stulz (2001) carried out research to identify whether domestic investors have more important information on individual shares rather than foreign investors in Korean capital markets in 2001. Based on such study, they found that prior to the Asian crisis, domestic institutional investors in Korea tended to perform trading in a manner of negative feedback while foreign investorscarried out trading in a manner of positive feedback. Negative feedback is purchases of stocks which prices are dropping and resell them at the time the stock pricesincrease, or the reverse of the positive feedback. Other study conducted by Wang (2000) in the Taiwan capital market found that foreign investors have significant impact on the stock market hence the market is very sensitive to sale transactions made by foreign investors. Studies on securities ownership has also been conducted in Indonesian capital markets, for example by Neal, Jones, Linnan, & Neal (2002) which studied companies within the period of 2002 using monthly/yearly data 2002 and focused on foreign ownership. The result found that foreign identity companies in the Indonesia Stock Exchange are very transparent in each of their transactions. In addition, this study also reveals that foreign investors make positive feedback namely selling decreasing shares and buying rising shares. Frensidy, Budi (2008) analyzed that the action of foreign sales and purchases has an impact related to movement of IHSG. Flow of foreign fundis anoptimistic or pessimistic signal from foreign

The Jakarta composite index (IHSG) also fluctuated during the study period. IHSG increased in the year’s initial trading and hit an all-time high at the level of 5523 in April 2015. As time passed, the IHSG index dropped to 4120 in September 2015 androse again to the level of 4593 at the end of 2015. Theoretically, there are many factors affecting movement of stock prices, namely exchange rate, interest rate, total circulating money, inflation rate, movement of stock prices index in the region, et cetera (Sukono, 2012). Change of ownership also includes factors that may affect movement of stock prices. Observing the opinion of several capital market experts and observers, they have different opinions as to the impact of foreign ownership. Some maintain that foreign ownership has an impact and some others do not share the opinion. Akma (2015) stated that Indonesian capital markets still rely on foreign investors, while Rudiyanto (2013) mentioned that stock prices on the Indonesia Stock Exchange (IDX) are no longer entirely controlled by movement of foreign investors. Viewing such different opinions as above, this study intends to see the relation between foreign and domestic securities ownershipand its impact on change of prices of stocks traded on IDX. Shares listed and traded on Indonesian capital marketsare divided into several industrial sectors and sub-sectors with the purpose of describing it to the relevant investors the fields of businesses performed by the companies which shares are listed and traded on the Indonesian capital market. The industrial sectors in the IDX are divided into nine industrial

284

investors both foreign and local, after which a conclusion will be drawn to see whether such securities ownershipaffects change in stock pricesin Indonesian capital markets.

investorsthat has positive impact on movement of IHSG. Study on flow of foreign fundsand its correlation with the stock pricescarried out by Rudiyanto (2013), reveals that stock pricesare no longer fully controlled by movement of foreign investors. Viewed from data in years 2006 up to 2010, foreign investorsreally realized the potential of Indonesia’s economy and continually made investment in Indonesian capital markets. When the IHSG dropped, foreign fundsindicated the trend of increase, the value of foreign fundsrose in 2008 while stock return was negative 50%. Another study by the team of Bapepam LK (2008) which analyzed the relation, co-integration and causality as well as the dynamic relation between flow of foreign funds, change in exchange rate, and movement of IHSG in the Indonesian capital market, explains that movement of IHSG has significant impact movement foreign capital enteringIndonesian capital markets, flow of foreign capital has more impact on the variable of movement of rupiah exchange rate ifcompared to movement of IHSG. Adaoglu & Katircioglu (2013) explain that there is a significantrelation between net monthly transactions carried out by foreign investorsandstock returnin the Turkish stock exchange. This study also explains the existence of Grangger causalityin the net flow of foreign investors andstock returns prior to establishment of the European Union, however such causal relation is only contemporary after the EU. Frensidy (2008) in his study titled Analysis on the Impact of Foreign Buy and Sale, Exchange Rate, and Hang Seng Index on the Composite Index in the Indonesia Stock Exchange under the GARCH Model explains that the net flow of foreign fundspositively affects the IHSG, meanwhile the relation between change of exchange rate and change of the IHSG is negative, and the relation coefficient between change of Hang Seng index and change of IHSG is 0.6128. Irawan and Murhadi (2013) in their study titled Analysison the Impact of Three Factor Model andPercentage of Foreign Ownershipon the ReturnRate in the Indonesia Stock Exchange explain that the factors of market, size and book to market have positive impact on the returnswhile the factor of foreign ownershipdoes not have significant impact in the study period of 2008 – 2011. This study intends to examine two different opinions namelyan opinion that maintains that the stock pricesare no longer fully controlled by movement of foreign investorsand an opinion that the net flow of foreign fundspositively affects the IHSG. This study will give description related to the impact of securities ownershipby investorson change of stock pricesin the period of January 2015 up to December 2015. The data analyzed is on securities ownership by

RESEARCH METHOD

The study is carried out on the shares listed on the IDX from January 2015 to December 2015. Based on the existing data, there are 563 (five hundred and sixty-three) shares. As the data collected is on securities ownership by foreign and domestic investors obtained from the website www.ksei.co.id, then only the shares with complete data on ownership andprice change areused as further samples. Based on this criteria, there are 526 (five hundred and twentysix) shares that serve as samples in this study. The data used in this study is the monthly panel data for the period of January 2015 up to December 2015, hence there are 6312 observations. The variables used in this study consist of change of stock prices, change of stock prices per sector, change of securities ownership by foreign investors, change of securities ownership by local investors. In this study, the dependent variable is change of stock prices, and the independent variable is change of securities ownership. The definition of each variableis as follows: 1. Change of stock prices Change of stock prices is calculated by deducting the data of stock pricesof the current monthfrom the previous month divided by the stock pricesof the previous month. The stock prices used are the closing prices. The reason for using the closing priceis because the closing price represents the most update price until the starting of the subsequent day’s trading (Investopedia, n.d.). 2. Change of securities ownership by foreign investors Change of securities ownership calculated by comparing the data of total securities ownershipsby foreigners in the current month with the previous month divided by the securities ownershipby foreigners in the previous month. Foreign securities ownershipis the data on securities ownershipby foreign investors, in rupiah, which are listed in the KSEI. Stock trading is carried out through the JATS system (Jakarta Automated Trading System) of IDX by investors, and then the securities owned by the investorsare listed and stored in the CBEST system (The Central Depository and Book-Entry Settlement System) of

285

Random Effectis a better model compared to the Common Effect. Hence the method of Random Effect is an appropriate model used for further analysis in this study.

KSEI. This data is used as the material for study. The unit used is index. 3. Change of securities ownership by local investors Change of local securities ownershipis calculated by comparing the data on the total local securities ownershipsin the current month with the previous month divided by the local securities ownerships of the previous month.

Table 2. Result of Test Common Effect Model Std. t-Stat Prob Error. C -0.0103 0.0024 -4.1794 0.0000 Foreign -0.0206 0.0025 -8.0999 0.0000 Domestic 0.0004 0.0002 1.7738 0.0000 Fixed Effect Model Coeff. Coeff. Coeff. Coeff. C -0.0103 -0.0103 -0.0103 -0.0103 Foreign -0.0206 -0.0206 -0.0206 -0.0206 Domestic 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 Random Effect Model Coef. Coef. Coef. Coef. C -0.0103 -0.0103 -0.0103 -0.0103 Foreign -0.0206 -0.0206 -0.0206 -0.0206 Domestic 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 Coeff.

Since this study uses the panel data, the Regression used to analyze the panel data is the regression model of panel data. Determination of regression model estimation is carried out by first examining the model. The model to be tested uses Common Effect, Fixed Effect, and Random Effect. These three tests are then compared to get the most appropriate to be used in analyzing hence giving solid test result. The modeling of panel data which is the combination of time series model and cross section is as follows: Yit = α + β1X1it +β2 X2it +εit; ……(1) i = 1, 2, … , n; t = 1, 2, … ,

Based on test on Random Effect, securities ownership by foreigners have significant impact on change of stock prices. The parameter value for the variableof foreign ownership has the value of (0.0206), meaning that if the level of securities ownership by foreign investors increases by one unit, the stock prices will go down by 0.021 percent. Meanwhile, the variable of local securities ownership has positive impact on change of stock prices. The parameter value of variable of local ownership of 0.0004 can be defined that if the level of ownershipby local investorsincreases by one unit, the change of stock prices increase is 0.0004 percent. In such this information era in which technological development facilitates foreign as well local investors to promptly get the latest information, any change will be easily found out by investors. Technological development gives an opportunity to every investor to get equal information hence they can easily know any latest development. The same holds true for the development occurring within the capital market, in which any information can be easily obtained by foreign investorsas well as domestic investors through such advancement of technology. The investorsthat get information in real time can use that information to make decision related to their investment portfolio inIndonesian capital markets. Therefore when an investor wishes to release its share ownership on his investment portfolio, other investors will process that information to subsequently make decision whether to immediately own the share or wait for a bit longer in

where: Yit = change of cross section stock price.-i time series .-t α = Constant β = Parameter X1it = change of securities ownership by foreign companies -i year.-t X2it= change of securities ownership by local companies -i year.-t εit = element of population disruption n = total number of companies t = amount of time RESULT & DISCUSSION

The result of test using Common Effect, Fixed Effect, and Random Effect can be viewed in table 2. Diagnostic testing is carried out to obtain the most appropriate model. First, the F Statistic Test used to select the method of Common Effect or Fixed Effect. The result of calculation indicates that the value of Cross-Section Chi-Squareis 1.0000.This means that the value is greater than alpha (α) 0.05 hence the model of Common Effect is a better method compared to the Fixed Effect. Subsequently, Langrangge Multiplier (LM) Testis administered to select the best model between the Common Effect and Random Effect. The result of LM Testis 0.0000 smaller than alpha (α) 0.05.This indicates that the

286

include the sectors of Agriculture and Trade Service. This means that if securities ownership by foreign investors increases by one unit, the stock prices of Agriculture and Trade Service will go down by 23.9 and 3.49 percent respectively for the sectors. Considering Indonesia’s economic condition that cannot be separated from the global economic dynamics which is estimated to have moderate growth even have the tendency to decrease,foreign investorswill also see the condition of Indonesia’s major trading partners that make foreign investorsmore cautious in investing their portfolio in this sector. Meanwhile securities ownership by domestic investors has negative impact on stock prices which include on the sectors of Basic Industry, Miscellaneous and infrastructure. If the level of securities ownership by domestic investors increases by one unit, the stock prices in the sectors of Basic Industry, Miscellaneous and infrastructure decrease by 1.4; 13.2, and 0.16 percent respectively. The Miscellaneoussector is under the category of blue chips which is nationally known to have good history such as automotive, supporting spare and apparel shares. Securities ownership by domestic investors has positive impact on change of stock prices in the sectors of Finance and Trade Service. If the level of securities ownership of domestic investors increases by one unit, stock prices will increase by 3.2 and 0.05 percent. The sectorsof Trade, Service & Investment comprise shares that are countercyclical stocks in nature, namelythe shares which products are saleable because they are needed by consumers even though under crisis situation such as supermarket, trading, and internet.

order to get that share at the price matching its limit of risk tolerance. The habit of domestic investors and foreign investors, investors in capital markets in Indonesia and investors in capital markets in Korea has similarity. Domestic investors have the habit of negative feedback namelybuying shares that are experiencing a drop in price and resell them when the price is on the rise while foreign investorshave the habit of positive feedback. After discussing the relation between the impact of stock ownership and change of stock pricesfor all stocks in the capital market, the subsequent discussion relates to the relation between securities ownershipand change of stock prices per sector. The result of testing using the model of Random Effect, impact of change of securities ownershipon change of stock pricesthat can be seen per sector can be viewed in table 2. Table 3. Result of Testing for Each Category of Sector Sector

Investor

Coeff.

Agri

Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic Foreign Domestic

-0.2399 0.0393 0.0078 -0.0241 0.0330 -0.1326 -0.0020 -0.1446 -0.0483 0.0247 0.0046 0.0059 -0.0038 -0.0355 -0.0016 0.0326 -0.0349 0.0005

Mining Miscella neous Basic Industry Consumer Goods Property Infra structure Finance Trade Service

Std. tProb Error Statistic 0.0661 -3.5835 0.0004 0.0486 0.8091 0.4194 0.0206 0.3813 0.7032 0.0345 -0.6999 0.4844 0.0313 1.0538 0.2926 0.0342 -3.8711 0.0001 0.0309 -0.0673 0.9464 0.0428 -3.3776 0.0008 0.0294 -1.6384 0.1022 0.0292 0.8472 0.3974 0.0060 0.7612 0.4469 0.0149 0.4017 0.6880 0.0105 -0.3642 0.7158 0.0197 -1.7980 0.0728 0.0050 -0.3308 0.7409 0.0152 2.1487 0.0320 0.0082 -4.2452 0.0000 0.0001 3.3332 0.0009

Conclusion Based on the above description and discussion on the relation between securities ownershipby investorsandchange of stock prices, conclusion can be drawn as follows; 1. Securities ownership by foreign investors has significant negative impact on the stock prices and domestic investor ownership has significant positive impact on change of stock prices. Development and utilization of technology facilitate investors in gaining information which is almost the same as received by other investors in real time. Each movement of information occurring related to the development of Indonesian capital marketcan be easily known by investors particularly foreign investors. Hence investors can use that information in each decision making to be made related to their investment portfolio. As local investors have sufficient information to make such

Viewed from the value of t-statistic as the result of regression above, there are several sectors in which securities ownership by investors has significant negative and positive impact on stock prices, both for securities ownership by foreigners and securities ownership by locals. Industrial sectors with foreign securities ownership have significant negative impact on stock prices, namely the sectors of Agriculture and Trade Service. In the sectors of Miscellaneous, Basic Industry, and infrastructure domestic securities ownership has significant negative impact on the stock prices, while in the sectors of finance and Trade Services domestic securities ownership has significant positive impact. The impact of foreign securities ownershiphas negative impact on change of stock prices which

287

[6]

decision they are also ready to take over the role of foreign investorsif at any time the latter release their securities ownership in the Indonesian capital market. 2. By sector, securities ownership by foreign investors has varied impacts on change of stock prices. Change in ownership of foreign securities only has significant negative impact on the stock prices in the sectors of agriculture and trade service. Meanwhile ownership of domestic securities has two impacts on change of stock prices. In the sectors of Basic Industry, Miscellaneous and infrastructure, domestic ownership of securities has negative impact on change of stock prices, while in the sectors of Finance and Trade Service, ownership by domestic investors has positive impact on the stock prices. This is inseparable from the characteristics and prospects of each industry which causes different trusts of investors in each industry.

[7]

[8] [9]

[10] [11]

Recommendation Based on the studies carried out, we recommend as follows. Investors must study the characteristics of impacts of securities ownership in each industry; hence they can make the right decision in the event of change of foreign or local securities. Further researchers can continue this study by involving other variables as the controlling variable, because the impact of securities ownership on the stock prices may be sensitive to variables such as change of exchange rate and change of stock price indices in other countries. Another aspect that needs to be studied is whether such change of securities has symmetrical impact on the stock prices at the time of good news or bad news.

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3]

[4] [5]

Adaoglu, C., & Katircioglu, S. T. (2013, 3 26). Dipetik 10 19, 2016, dari SSRN https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=2239679 Akma, A. (2015, Dec 7). Analisa Bisnis Makro. Retrived from D7News: http://d7news.com/pasar-modal-indonesia-masihandalkan-aliran-dana-asing/ Bapepam LK, T. P. (2008). Analisis Hubungan Kointegrasi dan Kausalitas Serta Hubungan Dinamis Antara Aliran Modal Asing, Perubahan Nilai Tukar, dan Pergerakan IHSG Pada Pasar Modal Indonesia. Choe, H., Kho, B.-C., & Stulz, R. M. (2001, 1). Dipetik 10 19, 2016, dari the National Bereau of Economic Research: http://www.nber.org/papers/w8073 Frensidy, B. (2008). Analisis Pengaruh Aksi Beli-Jual Asing, Kurs, dan Indeks Hang Seng Terhadap Indeks Harga Saham Gabungan di Bursa Efek Indonesia dengan Model GARCH. Media Riset Bisnis & Manajemen , 35-42.

288

Investopedia. (t.thn.). Closing Price. Diambil kembali dari Investopedia: http://www.investopedia.com/terms/c/closingprice.asp Irawan, R., & Murhadi, W. R. (2013). Analisis Pengaruh Three Factor Model dan Presentase Kepemilikan Asing Terhadap Tingkat Return di Bursa Efek Indonesia. Jurnal Manajemen & Bisnis , 213226.Vol 33 No. . Law of the Republik of Indonesia on Capital Investment (2007) Jakarta Neal, C. B., Jones, S. L., Linnan, D., & Neal, R. (2002). Hearding and Feedback Trading by Foreign Investors: The Case of Indonesia during the Financial Crisis. Indiana Kelly School of Business Working Paper. Solomons, R., & Grootveld, H. (2003. The Equity Risk Premium: Emerging versus Developed Markets. Sukono, I. B. (2012). Analisis Faktor-Faktor yang Mempengaruhi IHSG di Bursa Efek Indonesia Periode Tahun 2007-2011. Dinamika Manajemen Jurnal Ilmiah USM , 38-51.

USE OF SOFTWARE MENDELEY EFFECTIVENESS RESEARCH IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS FOR PUBLICATION JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL Rohmiati Amini1), DidinHadi Saputra2) 1stFKIP UNW, Mataram, Indonesia Email :[email protected] 2nd FKIP UNW, Mataram, Indonesia Email : [email protected]

Abstract. In implementing the business and economics research in social life, surely we must mendeseminasikan research results in international journals. One supporter of the business activity is to use the right program and have functions that support the activities of our scientific research. The use of software Mendeley in the international journal publications has been used by some colleges. One of the main objectives of this program areMendeley, academics facilitated in accessing scientific work that they want to collection. Use of the software is intended to provide benefits and a better destination among academics in college. The development of a database on the various scientific fields provided by the developers of resources for information collection brings convenience and comfort for its users. The management can actually be done by making the application itself or looking for an application that is not paid or free. Software Mendeley is actually the intended application easier in making citations and bibliography used by the author, so that the author will be suppressed guilt in making a bibliography and facilitate in obtaining a paper to be cited. This software can also be also be used to manage files of journal articles on research and economic business by academics, as a backup file of journals subscribed by the institution, so that the researchers will be reduced concern at any time when unsubscribing. Keywords: Business Research, Business Activities, Software Mendeley Introduction The development of information technology in the research world has been so increased, so researchers must know the various applications provided by the provider of information services such as online and offline journals database, which contains a collection of articles from scientific journals. Many researchers in the field of business and economics that assumes that the use of online journals are very helpful and make it easier to support the activities of research and study, both for drawing up proposals or discussions. However, if the online journal articles that have been downloaded (download) is not documented correctly, it will be very difficult rediscovered, at any time when necessary. The actual journal articles online will easily find them again, if managed well in the form of a database. However, because of busy and availability is very limited when the investigators resulted database was never completed and maintained. As a result, the article is often scattered in various places. One application database that can be used to manage online journal articles areMendeley. Actually, many database applications available, its free and can be used to manage the library. However, such applications often causes librarians be difficult to make a selection that will be used in the library. There are important things that must be taken into consideration in choosing an application, namely the extent to which an

application can ease the task of librarians (Taufiq, 2009). Which is intended to ease the job is to facilitate, accelerate and is compatible with other applications already in use. Mendeley is a management software for reference and academic social network that can help in organizing research, collaborate with other researchers online and find the latest research publications. As a reference database, file references such as books or articles from journals in PDF form can be saved and given the right information to help facilitate the search. PDF files are saved can be opened, read, and given notes with sticky notes or highlights. Posts created with Microsoft Word, OpenOffice or LaTeX can be linked to software Mendeley so citations and a reference list (bibliography) can be arranged automatically. The writing is done based on the source literature. All sources that are used need to be cited in the manuscript and then the sources cited are listed as references. Quoting sources in the article and its inclusion in the bibliography called citation style. People generally assume that the citation can be done arbitrarily. Many people also assume that during this time they have done citation correctly. Though not always the case. Citation must be made using a particular style known as citation style (citation style). A citation (citation) or bibliographic citation is a reference to books, articles, web pages, or the products of other publications which provide sufficient details to

289

identify it uniquely publishing products. The writings or lectures that are not published as a working paper (working paper) and personal communications (personal communication) also sometimes cited (cited). Citation is used in scientific works to provide credit or recognition of the influence of the earlier work, or refer to who has the authority of science. Citation allows the reader to assess what is being tested right now by viewing previous works. The authors are often directly involved in this test and to explain why they agree or do not agree with the views previously. Ideally citation sources are primary (first hand) and the date. Each installation Mendeley must be accompanied by registration of a new account, because each account Mendeley accompanied by an online account. If the user Mendeley PDF synchronize data stored on your computer / laptop with their online account, then the reference information stored on a laptop last will also be stored on the website and can be accessed from anywhere via the Internet on a laptop or with Mendeley app for iPhone and iPad. Also through the Internet, can be found researchers or groups of researchers / authors others who have similar interests or conduct a search of articles with respect to the topic of the research that is being done. Mendeley is a software which has the ability to process scientific databases such as e-journals, e-books and other references. Functions as a library, along with the ability to use as a processor, a bibliography in the preparation of scientific papers.Mendeley is a free standalone application program for managing literature and develop a social network is useful for managing academic literature, literature online sharing, and search for the latest literature. The use of various styles of different references in every field of science using Mendeley applications no longer need to be carried out manually. By Mendeley simply select only when creating a database library, the selected style will in itself be used at the time to be quoted and advantages of Mendeley applications that do not need to type the Bibliography. For Mendeley will automatically create Bibliography so doing citations.

student in Germany. The first version was released in August 2008. The team consists of researchers, alumni and developers from various institutions. Its investors include former founders of Skype, the former Head of Digital Strategy at Warner Music Group, as well as academics from Cambridge and Johns Hopkins University. Mendeley has won several awards, such as "European Start- up of the Year 2009", "TechCrunchEuropas", which is the best social innovations that benefit the community in 2009, "and The Guardian as ranked 6th on the Top 100 companies in the Media tech ". Elsevier bought Mendeley 2013. the sale sparked a debate in the scientific network and open Access Media. Some users Mendeley angry with the acquisition program by the giant publisher Elsevier, which is known to many issuing restrictive and considered contrary to the open model (opensources program) . David Dobbs, in The New Yorker, explaining the reason Elsevier bought Mendeley, namely to obtain user data and to coopt. Steps Preparation and Operations The activities to be done in using Mendeley application is making preparations, run the program and share articles. In preparation you need to do is download the application, install, insert articles and edit metadata. 1. Download Application Applications can be obtained by downloading from the website address www.mendeley.com. At the bottom there Freedownload text. Once downloaded and installed, then the program menu will appear the text Mendeley Desktop. 2. Install Mendeley The downloaded file named Mendel-Desktop-1.10.1win32.exe, meaning that this file to uninstall Mendeley on Windows 32 bit operating systems. Of course, these files will not be used if the computers we use to use Linux or Mac operating systems. 3. Once the file Mendel-Desktop-1.10.1-win32.exe clicked 2 times, then the executable program will be run and the menu will appear as follows: 4. Then select the next 5. Select I Agree 6. Select the next 7. Select install 8. The process to install, wait until the end 9. Finish, click finish 10. After the installation process is complete, then back to the start and select the icon for registration Mendeley.

Getting to know Mendeley Applications Mendeley is a program to create citations and reference managers are widely used by researchers and academic in mensitasi (clipping) reference sources, especially from the journal, especially for students who are writing theses and dissertations. Many universities in various countries that require the use of citation and reference manager in writing thesis and dissertation. Due to the use of this software facilitates the process of sampling the references used (Tribune-East, 2014). In wikipedia (2014) mentioned that Mendeley is a program-based desktop and web is used for managing and sharing research papers, found the research data and collaborating online. The program combines the Desktop, PDF and reference management application that is available for operating systems Windows, Mac and Linux. Mendeley with a webbased online social network for researchers. In Mendeley, the user must store all the data and a copy on the server. Mendeley Web provides a space as much as 2 GB of storage space and can be upgraded with a cost. Mendeley built in November 2007 by three doctoral

Registration and Login That is done in the registration is to enter a first name, second name, email, password to enter mendelay (not to enter the site email us), areas of interest and profession. In the registration process should be ensured good internet access networks, because many cases of failure at this stage due to lack of good quality Internet network. Sometimes only a few who can register, while others fail. Started Database Mendeley The main feature in the app Mendeley is to create folders, fill the pdf file, edit metadata, and use documents. 1. Making Folder

290

Folder creation meant that a PDF file of a particular subject can be grouped. Thus, the manager will be easier to distinguish a particular subject and in the search for return. This grouping can be used to facilitate in making a bibliography or bibliographic particular subject. But actually there is no difference between the separated and not separated, because there is a search feature to search for a subject to be searched. 2. Adding Documents The addition of metadata file documents can be done by means move your files one by one (add file) from folders existing PDF files as needed, add all the files in the folder (add folder), from the folder you have specified or set of menu TOOL -OPTION, manual metadata entry field per field and importing metadata. a. Add File b. Add Folder c. Wath Folder d. Manual Data Entry e. Import f. Edit Metadata Document Editing metadata is done when there are fields that are not complete. If the PDF file is derived from online journals in the country are often a lot of metadata that are not included in full, even one sign. But in foreign journals are generally complete, although sometimes there is also incomplete entry into the field is supposed to be. Therefore, managers need to add the fields that are not complete. For example, TAG field are often not charged. This field could be filled with the subject, so if you have filled the user or manager will be easier to find a subject, because not all subjects contained in the file title. g. Tool Tool is useful for installing applications importing documents from the website, the application of making citations and bibliography in MS Word and invite others to participate in group discussions. While OPTION can be used to determine the downloaded file, specify the folder containing the PDF file that will be added to the system, specify the server computer to be used as an IP Adreess registered in the server Mendeley and the old application to replace the user by registering an email address and password. But in the latest version of the application is only listed as a user and can not be replaced, if already registered. In the latest version, see this page contains information on the number of data stored on the hard disk and a computer hard drive Mendeley server users.

do not exist. Instead listed in the bibliography, but the citation was not found. With this application, then all the names cited are automatically included in the list of libraries. b. Manage pdf files downloaded from online journal database for retrieval at any time required. If the librarian download a pdf file of the online journal, then the pdf file can be put into Mendeley easily and quickly, without having to manually mengentri metadata. Thus, if at any time there are users who need back the document, the librarian can find back and give it to the user, without having to access the journal using the internet. This is very useful for libraries that slow internet access. c. Discuss an article, after being given a note by the first reader. This method can be used by other users who have an account with Mendeley. But the split (share) is not an application, but a document or file pdfnya. Users that one can share documents with other users, to jointly provide an assessment of research documents, for example. Therefore in this share is usually done by those who are members of a group who have areas of interest or the same subject. This method actually has the potential to be used by the library manager in the framework of selected information dissemination activities to its users. Conclutions A citation (citation) or bibliographic citation is a reference to books, articles, web pages, or the products of other publications which provide sufficient details to identify it uniquely publishing products. Citation is used in scientific works to provide recognition of the influence of the earlier work, or refer to who has the authority of science. The position of citations of the most common is a bibliography or list of references at the end of the article, but the position of citation can also be in the body text (parenthetical citation), at the bottom of the page (footnotes), at the end of the document (endnotes), on a page or a special section entitled "Works Cited", or in a special page entitled reference list / list of reference. Therefore there is a software for managing reference free or paid ieMendeley. This software provides convenience in mensitir and create bibliographies automatically. In Mendeley we can also choose the style of citation that can be adapted to the format of his style such as APA (American Psychological Association) for the fields of psychology, education, and social sciences more, MLA (Modern Language Association) for the field of Literature was, literature, art, and humanities, AMA (American Medical Association), for the field of medicine, health and biological sciences, Turabian (commonly used by the students for all sorts of subjects), Chicago (commonly used in a variety of subjects in the 'real' world such as books, magazines , newspapers, and publications other than scientific publishing), NLM (National Library of Medicine), ACS (American Chemical Society), APSA (American political science Association), to political science, CBE (Council of Biology Editors), IEEE style, ASA (American Sociological Association),

3. Utilization Mendeley application can be used for: a. Creating citations and bibliography for writing purposes. Utilization beginning of the application is to facilitate Mendeley writers create citations and bibliographies. This function is for authors strongly felt the impact. Cases often faced by writers create citations and bibliography are included in the citation of the author's name, but in a list of libraries

291

Columbia style, MHRA (Modern Humanities Research Association). [3] [2] [3]

ACKNOWLEDGMENT We would like to convey our gratitude to all parties for making this research possible, so that the results of this study can be desiminated and presented in International Conference ADRI

[4] REFERENCES [1] [2]

[5]

Taufiq, Andik. 2009. “Persyaratan Perangkat Lunak (Software Requirements) Tujuan Requirements.” Tribun-Timur. 2014. Buku mendeley karya dosen UNM tembus google books.

292

http://makassar.tribunnews.com/2013/11/28/buk u-mendeley-karya-dosen-unm-tembus-googlebooks. diakses 15 Januari 2014. [1] M. First, “Registrasi Akun Mendeley.” S. Mendeley, “Tutorial ‘ mendeley ,’” 2015. F. Pdf, M. Word, M. Mendeley, and S. Mendeley, “PANDUAN PENGGUNAAN SOFTWARE MANAJEMEN REFERENSI MENDELEY,” pp. 1–16. B. Taruna and W. Putra, “MENDELEY SEBAGAI,” 2016. A. Taufiq, “Persyaratan Perangkat Lunak ( Software Requirements ) Tujuan Requirements,” 2009.

KNOWLEDGE TRANSFER: A CONCEPTUAL MODEL AND FACILITATING FEATURES IN START-UP BUSINESS Boy I. Pasaribu, Adella Arfianti, Gun Gun Gumilar, Hilda P. Rizanti, & Siti Rohajawati 1)

Bakrie University, Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected], [email protected] [email protected], [email protected], [email protected]

Abstract. This paper presents a conceptual model of knowledge transfer in a start-up business for solving knowledge workers turnover problem. Through activities of business process observation and interviewing, the conceptual model was designed. Afterwards, the features in facilitating tools are recommended. The features are mostly aimed to empower the knowledge workers in different fields for sharing their valuable knowledge effectively and efficiently. The study found that the main phase of knowledge transfer model was based on awareness, acquisition, transformation, association, application and knowledge externalization/feedback. Furthermore, the conceptual model generated features to manifest user requirement with profile, scheduling, module, learning evaluation, and reporting. Keywords: knowledge transfer, start-up business for company success. It is embodied within the company and should process through social interchange. In fact, the flows of KT may be extremely rapid and circulatory as the case for some forms of action learning. Next, [4] stated that knowledge is the creative source of the knowledge worker. The quality of their work depends not only on their ability to create, distribute and share knowledge, but rather how to use their knowledge within the company. Knowledge is indeed belongs to an individual, but is also the right of a company where individuals place the work to take advantage of the intellectual-based assets. Hence, the learning process becomes a key activity in increasing knowledge capacity. The individual training as a new staff is a necessary process to improve the company's performance. According to Liyanage et al. (2009) KT is one of the areas which related to the movement or transfer of knowledge of a place, person or other ownership. It is about identifying existing knowledge, acquire and then apply it to develop new ideas or to increase the value of the ideas. It will make the process better, faster and safer than ever. Therefore, KT is not just the use of existing resources, but how to acquire and absorb it more effective and efficient. Refer to Ladd & Ward (2002) KT is transfer process of useful information from one individual to another with the possibility that it had not been accompanied by an understanding of the information being transferred. A KT process can often be wrong if the parties involved are not willing to share knowledge because of confidentiality issues, cultural difficulties and also for fear of losing competitive advantage. This study was used KT Model by Liyanage et al. (2009) to analyse the KT process in XYZ company (Figure 1).

I. INTRODUCTION Currently, the knowledge economy era has been encouraging organizations to compete and use technology to transform and become a start-up business. One of them (XYZ) has facing problem with turnover of knowledge workers. XYZ is one company that utilizes Information Technology in serving public entertainment. However it has a high rate of staff turnover especially in potential workers. It will lead to bring out the barrier of business activities. Most of the new staff joint and left without managed well. XYZ has been badly experiencing in loss of knowledge that affects the business processes. If it is a set of activities and interrelated of each other, and one process does not go well so the other process will be affected to perform good. Even though the business processes still work and run, the potential knowledge is not kept and managed. It is not taken over, not stored and even worst it has to be replaced with unprofessional staff. This problem led to study of how to solve it using the concept of knowledge transfer (KT). This concept will keep the valuable knowledge worker and transfer the knowledge to a new potential staff in order to continue the business process of XYZ. Based on a model of knowledge transfer (Liyanage, Elhag, Ballal, & Li, 2009), we focused on training process of knowledge worker. On the next section, we delivered detail of KT process in XYZ. II.

KNOWLEDGE TRANSFER

Knowledge is the key success in all aspects because it has become the absolute asset for organizations. According to [2] knowledge is an organized structure of facts, relationships, experience, skills and insights that generate action. Furthermore, Sensuse (2014) knowledge is important asset

293

is conducted to depict the problem into conceptual model of XYZ KT activities based on KT model. This conceptual model has generated to be features of KT tools. Finally, the validation was conducted by discussion repeatedly within user (owner) and examined to experts. IV. ANALYSIS AND RESULT 1.

A Model of XYZ Knowledge Transfer XYZ is a start-up company in IT and Entertainment. The company was founded in early 2015. In the process of staffing, XYZ apply their probation within 3 months for introducing and learning of employees. This period is the crucial time and very important because they will be assessed in competence and their knowledge. This process is used to select the eligible and put in permanent staffing. Based on observations, the main problem in training process is turnover. One staff left and out without transfer their knowledge for the new one staff replaced. Another problem is the training process conducted in a few days or meetings. The knowledge is done completely on oral basis, but not in structured document yet. The solution is given to concern for knowledge tailored. XYZ requires the scheduling of training for knowledge transfer process. From this, it can be detected how much knowledge to be formed and documented. Based on discussion, we proposed some of the possible features of the KT model, such as the login page, article pages, online discussion forums and so on. The owner felt that the proposed solutions are indispensable in fact to struggling as a start-up and avoid to loss the knowledge of employees. It may impact very influentially in the passage of the company's business processes. According to Liyanage et al. (2009) KT process has two very important supporting objects that are the source and receiver. The source is an individual who is willing to do knowledge transfer with other (individuals more expert). And, the receiver is an individual who will be the recipient of knowledge to gain new knowledge regarding his role and his knowledge. Each division of XYZ has been linked with each other in a business process. Briefly business processes at XYZ starts with a team of developers who design and build a system, then XYZ perform its core business after the division of the partnership and marketing find a partner who is willing to cooperate. Then after getting a partner, the editorial division team would publish their work in social media and blogs by digital division. Prior to publish, to make it more attractive all the content that is created by the editorial division will be designed in advance by the design team. Content made attractive and publish it digitally. The aim is XYZ can have benefit and big opportunity to get a new partner. The business problem will arise when one of the potential team is leaving the company. The interconnected between division is postponed because the role of the staff no one can replace for each other.

Fig. 1 Knowledge Transfer Model of Liyanage et al. (2009).

The first step of KT process is to identify the appropriate knowledge to be utilized (Knowledge Awareness). The next step is to gain knowledge. And condition both of the receiver and sender are agree to carry out KT (Knowledge Acquisition). It will refer to the company's ability to identify and acquire the knowledge which is essential to be done. The success of this phase will generate data or information. Because it should be converted in advance that knowledge will be useful and generate into new knowledge or to enhance the existing knowledge. Data and information will transform to be knowledge on transformation phase (Knowledge Transformation). On this phase, the receiver will be involved in selecting to add or remove the knowledge. The receiver should be able to tailor the knowledge which is needed by organization (Knowledge Associations). Finally, the knowledge will apply and run continuously (Knowledge Application). It need response from the receiver to implement and get the best results of all KT phase. According to GNB KT tools [6] KT process is easily to manage. This guidance is useful to apply and map user’s need. The main process of this tools are identify essential knowledge or knowledge at risk, identify “who” has the knowledge, identify “to whom” the knowledge should be transferred, determine the best method(s) to capture & transfer the knowledge, and evaluate to ensure the knowledge was learned. III. RESEARCH METHOD The observations have been conducted in XYZ for 1 year (2016) specially on training process. We found some constraints in KT process. The main problem is XYZ has not had time to facilitate knowledge worker with extreme rate of turnover. Next, the interview is used to collect data of executive owner and manager level for 18 informants. Each of informants is interviewed for one hour. The topic of interview questions focused on the condition of staff turnover. After data collection and observation, the analyses

A. Awareness The turnover in a company is a natural, but XYZ has limited of resources. This will give a considerable impact on business processes. It is due to the knowledge staff-out and business continuity cannot be run as usual. For this XYZ should have knowledge awareness. It is one of the important

294

point in the company. They have to aware that KT is a process to keep and takeover of knowledge to his successor. And, it can be managed properly. XYZ and their employees should aware of the importance of KT. The process needs to be formed into a formal rule. It must be obeyed and carried out at every occurrence of turnover or training to new staff. Some of the process of KT has been carried out in XYZ. The process is done by oral and manually. It shows that XYZ has the awareness of KT process. First, XYZ will provide the training schedule. Before it conducted, XYZ prepare and identify the appropriate of knowledge and appoint the trainer from internal or external. The professional will deliver their knowledge into a new staff. The sources knowledge will changed by the participants after the training. On this condition the source knowledge is a supervisor who has responsibility to share and ability of work. The knowledge must be in accordance with the division in which the supervisor served. If it does not fit then the supervisor cannot do KT. Each of staff who will be out of XYZ should do KT. They will be replaced by new staff that has good skill.

understanding to this, the new staff must be able to recognize the potential of how beneficial knowledge that has been transformed to meet the needs of XYZ Company. To recognize the potential of existing knowledge is measure the new staff with the knowledge received. If the new staff have known they will good to do in company. They will also be able to generate ideas or suggestions to implement at XYZ. They are capable or not in understanding the potential knowledge, may show their performance value at the end of the training period.

B. Acquisition The process of KT is a transfer of knowledge from one individual to another. The transfer of knowledge between the parties must be willing to do and have knowledge as needed. In the case of XYZ, supervisor or staff who leaves the division should be willing to do the KT to new staff. At this stage, a source must be able to provide data and information regarding their jobs both verbally and documented. It will create a replacement easily to handle the job. Willingness to provide a source of knowledge can minimize the possibility of transferring the knowledge. C. Transformation This phase focused on XYZ training process. Data, information and knowledge should provide properly in order to do KT. XYZ will get the beneficial from this KT and able to increase the value of knowledge by converting it into tacit or explicit. Based on observation the training process has two type i.e., tacit to tacit and tacit to explicit. - Tacit to Tacit: Direct interaction between supervisors or staff who will leave and new staff as a replacement. Formation of knowledge is done because the data, information, knowledge stored in the individual source. It is type of personal experience and not yet documented. Hence, a new staff should be given directly in training or discussion as a new knowledge. - Tacit to Explicit: Formation of knowledge of the data, information and experiences of individuals who possessed source into a form of a document or modules. It can later be read by the receiver. Formation of knowledge is done into document. The new staff as the receiver can easily gain knowledge by reading it over and over.

Fig. 2. A Conceptual Model of XYZ Knowledge Transfer. E. Application Application of knowledge is a significant activity in KT. It works when the knowledge has been transferred from the giver to receiver and already be applied or implemented. The application process has done if a new staff has good understanding of the knowledge and applied in accordance with the needs of the division and roles. It is intended to help job effectively and efficiently. It will affect the passage of a business process such as prior or even better. At this stage, a new staff at the XYZ Company has got knowledge from senior will apply in accordance with the duties and role at XYZ. In order to evaluate the performance of applying knowledge, a performance report will be evaluated. F. Knowledge externalization / Feedback One of KT process was the availability to provide training program. This training should be beneficial for both parties (giver and recipient) of knowledge. The new staff will increase the competence and the company have gained feedback from new staff. All of it will increase the value of the knowledge transferred. This stage resulted on new staff with good skill to over a new ideas and innovations for XYZ to run a business strategy. And the employees who is

D. Association Prior knowledge can be implemented. The knowledge must be identified in advance with the suitability to the needs that exist and the level of its urgency. The level of urgency is how important the knowledge required to be transferred and implemented. After their mature

295

replaced will get a new learning and challenging in a future career. According to analysis of KT Model described, we proposed a conceptual model of XYZ KT in Figure 2. Once the conceptual model of KT is implemented through the features and use cases, this model is verified by XYZ. Further the conceptual model confirmed by the existing business processes and tailored to the needs of the problem at XYZ. This model was also validated through discussions with XYZ, lecturers as well as in the field of Knowledge Management at a hearing test final by 3 main testers.

B. Profile Features On the application of KT XYZ needed a feature profile. This feature was first displayed after the user successfully logs in. The usefulness of the profile feature is to look at the image along with a work history of the employee. There is also a form that displays source unwillingness to do KT. The people that can access this feature are admin, new staff and supervisors or staff who will be out of XYZ (hereinafter referred to as Source). They have access to the KT application of XYZ. Admin has access to the entire start uploading knowledge module, manage scheduling, managing tests and test results to managing the process of KT report. In a profile feature, administrator can do things such as update the data and also see all the employee profile. Meanwhile, the new staff can only do two things: look at the profile page and also change or update their personal data contained in the profile feature.

2.

Facilitating Features of XYZ KT Model Based on observations, analysis models and data collection, it founded some features that are required XYZ in the application of KT tools: login feature, a profile feature, scheduling feature, modules feature, learning evaluation features and report (Table 1). TABLE I FACILITATING FEATURES OF XYZ KT TOOLS

KT Process Awaren ess

Acquisit ion

Conditions PT XYZ User Guide email reminder, SOP Verbally

Suggested Features Login and scheduling features

Suggested Information

Profile and scheduling features

Source is willing to do KT with appropriate knowledge that will be transferred is known. Face to face schedule between source and receiver. Documenting knowledge to become module at an application page. Assessment test on to what degree the receiver understand the transferred knowledge. Training progress and KT application progress. Receiver is able to give feedback towards the knowledge and the training.

Transfo rmation

Not yet available

Module and scheduling features

Associat ion

Not yet available

Learning evaluation feature

Applicat ion Knowle dge Externa lization/ Feedba ck

Not yet available Not yet available

Report feature Report feature

C. Scheduling Features Admin as managing the scheduling will incorporate important schedules XYZ process of KT. One example is to enter the date of commencement of the process of KT and when this process will be completed, scheduled to enter how much time is given to the new staff supervisor module and insert understand when learning evaluation will be done to the new staff. While a new staff and the source on these features can only see the schedule page that has been entered by the admin. As previously described KT process at XYZ, it did not just read about KT which has been documented in the form of modules, but there is also a process of KT with face to face --or in other words-- tacit KT is done to tacit. KT activities is controlled or in the show schedule in the scheduling feature of KT application. The scheduling feature is necessary because according to the observation at the time of data collection XYZ requires it for the training or KT process, because it can show the KT process is structured in terms of time. And again, everything is displayed on the scheduling feature will be supporters of the features that will display the results report of all to be effective and efficient.

To gain access to do KT with the scheduled time.

D. Module Features This feature is an embodiment of the process of formation of tacit knowledge into explicit. So on the features of this module are already documented good knowledge of the company as well as an explanation of the role and the new division for new staff. It also becomes the source of personal experience or knowledge providers. This feature is used to new staff. They can understand information about the company and know about the work which they do and be responsible. So the new staff as a replacement will have no trouble to move on and understand the state of the work. Knowledge is documented in the form of the module is also intended to minimize the loss of essential knowledge that exist on an individual company. The module features are managed by the admin and source, which they can enter, change, update or remove an existing module of this. But these activities do if there is an update of related divisions. Module that appears on every new staff adjusted to the division of responsibility. So this feature is for a new staff to read.

A. Login feature In general, in order to access the application, then the user must log in first. Login feature serves to validate the user and as a barrier to access rights to certain features in the application. Where only certain and already registered user who is allowed to get access to a certain feature. On the Application of XYZ KT, it takes a login feature that can be accessed by admin, source and also new staff. In this feature, there are two fields that must be filled by admin, source and new staff i.e. username and password. New staff and source can perform admin login if already registered their name into the system. After a successful login, the first page that appears on the application of KT is the profile of the user that logs into the system.

296

V. CONCLUSIONS

E. Learning Evaluation Features Learning evaluation feature can only be accessed by a new staff when he had finished reading and understanding the existing module based on the features. This feature is an evaluation test which is applied to new staff where this can be used by XYZ as a measure to assess of the understanding of new staff with knowledge that has been transferred. This assessment will also be useful to one supporting vote when deciding on the end of the probation new staff at XYZ. In this feature admin is in charge to enter the test questions, manage test item in an application, displaying the results of the test. They makes learning from this evaluation. It is not the admin role, but all of this matter was made by the supervisor or certain parties related to that of the division, admin is only served to posting or uploading the test item.

Concerns in regarding high turnover at XYZ are solved using the conceptual model of KT that refers to Liyanage (2009). The main stages of the process are awareness, acquisition, transformation, association, application and knowledge externalization/feedback. The models generated to the features which is required by the user. There are login, profile feature, scheduling feature, modules feature, learning evaluation features and reporting features. In addition, from the analysis of the process of KT we designed an application model by use case diagram to development in the next research. The main application is aimed to manage profile, modules, learning evaluation, schedules, and reports. In profile, new staff can see the data profile and update it. The admin have a priority privilege to operate all functions of the features. We highly recommended this conceptual of KT model to be evaluated as well as for other startup business organization. It also needed to enhance become a knowledge management systems.

F. Reports features The function of the report features is to show the results and the progress of the implementation of KT process of training staff at XYZ. So on this feature will be shown reporting from the beginning of the process of knowledge transfer on a new staff. As a knowledge transfer schedule starts up learning outcome evaluation and feedback from new staff. Based on this features XYZ can know what knowledge has been transferred and the reporting used as one of the supporters of the final determination probation period. Assigned to manage this reporting feature is admin. He served for entering all the data and information that can demonstrate progress in the implementation of KT tools in the process of training at XYZ. Starting from the schedule, what of KT, learning outcome evaluation, feedback from new staff can print become a report and utilize as a form of documentation for XYZ. Here, the source allows to print and view reports.

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3]

[4] [5] [6]

.

297

C. Liyanage, T. Elhag, T. Ballal, and Q. Li, “Knowledge communication and translation – a knowledge transfer model,” J. Knowl. Manag., vol. 13, no. 3, pp. 118–131, 2009. I. Becerra-Fernandez and R. Sabherwal, Knowledge Management Systems and Processes. Armonk, New York: M.E. Sharpe, Inc., 2010. D. I. Sensuse, “Models and Frameworks of Knowledge Management : A Literature Review,” in International Conference on Information Science, Electronics and Electrical Engineering, 2014, pp. 1166–1170. L. Mládková, “Knowledge Management for Knowledge Workers,” Electron. J. Knowl. Manag., vol. 9, no. 3, pp. 248–258, 2011. A. Ladd and M. A. Ward, “An Investigation Of Environmental Factors Influencing Knowledge Transfer,” J. Knowl. Manag. Pract., pp. 1–11, 2002. N. N. Brunswick, GNB Knowledge Transfer Guide, no. December. 2010.

DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEM PEOPLE BUSINESS CREDIT METHOD USING ANALYTICAL HIERARCHY PROCESS (AHP) IN BANK BUKOPIN PADANG BRANCH Idwar1), Bonie Kenanga2) 1)

UNIDHA , Padan, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

UNIDHA, Padang, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Today the demand for credit through the Bank has been growing very rapidly. Credit is not only used for the lower middle class people alone but by all walks of life to meet their basic needs. One type of loan is pretty much demand that the People's Business Credit (KUR). KUR is a type of loan given by the government for the perpetrators of, Micro, Small, Medium Enterprises and Cooperatives (SME-K). There are several models that are used to build a DSS one of which is the Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP). AHP method used in this research is to determine which prospective borrowers are deserving of KUR Bank Bukopin by considering criteria - criteria that have been determined by the Bank. The criteria - the criteria on the basis of decisions by the Bank in determining the prospective debtors are credit status, business productivity, business conditions, warranties, and collectibility. This study designed a software that can assist the Bank in determining who the prospective customer is eligible to receive KUR. The results of AHP method is calculated automatically by the application Micorsoft access is made in the form of a database. Keywords: Decision Support System (DSS), People's Business Credit, Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP)

I. INTRODUCTION

structured into several components in the composition of the hierarchy, by giving subjective value on the importance of each variable in relative terms, and define a variable which has the highest priority in order to affect the outcome of the situation , The decision making process is basically choosing a best alternative. As do the structuring issues, determination of alternatives, penenetapan possible value for the variable aleatori, settler value, preference for time requirements, and specifications for the risk. Whatever the widening alternatives that can be set or terperincinya assessment value of possibilities, limitations that still surrounds is the basis of comparison in the form of a single criterion. The main equipment Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) is to have a functional hierarchy of human perception with its main input. With a hierarchy, a complex and unstructured problems to be solved in the group-group and organized into a hierarchical form. Based on the case - this, the AHP method used in this research is to determine which prospective

Key decision making capability in a rapid, precise and accurate is to succeed in the face of global competition. Information can be useful if used properly, even if it is processed by the system so that the information can be efficiently well. Systems that can help in decision-making is a decision support system, where the system is able to manage data and provide the best alternative solution Turban, [1] and Sprague, [2]. Bank Bukopin is one bank that is trusted by the government to provide facilities to the public KUR. Heightened interest of the community to get KUR, making the Bank the difficulty in determining who is eligible to receive KUR or not. Moreover, the process of determining who is eligible to receive KUR is still done manually, making it less efficient in implementation. Therefore, a system can be designed to assist the Bank in determining who is eligible to receive KUR, so it can be more efficient in its implementation.[5] Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) is a method to solve a complex situation is not

298

weight of each element. This step is to synthesize the judgment in the prioritization of the elements on the lowest hierarchy level to achieving goals. 8. Check the consistency of the hierarchy. If the value is more than 10% (percent) or 0.1 then the assessment data must be rectified.

borrowers are deserving of KUR Bank Bukopin by considering criteria - criteria that have been determined by the Bank. The criteria - the criteria on the basis of decisions by the Bank in determining the prospective debtors are credit status, business productivity, business conditions, warranties, and collectibility. Although the selection of prospective customers who will receive the KUR remain determined solely by the Bank, but this Decision Support System will display the global priority values from the highest to the lowest of the candidate and the client, so that will facilitate and assist the Bank in making decisions.

The steps in using AHP I do in this essay is as follows: 1. Determine the types of criteria KUR potential recipients. 2. Develop these criteria in a matrix form pairs. 3. The sum a column matrix. 4. Calculate the value of the criteria column elements with each element formula column divided by the number of column matrix. 5. Calculate the value of the priority criteria to add a row matrix formula results of step 4 and step 5 result divided by the number of criteria. 6. Define alternatives that would be an option. 7. Develop alternatives that have been determined in a matrix form pairs for each criterion. So there will be as many as n matrix between alternate pairs. 8. Each matrix between alternate pairs of n matrices, each matrix is summed perkolomnya. 9. Calculating the value of each alternative priority matrix between alternate pairs of the formula as in step 4 and step 5. 10. Test the consistency of each matrix between alternate pairs of formula each matrix element pairs in step 2 multiplied by the value of the priority criteria. The result of each row add up, then the result is divided by the respective total value of the priority criteria λ1, λ2, λ3, ......, λn. 11. Calculate the maximum value of lambda by the formula: λ max = ∑ n (1) 12. Calculate the value of index Consistent with the formula CI = λmax-n (2) n-1 13. Calculate the ratio of consistency, with the formula CR = CI (3)

II. METHOD

Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP) is a technique to support the decision-making process that aims to determine the best choice of several alternatives that can be taken. AHP was developed by Thomas L.Saaty in 1970, and has undergone many improvements and development to date.[3] Basically, the decision-making process is to choose an alternative. AHP is generally used for the purpose of setting priorities from a variety of alternative choices and those choices are complex or multiple criteria. Basically, there are several steps that need to be considered in using AHP, among others (Suryadi & Ramdhani 2010): [4] 1. Define the problem and determine the desired solution 2. Make a hierarchical structure that begins with a general purpose followed by sub-objectives-subobjectives, criteria and possible alternatives at the level of the criteria under 3. Make a pairwise comparison matrix that depicts the relative contribution or influence of each element on each goal level or above criteria. Comparisons are made based on the judgment of the decision maker to assess the importance of an element than other elements 4. Perform pairwise comparisons in order to obtain a value judgment entirely as many as n x [(n-1) / 2] fruit n is the number of elements compared 5. Calculate eigenvalues and tested for consistency if not inconsistent then repeated data retrieval 6. Repeat the steps 3, 4 and 5 for all levels of hierarchy. 7. Calculating the eigenvectors of each pairwise comparison matrix. Value eigenvector is the

RI

Where: RI is a random index value s derived from random table like Table 1.

299

TABEL 1 INDEX RANDOM N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

The process starts with the setup matrix of criteria, sub-criteria matrix setup, and completeness of assessment form filling, then the next process is the process of decision support systems creditworthiness. The main algorithm can be seen in the fig.1 below:

RI 0,00 0,00 0,58 0,90 1,12 1,24 1,32 1,41 1,45 1,49 1,51

If CR 1.96 or tcount < 1.96, then there are significant differences, statistically between the current conditions with the hope of employees on indicators assessed. "The selection I've ever participated conducted to obtain employees who have a desire to grow ", does not have significant differences. This means that all this time, the selections participated by the talented employees at Telkom University have been trying to explore the desire of candidates to continue to develop. As for the other indicators, there are still gaps between the expectations of employees on the importance of the talent management implementation with the current conditions as well as significant differences in almost all indicators. This indicates that the company still has to improve the effectiveness of talent management further through the improvement of existing indicators, in order to fulfill the expectations of employees.

A. The results of Descriptive Analysis Descriptive analysis used rank order based on data from respondents' answers. Processing resulted in a percentage of employee perception on the effectiveness of talent management at the Telkom University. B. Employee assessment regarding the Current Talent Management Employee assessment on the management talents on the current conditions as a whole based on the scores and grades. Management in managing talent associated with performance assessment, development and learning and regeneration of the leadership. Key performance indicators do not cover all aspects required. In addition, follow-up results of performance appraisal oriented to overcome the gap between the competences of employees with the competence required. That the School of Economics and Business (B) and the School of Industrial Engineering (E) have enough assessment meaning that there are many dimensions in managing talent that should be improved. Only the dimensions of Recruitment and Selection are considered effective in the implementation by the entire school. That the talented employees at Telkom University expects that all indicators and dimensions in talent management can be implemented effectively. That employees throughout the school expect that the indicators and dimensions of talent management can be effectively implemented both at the faculty and at the university level. The School of Informatics (G) has the highest expectations regarding the effectiveness of talent management for 87%. Meanwhile the School of Creative Industries has the lowest level of expectation that is 69%. Employees assessed the lack of the capability of organization to harmonize the procurement of new employees with the organization's strategy. Poor technical / facilities support for employees as a new employee occurred because of the unconformity of performance assessment as a measurement of competence with completion of work for the employee career development, as the company's focus is to improve the effectiveness of talent management. Implementation of the HR department's role in the relationship with the employees and as an innovator is still low, in particular, for the support management in learning and development activities and adequate facilities. Implementation of the HR department's role in the relationship with the employees and as an innovator is still low, specifically, for the support management in learning and development activities and adequate facilities. On the other hand, there are number of indicators that show the company has been effective in the management of The Talent. Employees assessed the organization has been able to implement the recruitment of employees which implies technical skills and ability in accordance with the organizations requirements. Selection process has indicated the employees who have committed to develop.

IV. CONCLUSIONS Based on the research that has been conducted, it can be concluded: 1. The process of attracting talent including planning, recruitment, selection and orientation at the Telkom University has not worked optimally due to the employee expectations score for the overall indicator is still above the current conditions score. This means that there are improvement opportunities for the talents procurement process due to the implementation of talent management that are currently running at the Telkom University still unable to fulfill the expectations of employees. 2. The process of developing talents including performance assessment, talent mapping, development and learning requirements analysis and the implementation of development and learning at the Telkom University has not worked optimally due to the employee expectations score for the overall indicator is still above the current conditions score. This means that there are improvement opportunities for the process of talent development due to the implementation of talent management that is currently running at the Telkom University still unable to fulfill the expectations of employees. 3. The process of binding talents including career planning, succession planning and maintaining talent at the Telkom University has not worked optimally due to the employee expectations score for the overall indicator is still above the current conditions score. This means that there are improvement opportunities for the process of binding talents due to the implementation of talent management that is currently running at the Telkom University still unable to fulfill the expectations of employees. 4. Indicators and dimensions of talent management can be effectively implemented both at the school and at the university level. School of Informatics (G) has the highest expectations regarding the effectiveness of talent

306

[7]

management for 87%. Meanwhile, the School of Creative Industries has the lowest level of expectation that is 69%.

[8]

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4]

[5] [6]

M. Armstrong, Michael, Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice. Eleventh edition. Kogan Page Limited : USA, 2009. R. Burbach, and T. Royle, Talent On Demand : Talent Management In The German And Irish Subsidiaries Of A US Multinational Corporation. Personnel Review. Vol.39, No.4, pp. 414-431, 2010. V. Garpersz, All in One : Integrated Total Quality Talent Management. Bogor : Tri-Al-Bros Publishing, 2013. N.D.Green, Norma D’Annunzio, Managing The Talent Management Pipeline Towards A Greater Understanding Of Senior Managers’ Perspectives In The Hospitality And Tourism Sector. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management. Vol.20, No.7, pp.807-819, 2008. P.B. Langenegger, M. Philippe and B.Staffelbach, Effectiveness Of Talent Management Strategies. European Journal of International Management. Vol.5, No.5, pp.524-539, 2011. C. Manopo, Competency Based Talent And Performance Management System. Jakarta : Salemba Empat, 2011.

[9] [10] [11]

307

S.Nilsson, and P.Ellstrom, Employability And Talent Management: Challenges For HRD Practices. European Journal Of Training And Development. Vol. 36, No. 1, pp. 26-45, 2012. O.Piansoongnern, and P.Anurit, Talent Management: Quantitative And Qualitative Studies Of HR Practitioners In Thailand. The International Journal of Organizational Innovation. Vol.3, No.1, pp.280-302, 2010. W.A. Schiemann, Willian A, Alignment, Capability, Engagement: Pendekatan Baru Talent , 2011. Sugiyono, Metode Penelitian Kuantitatif, Kualitatif, dan R&D. Bandung: Alfabeta, 2011. V. Vaimen, S. Hugh, and D.Collings, Talent Management Decision Making. Management Decision. Vol. 50, No. 5, pp. 925-941, 2012.

MANAGEMENT STRATEGIC DEVELOPMENT MARKETING COOPERATIVE IN THE ERA OF GLOBAL Agustin Sukarsono1) 1)

STT Pomosda Nganjuk

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. This study aims to determine the direction of cooperative management and marketing strategy that will provide a reference about the profile and needs of employees that need to be met. Thus, it is expected to emerge the connection between business strategy in the future with the development strategy of strategic management to be run. Employee profile needs to be reflected in Human Resource Management in a company, which includes; planning, organizing, coordinating, implementing and monitoring of procurement, development, provision of remuneration, integration, maintenance, and separation of labor in order to achieve organizational goals. he methodology used in this research is the study of literature or library research direction and stages of marketing development strategy, starting with the Human Resource Management approach through; mechanical approach, paternalism approach, and approach social system. Namely the implementation phase; recruitment (procurement), maintenance (maintenance), and development (development). The results of this research is a description of their function, namely HRM workforce planning, workforce development, performance appraisal, remuneration, maintenance of employment and dismissal. Urgency their HRM HRM means that for the set, taking care of human resources based on the company's vision for the objectives can be achieved by optimum organization, staffing and personnel within the organization, improve performance, develop a corporate culture that supports the implementation of innovation and flexibility to meet the era of free competition. Therefore, the researchers recommend that improving the quality of the resources must still continue to be pursued. Because even if a company or cooperation in this global era does not have a comparative advantage is good, but has a competitive advantage, the company or the cooperation could better compete with the company or cooperation in the current global era. Keywords: Strategic Management, Human Resource, Development, Recriutment, Maintenance

I. INTRODUCTION

Problem Formulation From the discussion of this paper, is expected to: 1. How does the cooperative marketing strategy? 2. How is the direction and stage management development cooperative marketing strategy?

A false sense of cooperative management into the early decline of competitiveness of cooperatives. Why not, the number of cooperatives Indonesia reached 150 thousand units with nearly 30 million members teapi overall business volume only reached Rp 68 T with Total SHU Rp 5 T PD compared with Indonesia, which reached more than 5000 T, the cooperative only accounts for less than 2%. What is wrong? If we accuse the agency, then Dekopin as the only institution that houses the Indonesian cooperatives should be held responsible. But in my opinion is not up there, like anything else we yell at Dekopin not much we can get. The last hope is to improve our cooperative management. Marketing is very closely related and are an integral part of the sale, either in the form of goods or services. By using the right marketing strategy, will attract many consumers that we aim as the market share of products that we offer. Even if the products we offer without a single glance was only sold, probably due to the implementation of the marketing strategy of false or inaccurate, it could be because we offer goods or services to the person or company that is not quite right.

Objectives The purpose of this paper is made is: 1. To find the right cooperative marketing strategy! 2. To determine the direction and stage management development cooperative marketing strategy? II. LITERATURE REVIEW A. Definition of Management Strategies Management marketing strategy can be understood from the definition of the two terms, namely the management and marketing strategy. Simply put, management can be understood as a process of planning, organizing, mobilization, and control of all resources to achieve a goal efficiently and effectively. Understanding the marketing strategy is making decisions regarding the marketing mix, marketing costs, and the allocation of marketing, in relation to the conditions of competition and the environmental conditions expected. From the notion of management and

308

marketing strategies can be concluded that the management strategy of marketing is the process of planning, organizing, and monitoring of marketing strategies. Thus, in the management of marketing strategies embodied the meaning of planning, organizing, and monitoring of policies covering the marketing of the marketing mix, marketing costs, and the allocation of marketing.

for something that is supported by the ability and willingness to buy. The desire into demand when supported with purchasing power. This difference can be explained that the marketers do not create needs; needs already exists. Marketers affect keinginandan demand by creating a product that is suitable, attractive, affordable and easily obtained by destination customer.

B. Objectives Strategic Management Marketing Cooperative, namely: The purpose of marketing is to know and understand the customer so that the product is suitable and can be sold by itself. Ideally marketing led to the customer is ready to buy so that remains is how to make the product available. While the marketing process consists of analysis of market opportunities, researching and selecting target markets, designing marketing strategies, designing marketing programs, and organizing, implementing and overseeing the marketing efforts. The marketing strategy is a series of concerted actions towards a sustainable competitive advantage. Factors that influence the marketing strategy is: 1. The micro factors, namely marketing intermediaries, PEMK, competitors and the public, 2. Macro factors, namely demographic / economic, political / legal, technological / physical and social / cultural. While the marketing strategy of the corner pendangan seller is: 1. Strategic location (place), 2. 2 Product y ang quality (product), 3. The competitive price (price) 4. A vigorous promotion (promotion). 5. Meanwhile, from the standpoint of the customer are: 6. The needs and desires of customers (customer needs and wants), 7. The cost of the customer (cost to the customer), 8. Convenience (convenience) 9. Communication (comunication).

2. Products The product is something that can be offered to meet the needs or desires of customers. The importance of a physical product is not on kepelikannya but on jasayang can be given. Therefore, in making the product should pay attention to physical products and services provided by these products. 3. Value, Cost and Satisfaction Value is the estimated total subscribers about the ability of a product to meet their needs. Each product has different capabilities to meet these needs, but the customer will choose the product manayang will give the highest total satisfaction. The value of each product actually depends on how far the product can approach the ideal product, is included in the price. 4. Exchange, Transaction and Relationship The exchange is one way to get a desired product from someone by offering something in return. Exchange is a process and not a single moment. Each party is said to be in an exchange when they negotiate and lead to an agreement. If agreement is reached, it is called a transaction. The transaction is an exchange of value between the two parties. For smoothness of the transaction, the relationship that is good and mutual trust among customers, distributors, dealers and suppliers will build a relationship / bond of economic, technical and strong social partners. 5. Market The market consists of all potential customers who have specific needs or desires and is willing and able to participate in the exchange to meet the needs or desires. The term market to show the number of buyers and sellers conduct transactions on a product.

The final goal and the concept of the marketing strategy is fully customer satisfaction ("Total Customer statisfaction"). Fully customer satisfaction does not mean give what we think we desire from them, but what they really want and when and how they want. Or briefly is to meet the needs of customers. There is a close relationship between the quality of a product with customer satisfaction and industry profits. Higher quality produce higher customer satisfaction, while supporting higher prices and often lower cost. Top executives of today see the task to improve and control the quality of products as a priority, so that every industry has no other choice but to run a total quality management ( "Total Quality Management").

6. Marketing and Marketers Marketing is the human desire in relation to the market, marketing means working with the market to realize transaksiyang may occur in meeting human needs and desires. Marketers are looking for resources from others and want to offer something of value to it. If one party is actively looking for an exchange rather than the other, then the first party is the marketer and the second party is a potential buyer. Of the core concepts of marketing it, there are five marketing concepts that underlie the way organizations conduct marketing activities. a) Production Insightful Marketing Concepts This concept is one of the oldest concepts, which will choose a product that is easily available and cheap. In this case the focus to achieve high production efficiency as well as extensive distribution coverage. This concept can be executed if product demand exceeds the offer and where the

C. Concept Of Marketing 1. Needs, Wants and Demand There is a difference between needs, wants and demands. The human need is a state where people feel does not have the basic satisfaction. Needs are not created by the community or the marketer, but has adadan etched in biological human condition. desire is the desire to be certain of satisfying those needs. Human desire is formed by the strength and social institutions. While the inquiry is a desire

309

cost of the product is very steeper. The weakness of this marketing concept is friendly and the service was not bad. b) The concept of Product Marketing Insight This concept argues that customers will choose products that offer quality, best performing and innovative in this respect satisfactory attention to making better products and continuously improve them. Insightful industry does not tend to pay attention to the wishes and needs of customers, so marketing departments will have difficulty in marketing. c) Marketing Concepts Insightful Selling This concept argues that if the customer is left alone, the customer will not buy products in sufficient quantities so that the industry must do business sales and aggressive promotions. This concept assumes that customers are reluctant to buy and must be encouraged to buy. This concept is often used in "products that are not discoverable" or not thought to be purchased as well as the industries that have excess production capacity. d) Marketing Concepts Marketing Insight This concept argues that the key to achieve the goal of the industry consists of determining the needs and wants of target markets and deliver the desired satisfaction more effectively and efficiently than competitors.

f. dissolution of the cooperative

D. Management and Cooperative Management Cooperative said as contra failing power means is sederhanya as countervailing power of capitalism. How? We know the market economic system the greater the amount that we spend more and more discounts that we get, in these conditions for the owners of capital or capital will be very profitable. Meanwhile, for those who do not have enough capital or capital will get a high price. In an effort to increase the economic bargaining power and economies of scale that the people of this cooperative is required. In cooperative management, understand that the cooperative was the main force is the common needs in an economic context, voluntary and transparent manner and the total participation of members. Logically when members feel the economic benefits of cooperative economic base then the member will run. The organizational structure of the cooperative was formed in such a way in accordance with the ideology and strategy development to acquire Strategic cooperative competitiveness so that each may have a different form functionally for adjusting the strategies that are being developed but are basic idologi primarily related to the cooperative organization will point out the similarity. It helps us little about the organization of cooperatives. at least we know the cooperative organization that plural 3 devices used are: (1) Meeting of Members; (2) The Board; (3) Trustees. Device cooperative organizations Members Meeting is the highest forum, which was attended by members of the cooperative as the owner. Privileges RA them are set: a. AD / ART b. Public Policy Organization, Management, and cooperative efforts c. Selecting, lifting, memberhantikan administrators and supervisors d. RGBPK and RAPBK e. Ratification of the board and supervisory accountability

Responsibilities of the Board of Cooperative Cooperative management was responsible for all efforts related to the duties and mandates. Device cooperative organization Supervisor Trustees chosen by the RA to oversee the implementation of decisions RAT and ideology. Supervisory task is not to find fault but to ensure that the activities undertaken by the cooperative in accordance with the ideology, AD / ART cooperative and decisions RA. Duties, obligations and cooperative supervisory authority as follows. 1) Supervisory authorities and the co-operatives in charge of supervising the implementation of policies and management of the organization. 2) Supervisors shall make a report on the results of kepengawasanya and keep the results of his report to a third party. 3) Supervisory cooperative examine the records and existing physical dikoperasi and get the necessary information.

Duties and obligations of cooperative management are: 1) The officials in charge of managing the cooperative according to the decision RAT. 2) To carry out the task, the board shall: a. Cooperative management is obliged to submit proker b. Cooperative management is obliged to submit financial reports and accountability c. Cooperative management is obliged to keep books of financial and inventory. d. Cooperative management is obliged to maintain the administration e. RAT held his obligation cooperative board. Cooperative management authority: a. Board authorized to represent the cooperative inside and outside the cooperative. b. Board is authorized to take legal action or other measures for the benefit of members and the cooperative expediency. c. Board authority to decide admission and dismissal of members in accordance with AD / ART.

Holistic marketing concept is based on the development, design, and implementation of marketing programs, marketing processes, and marketing activities that recognize the breadth and interdependence. Holistic marketing is a marketing approach to try to acknowledge and reconcile the scope and complexity of marketing activities. So the competitive strategies in each department will determine competitive advantage and superior quality. B. Stages of Development Strategy of the Department of Marketing (Focus on HRM) 1. Planning In the process of preparation planning is the need for human resources to determine the range of work that may arise. What can be done is to do an estimate / forecast the vacant job, the amount, timing, and so forth. There are two factors that need to be considered in the preparation, ie

310

internal factors such as the number of new employees' needs, organizational structure, existing departments, and others. External factors such as employment law, labor pasa conditions, and so forth.

not show performance enough. Voluntary Dismissal is separation of an employee of an organization on the initiative of the organization or employees own volition. d. The resignation is the separation of an employee who has completed the maximum work period of the organization or commonly known by the term pension.

2. Recruitment & Selection a. Recruitment of labor / Recruitment. Recruitment is a process to find a candidate or candidates, employees, workers, managers, or a new workforce to meet the needs of tablespoons oraganisasi or company. In this stage the necessary analysis of existing positions to create a job description / job description and job specifications / job specification. b. Selection of labor / Selection. Selection of labor is a process of finding the right employment of the many existing candidate or candidates. The initial stage needs to be done after receiving the application file is viewed resume / cv / curriculum vittae belonging to the applicants. Based on the views expressed by Cut Zurnali an HR department to recruit employees with qualified knowledge workers that an organization or company can achieve a competitive advantage in the long term, while providing benefits to the stakeholders of the organization, not just at the moment but also in the future front.

C. Examples Of Application / Case Study; "Strategy And Management Plan Human Resources Pt Semen Gresik" 1. Human Resources Development (Human Capital Master Plan) Anticipating the growth and development of the Company are starting to aggressively last several years, the Company has developed a Human Capital Master Plan (HCMP) which is a framework of the gradual development of the Company HC in the next five-year period, in order to ensure the Company's vision tercapaianya. In HCMP, the Company has set policies and developing a fundamental in the management of human resources. All policies are drawn up regarding the development of HC boils down to one goal, the Company owns and mengembangangkan HC with the best talent to ensure the achievement of the vision and mission statement. 2. Hcmp Containing The Four Phases Of The Company Made In Sustainable, namely: The first phase, 2009 - 2010, setting the foundation of human capital, ie the preparation and commencement HCMP transition alignment systems implementation activities and the optimization of human resources management system framework flow of human capital among the members of the Company group. The second phase, the implementation HCMP, 2011 2012, growth and strengthening. Company to strengthen its human capital system and the acceleration of HR performance on an ongoing basis. Target this stage is the acceleration capability and HR performance significantly in order to support the achievement of corporate objectives. The third stage, in 2013, excellent performance. At this stage the entire Human Capital System has achieved optimal conditions and are at a high degree of alignment to demonstrate high performance system and culture. The fourth stage, 2014 and beyond, the Company's management are aligned with the HC HC management of world-class companies. At this stage, the management of HC conducted by the Company is able to create the image or changing the public's perception of the Company. The Company has become a world class company with international management standards, the employer of choice in the business and corporate persemanan the selection of the best talents who are interested in the field of cement falls.

3. Training, Development & Performance Assessment a. The development and evaluation of employees (Development and evaluation). Workers who work in the organization or company must master the duties and responsibilities. For that we need a briefing that the existing workforce can be more controlled and experts in their respective fields as well as improving existing performance. Thus the process of development and evaluation of employees is very important from the employees at both high and low levels. b. Provide compensation and protection of employees (Compensation and protection). Compensation is a reward for the contribution employees regularly work from the organization or company. Compensation is very important and adapted to labor market conditions that exist in the external environment. Compensation that is not in accordance with existing conditions can cause labor problems later in life or may cause harm to the organization or company. 4. Promotion, Transfer and Separation a. Promotion is a kind of transfer that includes the reassignment of an employee in a position that is likely to be given a higher payment and the responsibilities, rights and greater opportunities. Demotion, sometimes called the transfer down, is a kind of transfer include withholding payments, rights and opportunities. b. Separation, also called the dismissal, often called downsizing, is a temporary or definitive transfer of an employee from the payroll. Generally it is to reduce the excess burden of labor costs and the company's financial problems more serious. c. Termination of management measures in the form of separation is an employee of the organization. for violating the rules of the organization or because it does

3. Training And Development One focus HCMP namely the implementation of leadership development program with the goal of producing leaders who have qualified leadership capabilities, both from the technical aspects, leadership, and business ACUMEN at all levels and the structural and functional organization. Leaders in the Company strived to have their core competencies and leadership elements. The core competence

311

consists of teamwork, continuous learning, serves oriented, professional. While elements of the form adaptibility leadership, problem solving, change leadership, planning organizing, and developing people. Human Resource Management is required to improve the effectiveness of human resources within the organization. The goal is to give the organization an effective working unit. To achieve this goal, the study of management personnel will demonstrate how the company should acquire, develop, use, evaluate, and maintain employees in the amount (quantity) and type (quality).

means that for the set, taking care of human resources based on the company's vision for the objectives can be achieved by optimum organization, staffing and personnel within the organization, improve performance, develop a corporate culture that supports the implementation of innovation and flexibility to meet the era of free competition. Therefore, the researchers recommend that improving the quality of the resources must still continue to be pursued. Because even if a company or cooperation in this global era does not have a comparative advantage is good, but has a competitive advantage, the company or the cooperation could better compete with the company or cooperation in the current global era.

III. CONCLUSIONS Knowing the direction of cooperative management and marketing strategies will provide a reference about the profile and needs of employees that need to be met. Thus, it is expected to emerge the connection between business strategy in the future with the development strategy of strategic management to be run. Employee profile needs to be reflected in Human Resource Management in a company, which includes; planning, organizing, coordinating, implementing and monitoring of procurement, development, provision of remuneration, integration, maintenance, and separation of labor in order to achieve organizational goals. Directions and stages of marketing development strategy, starting with the Human Resource Management approach through; mechanical approach, paternalism approach, and approach social system. Namely the implementation phase; recruitment (procurement), maintenance (maintenance), and development (development). The function of the HRM namely workforce planning, workforce development, performance appraisal, remuneration, maintenance of employment and dismissal. Urgency their HRM HRM

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

312

P.Kotler and G.Armstrong, Principles of Marketing by., 12th edition publisher Jakarta, 2008. F.Tjiptono, Marketing Strategies, 2nd Edition, Publisher Andi, Yogyakarta, 2004. D.Saladin, Consumer Behaviour and Strategic Marketing, Publisher Linda Works. Bandung, 2003. Khotijah, 2004, Smart Strategi Of Marketing Persaingan Pasar Global. Bandung, Alfabeta Pearce & Ricahrd, Strategic Management: Planing For Domestic and Global Competition, 14th Edition. ISBN-13: 978-0077862510, Publisher: McGraw-Hill Education, 2014. http://khoirulanisastikes.blogspot.co.id/2013/01/makalahmanajemen-strategik.html

ANALYSIS OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOR: WHY THEY CHOOSE PLEASED WITH COSTS EXPENSIVE EDUCATION Nurmawati 1) Ida Kusnawati Tjahjani 2) 1)

University 45, Surabaya, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

Universitas 45, Surabaya, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. This study aims to determine the factors that influence consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Collecting data in this study using questionnaires, with a sample of 100 people taken by accident sampling and multiple regression analysis.  Beresearch resultsrdasarkanon the analysis of the effect of various attributes individually, it can be seen that each - each of variable quality, facilities variable and variable costs have a significant influence on consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Among these variables, quality attributes are the variables that most influence. However, when seen in the four variables simultaneously, then all these variables have a significant influence they deserve as a predictor variable. For simultaneous analysis results can be seen that together or simultaneously, the four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because the F ratio of 37.271, with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 is not significant as independent variables in education but if together four variables are significant as predictors. Keywords: Consumer Behavior, Accident Sampling, Regression Analysis, Estimator Variable and Variable Predictors

I. INTRODUCTION

FORMULATION OF THE PROBLEM in obtaining customer satisfaction to fulfill his wish, someone must have a specific reason. From the description above, it can be determined that the main problem is "How consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost".

Many service agencies in Indonesia which is engaged in various fields, one of which is education. Education is one of the most important priorities for most people and is one of the service agencies are always sought after by consumers. Therefore, many educational institutions are competing to attract the consumers to choose the institution. Competitive conditions such as education that occurs at this time, require that a consumer must act selective when choosing educational institutions. Most of the people have hope to be able to continue their education of at least graduated from high school / vocational school, therefore, to produce the next generation of quality required good handling and precise. An education should rely on technological advancement and customer satisfaction as well as prioritizing service to customers, thus requiring costly. School is an institution designed for the teaching of students with teacher supervision. Schools have an important role in enhancing the intellectual development since the school is a second place for children to seek knowledge and develop skills or talents. Good schools and in accordance with the character of the child and will be able to guide your child toward a better future. Thus choosing a good school and in accordance with the character of the child is very important. There are many factors that influence parents in choosing SMA / SMK, include internal factors of parents, the school or the internal environment, such as: the income of parents, school programs, facilities, location, and cost. Need to do some research to find out why consumers choose education / schools at high cost.

RESEARCH OBJECTIVES

The goal of theof this study are: 1. To identify factors that influence consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. 2. To identify the most dominant factor in choosing educational costly. II.

LITERATURE REVIEW

A. Understanding Consumer Behavior and Purchase Decision Ujang Sumarwan [1] states that: consumer behavior is all the activities, actions, as well as a psychological process that encourages such action at the time before buying, when buying, using, spent produkdan services after doing the above matters or activities evaluated. Philip Kotler and Kevin Lane Keller [2] states consumer behavior is the study of how individuals, groups and organizations select, purchase, use, and how goods, services, ideas, or experiences to satisfy their needs and desires. Nembah F. Hartimbul Ginting defines consumer behavior is an individual act in meperoleh, use and dispose of goods and services the economy, including the decision-making process before setting actions. Meanwhile, according to

313

Supranto & Nandan Limakrisna [3] defines the behavior of consumers as a dynamic interaction between cognition, affect, behavior, and environment in which humans carry out exchange activities in their lives. Schiffman and Kanuk book Sumarwan Ujang [1] defines an election decision as an act of two or more alternative options. A consumer who wanted to do a choice he should have alternative options. According Ujang Sumarwan [1] that: the consumer's decision to decide to purchase or consume certain products will be preceded by the introduction of measures needs, the time, the situation changes, the ownership of the product, product consumption, individual differences, the influence of marketing, information retrieval, search internal and external search. Kotler and Armstrong [4] states that, perception is the process whereby a person select, organize, and interpret information to form a meaningful picture of the world.

C. MULTIPLE LINEAR REGRESSION ANALYSIS Multiple linear regression analysis used in this study to determine the influence of consumer perception towards education at a high cost which is reflected in the three variables, namely variables brandimage,cost and facilities. Multiple regression analysis is used to determine the relationship of independent variables on the dependent variable, as proposed by Sugiyono [5] that the multiple linear regression analysis is used by researchers, when the researchers intend to predict how the situation (rise and fall) the dependent variable (criterion), if two or more independent variables as predictors factors manipulated (ups and downs of the value). D. THE THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK Based on a literature review that has been presented, the framework is the decision to choose education with expensive fees as follows:

III. RESEARCH METHOD Based on theresearch method is a survey carried out among populations large and small, the data studied are data from a sample taken from the population, so the found events relative, distribution and relationships between variables sociological or psychological. (Sugiyono) [5]. Based on their explanations level which is a descriptive study was conducted to determine the value of an independent variable, either one or more variables(independent)without making comparisons, or connect between one variable with another variable. (Sugiyono) [5]. Based on the type of data and the model data analysis which is quantitative research. Quantitative data is data that form of words, sentences, schematics, and pictures. (Sugiyono) [5]. Population and sampling population in this study is the education at a high cost. Parubak (2004) explains that, the choice of respondents was taken usingmethod, accidental samplingwhich is determined by chance in the sense that all users of education at a high cost. Data analysis technique used is the analysis of factors, with a sample of 100 people.

a. Quality b. Facility c. Cost d. Location

1. Independent Variables (free) as a consumer motivation. Someone chose education at a high cost, because such education has attributes that meet individual needs so as to encourage consumers to enroll in the school. The study attributes identified as benefits are sought to meet the desire for better education are as follows: a. Quality b. Facility c. Cost d. Location 2. Dependent Variable (affected) as the variable behavior of consumer behavior is a manifestation of consumer preference in choosing education at a high cost. E.

POPULATION AND SAMPLE

Population in this study is consumers who choose education at a high cost. In this study, the number of samples to be studied there were 100 respondents to themethod. accident sampling.

A. DATA COLLECTION TECHNIQUES Interview (interview) is a dialogue conducted by the interviewer (the interviewer) to obtain information from interviewees (interviewer).Researchers used the free interview that the interviewer is free to ask about anything, but also remember about the data that will be collected. Questionnaire (questionnaire) is a number of written questions that are used to obtain personal information from respondents about, or things he knew. Researchers use the enclosed questionnaire, which already provided the answer questionnaire so that respondents can just choose. B.

The Decission to choose Education at a high costs

IV. RESULT AND DISCUSSION of this analysis is used to examine the relationship between independent variables and the dependent variable is the variable characteristic of education at a high cost to the consumer behavior in choosing education with a model that has been determined, the results are as follows: Y = - 3.604 + 0,554x1 + 0, 44x2 +0,46x3+0,0075x4

DATA ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES

Data analysis method used was the factor analysis with SPSS for windows. Malhotra [6] explains that the factor analysis is a group of procedures that are used to reduce or summarize data.

X1 r 0.238 prob (0.00001) t 5.13 F ratio: 37.271 Prob : 0.000001 2

314

X2 0.1616 (0.00012) 4.024

X3 0.1596 (0.0001 3.993

X4 0.0005 (0. 9495) -0.069

Multiple R:0.830 Based on the results of the regression analysis, we can know the role of each variable separately motivation of the decision to choose education with expensive fees are variable quality significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost which is indicated by the t value (5.13) is greater than the value t table (1.685) with the magnitude of the effect of 0.554. As for the variable facilities, significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (4.024) is greater than the value t table (1.685). and have the effect of 0.44. Variable fees are set for education is a variable that significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (3.993) is greater than the value t table (1.685) .Variabel locations in education does not significantly influence the decision choose education at a high cost as evidenced by the t value (0.069) is smaller than the value t table (1.685). Results of the analysis showed that simultaneously together or simultaneous four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because nlai F ratio of 37.271, with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 not as significant as independent variables in education but if together four variables are significant as predictors. V. CONCLUSIONS

facilities variable and variable costs have a significant influence on consumer behavior in choosing education at a high cost. Among these variables, quality attributes are the variables that most influence. However, if viewed four variables simultaneously then all these variables have a significant influence they deserve as a predictor variable. 2. For simultaneous analysis results can be seen that together or simultaneous four variables significantly influence the decision to choose education at a high cost because nlai F ratio of 37.271 with a probability of 0.00001 or 0.001%. Even if viewed individually or separately variable x4 is not significant as variables influence in education, but if together four variables are significant as predictors. REFERENCES [1] U. Suwarman, Perilaku Konsumen Teori dan Penerapannya dalam Pemasaran. Bogor: Ghalia Indonesia, 2011. [2] P. Kotler, and K.L.Kervin, Marketing Management 13th Edition. (Alih bahasa: Bob Sabran). Jakarta: Erlangga, 2009. [3] Supranto, J dan Nandan Limakrisna. 2007. Perilaku Konsumen dan Strategi Pemasaran. Jakarta: Mitra Wacana Media. [4] P. Kotle, dan G. Amstrong, Prinsip-prinsip Pemasaran. Jakarta: Erlangga, 2001. [5] Sugiyono, 2007, Metode Penelitian Bisnis, Cetakan Kesembilan, Penerbit CV Alpha Betha, Bandung [6] Malhotra, Naresh, K., 1996. Marketing Research An Applied Orientation, Prentice-Hall International, Inc., New Jersey. [7] Schiffman, Leon G dan Leslie L. Kanuk. 2004. Perilaku Konsumen. Jakarta: Indeks.

1. Based on thean analysis of the effect of various attributes individually, each found that the variable quality,

315

DEVELOPING COOPERATIVE OF SUBAK TO IMPROVE AGRIBUSINESS: Case of Subak of Guama, Bali Province Dr. Ir. Gede Sedana, M.Sc. MMA Faculty of Agriculture, Dwijendra University-Bali Email: [email protected] Abstract. Farmers group in Bali called subak as a traditional irrigation system and has been acknowledge as a world cultural heritage rewarded by UNESCO. In order to maintain subak an support rural development, government has introduced agribusiness program into subak system by establishing subak cooperative. This study aims at portraying the establishment and development of subak cooperative and describing the strength, weaknesses of subak cooperative relating to agribusiness works. The study was conducted in a Subak of Guama selected purposively as it is the only one of subaks in Bali which has been developed by government. Data collected was fully analyzed by using descriptive method. The results of study pointed out that cooperative of Guama subak has established since 2003 under the law of cooperative. The main agribusiness works run by cooperative consists of integrated crops management, crop livestock system and micro credit. Aside from these, the activities conducted are producing of rice seeds and organic fertilizer and providing of agro-inputs service. The strengths of subak cooperative are (i) good interrelation among the farmers; (ii) the bond between farmers and their management board, (iii) awig awig (internal law) of subak; and (iv) religious value in the subak. While the weakness are limited size of paddy field, (ii) low formal education of farmers, (iii) the limited good agricultural practices/technologies, and (iv) lack of post-harvest technology. Keywords: Subak, agribusiness, cooperative and social capital. institutions with a top-down approach led to low participation of community. In this context, the study of economic development at the local institution (subak) which has cultural basis such as social capital needs to be done. The strategy of community empowerment and local institutional are seen as urgent in rural development programs to strengthen the networks of rural economy (Elizabeth, 2007). Subak that has successfully conducted agribusiness activity is Subak Guama located in the District of Marga, Tabanan regency since 2002 through the Direct Financial Assistance for Community (BLM). This subak was purposively selected as a research study. Objectives of the study are to portray the existence of subak cooperative and describe the strength, weaknesses, opportunities and threats of subak cooperative relating to agribusiness works. Data collected by employing interview, focus discussion group, and direct observation. Data is fully analyzed by using descriptive method.

I. INTRODUCTION One of the agricultural development objectives is to develop economic activities on rural economic development through agribusiness and develop agribusiness companies which have high competitiveness, sustainability and decentralization (Fatah, 2006). Agriculture and rural developments held in Indonesia seem to get less serious attention. The main mistake in agricultural development still reflects a marginalization concept for the local institutions. This unsuccessful achievement of agriculture and rural development is caused by lacking of involvement of the existing organizations in the community or a rural farm itself (Fatah, 2006; Syahyuti, 2007; Chambers, 1983). All forms of traditional aspects (social, cultural customs) in the villages and communities must be empowered to achieve the goal of agricultural and rural development (Elizabeth, 2007). In case of Bali, the agricultural development has been carried out with less emphasis on the local institution endowment which has been existed. (Elizabeth and Iwan, 2009). Institution of farmers tends to be positioned as a mere tool to implement the project, not as an attempt to the empowerment and without any strengthening of their social capital (Syahyuti, 2007). Hartono (2009) also argues that the powerlessness of the functioning of local institutions such as farmer groups and Water Users Association (WUA), including subak will result in the failure of agribusiness development in rural areas. Sahyuti (2007) adds that the introduction of outside institutions that have less attention to existing structure and networks of local

II. RESULT AND DISCUSSION

  1.

DEVELOPING SUBAK COOPERATIVE WITHIN SUBAK OF GUAMA Subak of Guama is located in the sub-district of Marga spread across three villages, namely Selanbawak, Peken Batannyuh and Belayu. Water source of subak is from Cangi weir built by the government on the river Yeh Sungi. Some other subaks which also obtain water from the weir of Cangi are: (i) Pacung Babakan; (ii); Cangi Selatan; (iii) Apit Jurang; (iv) Uma Dalem; (v) Bulan, (vi) Selanbawakand (vii ) Lepud. The entire subaks getting

316

water from weir of Cangi have merged into a coordination body, called Subak-gede Asta Buana Cangi. The area of Guama subak is 179 ha where its rice fields have relatively flat topography. Availability of water in the subak for planting along the year is sufficient with the cropping pattern of rice-rice-secondary crops. Physical infrastructure such as roads either for four-wheel and two wheels in the subak and the surrounding area is relatively good, so be a contributing factor in the development of agribusiness. In addition, network communication, electricity and drinking water to rural communities including farmers as subak’ members are very good. 2. Establishment of subak cooperative BPTP (The Agency of Research for Agricultural Technology) Bali made as a pilot project in Subak of Guama for an integrated agribusiness development through subak, which was initiated the formation of the integrated agribusiness activities. In an effort to ensure the sustainability of agribusiness development on the subak basis, empowerment activities had carried out since the beginning process by employing intensive and participatory approaches (see Figure 1). Community empowerment is a concept of economic development covering social values (Chambers, 1983; Chambers, 1995; Korten, 1987). Figure 1 Empowerment process in subak cooperative establishment

legislation on cooperatives. Agribusiness activities in Subak of Guama run through a cooperative unit that was formed under the auspices of the subak. Schematically, the Subak Guama institutional adjustment can be seen in the Figure 2. In this institutional adjustment, position of kelihan subak or pekaseh still has a central role to oversee the cooperative established. This condition indicates that the formation of cooperatives still remain under the umbrella of subak. Figure 2 Institutional adjustment of subak orienting agribusiness

Source: Sedana (2013) 3.

Development of subak cooperative An institutional adjustment made in subak is an effort to develop agribusiness activities and still be under the auspices of the subak institutions. There are several advantages gained by establishing new institutions within the subak, which are as follows. a. Members can easily get the agro-inputs for both groups and individuals. b. Members easily obtain credit. c. Subak easily adjusts members’ obligations due to awig awig subak included in economic management. d. Profits of economic activities within subak can be part of individual profit as well e. Make it easier to get access to external capital. f. Facilitate access to information

Source: Sedana (2013) Mentoring by BPTP especially in Subak of Guama significantly contribute to encourage and motivate farmers and subak to establish subak cooperatives (called KUAT, Koperasi Usaha Agribisnis Terpadu or Cooperative of Integrated Agribusiness Activities). The staffs of BPTP with the management bords of subak and cooperative further enhance its role in the development of agribusiness. Agribusiness development made subak to have adjustment on its organizational structure. As known, socio-cultural aspects of agriculture become very dominant in the subak system, in other hand the farmers’ demand of needs increasingly complex, especially with regard to economic aspects. At Guama subak, its institutional adjustment has been experiencing along with the development of agribusiness being operated since 2003. In the development of agribusiness at the subak level, Subak of Guama has expanded the institutional structure in accordance with the needs of the agribusiness activities. In addition, institutional adjustment is also made to comply with

At Subak of Guama, agibusiness development organized through the established cooperative, called Cooperative of Integrated Agribusiness (KUAT) Subak of Guama which hal aready legal status: Number 22/BH/Diskop/VIII/2003 dated August 14, 2003. KUAT has a function to hold the management of the business units for the members of Guama subak relating to farm management and increased revenue subak members. Through capital gained from the government (BPTP), some of the main activities that have been carried out were as follows: (i) integrated crops management; (ii) cropslivestock system; and (iii) micro credit. On the integrated crops management operations, it was realized in the form of distribution of agro-inputs such as distributing of seeds, fertilizers, and pesticides with the

317

certain payment system that is after harvesting (4 months) and the interest rate of 1% / month. On crops-livestock system, it had been realized in the form of cattle loans to members of the subak as much as Rp. 3,000,000.00 /unit with a 1% interest, in which it should be returned within 2 years. Micro credit was carried out by providing capital assistance for the strengthening of women farmers on the activities such as: (i) coconut oil business, (ii) breeding pigs; (iii) local snack business, (iv) a loom; (v) carving business, and (vi) trading businesses. Development of agribusiness activities in Subak’s cooperative of Guama had significantly increased, especially on the financial aspect. The amount of capital owned by KUAT Guama increased on the three activities as shown in Table 1.

Figure 3 Agribusiness development within cooperative in Subak of Guama

Table 1 Development of capital of KUAT, Subak of Guama sourced from BLM Source: Sedana (2013) Strengths found in subak system relating to agribusiness development are as follows: (i) the interrelation among the farmer as members of subak, (ii) the bond between farmers and their management board, (iii) awig awig (internal regulation) subak; and (iv) religious value in the subak. These are strongly related to social capital components, such as mutual trust, social norms and social networking (Putnam, 1992; Fukuyama, 1995; Mudarta, 2009; Flassy, et al., 2009; Subejo, 2004; Hasbullah, 2006). These three elements might have influences on the achievement of common goals (agribusiness activities) through the coordination and collective actions (Woolcock, 1998; Montgomery, 1998; Cox, 1995; Haris dan Renzio, 1997). Weakness in this study might bring about barriers to the development of agribusiness in the subak level. These include: (i) limited size of paddy field, (ii) low formal education of farmers, (iii) the limited good agricultural practices/technologies, and (iv) lack of post-harvest technology.

Sources: KUAT, Subak of Guama, 2012 This condition indicates that the formation of cooperatives within subak system could increase economic value and provide benefits to the farmers. In other words, the economic value of capital in KUAT Guama is in the forms of integrated crops management, crop-livestock system and micro credit increased by an average of 47.34% per year. The highest percentage of increase was in the business activities of the integrated crops management which reached an average of 251.38% per year. Economic benefits perceived by the farmer as members of subak and cooperative are reflected in the condition of SHU. In this study, it was found that SHU of KUAT from 2004 to 2012 had significant changed. Aside from the main activities, KUAT of Guama also had other business development such as rice seed business, processing compost and UPJA (the service for agricultural machine). Sustainability of cooperative might be ensured as long as it could give good service to members and encourage their participation (Aref, 2011; Ortmann and King, 2007). Development of agribusiness within subak is shown in Figure 3 (Sedana, 2013).

III. CONCLUSIONS Intensive empowerment and participatory approach ensure the sustainability on agribusiness activities within subak. This empowerment needs an adjustment of subak institution by establishing an economic unit, namely cooperative. The strengths of subak in agribusiness development relating to social capital are: (i) ties among members of subak; (ii) ties among members and management board; (iii) internal regulations (awig-awig) of subak; (iv) religious values within subak. These are likely component of social capital (mutual trust, social norms and social networking). Meanwhile, the weaknesses are: (i) small size of rice field; (ii) low level of formal education; (iii) lack of agricultural technologies;and (iv) lack of post-harvest technologies. Regarding the conclusion mentioned and in the effort to achieve sustainability of agribusiness

318

development within subak system, it might be suggested as follows. Strengthening social capital of subak should be done by using participatory approach. For this, it could be equipped with improving skills of administration, management, leadership and finance for the management boards of subak and cooperative. Aside from this, it should be done an extension and training for increasing entrepreneurship of them. Empowerment process should be intensively facilitated to have good achievement aside from giving charity. Farmers’ participation is needed as a social capital within subak.

[1]

[2] [3]

[4] [5]

[6]

[7] [8]

[9] [10]

[11]

[12] [13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

REFERENCES Aref, F. 2011. Agricultural Cooperatives for Agricultural Development in Iran. Life Science Journal, 1 (8) : 82 – 85. Chambers, R. 1983. Rural Development, Putting the Last First. New York: John Wiley Chambers, R. 1995. Poverty and Livelihoods: Whose Reality Counts? Uner Kirdar and Leonard S. (eds.), People: From Impoverishment to Empowerment. New York: New York University Press, 1995. Cox, E. 1995. A Truly Civil Society .Sidney: ABC Books. Elizabeth, R. 2007. Partisipasi sebagai Strategi Pemberdayaan Petani Miskin melalui Program Integrasi Jagung dan Ternak. http://ejournal .unud.ac.id Elizabeth, R.dan Iwan S.A. 2009. Sistem Kelembagaan Komunitas Petani Sayuran di Desa Baturiti, Kabupaten Tabanan Provinsi Bali. http://pse.litbang. deptan.go.id Fatah, L. 2006. Dinamika Pembangunan Pertanian dan Pedesaan. Banjarbaru: Pustaka Banua. Flassy, DJ.,Sasli R., Agus S. 2009. Modal Sosial: Unsur-Unsur Pembentuk. http://p2dtk.bappenas.go.id. Fukuyama, F. 1995. Trust: The Social Virtues and the Creation of Prosperity. New York: Free Press. Harriss, J. and De Renzio, P., l997, Policy Arena: Missing Link or Analytically Missing?: The Concept of Social Capital. Journal of International Development, Vol. 9, 1997. Hasbullah, J., 2006. Sosial Kapital: Menuju Keunggulan Budaya Manusia Indonesia. Jakarta: MR-United Press. Korten, D.C.1987. Community Management, Connectitut :Kumarian Press, Westaharford. Montgomery, J.D. 1998 Social Capital—Research Notes. Pacific Basin 04 - Social Capital - References. in Social Capital, Local Capacity Building, And Poverty Reduction. Cambridge: John F. Kennedy Center, Harvard University. Mudarta, K.G. 2009. Jaringan Sosial (Networks) dalam Pengembangan Sistem dan Usaha Agribisnis: Perspektif Teori dan Dinamika Studi Kapital Sosial. Forum Penelitian Agro Ekonomi, Volume 27, No.1, Juli 2009. Ortmann, G.F. and King, R.P. 2007. Agricultural Cooperatives II: Can They Facilitate Access of Small-

[19]

[20]

[21]

[22]

[23]

319

Scale Farmers in South Africa to Input and Product Markets? Agrekon, Vol 46, No 2 (June 2007). Putnam, R.D. 1992. The Prosperous Community: Social Capital and Public Life .American Prospect, 13. In Elinor O. and T.K. Ahn. editors. Foundation of Social Capital. Massachusetts: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited. Rachman, B. 2009. Kebijakan Sistem Kelembagaan Pengelolaan Irigasi: Kasus Provinsi Banten. Analisis Kebijakan Pertanian Vol. 07 No. 1.Tahun 2009. Sedana, G. 2013. Social Capital into Agribusiness Development within Subak System in Bali. Dissertation, Udayana University, Indonesia. Sedana, G. I G.A.A.Ambarawati, and W. Windia. Strengthening 2014. Social Capital for Agricultural Development: Lessons from Guama, Bali, Indonesia. Asian Journal of Agriculture and Development. Vol.11 No.2. pp.39-50 Shah, P. and Shah., 1994. Multifunction Irrigation Organisations: Advantage or Handicap Irrigation Management Network, Network Paper No.28, April 1994.Londdon: Overseas Development Institute. Subejo. 2004. Peranan Social Capital Dalam Pembangunan Ekonomi: Suatu Pengantar Studi Social Capital di Pedesaan Indonesia. Majalah Agro Ekonomi 11 (1): 32 – 41. Syahyuti. 2007. Kebijakan Pengembangan Gabungan Kelompok Tani (Gapoktan) Sebagai Kelembagaan Ekonomi Di Perdesaan. Bogor: Pusat Analisis Sosial Ekonomi dan Kebijakan Pertanian. Analisis Kebijakan Pertanian. 5 (1): 15 – 25. Woolcock, M. 1998. Social Capital and Economic Development; Toward a Theoretical Syntesis and Policy Framework. Theory and Society, In Elinor O and T.K. Ahn.. Foundation of Social capital. Massachusetts: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited.

Agricultural Wastes/ Residues Management for Energy: Potential Role of Cooperatives Written by: Herry Suhermanto, Ir., MCP, PhD. (Vice Head of Development Policy Institute for R&D – Universitas Trilogi) Abstract. Agricultural wastes/ residues still require better management in structuring and organizing on “how to handle” them, for they could have economic and social value that is meaningful to the public. Wastes/ agricultural residues, with proper management, could be an important source for the development of biomass energy. Government support and commitment are needed to create energy security, whereas fossil energy may serve longer providing the availability of renewable energy is fulfilled by the public. Cooperatives as public institution have shown partial ability to independently manage the renewable energy as individuals or community efforts dealing mostly with biomass energy. The point here is how to integrate cooperatives in the development of biomass energy as an important instrument in building a social culture that emphasizes togetherness and cooperation to carry out collective membership-based businesses action to strengthen energy security. Cooperative is potential institution to build social-economiccohesiveness (vertical/ horizontal integration) in developing national energy security by utilizing biomass from agricultural wastes/ residues. Keywords: Agricultural & Energy

fallen leaves, broken branches/ twigs due to weathering, and husk as rice mill residues). After all, it is important to control wastes especially agricultural waste/ residue. Control here is intended to reduce or destroy waste/ agricultural residues without an adverse (undesirable) impact on the environment and human life. In any case, itcannot be done freelytowaste anything includingagricultural waste/ residues into the environment, although majority of wastes/ residues of agriculture arediscarded by burning to reduce them. Apparently, not only there are element of threats that one should consider in handling waste/ residues of agriculture activity, but also the aspects of using the waste was already heavily regulated, both in developed countries and in developing countries (Yevich et al., 2003; Al-Ansary, Marwa S., et al., 200x). The use of waste in urban areas, according to Jusuf Jusri (www.energi.lipi.go.id, December 6, 2004 edition) that if the household garbage in Jakarta reached 20,000 tons per day, it may produce 100 megawatts of electricity power. Now, ifnational agricultural wastes/residues could reach> 100 million tons per year,1then they could potentially generate electrical energy of at least 1300 MW. When the 100 megawatts can provide the average income of Rp. 320 billion per year, then the use of agricultural waste to energy potentially will generate Rp. 4,160 trillion, and even greater if calculated using the Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resourcesdata. This waste potential must be considered for national and local economic development.2

I. INTRODUCTION A. Background The government has issued the Law that regulates garbage handling, the Law No. 18/ 2008 about Waste Management in Indonesia. Trash is defined as waste ofhuman daily activities and/or residuals of natural processes in the solid form. The law governs waste management, including the division of authority and its implementation, as well as the categorization of garbage, which includes: (a) household waste, (b) the household like waste; and (c) the specific waste. Natural processes or human activities, leaving effluent/ residual either in the form of solid, gas, or liquid. The definition of household waste is the waste/ residual activity derived from the daily activities of households, excluding feces and specific garbage. Household-like waste is waste from commercial areas, industrial areas, special areas, social facilities, public facilities, and/or other facilities. As for the meaning of specific waste, it includes: 1. waste that contains hazardous and toxic materials; 2. waste that contains hazardous and toxic wastes; 3. garbage arising from natural disasters; 4. The building demolition debris; 5. waste cannot be processedby the available technology; and/or 6. waste that is not periodic. Although not explicitly stated, agricultural waste can be categorized as a specific waste that is not periodic waste, and waste that technology has not yetbeen processed. In some cases, agricultural waste may arise periodically, as crop waste from the cropping pattern. Henceforth, the term waste has connotation of accidentally discarded. It would be understood also that wastes/ residues of agriculture related activity are the result of farming from land preparation to (post) harvest, instead ofthose wasted naturally (such as

1

Data Table 1 Potential Agricultural wastes/ residues in Indonesia 2 Generally solid urban waste can be converted for energy (electricity), and so is the agricultural waste. Converting waste into energy can be done by various methods. The agricultural wastes/ residues could be processed into biomass known to exist in the form of a solid, liquid, and gas;

320

1.

Challenges and Problems Faced To not waste the calories produced from the burning of agricultural waste/ residues, then utilization of the waste is necessary to be managed, at least being burned for energy. In many countries, including Indonesia, agricultural waste/ residues generally being used for various business purposes, such as energy and compost, but they arestill partially conducted activity and not yet being publicly institutionalized (Yevich et al., 2003).3 Here, it is necessary to make people understand about the utilization of agricultural waste/ residues; and to make them capable to manage the waste in an integrated and sustainable manner. The problem is that business activities engaged in the utilization of agricultural wastes/ residues in Indonesia are still in the test-mode phase. They grabbed in the "niche market" to recoup the cost of research onthe prototype of waste treatment technology. The nature of the agricultural waste/ residues processed products seems for very specific uses,4 (typical, small/ not for mass products, and spread out) encouraged the formation of niche markets. Without proper supports with appropriate regulations to ensure the technical procedures of governingagricultural waste/residue utilization that is good, true, and can be accounted for, it may weaken the intentions of the people (farmers) to move in this lineof business. Provision of agricultural waste/ residues as raw materials to beprocessed for energy sustainably, might be constrained by the rapid conversion of the agricultural land itself. Population growth, among other things, has led to intensifying agricultural land conversion into nonagricultural use. 5 The agricultural land shrinkage decreasesthe agricultural land occupation per resident.Without adequate support on the provision of land favorable for corporate to manage, then this may affect the interest/ choice of individuals in agricultural business to develop waste treatment activity in corporate scale. Other options would be: activating agricultural stakeholders (local) and the owners of small land farming to work together

(cooperative) in developing local economically agricultural wastes/ residues’ treatment. How may they work together? In realizing the potential of agricultural wastes/ residues into the local economy, we might need an integrated process to convert wastes/ residues into products that have economic value, including utilizing themas commodities/products for profitablytradedenergy. The great challenge here is how to set up or build a self-reliant community in the provision of food (agricultural and plantation) and energy security within their value chain. One must consider to include converting agricultural wastes/ residues into energyused in onevalue chain, the as the energy used become public good, itmight give benefit to domestic households or industrial sector. Community-based efforts or groups are very important and necessaryto maintain the continuity of supply of raw materials needed to produce energy. The scenario is to develop energy security from, by and for the community. Table 1 Potential Agricultural Wastes/ Residues in Indonesia Commodity

1989 Potential Waste Areal (Ha)

Waste (ton) ton/ Ha

Areal 2007 (Ha)

Paddy

21,062,414.0 15,534,000.0 0.74

Corn

2,944,199.0 3,344,000.0 1.14

3,630,324.0

Peanuts

620,817.0

0.60

660,480.0

Soybean

1,198,096.0 2,127,000.0 1.78

459,116.0

Cassava

1,407,870.0 6,714,000.0 4.77

1,201,481.0

Food crop agriculture

27,233,396.0 28,090,000.0 1.03

30,246,675.0

Kakao

317,705.0

1.732.641,0

Karet

3,055,960.0 59,045,000.0 19.32

Kelapa

3,283,589.0 5,373,000.0 1.64

3.767.704,0

KelapaSawit

973,528.0

8.992.824,0

Kopi

1,036,550.0 3,475,000.0 3.35

1.233.698,0

Tebu

357,752.0

451.788,0

Estate Agriculture

9,025,084.0 82,908,606.0 9.19

371,000.0

24,295,274.0

2011 (Ha) 240,000.0

0.76

6,214,000.0 6.38 8,561,606.0 23.93

3.456.127,0

19.634.782,0

Source: Ministry of Agriculture all of which could potentially produce electricity. The Ministry of Energy calculates that the electric potential from biomass conversion is expected to generate electric power up to 50 Giga Watts. 3 The research paper on waste management of resources management http://www.slideshare.net/risaastrianiginting/garbage-27806911 describes the geographical influence on the condition of waste generated and its utilization in sufficiently detail. 4 For small-scale look at the "Potential Biomass Generate Electricity, Fuel Stoves and Organic Fertilizer." 2013. The original manuscript in http://www.pikiranrakyat.com/node/217221, or see the notes of AnggitDwipramana, (2012 ) in http://anggitpramana.com/2012/08/26/wow-pembangkitlistrik-tenaga-biomassa-pltb-mulai-tumbuh-di-indonesia, for medium-scale enterprises. 5 Findings of Lilian Nur Faizah, 2007, quoting from BomerPasaribu that every year (in the period of 1992-2002) there was 165 thousand hectares of agricultural land areas being converted for housing/ settlement, industrial and infrastructure development.

More than one hundred million tons of agricultural wastes/ residues per year (see table 1, not including the fisheries and livestock) were notproperly managed for the benefit of the people or at least to make them more useful. Burning efforts to eliminate or reduce wastes can cause health problems to society, fire’swidespread, environmental pollution, and/or other environmental damage punishable by Law. Similarly, the omission (natural decay) of agricultural waste could become a threat to human health and the environment water system. Agricultural wastes/ residues management seems not enough to build integrated non-fossil energy supply efficiently and effectively. Even in a community scale, the farm business management 6 hardlyconducted in an 6

From http://www.paskomnas.com/id/berita/KondisiPertanian-Indonesia-saat-ini-Berdasarkan-PandanganMahasiswa-Pertanian-Indonesia.php (2009): "The development of agriculture in the past have several drawbacks, which is only focused on farming with weak macro policy support, as well as using very centralized

321

(farming). They should understand the importance of integrating agriculture and energy farming as their business value chains.Horizontally and vertically based on the proximity of their business with the production and/ or marketingthe energy, cooperatives can become an effective instrument to establish community value chain, and integrating the fields of activity in the agricultural-energy value chain, ex-ante, on-going, and post-production. In the intention of having economically independent society, the establishment of agro-based energy business is supposed to be coming as local’s aspirations. Turning agricultural waste/ residues into energy (biomass) would mean able to supply such waste/ residues (energy raw materials) sustainably. It can be done individually (corporationbased) or through community (cooperativesbased). Energy supply in the community scale, in this case, must be met inclusively by the community. It may not to be equal or at the same taste, but at least the basic rights of communityfor energy consumption can be met. Food and energy are the people basic rights that must be fulfilled by the government. 8 Integration of agricultural enterprises in the provision of providing bio-energy (plus food) to the public will require intensive efforts across sectors and institutions. This paper is intended to prepare policy alternatives that are useful to strengthen cooperatives as a community based efforts to integrate the supply chain (processing wastes/ residues) of farming for food and energy for the community. Through this article, it is expected to knowhow the strategies and policies of utilizing agricultural wastes/ residues should be taken in the presence of cooperatives. Here, the cooperative becomes community instrument to institutionalize collective spirit in the society. When individual members of cooperative would share the same spirit, they may have robust "bargaining position" that is importantto facethe free market. The method of agenda setting might recognize items that could affect public policy, that is through identifying key issues and related interests. Carefully studieson the issues and interests might systemically be reconfirmed with government-communityagendathat should be addressed togetherin the search for policy solutions. Asystemic policy agenda can be compiled by adapting institutional agenda following the role of each stakeholderbased on the magnitude of a scenariowithin the framework of government cooperatives policy development. The analysis is directed to examine fundamental issues or problems, faced by the

integrated manner. People tend to diverse their agricultural businesses for self-benefit, barely as part of community empowerment. Developing such collective spirit will require better understanding about the benefit of cooperation among all stakeholders in the business. Unfortunately, as indicated by the Vice President (Boediono, 2012), the spirit of togetherness or "gotong royong" (which facilitates effortsof integration) apparently started to fade out from the sociocultural context of Indonesian society. 7 How big is the structural changes caused by the erosion of the spirit of togetherness can be improved, it will largely depend on how much benefit can be accepted by society vis-à-vis the culture of togetherness. Wiroutomo (2012) mentioned that a cultural change is possible only through structural changes, and a span of time to process it. Avalue system that could strengthen the cultural side of a nation should be protected and maintained. The problem; maintain the spirit of mutual cooperation in Indonesia cultural value system is constrained philosophically by the new understanding of the constitution forlessaccentuation on the collective spirit (Constitution 1945), due to the amended constitution by inserting human rights that accentuates individualist spirit (Constitution NRI 1945). However, Indonesian government structurally puts interest in maintaining the spirit of togetherness to keep national unity democratically. Government has tried to maintain the collective spirit and to process it in the structure that is run institutionally through cooperative governed by the Law No. 25 of 1992 concerning Cooperatives. The law No. 17/2012 about Cooperatives expressed more individualistic commitment was overturned by the Constitutional Court. Shared values held (built) by the cooperative could be used to integrate the value chain of farming, especially to manage agricultural waste/ residuesfrom the farm converted into electrical energy for the benefit of the wider community. With the spirit of togetherness, an element that should be highlighted in the integration process is how to build business characteristics in agricultural cooperative with the format of energy service as to strengthen the capacity of the (at least) local economy. 2. Scope of Policy Analysis To utilize agricultural waste for energy, cooperativesmust provide points of contact in the process of integrating business management in processing waste to energy. It can be said that the farming community (including plantations and livestock) may be affected by the structural changes taking place in their respective fields of activity

8

Food must be assured as society fundamental right, check in http://bkp.pertanian.go.id/downlot.php%3Ffile%3DBukuDas awarsa_BKP.pdf, while energy as a fundamental right is still discourse, where political will is needed to support such right, check http://power-to-thepeople.net/2013/01/renewable-energy-our-fundamentalchoice-today/ sites. Meanwhile, NU Chairman Said Aqil Sirajd (2008) argued that "any policy in the energy sector should be directed to meet the interests of society and not for those of a particular group or interest." Check the website http://migasreview.com/kebijakan-sektor must-directedenergy-fulfillment-interest-masyarakat.

approach. As the result, farming in Indonesia is still dominated by the conditions of: (a) small-scale, (b) limited capital, (c) using simple technology, (d) influenced by seasonality, (e) local area market, (f) generally laboring family that causes agricultural involution (hidden unemployment), (g) low access to credit and information, (h) monopsony/ oligopoly in the agricultural commodity controlled by traders - wholesalers resulting in adverse price exploitation at farmer’s level." 7 RI Vice President: GELORAKAN GOTONG ROYONG. 2012. http://jatim.bkkbn.go.id/berita.php?p=berita_detil

322

individual or the public, in managing agricultural wastes/ residuesfor energy purpose in the system and governance of cooperatives. Farming community can take advantage of cooperatives as instruments to mutually joint energy venture business beneficially. It needs to prepare acceptable scenarios in the business value chain development based on supply and demand, to maximize the economic value of agricultural wastes/ residues as commodity(input material) for energy.

treat agricultural waste as waste that must be controlled [through "The Waste Management (England and Wales) Regulations 2006 (Statutory Instrument 2006 937)]." Canadian regulates waste management using Environmental Management Act (previously arranged through The Waste Management Act); specifically regulates the handling of agricultural waste through The Agricultural Waste Control Regulation (considered also in The Public Health Act). The matters of proposed regulation are related to the practice of utilizing, storing, and managing agricultural waste, which must be environmentally friendly. Slightly different from Canada, the United States (US) tends to sort out the rules based on the source and type of waste that must be controlled, given the threat of different factors.

Figure 2. General Framework for Agenda Setting Understanding the issues of cooperative development could come from analyzing primary and secondary data ofcooperative activities in the fields of agriculture and energy. Bearing policy optionof "zero waste" in agriculturalactivities to provide bio-energy through cooperatives might give lessons in agricultural-energy cooperatives, how it could be prepared, explained as systemic policy agenda before developingscenario that could be addressed by relevant institutions, especially in governments. B. Potential Cooperation in Waste Agricultural Residues for Energy

Management

/

Research conducted by El-Haggar One M., et.al. (The American University Cairo, Egypt), WatiHermawati (PAPPIPTEK-LIPI), and Saleh Siswanto (FT-University of Indonesia) indicate that the utilization of agricultural wastes/ residues has been done in many places using various forms of technology andvarying scale of management. They indicate that management is generally conducted in piecemeal manner and did not/ have not been effective enough to be developed further into a large-scale and sustainable business entity. Lack of continuity in the supply of energy raw materials from processed agricultural wastes/ residues to the centers of power plants, is one of the causes. 1.

In the United States, responsibility for waste management (garbage) is given to The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). In addition, each state in the US may setup its own procedures for managing waste, including agricultural wastes/ residues. There is no single approach waste management In the US that is suitable to be usednationally (statewide). In managing all streams of garbage/ waste in every situation, the EPA has developed the environmentally friendly strategy of waste management hierarchy, particularly for solid waste. This hierarchical strategy gives more emphasis on efforts to reduce, reuse, and recycle most of the waste as a key component of the Sustainable Materials Management Program (SMM) EPA. There are government interests on energy generation in the rankings after the effort of recycling/ composting to be managed accordingly. In the US,

Foreign Countries Experience

Some developed countries such as Britain, Canada, and the United States have confirmedspecifically agricultural waste management procedures in the form of regulations and laws. 9 Britain had revised "Agricultural Act of 1947" and

http://www.certifiedorganic.bc.ca/rcbtoa/services/regulations .html, and American sets regulation through the United States Environmental Protection Agency and the rules in each state (http://www2.epa.gov/regulatory-informationtopic/waste).

9

For the UK, it can be found at: http://www.northumberland.gov.uk/default.aspx?page=1362, for Canada

323

waste volume reduction/ reuse of garbage seems in great demand.10 Agricultural waste or residue, generally in solid form (prior to decompose naturally), has been used for various purposes in many countries (including Indonesia). In principle, the main interest is to reduce the volume of waste in a responsible manner, both to human health and to preserve the environment. Yevich and Logan (2003) research indicates that even though there iscustom to burn agriculture wastes/ residues in developing countries, particularly in Asia and Africa, yet some people have used the wastes as energy combustion material. 11 The ratio of agricultural waste/residue being burned and being used as fuel in Asia is 37:63, while in Africa the ratio is 50:50. Asian people seems more incline to utilize the agricultural waste/ residues for fuel (energy) than the people in Africa. The Yevich (et al., 2003) research paper includesIndonesia as country that contribute the largest agricultural residues in Southeast Asia, and utilize only 14% of them for biofuel. The rest, 73% is burned in the fields and the remainder is used as compost. The data of Directorate GeneralEBTKE, Ministry of Energy, 12 shows that the potential biomass electricity generation was accounted for up to 50 Giga Watts (GW), but only about 4% being converted into electricity. This potential has been recognized for quite some time, but the converting to electricity is constrained by the difficulty of collecting biomass raw materials in large quantities from various (scattered) locations sustainably and transporting them to the centers of biomass power plants.

Novkovic et al., 200x) indicates that such changes are challenging for food-related manufacturers in the presence of various new regulations on health and safety, on the reduction of price supports and subsidies from governments, and on the increased competition due to international food interdependency. At the same time, technological innovation, particularly in biotechnology has created greater vertical integration and heterogeneity efforts among farmers. Anticipation of changes can be a burden,rather than challenge, to individual agricultural business, especially those who have no enough capital (weak). 14 This group requires a form of institution/ organization that can assist them in doing interorganizational transactions. As noted by Bijman (et. Al., 20xx, citing Thompson 1967; Galbraith 1977), 15 cooperative is a transactional oriented organization; where members (farmers) can conduct transactions to deal more efficiently as an organization rather than on individual basis, which is preoccupied more often by the problem of intra-organizational coordination. Law No.25/ 1992 on Cooperatives clearly suggests that a cooperative is created to meet the aspirations and needs of its members bearing their economic, social and cultural rightsascollective values incooperation principle. As a container of joint venture (incorporated) activity, cooperative is formed to empower its members so that they can grow into a strong, healthy, self-reliant and resilient individual. In this case, the cooperative can be said to be a form of non-governmental organizations formed democratically and has autonomy in the policies asa businessorganization.16 Agriculture and rural cooperatives must run coordinative arrangements through "consensus," or trade off, as an option to be able to serve more than one purpose members' businesses. Coordination arrangements between the activities undertaken by different businesses, as stated Bijman (et.al., 20xx), will be faced with the choice and limit the ability of the cooperative to move its own way. As noted Novkovic (et al., 200x) mentioned that the cooperative will benefit from the innovative strategy if able (allow) to combine the cooperative identity (multi-purpose, democracy, collaboration and consultation) due to the interests of its members in their business decisions. In this context, the importance and strength of socio-economic links that exist therein, cooperative is a mean for building organizational culture that promotes togetherness and the spirit of "cooperation." Togetherness and the spirit of mutual cooperation is an important success factor of collective

2.

Cooperation in Agriculture The Indonesia Central Statistics Agency (BPS) has noted that agriculture as a sector consists of agriculture (food), plantation, animal husbandry, fisheries, horticulture, and forestry. The productivity of agriculture in the broad sense, however, is tied to factors of production consisting of space/ land (as medium where the plants grow), labor (as farm owners/ farm workers) and seeds (seedling). Agriculture itself is linked to the rural atmosphere and (especially) foodproduction. Currently farming is under pressure and facing new risks due to the increasing interest to develop integrated global food system. 13 Fulton and Gibbings (2000, in

10

Reuse is not the same as recycling. Recycling is understood as the destruction of waste material for further use, while the reuse of garbage usually just picked/ reconstructed to be used again as the original function. 11 Rosemarie YevichandJennifer A. Logan. 2003. "An assessment of biofuel use and burning of agricultural waste in the developing world." Article first published online: 10 OCT 2003 http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/ 12 http://thepresiduntpostindonesia.com/2013/01/28/listrikbiomassa-diperlukan-penyempurnaan-feed-in-tarrif/

14

Capital in terms of financial and human/ social capital. The cooperative can be said is one form of social capital. 15 Jos Bijman, Roldan Muradian and Andrei Cechin. (20xx). “Agricultural cooperatives and value chain coordination.” 16 Data on the number of cooperatives are available on the Ministry of Cooperative and SMEs website (nationally in 2013 there were 143,117 active cooperatives,) but they are not broken down by sector.BPS does not provide cooperative data by sectors also. Data on the number of cooperatives by the business sector are provided partially on Website in a variety of areas (province/ district/ municipality).

13

Sonja Novkovic and Natasha Power. (200x). “Agricultural and Rural Cooperative Viability: A Management Strategy Based on Cooperative Principles and Values,” Saint Mary’s University Halifax, Canada.

324

action ( Wirutomo, 2012; Ostrom, 1994, 1999, in Bijman et.al., 20xx). Cooperatives data released by the Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs and by BPS do not describe the cooperatives specification per business sector, rather in terms of the number of cooperatives, the number of members and employees, the number of active-inactive cooperatives, the capital structure and business volume. In 2010,17 there were 177,482 cooperatives with 30.46 million membersnationwide. From these cooperativesnumber, 124,855 (70.35%) are considered active cooperatives. Cooperatives employ 32,050 cooperative managers plus 326,718 employees to run businessesof Rp.76,8 trillion. In 2013, there were 203,701 cooperatives with 35.26 million members employing 35,063 managers and 438,541 employeesnationwide; and the business volume reached Rp.125,6 trillion. On the amount of the cooperatives in 2013, there are 143,117 (70.26%) considered as active cooperatives. The development of cooperatives in the last three years (2010-2013) has showed anominal increase in terms of the number of cooperatives, the number of members, the number of managers and employees, up to the volume of business. Although the proportion of the number of active cooperatives decreased slightly, but the volume of business per unit of cooperative increased from Rp.432,7 million in 2010 to Rp.616,6 million in 2013. Data on the number of agricultural cooperatives in the form of village unit cooperative (KUD) can be found partially from various regional Website. 18 For example, in NTT, 29.35% of the total number of cooperatives in 2010was KUD. 19 The results of field monitoring by the Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs (2012) showed that there were 10,677 units of KUD throughout Indonesia, where 7,088 of them in the category of active cooperatives. Lately, the Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs supports the revitalization of cooperatives. Agricultural/ rural cooperatives must be able to bridge the interests of society and its members to meet an efficient and effective business, responsible management, and well informed member (products’ affordability, availability of production factors, convenient market/ marketing, and promotion). These particular strengths could be developed through collaboration of various agricultural cooperatives using partnerships and appropriate inter-KUD format. In connection toagricultural the wastes/ residues management, cooperatives are expected to set up a working agenda that is both strategic (based scenarios/ Business Plan) related to the utilization of the wastes/ residues for the

benefit of the society in general; and specifically, to serve the business interests of cooperative members. Within the framework of the revitalization, KUD could run agricultural wastes/ residues management for energy (biomass) consideringthat the supply ofenergy materials are easy to obtain and are always available in the rural areas. Collaboration or partnership can be run for the benefit of information dissemination, research, development, education and training efforts related to the utilization of agricultural waste/ residues for energy. Agricultural waste/ residues management seems to be more effective ifguided or regulated by local governments because of their closeness to the community. In accordance to Law No. 18/2008, waste management should be done in a systematic, comprehensive, and continuous manner;so, that there is a reduction in the volume of waste in the process. The collection of agricultural waste/ residues can be managed through a single unit KUD, if the management can operate systematically and interactively viable for supporting energy business. The involvement of the government and local governments is crucial in providing data and information as well as the introduction of various instruments to modifyagricultural wastes/ residues into biomass energy, including its most efficient and effective technological know-how. Cooperatives in Indonesia pretty much work on wastes/ residues/ garbage for businesses, both in the context of recycling as well as for other purposes. In Solok, for example, farmers have carried out practical activities of waste treatment converted waste into soil nutrient good for rice production with assistance from the local government.20 In Karanganyar, villagers are operating treatment plant for organic household waste to be composted; and separatednon-organic waste for handicrafts. The compost/ fertilizer can be used for farming, and there have been several agricultural cooperatives ready to accommodate the development of waste treatment plant. Inter-cooperatives trade is needed to cover operating costs.21 In addition, the program manager of waste treatment in Karanganyarhas openedthe garbage bank, where every resident is obliged to separate organic and non-organic to bring it to the organizer (the bank, theCommunity Self-Reliance Agency)and receive fees for deposited garbage. Various studies led by government has been working on agricultural wastes/ residues for a variety purposes; such as, coconut water as a solvent vaccines of Newcastle disease (ranched chicken), ammonization of rice straw foranimal feed, pulp sago for poultry feed, liquid smoke from palm shells, Low tar tobacco and nicotine, cultivation of edible mushroom using pulp of paper waste, a mixture of neem leaf and tuber gadung as botanical pesticides, cookies pulp, vinegar banana peels, leaves pare for de-worming hull on lamb, beef jerky banana, and fermented bagasse for animal feed.22The follow-up results of these studies is not known, but at least the government has seen the value of using

17

Source: “Rekapitulasi Data KoperasiBerdasarkanProvinsi,” 30 Desember 2010. Ministry of Cooperative and SMEs. 18 KUD, according to Presidential Decree 4 of 1984 on Promotion and Development KUD, is a business cooperative whose members are located in the village/ rural areas. KUD can be an amalgamation of several small agricultural cooperatives that are quite numerous in the countryside. 19 http://ntt.bps.go.id/index.php/ekonomi-danperdagangan/keuangan-dan-harga/48-data/keuangan-danharga/236-banyaknya-anggota-koperasi-unit-desaKUDand-more-cooperative-by-county-city-and-status-2011

20

http://epetani.deptan.go.id/berita/praktek-pengolahanlimbah-menjadi-sumber-nutrisi-8092 21 http://www.karanganyarkab.go.id/20130607/desa-buranbersiap-operasikan-instalasi-pengolahan-limbah/. 22 http://www.iptek.net.id/ind/pd_limbah/?mnu=2

325

agricultural wastes/ residues. Here it seems necessary for governments to regulate research mechanisms such that the results can be useddirectly for business development in the region. Agricultural businesses that are typically local, worked in a solid corporative and investment, particularly in the farming business that produces a salable "global" commodity, such as oil palm, cocoa, and coffee. Agricultural wastes/ residues can be obtained free of charge or with a financial reimbursement through collaboration inter-business (corporations and cooperatives). The utilization of agricultural waste/ residues for biomass energy, however, will be enjoyed mostly by the community and members of the cooperative. There are many failure and success stories of cooperatives in Indonesia. They can be shown from the increasing numbers ofinactive (dormant) cooperatives on the one hand, and there are also numbers of cooperatives able to export commodities into the world market, on the other hand. Collaboration in partnership encouraged by the government through the Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs, have put National Cooperative Business Association (NCBA) of the United States in a cooperatives synergy effort to market a variety of Indonesian spices commodities to enter the export market in particular. PT. Cooperative Business International (CBI) of Indonesia, in cooperation with the NCBA, has made partnerships with cooperatives in several provinces to establish a cooperative network for the marketing of certain commodities that are saleablein global market. Commodities like vanilla, for example, exported by a cooperative in Klaten, Central Java using commodities from Timor Leste and Papua New Guinea. Other commodity included in this business networks is cinnamon from West Sumatra and Jambi, which is produced by at least by 12 village unit cooperatives (KUD) in the two provinces. For commodities like black pepper and coffee Arabica, they are cultivated through a network of cooperatives in the provinces of Lampung, South Sumatra and Nanggroe Aceh Darussalam (Aceh).23 Bad story has put cooperatives (KUD) milling rice production difficult to develop further. Dairy cooperative (in Pujon-Malang and PasuruanPrigen) is also difficult to increase its scale and business chain, because it acts as a supplier and as an industry (fabrication) that processes milk. There are problems in the regeneration of agricultural cooperatives, while the managers getting older, they have not provided sufficient incentive for youngsters to get involved in the agricultural cooperative.Spirited driving cadres of "coop-entrepreneurship" is still no progress, and it needs to be activated, especially in order to meet the demographic bonus.24

Government and local governments assigned by law to provide convenient coop-business environment and/ or incentives in accordance totheir authority in supporting the development of new and renewable energy (EBT) in an integrated manner, to achieve the economic value that can provide maximum benefit for the community. The unavailability of sufficient data and information related to business activities of agricultural/ rural cooperatives,however, becomes obstacle in breaking down the role and capacity of cooperatives to manage the strength and distinctiveness (comparative advantage) of local agriculture. The supply of raw materials for biomass energy utilization will rely on agricultural commodity and/oragricultural wastes/ residues produced. Agriculture and rural cooperatives (KUD) can be used as a means for the development of EBT processing "business" in term of biomass energy in collaboration (partnership) with energy cooperatives. KUD has distinctive character management, however, and for that, the enterprises can serve individual cooperative members or groups to workin the renewable energy business structure by setting therules of the game together (all still under legitimate rules and regulations that apply). 3.

Cooperation in Energy Sector As observed by Fitria 25 waste animal, agricultural residues, residues of forestry and wood waste, industrial waste and household waste can be used/ converted into clean and efficient energy with various levels of technology, ranging from the simple (conventional) to the gasification sophisticated plasma technology. Environmental recovery caused bybio-energy supply is possible due to substantially lower amount of garbage in landfills, and the rest of the wastecould be managed better through safe disposal of control to meet pollution control standards. Fitria observed all agricultural wastes, such as bagasse, straw, stems, petioles, leather, shell, peel, pulp, and straw, areavailable in large quantities every year in all regions in Indonesia. They are still very underutilized, however. Some of them, such as straw, rice husk, shell and coconut fiber, and fibrous bagasse, can be easily converted into energy. Agricultural wastes/ residues may be preserved as feedstock for biomass energy sources. 26 Wastes to energy processing activities provide an opportunity for business, yet better be developed in cooperativemanner by processing them into liquid fuels or thermochemical to produce electricity and heat. West Sumatra, Central Java and Yogyakarta, KUDs generally manage activities that are no longer in their core business (more to savings and loans/ services), or still in the core business just to leverage existing assets (the old millers machines 1970stech), some managed by elders (first generation) and still expected help from government. 25 Fitria.Oktober, 2012. “Energi Terbarukan dari Limbah.” Fromhttp://lingkungan.net/2012/10/energi-terbarukan-darilimbah/ 26 Biomass or solar energy stored in the biological material considers as renewable energy source that is available in many areas of Indonesia. http://www.pikiranrakyat.com/node/217221 (2013).

23

A full description can be found at http://industri.bisnis.com/read/20131124/12/188468/kemenk op-ajak-ncba-pasarkan-rempah-indonesia-Editor: Martin Sihombing 24 As the result of the dialogues and the author's observation as Director Empowerment of Cooperatives and SMEs, Bappenas period of 2008-2011, during monitoring activities of cooperatives in various provinces, such as in Gorontalo,

326

SigiPalu, Mempawah, Bontang, and Tenggarong that produce at a daily average of 224 m3biomethane, which is equivalent to 224 kwh or 107.52 kg of LPG, and about 7,200 liters of liquid organic fertilizer.29 Although the "recovery" of energy has not been the best strategy in the United States, but the United States contained energy cooperative firstly founded by a group of farmers in 1936 (in Licking and Knox, Ohio). A farmers’ group decided to take advantage of the federal program offered through the Rural Electrification Administration (REA) and formed an electric cooperative called Licking Rural Electrification (LRE). Initially only 5 people hired to serve 410 members and 143 kilometers of electricity network. Currently, the electric cooperatives Ohio (LRE) serves nearly 340,000 homes and businesses in Ohio and collaborate with nearly 1,000 rural electric cooperatives throughout the United States serving 25 million consumermembers. 30 Membership system runs the LRE oriented excellent service that follows the cooperative values and principles; such as,if the price of electricity is inappropriate (modest) then the cooperative profits will be returned to members, and any program will be executed accordingto the "wishes" of members. To provide the best service to the community, the cooperative will fully serve the prospective cooperative members coveringthe transfer of electrical network(cost and equipment) from non-cooperative company to the cooperative electric utility network. The LRE also makes a firm commitment to carry out green energy. In addition, there is a Touchstone Energy Cooperative (KET), which seeks to provide reliable electricity at a competitive cost for its members. KET gives power to members by explaining about how cooperatives should be run. The cooperative is ready to provide reliable energy and affordable to improve the quality of life of its members. Members are led to be able to save money using energy responsiblyin the spirit of “togetherness” within a cooperative KET connected community.31 In the UK, there is BEC, Bristol Energy Cooperative, owned by Bristol local communities, aims to foster the supply of green energy and encourage the use of energy pennywise for all. BEC is a member of the Bristol Energy Network, an umbrella organization that widely serves all grassroots initiative in the field of energy and is involved in energy sustainability in Bristol. BEC was established in April 2010 in connection with the implementation of FeedIn-Tariff (FIT) policy in the UK, a form of government subsidies for the use of renewable energy, including solar energy scheme that uses Photovoltaic (PV) up to 5MW. FIT is paid by the energy companies, which then must raise the price of energy to cover payments (fees). FIT is readily available to those who own the property and capital (for PV installation), but not for most people who do not own property, and they must pay higher energy bills. Residential space and the extentof property will be the basis for calculating the FITsubsidy. Some large electric

Availability of agricultural wastes or residues are

frequently exposed to the seasonal factors, and each season can provide the quantity and quality of different raw materials to be used as a source of biomass energy (Fitria, 2012; Yevich, 2003). Rakhman 27 argued that biomass is a source of energy that can be recycled (renewable) and biomass needs to be processed to be a fuel that is easy and safe to carry and use. Some waste materials such as livestock manure (cow) and fruit waste has been processed into biogas which can be used for domestic purposes such as cooking, produce electricity, or as a substitute fuel (fossil), at various locations in Indonesia.28The solid agricultural waste is also easily to convert into fuels (chips and pellets) and can be collected fromindustrial forest plantations that produce residues and wood waste. Conversion techniques are used including anaerobic digesters to produce biogas, or fermented to produce ethanol (Fitria, 2012), or direct combustion. Although the cultivation of biomass energy sources in Indonesia have become the choice of business by the community, but cooperative management still has to be encouraged by the government. Some individuals/ groups of individuals have been managing electric energy generation in micro scale with limited distribution, exploiting the potential of micro-hydro, solar energy, geothermal energy, or biomass. Biomass in Indonesia (2012) also is operatedasnon-cooperative businesses, which are developed privately in at least 33 districts/ cities, such as Bandung, Tangerang, Bekasi, Malang, Padang Panjang, Kutai, Banjar, 27

Quoted from MamanRakhman. "Understanding Energy Conversion." Http://file.upi.edu/Direktori/FPTK/ JUR_PEND.TEKNIK_MESIN 28 In Yogyakarta, for example, there is a cooperative market that processes waste from the market residual of (unsold) fruit and vegetables for biogas, processed to be used to turn an electric generator.

29

http://www.pikiran-rakyat.com/node/217211 (2013). http://www.theenergycoop.com/mainNav/aboutUs/weAre.a spx 31 http://www.togetherwesave.com/ 30

327

companies offer free electricity to compensate the FIT paid through a lease based on the living space occupied by individuals and community organizations that are subsidized. The company will take advantage of the FIT namely from government subsidy margin given to individuals/ organizations that have been in the community "rent" return. This means gettingaway the FIT advantage from the area and local community. The BEC aims to keep the FIT profits and energy infrastructure in the ownership of local communities. The electrical energy used by BEC is natural energy, namely solar energy and wind energy, obtained by collaborating with various parties, such as investors, producing the instruments of energy generation supply (solar panels) for the community.32 While in Indonesia, aspirations and local involvement in the design of food security and energy programs are still inadequately accommodated, particularly in the development of energy cooperatives in the area. Facilitation regulations to establish patterns of collaboration (based on public-public, public-private, private-private cooperation) in the development of energy has not been maximized. Energy development for the community seems more sustained independently if managed by corporation rather than by cooperative. 33 It seems that the collaboration of corporatecooperative, especially among agricultural cooperatives that will provide raw materials (for energy) in an ongoing basis, and the energy companies, whose scope of activities of generating and distributing energy (electricity), need to be built in a new perspective that is giving more meaning to cooperative as a new brand of business. All elements of society shall be involved, willing to share in the spirit of mutual cooperation in the form of cooperatives as well as to become the driving force in the area to control energy security.

Viewing cooperatives in agriculture and energy above would find some basic things that should be considered as assumptions in the agricultural waste/ residues management for energy, namely: a. Not enough efforts to maintain the spirit of "gotong royong" that can be used to strengthen the “togetherness” behavior in the community b. "Liberalism" can still be aligned with the cooperative bearing the people’s economicas the basic concept of cooperatives in Indonesia (deepening the case of the US and UK) c. Collaboration agricultural cooperatives and corporations ina cooperative energy business can be built within the framework of supply and demand that are mutually beneficial (win-win situation) to the involvedstakeholders d. With the collaboration strategy, it is expected reliability of raw materials for energy supply (electricity) in the community, and the business activities become more secure inproducing electricity at affordable price e. The simpler the structure ofthe agricultural wastes/ residues management in reaching its economic scale,the morecrucialthe efforts will be to meet the provision of renewable energy for the wider community. The national cooperatives require to improvetheir system of cooperative governance as the fundamental things to do to maintain the spirit of collectivism in their business conduct. The restructuring is also needed in the face of liberalism pressure and its global influence. The intention is to restore the identity of cooperatives by applying carefully the values and principles of cooperative in mutual aid respect as a catalyst for internal collaboration. Togetherness may be built but still in the "wishes" area of members focused to the best service to the community. While the definition of restructuring might consist of steps that should be addressed by government that includes: (1) dissolution of "defunct" cooperatives by revoking its status as a business/legal entity, (2) the revitalization of cooperatives in the "comma" in the sense that there were members but inactive, and/or do not have the social and economic activities and not running the RAT, and (3) incentive/ facilitation to attempt conglomeration of cooperative/ partnerships (amalgamation) collaboration through merger among cooperatives, or incorporated with corporation. By looking at the chain of production and value chain, scaling up the number of cooperatives should consider the microcooperative assets to add up as resources for merger. Brazda (2004),34observed that in Austria, there has been a change in the structure of agriculture and agricultural cooperatives,into which in its traditional sense may be occurred in the next few years. This has affected the structure of cooperative business activities, where cooperatives should be more integrated in the horizontal and vertical value chain based on proximity to the changes in production and marketing. If the cooperative wants to

4.

Importance of Collaboration Strategy The LawNo. 25/1992 on Cooperative defines a cooperative as a business entity consisting of individuals or legal entities who are willing to createbusiness activities based on cooperative principles. It is a people's economic movement based on family principles. The Indonesian cooperative principle is roughly equal to the cooperative principles recognized internationally. Slight differences seemlaid in the drawback of business profits (SHU) concept and thecollective deliberation on the use of SHU. Article 4 of Law No. 25/1992explains that the cooperative has the functions and roles of, among others: (1) to encourage economic capacity (potential) of its members and the community, (2) to enhance the quality of human life, to strengthen the people's economy and to take part in developing national economy, and (3) to develop creativity and spirit of association (to bea learning organization).

32

http://www.bristolenergy.coop/ The efforts for renewable energy more likely led by companies rather than by the cooperatives. When it is driven by cooperative, it is more likely established by employee cooperative (of government institution or companies worked in the field of energy), so that the "genre" is more inclined to the servicecooperative/ trades rather than the production cooperatives.

33

34

Brazda, Johann. 2004.“Perspectives of Agricultural Cooperatives in Austria,” dalam Agricultural Co-Operatives Are Facing A Challenge,Eigenverlagdes FOG,Wien 2004.

328

continue playing a major role in the field of activity that characterizedits efforts, then reposition and reorientation efforts should be made. Nature will be highly situational, because business changing environment will influence the opportunities and business risks, including the development of cooperatives. New needs arising from the members and at the same time challenging for the cooperative to adapt structural changes in the cooperatives themselves, especially the changes in the form of cooperative organization, size, orientation and patterns of investment. Now, the government's role is still quite strong in organizing and mobilizing cooperatives in Indonesia, but in time the cooperative must be part of non-governmental public institution that can provide social welfare (member) independently and continuously. The government needs to have a strong political will, firmly, and clearly with certainty in empowering people to become independent in a spirit of cooperation (gotong royong), as a form of constitutional implementation (creating welfare while protecting the life of the nation). Brazda view on the above can be a reason to reunite political forces to be willing to accept that cooperative is an economic entity that is dynamic and has noteworthy role to support national economy. Baga (2013)35 suspects a "monopoly" act of the Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs in the development of national cooperatives, although a lot of ministries/ agencies would also develop and conduct cooperative training in their field of work respectively. For example, the Ministry of Agriculture provides guidance to farmer group(Gapoktan) cooperative conduct, the Ministry of Social Affairs also builds business groups (KUBE) in cooperative manner, the Ministry of Maritime Affairs and Fisheries with its groups of fishermen, and many others institution that run coaching values and principles of cooperatives to society with/ without guidance from the Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs. Most of them do not include the word "cooperative," because cooperative development/ coaching is not included in the task and functions of the ministries/ agencies concerned. The rigidity of this kind of game has affected national efforts in establishing cooperatives as the driver of people’s economic as the basis of the national economy.36 Meanwhile, perBaga view, therewill be time to foster joint cooperative conducted by cross-unit and cross-sector work, through collaboration between ministries/ agencies, and replace the regulations that are not conducive to this effort.

on Cooperatives was canceled by the Constitutional Court, since it wants to build cooperative business licenses based on the classification of the cooperative, which includes: a. Consumer cooperatives: services/ business activities in the provision of goods neededby members and nonmembers b. Cooperative producers: services/ business activities in the provision of means of production and marketing of production produced by members and non-members c. Cooperative services: business/ services activities of non-savings and loans needed by members and nonmembers d. Credit Unions: running a savings and loan business as the only business in serving member Referring to the law seems that an integrated cooperative management might requirea merger of two or more types of cooperatives (collaboration). It is a community business with a little complication in the legal aspect. Meanwhile, the Law No. 25/1992 on Cooperatives has assigned the government to create and develop a climate and conditions to promote the growth and popularization of the cooperative. The task of the government among other things are: to provide guidance and protection to cooperatives, where the community is expected to be motivated and could choose to be a member of one or more types of cooperatives, which correspond to their areas of work/ business. In relation to Law No. 25/1992, Utomo37 suggested that the government guidance to create and develop appropriate climate and conditions for promoting cooperatives development can be done in the form of: a. To provide business opportunities for cooperatives to expand extensively b. To Improve and strengthen the cooperatives to be healthy, strong and independent c. To strive cooperative governance in a mutual beneficial business relationship, not only between cooperatives, but also between cooperatives and other business entities d. To Encouragecooperative as social paradigm Pointed out further that government mustbe able to provide convenientenvironment for cooperatives to flourish. Here, the government has a role to make guidance for cooperatives to accord with the economic interests of cooperative members, mainly by: a. Encouragement, development and assistantship in the implementation of education, training, counseling and research on cooperatives b. Providingpolicy to strengthen the cooperative capital and to develop cooperative financial institutions c. Assisting the development of cooperative business networks in a mutually beneficial cooperation among cooperatives

C. Potential Cooperative There is a tendency of classifying the type of cooperative based on the similarity of business activities and/or economic interests of its members. UU no. 17/2012 35

Baga, Lukman M. Dr. Ir., MA.Ec. 2013. "The design of Production Development, and Marketing and Institutional Business." The teaching staff of the Department of Agribusiness, Bogor Agricultural University, working paper as input in the preparation of background Study RPJMN 2015-2019, Empowerment of Cooperatives and SMEs’ Sector, November, 2013. 36 Political alignments still exist in people's economy despite the economic wheels tend to the principles of liberal capitalism.

37

Utomo, Tri Widodo W. 199x(?). “AnalisisMasalahdan ImplementasiKebijakanPerkoperasiandan Usaha Kecil MenurutPendekatanInstitutional Arrangements.”

329

d.

Consulting cooperatives in assistantship program to solve the problems faced by the cooperatives with regard to the constitution and the principle of cooperation

social aspect in a company is like a bastion of hope for productivity and collaboration, whereas the process of structure and culture creates the opportunity to foster effectively: who knows whom, who knows what, how work is done, and how a decision can be made. Business with social value (such as those who run cooperatives) should ideally run as a business based on a well-defined problem, supported by members who are committed, and with welldefined incentives (clear, concise) for those who participate. Hierarchy, thinking straight/ bias, standard operating procedures, and rigid job descriptions are forming institutional inertia that hinder progress, said Hanley. This mindset shall not be included as cooperatives paradigm or within the framework of the cooperative development. The new facesrequire efforts to maintain the spirit of cooperatives in the sense of shared value, efforts, and results as the appropriate portion of the business capacity of each member. In waste management and energy as a joint venture, will be involved in elements of agriculture, business elements, members of the government, technology elements, elements of human resources and social, geographical elements, and elements of weather/ climate. Society as a member of the cooperative can use together or on their own all or part of goods and services (including energy) provided / supplied by various elements above through a cooperative, not free but available in an affordable price (agreed). Producer and consumer members of the cooperative is entitled to receive priority service facilities. The formation of savings and credit cooperatives (KSP) can be used to finance the procurement of raw materials enterprises in the agricultural sector and the energy sector, as a business unit that accommodates the interests of financial inclusion. It is important for KSP to apply the values and principles of service excellent and international standard. The application of the concept of "Certification of Cooperative Capital" (CCC)40 can be used to strengthen the capital structure of cooperatives.41 Sale and purchase of CCC is only possible between members, but still adheres to the principle of "one man one vote" is not of the magnitude of the CCC owned. KSP can collaborate with cooperatives for the purpose of promotion and marketing of products

The role for the government seems to be quite extensive, and there are interests to build collaborative cooperative as business network, mandated by Lawyet should be pursued. To protect cooperatives, the government can take such policy-setting for economicactivity that can only be managed by cooperatives, and to provide the right business environment to flourish cooperativesas well as nurturing enterprises to work in cooperative way. The Utomo’sstudy,which refers to the Law No. 25/1992, provides an overview ofcategorizingcooperatives that could run management and treatment of agricultural wastes/residuesproperly.The Law No.17/ 2012, which was canceled, cannot facilitate agricultural cooperatives in term of cross sectors collaboration, primarily cooperative eblendingto venture agricultural and energy business sector. The Law No.25/ 1992, however, clearly states that the national and local governments are expected to integrate the cooperatives efforts to integrate wastes/ agricultural residues management and their usage for energy in the input and output process manner, or within the process of supply and demand, both in terms of internal collaboration between members of a cooperative or inter-cooperatives. Together with cooperatives, governments can optimize inter-agency cooperation between regions, as well as increasing the capacity ofcooperatives in the development and empowerment ofprocessing agricultural wastes/ residues for energy. Support and facilitation of political alignments seem to be required. There are social values being underestimated by the business world. Such value seems to be driven by cooperativesacted as a medium that facilitates as social container for (especially) micro, small and medium enterprises. 38 As indicated by Hanley (et al., 2014), 39 the 38

As in India, manufacturers of agricultural commodities are generally small farmers who do not have much power to negotiate, because: 1) the quantum and value of their assets is limited, 2) supporting capacity-both financial and infrastructure-is poor, 3) the volume of operations/ productivityis low; 4) there is lack of market information and lack of access to formal financing mechanisms in the absence of collateral. The unavailability of alternative market mechanisms for small and medium-sized farmer means encouraging them to pawn their before-yield products to the market that will make a big unilateral advantage from the differences of prices at the farm level and the sales prices in the market. To avoid such price gap, as a member of the cooperative allows farmers to bring together sources in their power and take advantage of economies of scale that exist at all levels of the supply chain, from procurement of raw materials or agricultural inputs, up to the facilitation of financing the business or for other real spending, which could eventually eliminate the sale in the market intermediaries. (Ref.: WP/ SYS/ R002. Date: Sept. 10th, 2005. "The Co-operative Model: Success engine for agricultural commodities." Website: www.nimble.in)

39 Dave Hanley dan Alicia Hatch. 2014. “SocialActivation: Frompassivetoactivetense.” Copyright ©2014 Deloitte Development LLC. 36 USC 220506. Member [email protected] 40 The CCC concept is not the same with the stocking, although it is a controversy of not being pro-capitalist economy, the CCC can help to strengthen the capital of KSP. The CCC ownership does not affect the policies and decisions of cooperative as an institution that remains at the Annual Meeting of Members (RAT) members of cooperative (AnifHidayatullah, 2014. "Certification of Cooperative Capital Is Difference with Stocks." Department of Cooperatives and SMEs, KulonProgo). 41 Government Regulation (PP) No.33 / 1998 on capital investment in the Cooperative allows the insertion ofCCC concept is getting "populist," and the PP can be improved when necessary.

330

produced by the members or by the cooperative producers (energy/ electricity) in its network. Village Unit Cooperatives (KUD) seems to be a critical point in the revitalization of cooperatives, especially in the type of production cooperatives. KUD inclusiveness in a partnership still is not been able to lift the role of KUDdue to the difficulty to meet the specified requirements for such kind of cooperative partnership (as designated / recommended the government). Many KUD find it difficult to provide an initial capital of Rp 200 million (as requested by the SOEs) to buy fertilizer to become fertilizer distributor. Farming agricultural land is also constrained by the status of land ownership and the ego of cooperative members. communitybase cooperative has not received an adequate portion of the upright of cooperatives in the community. Cooperative Anisa in Subang, for example, is working on the concept of a warehouse receipt constrained by the amount of capital that must be provided to be supplied to the PT. Agricultural (designated by the Ministry of Commerce as quality controller) to purchase agricultural products.42 In conducting its business, the cooperative has the opportunity to make partner with other businesses, and also to conduct its business with the Islamic economic principles. Cooperative sharia is a cooperative entity for doing business with the Islamic principles. If the cooperative has a productive unit and the savings and loan unit, then the whole products and the operations must be carried out with reference to the fatwa of the National Sharia Board (DSN) of MajelisUlama Indonesia. Here, cooperative sharia is not allowed to engage in those areas in which there are elements of having interest on borrowed money (riba), getting something very easily without any hard work or receive benefits without working (maysir), and making purchase/ transaction containing obscurity such as betting, or gambling (gharar). In addition, the cooperative sharia is not allowed to do derivative transactions,and so does the other Islamic financial institutions.43 In accordance to the Law No.30 / 2007 about Energy, every person is entitled to obtain energy, and the provision and utilization of new and renewable energy (EBT) shall be encouraged by all level of governments in accordance to their authority. What can be proceed to produce biomass energy?Someinput materials might be needed,which can largely be derived from agricultural wastes/ residues, such as tree branches, wood, leaves, and agribusiness manufacturewaste (i.e. sawdust), leaves and other vegetation residual. Some plants may hold more energy than the other caused by different mode of photosynthesis. Biomass can also be produced in the form of gas from the final disposal (landfill) of waste (case in Malang), or from the fermentation of plant litter/ manure (spread wise case). The agricultural waste/ residues mayexpand farmer’s choices in doingbusiness since they offered the farming community the business ofcontrolled recycle wastes/

residues activities ranging from individual activity up to group activity.For the business purpose that includes energy, togetherness is needed inagricultur alwastes/ residuecollection to assure sustainability of energy input supply. The business can be assembled to meet its economic of scale that is profitable and sustainablewithcooperative kind of business. The excess energy can be sold to cooperative non-members (cooperative’s customers) if allowed by the rules. Funding for initial construction and operationalizationof agricultural waste power generation (whether for household/ domestic or to generate electricity) can be supported through the available capital in the KSP. Converting agricultural wastes/ residues forenergy can also be conducted by the same cooperative (KSP) to cover working capital for collectingwaste anddistribution of the ready to use processed materialfor energy plants. Setting energy at a base price of energy production might not enough to cover the operational cost cooperative and its development, yet members might have better price than cooperative nonmember. D. Agenda Setting As mentioned on the above, to set up a system for developing agenda to be engaged by cooperatives in agricultural wastes/ residues management, we are supposed to focus on a network/ collaborativeenergy management process. The agenda should be geared more towards renewable energy conducted as public sector involving ministries/ agencies that are dealing with forestry, agriculture, energy, and cooperatives. Interests upon how the preparation and prosecution are arranged might be considered and set into actions and policies in implementing cooperativescollaboration. The following agenda hasconsidered somesteps/ measuresto support the interests of energy (and food) security: a. Establish a working group namely "The development of renewable energy from agricultural wastes/ residues for cooperatives and Micro-Small-Medium enterprises" involving cross related ministries/ agencies b. Disseminate laws and regulations related to renewable energy, agriculture and cooperatives to general society and related institutions c. Prepare modules for training and EBT cooperative development with concentration on biomass business activity d. Make dialogueswith cooperatives and SMEs regarding renewable energy development as part of strengthening the community in utilizingagricultural wastes/ residues forenergy purposes e. Build a cooperatives network that integrates cooperatives in agriculture and in the field of energy to be collaboratedmanner to meet the basic needs of energy, particularly in rural areas f. Empower all types of cooperatives (producers, consumers, services, and savings and loans) to focus on working together to fulfill "zero waste" policy and use it for business activities that have a high economic value sustainably

42

From interview with a Deputy Director at the Directorate of Cooperatives and SMEs, Bappenas. 43 http://just-for-duty.blogspot.com/2012/01/koperasisyariah-pengertian-prinsip.html, for the definition of riba, masyirandghararcheck:http://kangmasgalihpermadi.blogspot. com/2011/10/normal-0-false-false-false-en-us-x-none.html

331

g.

h.

Backup efforts in the field of power generation up to 10 MW (or an agreed and set later) as a form of small and medium scale cooperative activity Provide trained personnel in the technical management of converting agricultural waste for renewable energy, electricity and its distribution.

Handling in partial patterns and the low public attention about the economic value of utilizing agricultural wastes/ residues into energy have become an obstacle to developcooperative in the business of biomass energy. When fossil energy is no longer supportive, the biomass or other renewable energy will be the replacement. Biomass energy generation requires supply continuity of energy catalyst whose fulfillment is possible through good cooperative governance in a network of cooperation between suppliers and users. With proper governance, cooperatives can be said as the right instrument to ensure the continuity of supply. Cooperatives are very useful for creating integration (vertical/ horizontal) in utilizing agricultural wastes/ residues for energy (biomass and electricity). The cooperatives can bridge the supply of energy catalyst to power generation plant, for conversion processes, for distribution services, and for advocating the efficiency and effectiveness in the use of biomass energy. Memberships in cooperatives have the advantage to build a social culture that emphasizes togetherness as mutual benefitin running the collective based business. What needed is the establishment of a (collaborative) partnership intra-cooperativeor intercooperatives, or between cooperatives and corporations (enterprises cooperative membership). The lack of information and data of agricultural cooperatives and energy cooperatives became an obstacle in assessing cooperatives behavior in these sectors;so,they can be used to develop policies of what could be built to integrate both sectors’ interests and how to improve the relationship between the two. Citing Garniwarecords (201x),it is recommended to get the right catalyst from agricultural wastes/residues as basic cooperative business for energy. He mentioned the importance of simply changing the paradigm of energy resources management from the perspective of energy as a commodity into the energy as development capital, as it is possible to utilize energy resources mainly to fulfill energy needs in the country. The stock of biomass energy could be set as the source of national income or to be exported, but it can be done only when the domestic energy needs are already fulfilled. Biomass energy can become the foundation of national energy when it is developed in a focused and continuously improved technology aspreserved energy, whilegradually reduce the share of fossil energy in the national energy mix. The real cooperative important role would be to maintain the sustainability of biomass energy andto provide more appropriate services to the community and society in general. Increasing biomass energy reserves could be done by utilizing a network of cooperatives in awin-win collaborativepattern. Government support and commitment are needed to create energy security, in which biomassismanaged independently by the community (through cooperatives). Utilization of biomass energy can be done by considering the balance between the availability of raw materials, production prices in the input and output sides, the maximum production rate, and the rate of additionalreserve of agricultural wastes/residues materials. Support rules/ regulations are needed primarily related to business ownership and concession rights for generating and distributing wastes/ agricultural residues vis-à-vis to the

All points on the above (a to h) would reduce the consumption of fossil fuel gradually for electricity generation. Cooperatives could be given moreroleto meet electricity demand in rural areas (urban areas as well) in addition the fulfillment by the State Electricity Company (PLN). The PLN can participate not only to foster cooperative for collecting service fees from its customers, but also to go further to cooperatively integrate companies of electric power generation that rely on renewable energy derived from biomassor agricultural wastes/ residues. It needs to be more involved in developing cooperatives, as partner in energy business, particularly in producing and distributing electricity. Through cooperatives, the PLN can optimize the fulfillment of electricity needs providing the increase number of cooperatives that engage in power generation business activities using renewable(primarily biomass) energy. E. Conclusions and Recommendations Law No.18/ 2008 on Waste Management does not regulate agricultural waste management, but there are principles of waste management that should be held by the public abouthow to handle agricultural waste. Trash has a negative connotation as any material which is deliberately disposed by community, which term may be less fit for discharge farm/ agricultural waste. To that end, the proper term is probably natural wastes/ residues because most agricultural waste material (in the broad sense) can be said to be wasted by nature, but still important to be controlled and can be utilized. Agricultural wastes/ residues can be categorized as specificjunk, the waste that is not periodically trashedor technologically being developed. Control is required to reduce such wastes or eradicate them to "zero waste" in a way that it is environmentally friendly. This is important because do nothing could become the element of threat to human health and the environment;i.e., when the agricultural wastes/residues management are not carried out properly or if the wastes being left alone they become hazardous to human beings and environment. Reduction or even eradication of agricultural wastes/ residues might benefit people; andif done economically wise, it might become the source of people’s income. Utilization of agricultural wastes/ residue into biomass must passcatalyst conversion process beforebeing used to generate energy and/or compost. The utilization of wastes into catalyst will require public setting to build economic value in the transformation process from waste (residue) to energy optimally. It is proven that 63% of agricultural wastes/ residues in Asia has been treated and used as fuel. Utilization for biofuel in Indonesia is still low (14%), although the Ministry of Energy has noted that the potential of biomass to produce electrical power would be around 50 GW.

332

attention of energy (output) generated by more than one establishment of cooperatives that isby closing partnership within business corporations (members) who are partnersin cooperative way. Cooperatives should then be understood as an institution that should be addressed across sectors, though its development is mandated to the Ministry of Cooperatives and SMEs.

[19] Bijman, Jos; Roldan Muradian, and Andrei Cechin. (20xx). “Agricultural cooperatives and value chain coordination.” [20] Baga, Lukman M. Dr., Ir., MA.Ec. 2013. “Rancangan Pengembangan Produksi, dan Pemasaran serta Kelembagaan Usaha.” Staf pengajar Departemen Agribisnis, Institut Pertanian Bogor, kertas kerja masukan dalam penyusunan background Study PRJMN 2015-2019, Bidang Pemberdayaan Koperasi dan UKM, Nopember 2013. [21] Brazda, Johann. 2004.“Perspectives of Agricultural Co-operatives in Austria,” dalam Agricultural CoOperatives Are Facing A Challenge,Eigenverlagdes FOG, Wien 2004. [22] Marwa S. Al-Ansary, Salah M ElHagar,andMahmoudA.Tahaetal. (200x).“SustainableGuidelinesforManagingDemolition Waste in Egypt,” paperpresentedby Marwa S. AlAnsary http://congress.cimne.upc.es/rilem04/admin/Files/FileP aper/ p221.pdf [23] Fitria.Oktober, 2012. “Energi Terbarukan dari Limbah.” http://lingkungan.net/2012/10/ energiterbarukan-dari-limbah/ [24] Hanley,Dave dan Alicia Hatch. 2014. “SocialActivation: Frompassivetoactivetense.” Copyright ©2014 Deloitte Development LLC. 36 USC 220506. Member ofDeloittteToucheTohmatsuLimited.usdbriefs@deloitte .com [25] Garniwa, Iwa, Prof. Dr. Ir. 201x. “Tantangan dan Strategi Pengembangan Tata kelola Energi Gas Untuk Ketahanan Energi Nasional.” Selaku Ketua Pengkajian Energi Universitas Indonesia (PEUI) [26] “GELORAKAN GOTONG ROYONG.” 2012. http://jatim.bkkbn.go.id/berita.php?p=beritadetil [27] Lilis Nur Faizah, 2007. Tugas Mata Kuliah “Vak Khusus Hukum Perbandingan Agraria” pada Fakultas Hukum, Universitas Gajah Mada [28] Novkovic, Sonja and Natasha Power. 2005. “Agricultural and Rural Cooperative Viability: A Management Strategy Based on Cooperative Principles and Values,” Saint Mary’s University Halifax, Canada.Journal of Rural Cooperation, 33(1) 2005:6778. [29] Yevich, Rosemarie andJennifer A. Logan. 2003. “An assessment of biofuel use and burning of agricultural waste in the developing world.” Article first published online: 10 OCT 2003. http://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/ [30] Rakhman, Maman. “Pengertian Konversi Energi.” http://file.upi.edu/Direktori/FPTK/ JUR_PEND._TEKNIK_MESIN [31] Sihombing, Martin (ed.), http://industri.bisnis.com/read/20131124/12/188468/ke menkop-ajak-ncba-pasarkan-rempah-indonesia[32] Utomo, Tri Widodo W. 199x(?). “AnalisisMasalahdan ImplementasiKebijakanPerkoperasiandan Usaha Kecil MenurutPendekatanInstitutional Arrangements.” [33] WP/SYS/R002. 10th Sept. 2005. “The Co-operative Model: Successengineforagriculturalcommodities.” Website: www.nimble.in

REFERENCES. [1] Anonymous,http://bkp.pertanian.go.id/downlot.php%3 Ffile%3DBuku_Dasawarsa_ BKP.pdp [2] Anonymous, http://power-to-thepeople.net/2013/01/renewable-energy-ourfundamental-choice-today/ [3] Anonymous, http://migasreview.com/kebijakan-sektorenergi-harus-diarahkan-pemenuhan-kepentinganmasyarakat.html#sthash.jWcVodxM.dpuf. [4] Anonymous, http://www.northumberland.gov.uk/default.aspx?page= 1362, [5] Anonymous,http://www.certifiedorganic.bc.ca/rcbtoa/s ervices/regulations.html, [6] Anonymous, http://www2.epa.gov/regulatoryinformation-topic/waste). [7] Anonymous, (2009). http://www.paskomnas.com/id/berita/KondisiPertanian-Indonesia-saat-ini-Berdasarkan-PandanganMahasiswa-Pertanian-Indonesia.php [8] Anonymous, http://thepresiduntpostindonesia.com/2013/01/28/listrik -biomassa-diperlukan-penyempurnaan-feed-in-tarrif/ [9] Anonymous, http://epetani.deptan.go.id/berita/praktekpengolahan-limbah-menjadi-sumber-nutrisi-8092 [10] Anonymous, http://www.karanganyarkab.go.id/20130607/desaburan-bersiap-operasikan-instalasi-pengolahan-limbah/. [11] Anonymous, http://www.iptek.net.id/ind/pd_limbah/?mnu=2 [12] Anonymous, http://www.bristolenergy.coop/ [13] Anonymous, 2013, http://www.pikiranrakyat.com/node/217221 [14] Anonymous, http://just-forduty.blogspot.com/2012/01/koperasi-syariahpengertian-prinsip.html, [15] Anonymous, http://kangmasgalihpermadi.blogspot.com/2011/10/nor mal-0-false-false-false-en-us-x-none.html [16] Anif Hidayatullah, 2014. “Perbedaan Sertifikat Modal Koperasi dengan Saham.” Dinas Koperasi dan UKM, Kabupaten Kulon Progo [17] AnggitDwipramana, (2012),http://anggitpramana.com/2012/08/26/wowpembangkit-listrik-tenaga-biomassa-pltb-mulaitumbuh-di-indonesia [18] Astriani Ginting, http://www.slideshare.net/risaastrianiginting/pengelola an-sampah-27806911

333

The Utilization of Crude Glycerol of Waste Vegetable Oil Biodiesel on Palm Oil Glycerolysis Siti Mujdalipah1, IkaAmalia K2, Hasna A1, Puji R N1, &NastitiSiswi I2 Type the author addresses here [email protected] Abstract. This study is to determine the best ratio of crude glycerol from waste vegetable oil biodiesel to palm oil. The ratio is 3 to 5.5. Each treatment was repeated twice. The characteristics which were analyzed were yield, interfacial tension and free glycerol content. The best product has the ability to reduce water interfacial tension from 72 dyne/cm to 33.965 dyne/cm and has a free glycerol content of 0.0294%. Keywords: crude glycerol, palm oil, glycerolysis, interfacial tension I. INTRODUCTION Biodiesel has been widely accepted as a renewable alternative fuel. The biodiesel demand is clearly increasing [1]. In addition, biodiesel is to a viable solution are facing scarcity of fossil energy in the foreseeable future, biodiesel is environmentally friendly, renewable and able to eliminate the greenhouse effect.The process of trans esterification biodiesel also produce glycerol as a by-product. For every 3 moles of ethyl ester will produce 1 mole of crude glycerol. This value is equivalent to 10% of the amount of biodiesel production [2]. Nevertheless, crude glycerol still contains various impurities such as oily, alkali, and soap components, a salt or diols, depending on the processes and the type of materials processed [3,4]. From 7 industry of biodiesel obtained that crude glycerol contains 38% to 96% glycerol, 2% methanol, and 29% ash [5]. The impurities in crude glycerol are influenced by the type of catalyst used in the process of making biodiesel. KOH and NaOH are a kind of catalyst that is most widely used. The ho-mogeneous basecatalyzed transesterification process is widely used industrially due to the fact that it is kineti-cally much faster and it has been proven to be economi-cally viable [6]. The catalyst mostly will be dissolved in the crude glycerol. Therefore, crude glycerol is alkaline with a pH value reaches 12. NaOH and KOH are the two types of catalysts that are also widely used in the processing of monoglycerides. Monoglycerides is obtained fromglycerolysis reaction. It is reaction between glycerol and oil/fat that is assisted by catalysts. The reaction will run slowly if it is done without a catalyst.Monoglycerides are widely used as emulsifier in various food products, such as bakery products, margarine, ice cream, candy and gum [7]. Currently there are 20 kinds of food emulsifier and 70% of them are monoglycerides[8]. Bakery products are the most products which is used this type of emulsifier. Approximately 60% monoglycerides are used in bakery products and about 20% are used on cakes and sponge cakes. Ratio of glycerol/oil is the most influential variable in the process of becoming amonoglyceride[9].Aprevious study obtained 1:3.5 as the best ratio between oil and glycerol pure in producing monoglyceride.This means that for every 100 grams of oil needed 350 g glycerol. For that, at the end of glycerolysiswill be produced a waste from un reacted

glycerol in a large quantities (> 50% b/b). Pure glycerol has a quite expensive price, i.e. Rp. 45,000.00/l. This condition certainly requires solutions that can decrease the cost of production.The search for other sources of glycerol which is cheaper will be the right solution. Crude glycerol in addition has a low price; it is also contain a catalyst that can be utilized in the synthesis of monoglycerides. II. METHODS 1.1. Materials The raw material used ispalm oleic purchased from PT. SMART Tbk. Chemicals used are obtained from the local chemical stores (Bratachem). Other materials used in the process glycerolysis are glycerol, isopropyl alcohol, aquades, and n-Hexan. While the materials used in the analysis are chloroform, acid, KI, sodium thiosulfate, and a solution of starch. 1.2. Methods 1.2.1. A glycerolysis Process. Glycerolysisapplied at the total massof reaction of 500 grams, the stirring speed was 400 rpm for 4 hour. The amount of solvent was 20 ml for every 10 g of palm oil. The ratio glycerol/palm oil ratios wereR1, R2, and R3. The temperature was 80-90 °C. 1.2.2. Analysis The products resultedwere then analysedfor their physical and chemical characteristics such as yield, the ability of the product in lowering the surface tension of water, and free glycerol content.

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION 3.1 Influence of ratio of crude glycerol to the yield of the products Yield is calculated by comparing the resulting product masstomass of palm oil which is used as raw material.Yield emulsifier produced in this research mostly exceeds the amount of the percentage of raw materials of palm oil.

334

33.745 – 34.025 dyne/cm. R1 could decrease better than others.However the values earned on (α = 0.05) from R1, R2, and R3 are no different. 3.3 Influence of ratio of crude glycerol to the free glycerol content of product Glycerol has three hydroxyl groups (-OH) which can be esterified by one, two or three fatty acids to form monoglycerides, diglycerides, and triglycerides.The number indicates the number of free glycerol glycerol that cannot convert into monoglycerides.

Figure 1.The correlation of the ratio of crude glycerol and oil to the yield of products Molar stoichiometry on the ideal reaction between glycerol and triglycerides are 1:1 where 1 mol MAGand 1 mol DAG will be formed. The use of excess glycerol is needed to increase the amount of glycerol which is dissolved in the triglyceride. It is done because the glycerol has a limited solubility in triglycerides [10].Solubility of glycerol in the TAG is an influential factor in the formation of the product. Figure 1showthat the larger ratio of glycerol tends to increase the conversion of triacylglycerol into MAG and DAG.The figure shows that the ratios influence the yield.However the yields earned on (α = 0.05) are no different.

Figure 3. The correlation of the ratio of crude glycerol and oil to thefree glycerol content

3.2 Influence of ratio of crude glycerol to the ability of the products to decrease water surface tension Surface tension (γ) of a fluid can be defined as the number of work required to expand the surface of the liquid by one unit area. The molecules in the liquid will do Van der Waals forces in the same magnitude in all directions.However, molecules on the surface of a fluid will make a force that leads into the liquid itself because there is no longer a molecule on the surface of the liquid surface area. As a result the surfaces of liquid tend to shrink.Measurement of the surface tension of water is carried out using Du Nouy. This method is done based on the determination of the force required to remove the ring from the surface of the liquid.

Products in this study contain free glycerol from 0.029 to 0.067%. Acceptable free glycerol content on the commercial monoglycerides is less than 7% of the weight of monoglycerides[11]. The products produced have good free glycerol content. The ratio of glycerol rough: oil on α = 0.05 showed no real difference towards the free glycerol content of the products. R1 R2 R3 IV. CONCLUSIONS R3 is the best ratios of by crude glycerol to palm oil with a comparison of crude glycerol higher than palm oil.The product resulting from the process of glycerolysisat R3 has the largest yield value (155%), free glycerol content of 0.029%-b, and ability to reduce the surface tension of water from 72 dyne/cm to 33.965 dyne/cm. REFERENCES [1] Li, C., Lesnik, K. L., and Liu, H. 2013. Microbial Conversion of Waste Glycerol from Biodiesel Production into Value-Added Products. Energies, 6(2013): 4739-4768. R1 R2 R3 [2] Thompson, J. C. and He, B. B. 2006. Characterization of crude glycerol from biodiesel production from multiple feedstocks. Applied Engineering in Agriculture, 22(2): 261-265. [3] Kovacs, A. 2011. Aspects of refining biodiesel byproductglycerin. Petroleum & Coal, 53(2): 91-98. [4] Tan, H. W., Aziz, A. R. A., and Aroua, M. K. 2013. Glycerol production and its applications as a raw material: A review. Renewableand Sustainable Energy Reviews, 27(2013): 118–127. [5] Hansen CF, Hernandez A, Mullan BP, Moore K, Trezona-Murray M, dan King RH, Pluske JR. (2009). A chemical analysis of samples of crude glycerol from the production of biodiesel in Australia, and the effects

Figure 2. The correlation of the ratio of crude glycerol and oil to theabilityof products to decrease surface water tension Figure 2 show that mostly the products on all ratioshave ability to decrease water surface tension from 72 dyne cm to

335

of feeding crude glycerol to growing-finishing pigs on performance, plasma metabolites and meat quality at slaughter. Anim Prod Sci 2009, 49:154-161. [6] Kombe, G. G., Temu, A. K., Rajabu, H. M., Mrema, G. D., and Lee, K. T. 2013. Low Temperature Glycerolysis as a High FFA Pre-Treatment Method for Biodiesel Production. Advances in Chemical Engineering and Science, 3(2013): 248-254. [7] Negi, D. S., Sobotka, F., Kimmel, T., Wozny, G., and Schomacker, R. 2007. Glycerolysis of Fatty Acid Methyl Esters: 1. Investigations in a Batch Reactor. J Amer Oil ChemSoc, 84(2007):83–90. [8] Stauffer, C.E. (2002). Emulsifiers and Stabilizers. DalamFats in Food Technology, Rajah, K. K. UK : Sheffield Academic Press Ltd. Chap. 7.

[9] PramanadanMulyani. (2016). Proses GliserolisisCPOmenjadi Mono danDiacylGliseroldenganPelarutTertButanoldanKatalisMgO. MakalahJurusanTeknik Kimia, FakultasTeknik, UniversitasDiponegoro, Semarang. [10] HarismawatidanPrasetyo (2011). Produksi Mono– danDigliseridadengan Proses GliserolisisPseudohomogendariMinyakGorengBekas. JurusanTeknik Kimia, Fak. Teknik, UniversitasDiponegoro, Semarang. [11] Prakoso, T., Sakanti, M.M. (2007). PembuatanMohogliserida. JurnalTeknik Kimia Indonesia. Vol 6 No 3: 689 – 697.

336

THE REUSE OF TRADITIONAL MEDIA COMMUNICATION FOR DISASTER PREVENTION (CASE STUDY IN BANYUMAS, CENTRAL OF JAVA INDONESIA) S. Bekti Istiyanto University of Jenderal Soedirman Purwokerto, Indonesia Email: [email protected] Abstract. The way how to decrease human victims in a disaster could be attempted before a disaster happened such as socializations and education to improve community awareness. Despite reguler socialization and education programs, information about natural disaster can use traditional communications also. This research used descriptive qualitative method with indepth interview, observation and documentation to collect data. The informans were collected as represented disaster mitigation institutions from Banyumas government and people who know about this problems and represented affected natural disaster areas.The result of this research shows that is a district that frequently stricken by disaster, Banyumas goverment already gave several things to prevent the appearance of victims in case the disaster came. The preventive action that goverment did such as the instalation of an early warning system technology, socialitation about disaster, even regular security about the current situation. Although these happening communication technology disaster does not leave the traditional communication media that already in use by Banyumas society since long time ago. The traditional media contains with two things which are folk performance such asGagrak Banyumasan shadows puppet and Banyumasan Gendingand the tools availability of traditional communication in this area. The folk performance could be as a complement media to educate people about disaster prevention with interact each other while the show is running/live. If both of the performing arts media could be switched on/revived and used again as a socialitation media regarding disaster case, so it would be easier for Banyumas society to understand because the used of Banyumas local language.For the tools of traditional communication media in this community such as kenthongan and bedug could be use as a early warning replacement, especially if the early warning system technology could not running well as usual. Sound from these tools also could be symbolized security situation in this community. Basically all of the traditional communication media are still needed by society in Banyumas area, included information sharing about disaster prevention. Keywords: disaster prevention, traditional communication media, reuse I. INTRODUCTION

also rivers, unstable ground, forest, roads, and railways. Besides, there are unstable seasons, climate and weather changes. There are also uncontrolled sand mining on several spots near Serayu river, illegal logging and also the luxurious villas and houses on Mt. Slamet. The frequent, hard rain increases the wariness of disaster in wet season. Kranggan, an area in Ajibarang even has the highest rain fall rate, which is almost as high as Bogor City in West Java. Data from Badan Penanggulangan Bencana Daerah (BPBD) Banyumas showed there are 19 sub districts out of 29 sub districts that have high risk of flood. There are 91 villages with high flood potential in Eastern Banyumas, which are Tambak, Kemranjen and Sumpiuh. National roads in those locations are also easily inundated by flood. Another example is the event on October 16th 2012, where a house in Banjarpanepen village in Sumpiuh, Banyumas, was seriously damaged due to the landslide. There were seven people live in that house but fortunately the disaster didn’t claim any victim. PROBLEM Based on the introduction above, there is a problem that can be abbreviated as “How is the reuse of traditional media communication for disaster prevention done in Banyumas?” LITERATURE REVIEW

Disaster is a thing that has to be avoided because it often comes unpredictably but is risky and causes both lives and materials loss. Generally, disaster will bring consequences as man victims, materials loss and public facilities damage that will affect to the lives of society and will also give impact to the future activities and development. Thus, in order to face a disaster there must be prevention efforts that will function as the programs that prepare, plan, control, and do the whole prevention and handling actions. These programs are hoped to press and reduce the loss due to the occurrence of disaster. One of southern Central Java areas which has high potential of natural disaster occurrence is Banyumas. Cahyono, the Head of Badan Penanggulangan Bencana Daerah (BPBD), an institution that is responsible in preventing and controlling disaster in Banyumas area, stated that based on national data, Banyumas Regency is ranked in 8th place as an area with high potential of disaster. This showed that Banyumas is placed in quite high position. Geographically, Banyumas Regency is located in Eurasia plate rim, which makes Banyumas has high risk of tectonic earthquake. This area is not only dominated by the mountains, but there are

337

Disaster Mitigation Based on UU No. 24 Tahun 2007, mitigation is a series of efforts including application of the regulation of high disaster potential development, actions of disaster prevention, emergency actions, rehabilitations and reconstructions. There are two kinds of mitigation, which are structural (i.e. checked dam, dams, earthquake-resistance houses and others) and non-structural mitigation (i.e. regulations, training, and others, which specifies in efforts to minimize disaster impacts). The efforts to minimize victims (mitigation) due to the disaster occurrence has been started since several years ago, orienting to Hyogo Framework, a commitment of international citizens to reduce the risk of disaster occurrence (Budianto & Tanti, 2013: 400). Disaster risk reduction can be understood as efforts or measurements that is used to minimize loss by minimalizing threats, susceptibilities, vulnerabilities, and increasing coping and adaptive capacities in the contexts of before, on and after the disaster. One of the most essential indicators in decreasing the risk and impact of disaster is the society’s readiness. Here, people’s awareness and understanding, as the subject and also the object when disaster occurs in an area, are needed. As people are more aware and understand the importance of disaster risk reduction information, the loss, both in materials and more importantly lives, might be reduced. In 2007, Indonesian Government released UU No. 24 tentang Penanggulangan Bencana. Even at the same year Indonesian Government had cooperation with UNDP by designing a program named Safer Communities through Disaster Risk Reduction (SCDR) in Development. This program’s objective is to help Indonesian Government in developing a society which is safer from disaster (Budianto & Tanti, 2013: 400). The purpose is to make the regulation makers and society o be able to recognize and understand the disaster risks and have ability that can be functiones to reduce the loss risks due to the disaster occurrence. Disaster countermeasures have been applied as one of 11 (eleven) mid-long term national development priorities on 2010-2014, which are integrated to national priority of Living Environmentand Disaster Management (Budianto & Tanti, 2013: 400). That priority is directed to the efforts as follow; mainstreaming the disaster risk reduction as national and regional priorities, strengthening the capacity of disaster countermeasures in the capital and regional area, optimizing the control instruments of space using in the aspect of disaster risk reduction, increasing the resources of emergency handling and humanity actions, and also accelerating the recovery of impacted area (Bappenas, 2010). Disaster reduction in Indonesia is still not working optimally since there is still not any blueprint of disaster risk reduction strategies that is purposed for creating correlations between stakeholders, disaster susceptibilities, society’s communicative potentials and other development agendas that are specifically related to the human resources like education and poverty handling (Budianto & Tanti, 2013: 402). In the other side, disaster risk reduction should need the permanent institutions from one, three and five years. In every impacted area, the society condition will be different

and it needs the different treatments in recovering them after disaster. Traditional Communication Media The efforts of information distribution through communication media for society are different because of different society structure and system in every region. For the linier society, which means that the problems are known and had by the biggest part of the society member, communication through modern mass media will be more beneficial. In contrast with the plural society, modern mass media will not work effectively and it takes harder efforts than the use of traditional communication media in the society (Rogers, 1992). Traditional communication media, which is also known as folk media, is human communication which is done by using symbols like sounds, cues, visual arts and shows (Rachmadi, 1988: 111). In modern, developed society, the human communication is done using modern media and technology like newspapers, radio, movie, television and other electronic appliances like internet, satellite and others. All of the mentioned communication channels are considered as communication media and are only differed by its source, type and scope. People’s media are described as media which are cheap, easy, general, offering chance for dialogue, suitable and approved by cultural aspects, local, flexible, entertaining and also populist, and is also trustworthy by the society members, which are dominantly the villagers with traditional lifestyle (Oepen, 1988: 88). Traditional communication media consist of many kinds and types, for examples are folklore (myths, legends and tales), proverb, aphorism, poem, folk songs, folk theater, and traditional music instruments like kenthongan, gong, bedug, gendang and others (Rachmadi, 1988: 111). All of those traditional communication media live among people, originated from their pure genuine tradition and is functioned as interactional tools in different occasions. Thus, people inherit their behavioral and moral values through the mentioned media to their ancestries. The needs of traditional communication media will always live as long as people need to inherit the values they need in their lives, which is not forcing and mingled with foreign values. In many regions in Indonesia, there are still many villages that use folk performances as communication media among them. This is because the messages that are delivered in traditional media are more acceptable and understandable by the traditional villagers. The development messages will be delivered by their mother tongue through the familiar media which are suitable with their cultural values, which makes the people as the recipients don’t feel forced to understand the messages. Some of the traditional communication media, the folk performances, that still live and active in Indonesia are ketoprak in Central and East Java, ludruk in East Java, wayang in the majority of Javanese people, randai in Riau, theatre and dagelan. All of those folk performances have characteristics as they are dominated by spoken element in conversations, dialogue or even in their songs. Folk performances as traditional communication media are the communication media that are used by people in a particular area (local), since the native culture was not contaminated by modern technology and are still used until now (Rachmadi, 1988: 112). As the media are originated

338

from the native people, so its historical appeals are functional and aesthetic, both the popular (ketoprak, ludruk) and the classic one like wayang. Therefore, as it has function to entertain the audiences, the traditional communication media are also functioned to educate, strengthen and even change the values and traditions of the people. Folk media are the identity of people’s expression. The messages that are being delivered to the people are the parts of their own life experiences, although there are also some magicalreligious traditions as people’s faith as reflections of their material and spiritual lives (Rachmadi, 1988:112). Another traditional communication medium is the sound, which symbolizes a particular sign with a particular meaning like the ones in kenthongan and bedug. Related to the disaster occurrence, the sounds of people beating those traditional instruments are meant to inform, warn and save people by beating it in a particular rhythm as danger signs. The danger signs are an effort to warn people about the chance of disaster occurrence. The forms of those danger signs are agreed by local society, which impacts as in case they hear the danger signs, they can understand it and know what to do. Basically, these danger signs should fulfil some requirements, including accessible, immediate, coherent, and official (cited from http://carapedia.com/tanda_tanda_bahaya_info2538.html).

preventing the disaster loss. Second, the availability of socialization and education to prepare people’s awareness and preventing maximum loss. This program can be formed as counselling and direct simulation about the procedures to prevent the victim loss and as the self-rescuing effort if there is an unwanted disaster occurrence. This program should be organized regularly as warning system, and thus it will automatically work in disaster occurrence. In fact, people will get easily bored with counselling and simulation programs. There are many reasons for this, as they already understand the procedures, people also consider these programs will bother their income factors because they will have less time for working, which implies on lesser income they get. Third, the level of understanding and awareness of the people. If the society has high level of this factor, thus they will contribute directly in the disaster handling programs. In contrast, if the level is low, they will also have low contribution in further programs. People’s readiness is an aspect that is essential in facing a disaster. Therefore, there must be a disaster communication medium that will help people in being aware and thus increase people’s contribution. The result of in-depth interview showed that people’s contribution is not obtained from counselling and simulation programs. In the beginning of the programs, people are still in need of the knowledge and they are curious, for example is in the socialization program of siren installation as the first step of early warning system in Pekuncen. People were also still enthusiast in practicing the simulation. They did all the instructions, directed by BPBD team and LSM members, the enactment of evacuation route, signs and safe meeting point. But, their curiosity doesn’t last forever since they will get bored and they feel they already know the materials, and they also had less contribution in the socialization process. They were just following the process but didn’t have courage to ask questions about what they have to do in emergency situation when there is a disaster occurrence like how to inform their relatives and how to save lives if one of their family members become the victim. The reminding process of loss reduction is still important and needed to be done. This is important to avoid panic and uncertain condition and turn it to be calm and clear to do actions. They are also expected to warn the others in order to decrease the chance of more life loss, because if people wait for government’s socialization programs, the result will not change. The informant from public figures explained that the effort of educating and building people’s understanding of the things to do in disaster occurrence comes as the traditional communication media. Traditional communication media that can be used for that purpose is the folk performances as educating medium and kenthongan as the early warning sign if there is a disaster occurrence in their area. Folk Performances as Disaster Education Media Istiyanto (2003) stated that in rural people, which is dominated by traditional people, there are many kinds of social media as the effective tools to interact among one another. These media has been growing and developing since long ago and has become the socialization media of the people’s values, from a generation to another. These media are known as folk media. The folk media use face-to-face

II. METHODS The method used in this study is qualitative descriptive, which is a method that reviews, explains and analyzes data in order to solve social problems that are occurring at the present time (Effendy, 2004: 93). The data are collected through in-depth interview, observation and documentation. To test the validity of the data, researcher used data triangulation method (Moleong, 2001: 178). In this study, validity test was done by comparing the observation result with the result of in-depth interview and also comparing the in-depth interview result with the material of related document. Purposive sampling technique, a sampling technique which is oriented to researcher’s opinion about the eligibility of the representative informants, was chosen in order to choose informants of this study (Arikunto, 1993). Researcher chose five public figures as informants, who are believed to be trustworthy in giving data for this study and understand the problems of this study well. Another informant is chosen from Badan Penanggulangan Bencana Daerah (BPBD) in Banyumas Regency as the representative of the Banyumas government. III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION Disaster Communication Media Yunianto, Kepala Pelaksana Harian BPBD Banyumas, stated that Banyumas is a district which has high potential of disasters like tornado, landslide and flood. In a disaster occurrence, the loss, both lives and material, are things that should be avoided in handling the occurring disaster. The prevention process of victim loss can be done in some situations. First, the availability of information system that is provided by the regions with high disaster potential as early warning system to the people. This system should be prevailed directly and immediately as the early effort in

339

communication both in interpersonal and group communications. Here, the contribution process of the members is very essential, both as the players and the audiences. They can deliver the messages directly in the performance. This is categorized as interactive communication process that is commonly happen in traditional people’s lives. Folk media often come as local arts or local folk performance. The arts of local folk performance is used as the local arts and folks performances. The arts of folk performance is used as the tools in introducing and delivering messages to the rural people, including the messages about disaster like the cause of the disaster, its prevention efforts and also the safety efforts in disaster occurrence. Because the rural people like and need the arts of traditional performances as entertainment media, thus these media can be a great tool as education tool about disaster. The education message about the disaster can be added implicitly as creative aspect in role’s dialogue in the performances. Further, Istiyanto (2003) stated that in traditional communication in rural areas, the use of folk performances as communication media has big potential to access many people, especially when the media have strong attraction which is rooted in people’s life. The arts of folk performances are the communication tools that have been used in a local area, which is used before the local culture was not contaminated by technology and is still used until now. These media are familiar with the people, full of variations and can be immediately available, and also cheap. These media, with all of its advantages, have the potentials as effective tools in delivering messages, especially when it is specialized in the case of disaster that should be understood by all society members. Generally, there are two kinds of folk performances in Banyumas that can be used as education and disaster communication media for traditional people in Banyumas. Pakem, the Javanese term of a story’s plot in the performances, indeed cannot be changed drastically. But, the dialogues and the messages about disaster education can be added and modified. The purpose is to build awareness and understanding without being contrast with the main idea of the story that has been the plot of the performance. If the plot turned to be very different than the main pakem, the audiences will leave them, and thus it will not be effective in communicating the particular messages like the disaster topics. Two kinds of folk performances in Banyumas are: a. Wayang Kulit Gagrag Banyumasan The history and definition of wayang kulit Gagrag Banyumasan are cited from Wikipedia (https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wayang_kulit_Gagra g_Banyumasan) and it explains that like the common Javanese, people of Banyumas also love to watch the performance of wayang kulit. The wayang kulit performances in Banyumas tend to follow gagrag, the Banyumasan style of puppeteer. The arts of Banyumas’ gagrag puppeteer are actually similar with Yogya-Solo style that is combined with Kedu (southern Central Java area) style in its story, strike and language. The only difference is in Banyumasan gagrag, the

punakawan (servants of the main character) use Banyumasan language. The name of characters are also generally same, except Bagong (Solo) turned to be Bawor or Carub in Banyumas. In Yogya-Solo style, Bagong is the youngest child of Ki Semar while in Banyumasan version, Bawor is the oldest. Bawor himself is the mascot of Banyumas Regency. The main character of Wayang Kulit Gagrag Banyumasan is the folk nuance that is really deep, in which the good puppeteer will perform the dynamic reality of society. The famous puppeteers of Wayang Kulit Gagrag are Ki Sugio Purbacarito, Ki Sugino Siswacarito and Ki Suwarjono. In the performance of Wayang Kulit Gagrag, all messages about society’s reality, development information, government’s program including the disaster socialization can be delivered clearly and it can also trigger the interactive communication between audiences and the performers when punakawan (Bawor and his siblings) making performance as the center of performance. This moment is functioned as the interlude from the main wayang story. In this scene, the puppeteer will insert the messages and even critics to everyone, subtly but also overtly as Banyumas people’s principle in life, cablaka, which means forthrightness. To get the audiences’ interest, the performance of punakawan is done in relax and humorous situation but the inserted messages can be emphasized repeatedly and, if needed, asked to the audiences to make sure that they understand the messages. If the puppeteer considers the audiences don’t understand the messages, it can be repeated and asked in dialogue to the audiences creatively, without being too patronizing. One of the examples of Wayang gagrag’s messages about disaster is when the puppeteer told a disaster occurrence of flood in an area in Banyumas. With the right gamelan tone, puppeteer told how flood occurred on the area, the victim’s fate, the causes of flood from illegal logging, the logged garbage, clogged streams, narrowing rivers, and also the human’s behaviors that finally causing flood as a test from God. Informant who represented the government also confirmed that the performances of Wayang Kulit Gragag Banyumasan can be the alternative socialization media aside from the socialization media as society gathering and outdoor media like banners. The puppeteer has to get a note so the messages that will be delivered to the audiences are suitable with the reality and not considered as subjective or bias information. If the puppeteer explain the messages in the right way, the people’s awareness of disaster will increase. In contrast, when the puppeteer cannot deliver the messages, audiences can misunderstand them. Therefore, the puppeteer’s information and understanding about disaster topic should also be increased. This is justified by the public figures informant who told

340

that indeed there are information about development and disaster messages are inserted by the puppeteer in the performances. The messages are usually inserted in satire and advices that are meant to trigger the audiences’ curiosity. Even in many occasions, the audiences are also asked by the puppeteer about the topic. Usually, this dialogue happened when the main character’s performance is in break and the performance is filled with entertainment performed by the servants of the main character to entertain and strengthen. The dialogue is delivered in Banyumasan language as the people’s mother tongue so they will understand the messages that are delivered by the puppeteer. This folk performance is started from 9 p.m. until the breaking dawn. b. Gending Banyumasan Gending Banyumasan, or the traditional songs of Banyumas, dominate many kinds of traditional arts in Banyumas. It can also be called as the uniqueness of the Banyumasan culture, even with many creations that perform the Banyumasan rhythm and accent, which differs with other kinds of art performances. The other characteristics are that Banyumasan songs contain parikan or traditional poetry that is usually containing humorous satire, more dynamic rhythm than the Yogya-Solo style, which is even more similar to the Sundanese. The rhymes tell advices, humor, and depicting Banyumas society and the social critics. The songs of Gending Banyumasan can be played with regular gamelan or the gamelan calung bambu. As other Javanese gending, there are also laras slendro and pelog in the rhythm of Gending Banyumasan. This performance art can also be inserted with much disaster information although not as the main message. The message can be delivered though the traditional poetry or in the specific rhyme in the main poetry. In Gending Banyumasan, the message is not delivered as straight as in Wayang Kulit Gagrag Banyumasan because it is a satire art. In Wayang Kulit Gagrag Banyumasan the puppeteer could tell the humorous story in dialogues, even puppeteer could deliver vulgar messages to attract people’s attention and relieve sleepiness. In contrast, the artists of Gending Banyumasan don’t do them because it will be difficult to keep along with the music and poetry rhythm and the rhymes of Gending Banyumasan are formal, adjusting the situation. But, the messages of disaster information can also be inserted in this performance although the duration of Gending Banyumasan is much shorter than the duration of Wayang Kulit Gragag Banyumasan. Wayang Kulit Gragag Banyumasan performance can be held in a night, while Gending Banyumasan will only be held in two – four hours of performance. The Sounding System of Traditional Communications New technology like early warning system with siren and other soundings have been installed by the regional

government as warning system of disaster occurrence in the areas with high risk of disaster. In fact, traditional people have had and used traditional media that are commonly used in the area where they live. The warning media are kenthongan and bedug. At the time before communication technology enters their lives, kenthongan and bedug are the effective communication media that are used by traditional society. The main function is indeed weaken when the audio-based communication technology like microphone, amplifier and speaker are used as direct communication tools for gathering people. But, the use of those tools cannot be functioned at any time like when the people do their regular patrolling or village securing at night, and will bother the people who are sleeping or resting. In this case, kenthongan as traditional sounding system is better to use. Unfortunately, recently the meaning of the sound symbols only can be understood by the ones who use the instruments. As a sounding system with a particular meaning, the exact beats and rhythm of kenthongan should be understood by the ones who beat them. The rhythm mistake in beating kenthongan will also bring misunderstanding of the delivered messages. Generally, kenthongan has some different meanings. For example, kenthong raja pati will bring signs that there is a murder in the area. The sounding symbol is represented by beating the kenthong once and pause, once and pause, and forth. If the kenthong beats sounded as twice beats followed with pause, it means that there is robbery or there is a robber who enters the area. Three times beats followed with pause means there is fire in the area. To spread the information about disaster like floods, kenthong beat will be sounded as four-time beats with pause. The titir sound of kenthong which sounded as five-time beats with pause symbolizes the animal theft. Besides, the sound of kenthong dara muluk, which sounded as one beat, pause, followed with eight beats, pause, one beat, symbolizes that the area is in the safe situation (cited from http://media.kompasiana.com/mainstreammedia/2011/04/06/kenthongan-komunikasi-tradisional-yangmerakyat-352734.html). In contrast with kenthongan, bedug is functioned to call people for praying in mosque or mushalla, kenthongan is more flexible to use. Recently, in the arts of traditional performances in Banyumas, kenthongan is not only used as information tool about the current situation but also as the instruments in carnivals. Even, kenthongan is also used as a contest in Banyumas villages as the celebration of Indonesia’s Independence Day. While kenthongan has the system when functioned as the security system in villages, the use of kenthongan in performance is functioned as musical instrument. Kenthongan and bedug in Banyumas area are still used for its meaning and functions, although there are also many society members who forget the meanings of its beat sounds, which is also developing in many kinds of folk performances media which is newly used. The sounds of kenthongan and bedug are still functioned as signs of disaster danger. The danger signs are the early efforts to warn people about the disaster. The forms of those danger signs are usually agreed by the entire society, and thus the society will understand the signs and know what to do. Basically, the danger signs

341

should fulfil some requirements as accessible, immediate, coherent, and official (cited from http://carapedia.com/tanda_tanda_bahaya_info2538.html). Another advantage of kenthongan and bedug is that it is cheaper and is available in the people’s life, easy to use and also massive. In an evacuation simulation in Pekuncen, kenthongan were beaten altogether from the houses and meeting points, which shows the occurred condition. The sound of kenthongan landslide disaster occurrence will be sounded as four beats in row and followed with pause. The sound then will be followed with other houses, which will help the entire village to understand the message and thus they will do the instructions as taught in the training. At the same time, the warning siren will be turned on and people will do the simulation. As analyzed, kenthongan and bedug as traditional communication media is still used based on its meaning and function in disaster communication system in Banyumas. These traditional media are functioned as complement of early warning system in the area. Even some informants tend to use these two tools because it is easy to use, kenthonganand bedug can be beaten by anyone. These two traditional tools will still function perfectly when the new technology is damaged, besides not all people will be able in operating the new technology. IV. CONCLUSIONS As one of the areas which has high risk of disaster, the government of Banyumas Regency has done some efforts to prevent victims, especially the unwanted life loss. The government has installed early warning system technology, disaster socializations and also the regular secure of current situation. But, the use of disaster communication technology will not put the traditional communication technology aside, which have been used by the Banyumas people. The arts of folk performances like Wayang Kulit Gragag Banyumasan and Gending Banyumasan have been the culture power of Banyumas people. These two performances can be functioned as interaction tools among people to access updated information about the current condition in their area, including the topic of disaster and how to prevent victim loss. The use of these two folk performance media as complementary socialization media will make the messages easier to be accepted because it uses Banyumasan local language. Besides, the description of situation in the

performance is based on reality, and thus audiences will be easier in absorbing the information. The sounds of traditional communication tools, which are the kenthongan and bedug, can symbolize the safety level of an area. Those two tools are still needed in the most of Banyumas areas.

REFERENCES [1] Arikunto, Suharsimi. 1993.ProsedurPenelitian SuatuPendekatanPraktek. Jakarta: PT RinekaCipta. [2] Budianto, Heri dan Tanti, Dewi Sad. 2013. Model Komunikasi Pengurangan Resiko Bencana di Indonesia. Bandung: Fakultas Ilmu Komunikasi Universitas Islam Bandung. [3] Effendy, Onong Uchyana. 2004. Ilmu Teori dan Filsafat Komunikasi.Bandung: Remaja Rosdakarya. [4] Istiyanto, S. Bekti. 2003. Penggunaan Media Rakyat dalam Mendukung Otonomi Daerah. Purwokerto: Jurnal Acta Diurna Volume 1 No 2 Agustus 2003. [5] Moleong, Lexi J. 2001. MetodologiPenulisanKualitatif. Bandung: Remajakarya. [6] Oepen, Manfred. 1988. Benarkah Kita Tahu Persis Apa yang Baik Bagi Rakyat? Penggunaan Media Massa oleh Lembaga Pemerintah dan LSM. Jakarta: Perhimpunan Pengembangan Pesantren dan Masyarakat. [7] Rachmadi, F. 1988. Manfaat Media Komunikasi dalam Pembangunan Masyarakat. Jakarta: Perhimpunan Pengembangan Pesantren dan Masyarakat. [8] Rogers, Everett M, 1992, Komunikasi dan Pembangunan Perspektif Kritis, Jakarta: LP3ES. [9] http://carapedia.com/tanda_tanda_bahaya_info2538.ht ml [10] http://media.kompasiana.com/mainstreammedia/2011/04/06/kenthongan-komunikasi-tradisionalyang-merakyat-352734.html). [11] https://id.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wayang_kulit_G

342

ANALYSIS OF SOCIETY’S PARTICIPATION EFFECT AND TRANSPORTATION’S INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT TO SUSTAINABLE TRANSPORTATION Andi Estetiono UNAIR, Surabaya, Indonesia E-mail : [email protected]

Abstract. Sustainable transportation is an aspect of global sustainability that contains three related components, that is: environment, society and economy. Major cities are bound to transportation system if they wish to grow and fully developed in the future, and we choose to analyze Medan. The purpose of research is to explain the effect of society’s participation and the transportation’s infrastructure development to the sustainable transportation in Medan. The research is conduct by using explanatory approach using primary data with purposive sampling method based on criterias of 300 respondents, and the data analysis is using path analysis and regresion. The result showing that participation of society and transportation’s infrastructure development is positively and significantly affecting the sustainable transportation in Medan. Variables of participations of society are in form of participation in decision making, execution and evaluation of transportation in Medan. The transportation’s infrastructure development related with physical infrastructure development, supportive infrastructure, and software infrastructure in Medan. In order to support the sustainable transportation in Medan there are need of active participation of society and a good transportation’s infrastructure development. Keywords: participation, transportation’s infrastructure, & sustainable trasnportation. I.

INTRODUCTION

the area development. Some of the occurred problems is the flood control, transportation and traffic jam, waste and cleanliness, street vendors arrangement, small amount of open space, slums and other problems. These problems should be managed with planned and coordinated activities which are not yet materialized.

Cities are the future living space of people, therefore it need to be prepared to become a convenient place to live, safer and provide more opportunity to interact one another, and environmental friendly. Roland Busch, CEO of Infrastructure and Cities Sector Siemens, in World Cities Summit in early June of 2014 in Singapore mentioned “that in 2009 alone, half the world population already lived in the cities, estimation in 2030 the population living in urban areas will reach two-thirds or approximately 3,5 until 4,7 billions people”. It means that the burden of the cities will be huge and inevitable. The increasing activities and mobility of people will require an effective and efficient public transportation’s development, suitable and integrated infrastructure and more optimum contribution and participation from the society. One of the factors that required the attention is the increasing number of people living in the cities. This number increasing is caused by more people moved from the villages to the cities. In 2025 the people living in the cities are estimated approximately 60%. One of the centres of economical growth in Indonesia is Medan of North Sumatra. This fast growth as the third biggest city in Indonesia is shown in high population increasing, activities and mobility increasing but with the same total area is creating various problems especially in

II. a.

METHODS

Population and Sample According to Sugiyono (2008): “Population is generalized area consist of object/ subject that possessed certain qualities and characteristics applied by researcher to be studied, and later on concluded. The population in this research is whole citizen of Medan. In 2015 the citizen of Medan is 2,468,429 consist of 1,241,826 male and 1,266,603 female. A sample is part of number and characteristic possessed by the population. The research object of this research is public transportation stakeholders (society, user, owner and other concerned parties) that related with the research. The sampling model in this research is using non probability sampling technique (purposive sampling), which is one of sampling technique that purposively taken based on certain criteria of researcher. The researcher defined the taken samples with certain consideration and criteria related to the research.

343

Samples are subset of population unit (Kuncoro,2003). The size of respondents samples defined according to Roscoe argument (Sugiono, 2003) that mentioned that no matter the amount of population in social research, the suitable samples b. Definition of Operational Variable Research Model Calculation No

Variable Particiation Society

1

of

Definition Participation of Society is the involvement of society, in thoughts, mentally and emotionally in the process of decision making, application, result usage and development evaluation of Medan.

Transportation Infrastructure Development

2

3

Tabel.

1

Variable,

Indicator Decision making Joining the meetings Application Taking part in giving opinion Involvement in material/ investments Taking part in execution Evaluation Involvement in giving feedback for further improvement

Dimention

Scale - Ordinal - Ordinal

- Ordinal

- Ordinal

“Development of physical systems that support transportation to fulfill the basic need of society in social and economical terms, in order of development the city of Medan.

Sustainable Transportation

are among 30 to 500 people. Based on that argument the samples decided is 300 respondents related to the research.

Sustainable transportation is “transportation that able to fulfill the need of society of transportation that consists of social function including accessibility, economical function including equality and environmental function including less pollution”.

Hard Infrastructure Including road, rails, airport, pier, harbor and water system. Non Physical Hard Infrastructure Related with public utilities functions as clean water availability including the water treatment installation and distribution piping system, electricity supply, telecommunication (telephone and internet) and energy supplies including petroleum, biodiesel and gas; along with the piping system. - Soft Infrastructure Institutional frame or establishment that covering values (including working ethics), regulation(especially developed and codified into law regulation and legislation), and quality of public service that provided by various related parties, especially government. Social Accessibility, convenience level of using public transportation Convenience level of public transportation Equality (sense of equality to use and manage public transportation Economy Affordability of public

344

- Ordinal

- Ordinal

- Ordinal

- Ordinal

and

transportation cost Effectivity of vehicle ownership limitation Environment Air and noise quality level Effectivity of policy regarding environmental friendly fuel

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION

- Ordinal

Two is the improvement of pedestrian facilities. To stimulate society to use public transportation there should be good pedestrian facilities, because the public transportation must involving walking activities. Third is the application of Transport Demand Management. The purpose is to increase the efficiency and effectively of current transportation system of the city. This is of course should consider the conditions existing in Medan The social sustainability is regarding the satisfaction of society in acquiring public transportation to support their daily activities, the availability of public transportation to every destination. The current total of public transportation in Medan is 6,695 units with legal permit of 240. This number is suitable to serve the need of society, but the spreading still uneven. And the other issues is the time accuracy of the travelling time, comfortability and safety while using public transportation. There are many alternatives that can be applied to deal with traffic issues in Medan. First is improvement and prioritizing the public transportation. This is to attract the society to use public transportation instead. The public transportation should be safe, comfortable, on time and covering many areas. They should be safe and not easily stop that can cause traffic jam and endangered other road users. A public transportation not only accounted for service operational, frequencies, speed and the comfort only, but also from the supporting system as well. Such as location determination and stopping point designs and special treatment as special track, traffic light and other things. That way the society will gladly leaving their personal vehicles and using public transportation instead. Two is the improvement of pedestrian facilities. To stimulate society to use public transportation there should be good pedestrian facilities, because the public transportation must involving walking activities. Third is the application of Transport Demand Management. The purpose is to increase the efficiency and effectively of current transportation system of the city. This is of course should consider the conditions existing in Medan.

a.

Discussio The participation of society in giving the opinions both in formal and informal channels regarding public transportation operational, involvement in investment of public transportation, taking part as operator, active involvement in providing public transportation mode and involvement of society to decide the path of that transportation. Based on the analysis there is a significant relation between society’s role in the management of public transportation of the city with the sustainable transportation. This sustainability is important in guarantee the social, economy and environment sustainability. The social sustainability is regarding the satisfaction of society in acquiring public transportation to support their daily activities, the availability of public transportation to every destination. The current total of public transportation in Medan is 6,695 units with legal permit of 240. This number is suitable to serve the need of society, but the spreading still uneven. And the other issues is the time accuracy of the travelling time, comfortability and safety while using public transportation. There are many alternatives that can be applied to deal with traffic issues in Medan. First is improvement and prioritizing the public transportation. This is to attract the society to use public transportation instead. The public transportation should be safe, comfortable, on time and covering many areas. They should be safe and not easily stop that can cause traffic jam and endangered other road users. A public transportation not only accounted for service operational, frequencies, speed and the comfort only, but also from the supporting system as well. Such as location determination and stopping point designs and special treatment as special track, traffic light and other things. That way the society will gladly leaving their personal vehicles and using public transportation instead.

345

IV. CONCLUSION

that enable the society to provide any critics and suggestions, and also forum of transportation society, particularly the city transportation.

a.

Conclusion Based on data analysis and discussion of research result, the conclusion is that participation of the society and transportation’s infrastructure development is positively and significantly affecting the sustainable transportation in medan. First participation through the involvement of society in decision making of every planning for the public transportation. This participation is active involvement of society regarding public transportation policy, the involvement in deciding the number of public transportation in every route and the involvement in deciding routes for every available transportation Second participation is through the involvement of society in giving the opinions. The third participation is the involvement in evaluation of public transportation of the city. This involvement is in term of opportunities to provide feedback regarding the management of public transportation, a forum of regular meeting to evaluate the public transportation performance between all concerned parties, there are also system

b.

346

Sugistion The suggestions regarding this research are as follows : 1. For companies, to improve the area development in Medan by giving more attention to the participation of society, transportation’s infrastructure development and sustainable transportation. 2. For the next researcher, to conduct further research regarding the variables of society’s participation, and development of transportation’s infrastructure to the sustainable transportation, and other variables to gain more varieties of result that can describe the affecting points of sustainable transportation in Medan. 3. The government of Medan should establish a forum of transportation society, especially for the public transportation as a communication tool between government and society.

[21] [22] Dicken, P. 1990. Location in Space: Theoretical Perspective in Economic Geography (3rd Edition). Harper Collins Publishers. New York. [23] [24] Dikun,S. 2002. Urban Transport Reforms. Paper Presented at the Seminar on City of Makassar Urban Transport in August 5,2002. PAJ Indonesia. Makassar: pp.1-10. [25] [26] Edwards,J.D.(Editor). 1992. Transportation Planning Handbook. Prentice Hall.New Jersey. [27] [28] Erlina, 2011. Metode Penelitian, Medan : USU Press. [29] [30] Evers, Hans-Dieter. 1995. Sosiologi Perkotaan, Urbanisasi dan Sengketa Tanah di Indonesia dan Malaysia. Penerbit LP3ES. Jakarta. [31] Ghozali. Imam. dan Fuad 2005. Structural Equation Modeling: Teori, Konsep, dan Aplikasi engan Program LISREL. Badan Penerbit Undip, Semarang. [32] [33] Hadjisaroso. 1994. Konsep Dasar Pembangunan Wilayah di Indonesia, dalam Prima No. 8 Agustus Tahun XXIII, LP3ES. Jakarta. [34] [35] Hairulsyah (2012) ; Pengaruh Partisipasi Masyarakat dalam Transportasi Berkelanjutan dan Pengembangan Wilayah di Kota Medan. Penelitian Disertasi Program Doktor PWD, USU. [36] [37] Hair, J.F., R.E. Anderson, R.L. Thatam, dan W.C. Black. 2006. Multivariate Data Analysis With Reading, 4th edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. [38] [39] Hensher,D.A. and Button,K.J. 2003. Handbook of Transport and Environment. Elsevier. New York. [40] [41] Hong,K.L. 2005. Road Pricing Modeling for HyperCongestion. Transportation Research Part B: Methodological Elsevier, New York. 39 (9 November 2005): 769-795. [42] [43] Jayadinata, Johara T. 1997. Tataguna Tanah Dalam Perencanaan Pedesaan Perkotaan dan Wilayah. ITB. Bandung.

REFERENCES [1] Adisasmita, Rahardjo, 2005. Dasar – Dasar Ekonomi Wilayah, Yogyakarta : Graha Ilmu. [2] [3] Adjid, D. A. 1985. Pola Partisipasi Masyarakat Desa dalam Pembangunan Pertanian Berencana. Bandung: Orbit Sakti. [4] [5] Andreas Suhono (2008); Model Kebijakan Pembangunan Infrastruktur Terpadu dalam Pengembangan Wilayah Perkotaan berkelanjutan. Penelitian Disertai Pada Program Doktor IPB. [6] Arikunto, Suharsimi (2006). Prosedur Penelitian Suatu Pendekatan Praktik, Jakarta : PT Rineka Cipta. [7] Arstein, Sherry (1969). A Ladder of Citizen Participation, Journal of the [8] American Planning Association. [9] [10] A.R Barter, Tamin Raad. 2000. Taking Steps : A Community Action Guide to People-Centered and Sustainable Urban Transport. [11] Bambang S. 2007. Transportasi Yang Humanis Dalam http://www.pu.go.id/bapekin/bulletin%20jurnal/bulleti n%2010/bulletin10 6 html. Diakses 07 Desember 2007 [12] Banister, D.1995.Transport and Urban Development. E & FN Spon. London. [13] Bentler, P.M. 1992. Structural Equations Program Manuals. Los Angeles, BMDP, Statistical Software. [14] Bintarto. 1983. Interkasi Desa-Kota dan Permasalahannya. Penerbit Ghalia Indonesia Jakarta. [15] Budiharsono. 2005. Tehnik Analisis Pembangunan Wilayah Pesisir dan lanjutan. Cetakan 2. Penerbit Pradnya Paramita Jakarta. [16] Center for Sustainable Development. 1997. Defenition and Vision of Sustainable Transportation, Toronto. Canada [17] Cernea, M. 1988. Mengutamakan Manusia di dalam Pembangunan. Universitas Indonesia. Jakarta. [18] [19] [20] Cohen dan Uphoff. 1977. Rural Development: Concept and Measures for Project Design, Implementation, and Evaluation. New York: Cornel University

347

EXSPERIMENTAL PHYSIC-CHEMICAL MODIFICATION ON SORGHUM FLOUR AS SUBSTITUTE WHEAT FLOUR Azafilmi Hakiim 1), Faresti Sistihapsari2), DessyAgustina Sari3) 1,3)

UNSIKA ,Karawang, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

UNDIP, Semarang, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Physic-chemical modification on sorghum flour through the process of hmt and acetylated reaction. The research’s aim is to learn the influence of reaction time and temperature with addtional of material to swelling power and % solubility of sorghum in order to get modified with characteristics similiar to wheat. The result of this study shows that the swelling power and % solubility, when the reaction time and temperature initial increased. The swelling power and solubility characteristics of near-modified sorghum flour obtained at a temperature 100 0C , over 14 hours in the HMT and the temperature 80 0C, concentration of 15%V acetic acid in acetylated process. Keywords: sorgum, heat moisture treatment, acetylated, %solubility, swelling power.

I. INTRODUCTION

Wheat is one of the foodstuffs imported by Indonesia, because it does not allow it to be cultivated in tropical countries. The increasing demand and import of wheat in Indonesia, resulting an effort to produce flour local resource whice has funtional properties and nutrition value equal with wheat. The impact to date food diversification program by empowering local potential has not shown satisfactory results. Alternative solutions wheat imports through substitution with sorghum as a local potential produce cheap but quality is not much different from the existing. But until now the use of sorghum as a food ingredient in Indonesia is still very limited due to the composition of sorghum flour for wheat flour substitute so far only reached the level of 20% of the sorghum flour. Substitution of sorghum were more than 20% will change the value of the taste, texture, color and aroma that lowering interest of consumers to consume processed sorghum flour [1]. This is because sorghum lacks physicochemical properties owned grain. It required modification in order to maximize the potential of sorghum as an alternative food to be reckoned. Modifications here is intended as a change from the molecular structure that can be done by chemical, physic or enzymatic. Modifications in sorghum by swelling power,

solubility in sorghum. Modifications made with sorghum flour physic modification and chemical modification. Physic modifications through Heat Moisture Treatment (HMT) with the addition of some materials that have high protein content and heating. Chemical modification is done through the acetylated reaction. This study aimed to characterize the properties of sorghum include swelling power and %solubility, modification of sorghum flour with Heat Moisture Treatment (HMT) and Acetylated characterization of modifications, knowing the condition of the modification (addition of ingredients, time of operation, the operating temperature, the addition of %concentration acetic acid) which generating a character similar to wheat flour. II. MATERIAL AND METHOD A. Material

Materials used in the modification Heat Moisture Treatment (HMT) is sorghum, green beans, soybeans, and distilled water. B. Method

HMT process is adding flour 30 grams (sorghum, sorghum + soybean, sorghum + green beans) to the 25% moisture content is then stored at a temperature of 4-50C overnight. Afterwards, flour oven at a temperature corresponding variable (1000C; 1100C; 1200C) and the corresponding

348

variable drying time (14 hours; 15 hours; 16 hours), and then let it cool. Acetylated modification of the materials used are sorghum, acetic acid, distillate water. Acetylated is done by soaking the sorghum flour 30 grams of water with a ratio of 1: 3, then added acetic acid at a concentration corresponding variable (10%V; 15%V; 20%V; 25%V) and temperature corresponding variables (600C; 700C; 800C) for 30 minutes. The reaction product was filtered, then the precipitate is washed until pH neutral (7). The precipitate obtained the oven at a temperature of 450C to constant levels.

power. Swelling power rate differences on various materials due to differences in the composition contain the material. Fat and protein in soybeans is greater than sorghum. Water absorption is affected by carbohydrate, protein and other components that are hydrophilic. Fat content and high protein can reduce swelling power because of its hydrophobic inhibiting the binding of water by the granule thus reducing the power of swelled [4].

C. Analytical Method

Then the products were analyzed swelling power, solubility%. Swelling power analysis using the method of Leach [2],% solubility using Kainuma [3]. III. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION A. Research Physical Modification

HMT modification, expected swelling power of sorghum (11) may increased toward wheat flour (12.84). The time and temperature heating operation on HMT modification causes a change in starch granules that affect the value of swelling power. Analysis of the level of swelling power of a material, made by the method of Leach. The results of this research are as follows:

Fig. 2 The effect of time and %Swelling power at all varian temperature in sorghum+soybeans starch

Figure 1. shows that % sweling power on starch content decreased a long with time at different variable temperatur. At longer reaction time in temperatur 1200C. Fig. 3 The effect of time and %Swelling power at variable temperature in sorghum+green beans

Figure 4. it can be seen that the solubility in sorghum operating time of 14 hours to 15 hours to increase, but after passing operating time of 15 hours solubility begins to decline.

Fig. 1 The effect of time and %Swelling power at variable temperature in sorghum

In Figure 2 and Figure 3 swelling power increases with along increasing temperature. Figure 1, 2, 3 show that sorghum has the highest swelling power and swelling sorghum + soybean has the lowest

Fig. 4 The effect of time and %solubility at variable composition starch addition.

349

In sorghum + soybean and sorghum + green beans has decreased to 15 hours of operating time, after passing within 15 hours the solubility begins to increase until it reaches its maximum point. The relationship between the swelling power of the percent solubility in a wide range of starch almost drawn a straight line that shows how close the relationship between these properties [5]. Temperature is one factor that determines the value of solubility, where the higher the temperature, the solubility will increase [6]. B. Research Chemical Modification

In our study, the process of chemical modification used are acetylated starch polymer was ester with an acetyl group. With acetylated modification, the expected level of swelling power and solubility of sorghum flour swelling power and solubility approaching wheat flour. The concentration of acetic acid which affects the amount of acetyl group substitution of the hydroxyl group. Modification of the sorghum flour by adding acetic acid in various concentrations (10% V, 15% V, 20% V, 25% V) at a temperature of 700C. Figure 5 and Figure 6, the more the concentration of acetic acid is added to the process of acetylated, swelling power and solubility values higher. At a concentration of 15%V addition of acetic acid, achieved value maximum swelling power and solubility. Value swelling power in acetylated modification addition of 15%V acetic acid is 12.31, the value of swelling power in this modification approaches the swelling power of wheat (12.84). The addition of acetic acid concentration of more than 15 %V will decrease the swelling power and solubility values.

Fig. 6. The effect of concentration acetic acid and swelling power on sorghum

Figure7 and Figure 8, along with the increased in temperature, swelling power and solubility increased due to increased acetylated reaction speed. With the increase in the acetylated reaction speed, the more the acetyl group is substituted carboxyl group.

Fig. 7. The effect of temperature and %swelling power at sorghum starch

Fig. 8. The effect of temperature and %solubility at sorghum starch

Fig. 5. The effect of concentration acetic acid and solubility on sorghum starch

This condition makes the acetylated starch has a weaker hydrogen bonds, thereby increasing the value of swelling power and solubility.

350

IV. CONCLUSIONS

The overall results suggested that he results were obtained the longer reaction times and higher temperatures lead to increased swelling power and % solubility enhancement. In HMT process operating conditions that produce grain sorghum with the characterization approaches are best at a temperature of 1000C and 14 hours, while in the process of acetylated obtained the best conditions on the addition of 15% V. ACKNOWLEDGMENT

We would like to thank Prof.Dr.rer.nat.Heru Susanto MT, for financial support to conduct this research. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Suarni, “Studi Komposisi Kimia Tepung Sorgum sebagai Bahan Substitusi Terigu”. Tesis Pascasarjana Universitas Hasanudin Makasar. 88 hlm, 2001. H.W. Leach, L.D. Mc Cowen, T.J. Schoch, “Structure of the starch granules. In: swelling and solubility patterns of various starches”. Cereal Chem. 36: 534 – 544, 1965. K. Kainuma, T. Odat, S. Cuzuki.“Study of starch phosphates monoesters” J. Technol, Soc. Starch 14: 24 – 28, 1967. L.H. Kruger, M.W. Rutenberg, “Production and Uses of Starch Acetates”, in Starch: Chemistry and Technology, Vol II, Academic Press, New York, 369-401,1967. C. Raina, S. Singh, A. Bawa, and D.Saxea, “Some Characteristics of Acetylated, Cross-Linked and Dual Modified Indian Rice-Linked, European Food Research and Technology, 223 hal, 561-570., 2006. W. L. Kerr, C. Sung-Gil, “Swelling Characteristics of Native and Chemically Modified `Wheat Starches as a Function of Heating Temperature and Time”, Department of Food Science and Technology University of Georgia Athens, GA, USA, 2004.

351

DEVELOPING COOPERATIVE OF SUBAK TO IMPROVE AGRIBUSINESS: Case of Subak of Guama, Bali Province Dr. Ir. Gede Sedana, M.Sc. MMA Faculty of Agriculture, Dwijendra University-Bali Email: [email protected]

Abstract. Farmers group in Bali called subak as a traditional irrigation system and has been acknowledge as a world cultural heritage rewarded by UNESCO. In order to maintain subak an support rural development, government has introduced agribusiness program into subak system by establishing subak cooperative. This study aims at portraying the establishment and development of subak cooperative and describing the strength, weaknesses of subak cooperative relating to agribusiness works. The study was conducted in a Subak of Guama selected purposively as it is the only one of subaks in Bali which has been developed by government. Data collected was fully analyzed by using descriptive method. The results of study pointed out that cooperative of Guama subak has established since 2003 under the law of cooperative. The main agribusiness works run by cooperative consists of integrated crops management, crop livestock system and micro credit. Aside from these, the activities conducted are producing of rice seeds and organic fertilizer and providing of agro-inputs service. The strengths of subak cooperative are (i) good interrelation among the farmers; (ii) the bond between farmers and their management board, (iii) awig awig (internal law) of subak; and (iv) religious value in the subak. While the weakness are limited size of paddy field, (ii) low formal education of farmers, (iii) the limited good agricultural practices/technologies, and (iv) lack of post-harvest technology. Keywords: Subak, agribusiness, cooperative and social capital.

In case of Bali, the agricultural development has been carried out with less emphasis on the local institution endowment which has been existed. (Elizabeth and Iwan, 2009). Institution of farmers tends to be positioned as a mere tool to implement the project, not as an attempt to the empowerment and without any strengthening of their social capital (Syahyuti, 2007). Hartono (2009) also argues that the powerlessness of the functioning of local institutions such as farmer groups and Water Users Association (WUA), including subak will result in the failure of agribusiness development in rural areas. Sahyuti (2007) adds that the introduction of outside institutions that have less attention to existing structure and networks of local institutions with a top-down approach led to low participation of community. In this context, the study of economic development at the local institution (subak) which has cultural basis such as social capital needs to be done. The strategy of community empowerment and local institutional

I INTRODUCTION One of the agricultural development objectives is to develop economic activities on rural economic development through agribusiness and develop agribusiness companies which have high competitiveness, sustainability and decentralization (Fatah, 2006). Agriculture and rural developments held in Indonesia seem to get less serious attention. The main mistake in agricultural development still reflects a marginalization concept for the local institutions. This unsuccessful achievement of agriculture and rural development is caused by lacking of involvement of the existing organizations in the community or a rural farm itself (Fatah, 2006; Syahyuti, 2007; Chambers, 1983). All forms of traditional aspects (social, cultural customs) in the villages and communities must be empowered to achieve the goal of agricultural and rural development (Elizabeth, 2007).

352

1). Community empowerment is a concept of economic development covering social values (Chambers, 1983; Chambers, 1995; Korten, 1987).

are seen as urgent in rural development programs to strengthen the networks of rural economy (Elizabeth, 2007). Subak that has successfully conducted agribusiness activity is Subak Guama located in the District of Marga, Tabanan regency since 2002 through the Direct Financial Assistance for Community (BLM). This subak was purposively selected as a research study. Objectives of the study are to portray the existence of subak cooperative and describe the strength, weaknesses, opportunities and threats of subak cooperative relating to agribusiness works. Data collected by employing interview, focus discussion group, and direct observation. Data is fully analyzed by using descriptive method.

Figure 1 Empowerment process in subak cooperative establishment

II DEVELOPING SUBAK COOPERATIVE WITHIN SUBAK OF GUAMA Subak of Guama is located in the subdistrict of Marga spread across three villages, namely Selanbawak, Peken Batannyuh and Belayu. Water source of subak is from Cangi weir built by the government on the river Yeh Sungi. Some other subaks which also obtain water from the weir of Cangi are: (i) Pacung Babakan; (ii); Cangi Selatan; (iii) Apit Jurang; (iv) Uma Dalem; (v) Bulan, (vi) Selanbawakand (vii ) Lepud. The entire subaks getting water from weir of Cangi have merged into a coordination body, called Subak-gede Asta Buana Cangi. The area of Guama subak is 179 ha where its rice fields have relatively flat topography. Availability of water in the subak for planting along the year is sufficient with the cropping pattern of rice-rice-secondary crops. Physical infrastructure such as roads either for four-wheel and two wheels in the subak and the surrounding area is relatively good, so be a contributing factor in the development of agribusiness. In addition, network communication, electricity and drinking water to rural communities including farmers as subak’ members are very good.

Source: Sedana (2013) Mentoring by BPTP especially in Subak of Guama significantly contribute to encourage and motivate farmers and subak to establish subak cooperatives (called KUAT, Koperasi Usaha Agribisnis Terpadu or Cooperative of Integrated Agribusiness Activities). The staffs of BPTP with the management bords of subak and cooperative further enhance its role in the development of agribusiness. Agribusiness development made subak to have adjustment on its organizational structure. As known, socio-cultural aspects of agriculture become very dominant in the subak system, in other hand the farmers’ demand of needs increasingly complex, especially with regard to economic aspects. At Guama subak, its institutional adjustment has been experiencing along with the development of agribusiness being operated since 2003. In the development of agribusiness at the subak level, Subak of Guama has expanded the institutional structure in accordance with the needs of the agribusiness activities. In addition, institutional adjustment is also made to comply with legislation on cooperatives. Agribusiness activities in Subak of Guama run through a cooperative unit that was formed under the auspices of the subak. Schematically, the Subak Guama institutional adjustment can be seen in the Figure 2. In this institutional adjustment, position of kelihan subak or pekaseh still has a central role to oversee the cooperative established. This condition indicates

2.1 Establishment of subak cooperative BPTP (The Agency of Research for Agricultural Technology) Bali made as a pilot project in Subak of Guama for an integrated agribusiness development through subak, which was initiated the formation of the integrated agribusiness activities. In an effort to ensure the sustainability of agribusiness development on the subak basis, empowerment activities had carried out since the beginning process by employing intensive and participatory approaches (see Figure

353

revenue subak members. Through capital gained from the government (BPTP), some of the main activities that have been carried out were as follows: (i) integrated crops management; (ii) crops-livestock system; and (iii) micro credit. On the integrated crops management operations, it was realized in the form of distribution of agro-inputs such as distributing of seeds, fertilizers, and pesticides with the certain payment system that is after harvesting (4 months) and the interest rate of 1% / month. On cropslivestock system, it had been realized in the form of cattle loans to members of the subak as much as Rp. 3,000,000.00 /unit with a 1% interest, in which it should be returned within 2 years. Micro credit was carried out by providing capital assistance for the strengthening of women farmers on the activities such as: (i) coconut oil business, (ii) breeding pigs; (iii) local snack business, (iv) a loom; (v) carving business, and (vi) trading businesses. Development of agribusiness activities in Subak’s cooperative of Guama had significantly increased, especially on the financial aspect. The amount of capital owned by KUAT Guama increased on the three activities as shown in Table 1.

that the formation of cooperatives still remain under the umbrella of subak.

Figure 2 Institutional adjustment of subak orienting agribusiness

Source: Sedana (2013)

Table 1 Development of capital of KUAT, Subak of Guama sourced from BLM

2.2 Development of subak cooperative An institutional adjustment made in subak is an effort to develop agribusiness activities and still be under the auspices of the subak institutions. There are several advantages gained by establishing new institutions within the subak, which are as follows. 1. Members can easily get the agro-inputs for both groups and individuals. 2. Members easily obtain credit. 3. Subak easily adjusts members’ obligations due to awig awig subak included in economic management. 4. Profits of economic activities within subak can be part of individual profit as well. 5. Make it easier to get access to external capital. 6. Facilitate access to information

Sources: KUAT, Subak of Guama, 2012 This condition indicates that the formation of cooperatives within subak system could increase economic value and provide benefits to the farmers. In other words, the economic value of capital in KUAT Guama is in the forms of integrated crops management, crop-livestock system and micro credit increased by an average of 47.34% per year. The highest percentage of increase was in the business activities of the integrated crops management which reached an average of 251.38% per year. Economic benefits perceived by the farmer as members of subak and cooperative are reflected in the condition of SHU. In this study, it was found that SHU of KUAT from 2004 to 2012 had significant changed. Aside from

At Subak of Guama, agibusiness development organized through the established cooperative, called Cooperative of Integrated Agribusiness (KUAT) Subak of Guama which hal aready legal status: Number 22/BH/Diskop/VIII/2003 dated August 14, 2003. KUAT has a function to hold the management of the business units for the members of Guama subak relating to farm management and increased

354

an adjustment of subak institution by establishing an economic unit, namely cooperative. The strengths of subak in agribusiness development relating to social capital are: (i) ties among members of subak; (ii) ties among members and management board; (iii) internal regulations (awigawig) of subak; (iv) religious values within subak. These are likely component of social capital (mutual trust, social norms and social networking). Meanwhile, the weaknesses are: (i) small size of rice field; (ii) low level of formal education; (iii) lack of agricultural technologies;and (iv) lack of post-harvest technologies. Regarding the conclusion mentioned and in the effort to achieve sustainability of agribusiness development within subak system, it might be suggested as follows. Strengthening social capital of subak should be done by using participatory approach. For this, it could be equipped with improving skills of administration, management, leadership and finance for the management boards of subak and cooperative. Aside from this, it should be done an extension and training for increasing entrepreneurship of them. Empowerment process should be intensively facilitated to have good achievement aside from giving charity. Farmers’ participation is needed as a social capital within subak.

the main activities, KUAT of Guama also had other business development such as rice seed business, processing compost and UPJA (the service for agricultural machine). Sustainability of cooperative

might be ensured as long as it could give good service to members and encourage their participation (Aref, 2011; Ortmann and King, 2007). Development of agribusiness within subak is shown in Figure 3 (Sedana, 2013). Figure 3 Agribusiness development within cooperative in Subak of Guama Source: Sedana (2013) Strengths found in subak system relating to agribusiness development are as follows: (i) the interrelation among the farmer as members of subak, (ii) the bond between farmers and their management board, (iii) awig awig (internal regulation) subak; and (iv) religious value in the subak. These are strongly related to social capital components, such as mutual trust, social norms and social networking (Putnam, 1992; Fukuyama, 1995; Mudarta, 2009; Flassy, et al., 2009; Subejo, 2004; Hasbullah, 2006). These three elements might have influences on the achievement of common goals (agribusiness activities) through the coordination and collective actions (Woolcock, 1998; Montgomery, 1998; Cox, 1995; Haris dan Renzio, 1997). Weakness in this study might bring about barriers to the development of agribusiness in the subak level. These include: (i) limited size of paddy field, (ii) low formal education of farmers, (iii) the limited good agricultural practices/technologies, and (iv) lack of post-harvest technology.

REFERENCES [1]

[2] [3]

[4] [5]

[6]

III CONCLUSIONS Intensive empowerment and participatory approach ensure the sustainability on agribusiness activities within subak. This empowerment needs

[7]

355

Aref, F. 2011. Agricultural Cooperatives for Agricultural Development in Iran. Life Science Journal, 1 (8) : 82 – 85. Chambers, R. 1983. Rural Development, Putting the Last First. New York: John Wiley Chambers, R. 1995. Poverty and Livelihoods: Whose Reality Counts? Uner Kirdar and Leonard S. (eds.), People: From Impoverishment to Empowerment. New York: New York University Press, 1995. Cox, E. 1995. A Truly Civil Society .Sidney: ABC Books. Elizabeth, R. 2007. Partisipasi sebagai Strategi Pemberdayaan Petani Miskin melalui Program Integrasi Jagung dan Ternak. http://ejournal .unud.ac.id Elizabeth, R.dan Iwan S.A. 2009. Sistem Kelembagaan Komunitas Petani Sayuran di Desa Baturiti, Kabupaten Tabanan Provinsi Bali. http://pse.litbang. deptan.go.id Fatah, L. 2006. Dinamika Pembangunan Pertanian dan Pedesaan. Banjarbaru: Pustaka Banua.

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12] [13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

[19]

[20]

Flassy, DJ.,Sasli R., Agus S. 2009. Modal Sosial: Unsur-Unsur Pembentuk. http://p2dtk.bappenas.go.id. Fukuyama, F. 1995. Trust: The Social Virtues and the Creation of Prosperity. New York: Free Press. Harriss, J. and De Renzio, P., l997, Policy Arena: Missing Link or Analytically Missing?: The Concept of Social Capital. Journal of International Development, Vol. 9, 1997. Hasbullah, J., 2006. Sosial Kapital: Menuju Keunggulan Budaya Manusia Indonesia. Jakarta: MR-United Press. Korten, D.C.1987. Community Management, Connectitut :Kumarian Press, Westaharford. Montgomery, J.D. 1998 Social Capital— Research Notes. Pacific Basin 04 - Social Capital - References. in Social Capital, Local Capacity Building, And Poverty Reduction. Cambridge: John F. Kennedy Center, Harvard University. Mudarta, K.G. 2009. Jaringan Sosial (Networks) dalam Pengembangan Sistem dan Usaha Agribisnis: Perspektif Teori dan Dinamika Studi Kapital Sosial. Forum Penelitian Agro Ekonomi, Volume 27, No.1, Juli 2009. Ortmann, G.F. and King, R.P. 2007. Agricultural Cooperatives II: Can They Facilitate Access of Small-Scale Farmers in South Africa to Input and Product Markets? Agrekon, Vol 46, No 2 (June 2007). Putnam, R.D. 1992. The Prosperous Community: Social Capital and Public Life .American Prospect, 13. In Elinor O. and T.K. Ahn. editors. Foundation of Social Capital. Massachusetts: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited. Rachman, B. 2009. Kebijakan Sistem Kelembagaan Pengelolaan Irigasi: Kasus Provinsi Banten. Analisis Kebijakan Pertanian Vol. 07 No. 1.Tahun 2009. Sedana, G. 2013. Social Capital into Agribusiness Development within Subak System in Bali. Dissertation, Udayana University, Indonesia. Sedana, G. I G.A.A.Ambarawati, and W. Windia. Strengthening 2014. Social Capital for Agricultural Development: Lessons from Guama, Bali, Indonesia. Asian Journal of Agriculture and Development. Vol.11 No.2. pp.39-50 Shah, P. and Shah., 1994. Multifunction Irrigation Organisations: Advantage or Handicap Irrigation Management Network, Network Paper No.28, April 1994.Londdon: Overseas Development Institute.

[21]

[22]

[23]

356

Subejo. 2004. Peranan Social Capital Dalam Pembangunan Ekonomi: Suatu Pengantar Studi Social Capital di Pedesaan Indonesia. Majalah Agro Ekonomi 11 (1): 32 – 41. Syahyuti. 2007. Kebijakan Pengembangan Gabungan Kelompok Tani (Gapoktan) Sebagai Kelembagaan Ekonomi Di Perdesaan. Bogor: Pusat Analisis Sosial Ekonomi dan Kebijakan Pertanian. Analisis Kebijakan Pertanian. 5 (1): 15 – 25. Woolcock, M. 1998. Social Capital and Economic Development; Toward a Theoretical Syntesis and Policy Framework. Theory and Society, In Elinor O and T.K. Ahn.. Foundation of Social capital. Massachusetts: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited.

DESCRPTION OF CARIOGRAM BASED ON DIET CONTENTS, DIET FREQUENCY AND PLAQUE AMOUNT ON FOURTH AND FIFTH GRADE SDN 04 KAMPUNG OLO PADANG STUDENTS

Dewi Elianora1), Intan B.E. Mahata2), Ega Raudhatul Hukma3) Pedodontic Department Faculty of Dentistry Baiturrahmah University, Padang Pedodontic Department Faculty of Dentistry Baiturrahmah University, Padang Faculty of Dentistry Baiturrahmah University, Padang     Abstract.  Kids are easily get dental caries. There are many causing factors of caries, so that cariogram program is used to find out the main cause of individual caries. The objective of this research is to determine the diet contents, diet frequency and plaque amount on fourth and fifth grade SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang students. This descriptive research was involving 30 samples taken with total sampling technique. The result showed that percentage for cariogenic diet content with high category was 53.3%, diet frequency was 66.6% which consumed food maximally 2-3 times in a day. The plaque score was in the poor category (76.6%). Result of cariogram showed that 25 kids (83.3%) were at middle risk category to get caries in the future.  Keywords: Caries, Cariogram, diet content, diet frequency, plaque   permanent teeth period. If the teeth are broken, there will no teeth to replace it. Children aged 10-11 years have been thinking logically and can easily be directed, so the children can be invited to cooperate in this research. The results of previous survey conducted by at SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang showed that the most of the students consume snacks at breaks and after school. The students consume snack between meals which made from sugar or artificial sweeteners either food or drink, such as ice cream, iced syrup, iced tea, sweets, biscuits that can cause high caries risk. It is also noted that there has not been conducted a research on dental health issues at the school. Based on explanation above, researchers are interested in taking the title of the research "Descrption Of Cariogram Based On Diet Contents, Diet Frequency And Plaque Amount On Fourth And Fifth Grade SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang Students”.

I. INTRODUCTION Cariogram is asystem developed at MalmÖ Dental School by Bratthall and his colleagues. Cariogram is a computer program that aims to show the background of multi-factorial dental caries by describing interactions associated with the ten cariescausing factors1. According to WHO (2003), 90% of schoolage children ever suffer from caries. Data of Survei Kesehatan Rumah Tangga (Indonesian Health Department, 2000) stated that 63.5% Indonesian people are suffers from caries and the prevalence of dental caries in West Sumatra was 70.6% 3. Research of the caries incidence factors at UKGS and Non UKGS Elementary School in South Jakarta, shows that the highest diet content is food with sugar, the highest diet frequency is three times a day and the number of plaques was in poor category4. Children aged 6-12 years old have a high caries risk because many sugary food and drinks sold at school. Consumption of cariogenic food and drink (how to, timing, and frequency of consuming excessive cariogenic food) can increase the risk of dental caries in children5. One of oral health indicator, is oral hygiene index, which shows the existing of organic deposit such as pelikel, alba, food debris, calculus, and dental plaque. Dental plaque is a deposit that forms a soft layer of biofilm and attached tightly on the surface of the teeth and gums and other hard surfaces in the oral cavity6. The average age of fourth and fifth grade elementary student is 10-11 years, children at this age are susceptible to have dental caries due to their habit of having snacks at school and at home. Children at this age are also in their mix dentition period, this is the end of prevention stage because after this a period, children will enter

II. RESEARCH METHODS This research is a descriptive research. Population in this research is 112 students from the fourth and fifth grade at SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang. Samples are taken by using total sampling technique. This research was conducted on 26-29 February 2016. Data for independent variable was taken through oral examination which recorded at examination sheets and questionnaire. Dependent variable that is cariogram description is obtained by using computer program based on the information about diet content, diet frequency and plaque amount. Data that collected are processed by using Brathall’s cariogram.

357

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION Caries risk factors of fourth and fifth grade students at SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang by using cariogram based on diet content, diet frequency and plaque amount can be described as follows: 1. Data analysis

seven parameters. On average the respondents are at moderate caries risk (83,3% or 25 respondents). The research shows that the highest caries risk factor of of fourth and fifth grade students at SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang based on diet content is high cariogenic food (53,3% respondent), moderate cariogenic food (26,6% respondents) and low cariogenic food (20% respondents). High cariogenic food mentioned in this research are candy, chocolate, cereals, cookies, crackers, doughnuts, cupcakes. Those foods are sweets and attractive so that children like them. This is similar with research conducted by the Damanik on SDN 060935 Medan in 2008 about dental health, that most school children really like foods that are sweet, sticky (cariogenic) and have attractive shape. These foods contain a lot of sugar, so it is often difficult for children to avoid consumption of sugar7. Caries risk caused by cariogenic food consumption, mostly if the food is consumed between meals and in the sticky form8. The average age of fourth and fifth grade students at SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang are 10-11 years old. They have high caries risk because of many sugary food and drinks are sold at school and commonly used artificial sweeteners instead of the original sugar. Artificial sweeteners can increase caries risk. Consuming cariogenic food excessively without being accompanied by the hygiene of the oral cavity, will leads to the risk of dental caries. From the research it is known that caries risk factors is obtained based on the frequency of eating and spending most of the day a lot of students is very low or at most 3 xa day(66,6%) respondents and at least with the frequency of eating and spending most of a day and more than 7 x 7 x a day (10%) of the respondents. Research conducted by Hana about the correlation between cariogenic food consumption with caries incidence and nutritional in children of third and fourth class SDN Kadipaten I and II Bojonegoro showed the highest frequency of cariogenic food consumption was 3-6 x a day (73%) with moderate caries rates (23.8%) 9. Analysis of the results showed that the highest diet frequency of students is 3 times a day. With such diet frequency, moreover the food consumed was cariogenic food, it will cause the occurrence of dental caries. If it is not followed with rinsing or brushing after eating it can lead to dental caries. Based on research conducted by the Damanik on elementary school children in Panei Tongah in 2009, suggesting that sugary foods that are soft and sticky can directly affect the occurrence of caries disease7. Consuming foods that contain high sugar, like chocolate, candy, sandwiches, meatballs, as well as biscuits have a high correlation with the incidence of dental caries. Consumption cariogenic foods frequently and repeatedly will cause the decreasing of plaque pH until it is below normal and causes enamel demineralization and dental caries formation. From the research result, it is known that caries risk factors is obtained based on the plaque index category mostly fair (76,6% respondents) and the least amount is poor (3.3% of the

Table 4.1 Frequency of Caries Risk Factors Based on Diet Content Diet Content Frequency Percentage Low 6 20 Moderate 8 26,6 16 53,3 High Total 30 100 From table 4.1 it is known that the highest caries risk factors based on the content of diet is on the high cariogenik diet (53,3% respondents,) followed by moderate cariogenic diet (26.6% respondents) and low cariogenic diet (20% respondents). Table 4.2 Frequency of Caries Risk Factors based on Diet Frequency Diet Frequency Frequency Percentage Very Low 20 66,6 Low 4 13,3 Moderate 3 10 3 10 High Total 30 100 Table 4.2 shows caries risk factors based on diet frequency. The highest diet frequency percentage is very low or at most 3 times a day (66,6% respondents) and the least high or more than 7 x times a day (10% of the respondents). Table 4.3 Frequency of Caries Risk Factors based on the Plaque Amount Plaque Index Frequency Percentage Satisfactory 0 0 Good 6 20 23 76,6 Fair 1 3,3 Poor Total 30 100 Table 4.3 shows that the highest caries risk factor based on plaque amount is fair (76,6% respondents) and the lowest is poor (3,3% respondents). Table 4.4 Frequency of Caries Incidence Risk Factor Cariogram Frequency Percentage Low 0 0 Moderate 25 83,3 5 16,6 High Total 30 100 Caries risk measurement results by using computer program cariogram from each respondent measured from

358

respondent). The poor category is caused by the consumption of sugary foods that not followed by good plaque control such us brushing or rinsing which leads to the growth of bacteria in the oral cavity and dental caries. Attention from parents and teachers are needed to provide information about the importance of maintaining oral health especially in children aged 1011 years. According to Rosidi et al, elementary school children had a high caries risk because of the many existing sugary food and drink sold at school5. Commonly they useartificial sweeteners instead of the original sugar. Artificial sweeteners can increase caries risk. The increasing of cariogenic food consumption can lower mouth pH thus also improving the process of demineralization and lowering remineralization. Because the excessive of cariogenic food and drink, types, how to consume, timing, and frequency can increase the risk of dental caries in children.

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

IV. CONCLUSIONS Based on the cariogram, the caries risk of fourth and fifth grade SDN 04 Kampung Olo Padang is moderate. It is caused by the high consumption of cariogenic food and fair plaque index. 1. The result of this research is expected to be a consideration so that schools can supervise snacks sold at school and children can avoid the risk of caries incidence. 2. It is expected that Padang City Health Office can collaborate with Public Health Centre (Puskesmas) to educate people about the cause of dental caries, healthy diet, and to go to dentist every 6 months to maintain children oral health. REFERENCES [1]

[2] [3]

[4]

[5]

Nagaraj, A., dan P. Vishnani. 2014. Cariogram- A Multi Factorial Risk Assessment Software For Risk Prediction of Dental Caries. International Journal Of Scientific Study 1(4). Pintauli, S., T. Hamada. 2008. Menuju Gigi dan Mulut Sehat. Universitas Sumatera Utara. Medan. Oktarianda, B. 2011. Hubungan Waktu, Teknik Menggosok Gigi dan Jenis Makanan yang Dikonsumsi dengan Kejadian Karies Gigi pada Murid SDN 66 Payakumbuh di Wilayah Kerja Puskesmas Lampasi Payakumbuh Tahun 2011. Skripsi. Universitas Andalas. Padang Karmawati, I.A., S.N. Tauchid, dan N.N. Harahap. 2012. Perbedaan Risiko Terjadinya Karies Baru Pada Anak Usia 12 Tahun Murid SD UKGS dan Non UKGS di Wilayah Kecamatan Cilandak Jakarta Selatan Tahun 2011. Jurnal Poltekes Kemenkes 2(4): 223-233. Rosidi, A, S. Haryani, dan E. Adimayanti. 2013. Hubungan Antara Konsumsi Makanan Kariogenik dengan Kejadian Karies Gigi. Jurnal Akper Ngudi Waluyon Ungaran.

359

Sasmita, I.S, A.S.P. Pertiwi, dan M. Halim. 2009. Gambaran Efek Pasta Gigi yang Mengandung Herbal Terhadap Penurunan Indeks Plak. Jurnal Universitas Padjajaran. Damanik, Noverini E. ”Gambaran Konsumsi Makanan Dan Status Gizi pada Anak Penderita Karies Gigi di SDN 091285 Panei Tongah Kecamatan Panei Tahun 2009”. FKM-USU. 2009:3 Hidayanti, L. 2005. Hubungan Karakteristik Keluarga dan Kebiasaan Konsumsi Makanan Kariogenik dengan Keparahan Karies Gigi Anak Sekolah Dasar. Tesis. Universitas Diponegoro. Semarang. Karmawati, I.A., S.N. Tauchid, dan N.N. Harahap. 2012. Perbedaan Risiko Terjadinya Karies Baru Pada Anak Usia 12 Tahun Murid SD UKGS dan Non UKGS di Wilayah Kecamatan Cilandak Jakarta Selatan Tahun 2011. Jurnal Poltekes Kemenkes 2(4): 223-233.

BEHAVIORAL DETERMINANTS of WOMEN AGE 15 – 24 YEARS OLD in HAVING GOOD PERSPECTIVE of MATURE AGE for MARRIED (PUP) in PANCORAN MAS VILLAGE, DISTRICT PANCORAN MAS, DEPOK CITY 2016 1)

Mona Safitri Fatiah

1)

Sekolah Tinggi Ilmu Kesehatan (STIKes) Bhakti Pertiwi Indonesia E-mail: [email protected] 2)

2)

Tri Yunis Miko Wahyono Fakultas Kesehatan Masyarakat, Universitas Indonesia E-mail:

Abstract: The percentage of early marriage women (age 2.042. That is, the learning outcomes using m-learning can significantly improve subject knowledge PC assembly techniques. Learning using multimedia will be more effective and efficient in conveying information. Multimedia uses a combination of several different media in the form of text, audio, graphics, animation, and video. Multimedia technology can be used to study media PC assembly techniques. Submission of materials can be easily accepted by the audience because of the use of multimedia can meet someone to save 90% of what they read, hear, see, say, and do. The use of multimedia can solve saturation for students to learn because it involves a cognitive, affective, and psychomotor student. Especially with today's technological developments that led to the use of the PC has become the daily needs of students. Some studies have also shown differences in the average knowledge for the use of interactive learning media. Research conducted in class XIDepartment ofLightweight Vehicle Engineering, SMKN 2, Depok, Sleman, Yogyakarta result that effective interactive learning multimedia products improve student learning outcomes with an average assessment of student learning outcomes when the pre-test was 63.75 with the lowest score of 50 and the highest value of 75. While the average value of 78.75 post-test with the lowest value and the highest value 65 90. the study concluded that the use of multimedia in teaching to make students feel more happy, more motivated to learn, and more interactive according to the speed of student understanding in order independent learning Another study conducted at SMA Negeri 11 Yogyakarta against chemical-based learning media android developed positively influences cognitive learning motivation and achievement of learners. The average post-test score for a class experiment that uses media products amounted to 80.31 with the score increased motivation of 0.31 while the average post-test scores for the class of controls that do not use the product media of 77.81 with the score increased motivation 0.16. As a means of information technology, the use of m-learning will attract student interest and make learning an active and fun. Excesslearning media (m-learning) subjects PC assembly techniques are:

1. This learning media can be viewed over and over again, wherever and whenever. 2. This learning media can be used independently anywhere and anytime. 3. This learning media can facilitate students in getting information about the computer assembly. 4. This learning media can be used offline and does not require the internet connection. The limitations of this study media are: 1. This learning media can not be installed on smartphones that are not based on Android. 2. The learning media only contains material on PC assembly. 3. The questions/exercise has not been made randomly. 4. The learning media needs to be tested to the general public so that later can be mass produced. 4. Conclusion The learning media(m-learning) subjects PC assembly techniques can increase the average knowledge of vocational students. The learning media on a PC assembly techniques based android system has the feasibility to become a medium of learning support for students. Learning outcomes achieved by students using instructional media PC assembly obtain an average value of 72.75. Validity test results of student, subject matter experts and media experts to get good grades. From media experts scored 92 (excellent), a material obtained a value of 87 (very good), and of students scored 73.47 (good). From the overall assessment given by students, material experts and media experts concluded that the learning media (m-learning) on a PC assembly technique is already feasible to use by students and teachers. Acknowledgements Acknowledgements submitted to the Department Electrical Engineering, Faculty of of Engineering, Universitas Negeri Jakarta and the Department of Computer Engineeringand Network (CEN), SMK 1 Perguruan Cikini Jakarta Utara. Bibliography C., Quinn. (2000). mLearning.Mobile, Wireless, InYour-Pocket Learning. Linezine. Fall 2000. Available at http://www.linezine.com/2.1/features/cqmmwiy p.htm Christianne Lynnette G Cabanban. (2013). Development of Mobile Learning Using Android Platform. International Journal of Information Technology & Computer Science

374

(IJITCS). ISSN No: 2091-1610. Volume 9: Issue No: 1, Issue on May / June, 2013 Sadiman Arief S., et al. (2007). Media Education. Jakarta: PT. Raja Grafindo Persada Ariesto Hadi Sutopo. (2012). Information and Communication Technologies in Education. Yogyakarta: Graha Ilmu Arsyad Azhar. (2011). Learning Media. Jakarta: PT. Raja Grafindo Persada Bambang Warsita. (2008). Learning Technology, Platform and Applications. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta Daryanto. (2010). Learning Media.Yogyakarta: Gava Media Deni Darmawan. (2012). Learning Technology, Bandung: Rosdakarya Munir. (2008). Curriculum-Based Information and Communication Technology, Bandung: Alfabeta E., Mulyana. (2012). App-Inventor: Create Your Own App Android. Bandung: Andi Yogyakarta Sherief Salbino. (2014). Book Smart Gadget Android for Beginners. Jakarta: Niaga Swadaya Suharsimi Arikunto. (2003). Basics Education Evaluation. Jakarta: Bumi Aksara Suharmini Arikunto. (1996). Research Procedure. Jakarta: Rineka Cipta Sugiyono. (2009). Quantitative Methods, Qualitative and R&D, Bandung: Alfa Beta Wahan Computer. (2013). Android App Programming Inventor.Yogyakarta: Andi Publishing Campbell, Scott and Fainstein, Susan S. (1996). Reading in Planning Theory. Cambridge. Blackwell Publishers. Marfai, MA, et al., (2008). The Impact of Tidal Flooding on a Coastal Community in Semarang, Indonesia. Environmentalist,28: p. 237-248. Perraudeau, M., (1988). Luminance models. In National LightingConference.Cambridge, UK, March 27-30. Nopriyanti. (2015). Development of Multimedia Interactive Learning Competency Lighting and Wiring Installation of Electrical Systems at SMK. Journal of Vocational Education, Vol 5, No. 2, June 2015 Lubis, IR, Ikhsan.J, (2015) Development of AndroidBased Chemistry Learning Media to Enhance Learning and Achievement Motivation Cognitive High SchoolStudents.Journal of Innovation Science Education, Volume No. 2 (191-201)

375

IMPLEMENTATION ADJUSTMENT GUARANTEED TIME SLOT METHOD BASED ON DATA SIZE FOR IEEE 802.15.4 Eppy Yundra1) 1)

UniversitasNegeri Surabaya (UNESA), Surabaya, Indonesia E-Mail: [email protected]

    Abstract.  The IEEE 802.15.4 was designed for physical layer and medium access control that was used for low power consumption and low data rate in the networks.The challenges in allocate guaranteed time slot are how to improve size data in contention free period (CFP) and reduce power consumption, respectively. This article proposes a scheme to improve performance IEEE 802.15.4, called guaranteed time slot allocated based on data size (GABAS), which analyze performance of the IEEE 802.15.4 networks. This article presents a comprehensive simulation for GABAS, especially for star topology to improve throughput, average bandwidth utilization as well as total energy consumption in the networks. The simulation results is proven that GABAS can be allocated in the IEEE 802.15.4 networks. GABAS performs better than the standard algorithm in term of throughput, average bandwidth utilization and total energy consumption in the networks. 

Keywords: IEEE 802.15.4, guaranteed time slot, energy consumption.   slot (GTS) for application that need specific requirement because device occupied as dedicated slot.

I. INTRODUCTION The IEEE 802.15.4 was designed for physical layer and medium access control that was used for low power consumption and low data rate in the networks. The IEEE 802.15.4 is one of candidates for wireless sensor networks, which consist of large number of sensors that are densely deployed to some physical phenomena for a wide variety applications. The IEEE 802.15.4 standard has been designed to specify the physical layer (PHY) and medium access control (MAC) sublayer for low power consumption, short transmission range, and low-rate wireless personal area network (LR-WPAN) [1]. The super frame structure in IEEE 802.15.4 standard consist of active portion and inactive portion. The active portion comprised of beacon frame, contention access period (CAP) and contention access period (CFP). While inactive portion used to sleep mode for saving energy. During CAP that mean contention mechanism, all of nodes have to compete each other to access the channel using slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA). Whereas in CFP used to guaranteed time

In the contention mechanism used to slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA). Device nodes will perform a backoff process as soon as the clear channel assessment (CCA) detects as busy condition. The challenge of CSMA/CA as following: first, when the device nodes detect the channel in busy condition, the device nodes have to increase the value of backoff exponent (BE). However, which cause range of blind backoff process also increase. Second, when the device nodes detect the channel in busy condition, the device nodes have to increase number of backoff stage. However, which cause more energy consumptions for entering next backoff stage. In addition, the blind of backoff process in the slotted carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) will cause lower channel utilization and more energy consumptions in the networks. Several authors have been proposed to improve the slotted CSMA/CA using hybrid MAC protocol integrating CSMA and time division multiple access

376

and analysis results is given in section 5. Final section are conclusions of the paper.

(TDMA) for wireless sensor network [11-13]. The authors of [14] propose an analysis for slotted CSMA/CA for energy consumption, but they only consider about idle condition for the standard and do not propose a new scheme. The authors of [15] propose an enhanced backoff (EB) mechanism shifts the range of backoff period (BP) to reduce redundant backoff and clear channel assessments (CCAs). However, the average delay also possibly increases. In [16] the authors present an additional carrier sensing (ACS) for IEEE 802.15.4 in order to improvement performance star networks. However, the authors do not consider about defer transmission and they do not provide retransmission state in Markov chain model. In [1718], sensor nodes use different mechanisms to reduce the waiting time before they have successfully transmitted packets, which makes it possible to decrease the backoff time between packet transmissions. They can improve channel utilization. However, fail to alleviate collisions.

II. OVERVIEW OF IEEE 802.15.4 The IEEE 802.15.4 standard can operate in beaconenabled mode and non-beacon-enabled mode. In beacon-enabled mode, each node employs two system parameters: beacon order (BO) and SO. The parameter BO decides the length of beacon interval (BI), where BI = aBaseSuperframeDuration × 2BO symbols and 0 ≤ BO ≤ 14; while the parameter SO decides the length of superframe duration (SD), where SD = aBaseSuperframeDuration × 2SO symbols and 0 ≤ SO ≤ BO ≤ 14. The value of aBaseSuperframeDuration is fixed to 960 symbols. The format of the superframe is defined by the network coordinator as shown in Figure 1. Furthermore, the active portion of each superframe consists of three parts: beacon, CAP, and CFP, which is divided into 16 equal length slots. The length of one slot is equal to aBaseSlotDuration × 2SO symbols, where aBaseSlotDuration is equal to 60 symbols. GABAS is expected to adjust time slot if the device node detects the channel in busy condition. If the device node detects channel in busy condition which cause blind of backoff process. In this case can cause degradation of performance networks not only lower bandwidth utilization but also more energy consumption. The performance of GABAS for star topology is simulated by model modified from [19] for considering packet retransmission, ACK and defer transmission, which is to obtain the bandwidth utilization and as well as energy consumption for IEEE 802.15.4 MAC in the networks. Let us denote SD and Tdelay be the supeframe duration in second and the time interval of waiting due to CCA busy in second, which can be obtained by Eqs.(1)and (2), respectively, where aBaseSuperframeDuration and Rs denote the minimum duration of the superframe and symbol data rate are equal to 960 symbols and 62500 symbol/second, respectively.

The performance analysis of IEEE 802.15.4 MAC is one of the important research topics in wireless sensor network. The challenges in allocate guaranteed time slot are how to improve size data in contention free period (CFP) and reduce power consumption, respectively. This article proposes aguaranteed time slot allocated based on data size (GABAS) for IEEE 802.15.4 which is the extended work from [19] and [20]. In [19], the authors focus on how to decrease the collisions between beacons or even between beacon and data packets by adjusting the beacon starting times of PAN and coordinator nodes for cluster tree topology. In [20], the authors focus on assigning adjustable length of GTS slot based on the length of packet and also deciding the precise time for the GTS starting time (GTSstart) and the GTS length (GTSlength) for star topology. However, all of the aforementioned models only consider CSMA/CA standard for contention mechanism.

SD 

aBaseSuperframeDuration x 2

Tdelay 

The major contribution of this article is to model the channel access for star network that allocate guaranteed time slot (GTS) based on data size to obtain the average throughput, the bandwidth utilization and energy consumption based on simulation method. That is important contribution in this article.

SO (1)

Rs

1  Unitbackoffperiod (2)  Rs

Let us also denote Lbeacon and Tbeacon be length of beacon in symbol and time interval of beacon in second, respectively; e.g., Lbeacon is equal to 190 symbols. Let denote CAPgabas be the length of CAP period in second and can be obtained by Eq. (3)

The rest of the paper is organized as follow. Brief overview of IEEE 802.15.4 is given in section 2. The description of GABAS is explained in section 3. Analysis of GABAS is derived in section 4. Simulation

CAPgabas  SD - Tbeacon

377

(3)

In this article, each node will communicates with are the maximum NB stage and retransmissions, i.e., the network coordinator by using the slotted they are equal to 4 and 3, respectively. Let bDFi,k , bDSAi,k and bDSBi,kbe the stationary probabilities of delay one CSMA/CA in CAP. To transmit a packet, a node first slot at first CCA busy, delay one slot for second CCA delays a backoff period (BP) determined by randomly busy for first and delay one slot for second CCA busy choosing from 0 to (2BE – 1) UBP, where BE is a backoff exponent and initially set to the value of for second at the states of DFi,k , DSAi,k, and DSBi,kfor the ithbackoff stage and the kth retransmission as shown aMinBE, and then performs the first CCA to detect in Eqs. (7) to (9), respectively. Finally, the total energy channel condition. If the channel is founded in busy at consumption of the network can be obtained. the first CCA detection, it will reduces minus one the value of contention window (CW), then continue delay Pst   i, ct  j, rt  k, fori 0,m, j  4,wi  1, k 0,R (4) for one slot Tdelay and then perform the second CCA to bi,j,k  tlim  detect the channel again. If the result of second CCA (5) channel is detected by busy condition, the node will b  lim P S    S i , r t   k , i  0, m , k  0, R  reduce again with minus one for value of contention S i, k t   s t window (CW), then continue delay for two slot Tdelay lim P C s  t   C i , r t   k , i  0, m , k  0, R  (6) and then perform again for third CCA. If the result of b Ci, k  t   third CCA channel is detected by idle condition, the node will starts to transmit its data packet and waits for b DF  lim P DF s  t   DF i , r t   k , i  0, m , k  0, R  t the acknowledged packet from the coordinator after (7) bDSA  lim P DSAs t   DSA , rt   k , i  0, m, k  0, R (8)  i finishing the data packet transmission. However, if the i,k t  result of third CCA channel is detected by busy b DSB  lim PDSBs  t   DSBi , r t   k, i  0, m , k  0, R  (9) condition, the device node will reassign a backoff i, k t  (BE + 1) – 1) UBP for delay period (BP) between 0 and (2 and attempt CCA again, where BE can be increased to V. SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS RESULTS the maximum value of macMaxBE. The transmission In this section, simulation experiments for GABAS will fail if the number of backoff attempts (NB) are performed by using the extended Castalia simulator exceeds the value macMaxCSMABackoffs. to validate the analysis and performance evaluation. In simulation model, we consider a star network topology We consider star topology network having one with one PAN coordinator and 20 device nodes, where network coordinator and twenty device nodes with the Dnode is equal to 10 meters. To simulate the same value of six for SO and BO. performance of power consumption, we consider the radio parameters of Chipcon’s CC2420 2.4 GHz for the IV. ANALYSIS OF GABAS IEEE 802.15.4 RF transceiver [22], where the transmitting power PWRtx, the receiving power PWRrx, In this section, the proposed GABAS based on and the idle power PWRidle, are 31.32 mW, 35.28 mW, the IEEE 802.15.4 use slotted carrier sense multiple and 712 µW, respectively [21]. Table I summarizes the access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) for part of simulation parameters. We compute the throughput, CAP only, because we only consider about active average bandwidth utilization (BU) and the total period, while part of CFP is neglected. This article also network energy consumption and also compare between the proposed algorithm (GABAS) and IEEE taking into account the case of acknowledged uplink 802.15.4 standard (Std). data transmission is investigated comprehensively via Markov chain model. Let bi,j,k be the stationary Table I The simulation parameters probability at the stochastic state (s(t) = i, c(t) = j, and Parameter Value r(t) = k), where s(t), c(t), and r(t) represent backoff Physical data rate 250 kbps stage, backoff counter, and number of retransmissions, Packet length (Ldata) 720 bits respectively, shown as Eq. (4), where bi,-1,k, bi,-2,k, bi,-3,k UBP 80 bits and bi,-4,k are the stationary probabilities for the first NumSuperframeSlots 16 CCA (CCA1), the second CCA (CCA2), the third CCA MacPacketOverhead 112 bits (CCA3) and packet transmission, respectively, at the ACK length (Lack) 88 bits ithbackoff stage and the kth retransmission. Let bSi,k and Dnode 10 m PWRtx 31.32mW bCi,k be the stationary probabilities of the successful PWRrx 35.28mW transmission and collision at the states of Si,k and Ci,k as PWRidle 712µW shown in Eqs. (5) and (6), respectively, where m and R



i, k

378







BO=SO BEmin BEmax

6 3 5

coordinator so that can avoid waste bandwidth utilization of superframe structure. This article presented a comprehensive simulation analysis of IEEE 802.15.4, specifically for star network, to predict the average throughput networks, bandwidth utilization as well as the network energy consumption. The validity of the analytical model is shown by closely matching its predictions of the simulation results. The results of simulation experiment show that GABAS is better than that of IEEE 802.15.4 standard in term of the throughput networks, average bandwidth utilization and energy consumption. As a future work, the proposed scheme will be compared by other algorithms

Figure 2 shows the network throughput against traffic load. The network throughput obtained by simulation is very close to that obtained by the analytical model. It is obvious the network throughput of GABAS is higher than those of the other algorithms. In the light traffic load (i.e., traffic load is equal to 0.1 and 0.2), the network throughput of GABAS is almost the same as those of IEEE standard; however, GABAS outperforms to the standard algorithm as the traffic load increases. The average goodput of GABAS increases by 18 %, compared to IEEE 802.15.4 standard.

REFERENCES [1] IEEE 802.15.4, “Part 15.4: Wireless Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs),” IEEE standard for information technology, September 2006. [2] A. N. Alvi, S. S. Naqvi, S. H. Bouk, N. Javaid, U. Qasim, and Z. A. Khan,” Evaluation of Slotted CSMA/CA of IEEE 802.15.4,” Seventh International Conference on Broadband, Wireless Computing, Communication and Applications, Canada, 2012. [3] K. Ashrafuzzaman and K. Sup Kwak, “On the Performance Analysis of the Contention Access Period of EEE 802.15.4 MAC,” IEEE Communications Letters, Vol. 15, No. 9, September 2011. [4] AN Alvi, SS Naqvi, SH Bouk, N Javaid, U Qasim, and ZA Khan, “Evaluation of Slotted CSMA/CA of IEEE 802.15.4,” Seventh International Conference on Broadband, Wireless Computing, Communication and Applications, Canada, 2012. [5] K. Ashrafuzzaman and K. Sup Kwak, “On the Performance Analysis of the Contention Access Period of EEE 802.15.4 MAC,” IEEE Communications Letters, Vol. 15, No. 9, September 2011. [6] Muneer O. BaniYassien, MarwaKh, Salayma, Wail E. Mardini, Yaser M. Khamayseh, Fibonacci Backoff Algorithm for IEEE 802.15.4/Zigbee, Network Protocols and Algorithms, pp. 62-78, Vol 4, No 3 (2012). [7] S Pollin, M Ergen, S Ergen, B Bougard, L Der Perre, I Moerman, A Bahai, P Varaiya, F Catthoor, “Performance Analysis of Slotted Carrier Sense IEEE 802.15.4 Medium Access Layer,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol.7, no.9, pp.3359-3371, September 2008. [8] J He, Z Tang, HH Chen, Q Zhang, “An accurate and scalable analytical model for IEEE 802.15.4 slotted CSMA/CA networks,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol.8, no.1, pp.440-448, January 2009. [9] C Buratti, “Performance analysis of IEEE 802.15.4 beacon-enabled mode,” IEEE Trans. Veh. Technol. 59, 2031–2045 (2010). [10] Y-K Huang, A-C Pang, H-N Hung, “A comprehensive analysis of low-power operation for beacon-enabled

.Figure 3 shows the average bandwidth utilization (BU) against traffic load. The average bandwidth utilization of GABAS has better efficiency than that of IEEE 802.15.4 standard. GABAS can improve the bandwidth utilization because reduce probability going to next backoff stage, which cause blind of backoff process and also allocated time slot accurately. The average bandwidth utilizationt of GABAS increases by 45%, compared to IEEE 802.15.4 standard Figure 4 shows the network energy consumption against traffic load. GABAS consumes lesser network energy than that of the IEEE 802.15.4 standard, because the GABAS algorithm can adjust the delay when CCA in busy condition which not only reduce probability collision but also probability entering next backoff stage. Moreover, GABAS has greater probability of successful transmission than that of the IEEE 802.15.4 standard, especially in heavy traffic load, which means that GABAS minimizes the energy consumption when retransmitting data packet.The average energy consumption of GABAS decreases by 28.67%, compared to IEEE 802.15.4 standardTheenergy consumption is obtained by summing the energy consumption of PAN coordinator and all of device nodes in the network. VI. CONCLUSIONS In this article, GABAS is proposed to improve performance IEEE 802.15.4 networks in order to reduce collision and blind of backoff process which need more energy consumption for random backoff. The proposed GABAS algorithm can adjust size of time slot accurately based on data size that allocated by

379

[13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

[19]

[20]

[21]

[22]

Fig. 1 an example superframe structure

120

Network goodput (kbps)

[12]

GABAS (sim)

100

Standard (sim)

80 60 40 20 0 0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4 0,5 0,6 Traffic load

0,7

0,8

0,9

1

Fig. 2 The throughput networks against traffic load

1

Gabas (sim) 0,8

Standard (sim) Rata-rata bandwidth utilisasi

[11]

IEEE 802.15.4 wireless networks,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol.8, no.11, pp.56015611, November 2009 K Sarvakar, PS Patel, “An Efficient Hybrid MAC Layer Protocol Utilized for Wireless Sensor Networks”. In Proceedings of International Conference on Wireless Communication and Sensor Networks (WCSN), Allahabad, India, pp. 22-26. December 2008. H Deng, J Shen, B Zhang, J Zheng, J Ma , H Liu. “Performance Analysis for Optimal Hybrid Medium Access Control in Wireless Sensor Networks”. In Proceedings of IEEE Global Telecommunications (GLOBECOM) Conference, New Orleans, LA, USA, pp. 203-207, November 2008 I Rhee, AWarrier, M Aia, J Min, M.L Sichitiu. “ZMAC: A Hybrid MAC for Wireless Sensor Networks”. IEEE/ACM Trans. Network. 2008, 16, 511-524. MB Rasheed, N Javaid, AHaider, U Qasim, ZA Khan, TA Alghamdi, “An Energy Consumption Analysis of Beacon Enabled Slotted CSMA/CA IEEE 802.15.4,” 28th International Conference on Advanced Information Networking and Applications Workshops (WAINA), Pp. 372-377, 13-16 May 2014. JY Ha, TH Kim, HS Park, S Choi, WH Kwon, “An Enhanced CSMA-CA Algorithm for IEEE 802.15.4 LR-WPANs”. IEEE Communication. Letters, vol.11, no. 5, Pp. 461-463, May, 2007. B-H Lee, R-L Lai, H-K Wu, C-M Wong, “Study on Additional Carrier Sensing for IEEE 802.15.4 Wireless Sensor Networks,” Sensors, Pp. 6275-6289, June 2010. Y Kwon, Y Fang and H Latchman, “Design of MAC protocols with fast collision resolution for wireless local area networks,” IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications, vol. 3, Pp. 793−807, May 2004. JG Ko, YH Cho and H Kim, “Performance Evaluation of IEEE 802.15.4 MAC with Different Backoff Ranges in Wireless Sensor Networks,” in Proceeding of IEEE International Conference on Communication Systems, Pp. 1−5, Nov. 2006. B.-H. Lee, M Udin Harun Al Rasyid, H.-K. Wu, “Analysis of superframe adjustment and beacon transmission for IEEE 802.15.4 cluster tree networks,” EURASIP Journal on Wireless Communication and Networking, July 2012 B.-H. Lee, Eppy Yundra, H.-K. Wu and M Udin Harun Al Rasyid, , “Analysis of superframe duration adjustment scheme for IEEE 802.15.4 networks,” EURASIP Journal on Wireless Communication and Networking, April, 2015 B Bougard, F Catthoor, DC Daly, “A Chandrakasan, W Dehaene, Energy Efficiency of the IEEE 802.15.4 Standard in Dense Wireless Microsensor Networks: Modeling and Improvement Perspectives”. Proceeding of Design, Automation and Test in Europe Conference and Exhibition. (DATE’05), pp.196-201, Mar. 2005. AS ChipconSmartRF® CC2420 datasheet (rev 1.2), Chipcon corp., 2004

0,6

0,4

0,2

0 0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

Traffic load

Fig. 3 The average bandwidth against traffic load

380

0,8

0,9

1

Fig. 4 The energy consumption against traffic load Energy Consumption (joule)

18 16

Gabas (sim)

14

Standard (sim)

12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0,1

0,2

0,3

0,4

0,5

0,6

0,7

0,8

Traffic load

 

381

DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF FUEL OIL TRUCK MONITORING SYSTEM USING GPS, RFID AND WIRELESS Syufrijal Study Program of D3 Electronics Engineering, University State of Jakarta Email: [email protected] Abstract. The stealing of subsidized fuel oil by fuel’s truck driver in a gas station happens quite often. This stealing action is usually done by reducing some part of cargo tank during the delivery from Pertamina to a gas station. This obviously makes the manager of gas station feel aggrieved as the amount of fuel’s supply is not exact anymore. Based on the condition above, this research will be focusing on creating a monitoring system for cargo tank truck using GPS (Global Positioning System), RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) and wifi (Wireless LAN). This research is done in the laboratory of tech faculty majoring electronic of UNJ. The method that is going to use is the experiment method, which are designing and testing so that it will be implemented on the tool. There are GPS, ultrasonic sensor, microcontroller arduino mega 2560, RFID reader, GSM1 modem and wifi module that are going to be implemented on fuel truck system, while on the server system, there will be computer and GSM2 modem. The input of microcontroller would be latitude and longitude coordinate transferred from the satellite through GPS, level data which coming from the ultrasonic sensor and the read tag RFID card system via RFID reader module. RFID tag card is used to identify the truck driver. The next step of this system is microcontroller will process that data and send it to server via wifi to be saved on the database. The data sending through wifi module can be done as long as the wifi module and the computer are connected to wifi router network. Microcontroller could also send position location data of the fuel truck by sending SMS to user’s handphone through GSM1, if there is a request of location data from a user. Afterwards, GSM1 modem will forward that message to GSM2 modem so the message could be saved. The program to monitor GPS data, fuel level and RFID in the server is using open source software, which is QT with C++ as its programming language. MySql is used as a database for data storage. The result of this research is that the server could monitor the truck tank location, fuel level and truck driver’s identity through wifi network or SMS. This system could also save those data into database. Keywords: GPS, Microcontroller, RFID, Wireless, SMS and his partner are removing some fuel to a prepared drum using a hose after he unseals the seal. The gas station will definitely having aggrieved with this action as the amount of supply they get is not exact anymore. It is reported that in one month, the aggrieved of these gas stations could reached up to 3,600 liters or equal with 16.2 millions. The stealing action by these tanker’s driver happens almost every day and it is already become a common secret. This fuel’s reduction can be avoid if there is a system to check if the amount of fuel in a tanker coming from Pertamina is the same as its amount when it is taken out in a gas station. But this process is relatively difficult to measure. Though there is an information of how much liter is the capacity of the tank but there is also an information saying that a tank is not a measuring tool. There is some way to approach this by measuring the height of fuel in a tank to guess the total amount of fuel. But because the size of tanks are different, this approach will have its difficulty. By using height sensor of the fuel, the different size of tanks will not going to be an issue anymore and the volume of the fuel in that tank can be

I. INTRODUCTION Fuel distribution has a risk of deviation on its delivery. That could be seen, when every time the government planned to increase the price of the fuel, the shortages of fuel’s availability happened in many area. Though based on Pertamina’s report, whenever this shortages happened, the supply sent is always on the normal condition. This means that it is clear there are some issues on its distribution. The price deviation between subsidized fuel, the nonsubsidized and the industry makes the fuel’s mafia who run the illegal business thrives. All this time, the fuel’s distribution from Pertamina to gas stations are using tankers which is managed by its business partner pointed by that company. The stealing of the subsidized fuel during its distribution to a gas station is normally done by reducing the supply, or it is well-known with the term of ‘pee on the road’, a sign by tanker’s driver during his action of stealing. The driver after loaded the fuel, will not going directly to an intended gas station, but will park his truck somewhere hidden. In that place, the driver

382

measured. By using GPS, the road path of tankers could also be monitored. GPS (Global Positioning System) is a coordinate global system that could point the coordinate position (latitude, longitude or the height) of an object anywhere on earth. By this, it will make sure that the tanker’s driver can’t steal the fuel somewhere hidden any longer as his position is detected automatically by GPS.There are many tankers used to distribute the fuels to gas stations, therefore the technology that could identify each of them is needed. By using RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) technology, the identity of tanker’s driver identity could be known. Sending data position of tankers, fuel’s volume and driver’s identity can be done by sending SMS or via wifi. Based on the facts mentioned above, this research will make a system that could monitor tanker’s position, fuels’ height level in the tank and the identity of the driver through GPS, RFID, SMS and wifi. II. METHODS Block Diagram Generally, diagram block of tanker’s monitoring system are using GPS, RFID andWifi can be seen on picture 1 and 2. 1.

Picture1. GeneralOverview Transmission

of

the

Data

Picture 2. Diagram block design tool

383

Pin 51 MOSI Pin 52 SCK Pin 53 SS

As seen on picture 2, there are module of ultrasonic, microcontroller, GPS, RFID reader, GSM1 modem and wifi on the tanker’s system, while computer and GSM2 modem are put on the server.Microcontroller is used as system controller. The type of microcontroller used is Arduino Mega2560. Input used as a signal input for microcontroller are data coming from ultrasonic sensor module, RFID and GPS. Ultrasonic sensor module is use to detect the height level of fuel in the tank. RFID reader module is to read the RFID tag card carried by tanker’s driver. GPS Module is used to identify the position of the tanker by receiving latitude and longitude data from satellite. GSM module is used to receive/sending SMS. Microcontroller will keep sending those 3 data (level data, RFID and GPS) through wifi module as long as wifi module and computer are connected to wifi router network. By request, microcontroller could also send the position location data of tankers to user’s phone by sending it via SMS through GSM1 modem. The process of that request is by sending SMS to GSM modem 1 so that the coordinate position data of the tankers could be located anywhere. In the server system, computer is use to display the visual coordinate data of tanker’s position, fuels level data and RFID tag card data real time while also could save those data in database by sending them via wifi module or by SMS coming from GSM1 modem to GSM2 modem.

MOSI RFID Reader SCK RFID Reader SDA RFID Reader

3.

Software Software used for monitoring system of tankers in computer server is QT Creator. QT program is an open source software that could be used in several operating systems (Linux, Windows and Mac), where one of its framework could make an application using C++ programming. Database program used in here is MySql, which is contained in Xampp program. Xampp program is a compilation of several programs Apache, MySql, PHP and Pearl. Picture 3. Hardware design scheme

2.

Hardware Hardware used in this research consists of arduino mega2560 module, ultrasonic sensor, RFID reader, GPS, GSM modem, TTL Logic Level Converter, Max232 module and wifi module. Arduinomodule connection can be seen in table 1 whilehardware design scheme can be seen in picture3. The use of TTL logic level converter module is as a bridge to convert the voltage of 3.3v to 5v from wifi module to arduino, while Max232 module is used as a converter from TTL to RS232 so that arduino is able to communicate with GSM1 module. Table 1.Arduino Module Connection Pin Arduino Pin Device Module Ground Ground 3,3 Vcc Vcc RFID, wifi, TTL Logic Level Converter 5 Vcc Vcc GPS, max 232, ultrasonic, TTL Logic Level Converter Pin 8 PWM Echo ultrasonic Pin 9 PWM Trigger ultrasonic Pin 14 TX3 RX Max 232 module Pin 15 RX3 TX Max 232 module Pin 16 TX2 RX GPS module Pin 17 RX2 TX GPS module Pin 18 TX1 RX wifimodule via TTL Logic Level Converter Pin 19 RX1 TX wifi module via TTL Logic Level Converter Pin 49 RSTRFID Reader Pin 50 MISO MISO RFID Reader

RESULT AND DISCUSSION Testing program done in this research consists of 3 parts which are program to send the data via Wifi, receiving/sending SMS and monitoring system and database 1. Testing of Sending Data via Wifi Wifi program is tested to know if microcontroller is able to send GPS data, RFID and level data through Wifi network. The result of the this can be seen in picture 4. Three data is successfully sent to computer server. GPS data that are captured are only latitude and longitude with data format $GPGGA, which are 0615.1297,S and 10700.2889,E. RFID tag data read is &fb&08&65&03 while 51 number is the result of level BBM reading through ultrasonic sensor.

384

Picture 4. Result of Wifi testing 2.

Testing of Receiving and Sending data SMS via GSM Modem Receiving / sending SMS can be done by using ATCommand. Command used to send SMS is AT+CMGS=xxx while for receiving SMS is AT+CMGR=xxx. XXX letters is a phone number used for the test. SMS result to user’s phone can be seen on picture 5. Picture 6. Browsing result of location on Google Map 3.

Testing of Monitoring system QT program is tested to know if computer is able to monitor and save GPS data, level data and RFID via wifiand SMS. The result of QT program for data monitoring can be seen on picture 7, while data storage result in database can be seen on picture 8.

Picture 5. Result of SMS Receiving and Sending SMS testing is done by sending the message “lokasi” to phone number put on GSM1 modem. Afterwards, GSM1 modem will resend the message to user’s number contain the address of coordinate data on Google Map. After SMS data is received in user’s phone, the coordinate address of tanker’s position should be copied to web browser first before Google Map look for that points. The search result of coordinate location via Google Map can be seen on picture 6.

385

1. 2.

3.

4. Picture 7. Testing Result of Monitoring System

5.

6.

III. CONCLUSION Microcontrollerused as a system controller is able to work perfectly to monitor the position of tankers, fuel’s level and driver’s identity. Input signal used as microcontroller are latitude and longitude data coming from GPS, RFID tag card and level data coming from ultrasonic sensor module and also the message received by GSM1. Output signal used as microcontroller are GPS data sending, level data and RFID to computer server via wireless LAN module (wifi). Data sending through wifi module can be done as long as wifi module and computer are connected to wifi router network. Besides that, the output signal of microcontroller can also about sending message to user’s phone and GSM2 modem via GSM1 modem with its message is the coordinate data of tanker’s location. RFID technology can be used as an identifier of driver’s identity by reading RFID tag card with the maximum distance of 4cm. QT Program can be used to display GPS data, level data and RFID sending via Wifi module or GSM2 module in the server. This program can also be used to save data into database using MySql. Ultrasonic sensor module can be used to detect fuel’s level based on the time difference of the emission and the receiving of ultrasonic wave which are then processed by microcontroller as the measured level. REFERENCES

[1]

[2]

Picture 8.Database testing result [3] [4]

[5]

[6] [7]

386

Al-Khedher, Mohammad A., “Hybrid GPS-GSM Localization of Automobile Tracking System”, IJCSIT International Journal of Komputer Science and Information Technology”, Vol 3 No. 6, December 2011, p75-85. Dawei Xu1, a, Leilei Deng2, b,Shan Ren3,c., “Development of Logistics Tracking System Based on RFID, GPS, GPRS”, Trans Tech Publications,Switzerland:Applied Mechanics and Materials Vols. 644-650 (2014) pp 5717-5720. Garg, Vijay K. (2007), Wireless Communications And Networking, USA: Elsevier Inc. Labiod, H, Afifi, H. And De Santis, C. (2007).WiFiTM, BluetoothTM, ZigBeeTM, AndWimaxTM, Netherlands, Springer. Maddison, Ralph and Mhurchu, Cliona Ni., “Global Positioning System : a New Opportunity in Physical Activity Measurement”, International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity, 6 : 73, November 2009. Stalling, W. (2005). Wireless Communications And Network, 2nd Ed., USA: Pearson Education, Inc. Tunccekic, Yesim and Dincer, Kivanc, “Mobile Mapping Applications Over J2ME Enabled Phones”, IJCSNS International Journal of Komputer Science and Network Security, Vol. 7 No. 2, February 2007, p 316-322

COMPARISON IDENTIFICATION SHAPE LEAVES IN INDONESIA USING EDGE DETECTION SOBEL, ROBERTS, PREWITT, ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION AND RATIO LENGTH AND WIDTH LEAVES Ratnadewi 1), Dominicus Reynaldi Farada2) 1) Electrical Engineering Department, Maranatha Christian University 65th, Prof. Drg. Suria Sumantri Street, Bandung, West Java, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected] 2) Electrical Engineering Department, Maranatha Christian University 65th, Prof. Drg. Suria Sumantri Street, Bandung, West Java, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract.There are many plants in Indonesia with diferrent shape leaves. The leaves can be treated especially for medicine. The shape leaves can be category to some group. One way to classify the shape of leaves are with image processing. The advantage of image processing is the object that is processed will not be damaged because the camera is not in direct contact with the object, the object in this research are leaves. Leaves identification are processed, first with transformation colour image leaf to black and white image leaf, second edge detection shape leaf is done by several methods edge detection that are Sobel, Roberts, Prewitt, and Ant Colony Optimization, third thinning process. The differences in leaves size cause grouping be constrained. Differences size leaves caused by the age of leaves or the distance image capture, therefore it needs ratio length and width leaves. Some shape leaves, that observed are Acicular, Cordate, Lanceolate, Linear, Lobed, Bipinnate, Spatulate, and Even Pinnate. From the observation edge detection with Sobel, Prewitt, Roberts and Ant Colony Optimization have the same accuration that is 91,67%. An error occurred in the group even pinnate and lanceolate

Keywords: edge detection, shape leaf, Sobel, Roberts, Prewitt, Ant Colony Optimization

I. INTRODUCTION

There are many plants in Indonesia with diferrent shape leaves. The leaves can be treated especially for medicine. The shape leaves can be category to some group. One way to classify the shape of leaves are with image processing. The advantage of image processing is the object that is processed will not be damaged because the camera is not in direct contact with the object, the object in this research are leaves. The utilization of image processing is widely used in various fields. The one application of digital image processing is Sobel edge detection method in the identification of patterns of koi fish colors carried by Milfa Yetri[1]. A. Johar et. Al [2] used Sobel edge detection method in application detection computer answers on the answer sheet in case study SMP Negeri 2 Bengkulu city. Gonzales, RC, and R.E. Wood [3] explained several edge detection methods such Roberts, Prewitt, Sobel. W. Lestari and P. Widyaningsih [4] use mathematical

387

morphology and edge detection to detect a person's fingerprint. S. A. A. Bowo, et. Al [5] analyze edge detection to identify the patterns of leaves using Roberts, Prewitt, Sobel edge detection. C.A. Martinez [6] proposed New ACO algorithm for image edge detection. Using heuristic and knowledge information and applying an improvement operator, binary images including edges detected are obtained. In this paper we use Roberts, Prewitt, Sobel Ant Colony Optimization (ACO) edge detection to identification shape leaves. II. EDGE DETECTION

Edge detection is one of the most important tasks of finding the image. Edges are significant local changes of intensity in an image. Detecting an edge in a digital image similar to analyzing relationship between a pixel and its neighorhoods. .The information on intensity and

orientation of those changes can be found by gradient. The norm of gradient is given by [aco] G  Gx2  G y2

 1  1  1 M y   0 0 0   1 1 1 

(1)

Where Gx and G y are the first derivatives of the

C. Sobel Edge Detection

image in the x and y direction, respectively. The orientation of the gradient is given by G   arctan y (2) Gx

Setting c  2 , we get Sobel operator:   1 0 1 M x   2 0 2   1 0 1 

A. Roberts Edge Detection

Using pixel coordinate notation with j corresponds to the x direction and i to the negative y direction. The first derivatives of the image in the x and y direction can be given by g Gx   g i, j   g i  1, j  1 x g Gy   g i  1, j   g i, j  1 y This approximation can be implemented by the following masks: 1 0  Mx    0  1

 1  2  1 M y   0 0 0   1 2 1  D. Ant Colony Optimization (ACO) Edge Detection

The lives of ant is in a colony. One behaviour studied is the search of food. If ant find a food then its walking from food sources to their nest and vice versa. Real ants deposit a hemical substance called pheromone on the ground. High level of pheromone remain on shorter paths because pheromone is laid down faster. This situation causes colony traverses shorter paths. In general, an ACO algorithm can be described like this: 1). ContructAntSolutions(): controls that all ants construct their solutions incrementally. 2). UpdatePheromones(): increases pheromone values on paths recently built by the colony and decreases all pheromone values on graph. 3). DaemonActions(): can be used to implement centralized actions not individually performed by ants. These actions are related to improve solutions or bias the search process of solutions.

0  1 My    1 0  B. Prewitt Edge Detection

Consider the arrangement of pixels about the pixel i, j  a0 a1 a2 a7

i, j 

a3

a6

a5

a4

III. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS

The partial derivatives can be computed by: M x  a2  ca3  a4   a0  ca7  a6  M y  a6  ca5  a4   a0  ca1  a2 

One of the important parts of the plant are the leaves. Leaf pattern can be divided into two category, that is single leaf and compound leaf. Single leaf reviewed there is only one leaf on stem. Compound leaf reviewed there is more than one leaf on stem. Test images can be shown in Fig. 1 There are eight shape leaves: The experimental result for Acicular leaf can be shown in Fig. 2 and Bipinnate leaf in Fig 3.

The constant c implies the emphasis given to pixels closer to the center of the mask. Setting c  1 , we get Prewitt operator:  1 0 1 M x   1 0 1  1 0 1

388

(a)

(c)

(e)

(g)

(b)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(d)

(e) Fig. 2 (a) 0riginal image (b) Roberts Edge detection (c) Prewitt Edge detection (d) Sobel Edge detection (e) ACO Edge detection (

(f)

After edge detection image, the next process is to calculate the ratio of length and width, and the total white pixel of leaf image. The value of ratio of length and width, and total white pixel of leaf image will be save in database. For the identification process we compare the value in database and the value of test image. If comparison value equal to one then the test image similar to database image. Table 1 is the ratio of comparison value test image and database image.

(h)

Fig. 1 (a) Acicular (needle shape) , (b) Linear (paralel margins, elongate), (c) Cordate (heart shape, stem in cleaf, (d) Lanceolate (pointed at both ends) , (e) Spatulate (spoon shaped), (f) Bipinnate (leaflets also pinnate), (g) Even Pinnate (leaves in rows, two at one point), (h) Lobed (deeply indented margins)

(a)

389

(b)

TABEL 2 THRESHOLD RATIO TOTAL WHITE PIXEL

(c)

(d)

Shape Leaf

Sobel

Prewitt

Roberts

acicular

ACO

0.6380

0.6343

0.6311

0.6375

bipinnate

0.8844

0.8906

0.8673

0.8609

cordate

0.7656

0.7635

0.7649

0.7560

even pinnate

0.7335

0.7398

0.7395

0.7309

lanceolate

0.5000

0.5019

0.5018

0.5512

linear

0.6135

0.6132

0.6130

0.6041

lobed

0.7513

0.7512

0.7510

0.7525

spatulate

0.5740

0.5714

0.5710

0.5689

IV. CONCLUSIONS

From the observation edge detection with Sobel, Prewitt, Roberts and Ant Colony Optimization have the same accuration that is 91,67%. An error occurred in the group even pinnate and lanceolate With 8 database image and 24

(e) Fig. 3 (a) 0riginal image (b) Roberts Edge detection (c) Prewitt Edge detection (d) Sobel Edge detection (e) ACO Edge detection )

TABLE I THE RATIO OF COMPARISON VALUE TEST IMAGE AND DATABASE IMAGE

Database image

Test image

Acicular 1

Acicular 1 Acicular 2 Acicular 3 Acicular 4 Acicular 5 Bipinnate 1 Bipinnate 2 Bipinnate 3 Bipinnate 4 Bipinnate 5

Bipinnate1

Comparis on Total whte pixel 1 0.63 0.96 0.67 0.97 1 0.97 0.92 0.87 0.88

Comparison Ratio Length and Width 1 0.98 o.92 0.89 0.82 1 0.99 o.85 0.81 0.82

REFERENCES [1]

[2]

[3] [4] [5]

390

M. Yetri, Yusnidah, M. Ramadhan, “Analisis Identifikasi Pola Warna Ikan Koi Menggunakan Metode Sobel Edge Detection Dalam Karakteristik Citra Sharpening”, Jurnal Ilmiah Saintikom, Vol. 14, No. 1, Januari 2015. A. Johar, D. Andreswari, G. Triyana., “Aplikasi Pengolahan Citra Digital Untuk Pendeteksi Jawaban Pada Lembar Jawaban Komputer Menggunakan Algoritma Sobel (Studi Kasus SMP Negeri 2 Kota Bengkulu”), Jurnal Teknik Informatika Vol. 7, No. 2 Oktober 2014. Gonzales, RC, R.E. Wood, Digital Image Processing Third Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008. S.A.A. Bowo, A. Hidayatno, R.R.Isnanto, “Analisi deteksi tepi untuk mengidentifikasi pola daun,” in Proc. Teknik Elektro Undip. C.A. Martinez, M.E. Buemi, “New ACO Algorithm for Image Edge Detection”,

AN IMPROVED CAESAR CIPHER ALGORITHM FOR BETTER SECURITY Johni S Pasaribu1) 1)

Politeknik Piksi Ganesha , Bandung, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Cryptography is an art and science of converting original message into non readable form. In this paper, we have introduced some novel improvements to the traditional Caesar cipher algorithm, which completely eliminates its fundamental weaknesses. Encryption is the process of scrambling a message so that only the intended recipient can read it. With the fast progression of digital data exchange in electronic way, Information Security is becoming much more important in data storage and transmission. Cryptography has come up as a solution which plays a vital role in information security system against malicious attacks. In this project, encryption will be implemented information that makes it hard to be readable and secure. Caesar cipher is a mono alphabetic cipher. It is a type of substitution cipher in which each letter in the plaintext is replaced by a letter. In this paper, author improved the traditional Caesar cipher and fixed the key size as one. Another thing alphabet index is checked if the alphabet index is even then increase the value by one else alphabet index is odd decrease the key value by one. This fact was proven by some specific demonstrations. Keywords: Cryptography, Encryption, Decryption, Plaintext, Ciphertext cipher where each character in the original message (called the plaintext) is replaced with a letter that is some number of positions down in the alphabet [2-3]. Among all the other cipher techniques, Caesar cipher is the easiest to break. Since the shift has to be a number between 1 and 25, one can simply try each possibility and see which one results in a piece of readable text. If it happens to be known a piece of the cipher text, then it is easy for a person to guess the key and hence the plaintext. With the increasing trend of internet technologies, numerous security issues are arising. Cloud users are also victim of the security issues. In cloud computing security issues are faced by the Cloud providers as well customers. In most cases, provider must ensure that their infrastructure is secure and that their client’s personal data and applications are protected while the customer must ensure that the Cloud provider has taken the proper security measures to protect their information So security issues are everywhere [6].

I. INTRODUCTION Now a day when internet provides essential communication between tens of millions of people and is being increasingly used as a tool for commerce, security becomes a tremendously important issue to deal with. One essential aspect for secure communication is that of cryptography. Cryptography is mainly used in transmitting the text which is sometimes called as the plaintext or the clear text from one end to the other. It includes techniques such as merging the words with some images, transforming in microdot form etc. to securely transmit the text. But in today’s computer centric world, cryptography is mainly dealing with the scrambling of the plaintext into a form which is not meaningful and does not reveal any information that is being transmitted called cipher text and then later converting it back to the plaintext. The process of converting plaintext to cipher text is called encryption and then converting the cipher text back to the plaintext is known as decryption. Cryptography not only protects data from theft or alteration, but can also be used for user authentication. Cryptography is about constructing and analyzing protocols that block adversaries. Various aspects in information security such as data confidentiality, data integrity, authentication, and nonrepudiation are central to modern cryptography [14]. Modern cryptography exists at the intersection of the disciplines of mathematics, computer science, and electrical engineering. Applications of cryptography also include ATM cards, computer passwords, and electronic commerce [12]. Cryptographic algorithms make use of Caesar cipher which is also known as a shift cipher, is one among the widely used cipher text mechanisms [10]. It is a substitution

Fig. 1 Plaintext to Cipher Text

391

receiver section and decryption takes place [15, 16]. Messages are encrypted by the sender using the key and decrypted by the receiver using the same key. Example DES (Data Encryption Standard), 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard), AES (Advanced Encryption Standard), Blowfish [3]. Figure 3 shows process of secret key cryptography. Here same key is shared by both sender and receiver for encryption and decryption. There are few challenges in the technique; the key should be transmitted over the secure channel from sender to receiver. The point is that if the secure channel already exits then transmit the data over the same channel, what is the need of encryption in such case. Practically no secured channel exits therefore key has been transmitted along the data which increases the overheads and effective bandwidth gets reduced. Secondly, the channel noise put harm to the key and data during the transmission [20].

Fig. 2 Ciphertext to Plaintext

II. OBJECTIVE The objectives of the research are to: i. Implement three methods of encryption using Caesar Cipher algorithm. ii. Develop a prototype that helps to test the output from the encryption process. iii. To compare the propose encryption method with Caesar Cipher. iv. Create strong encryption by using the different algorithm.

Fig. 3 A Simple Symmetric Key Cryptography Model

III. SCOPE The objectives of the research are: i. Caesar cipher algorithm is applied to increase the strength of security. ii. Create encryption and decryption method for the propose encryption. IV. CRYPTOGRAPHY Cryptology is not a new; it has existed for more than 2000 years. The word cryptology is derived from two Greek words: kryptos, which means "hidden or secret and graphein” (to write), is the art and science of making communication unintelligible to all except the intended recipients [7]. In the language of cryptography, the message one intends to send is called the plaintext while the message that is actually sent is called the cipher text. Ciphers make textual communication a mystery to anyone who might unduly intercept it. Hence, a cipher is a method used to encode characters to hide their values. Cipher is employed in design of cryptosystem. A cryptosystem is a system, method, or process that is used to provide encryption and decryption [8]. There are two main categories of cryptography depending on the type of security keys used to encrypt/decrypt the data. These two categories are: Asymmetric and Symmetric encryption techniques. A. Symmetric Encryption When same key is used to encrypt and decrypt the message then it is known as symmetrical key cryptography. It is also known as private key cryptography; users have the provision to update the keys and use them to derive the sub keys. It is much effective and fast approach as compared to asymmetrical key cryptography. In symmetrical key cryptography (Shared key cryptography); key has been generated by the encryption algorithm and then send it to the

B. Asymmetric Encryption In asymmetric key cryptography (Public key cryptography) different keys are used for encryption and decryption, hence also known as public key encryption. The two keys are a private key and a public key. The public key is announced to the public; whereas the private key is kept by the receiver. The sender uses the public key of the receiver for encryption and the receiver uses his private key for decryption. Here the number of keys required is small but it is not efficient for long messages. Public key cryptography also called asymmetric key cryptography which uses different keys for encryption and decryption. Ex. RSA, Digital signature scheme, etc. The public key is known to all the receivers, is used for encrypting the plaintext message. The private key is known only to the user of that key. With public key cryptography, keys work in pairs of matched public and private keys. Figure 4 shows the process of public key cryptography where public key used by sender for encryption and all the receivers use their private keys for decryption. Messages encrypted using the public key cannot be decrypted using the public key. Public key encrypted messages can only be decrypted using corresponding private key which is kept secure.

Fig. 4 A Simple Asymmetric Key Cryptography Model

392

C. Caesar Cipher Methods Cryptography is an art and science of converting original message into non readable form. There are two techniques for converting data into non readable form: 1. Transposition technique 2. Substitution technique. Caesar cipher is an example of substitution method [19]. It is said to have been used by Julius Caesar to communicate with his army. Caesar is considered to be one of the first persons to have ever employed encryption for the sake of securing messages. Caesar decided that shifting each letter three places down the alphabet in the message would be his standard algorithm, and so he informed all of his generals of his decision, and was then able to send them secured messages. One of the strengths of the Caesar cipher is its ease of use and this ease of use would be important for Caesar since his soldiers were likely uneducated and not capable of using a complicated coding system.

Fig. 6 Classification of Encryption methods

D. Modified Caesar Cipher Algorithm To encrypt a message proposed algorithm requires plaintext and encryption key. The encryption key is an integer value and it determines alphabet to be used for substitution. It is based on modulo twenty six arithmetic to ensure that integer value wraps round in case encryption key supplied is more than twenty six. Decryption follows reverse operations performed during the process of encryption. It requires decryption key, and encrypted text. The decryption key should be complement to the encryption key so that reverse character substitution can be achieved. As stated earlier, Caesar cipher simply shifts encrypted character by number of positions. In this paper author proposed a new method, where key size is fixed as one. In this method firstly alphabet index is checked if the alphabet index is even then increase the value by one else the index is odd decrease the key value by one. Furthermore, the characters of the encrypted text are scrambled in such a way that if an attempt is made to decrypt the cipher text it would not be easy to decrypt the text. Encryption Algorithm Step1: Take the plain text as input. Step2: Firstly alphabet index is checked if the alphabet index is even then increase the value by one else decrease the key value by one. Step3: Get the encrypted text. Decryption Algorithm Step 1: Insert cipher text. Step2: Check alphabet index if the alphabet index is even then increase the value by one else decrease the key value by one. Step 3: Get the plain text.

Fig. 5 Caesar cipher working

Further enhancement to original three places shifting of character in Caesar cipher uses modulo twenty six arithmetic for encryption key that is greater than twenty six. = ( + 26 Where x is value of plaintext n is number of shift. The most pressing weakness of this cipher is simplicity of its encryption and decryption algorithms; the system can be deciphered without knowing the encryption key. ( = ( − 26 For example: Suppose that address of message is JURUSAN TEKNIK INFORMATIKA Now apply Caesar cipher to encrypt the plaintext. Shifting the key by three as shown in Figure 5. Plaintext: JURUSAN TEKNIK INFORMATIKA Ciphertext: MXUXVDQ WHNQLN LQIRUPDWLND There are two techniques for converting data into non readable form: 1. Transposition technique 2. Substitution technique Caesar cipher is an example of substitution method. Caesar cipher has various limitations. This paper presents a perspective on combination of techniques substitution and transposition. A double columnar transposition method can be applied on Caesar cipher in order to overcome all limitation of Caesar cipher and provide much more secure and strong cipher.

TABLE I Key for Uppercase Alphabets

TEXT KEY

A B

B A

C D

D C

E F

F E

G H

H G

I J

J I

K L

L K

M N

N M

O P

P O

Q R

R Q

S T

T S

U V

V U

W X

X W

Y Z

Z Y

p q

q r

r q

s t

t s

u v

v u

w x

x w

y z

z y

TABLE III Key for Lowercase Alphabets

text key

a b

b a

c d

d c

e f

f e

g h

h g

i j

j i

k l

l k

m n

393

n m

o p

TABLE IIIII Key for Numeric Values

Number Key

1 2

2 1

3 4

4 3

5 6

6 5

7 8

8 7

9 0

0 9

TABLE IVV Mapping Table for Uppercase Alphabets

A 0

B 1

C 2

D 3

E 4

F 5

G 6

H 7

I 8

J 9

K 10

L 11

M 12

N 13

O 14

P 15

Q 16

R 17

S 18

T 19

U 20

V 21

W 22

X 23

Y 24

Z 25

r 17

s 18

t 19

u 20

v 21

w 22

x 23

y 24

z 25

TABLE V Mapping Table for Lowercase Alphabets

a 0

b 1

c 2

d 3

e 4

f 5

g 6

h 7

i 8

j 9

k 10

l 11

m 12

n 13

o 14

p 15

q 16

Encryption C=E (P) = (P+1) if P is even or zero than add one Else E (P) = (P-1) (mod 26) if p is odd than subtract one Decryption P=D(C) =(C-1) if C is odd than Subtract one Else D(C) = (C+1) if P is even or zero than add one

E. Comparison with Caesar Cipher Existing Technique of Caesar cipher using the key as three where each character is shifted by three character for example A become D and key is most of time in incremental order Caesar cipher is a mono alphabetic cipher. It is a type of substitution cipher in which each letter in the plaintext is replaced by a letter but in this Modified Caesar cipher algorithm to encrypt a message proposed algorithm requires plaintext and encryption key. It is based on modulo twenty six arithmetic. Here key size of Caesar cipher fixed as one. Another thing alphabet index is checked if the alphabet index is even then increase the value by one else alphabet index is odd than decrease the key value by one. In this way this method is better than existing one.

Fig. 8 Decryption Process

F. Experimental Results 1) Encryption Example 1 TABLE VI Encryption Process

Plaintext Ciphertext

Bobotoh2017 Apapspg1928

We get Apapspg1928 as cipher text because as per as algorithm the value B that is 1 is odd (Refer to table 4) and we have to subtract one as per algorithm and we get A as cipher text of B. Same way o is even and we add one and then p became cipher text of o. Example 2 TABLE VII Encryption Process

Plaintext Ciphertext Fig. 7 Enryption Process

2) Decryption

394

Cryptography Dqzosphqbogz

[6]

Example 3 TABLE VIII Decryption Process

Plaintext Ciphertext

[7] [8]

Apapspg1928 Bobotoh2017 [9]

We get Bobotoh2017 as Plaintext because according to algorithm A is even (Refer to table 4) and we have to add one as per algorithm and we get B as Plaintext of A. Same way p is odd and we subtract one and then o became plaintext of p.

Plaintext Ciphertext

[10] [11]

Example 4

[12]

TABLE IX Decryption Process

[13]

Dqzosphqbogz Cryptography

[14]

V. CONCLUSIONS

[15]

Data Security is a very important aspect. The key generations play a crucial role in designing the ciphers. This paper presents Modified Caesar cipher. It is a substitution cipher. The use of internet and network is growing rapidly. So there are more requirements to secure the data transmitted over different networks using different services. To provide the security to the network and data different encryption methods are used. In this paper Caesar cipher technique is used for security. It is unique in its own way. Security provided by this algorithm can be enhanced further, if more than one algorithm is applied to data.

[16] [17]

[18] [19]

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4]

[5]

[20]

Hamdan.O.Alanazi, B.B.Zaidan and A.A.Zaidan, New Comparative Study between DES, 3DES and AES within Nine Factors, Journal Of Computing. Vol. 2 , Issue 3. Pp.152-157, 2010. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network, New York: Prentice Hall, 2006. B.A.Forouzan, Cryptography & Network Security, New York: McGraw Hill Book Company, 2008. Somdip Dey, Joyshree Nath and Ashoke Nath, “An Advanced Combined Symmetric Key Cryptographic Method using Bit Manipulation, Bit Reversal, Modified Caesar Cipher (SD-REE), DJSA method, TTJSA method: SJA-I Algorithm”, International Journal of Computer Applications (IJCA). Vol. 46, No. 20. Pp. 46-53, May 2012. S G Srikantaswamy, Dr. H D Phaneendra, “Improved Caesar Cipher with Random Number Generation Technique and Multistage

[21]

[22]

[23]

395

Encryption”, International Journal on Cryptography and Information Security (IJCIS). Vol. 2, No.4. pp. 39-49, December 2012. Kashish Goyal, Supriya, “Security Concerns In the World of Cloud Computing”, IJARCS International Journal of Advanced Research in Computer Science, Vol. 4, No. 4, pp. 230-234, March 2013. ”CRYPTOGRAPHY”.https://en//.wikipedia.org/wiki/cryptography Ochoche Abraham, Ganiyu O. Shefiu, “AN IMPROVED CAESAR CIPHER (ICC) ALGORITHM”, International Journal Of Engineering Science & Advanced Technology (IJESAT). Vol. 2, Issue -5. pp .1198 – 1202, October 2012. Jason Crampton, “Time-Storage Trade-Offs for CryptographicallyEnforced Access Control”, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Springer, 2011, Vol. 6879/2011, pp. 245-261. [Online]Available:http://www.cs.trincoll.edu/~crypto/historical/caesa r.html. Last visited on 15-09-2016 Jiannong Cao, Lin Liao, Guojun Wang, “Scalable key management for Secure Multicast Communication in the Mobile Environment”, Pervasive and Mobile Computing, Vol. 2, pp.187–203, 2006. Ayushi,“A Symmetric Key Cryptographic Algorithm”, International Journal of Computer Applications (0975 - 8887), Vol. 1, No. 15, 2010. Gaurav Sharma, Ajay Kakkar, "Cryptography Algorithms and approaches used for data security”, International Journal of Scientific & Engineering Research, Vol. 3, Issue 6, 2012. Shyam Nandan Kumar,“Review on Network Security and Cryptography”, International Transaction of Electrical and Computer Engineers System, Vol. 3, No. 1, pp. 1-11, 2015. Jason Crampton, Time-Storage Trade-Offs for CryptographicallyEnforced Access Control, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Springer, 2011, Vol. 6879/2011, pp. 245-261. Jiannong Cao, Lin Liao, Guojun Wang, “Scalable key management for Secure Multicast Communication in the Mobile Environment” Pervasive and Mobile Computing Vol. 2, pp.187–203, 2006. Jawahar Thakur, Nagesh Kumar, ”DES, AES and Blowfish: Symmetric Key Cryptography Algorithms Simulation Based Performance Analysis”, International Journal of Emerging Technology and Advanced Engineering,Vol. 1, Issue 2, pp. 6-12, 2011. “ENCRYPTION”http://www.cse.wustl.edu/~jain/cse56706/ftp/encryption_perf/index.htm Vinod Saroha, Suman Mor and Anurag Dagar, “Enhancing Security of Caesar Cipher by Double Columnar Transposition Method”, International Journal of Advanced Research in Computer Science and Software Engineering. Vol. 2, Issue 10. pp .86-88, October 2012. Hamdan.O.Alanazi, B.B.Zaidan and A.A.Zaidan, “New Comparative Study Between DES, 3DES and AES within Nine Factors”, Journal of Computing, Vol.2 , Issue 3. Pp.152-157, March 2010. Maulik Kothari, Manthan Shah, and Meet Malde, “Comcrypt: An Encryption Algorithm based on Vernam cipher”, International Journal on Computer Science and Technology (IJCST). Vol. 3, Issue 4.pp .364-367, Oct – Dec 2012. Akanksha Mathur, “A Research paper: An ASCII value based data encryption algorithm and its comparison with other symmetric data encryption algorithms”, International Journal on Computer Science and Engineering (IJCSE). Vol. 4 No. 09. pp .1650-1657, September 2012. Ajit Singh, Aarti Nandal and swati Malik, “Implementation of Caesar Cipher with Rail Fence for Enhancing Data Security”, International Journal of Advanced Research in Computer Science and Software Engineering. Vol. 2, Issue 12. Pp. 78-82, December 2012.

INTERACTION BETWEEN MATHEMATICS AND ENGLISH LEARNING: AN OBSERVATION ON TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN ENGLISH TO INDONESIAN EFL STUDENTS Dr. AgusRianto Dr. IffiFitriah Borneo Tarakan University Abstract. Learning mathematics in English formost Indonesian learnershas never been an easy process.The objective of this paper is to provide more understanding about the relationship between learning English and learning mathematics in the context of Indonesian EFL learners. The analysiswas based on the observation on mathematics classes taught in English to undergraduate students in mathematics education department of Borneo TarakanUniversity, North Kalimantan, Indonesia. It was observed that the learning of mathematics in English to Indonesian EFL learners was not simply switching their first language (Indonesian) to English, but other factors were involved. The learning of mathematics in English was believed to be more effective when both the teacher and the learners understood the relationship between mathematical skill and the English language. The studies reviewed combined with the reflection on teaching the subject were expected to result better teaching techniques especially for Indonesian EFL learners. The observation results and the discussion of this topic can provide teachers and learners with more understanding about the nature of learning mathematics in English. Keywords: English and Mathematics Learning II. MTHODS I.

INTRODUCTION

Mathematics tends to be considered as a subject that does not require a strong command of language (Robertson, 2009). In reality, however, mathematical reasoning and problem solving are closely linked to language and rely upon a firm understanding of basic math vocabulary (Dale & Cuevas, 1992; Jarret, 1999).Understanding the relationship between mathematical skill and language is very important especially when mathematics is taught in English, which is not students’ first language. An assumption that many English language learners (ELLs) will excel in math because math is a "universal language" and students may have had prior educational experience that included mathematical instruction, can lead educators astray(Robertson, 2009).This statement leadsthe writers to explore more about the relationship between mathematical skill and English learning. In general, this paper will briefly review several studies on the relationship between English learning and mathematics learning and followed by an observation on mathematics teaching and learningprocesses. The suggested methods used in the classroomwill be presented at the end of the discussion.

 

Language and Mathematics ESL/EFL Students

Learningfor

Halliday (1975) has suggested that the mathematics register, defined as themeanings belonging to the natural languages used in mathematics, has the following components: 1. Natural language words reinterpreted in the context of mathematics, such as set, point, field, column, sum, even (number), random. 2. Locutions, such as square on the hypotenuse and least common multiple. 3. Terms created from combinations of natural language words, such as feedback and output. 4. Terms formed from combining elements of Greek and Latin words, such as parabola, denominator, coefficient and asymptotic. In addition to vocabulary, a mathematics register also includes styles of meaning and ways of presenting arguments within the context of mathematics. These processes require new structures, which are most often borrowed from specialized forms in the natural language. Examples of expressions adapted from English include: 1. "the area under the given curve" 2. "the sum of the first nterms of the sequence" (Halliday, 1975)

396

According to Barwell (2008),mathematical English has its own vocabulary, which can be roughly divided into three groups: 1. Technical terms specific to mathematics (e.g., multiplicand, quadrilateral) 2. Technical terms used in mathematics that also have unrelated everyday meanings (e.g., volume, product). 3. Mathematical use of words adapted from similar everyday meanings (e.g., similar, face).

take place in the learner's mothertongue or in a second language. Language is also applied to the content ofmathematics in the representation of experience through diagrams andmathematical notation. The diagrams might be given a description or discussion,and the notation might yield a verbalization. In the model, Clarkincludes creative processes (inspiration) that "may or may not make use ofverbal, spatial or notational imagery".The model suggests the variety in the roles language plays in mathematicsinstruction. Different linguistic activities serve different purposes whenmathematical concepts and skills are being acquired. Students require considerableproficiency in both their first and second languages if they are to copewith the range of linguistic activities required for learning mathematics. Empirically, Cummins (2000) demonstrated in the field of mathematics, by doing research involving ESL students in Australia that there was a link between low proficiency in all languages and mathematical underachievement. There was also some evidence that students with strengths in two languages do better in mathematics than other students. Barton and Neville-Barton (2003) in their study of 83 volunteer first year students conducted in January 2003, found that because of a lack of understanding of mathematical text, students who have English as an additional language (EAL students) are at a 10% disadvantage in comparison with English first language students. The EAL students in their study were mainly Asian. They also found that although written mathematics can take the form of text, symbols, diagrams or graphs, second language students prefer mathematical symbols to express themselves to texts, diagrams or graphs especially in the case of text questions. However, EAL students' reliance on symbolism in mathematics learning is unjustified, showing that mathematics is not language free. To conclude, it should be added that poor ability to communicate mathematics could be the result, rather than the cause, of poor understanding (Bohlmann, 2001).

Barwell (2008) further mentioned that mathematical English also has several otherdimensions, including specialized syntax (e.g., the use of words like and, a, or if), use of symbols (e.g., 3-D), ways of talking and writing (e.g., word problems, writing a solution, giving an explanation), social factors (e.g., the use of we to refer to people who do mathematics, as in “We call that a pentagon.”) In describing his experience, Halai(2004) stated that as students worked at mathematical problems it appeared that their understanding of the problem statement required interpretation at least at two levels. At one level the students appeared to make sense of the language in which the mathematics problem was coded. This involved making sense of the grammar and usage of words and at another level they appeared to make sense of the mathematics involved. Thus, while mathematics is often seen as languagefree, in many ways learning mathematics fundamentally depends on language (Barwell, 2008). In general, it is obvious that learning mathematics in English is different from learning ordinary English because the concepts that mathematics constructs are often difficult to articulate in ordinary language. Mathematics symbolism has developed to express meanings that go beyond what ordinary language can express. In the context ofEnglish asa second language (ESL),research has shown that, while many ESL students are quickly able to develop a basic level of “conversational” English, it takes several years to develop more specialized “academic” English to the same level as a native speaker (Thomas & Collier, 1987). According to Heugh (1999) the minimum vocabulary necessary to cope with English as instruction medium is 5000 words. She claims that after four years of home language medium instruction in primary school, accompanied by English as a subject, a student would have acquired only about 800 words. Clark (1975) proposed a model (Figure 1) for representing the different roles that language might play in the teaching and learning of mathematics. Inthe model, concepts are viewed as the result of the learner's experience, withlanguage facilitating the learner's conceptual development through discussionand instruction. These activities might

 

397

notan easy task. At the beginning of the semester, the problem faced during the learning process wasthe low English proficiency level of students.Although all the 82 students taking this subject had passed the English subject taken duringtheir first semester, their overall English performance was low. The initial data of learners’ English proficiency shows that thirty percent of the students got C and C+, forty percent obtained B and B+ and thirty percent got A. From this initial data, the assumption was made that the English language was not a barrier in the learning process. However, the statistics did not meet the reality. The language problem was found immediately in the earlier meeting. Most of the students were not able to solve most of the word problems in arithmetic and algebra. The teacher realized that the students neededa step by stepguidancein order to cope withthose problems. Unexpectedly, it was also found that some students had problems in understanding somebasic mathematics concepts. It was an unexpected situation as all of these students were selected and prepared to be mathematics teachers and it was assumed that they had a very good basic mathematics skill. It wasalso found that most of the students in one class, mostlywho did not come fromthe city, admitted that their English was very weak and they did not have enough vocabulary and understanding of the mathematical concepts, despite the fact that they learned the concepts previously. What were found in these classes empirically support Cummins’ (2000) findings. There was an indication that the lower English proficiency had impact on the lower performance in English instructed-mathematics learning. Interestingly, it was also found thatthe students who got equal results of English did not get equal understanding in learning mathematics in English.Halliday (1978) has highlighted about the use of this language in mathematics in his influential discussion of the ‘‘mathematical register.’’ He pointed out that counting, measuring, and other ‘‘everyday’’ ways of doing mathematics draw on ‘‘everyday’’ language, but that the kind of mathematics that students need to develop through schooling uses language in new ways to serve new functions. This is not just a question of learning new words, but also new ‘‘styles of meaning and modes of argument and of combining existing elements into new combinations’’(Halliday, 1978, pp. 195–196). The later problems also make it harder for the teacher in finding a balance between focusing on mathematics and focusing on language. As a result, teaching this subject was a challenge and finding a way to teach this subject effectively was a quest. To solve the problem at that time, the teacher tried to give more exercises with more various kinds of activities such as games, worksheet, cooperative

III. RESULT AND DISCUSSION AnObservationon Teaching Mathematics in English to Indonesian EFL Students There were two classes of mathematics taught in English during the odd semester of the academic year 2016/2017 in mathematics education department at faculty of education and teacher training of Borneo University Tarakan. The students were enrolled in this department through a national enrollment selection. It could be assumed that they had some similar basic academic qualifications as these were requiredduring the enrollment selection process. The first class consisted of 37 students and the second class consisted of 45 students. Mathematicstaught in Englishis a subject offered to the third semester students in the department. This has been a compulsory subject in the department since the university was established. The general purpose of teaching mathematics in English wasto provide the students with the knowledge of Englishin learning mathematics. In addition, the teacher set two specific objectives during the teaching and learning processes. The first wasfor students to understand and improve their vocabulary and knowledge on mathematical English. The second was for students to use their knowledge on mathematics in written and oral forms of English. The mathematics concepts taught in this subject included algebra, arithmetic, statistics and geometry. In fact, all of these concepts were taught when the students were in their junior and senior high schools. It was observed that the teaching and learning of mathematics in English to Indonesian EFL students was not an easy process. The teacher admitted that teaching the subject in English was

 

398

learning and also discussion and presentation. However, until the end of the semester, most of the students were stillhard to improve their ability in understanding the subject. At the end, more than half of the students got C+ and below. The results were shown in Table 1.

experience in learning mathematics and English. 2. In the context of University Borneo Tarakanstudents, using cooperative and collaborative learning seemedto facilitate and reduce anxiety in learning mathematics in English. Rather than only explaining the Table 1. Results of Mathematics Taught in concept by the teacher, students could get Englishfor Odd Semester of 2016/2017 more about the language and concept together with peers,whilethe teacherwas only a facilitator. The teachershould promote Class A Class B students’ mathematical meaning-making Marks Frequency Percentage Frequency Percentage Total through problem solving, problem posing and A 14 17.07 2 2.44 16 opportunities for discussion. Students should B+ 12 14.63 1 1.22 be13given some manipulation through the use B 3 3.66 2 2.44 5 ofpictures, video, manipulatives,objects, games, and graphicorganizers. These C+ 7 8.54 3 3.66 10 activitiescan help the students contextualize C 5 6.10 6 7.32 11 the concept (Garrison & Mora, 1999). Creating D+ 1 1.22 5 6.10 6 some simple graphic can also be assigned to D 3 3.66 10 12.20 13 students as achallenge. E 0 8 9.763. The8 teacher must be aware of the specific linguisticdemands of mathematics and, which Total 45 54.88 37 45.12 82 aspects must behighlighted and discussed thoroughly with the students. The teacher Based on the observation during the teaching needs to find out the problems immediately and learning processes and the results obtained by before it continues further. Thus an effective the students, it can be concluded that learning communication between the teacher and the mathematics taught in English is not an easy task students must be intensified and improved. but it is a process of combining knowledge of language and mathematics—it seemed like learning a whole new subject. The mathematics that students learnt in their first language REFERENCES (Indonesian)might seem totally different fromthe [1] Adler,J. (1998). A language of teaching mathematics they learnt in English. The situation dilemmas: Unlocking the complex faced by the teacher was consistent with that faced multilingual secondary mathematics by Adler (1998) who highlighted three dilemmas in classroom. For the Learning of Mathematics, teaching and learning mathematics in multilingual 18(1), 24-33. context. The first was dilemma of code [2] Barwell, R.(2008). ESL in the mathematics switching—whenlearners and/or teachers switch classroom. What Works?.Research into fromlanguage of instruction to the first language. Practice: Research Monograph #14. Ottawa: The second was dilemma of mediation—when The Literacy and Numeracy Secretariat, 4. teachers move towards the learners [3] Barton B. & Neville-Barton P. preferredlanguage. Finally, dilemma of (2003).Language issues in undergraduate transparency—when the teacher spends time mathematics: A report of two studies. New explicitly teachingmathematical language. Zealand Journal of Mathematics (Supplement), 32, 19-28. IV. CONCLUSIONS [4] Bohlmann C. (2001). Reading skills and mathematics. Communications: Third The Classroom Implications Southern Hemisphere Symposium on The observation results and the discussion on Undergraduate Mathematics Teaching, 5-14. this topic lead the writers to formulate the [5] Clark, R. (1975).Some aspects of following implications in teaching and learning psycholinguistics.In E. Jacobsen (Ed.). mathematicsin English for IndonesianEFL context: Interactions between linquistics and 1. Characteristics of students must be mathematical education: Final report of the acknowledged before a class begins. There symposium sponsored by UNESCO, CEDO must be enough data about students’ English andICMI, Nairobi, Kenya, September 1 -1 proficiency levels, their social background or 1,1974 (UNESCO Report No. EDeven their motivation and interest in learning 741CONF.808, pp. 74-81). Paris: UNESCO the subject. The availability of the data will provide picture of

 

the learners’

previous

399

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

 

Cuevas, G.J. (1984). Mathematics Learning in English as a Second Language.Journal for Research in Mathematics Education, Vol. 15, No. 2, Minorities and Mathematics, 134-144. Cummins, J. (2000). Language, power andpedagogy: Bilingual children in the crossfire.Clevedon, UK: Multilingual Matters. Dale, T. C. & Cuevas, G. J. (1992).Integrating mathematics and language learning. In P. A. Richard-Amato & M. A. Snow (Eds.), The Multicultural Classroom: Readings for Content-Area Teachers. White Plains, NY: Longman, Inc. Garrison, L & Mora, J. K. (1999).Adaptingmathematics instruction for Englishlanguage learners: The languageconceptconnection.In NationalCouncil of Teachers of Mathematics.Changing the faces of mathematics:Perspectives on Latinos (pp. 3547).Reston VA: NationalCouncil ofTeachers of Mathematics Halai, A. (2004). Teaching Mathematics in Multilingual Classroom.Proceedings of the 28thConference of the InternationalGroup for the Psychology of Mathematics Education. 240-243 Halliday, M. A. K. (1975). Some aspects of sociolinguistics.In E. Jacobsen (Ed.).Interactions between linguistics and mathematical education: Final report of the symposium sponsored by UNESCO, CEDO and ICMI, Nairobi, Kenya, September 1 -1 1,1974 (UNESCO Report No. ED74lCONF.808, pp. 64 -73). Paris: UNESCO. Halliday, M. A. K. (1978). Sociolinguistics aspects of mathematical education.In M.Halliday, The social interpretation oflanguage and meaning, (pp. 194-204). London: University Park Press. Heugh K. (1999). Languages, development and reconstructing education in South Africa. International Journal of Educational Development, 19, 301-313. Jarret, D. (1999). The Inclusive Classroom: Teaching Mathematics and Science To English Language Learners - It's Just Good Teaching. Portland: Northwest Regional Educational Laboratory. Retrieved March 8, 2009 from http://nwrel.org/msec/just_good/8 Robertson, K. (2009). Math Instruction for English Language Learners.retrieved April 1st, 2013 from http://www.colorincolorado.org/article/30570/ ?theme=print Thomas, W. P., & Collier, V. (1997).Schooleffectiveness for language minority students.Washington, DC: National Clearinghousefor Bilingual Education.

400

ISLAM NUSANTARA AND ISLAM BERKEMAJUAN RHETORIC IN NEW MEDIA Dini Safitri UNJ, Jakarta, Indonesia [email protected]

Abstract. The purpose of this study is to provide an overview of the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan which are two major ideas about the identity of Muslims in Indonesia. Both the rhetoric anchored in the two mass organizations of Islam, the largest and oldest in Indonesia. Islam Nusantara rhetoric is the brainchild of Nahdlatul Ulama (NU), and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric is the brainchild of Muhammadiyah. NU and Muhammadiyah wants to spread the values of Islam to the people of Indonesia, but a different way in persuading the people of Indonesia. Both of them, are actively using new media to spread the idea. There are pros and cons about the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara in new media. Nevertheless, the research concludes that both the rhetoric within the framework of national unity, Bhineka Tunggal Ika. Criticism and argumentation rhetoric, is a form of Fastabiqul Khoirot to achieve the Rahmatan Lil Alamin of Islam. Keywords: Rhetoric, Islamic Organizations, New Media I. INTRODUCTION Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric are great ideas on the identity of Indonesian muslims. Both rhetoric came from two largest Islamic organizations in Indonesia. Islam Nusantara rhetoric was delivered by Nahdlatul Ulama (NU) and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric was a product of Muhammadiyah. Those organizations held their national congress on August 2015, NU held their congress first, and then Muhammadiyah had theirs few days later. The 33rd congress of NU were held in East Java city of Jombang on 1st-5th of August 2015 with official congress theme was Meneguhkan Islam Nusantara, Merawat Indonesia untuk Membangun Peradaban Dunia (Strengthening Islam Nusantara, Nurturing Indonesia to Develop Global Civilization). While Muhammadiyah’s 47th congress was held in Ujungpandang, South Sulawesi on August 3-7 2015 with official tagline Dakwah Pencerahan untuk Indonesia Berkemajuan (Enlightenment Movement toward Progressive Indonesia). NU and Muhammadiyah wished to spread the values of Islam to Indonesian people through their respective congressional theme. It is interesting that both organizations seek to persuade Indonesian people by using social media to disseminate their rhetoric.

in the expression of the discourse of Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan. Triangulation method in this research is done by comparing the information or data in a different way by using the method of observation. Observations made to the opinion text from NU’s and Muhammadiyah intellectual elites. III. RESULT Islam Nusantara rhetoric increasingly popular after President Joko Widodo delivers a speech during the opening of the National Conference NU clerics in Masjid Istiqlal (14/6). In his speech, he openly declared his support on the Islamic model of the archipelago, which is a friendly and moderate Islam. But the speech, different views on the new media, especially social media. Many netcitizen that interprets the contents of the speech Joko Widodo, is the implied message that makes Indonesian Muslims can’t be sovereign, because in the name of Islam, according to the agenda should moderate spread of alien ideology of nonMuslims. The agenda, including: 1). Indonesian Muslims will not demand the application of Islamic law, 2). Indonesian Muslims should not criticize the Israeli, 3). Indonesian Muslims should tolerate everything, including tolerate school of thought that is contrary to the teachings of Islam. Criticism of the speech, then extends to the rhetoric criticism Islam Nusantara in new media. The widespread criticism, spurred by some of the events that helped reinforce the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara. Among the events that became a byword in the new media, especially social media, is the reading of the Qur'an with Java style on the Commemoration of Isra 'Mi'raj at the National Palace as well as the circulation of quoting statements from the Minister of Religion, Lukman Hakim Saifuddin (LHS), which calls on Muslims to respect people who are not fasting. Quran reading event with Java style on the Commemoration of Isra 'Mi'raj at the State Palace, reaping a

II. METHOD The paradigm of this study are interpretive. This approach was chosen, because it starts from the phenomenon that the object is built of a particular situation, which is internalized by individuals or particular social group. The method in this study is a rhetorical argument by Stephen Toulmin. This method was chosen for this study to examine the text in a column on New Media, such as website, blog dan sosial media. This method is part of a text analysis method. This study is limited to Islam Nusantara and Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric on the official web NU and Muhammadiyah, because there is competition (contestation)

401

lot of counter reaction. Counter parties say that the horse's bit, does not comply with the rules of the appropriate reading of the Qur'an recitation science, so that it can change the meaning and the meaning of the sentence Qur'an. This peritiwa associated with Islamic rhetoric archipelago, because after the incident, recitation of the Qur'an with the style of Java, followed by the show "Ngaji Qur'an Langgam Java and indigenization of Islam" held by Majlis Sholawat GUSDURian in Hall Green Foundation LKiS in Sorowajan (Wednesday, 05/27/2015). According to the counter, the series of events to reinforce the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara as an act of syncretism, ie confuse Islam with non-Islamic teachings. Reading the Qur'an as part of the teachings of Islam, can’t mixed with a horse's bit of Java, which can violate and change the meaning and the meanings of the words of the Qur'an. Counter parties, has told that Islam is a doctrine that is whole, perfect and pure at the same time. There should be no additional trinkets or the local culture mixed mortar into berfondasi Tawheed Islamic teachings. In the principle of monotheism, syncretism was not given a place and does not know tolerance. Purification of faith is absolute. Meanwhile, the pro against the event, saying that the event is the result of acculturation Islam with Javanese culture. This is consistent with the idea of Islam Nusantara as the idea of Islamic acculturation. Certain values in Islam "adapted" to the cultural heritage. The reason is, when Islam arrived in Indonesia, the existing culture first flourish. Therefore, it should not be eliminated just the culture. Islam is growing in the archipelago is Islam typical of the archipelago with various trinkets culture, which is different from the Islam of the Arab world with different cultures. Among the pros and cons of both sides, there is a third party argued, the definition of Islam Nusantara ala Jokowi unclear. In general, this third party to interpret Islam Nusantara as Islam is more tolerant of the traditions of the archipelago, which in this case should be read as Java. It makes Islam Nusantara is labeled as a syncretic Islam, because torelan against elements of Javanese culture with Hinduism and Buddhism. Another counter reaction against Islam Nusantara rhetoric, is a reaction to quote the statement of Minister of Religion, LHS, which calls on Muslims who were fasting in honor of those who did not fast. Netcitizen the cons say Menag been held hostage foreign agenda, tolerant Islam. The majority of Muslims in the country, must remain tolerant to the value of the minority. LHS rated making statements against Islam majority logic. According netcitizen, logically, LHS as the Minister of Religious Affairs should invite minority of people who are not fasting, respect the majority of Muslims who are fasting Ramadan. But in fact, a call LHS is the opposite. Regardless of the pros and cons netcitizen rhetoric regarding Islam Nusantara, look rhetoric Islam Nusantara spoken a number of elite NU, reaping bustle in new media. On the one hand, the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara, better known by the public. However, speech acts reworded in new media, the author I was ineffective. This is further prolonging the conflict between NU and other Islamic organizations, particularly those assessed by the elite NU as radical Islamic movements. The existence of a conflict

between the elite NU with a number of radical Islamic movements are assessed, it can be seen from the opinion article published in the official web NU. Of the many articles, some of them, even the author of the article directly naming the other Islamic organizations as the Islamic movement that should be dammed because a lot of spreading radicalism to the Muslims of Indonesia. Based on author searches on the official web NU, the idea of Islam Nusantara had long surfaced long before the 33rd congress of NU in Jombang. But the Islamic notion of this massive archipelago in the production and dissemination, primarily through new media, namely in the period ahead NU 33. Unfortunately, management NU diction of the elite, to popularize Islam Nusantara, a lot of criticism. Such criticism, there are many coming from Islamic organizations labeled by NU elite as radical Islamic movements. Interestingly, of the many opinion article produced and distributed at the official web NU, neither of these posts are attacked Muhammadiyah, which is the oldest Islamic organizations that still survive, and also has many members as NU. In fact, the two are giving kudos and congratulations Muktamar support. Islam Berkemajuan to Forward Indonesia In contrast to the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara many reap bustle in new media, Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric is not much addressed reactively by netcitizen. Even the atmosphere of Muhammadiyah Congress is not in dispute like atmosphere NU, making netcitizen many give praise to the Muhammadiyah. Many netcitizen who considered that the theme of Muhammadiyah in the 47th congress, is one way of Muhammadiyah wants to realize Islam Indonesia advanced. This is in accordance with the ideals of the founder of Muhammadiyah, KH Ahmad Dahlan, who say that Islam is a religion berkemajuan as opposed to stagnation, superstition and idolatry that occurred in Indonesia's Muslim population. Islam Berkemajuan movement has pioneered the era KH. Ahmad Dahlan, manifested in the establish form social institutions, such as amil zakat institutions, hospitals, orphanages, and modern schools. The trip set up by these institutions is not easy, since the movement was pioneered in the community who do not have awareness to pay zakat, the communities still rely on traditional healer to cure the disease, in people who still ignore the orphan, the majority of Muslims who debated whether modern schools are infidels or not. This movement is being developed today, notably in formulating ideal educational purposes, which gave birth to the individual who appears as a scholar and intellectual Muslims realize that advanced, has the firmness of faith and science are spacious and robust physical and spiritual. In addition, Muhammadiyah figures are also a lot of praise, because it actively fights for the interests of Muslims. For example, Din Syamsudin, who gets his appreciation for ketokohannya in MUI, especially concerning the MUI Fatwa regarding BPJS. Although the time to reap the pros and cons of the fatwa, but the MUI institutionally in appreciation netcitizen already can issue a fatwa on the issue of Muslims in the realm beyond aqidah, thoughts, daily worship, halalharam goods / services. Netcitizen considered that the MUI

402

Fatwa on BPJS shows that MUI has been able berfatwa regarding state policy, especially in social and economic fields. This MUI netcitizen movement associated with the persona Din, which is in line with the concept of Islam Berkemajuan, the MUI has continued role to a more advanced issues. MUI already can act to protect Muslims from usury dangers that lurk Muslims, contained in state policy. In addition to movement of the leaders of Muhammadiyah, Muhammadiyah movement is institutional, which is also appreciated netcitizen is jihad constitution. This movement, a movement to sue the Act that are inconsistent with the Indonesian state. Here are some laws in contested by Muhammadiyah: 1). Act (Act) Migas No. 22 of 2001 and Law No. 7 of 2004 on Water Resources, 2). UU no. 24 of 1999 on Foreign Exchange Traffic and Exchange Rate System, 3). UU no. 25 of 2007 on Investment, and 4). UU no. 30 Year 2009 on Electricity. Muhammadiyah argues that most of the substance of the law to threaten and harm the public, and contrary to the 1945 Constitution and Article 33 of the 1945 Constitution. Especially for the Oil and Gas Law No. 22 of 2001 and Law No. 7 of 2004 on Water Resources. Muhammadiyah act as initiators judicial review of Law. According Muhammadiyah, Act, assessed as unfavorable to the people's welfare, but would benefit the few and foreign companies. Through the movement, the Muhammadiyah tries to appear leading to straighten Indonesia, as a great nation, free from foreign interference. It is likened to the Jihad. Many of those who tried to approach Muhammadiyah, from giving threats, to provide funding deals CSR as compensation so as not to continue the lawsuit. Alhamdulillah, finally Muhammadiyah 'win over the judicial review of Law No. 7 of 2004 on Water Resources (SDA). The Muhammadiyah movement and is expected to continue to be done, so that the Islamic movement berkemajuan able to bring Indonesia Maju.

give suggestions, feedback, the argument against rhetoric Islam Nusantara in new media. Surely the netcitizen participation, a social movement is one means of public spaces to build communicative action. Meanwhile, Muhammadiyah positions that are outside the coalition government, consistent with a step forward, to produce and disseminate Islam Berkamajuan rhetoric. Based explanation above, the authors conclude both NU and Muhammadiyah, rhetoric movements, remains with the spirit of national unity. In Indonesia, every Islamic organizations, had the idea of Islam recognized the strengths of each, but everything is geared towards the agenda of spreading Islam as a religion that rahmatan lil 'Alamin. Mutual criticism and arguments between Islamic organizations in the archipelago, is nothing but the manifestation of the spirit of the race with Fastabiqul Khoirot, among Islamic organizations in order to feel the presence and emergence. REFERENCES M. Amin Abdullah. (2005) Democracy and Authoritarianism in Islamic Text: The Implication and the Consequences of having Bayani type of Islamic Epistemology in the Political Arena. ICIP Journal,Vol. 2,No. 2 [2] Benyamin Fleming Intan.(2006).“Public Religion” and the Pancasila-Based State of Indonesia: an ethical and sociological analysis. New York: Peter Lang. [3] Abdul Azis dkk. (2006). Gerakan Islam Kontemporer di Indonesia. Jakarta: Diva Pustaka. [4] Raja Bahul. (2003). Toward an Islamic Conception of Democracy: Islam and the Notion of Public Reason. Critique: Critical Middle Eastern Studies, Vol. 12, No. 1. [5] Moh. Nurhakim. (2012). Muhammadiyah dan Agenda Pengembangan Pemikiran Islam dalam Konteks Perubahan Masyarakat Kontemporer. Jurnal Online Metodologi Tarjih Muhammadiyah, Vol. 1, No. 1 [6] Dini Safitri. (2015). Debat Retorika dalam Wacana Islam Nusantara. Jurnal Commlinevol. VI,No. 2 [7] Ibnu Hamad. (2007). Lebih Dekat dengan Analisis Wacana. Mediator,Vol.8,No.2 [1]

Face of Islam in the archipelago Images are framed in the new Media Two brief review above, the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara and Islam berkemajuan in new media, is the result of the writer's observation at a number of websites, blogs and social media accounts. Based on the writer's observation, phenomenon netcitizen more frenzied thrash Islam Nusantara rhetoric and not so reactive response Islam Berkemajuan rhetoric, is a portrait of the face of Islam in the archipelago that is framed in the new media. The presence of the new media as an alternative media louder voice an opinion, makes the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara more frenzied. The bustle, could not be separated from the position of NU, which is currently located in the governing coalition. This makes the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara, is getting attention from both the government and society. From the government side, the rhetoric of Islam Nusantara become a topic of study and research funded under the ministry of religion. Moreover, as the realization of political appointments Jokowi about the NU students to the citizens, the government formally specify a date of October 22 as the day students. While the public's attention, especially netcitizen, is involved participation by netcitizen

403

AVOIDANCE OF DOUBLE TAXATION AGREEMENT IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES (IN PERSPECTIVE BUSINESS LAW) Musniasih Yulianti1), Didin Hadi Saputra2) 1)

FKIP UNW Mataram

E-mail: [email protected] 1)

FKIP UNW Mataram

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Interest taxation agreement (P3) or known as the Tax Treaty is to avoid double tax. Tax Treaty whether or not there is very affect the profits of the investors in international trade transactions. The business activities of a company domiciled abroad carried out by a Form Uaha Permanent (Permanent Astablishment). Each - each country would impose a tax in accordance with the rules and regulations set by each country. This allows double taxation if the two parties interact tax as a result of the transactions between the two countries. Each country has a way or method of avoidance of double taxation, but this is no guarantee of double taxation can be avoided completely. In this article, the author uses research to assess and address issues regarding the procedure for avoidance of double taxation in developing countries and the classification and distribution of taxing rights which function to use as a reference. Solutions to address the problem of international double taxation (international double taxation), namely the presence of international tax policy to regulate the rights of taxation prevailing in a country, where every country certainly set their taxes in the territorial sovereignty of the country. This policy is called the Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement (P3B) / Tax Treat. Keywords: P3B, BUT, International Tax because it involves the cooperation of two countries. These bilateral agreements can be used to avoid the double taxation that can harm both sides and is used as a reference to determine the division of taxation right that serves to the parties (taxpayers) -haknya understand their rights and obligations that have been listed in the agreement on avoidance of double taxation, and can be used as a rule that serves to prevent any individual resident or foreign national citizen and business entity that undertakes smuggling / tax evasion cost the state, as well as reducing the incidence of double taxation. The continued development of international trade transactions can bring positive and negative effects on a country. The positive impact can improve the reception of a country, which, among others, sourced from the tax sector. International trade transaction would result in increased tax revenues that will make a major contribution to drive the economy in the country. Negative impacts are problems occurring among countries that conduct international trade transactions because of differences in tax rates and the difference of tax facilities. Trade transactions between the two countries or some countries may pose its own problems in terms of taxation, the tax regulations of interstate clashes jurisdiction. This needs to be arranged and agreed upon by the two countries concerned, or around the world to boost the economy and trade between countries not to impede the investment of foreign investment due to double taxation which would burden taxpayers domiciled in both countries

I. INTRODUCTION Nowadays, the development of technology, communications, and information took place very fast and dynamic, so bring a very significant change, especially in the economic and social fields. This is evidenced by the growth of a climate conducive to international economic relations. "Initially, only the International economic relations characterized by the exchange of goods, then the migration of human resources, cross-border service transactions and then the flow of capital and financing and the flow of information among countries increasingly play a role in the constellation of the International Economy" (Gunadi, 2007: 2). Each - each country would impose a tax in accordance with the rules and regulations set by each country. This allows double taxation if the two parties interact tax as a result of the transactions between the two countries. Each country has a way or method of avoidance of double taxation, but this is no guarantee of double taxation can be avoided completely. In this article, the author uses research to assess and address issues regarding the procedure for avoidance of double taxation in developing countries and the classification and distribution of taxing rights which function to use as a reference. To find out how the procedure of tax evasion by entering into agreements that could be unilaterally or bilaterally used herein is by way of bilateral

404

conducting international trade transactions. Each country may impose a tax on income derived from the international trade transactions. There are two authorities have an interest in taxation related to income taxation right to ownership / beneficial owner, namely the taxpayer's country of origin (domicile principle) and the country in which the taxpayer earned income (principle of source). Tax problems arise when the two countries want to impose a tax on the same type of income (passive income). If taxation is based on residency, then the aspect of fairness and efficiency of investment will be able to be ascertained. But on the other hand is sulitmenentukan for certain income of taxpayers who come from abroad. Conversely, if the tax is based on the principle of the source, it will be easy to determine with certainty the value of income that will be taxed. But on the other hand, it does not meet the fairness and efficiency of investment can not be ascertained. In addition, the tax rate imposed for the same tax object is also different between the taxation of which is based on the principle of resource with those based on the principle of domicile. Another thing to note is that the right of a state to impose a tax on earnings based on the jurisdiction of his residence, but on the other hand is also the right of other countries to levy income tax based on source jurisdiction. This has led to an international double taxation (international double taxation) for taxpayers subject to double taxation on income (income) of the same by different countries in the same period. Solutions to address the problem of international double taxation (international double taxation), namely the presence of international tax policy to regulate the rights of taxation prevailing in a country, where every country certainly set their taxes in the territorial sovereignty of the country. This process, called Persetujuann Avoidance of Double Taxation (P3B) / Tax Treaty. Tax Avoidance Agreements (P3B) / tax treaty is suppose to have an influence in increasing trade flows. Some of the literature supports this opinion, but some literature also states that there is no significant influence of P3B with trade flows. This study was conducted to provide an analysis of the value of export and import trade before and after the agreement on the P3B. P3B is agreement / approval / agreement made by the two / more countries / jurisdictions governing the tax treatment of income tax on income earned by the taxpayer in the country of two / more countries / jurisdictions different tax. II.

main factors that led to the emergence of international trade, the factors affecting demand and supply. Economists consider international trade as an engine of economic growth (Engine of Growth) and the prevailing view until now. As some of the expert opinion of the world economy on international trade quoted Yuniati (2013: 14), as follows: (1) Adam Smith argued about obtaining gain (Gain from Trade) on international trade, in the form of increased production and consumption of goods and services. With the foreign trade of a country can increase the production of goods and services that can not be sold in the country but still sell well abroad, so there will be exports and imports of a country and there was a market expansion. The expansion of this market as a result of the advantages of foreign trade (internationally) known as the theory of "doctrin vent for surplus". (2) John Stuart Mill argued that international trade and relations with other countries can enhance the productivity level of production activity. As with Smith, a factor which led to foreign trade creates production is due to the expansion of the market. Description Mill is what is called the theory of "doctrine productivity". Taxation of Export-Import According to the Law on Value Added Tax on Goods and Services and Value Added Tax on Luxury Goods No. 42 of 2009 Article 1 paragraph (1) describes the customs area is the territory of the Republic of Indonesia covering land, waters and air space above it, as well as places in particular the exclusive economic zone and continental shelf in which the applicable law governing customs. Export According to the Law on Value Added Tax on Goods and Services and Value Added Tax on Luxury Goods No. 42 of 2009 Article 1, paragraph (11) explained that the export is removing items from inside to outside the customs territory of Indonesia to meet the applicable provisions. General provisions in the export field typically includes matters relating to the delivery of goods to foreign countries. Import According to the Customs Act No. 10 of 1995 is explained on General Provisions states that the import is trading activities by entering goods from abroad into the customs territory of Indonesia to meet the applicable provisions. General provisions in the import sector typically include matters relating to the delivery of goods into the country. Import goods free of duty based on rates as high as forty percent of the customs value for the calculation of import duty. Withholding tax on imports, carried out by the Directorate General of Customs and Excise (DJBC). Basic on the taxation of import is the import value that represents the value of the money to be bases of duty plus import duties and other charges under the provisions of the customs regulations.

RESULT AND DISCUSSION

Theory of International Trade International trade is a trade between two or more countries based mutual agreement that the two countries establish mutual cooperation especially in the field of economy. Hidayat (201) defines that international trade is trade between or across countries that includes exports and imports. International trade is divided into two categories, namely trade in goods (physical) and trade in services. Trade in services includes interest payments and remittance such as salaries of Indonesian Workers (TKI) abroad and use services of foreign consultants in Indonesia as well as royalties on technology (license). In principle, there are two

International Tax Law Countries Indonesia held a Tax Treaty is not merely the desire of our country, but also because there is the principle of reciprocity and mutual interests of the countries that hold the approval. Understanding the tax laws, according to some

405

expert opinion quoted in Suandi (2008: 251-252): (1) According to Buhler stated that international tax law is divided into narrow and broad sense: a) international tax law in the narrow sense is kaedah kaedah (norm) legal disputes (collisions) are based on the law of nations (international law). b) international tax law in the broad sense is international law kaedah kaedah-plus national legislation which has as its object the legal dispute (collision) course that is located in the area of taxation. (2) According to Rossendorff interpret international tax law as the overall national tax laws of all countries in the world. (3) According to Van Themaat international tax law defines as a whole norms, including customs and international treaties that restrict the sovereignty of a country in terms of tax collection. (4) According to Adriani understanding of international tax law is a legal entity that explores an issue that stipulated in national legislation concerning: a) Taxation of persons abroad b) Regulations nationwide to avoid double taxation. c) Treaties.

According to Kurniawan and Muri (2011) in the Princess (2013: 21), P3B new taxation does not entitle the country to hold P3B. The taxation of a country on a type of income is based on the provisions of the domestic country. Thus, if in a given country P3B a taxation right over a certain income but the country is based on its domestic law does not impose a tax on certain income that the state may not impose tax on certain income that although P3B give to the country's taxation right. III. CONCLUSIONS Based on the results of research conducted agreements to avoid double taxation can be an opportunity to establish trade relations are better for both countries agreement, but if the State of Indonesia did not take advantage of this agreement it will be a disadvantage for many products, goods and services incoming foreign. For the development of future research will come in the expected further develop research area samples so that it can be seen the impact of P3B against States other parts of the world.

Principles of Tax Each country applying its own principles in the legislation that made reference to taxation. The principle affecting the tax treatment of the subject and object of foreign tax. Some of the principles put forward by Sumitro in Surahmat (2000: 6), is as follows:  The principle of Domicile  Principle Sources  The principle of Citizenship  Principle of Territorial

ACKNOWLEDGMENT We would like to convey our gratitude to all parties for making this research possible, so that the results of this study can be desiminated and presented in International Conference ADRI REFERENCES [1] P. I. Indonesia-China, "No Title," pp. 1-17. [2] "ANALYSIS OF ELIMINATION OF DOUBLE TAXATION IN. TS Indonesia. " [3] F. Law, P. Studies, Law I., K. Law, and T. Relationships, "avoidance agreement ..., Ratyan Noer Hartiko, FH UI, 2012," 2012. [4] F. Law and U. S. Maretsurakarta, "Studies on avoidance of double taxation tax law adopted in Indonesia bekenaan income tax," 2008. [5] R. Nurhidayat, "TAX TREATY AND FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT," 2012. [6] Women, R.D. 2013. Analysis of Double Taxation Treaty between Indonesia and Hong Kong. Jakarta: Faculty of Economics, University of Indonesia. [7] of the Republic of Indonesia. Regulation of the Director General of Taxation Number PER-61 / PJ / 2009 /, on 5 November 2009, on the Procedure for Application of Tax Avoidance Agreements. [8] of the Republic of Indonesia. Regulation of the Director General of Taxation Number PER-48 / PJ / 2010, November 3, 2010, on the Implementation of the Joint Agreement Procedure (Mutual Agreement Procedure) Based on the Avoidance of Double Taxation Agreement. [9] Republic of Indonesia. Law No. 36 of 2008, dated September 23, 2008 on Income Tax.

International Double Taxation According Suandi (2008: 255) states that double taxation international is the central issue in the law of international tax or taxes imposed more than once against the same object by more than one country, double taxation may occur because there is more than one country collect taxes and the tax imposed on the same object. Double taxation avoidance agreement, including one major source of international tax law in addition to national taxation laws for this agreement is essentially a reconciliation of two different tax laws. According Surahmat (2000: 21), there are three causes of international double taxation: 1. Conflicts between Principle of Domicile with Azas Source 2. The conflict because Difference Definition Population 3. Differences Definition of Income Source Position DTA P3B position law before the domestic laws vary widely in different countries. In Indonesia, according to the explanation of Article 32A of Income Tax Act which states that: The Government is authorized to deal with other governments in order to avoid double taxation and prevent tax evasion and P3B is lex of the Income Tax Law. If there is a conflict between P3B with domestic law, the P3B will apply (tax treaty ceding domestic super tax laws).

406

HUMAN RIGHTS IN THE LAW OF GENDER PERSPECTIVE (Relation in protection and enforcement) Siti Afiyah 1) 1)

University of Darul Ulum (UNISDA) Lamongan E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. The purpose of this research is the equality in education and teaching in all areas, special protection and gender equality in the implementation of employment and equality in the matter of marriage. Type This study is a sociojuridical (Sociological Jurisprudence), in which researchers are assessing the implementation of the law or the operation of legal norms in public life, and using legislation approach (Statute Approach). Law of the Republic Indonesia Number 39 of 1999 on Human Rights (HAM) says about women's rights which in essence is equality and equality of life for women premises of men, as contained in Articles 45 to 51, ranging from equal rights in election and elevation in its representation in the executive, legislature and judiciary. The conclusion of this study is that women's rights are still not fully enforced, authoritarian rule that gender inequality is allowed to take place, violence against women is not a central issue of the public. Almost all laws and policies issued directed to the pursuit of economicc growth and social stability national. But the legal system of legislation and policies governing the rights of women in Indonesia have not been able realization in accordance with the Act. Keywords: Human Rights, Law, Gender

should. Every social fact enveloped in values that should be interpretation. Within the framework of this Act and the regulations are an instrument of justice.

I. INTRODUCTION In the explanation of the Law of the State of the Republic of Indonesia Year 1945 states that Indonesia is a country based on law (rechstaat) is not based on power alone (machsaat). Mentions state of law have meaning and meaning is very important to ensure order and security of society, the meaning of the words in explanation of the Act of 1945, among other things, that state power is limited by law and based on the law, so it is not based on one's power. The aim is that the interests and rights of the people can be guaranteed against arbitrary actions of rulers. The law in question must reflect fairness and protection of the rights of the balance between the interests of individuals with interest of people (society).In the Act of 1945 states, Article 27 paragraph (1) Everyone has equal status before the law. Of this section may be we must understand that there is no discrimination between men and women, all receive equal treatment before the law. This Article is supported by other rules, Marriage Law No. 1 of 1974, Article 31 paragraph (1) contains a sentence which says that the rights and position of wife is balanced with the rights and status of the husband in a friendly household life and social life in the community. Later in the article 35 paragraph (1) treasures that got during the marriage become community property. Article 36 paragraph (1) of the community property, spouses can act on the agreement of both parties In fact, the law is the Act or regulations binding. But sometimes the Act has not been enough to justify that it

II. RESULT AND DISCUSSION A. The Implementation Of Ham In Law About Women. As a concept, the existence of Human Rights (HAM) continues to grow. This is a response to the phenomenon of injustice that continue to appear in many forms. In the age of 54 years Declaration of Human Rights issued a worldwide United Nations on 10 December 1948 has continued to be prosecuted renewing itself, as well as generate back a new awareness of deprivation or injustice has taken place. In the last two decades, the desire and demands of women to legitimize women's rights as human rights continue to roll. The peak in World Conference of Human Rights, in June 1993 in Vienna, Austria. In the declaration of women's rights position drafted in the dichotomy between the private spheres of life, where human rights violations occur only recognized in the sphere of public life only, and where the violation is recognized only by the State over the individual alone. Whereas the right of personal truth is a fundamental right for everyone, because it should not be violated, either by states, groups and individuals. As a result of the dichotomy relations, violence against women, such as other forms of sexual violence, adultery, rape, prostitution, trafficking of women, and others are still perceived as a domestic issue, a personal issue, not a human rights issue.

407

Are there any rights which air-female perspective? Ideally, rights do not choose the gender, but in fact universally, women do not enjoy and practice of human rights and fundamental freedoms fully, on the same basis as men. However, all human rights guarantees non-discrimination and sex equality. Evidence of the limitations of women's rights is objectively quantifiable. Statistics from the United Nations reinforce this statement. Women are one of the first victims of the patterns of unequal development. Keep in mind, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights is much wider than ideal. Refinements interpretation occurs indication deliberate manipulation or not (by men), so many human rights concerns neglected economic and social rights. Although gender relations within the scope of private (personal), has in practice the state has a role arrange private life through taxation, social security, immigration and nationality law, hunting regulations in addition to the Marriage Act and the family. In the Criminal Code of violence against women are not specifically regulated but there are several articles that regulate violence, among others: 1. Rape (Article 285 onwards) 2. Molestation (Article 290 onwards) 3. Trafficking in women and children (Article 297 onwards) 4. Abortion (Article 299 onwards) 5. Sell / give to drink intoxicants (Articles 300 and so on) 6. Handed children become beggars (Article 301 onwards) 7. Insult (Article 310 onwards) 8. Crimes against personal liberty (Article 324 onwards) 9. Leaving people who need to be helped (Article 304 onwards) 10. Crimes against life (Article a 338 onwards) 11. Persecution (Article 351 onwards) 12. Fraud (Article 378 onwards) 13. Pornography (Article 981 onwards) The definition of violence of the articles above is still far from the overall form of the written form of violence in international instruments on the elimination of violence against women Declaration. Although Indonesia has ratified the declaration, it still has not been able to stop violence against women. Violence against women still continue to occur and are considered unusual problems or personal problems, both in the public gaze, even though the country has not been regarded as a social problem that must be addressed immediately. It can be seen the lack of public facilities provided by the state for women victims. Up Per B. Safeguard And Enforcement In Indonesia, since the founding of this is expressly stated in Amendment 1945 of their Equality of rights and obligations between men and women, among others in: a. Article 27 Amendment 1945: Every citizen has the right and duty to participate in the efforts of state defense. b. Article 28: Everyone has the right to life and sustain life and livelihood. Also in some other article (Article 29 paragraph (2), Article 30 paragraph (1), Article 31 paragraph (1) of the 1945 Constitution, and so on). Provisions contained in the amendment of the 1945 Constitution is a general principle that is used as the basis

for the implementation of laws and regulations that exist in Indonesia in outlining the principle of equality between men and women in various fields such as: education, employment, health, law, politics, etc. in the form of laws and regulations are non-discriminatory. Law No. 39 of 1999 on the new human rights also makes mention of women's rights which in essence is equality and equality of life for women premises of men, as contained in Articles 45 to 51, ranging from equality in the election and elevation in representativeness in the executive, legislature and judiciary, equal rights in education and teaching get in all areas, special protection and gender equality in the implementation of employment and equality in the matter of marriage. Also in the Law on the new human rights is also a National Commission on violence against women. In the system of the laws and policies governing the rights of women in Indonesia, particularly since the new order can not be separated from economic and political interests of the government. As known to rebuild the country's economy bankrupt during the old order, the government is aggressively pursuing various programs for economic growth in its main political stability as a prerequisite. Almost all laws and policies issued directed to the pursuit of economic growth and social stability national. However, an official reference used by the government to declare that we have included the principle of equality is the provision of Article 27 of the 1945 Constitution is mandated to provide access and control the same for women and men, not only in law and government, but also in social, political and economic. Based on this constitutional mandate in 1974, the government reforms family laws, especially the law of marriage. Legal reform and the family in particular the Law of marriage on the one hand it provides space for wide to women because women recognized the capacity ability of the law, but on the other hand Article 31 paragraph (3) and 34 paragraph (1) of this Act have confirmed the role and sexual stereotypes (sex Rolex and 'stereotyping) women and men. Woman (wife) placed as a mother and housekeeper (domestic sector) and male (husband) is the head of the family and the breadwinner (public sector). By definition such as this clearly provides a potential for the men to decide whether the wife's role should public sector or not. The assumption was male-breadwinner and the woman is the mother "Bernie ladder whose life is supported by the husband also used in employment policies, especially on wages and ban employers employing women at night in a dangerous place. But in the field of employment, a violation of the rights of women workers, such as provisions on wages, working hours, provision of shuttle facilities, health and safety at work and the rights violations and manipulation of menstruation, pregnancy and childbirth are common. Besides, they also face hefty acts as in the form of sexual harassment by male colleagues and employers. However, this sort of thing has been set in the new legislation, namely the Law on Human Rights No. 39 1999 Article 49 paragraph (2) which reads: Women are entitled to special protection in the execution of the work or the profession of the things that threaten the safety and health or with respect to the female reproductive function.

408

Also in Article 49 paragraph (3), which reads: Special rights inherent in women due to their reproductive function guaranteed and protected by law. Then how the condition of women in Indonesia as a result of the prolonged economic crisis this? in other countries, studies have shown the economic crisis has led to the feminization of poverty (FÃ © minisation of Poverty), That is a situation which indicates worsening conditions of women's lives as a result of the economic crisis, so that poor women become poorer, the number of women who are poor to be increasing, and when compared to men, women are the poorest groups both quantitatively and qualitatively. With all its backwardness owned, it is not likely the economic crisis will cause the Indonesian women will also suffer the same fate, even worse compared to colleagues in other countries. As examples of events looting followed by sexual abuse, particularly rape experienced by many tribal women Sino that was widely reported by the media a few years ago, further ads to the burden to be borne by women, not just the victim, but the other women in the form fear and anxiety such a tragic event will also befall him. Indications of increased crime such as mugging and muggings in the streets, markets and public transport had started to appear, and women have always been the main victims. All that will further narrow the space for women to survive in a crisis situation like this. On the basis of the description above, the authors concluded that the process of implementing the concept of human rights failure / error in its application. This is because: 1. Condition of people who are still suffering under poverty, that can not meet the demands of human rights such as equality before the law and government. 2. Many human rights value that conflict with customary law and religious law. 3. Diskriminasi gender is not always bad connotation. 4. Error application of human rights is shown rights of criminals or perpetrators of the victims. These changes are not only concerning aspects of the rules, but also concerning aspects of the structure and culture of society. This means that the women's agenda must be placed in the context of the overall economic and political changes in the law, which is directed to the formation of democratic and just society. The issue of violence against women both in the domestic sphere and in public (workplace or public) must be placed in the context of the culture and politics of violence, which is run by the authorities so far. Therefore, prevention and mitigation is not enough to just level perpetrators and victims but also in efforts to change the political system of wider institutionalized violence in all aspects of society. Assume that the domestic problems are not an issue of human rights is an important part that must be changed as well. It is well known that the reforms in the law to face obstacles and limitations that are not small. Heterogeneity people of Indonesia have extended the political and ideological constraints that exist. Incorporating women's agenda into all planning changes to be made is a challenge given the structure of society is very patriarchal. Increased

representation of women in decision-making bodies, especially high impact on women is a necessary thing to do. To accelerate the policy of affirmative action should be applied in all aspects of life. III. CONCLUSIONS Based on the above discussion, it can be concluded as follows: Of the various problems experienced by women as depicted above, shows that women's rights are still not fully enforced, although various international legal systems has been widely ratified and national law that guarantees the rights of women are already widely available. Authoritarian rule, gender inequality is allowed to proceed or rapid social change to be the cause of various violations of human rights, including women's rights. The basic thing is the question of removing the causes of the subordination of women. Throughout the patriarchal ideology and socio-cultural values gender bias tends to discriminate against women are still deeply rooted and living in the community, then the woman will always be in a situation that is backward, suffering, poor and persecuted. The process of draft implementation of human rights legislation turned out to have failed in its application that it is because: a. The condition of the people who are still under pain poverty, that can not meet the demands of HAM as equality before the law and government, b. Many human rights values that conflict with customary law and religious law, c. Gender discrimination is not always the obvious connotation. d. Misapplication of human rights aimed more criminals or perpetrators of the victims of crime. in modern life is violence against women is not a central issue of the public to be prevented and mitigated. There are several reasons: First: The issue of human rights is still considered only as a public matter that violence against women by domestic sector is not considered a violation of Human Rights. Second: The public perception is no exception separate female society on violence against women is still limited to physical violence (rape). Third: Violence against women is still seen as a problem between individuals, and is not seen as a problem related to all forms of torture, violence, cruelty and neglect of women's rights as a creature of God. Fourth: There is a dangerous symptom of cynicism on the part of society that violence against women is seen as the causes raised by women themselves. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

409

E.T. Agustina, Enforcement of the Rights of Women. Jakarta: Pustaka Pelajar, 1999. E.T.Agustina, Enforcement of the Rights of Women. Jakarta: Pustaka Pelajar, 1999. Ihrami et al, Elimination of Discrimination Against Women. Yogyakarta: LKIS, 2000. The Government of Indonesia, Law No. 1 Year 1974 on: Marriage. Surabaya: Ink Reader Mas, 1990. Roswati, Some of the obstacles were encountered in female victims, the list of papers RA-WCC. Jakarta: Rifka an-Nisa, 2000. Safaa € ™ at, Rahmat, the Women Workers: Protection of Law and Human Rights SASI. Malang Teachers' Training College, 1998.

ANALYSIS RELATIONSHIP ASEAN AND CHINA REPUBLIC on DRUGS Dr. Kinkin Yuliaty Subarsa Putri1), Marisa Puspita Sary M.Si 2) 1)

State University of Jakarta, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

2)

State University of Jakarta, Indonesia

Abstract. Background of these research is cooperation between ASEAN and China Republic. On May 27, 2016, in Indonesia had founded drugs on big content and its from China. From statement Bambang Waseso, Head of Handling Drugs of Indonesia. Drugs from China comes on ton’s content. Indonesian government has program of handling drugs to youth generation. Theory these research are psychoanalytic from Sigmund Freud. When the information is not handling, the audience would follow it. It could be danger for youth generation for ASEAN. Methods is mixed methods research from C Teddlle. A Tashakkori, 2011. Mixed methods research is more specific in that it includes the mixing of qualitative and quantitative data, methods, methodologies, and/or paradigm a research study or set of related studies. One could argue that mixed methods research is a special case of multi methods research. The results is ASEAN should be relations on handling drugs agreement. Because drugs could damage for youth generation. Relationship is not only on politics agreement but all sector on between ASEAN. Keywords: Political Communication, ASEAN Relations

trade, including the study of the problems of international commodity trade, the improvement of their transportation and communications facilities and the raising of the living standards of their peoples; 6 To promote Southeast Asian studies; and 7 To maintain close and beneficial cooperation with existing international and regional organisations with similar aims and purposes, and explore all avenues for even closer cooperation among themselves. 9 (ASEAN.org.2016) [1]. A drug may be classified by the chemical type of the active ingredient or by the way it is used to treat a particular condition. Each drug can be classified into one or more drug classes. Narcotic analgesics are drugs that relieve pain, can cause numbness and induce a state of unconsciousness. They work by binding to opioid receptors, which are present in the central and peripheral nervous system. There are three types of opioid receptors, which are all G-protein linked and either facilitate opening of potassium channels (causing hyperpolarization) or inhibit calcium channel opening (so inhibits release of excitatory neurotransmitters such as substance P). Overall, narcotic analgesics reduce neuronal excitability in the pain carrying pathway. Morphine and its analogues, and some synthetic derivatives are classed as narcotics analgesics. Narcotic analgesics are used to relieve acute and chronic, severe pain. Some narcotics are more potent than others. They also have the tendency to cause tolerance and dependence. The Last Research. From last research about Drug Free Asean 2015: status and recommendation from United Nations, 2008. [4] And from the 4th ministerial meeting on drugs matters 29th October 2015, Langkawi Malaysia, and

I. INTRODUCTION The Association of Southeast Asian Nations, or ASEAN, was established on 8 August 1967 in Bangkok, Thailand, with the signing of the ASEAN Declaration (Bangkok Declaration) by the Founding Fathers of ASEAN, namely Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore and Thailand. Brunei Darussalam then joined on 7 January 1984, Viet Nam on 28 July 1995, Lao PDR and Myanmar on 23 July 1997, and Cambodia on 30 April 1999, making up what is today the ten Member States of ASEAN (ASEAN.Org. establishment, 2016). As set out in the ASEAN Declaration, the aims and purposes of ASEAN are: 1 To accelerate the economic growth, social progress and cultural development in the region through joint endeavours in the spirit of equality and partnership in order to strengthen the foundation for a prosperous and peaceful community of Southeast Asian Nations; 2 To promote regional peace and stability through abiding respect for justice and the rule of law in the relationship among countries of the region and adherence to the principles of the United Nations Charter; 3 To promote active collaboration and mutual assistance on matters of common interest in the economic, social, cultural, technical, scientific and administrative fields; 4 To provide assistance to each other in the form of training and research facilities in the educational, professional, technical and administrative spheres; 5 To collaborate more effectively for the greater utilisation of their agriculture and industries, the expansion of their

410

from Sheng Ljun about China-ASEAN cooperation against illich drugs from the golden triangle, ASEAN Perspective, vol 33 No.2, 2006, pp 97-126 [2]. These research about relationship ASEAN and China Republic on drugs. The perspective of these research from politics communication. Political communications is a subfield of communication and political science that is concerned with how information spreads and influences politics and policy makers, the new media and citizens. And the methods is mixed methods. A few informant and descriptive analysis. The result of these research are there are few planning about solutions of relationship ASEAN and China Republic on drugs. Beside of planning, we have to secured of policies on narcotics drugs. Politics communications could be moving about secured on narcotics drugs between ASEAN and China it self. ASEAN must integrated to handled policy and action on narcotics drugs. In Began with planning. All participant of ASEAN defined about policy of narcotic drugs. As Sheng Ljun research about cooperation against ill drugs from the golden triangle. Sheng describe about dialog relations. Planning should be planned between decision maker between participation of ASEAN. Not only the head of the state but the society supported on handle narcotics drugs. After planning, the member of ASEAN should arrange

organizing handle narcotics drugs. From the understanding letters until evaluating of handle narcotics drug. Organizing handling narcotics drugs should be approved between of members ASEAN. Actuating on handle narcotics drugs from decision making as a roles of prevented until handling on narcotics drugs. Actuating program should be coordinating between the tools of state on participant of ASEAN members. Not only the highest thing of the tool on the state but the population known about that. Evaluating the handling narcotics drugs have to monitoring from the point by point of understanding by member of ASEAN. And towards the participant of ASEAN should strict on regulation of drugs narcotics and China. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4]

411

ASEAN. 2016. About ASEAN. Asean.org S. Lijun, Shen, China-Asean Cooperation Against Illicit Drugs From The Golden Triangle. ASEAN Perspective, vol 33 No.2, 2006, pp 97126, 2006. N. Swanström, Niklas, Narcotics and China: An Old Security Threat from New Sources. China and Eurasia Forum Quarterly, Volume 4, No. 1, 2006. United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime Regional Centre for East Asia and the Pacific . 2008. Drug-Free ASEAN 2015: Status and Recommendations. Asia.

Characteristics in the Marriage Registration Office of Religious Affairs Dr. M. Zamroni, SH, M. Hum 1) 1)

Universitas Maarif Hasyim Latif (UMAHA) Sidoarjo E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Marriage has a great significance in human life and the cultural patterns to control and establish a strong foundation in the household. There is a duality of the legal status of marriage to nationals of Indonesia, specifically Islam, which is a valid marriage, and recorded in the religious affairs office sub-district with a valid marriage according to the norms of Islam but not listed against state institutions. Keyword: Marriage, register, Religious Affair Office. The description in the Marriage Bill states unequivocally that a marriage is valid if done dihadapat employees registrar of marriage and to be listed in the list of registrars perkawian by employees registrar marriage is concerned and carried out in accordance with the law and / or statutory marriage parties mating along not contrary to law, undang.Lebih further, also explained that thus the introduction of religion into marriage only between denominations need to be seen in the performance of its functions as a registrar of marriage, which is one aspect of the civil registry. Based on the description of the background of the above problems, then the problem in this paper is: 1. How the legal provisions and the rationale for registration of marriage in the Marriage Law? 2. How Religious Affair Office authority of the District in implementing the tasks of recording perkwinan for the citizen who is Muslim?

I. INTRODUCTION The process of formation of marriage law in Indonesia to invite a great attention from all levels of Indonesian society. Every time the government proposed draft Marriage Act to the House of Representatives of the Republic of Indonesia, always bring up the pros and cons reaction among the people, both Muslims and non-Muslims against the marriage bill. In addition reactions for and against marriage bill that also emerged from each faction in Parliament, so that the debate relating to the regulation of marriage is always interesting to discuss. For the marriage of man and not just as a statement containing permission to have sexual relations as husband and wife, but it is a turning of society, thus the marriage has a great significance in human life and the cultural patterns to control and establish a strong foundation in the household.There is a dualism of the legal status of marriage to nationals of Indonesia, specifically Islam, which is a valid marriage, and recorded in the sub-district religious affairs office with a valid marriage according to the norms of Islam, but not registered against state agencies. Marriage in positive law in Indonesia is already specifically regulated by Indonesian Law No. 1 of 1974 About Marriage, which was then applied to the rules implementing the Government Regulation No. 9 of 1975. In addition to these regulations, marital issues are also regulated in Act No. 7 of 1989 About the Religious Court , Presidential Instruction No. 1 of 1991 About the Compilation of Islamic Law and arranged in a variety of regulations and decisions of other countries. Problems registration of marriage as a condition of lawful marriage is one chapter contents reap many debates. Initial formulation of Article 2 Marriage Bill stated: 1. Marriage is valid if done dihadapat employees marriage registrar, be recorded in the register recording the marriage by the employee, and carried out according to the provisions of this Act and / or statutory marriage blame groups who do marriage to the contrary in this Act; 2. Meant marriage registration under subsection (1) of this article is done by state officials to be further regulated under separate legislation.

II. RESULT AND DISCUSSION The President of Republic of Indonesia in 1996 has issued instructions for the Cabinet Presidium by President Instruction Number 31 / U / In / 12/1996 which among other things has instructed the minister of justice and civil registry offices throughout Indonesia not to use the classifications of the Indonesian population. According to Article 131 and IS 163 at the registry office throughout Indonesia as well as the subsequent civil cacatan office in Indonesia for the entire population of Indonesia and only determined between the citizen and the Stranger.  In Indonesia there are two state agencies or institutions that are tasked to record the marriage and divorce (and ruju '). The agency or institution in question is:  a. The District's Office of Religious Affairs of Marriage, Divorce, and Ruju'for the Muslims.  b. The registry office (Bugerlijk Stand) to marriage for those who are subject to:  1. Stb 1933 Regulation Number 75jo Stb.  1936 Number 607 on Civil Rules for the Indonesian people, Christians, Java, Madura, Minahasa, and Ambonia.   

412

provisions in Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Act, is an integral and inseparable and must be implemented cumulative and not alternative, as isolated and alone. Meanwhile, according Soerjono Soekamto and Purnadi Purbacaraka that such provision is imperative. That is, the provision of coercive.  The Supreme Court only recognizes the validity of a marriage if it has met the conditions set by their religion, conducted in the presence of official marriage registrar authorized and registered by the officials according to applicable regulations. In line with this, it is understood that the civil registry is a requirement that must be met for a valid marriage by religion and by positive law. In addition, we do not need to be a dichotomy between legitimate marriage according to the religion and authorized by the state, but both conditions must be implemented in a balanced and parallel.  The marriage registration of citizens who are Muslims are also set forth in Article 8 of the Law Administration that determines that the conduct of the agency obligations for registration of marriage, divorce, divorce, and refer to the Moslem population at district level is done by the registrar at the District Office of Religious Affairs. The provisions of Article 34 of the Indonesian Law of the Population Administration stipulates that:  1. A valid marriage under the laws shall be reported by the resident to the agency conduct the marriage place no later than 60 (sixty) days from the date of marriage;  2. Based on the report referred to in paragraph (1), the Registrar of Civil recorded at the register a marriage certificate and publish official copies of marriage certificate;  3. Excerpts marriage certificate as referred to in paragraph (2) respectively awarded to husband and wife;  4. Reporting as referred to in paragraph (1) for the Moslem population conducted in the District Office of Religious Affairs;  5. Data from the records referred to in paragraph (4) and in Article 8 paragraph (2) shall be submitted by the District Office of Religious Affairs to the Executing Agency no later than 10 (ten) days after the registration of marriages performed;  6. Results of recording data as referred to in paragraph (5) does not require the issuance of official copies of civil registration;  7. At the district level report referred to in paragraph (1) conducted at “Unit Pelaksana Tugas Dinas” implementing agencies. 

2. Stb 1847 Regulation Number 23 on Marriage made in accordance with Stb. 1849 Number 25 is on the European Civil Registration.  3. Stb 1917 Regulation Number 129 registration of marriages conducted according to the provisions Stb. 1917 Number 130jo. Stb. 1919 Number 81 on the Civil Registration Regulations mixture.  4. Civil Registration for Mixed Marriage as stipulated in Stb. 1904 Nomber 279.  5. Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia Number  9 of 1975 confirms that Christians in Sumatra, Kalimantan, Bali, West Nusa Tenggara and East, mostly in Sulawesi, Maluku and Irian Jaya are not regulated separately as mentioned in the points above, registration of marriage for them was held at the Office Notes civil pursuant to Article 3 to 9 of this rule.  Religious Affair Office must record any marriage conducted in each region. Negligence noted this marriage can be sanctioned to the marriage registrar. One of the uses of this marriage registrar is to control the cabinet on the data of Marriage, Divorce and Ruju'. In Indonesia occurs marriage that is not recorded at the registry office. In order for a marriage registered is proof, if the marriage were registered marriages has permanent legal force. In Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Law explained on the registration of marriages.  The provisions in Article 2 (1) of the Marriage Law states that marriage is legal if it is done according to the law of each religion and belief it. Furthermore, in the explanation of the article stated that there was no marriage outside their respective religions and beliefs itu. So in Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Law states that every marriage must be recorded in accordance with applicable regulations. The regulations are Law of Republic of Indonesia Number 22 of 1946 and Law of Republic of Indonesia Number 34 of 1954 on Registration of Marriage, while the marriage registrar employee obligations stipulated in Government Regulation No. 1 of 1954 and Government Regulation No. 2 of 1955. Provisions of Article 2 of Indonesian Government Regulation No. 9 of 1975 that the marriage documentation for the Islamic religious marriage performed by employees registrar of Religious Affair Office in Districts, while for other than Islam marriage registrar performed by the marriage registrar at the Civil Registry Office.  A fact that is still frequently encountered in the reality of our lives is still a lot of people who enter into marriage without Religious Affair Office for the Moslems and the Civil Registry Office for the citizen than Islam, with a variety of reasons. Against this kind of marriage, some scholars and legal experts argue that such marriages invalid if done pursuant to Article 2 paragraph (1) of the Marriage Law, which is done according to the law of each religion and belief. While registration of marriage is an act of administration only, if not done does not affect the validity of a marriage that has been implemented it, but on the other hand considers marriage that is not recorded illegitimate and categorized as marriage imperfect (broken), so for those who feel harmed as a result of the marriage can requested the cancellation of the Religious Courts because the

III. CONCLUSIONS Appreciative reading with aesthetic-receptive criticalcreative strategy consists of 6 phases. The first instructional activity is introduction to the model. The core instructional activity consists of 3 phases. The cores of instructional activity consist of 3 phases (phase 1 until phase 3). The activities of students group work in doing the worksheet and making a plan to transform story text: (a) Planning, (b) arranging the scenario, (c) the lay-out of picture, narration and words. The students arrange the picture based on the plot story. The last activity, the students and teacher reflect

413

[4]

the instructional process and the teacher give post-test to the student. The appropriateness between the steps from the teacher and students activity are based on instructional model of transform folklore story to picture story. The appropriateness of evaluation tool in assessment (1) the capability of students in appreciative reading as aesthetic -receptive and criticalcreative activity; (2) the capability to transform folklore text story through picture story, as a activity product; and (3) the capability to develop the character.

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3]

A.Mannan, Aneka Masalah Hukum Materiel dalam Praktek Pengadilan Agama, Jakarta: Pustaka Bangsa Press, 2002. Prakoso, Djokodan I Ketut Murtika, Azas-azasPerkawinan di Indonesia, Jakarta: PT. BinaAksara, 1987. S.Soekamto dan P. Purnadi, Aneka Cara PembedaanHukum. Bandung: PT. Citra Aditya, 1989.

414

Sudarsono, Hukum Perkawinan Nasional, Jakarta: Rineka Cipta, 2010. LEGISLATION:  Law of Republic of Indonesia No. 22 of 1946 on Registration of Marriage.  Law of Republic of Indonesia No. 1 of 1974 on Marriage.  Act of Republic of Indonesia No. 7 of 1989 on Religious Courts.  Act of Republic of Indonesia No. 23 of 2006 on Concerning Population Administration.  Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia No. 1 of 1954.  Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia No. 2 of 1955.  Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia No. 9 of 1975.  Presidential Instruction of Republic of Indonesia No. 1 of 1991 About the Compilation of Islamic Law. 

Characteristics in the Marriage Registration Office of Religious Affairs Dr. M. Zamroni, SH, M. Hum 1) 1)

Universitas Maarif Hasyim Latif (UMAHA) Sidoarjo E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Marriage has a great significance in human life and the cultural patterns to control and establish a strong foundation in the household. There is a duality of the legal status of marriage to nationals of Indonesia, specifically Islam, which is a valid marriage, and recorded in the religious affairs office sub-district with a valid marriage according to the norms of Islam but not listed against state institutions. Keyword: Marriage, register, Religious Affair Office. 2.

Meant marriage registration under subsection (1) of this article is done by state officials to be further regulated under separate legislation. The description in the Marriage Bill states unequivocally that a marriage is valid if done dihadapat employees registrar of marriage and to be listed in the list of registrars perkawian by employees registrar marriage is concerned and carried out in accordance with the law and / or statutory marriage parties mating along not contrary to law, undang.Lebih further, also explained that thus the introduction of religion into marriage only between denominations need to be seen in the performance of its functions as a registrar of marriage, which is one aspect of the civil registry. Based on the description of the background of the above problems, then the problem in this paper is: 1. How the legal provisions and the rationale for registration of marriage in the Marriage Law? 2. How Religious Affair Office authority of the District in implementing the tasks of recording perkwinan for the citizen who is Muslim?

I. INTRODUCTION The process of formation of marriage law in Indonesia to invite a great attention from all levels of Indonesian society. Every time the government proposed draft Marriage Act to the House of Representatives of the Republic of Indonesia, always bring up the pros and cons reaction among the people, both Muslims and non-Muslims against the marriage bill. In addition reactions for and against marriage bill that also emerged from each faction in Parliament, so that the debate relating to the regulation of marriage is always interesting to discuss. For the marriage of man and not just as a statement containing permission to have sexual relations as husband and wife, but it is a turning of society, thus the marriage has a great significance in human life and the cultural patterns to control and establish a strong foundation in the household.There is a dualism of the legal status of marriage to nationals of Indonesia, specifically Islam, which is a valid marriage, and recorded in the sub-district religious affairs office with a valid marriage according to the norms of Islam, but not registered against state agencies. Marriage in positive law in Indonesia is already specifically regulated by Indonesian Law No. 1 of 1974 About Marriage, which was then applied to the rules implementing the Government Regulation No. 9 of 1975. In addition to these regulations, marital issues are also regulated in Act No. 7 of 1989 About the Religious Court , Presidential Instruction No. 1 of 1991 About the Compilation of Islamic Law and arranged in a variety of regulations and decisions of other countries. Problems registration of marriage as a condition of lawful marriage is one chapter contents reap many debates. Initial formulation of Article 2 Marriage Bill stated: 1. Marriage is valid if done dihadapat employees marriage registrar, be recorded in the register recording the marriage by the employee, and carried out according to the provisions of this Act and / or statutory marriage blame groups who do marriage to the contrary in this Act;

II. RESULT AND DISCUSSION The President of Republic of Indonesia in 1996 has issued instructions for the Cabinet Presidium by President Instruction Number 31 / U / In / 12/1996 which among other things has instructed the minister of justice and civil registry offices throughout Indonesia not to use the classifications of the Indonesian population. According to Article 131 and IS 163 at the registry office throughout Indonesia as well as the subsequent civil cacatan office in Indonesia for the entire population of Indonesia and only determined between the citizen and the Stranger.  In Indonesia there are two state agencies or institutions that are tasked to record the marriage and divorce (and ruju '). The agency or institution in question is:  a. The District's Office of Religious Affairs of Marriage, Divorce, and Ruju'for the Muslims.  b. The registry office (Bugerlijk Stand) to marriage for those who are subject to: 

415

of a marriage that has been implemented it, but on the other hand considers marriage that is not recorded illegitimate and categorized as marriage imperfect (broken), so for those who feel harmed as a result of the marriage can requested the cancellation of the Religious Courts because the provisions in Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Act, is an integral and inseparable and must be implemented cumulative and not alternative, as isolated and alone. Meanwhile, according Soerjono Soekamto and Purnadi Purbacaraka that such provision is imperative. That is, the provision of coercive.  The Supreme Court only recognizes the validity of a marriage if it has met the conditions set by their religion, conducted in the presence of official marriage registrar authorized and registered by the officials according to applicable regulations. In line with this, it is understood that the civil registry is a requirement that must be met for a valid marriage by religion and by positive law. In addition, we do not need to be a dichotomy between legitimate marriage according to the religion and authorized by the state, but both conditions must be implemented in a balanced and parallel.  The marriage registration of citizens who are Muslims are also set forth in Article 8 of the Law Administration that determines that the conduct of the agency obligations for registration of marriage, divorce, divorce, and refer to the Moslem population at district level is done by the registrar at the District Office of Religious Affairs. The provisions of Article 34 of the Indonesian Law of the Population Administration stipulates that:  1. A valid marriage under the laws shall be reported by the resident to the agency conduct the marriage place no later than 60 (sixty) days from the date of marriage;  2. Based on the report referred to in paragraph (1), the Registrar of Civil recorded at the register a marriage certificate and publish official copies of marriage certificate;  3. Excerpts marriage certificate as referred to in paragraph (2) respectively awarded to husband and wife;  4. Reporting as referred to in paragraph (1) for the Moslem population conducted in the District Office of Religious Affairs;  5. Data from the records referred to in paragraph (4) and in Article 8 paragraph (2) shall be submitted by the District Office of Religious Affairs to the Executing Agency no later than 10 (ten) days after the registration of marriages performed;  6. Results of recording data as referred to in paragraph (5) does not require the issuance of official copies of civil registration;  7. At the district level report referred to in paragraph (1) conducted at “Unit Pelaksana Tugas Dinas” implementing agencies. 

1. Stb 1933 Regulation Number 75jo Stb.  1936 Number 607 on Civil Rules for the Indonesian people, Christians, Java, Madura, Minahasa, and Ambonia.    2. Stb 1847 Regulation Number 23 on Marriage made in accordance with Stb. 1849 Number 25 is on the European Civil Registration.  3. Stb 1917 Regulation Number 129 registration of marriages conducted according to the provisions Stb. 1917 Number 130jo. Stb. 1919 Number 81 on the Civil Registration Regulations mixture.  4. Civil Registration for Mixed Marriage as stipulated in Stb. 1904 Nomber 279.  5. Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia Number  9 of 1975 confirms that Christians in Sumatra, Kalimantan, Bali, West Nusa Tenggara and East, mostly in Sulawesi, Maluku and Irian Jaya are not regulated separately as mentioned in the points above, registration of marriage for them was held at the Office Notes civil pursuant to Article 3 to 9 of this rule.  Religious Affair Office must record any marriage conducted in each region. Negligence noted this marriage can be sanctioned to the marriage registrar. One of the uses of this marriage registrar is to control the cabinet on the data of Marriage, Divorce and Ruju'. In Indonesia occurs marriage that is not recorded at the registry office. In order for a marriage registered is proof, if the marriage were registered marriages has permanent legal force. In Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Law explained on the registration of marriages.  The provisions in Article 2 (1) of the Marriage Law states that marriage is legal if it is done according to the law of each religion and belief it. Furthermore, in the explanation of the article stated that there was no marriage outside their respective religions and beliefs itu. So in Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Law states that every marriage must be recorded in accordance with applicable regulations. The regulations are Law of Republic of Indonesia Number 22 of 1946 and Law of Republic of Indonesia Number 34 of 1954 on Registration of Marriage, while the marriage registrar employee obligations stipulated in Government Regulation No. 1 of 1954 and Government Regulation No. 2 of 1955. Provisions of Article 2 of Indonesian Government Regulation No. 9 of 1975 that the marriage documentation for the Islamic religious marriage performed by employees registrar of Religious Affair Office in Districts, while for other than Islam marriage registrar performed by the marriage registrar at the Civil Registry Office.  A fact that is still frequently encountered in the reality of our lives is still a lot of people who enter into marriage without Religious Affair Office for the Moslems and the Civil Registry Office for the citizen than Islam, with a variety of reasons. Against this kind of marriage, some scholars and legal experts argue that such marriages invalid if done pursuant to Article 2 paragraph (1) of the Marriage Law, which is done according to the law of each religion and belief. While registration of marriage is an act of administration only, if not done does not affect the validity

III. CONCLUSIONS Appreciative reading with aesthetic-receptive criticalcreative strategy consists of 6 phases. The first instructional activity is introduction to the model. The core instructional

416

[2]

activity consists of 3 phases. The cores of instructional activity consist of 3 phases (phase 1 until phase 3). The activities of students group work in doing the worksheet and making a plan to transform story text: (a) Planning, (b) arranging the scenario, (c) the lay-out of picture, narration and words. The students arrange the picture based on the plot story. The last activity, the students and teacher reflect the instructional process and the teacher give post-test to the student. The appropriateness between the steps from the teacher and students activity are based on instructional model of transform folklore story to picture story. The appropriateness of evaluation tool in assessment (1) the capability of students in appreciative reading as aesthetic -receptive and criticalcreative activity; (2) the capability to transform folklore text story through picture story, as a activity product; and (3) the capability to develop the character.

[3] [4]

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

REFERENCES [1]

A.Mannan, Aneka Masalah Hukum Materiel dalam Praktek Pengadilan Agama, Jakarta: Pustaka Bangsa Press, 2002.

417

Prakoso, Djokodan I Ketut Murtika, Azas-azasPerkawinan di Indonesia, Jakarta: PT. BinaAksara, 1987. S.Soekamto dan P. Purnadi, Aneka Cara PembedaanHukum. Bandung: PT. Citra Aditya, 1989. Sudarsono, Hukum Perkawinan Nasional, Jakarta: Rineka Cipta, 2010. LEGISLATION:  Law of Republic of Indonesia No. 22 of 1946 on Registration of Marriage.  Law of Republic of Indonesia No. 1 of 1974 on Marriage.  Act of Republic of Indonesia No. 7 of 1989 on Religious Courts.  Act of Republic of Indonesia No. 23 of 2006 on Concerning Population Administration.  Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia No. 1 of 1954.  Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia No. 2 of 1955.  Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia No. 9 of 1975.  Presidential Instruction of Republic of Indonesia No. 1 of 1991 About the Compilation of Islamic Law. 

Characteristics of Marriage Registration in The Office of Religious Affairs  By: Dr. M. Zamroni, SH, M. Hum1) 1)

Universitas Maarif Hasyim Latif (UMAHA) Sidoarjo Email: [email protected] 

Abstract. Marriage has a great significance in human life and the cultural patterns to control and establish a strong foundation in the household. There is a duality of the legal status of marriage to nationals of Indonesia, specifically Islam, which is a valid marriage, and recorded in the religious affairs office sub-district with a valid marriage according to the norms of Islam but not listed against state institutions Keywords: Marriage, register, Religious Affair Office. blame groups who do marriage to the contrary in this Act;  b. Meant marriage registration under subsection (1) of this article is done by state officials to be further regulated under separate legislation.  The description in the Marriage Bill states unequivocally that a marriage is valid if done dihadapat employees registrar of marriage and to be listed in the list of registrars perkawian by employees registrar marriage is concerned and carried out in accordance with the law and / or statutory marriage parties mating along not contrary to law, undang.Lebih further, also explained that thus the introduction of religion into marriage only between denominations need to be seen in the performance of its functions as a registrar of marriage, which is one aspect of the civil registry.  Based on the description of the background of the above problems, then the problem in this paper is:  a. How the legal provisions and the rationale for registration of marriage in the Marriage Law?  b. How Religious Affair Office authority of the District in implementing the tasks of recording perkwinan for the citizen who is Muslim? 

I. INTRODUCTION The process of formation of marriage law in Indonesia to invite a great attention from all levels of Indonesian society. Every time the government proposed draft Marriage Act to the House of Representatives of the Republic of Indonesia, always bring up the pros and cons reaction among the people, both Muslims and non-Muslims against the marriage bill. In addition reactions for and against marriage bill that also emerged from each faction in Parliament, so that the debate relating to the regulation of marriage is always interesting to discuss. For the marriage of man and not just as a statement containing permission to have sexual relations as husband and wife, but it is a turning of society, thus the marriage has a great significance in human life and the cultural patterns to control and establish a strong foundation in the household. There is a dualism of the legal status of marriage to nationals of Indonesia, specifically Islam, which is a valid marriage, and recorded in the sub-district religious affairs office with a valid marriage according to the norms of Islam, but not registered against state agencies. Marriage in positive law in Indonesia is already specifically regulated by Indonesian Act Number 1 of 1974 About Marriage, which was then applied to the rules implementing the Government Regulation Number 9 of 1975. In addition to these regulations, marital issues are also regulated in Indonesian Act Number 7 of 1989 About the Religious Court , Presidential Instruction Number 1 of 1991 About the Compilation of Islamic Law and arranged in a variety of regulations and decisions of other countries. Problems registration of marriage as a condition of lawful marriage is one chapter contents reap many debates. Initial formulation of Article 2 Marriage Bill stated: a. Marriage is valid if done dihadapat employees marriage registrar, be recorded in the register recording the marriage by the employee, and carried out according to the provisions of this Act and / or statutory marriage

II. DISCUSSIONS The President of Republic of Indonesia in 1996 has issued instructions for the Cabinet Presidium by President Instruction Number 31 / U / In / 12/1996 which among other things has instructed the minister of justice and civil registry offices throughout Indonesia not to use the classifications of the Indonesian population. According to Article 131 and IS 163 at the registry office throughout Indonesia as well as the subsequent civil cacatan office in Indonesia for the entire population of Indonesia and only determined between the citizen and the Stranger. In Indonesia there are two state agencies or institutions that are tasked to record the marriage and divorce (and ruju '). The agency or institution in question is:

418

1. The District's Office of Religious Affairs of Marriage, Divorce, and Ruju' for the Muslims.  2. The registry office (Bugerlijk Stand) to marriage for those who are subject to:  3. Stb 1933 Regulation Number 75 jo Stb.  1936 Number 607 on Civil Rules for the Indonesian people, Christians, Java, Madura, Minahasa, and Ambonia.  4. Stb 1847 Regulation Number 23 on Marriage made in accordance with Stb. 1849 Number 25 is on the European Civil Registration.  5. Stb 1917 Regulation Number 129 registration of marriages conducted according to the provisions Stb. 1917 Number 130 jo. Stb. 1919 Number 81 on the Civil Registration Regulations mixture.  6. Civil Registration for Mixed Marriage as stipulated in Stb. 1904 Nomber 279.  7. Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia Number  9 of 1975 confirms that Christians in Sumatra, Kalimantan, Bali, West Nusa Tenggara and East, mostly in Sulawesi, Maluku and Irian Jaya are not regulated separately as mentioned in the points above, registration of marriage for them was held at the Office Notes civil pursuant to Article 3 to 9 of this rule.  Religious Affair Office must record any marriage conducted in each region. Negligence noted this marriage can be sanctioned to the marriage registrar. One of the uses of this marriage registrar is to control the cabinet on the data of Marriage, Divorce and Ruju'. In Indonesia occurs marriage that is not recorded at the registry office. In order for a marriage registered is proof, if the marriage were registered marriages has permanent legal force. In Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Law explained on the registration of marriages.  The provisions in Article 2 (1) of the Marriage Law states that marriage is legal if it is done according to the law of each religion and belief it. Furthermore, in the explanation of the article stated that there was no marriage outside their respective religions and beliefs itu. So in Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Law states that every marriage must be recorded in accordance with applicable regulations. The regulations are Indonesia Act Number 22 of 1946 and Indonesian Act Number 34 of 1954 on Registration of Marriage, while the marriage registrar employee obligations stipulated in Government Regulation Number 1 of 1954 and Government Regulation Number 2 of 1955. Provisions of Article 2 of Indonesian Government Regulation Number 9 of 1975 that the marriage documentation for the Islamic religious marriage performed by employees registrar of Religious Affair Office in Districts, while for other than Islam marriage registrar performed by the marriage registrar at the Civil Registry Office.  A fact that is still frequently encountered in the reality of our lives is still a lot of people who enter into marriage without Religious Affair Office for the Moslems and the Civil Registry Office for the citizen than Islam, with a variety of reasons. Against this kind of marriage, some scholars and legal experts argue that such marriages invalid if done pursuant to Article 2 paragraph (1) of the Marriage Law, which is done according to the law of each religion and belief. While registration of marriage is an act of

administration only, if not done does not affect the validity of a marriage that has been implemented it, but on the other hand considers marriage that is not recorded illegitimate and categorized as marriage imperfect (broken), so for those who feel harmed as a result of the marriage can requested the cancellation of the Religious Courts because the provisions in Article 2 paragraph (2) of the Marriage Act, is an integral and inseparable and must be implemented cumulative and not alternative, as isolated and alone. Meanwhile, according Soerjono Soekamto and Purnadi Purbacaraka that such provision is imperative. That is, the provision of coercive.  The Supreme Court only recognizes the validity of a marriage if it has met the conditions set by their religion, conducted in the presence of official marriage registrar authorized and registered by the officials according to applicable regulations. In line with this, it is understood that the civil registry is a requirement that must be met for a valid marriage by religion and by positive law. In addition, we do not need to be a dichotomy between legitimate marriage according to the religion and authorized by the state, but both conditions must be implemented in a balanced and parallel.  The marriage registration of citizens who are Muslims are also set forth in Article 8 of the Law Administration that determines that the conduct of the agency obligations for registration of marriage, divorce, divorce, and refer to the Moslem population at district level is done by the registrar at the District Office of Religious Affairs. The provisions of Article 34 of the Indonesian Law of the Population Administration stipulates that:  1. A valid marriage under the laws shall be reported by the resident to the agency conduct the marriage place no later than 60 (sixty) days from the date of marriage;  2. Based on the report referred to in paragraph (1), the Registrar of Civil recorded at the register a marriage certificate and publish official copies of marriage certificate;  3. Excerpts marriage certificate as referred to in paragraph (2) respectively awarded to husband and wife;  4. Reporting as referred to in paragraph (1) for the Moslem population conducted in the District Office of Religious Affairs;  5. Data from the records referred to in paragraph (4) and in Article 8 paragraph (2) shall be submitted by the District Office of Religious Affairs to the Executing Agency no later than 10 (ten) days after the registration of marriages performed;  6. Results of recording data as referred to in paragraph (5) does not require the issuance of official copies of civil registration;  7. At the district level report referred to in paragraph (1) conducted at “Unit Pelaksana Tugas Dinas” implementing agencies.  III. CONCLUSIONS From the foregoing, it can be concluded as follows:  1. The First, the Marriage Registration is an act of administration based on the legislation in force undertaken by instasi authorized (Religious Affair Office for

419

Indonesian citizens who are Muslims and the Civil Registry Office for the citizen whose religion other than Islam) which is marked by the issuance of a marriage certificate and a marriage certificate to the bride and groom.  2. The Second, the marriage registration is very important because it provides certainty and legal protection as well as highly beneficial to the couple and to the consequences later, like the treasure, the status of children, and so forth, as well as being an additional factor to realize the purpose of marriage is the realization household (family) happy, sakinah, mawaddah, and mercy.   3. The Third, there is still a pro and contra view among scholars and legal experts in assessing a civil registry provisions set forth in Article 2 paragraph (2) of Indonesian Act Number 1 of 1974. The parties considered that the registration of marriage is not the administrative work related to the validity of a marriage. But on the other hand considers that registration of marriages be the deciding factor validity of the marriage, so marriage is not recorded categorized as imperfect marriage that may be requested cancellation in court.  Based on the research that the level of consumer preferences are influenced by consumer tastes are drawn from the number of requests dendeng and rendang. Demand for the dendeng and rendang is affected by income, education, family status and ethnicity. So that research results can be summarized as follows:   a. Consumption of consumers in Minangkabau traditional dishes (dendeng and rendang) significantly affects preferences (utilities) in consuming dendeng and rendang. In addition, consumers can maximize their utility be 91.60 percent degree of satisfaction with almost 100 percent.

b. Consumers Minangkabau traditional dishes (dendeng and rendang) allocating revenue to the median of the observed consumer IDR 237,000, - by buying dendeng as much as 463 grams (equivalent to 2 packs a mean packing 250 grams) and rendang buy as much as 658 grams (equivalent to 3 packs means packing 250 grams). c. Income, education, and ethnicity significant effect on demand rendang. While the demand for dendeng is significantly affected by income, education and consumer status. REFERENCE [1] A.Mannan, Aneka Masalah Hukum Materiel dalam Praktek Pengadilan Agama, Jakarta: Pustaka Bangsa Press, 2002. [2] Prakoso, Djokodan I Ketut Murtika, Azas-azas Perkawinan di Indonesia, Jakarta: PT. Bina Aksara, 1987. [3] S. Soekamto, dan P. Purbacaraka, Aneka Cara Pembedaan Hukum. Bandung: PT. Citra Aditya, 1989. [4] Sudarsono, Hukum Perkawinan Nasional, Jakarta: Rineka Cipta, 2010. [5] Act of Republic of Indonesia Number 22 of 1946 on Registration of Marriage. [6] Act of Republic of Indonesia Number 1 of 1974 on Marriage. [7] Act of Republic of Indonesia Number 7 of 1989 on Religious Courts. [8] Act of Republic of Indonesia Number 23 of 2006 on Concerning Population Administration. [9] Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia Number 1 of 1954. [10] Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia Number 2 of 1955. [11] Government Regulation of Republic of Indonesia Number 9 of 1975. [12] Presidential Instruction of Republic of Indonesia Number 1 of 1991 About the Compilation of Islamic Law.

420

CASE STUDY ON VIOLENCE AGAINST AHMADIYYA ADHERENTS IN INDONESIA IN THE REIGN OF PRESIDENT SUSILO BAMBANG YUDHOYONO Agung Yudhistira Nugroho, MA1) 1)

UNTAG, Jakarta, Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Ahmadiyya saga in Indonesia just like a never ending stories. Starting from the non-acceptance of them in society, violence and intimidation, pressure from Islamic organizations and the Indonesian Ulema Council. The government placed in the position of a dilemma. On one hand the government is required to protect its citizens in this regard Ahmadiyya followers are intimidated by a group or community that does not accept them, on the other hand the government must determine the manner in which the Government should disband and ban the Ahmadiyya. When the Ahmadiyya and other religious people defended using the excuse of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the UN Human Rights artificial precisely considered weak and unable to protect Palestinians from Israeli attacks. From here then comes the problem of where the followers of the Ahmadiyya to be able to put themselves in a society that does not accept them, Not an easy task to find the right solution for this case. Solutions that can be offered is to address these differences by looking at the cornerstone of our country Pancasila which has a single slogan Unity in Diversity. In that case author also concern about how the the government in maintaining security for Ahmadiyya followers whom a citizen of Indonesia as well? This is what will be studied in this paper. Keywords: Ahmadiyya, Human Security, Islamic organizations, the Government of Indonesia, Radicalism.

and other religions in Indonesia. Receipt of Ahmadiyya in Indonesia at that time can be seen from WR. Supratman confirmed as a national hero. Even Ahmadiyya mosques built in many places and its adherents are free to run his worship. After the reform and especially during the reign of Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono, everything changed. In the administration of President Yudhoyono, the Indonesian Ulema Council (MUI) have a dominant influence in the running of Islamic law. So that in 2005, the MUI issued a fatwa on the Ahmadiyya and asked Yudhoyono to ban all related to Ahmadiyya . From the fatwa is what later became the basis for the intimidation against the Ahmadiyya. On the other hand the existence of a coalition of Islamic organizations initiated by Hizb ut-Tahrir Indonesia (HTI) with the Muslim Forum, the Islamic Defenders Front and the Indonesian Mujahidin Council, which then lobbies the Coordinating Board for Monitoring Mystical Beliefs in Society (Bakor Pakem), to ban Ahmadiyya . Bakor Pakem itself as a forum of various government agencies under the supervision of the Attorney General. The purpose of the Hizb, which is the parent of HTI is headquartered in London, is establishing Islamic caliphate, a kind of Ottoman Empire, with members of all Islamic countries around the world. Based on MUI fatwa’s and supported by other Islamic groups, acts of violence against the Ahmadiyya in various places in Indonesia are common, took so many casualties. The peak of this riots held in Cikeusik, Banten in 2011, that

I. INTRODUCTION Violence committed against Ahmadiyya in Indonesia has increased in recent years. In Lombok, West Nusa Tenggara, the Ahmadiyya community were expelled from their land and had to stay in Mataram Transito building used as a place of refuge for more than 7 years. In some cities like Tangerang, Bogor and Tasikmalaya, the Ahmadiyya congregation many death threats if they are still running a worship. Ahmadiyya is a sect of Islam, founded by Mirza Ghulam Ahmad in 1889 in India. The fundamental difference Ahmadiyya teachings with the teachings of Islam whom are admitted Mirza Ghulam Ahmad as the Mahdi. It is completely contrary to the fundamental Islamic beliefs that do not recognize Ghulam Ahmad as the Imam Mahdi, because of the religious beliefs of Islam considers Muhammad was the last prophet. Coupled with the presumption Ahmadiyya has its own holy book that is different from the Koran. Although Ahmadiyya themselves against the assumption. They declared the Ahmadiyya holy book the Koran remains, but based on the interpretation of Mirza Ghulam Ahmad. Ahmadiyya itself went to Indonesia and named themselves as Jamaah Islam Indonesia, and approved as a legal entity by the Minister of Justice in 1953.Since recognized as a legal entity, for more than fifty years of Ahmadiyya coexist in peace and security with the Moslems

421

several of people were killed when hundreds of people tried to expel the Ahmadiyya study group.

Traditional Security. Non-Traditional Security Studies assume that the state is not the only subject. Non-Traditional Security Studies in Copenhagen School clarify the role of objects and subjects in international security. Associated with the securitization process, of course, not in spite of speech act. Speech act, carried out by MUI in the form of a fatwa that forbids Ahmadiyya, encouraging other community components to criminalize Ahmadiyya . Thus the government has failed to implement the responsibility to protect (R2P) against its citizens. Governments tend impunity violence against the Ahmadiyya . This is clearly contrary to the principle of the Pancasila state governing religious freedom in Indonesia. It is undeniable that the securitization of religion brings its own dilemma against law enforcement officers and state officials. Individually they see their religion ideology leads them to behave is not neutral in handling cases related to religion. This is evident from the case in 2006 in Lombok. Expulsion of Ahmadiyya comes ahead of the local elections. The expulsion carried out by the religious leaders that the locals called “Tuan Guru” who is also running for the head region. When the newly elected governor, the governor, who also came from Islamic organizations are not willing to solve the problem on Ahmadiyya who have been expelled from their homeland. Plus the governor gives speech act to the Ahmadiyya to get out of the Ahmadiyya or seek asylum abroad. Here 'Local State' put option to support the banning of Ahmadiyya in Lombok be to continue to have the support of the Islamic group the majority there. The same thing is also happening at the national level. SBY government never act to stop the criminalization of Ahmadiyya followers because they will damage relations with the Islamic group majority. As a result, the government tends to leave and turn a blind eye to criminalize the Ahmadiyya followers. The government considers the criminalization committed against Ahmadiyya is not a fundamental, because Ahmadiyya are a minority. The violence of the minority groups is the impact of the weakness of representative democracy tends to ignore the minority groups because they will not takes the influence in elections. Here the political agenda of the foundation to secure political office, with the support of Ahmadiyya will eliminate the majority support that in fact Islam is the main source of votes in the election.

Research Question Is violence against Ahmadiyya due to non-fulfillment of the security community by the government of Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono? II.

DISCUSSIONS

Basically, human nature is less like the difference. The differences are often regarded as incompatible with the eyes of the majority of individuals or groups. Especially when it concerns the differences more fundamental problems, namely religion. See the case on the Ahmadiyya adherents in criminalization by other Muslims, quite contrary to Pancasila. Where Indonesia is a country that is based on Pancasila is not a religion. In creating a sense of security for all citizens and the protection of human rights is a constitutional duty of the government. Therefore, protection of Ahmadiyya from threats to the right to security in freedom in exercising their religion and a real threat to human rights are appropriately become the constitutional duty of the government. The whole basis of the law, instruments, and devices for protecting against its citizens must be provided by the government. However, in the name of constitutional duties, does not mean the country is justified devices perform actions beyond the limits defined democratic authority through legislation. Restriction of powers in dealing deal with Ahmadiyah is an absolute done by the government to protect its citizens in the running of religious freedom. Ahmadiyya cases started when SBY as head of government had a close relationship with the Islamists community. In that result President gives an absolute authority to the MUI. This situation has never been done by SBY’s predecessors. In the Soeharto’s era Islamic organizations are marginalized and not given a chance to develop into force. Every movement that lead to acts of radicalism and violence immediately suppressed to prevent the disruption of national stability and economic growth in Indonesia. Soeharto holds a dominant role in every aspect of life. While the strength of the democratic system and control functions scattered in various groups and institutions. Therefore, the President must constantly strive to always get support from groups who have the power and the control. From there SBY put MUI as a controller of the control of Islam in Indonesia. A security issue itself is usually assumed to be a problem associated between countries, in maintaining and protecting the security of a country from threats that come from other countries (Traditional Security). However, with the awareness that the security threats come not only the state, then the concept of security of a military nature was shifted so that a broader concept of security, it is then referred to as Non-Traditional Security. This is in line with the opinion of Barry Buzan, who stated that there are different types of threats that are no longer new and traditional security concerns. Here Barry Buzan assume that there are new threats that must be addressed with different studies, or the so-called Non-

III. CONCLUSION For the citizens of Indonesia's national sovereignty is equal treatment of citizens regardless of their racial background, ethnicity, religion and culture. Decisions taken by the MUI is an attitude that is contrary to the state constitution and a legal order ambiguity in Indonesia. This is what will happen when state officials were united with the people to oppress minorities. Plus puts the benchmark of thought on the basis of religion of the majority, while the freedom of the right of citizens to adopt a religion or belief of each conditioned on behalf of desecration and blasphemy. Violate the rights of Ahmadiyya to profess their belief is a denial of their rights as human beings. It is as stipulated in the UN Universal Declaration of Human Rights which has put faith and trust as the most essential rights of every human being. When the Ahmadiyya and other religious

422

people defended using the excuse of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the UN Human Rights artificial precisely considered weak and unable to protect Palestinians from Israeli attacks. Islamic mass organizations in Indonesia accused the UN Declaration on Human Rights is an infidel at once artificial Islamic organizations are making themselves what they mean as a human right, namely the repression against followers of a religious sect that is not in line with them. This is compounded by the country with impunity minorities and not protecting the victims. Government less assertive in taking a stand in placing itself as a party that has authority over the responsibility to protect. Security against minority communities increasingly marginalized. Governments tend to seek safe against his position. People power is erroneously often distorted as the absolute power to suppress the minority. Not an easy task to find the right solution for this case. Solutions that can be offered is to address these differences by looking at the cornerstone of our country Pancasila which has a single slogan Unity in Diversity. It is undeniable that the political elite are too arrogant to implement the

philosophy of life of the New Order that in reality there are still relevant for social life. We tend to denounce and change the order of life can still be implemented, and not impose the system is still trial and error. Certain maturity of thought and put the interests of the nation and respect for religious freedom becomes a matter that can not be negotiable. Interests of the individual or group should be placed far below the nation's interests. Indonesia's identity during which upholds unity and appropriate based on Pancasila should be prioritized. REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

423

F. Barth, Fredrik, Kelompok-Kelompok Etnis dan Batasannya (terj), Jakarta: Published Universitas Indonesia, 1988. B. Buzan, People, States, and Fear: An Agenda For International Security Studies In The Post-Cold War Era. London: Harvester Wheatsheaf, 2nd edn, 1991. B. Buzan, O.Waever, J. Wilde, Security: A New Framework of Analysis, London: Lynne Riener Publisher, 2008. N. Iskandar, Fatwa MUI dan Gerakan Ahmadiyah Indonesia, Darul Kutubil Islamiyah, 2015. Yusuf, Islam, Munirul, Ahmadiyah Menggugat. Jakarta: Mubarik Publishing, 2011.

FUCNTIONS OF CUSTOMARY LAW IN MANAGING WATER MANAGEMENT WITHIN FARMERS’ ORGANIZATION: Case of Subak Kedua, Denpasar City, Bali Province, Indonesia Dr. Putu Dyatmikawati, SH.M.Hum1) 1)

Dwijendra University-Indonesia

E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract.Irrigation water management in Bali province, Indonesia has been well known due to the existence of traditional irrigation system, called subak. Subak is not only an institution in agriculture, but also as a part of Bali’s local wisdom. The philosophy of the subak system is Tri Hita Karana (three causes of happiness) which a basis for subak to manage irrigation and farming activities. The objective of this study is to describe the subak as organization and functions of customary law in sustaining the activities on farming and irrigation in subak system. The results of study point out that subak as an organization employs traditional management to members, particularly in irrigation and rice farming activities. In order to manage these activities, subak has established customary law based on the traditions happened in the community where subak is located and based on the Tri Hita Karana. Thus subak’s customary law is specific location in nature. Therefore, the main contents of customary law concerning the parhyangan (relationship between farmers and God), pawongan (relationship among farmers) and and palemahan (relationship between farmers and environment). Applying Tri Hita Karana, subak ensures to achieve the harmony among the members and management board and make sustainable irrigation system. Keywords: Customary law, tri hita karana, subak, harmony, and sustainable to manage these activities, subak has established customary law based on the traditions happened in the community where subak is located. Thus subak’s customary law is specific location in nature (Ndulo) [3] mentions that customary law is the indigenous law of the various ethnic groups having sources in the practices and customs of the people. The objective of this study is to describe the subak as organization and functions of customary law in sustaining the activities on farming and irrigation in subak system. The study was conducted through making descriptive analysis of the relevant studies conducted in Bali relating to the objectives of the study.

I. INTRODUCTION Indonesia constitutes agrarian state due to most of the population has still dependent on the agricultural sector for their life. Roles of agricultural sector in economic development are (i) providing food for the people; (ii) creating an employment; (iii) supporting raw material to upstream agro-industry; (iv) consuming products produced by upstream agro-industry; and (v) providing additional revenue of the state as producing the export products. One of the agricultural commodities is rice which is becoming a staple food for Indonesian. The growth of population and food (rice) should be in balance in order to avoid the deficit of rice. Indonesia is a country that has imported rice from other countries, like Thailand, Vietnam, China and others. Responding to this condition, rice farming has been continued to improve not only productivity and quality but also on rice business management. Presently, government has made acceleration on increasing productivity of rice through providing irrigation infrastructure, such as weir, irrigation canal and its operation and maintenance. Irrigation water management in Bali province as one of the provinces in Indonesia has been well known due to the existence of traditional irrigation system, called subak established since more than thousand years ago (Lansing, [1]; Pitana and Setiawan) [2]. The existence of local knowledge and local wisdom in Bali have still significantly important in ordering the social interaction among the people, including farmers. Rice farmers in Bali are being member of subak as traditional irrigation system or organization. This organization employs traditional management to members, particularly in irrigation and rice farming activities. In order

II. DISCUSSIONS Subak as traditional irrigation system Water is one of the most important natural resource that is being used for agricultural and non-agricultural sectors. Nowadays, scarcity and competition of water have increasingly happened including in Indonesia. In Bali province, for instance, these frequently make conflicts among the users, such as subak, private sectors (for tourism and industry), and government (for domestic water), particularly along the water source such as river. Subak as an organization that regulates the distribution of water in the rice is one of Bali's cultural heritage that has been recognized worldwide. Subak irrigation system in Bali has been known since more than thousands ago (Roth and Sedana, [4]; Sedana, et al) [5]. In the past, the kings (monarchy) involved in subak system by allowing farmers’ group to construct temporary dams on the rivers to irrigate the existence dry land. Even, the Monarchy gave freely some

424

land tax for the farmers. In the period of the Dutch administration, the head of subak was instructed to collect land tax from the farmers (subak members). It is worthy to note that subak has specific activity--ritual ceremonies which might not be found in other irrigation systems in Indonesia (even in the world). The existence of subak is not similar with the village even though the members are similar. Subak’ s boundaries is based on the hydrological border, but the village is based on the administrative one. In some cases, the areas of subaks are passing the areas of some villages. It means that the areas of subaks are located within more than one village. However, there is also some subaks located within one village. It is dependent on the areas of subaks, and also area of village. Subak is not only an institution in agriculture, but also as a part of Bali’s local wisdom about human society and its relationship with the environment. Subak is a customary law community that has the characteristics of socio-religiousagriculture, which represents farmers’ associations that manage an irrigation system in paddy fields. The philosophy of the subak system is Tri Hita Karana (three causes of happiness) concept based on the harmony among the three. Tri Hita Karana is a universal concept of harmony and togetherness (Windia) [6]. In daily activity, subak is managed by the chairman (called pekaseh) assisted by secretary (called penyarikan), and treasurer (called petengen) and general assistant (called saye). The chairman of subak democratically is elected by all members of subak in line with the customary law. Generally, the period of being chairman is five years and he might be able to elect any more, dependent on the members. Customary law of subak define the prerequisites of chairman, such as honest, knows well about irrigation system. In the subak which has large area, there might be divided into smaller area (subsubak, called tempek) and chaired by a chairman of subsubak, called kelihan tempek. He assisted chairman of subak at the level of sub-subak, such as coordinating members to conduct the activities within subsubak. Coordination between chairman of subak and subsubak is also arranged in the customary law. Pekaseh coordinates the activities relating to farming and irrigation and ritual ceremonies. In term of farming, pekaseh always invites management board and members in the meeting before planting seasons to define seed variety, planting schedule, the use of agro-inputs and others. In the irrigation aspect, pekaseh coordinates the water distribution among farmers, and or subsubak, including the water borrowing system, especially during dry season. The activities of recording including inventory of assets in subak are responsible by the secretary. Menawhile, the treasurer has fully responsibility of keeping financial aspect of subak. The treasurer and secretary must be responsible to the chairman of subak.

that has been applied in the Balinese people life including subak since a long time ago to sustain irrigation and rice farming (Nopitasari, et al, [7]; Sriarta, et al) [8] Concept of THK has various excellences and universal relating to sustainable developments and environments (Sutawan [9]; Windia, [10]; Agung, [11], and Wesnawa) [12]. Parhyangan relates to Hindu religion, in which it is physically show by the building of temples within subak system (Windia, et.al.,) [6]. Generally, there are three levels of temple as a place for farmers (subak’s members) to worship for the God. These are at the individual level, subak level and inter-subaks level. At the individual temple, each farmer has a small temple constructed at the inlet (small of irrigation division structure). Farmer has a belief that the availability of irrigation water in the inlet is created by the God. Therefore, each farmer must conduct ritual ceremony at this temple for every rice farming activities. The ritual ceremonies of farmers are strongly concerned to the stages of rice farming. In the land preparation, for instance, farmers conduct ritual ceremony at the temple and thus followed by the ritual ceremonies for seedlings, transplanting until harvesting. At the subak level, the ritual ceremonies are performed in some temples owned by subak, such as temple constructed within the area of subak, called temple of bedugul, temple constructed near the weir, called temple of ulun empelan. The chairman of subak coordinates the performance of ritual ceremonies at the subak level started from preparation until completion of performance. Under the customary law, preparation of this ritual ceremony is assisted by the wives of farmers for making offering that is very complex offering. At the Bedugul temple, ritual ceremonies are conducted after the rice is “pregnant” (about two months after transplanting). Subak always chose the best day in line with the Hindu calendar and agreed by the members. At the ulun empelan temple, the subak has ritual ceremony for symbolically fetching irrigation water from the weir (at the river). At the inter-subaks temple level, some subak s would have similar ritual ceremony at the same temple. These subaks historically have similar traditional life and have a temple which is worshiped together since a long time ago. Owing to change of the hydrological border of subak, they must be separated only in farming activity but still together in performing ritual ceremony at the similar temple. Also, all subaks which have belief that their irrigation water coming from the lake, they will go the temple constructed in lake (in Bali, there are four lakes). Concerning pawongan aspect, customary law of subak orders the management and organization of subak to attain the harmony in the farming and irrigation activities. Based on the customary law, subak has monthly meeting (1 month equals to 35 days in line with Hindu calendar). Every month, all members of subak must attend the regular meeting and this is without any announcement. Incidental meeting, however, pekaseh (and kelihan tempek) must inform members to attend the meeting. In the customary laws, there is a fine or sanction for those who do not attend the meeting. In subak system, it is stated in the customary law that meetings of subak are divided into two kinds, namely management boards meeting and assembly meeting (attended by all members). Aside from meeting, pekaseh

Contents and functions of customary law Principally, the contents of customary law of subak including, such Subak of Kedua in Denpasar city are relating to parhyangan (relationship with the God); pawongan (relationship with human being); and palemahan (relationship with environment) as its philosophy namely Tri Hita Karana (THK). Tri Hita Karana is a basic concept

425

also coordinates the contribution of members if there is an event that would be conducted. The kind and amount of contribution are agreed by all members through the meeting. Decision making process in subak system should be based on consensus and democratic as cited in the customary law. The harmony among the farmers and management board of subak is also shown in the process of water borrowing. Subak’s customary law defines that farmers are allowed to borrow water from the other farmers with the agreement and approval of management board. During dry season, individual farmer often borrows water to irrigate his farm land. The process is very simple as defined in the customary law. The simplicity of this process is addressed to avoid farmer stealing water due the complexity of water borrowing process, while he needs irrigation water immediately. Water borrowing is also happened between the sub-subak (tempek). In this case, the chairmen of subsubaks will have discussion about water borrowing relating to how many hours, when will be borrowed and who will take an action on the process. The agreement between the two then is brought to the chairman of subak (pekaseh) to be acknowledged. Conflict management is under the consensus among the subak as cited in the customary law. If a farmer is known stealing water, he would be fined in line with the customary law. It defines that fines of stealing water at the primary canal, secondary canal, and tertiary canal are different. The amount of sanction/fine would be decided in the meeting of subak. In term of palemahan (environment), customary law of subak has define how to keep and maintain environment, such as water, soil, irrigation facilities, and erosion. Farmers are obliged to make clear on their borders of rice field and the canal in order to avoid conflict among them. Farmers are not allowed to catch fish on the canal by using chemical material. For rice farming, subak also forbids farmer to use more chemical fertilizer and pesticide. It must be wisely used fertilizers and pesticides and must follow the recommendation from the government. As usual, farmers will clean the canals and dikes before planting season to ensure that water could flow well. THK implicitly has messages that natural resources should be managed wisely and always thank the God and ensure to have harmony among the farmers in the irrigation and farming activities. This is indicated that local wisdom values application on THK of subak has proved that it is considered as the unique and the world’s most effective local irrigation and farming management (Lansing) [13]. Customary law of subak could secure the sustainability of water management at the source level (river) and irrigation facilities due to there is internal regulations ordering members to conduct. One of important things in customary law of subak is a social sanction. This sanction makes farmers are afraid of doing a wrong thing which break a rule. The customary law also defines that if someone break the rule and make harmful for the entity of subak, he would be heavily fined, such as blocking inlet on the canal to stop irrigating water to him.

III. CONCLUSIONS Subak is not only an institution in agriculture, but also as a part of Bali’s local wisdom about human society and its relationship with the environment. The philosophy of the subak system is Tri Hita Karana (three causes of happiness). As traditional irrigation system, subak has customary law to manage the activities relating to farming and irrigation based on the Tri Hita Karana. Therefore, the main contents of customary law are parhyangan (relationship between farmers and God), pawongan (relationship among farmers) and and palemahan (relationship between farmers and environment). This organization employs traditional management to members, particularly in irrigation and rice farming activities. In order to manage these activities, subak has established customary law based on the traditions happened in the community where subak is located. Thus subak’s customary law is specific location in nature. REFERENCES [1] [2]

[3] [4]

[5] [6] [7] [8]

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

426

J.S.Lansing, Perfect order recognizing complexity in Bali. Princeton and Oxford: Princeton University Press, 2006. G.Pitana, and G.A.P.Setiawan, Pariwisata sebagai Wahana Pelestarian Subak, dan Budaya Subak Sebagai Modal Dasar dalam Pariwisata. Jurnal Kajian Bali Volume 03, Nomor 02, Oktober 2013. Pp:159-160, 2013. M. Ndulo, M, African Customary Law, Customs, and Women's Rights. Indiana Journal of Global Legal Studies 18:1.pp. 88-120, 2011. G. Sedana, and W. Windia,“Social capital on agribusiness development in Subak Guama, Tabanan Regency, Bali”, Journal of Social Science, Vol. 35 No.2, 2012, Chulalongkorn Univ., Sosial Reseach Institute (CUSRI), 2012. G. Sedana, et.all, Strenghtening Sosial Capital for Agricultural Development: Lesson from Guama- Bali, Indonesia. Asian Journal of Agricultural Development, Volume 11, Issue 2, 2014.. W. Windia, Penguatan Budaya Subak Melalui Pemberdayaan Petani. Jurnal Kajian Bali Volume 03, Nomor 02, 2013. Pp:137-158, 2013. N.P.I Nopitasari, and P.Suatra, Konsep Tri Hita Karana dalam Subak. Kertha Desa, Vo.01.No. 2, July 2013. pp:1-5. P.Sriartha, Suratman, and S.R.Giyarsih, S.R, The Effect of Regional Development on The Sustainability of Local Irrigation System (A Case of Subak System in Badung Regency, Bali Province). Forum Geografi, Vol. 29 (1) July 2015: pp: 31 – 40, 2015. N.Sutawan, Tri Hita Karana and Subak In Search for Alternative Concepst of Sustainable Irigated Rice Culture. Universitas Udayana: Denpasar, 2004. W. Windia, Transformasi Sistem Irigasi Subak yang Berlandaskan Konsep Tri Hita Karana. Pustaka Bali Post, Denpasar, 2006. A.A.G, Agung, Bali Endangered Paradise: Tri Hita Karana and the Concervation of the Island, Dissertation. Leiden University: Belanda, (online) available http://indo-emirates.org/portal, 2007. A.I.G. Wesnawa, The Change implementation of Tri Hita Karana (THK) concept in Village settlement (a Case study in Badung Bali Province). Disertation. Unpublished. UGM Yogyakarta, 2009. J.S.Lansing, J.S, Balinese Water Temples and the Management of Irrigation. in American Antropologist No. 89, 1987. D. Roth, and G.Sedana, Reframing Tri Hita Karana: From ‘Balinese Culture’ to Politics. The Asia Pacific Journal of Anthropology, 16(2), 157 – 175, 2015. A.I.G.Wesnawa., W.Suastra, Tri Hita Karana (THK) Concept in Rural Settlements of Bali. Journal of Education and Social Sciences, Vol. 3, (Feb.).pp:75-78, 2016.

INTEGRITY OF HUMAN RESOURCES AND PERFORMANCE OF THE ORGANIZING ELECTIONS 2017 Meithiana1),  

Abstract. Still it is difficult for the Commission to implement a policy of achievement of performance with integrity. That requires a professional organizer, namely HR understand the work as a profession that has the specific role and its own ethical code. To realize both of these is to improve the process of selection and recruitment of PPS and KPPS as well as open access to registration for prospective PPS and KPPS, so there are many potential candidates who so far can not be involved as election organizers who have high integrity and optimal performance. Keywords: Integrity, performance, Operator eLECTIONS with the 2013 IDI achievements at 63.72. IDI achievements of 2014 in the category of being. Nevertheless, the figure had exceeded the target in the National Medium Term Development Plan is pegged 73.00. Survey Indonesian Survey Institute (LSI) and The International Foundation for Electoral Systems (IFES) in October 2014 concluded that overall positive rate of the Indonesian people against the election of 2014.  Seen from the side of a lawsuit filed to the Constitutional Court, the greater part of the 147 lawsuit submitted to the Court in the case of the Regional Head Election dispute in 2015 is suing the organizers of the dispute is considered unprofessional or not credible in carrying out electoral duties. Regardless of the condition only 7 lawsuit continued and from the lawsuit proceed only 5 claims received to do the re-election, then the condition must remain a matter of evaluation in the planning and conduct of elections that are acceptable to all parties.  There are so many variables that affect the implementation of elections acceptable to the various parties. Wall et al [7] set of seven common principles to guarantee the legitimacy and credibility of the election organizers. Those principles are: independence, impartiality, integrity, transparency, efficiency,proffessionalism. and servicemindednessMoreover, the principle of which is not less important to serve as a foundation to build value in the election management bodies is accountability.   These principles are also included in the Law No. 15 of 2011 [4] on General Election Organizer stating that in order to improve the quality of the elections to ensure the implementation of the political rights of the people required professional organizer of the elections, and for integrity, capability, and accountability. Therefore, one important factor for the successful holding of elections lies in the readiness and professionalism of the election organizers itself, namely the Commission and the Election Supervisory Body, as an integrated function of the administration of elections. Both these institutions have been mandated by legislation to hold elections according to the functions, duties and authority of each. However, to realize and

I. INTRODUCTION Talking about democracy in a country will not be apart from discussing the electoral system adopted by each country. Once the rapid dynamic development of the electoral system as outlined in the legislation nor the discussion by legal experts, political scientist, expert in Constitutional or also by other experts that have relevance to the election, but until now the issue of electoral never endlessly back into topic of discussion, both formal and informal, yet completed the process of organizing and problems in it, the Commission is still carrying out a series of election stages of the legislative elections on 9 April 2014 that followed the election of President and Vice President on July 9, 2014, followed by the election of Regional Head and Deputy head simultaneously in 2015. This means that the National election Commission as an election management bodies already announced back in stages next elections of regional heads in unison, which is simultaneously the regional elections are the second wave of regions whose regional heads period ending on the second half of 2016 and the head regions whose term expires in 2017, as many as seven provinces, 76 districts and 18 cities, which it can be said that the Commission continue to make performance improvement.  the efforts of these improvements have received appreciation from various parties who perform an assessment of the EMB include improvement efforts elections to bring quality and integrity elections have been conducted from various aspects. The result is the election of DPR, DPD and DPRD as well as the election of President and Vice President of 2014 was orderly, safe and smooth. Public confidence in the implementation and results of the elections is also increasing. Indonesian Democracy index (IDI) in 2014 also increased compared to the year 2013 (in Ward) [8].   Measurement of democracy index conducted by the Central Statistics Agency (BPS) showed IDI in 2014 reached 73.04 on the index scale of 0-100, up 9 , 32 points compared

427

establish KPPS PPS and integrity are the barriers that come from regulation. Such constraints contained in PPS appointment procedures were not selected through a recruitment and tests, but through a proposal.  The mentioned above are interrelated and have a weakness for election organizers realize integrity. First Regency does not have many options against the names of candidates proposed PPS without a process kualilifikasi clear. The problem is very likely that the suggestions or recommendations will only include people nearby who have the same politics with, without considering the professionalism and quality. Second, KPPS raised by local PPS without any selection procedure, it is possible in practice PPS coordinate with referrals, to provide feedback on the candidates KPPS nearby as well.  II.

with the election. Integrity is an important principle for an institution of public servants to gain the recognition of others. Referring to the above understanding, means the election organizers of integrity should have consistency, dependability, honesty, confidence to understand, behave and act in accordance with the values LUBER and JURDIL in the implementation election. Election organizers must have the spirit to uphold the entire Regulatory Commission and the electoral code of conduct and voluntary. In addition, throughout the implementation stages of the election should be conducted with integrity. The integrity of the election, or in a more complete implementation of process integrity and the integrity of the election results, is one of the parameters of democratic election administration process. Integrity means the implementation process in all stages of the electoral principle was formulated based on the principles of democratic elections, namely a direct, public, free, confidential, honest and fair, transparent and accountable. Including the setting and implementation of each stage of the election should ensure the integrity of the process and the election results. Election organizers not only have the knowledge and ability of electoral in performing their duties but also carry out their duties with integrity. Citing the opinion of Samuel Johnson, Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless, and knowledge without integrity is dangerous and dreadful.

DISCUSSIONS

A. The concept of Integrity Referring to Law No. 8 Year 2015 [6] on the Amendment of Act No. 1 of 2015 [5] on Stipulation of Government Regulation in Lieu of Law No. 1 of 2014 on the Election of Governors, Regents and Mayors into law,explained that the Implementation election is direct, public, free, confidential, honest and fair can only be realized if the Election has high integrity and understands and respects the civil and political rights of the citizens. Also required is a professional organizer of the elections, and for integrity, capability, and accountability. Integrity is consistency and unwavering determination in upholding the noble values and beliefs. In the context of ethics, integrity is defined as honesty and truth of one's actions. The opposite of integrity is Hypocrisy (hypocrite or hypocritical). One is said to have integrity when its conduct in accordance with the values, beliefs, and principles held. Integrity according Poerwadarminta [3] mean unanimity, integrity or honesty. There are at least three meanings associated with integrity. a. First, integrity as a unity,is used to describe the condition of unity, overall, alignment. b. Second, integrity is incorruptibility,integrity, determination, unwavering, without defect. In this case the integrity mean consistency, coherence between the idea of the realization in fact. c. Third, integrity is a moral quality. General understanding of integrity as honesty, sincerity, purity, and straightness. Quality honestly the main pillar of the moral quality of a person. To be able to carry out the election accountable, then the general elections there is every level of the KPU, Provincial KPU, Regency / City and election organizers who are Adhoc namely PPK, PPS and KPPS are required to be always maintain integrity in conducting all phases of the elections. In the context of the election organizers, integrity can be defined as the fit between the action and behavior of the organizers with responsibility and in accordance with the legislation governing the election. The existence of such integrity, the organizers will gain public trust, particularly of voters, as well as the contestants election, both candidates the per-person or political party, which is directly concerned

B. The management of human resources Main principle of a Supervisory Election is a high integrity, not only is it a moral and ethical is important as the capital base and a target primary to become the Election. To that end, the recruitment process Election Supervisory Committee (Panwaslu) District and City in each province should be able to give birth to the Election Supervisory who have ethics and morals in safeguarding the implementation of the electoral process, 2017. The value of ethics and morals are absolute principle as election monitors as the basis for the creation of capital organizers and supervisors who have integrity in the democratic process. In addition, the candidate selection process Panwaslu members do need to certainly been smoking intervention, resulting in the implementation of fit and proper test(fitand propertest)against a candidate member of the Commission can be ensured independence and credibility (Wijaya) [9].   The credibility of the election organizers can be measured through three aspects of the assessment that is, the first aspect of the ethical quality, both on Moral and third on the intellectual aspects. Three aspects, it is a mandatory criterion in the selection process of the election watchdog. The reason to use these three aspects are considered the facts of election, like 2009 and 2014 was often reported to the Assembly Audit Honorary Council Election (DKPP) due to ethical problems and moral, and intellectual aspects (Bhakti)[1]. One of the important agenda related to the integrity of the election organizer is to ensure PPS and KPPS have knowledge of electoral good and integrity in carrying out their functions. This is important because election organizers spearheading the airport voters voting was polling station officials and PPS, which is in direct contact with the

428

implementation of the electoral. Spirit electoral operations LUBER and JURDIL in the hands of PPS and KPPS. without integrity level with PPS and KPPS, then the idea of the organizers of election integrity, and quality will only be a wonderful concept to discussed without any practice.    C. Optimizing Performance Election To realize election integrity , PPS and KPPS must carry out their duties and functions based on the principle of the principle of democratic elections, namely a direct, public, free, confidential, honest and fair, transparent and accountable. Among the role of PPS and KPPS in realizing election integrity is to serve the voters in voting, protect the sovereignty of the voters, airport participating in the election, and realize the process and outcome of the election integrity.  The integrity of the administration of elections that conceptually can be seen from the perspective of the organization's management Election organizers orderly and professional both in terms of managing and running the electoral administrative regulations that include technicaloperational stage arrangement in the form of internal regulation formulation KPU and Bawaslu which is in line with the law, enforce the criminal acts of the elections, as well as enforcement of regulations related to the implementation of the code of conduct election organizers. Enforcement of the code of conduct the election organizers is a substantial part in building understanding and instill quality awareness of ethics for all election organizers on the importance of carrying out the duties and functions professionally and independently. DKPP as an enforcement agency codes of conduct election organizers in maintaining and guarding the honor of Election prioritize law enforcement and ethics(RuleOf Law and The Rule OfEthics)simultaneously.  Various regulatory improvements made in organizing the election, including regulating the conduct of elections, so as to have integrity strong in the running phases of the election. Various regulations, among other things, the independence and integrity of the election management became stronger after the issuance of Law No. 15 of 2011 [4] on the Election. Legislation is mandating the establishment of the Honorary Board of Election (DKPP) permanent with the task of examining and deciding a complaint or report an alleged violation of the ethics of the election management with the nature of the decision that is final and binding,  a. the Commission should encourage the organizers gradually to complain directly organizers in underneath were allegedly involved in election violations. The proactive attitude as proof that the Commission wants any election organizers who become policy makers and providers of technical support work professionally and responsibly. b. KPU needs to limit the participation of the public who had been a committee PPK and PPS in two election period. This restriction is expected to receive more integrity organizers. KPU member RI, Ferry Rizkyansyah (2015) expressed the spirit that want to build here because of a lot of evaluation of the ad hoc committee, the full record although not all problematic. KPU should be a mechanism merit in the recruitment

system in order to obtain PPK or PPS integrity. It is expected in addition to the cadre of organizers also expected to minimize thought to cheat in performing the duties of electoral. c. KPU needs to use a number of information technology systems in managing the election stages DPR, DPD and DPRD as well as the election of President and Vice President In 2014 the information system of political parties (SIPOL) , the information system of electoral districts (SIDAPIL), voter registration information system (SIDALIH), nomination information system (SILON); logistics information systems (SILOG) and information systems counting (SITUNG). All of the information system is managed and is under the control of the Commission and can be accessed by the public or relevant stakeholders. In organizing the Regional Head Election simultaneously in 2015, in addition to utilizing and developing information systems that have been used in the 2014 elections, the Commission made a new information system the stages of the elections information system (SITaP). SITaP serves to provide convenience to the Commission to collect information RI in the implementation stages of the elections of Provincial and Regency / City throughout Indonesia. Finally the most important is the disclosure counting. The public can access information on the results of vote counting down to the level of TPS, so that the public can access the information of votes DPR, DPD and DPRD Election 2017 from all polling stations, recapitulation in the district, the district / city and province. Seeing the above issues, it is important to make corrections so that there is a level election management personnel PPS and KPPS understand, has a high willingness to hold elections in accordance with applicable regulations. Means it takes the organizer of professional, that person understand the work as a profession that has the specific role and its own ethical code. PPS and KPPS dituntuk for professional and should really be able to do their job properly. Thus it is important to do in order to realize KPPS PPS and integrity by: a. Making PPS and KPPS professional, namely a demand for someone who is their mandate in order to get the process and optimal results. Thus, PPS and KPPS election organizers must believe in the profession as a respectable profession for establishing democracy in this republic. b. Making the PPS and KPPS election organizers as a big family. This means that should no longer exist and KPPS PPS dual loyalties to other parties. PPS and KPPS to be loyal to the Commission Regulation and all tasks assigned by the Commission. In addition, there should be a mechanism competency tests for prospective PPS and KPPS so that there is no best candidates, who will be PPS and KPPS. Guidance and escort PPS and KPPS well and structured very important to form a PPS officer and KPPS professional and integrity.

429

[7]

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

N.P.Bhakti,Unity State and UnitaryState.Indonesian Institute of Sciences, Jakarta LIPI Published, 2015. R. Kurniansyah, The heaviness of PPS and KPPS in realizing election integrity. Onlinearticle,taken from www.jimly.com, 2015. Poerwadarminta, Philosophy, Ethics and Logic. Yogyakarta: Canisius, 2002. Law No. 15 of 2011 on the Election. Act No. 1 of 2014 on the Election of Governors, Regents and Mayors Act No. 8 Year 2015 on the Amendment of Act No. 1 of 2015 on Stipulation of Government Regulation in Lieu of Law No. 1 of 2014 on the Election of Governors, Regents and Mayors.

[8] [9]

430

A. Wall, et, all., Electoral ManagementDesaign.Yogyakarta: Student Library, 2011. E.S. Ward, Erik Satrya, Quality & Morality election 2014 Very Low, onlinearticle,taken from http://definisimu.blogspot.co.id/2012/09/definisi-integrit.html , 2015. H. Wijaya, Hendru, Ethics and Moral Values So Main Target Selection of Trustees Election. ArticlesOnline,published by www.bawaslu.co.id , 2015.

REPRESENTATION OF WOMEN IN MEDIA SITES ONLINE Dr. Hj. Novi Andayani Praptiningsih, M.Si 1 1)

UHAMKA, Jakarta, Indonesia E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract. Dream.co.id site content articles and images predominantly women, where there are 429 articles in the category of housewives and career. The site is the site of the Muslim lifestyle who ranks 10th in Indonesia. Recorded census at the end of 2016 as much as 49.83%, or about 118.3 million people is the female population. The Central Bureau of Statistics recorded at 60.67% of Indonesian women married, had a position as a housewife and also work. These facts explain that women have multiple roles. The research objective was to determine the representation of women in the Online site. The method used is the analysis of the contents of the article content Dream.co.id by framing the article connecting concept and as a mark of meaning production. There are three theories that explain the representation. First, gender representation and gender is shaped by culture. Gender representation in media produces negative stereotypes of women, where women are always positioned in the domestic sphere. Second, representation and realism that is the real picture that is displayed media. Content received an audience is a form of real world. Third, changes in the representation of where the text that appears to have an important meaning message (Branston & Stafford, 2003). The findings show that 67% of women described as having two roles. Women have a function take on the role of tradition and role transitions. Women have a great responsibility in the domestic sphere and the public. A role can be an option for women themselves, but also as the demands on women. Both of these roles as a breakthrough of postfeminis, but is still undergoing structural traditionalists. On the site's content was found to be 71.7% of women get the stereotypical 'housewife'. The 28 articles category housewives and career are 57.1% on a female stereotypes about the 'housewives' negative tone in the media portal Dream.co.id, such as : housewives make a loss because it does not work and the purchase of foreign products, father was a non-commissioned officer who just married housewife, housewife better than career, women should be more at home and be a housewife, a wife/mother perform all household tasks such as cooking, washing, embroidery, childcare, care of the home, children, husband, being a housewife into the nature of monthly expenditure, women as domestic servants work caring for children, can work under pressure, a little rest, good at cooking, washing, can take care of their own health, and finally women should be housewives. Conclusion is different roles and weights, two different terms. Private role is to take care of the family. While household problem is not a requirement for women. Sincerity women who want to perform household duties while caring for children and a husband. The system of values, norms, stereotypes and gender ideology has long been seen as one of the factors that influence women's position and relationship with men, or with the environment in the construction of society. The role of women in the public sphere of the economy is getting the salary from his own sweat where the money is not an obligation to use on families. Women who want to help and share their income to domesticate the supposed obligation of men referred to as alms. Alms in financial terms given willingly by the woman/wife to the household as a form of glory and grace of a woman. Each role taken by women has a positive function for themselves, society and beliefs. Keywords: Representation, Woman, Online Media Sites something of meaning, describe, a world full of meaning for others (Hall) [3]. Representation is the production of meaning through language, where The Shorter Oxford Dictionary describes the two meanings of representation ie (Hall) [3]: 1. Showing something to explain and describe, calling the description, depiction or imagination. 2. Displays meaning to symbols, words that stand or replaced. 3. There are two systems of representation that mental representation and the representation system (Hall) [3]. First, mental representation is a system where all kinds of objects people and programs linked to the rule concept or mental representation of where we take it on our minds. Meaning depending on the system of concepts and penggambarkan formed in our minds that delivers real world. Secondly, the representation is a system of concepts, categories, and marks arranged and formed consciously. The second point related

I. INTRODUCTION Representation in media studies explain how media construct images and text indirectly. The question that always comes up in this study is how the media portrays a group identity, a story, or a specific event. Media gives us a view of the conditions and situations on purpose. Media content as the basis of media influence. Open media content and access various mass communication processes. Media content helps us to predict the effects that occur in the audience. Media provide messaging content that has the effect. Content does not stand alone to understand the emphasis being produced where content can give a natural effect or broadly (Shoemaker & Reese) [1]. Representation connects meaning and language to culture. Hall stated the representation means using language to say

431

to the representation and realism (reality) disclosed Branston and Stafford that media construct rules and systems, and charm. Media presents the elements of the text and does not represent a deviation. Media formed a concept that has never been experienced by audiences (Branston & Stafford) [2]. Stereotypes in the media is a controversial issue that leads to identity, an understanding of the power of certain groups, describing negative image 'see' and groups. Stereotypes are represented media shaping the thinking public that a particular ethnic or class should be categorized on the text produced media. Characteristics of stereotypes there are four, namely: 1. Involve categorization and evaluation of stereotyped groups 2. Understand the special nature of the group and gave negative suggestion 3. Always carry stereotypes in programs and text, but not all negative 4. The stereotype asserts a fact or attribute differences right.

mother who takes care of the household, women also have a role in the areas of social, economic, and political. II.

THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK

Reality or positive picture of disadvantaged groups could ignore the labeling that appears. Where the media does not describe clearly the actual facts. As a picture of social reality and the real state of previously unseen (Branston & Stafford) [2]. Text media presents elements of the text and does not represent a deviation. Here are the things that the media ignored: 1. Media displays the feelings of others. The media construct rules and systems, and charm. To create text, media takes work and a different subject on film, television, radio and rely on the spoken word. 2. Display and text program has a variety of programs 'genre' is not or has never been experienced by audiences. Familiarity is important audience created to obtain a noticeable effect in various genres such as adventure genre, thriller, horror, romance, action, mystery, comedy, and drama. In addition, the representation of the beauty soap ad generates something unreal and make specific and pressing issues to be long-term problems. 3. Media display images and text as a reflection, forming stereotypes excessive, understand humor and entertainment the desired audience. Questions representation of positive and negative media present a positive image and negative, good and bad that can form an understanding of the audience. Questions involved in the media about representation is : 1. How can a community be displayed ? 2. How many categories of positive representations ? 3. Is there any influence of the practical work in the media about the image ? 4. Do understanding of the audience raises a specific meaning ? When media stereotypes form a particular group then became very influential in the community. There are some image or story that accidentally labeled bad and cruel as the label unemployment, women as sex objects and other commercial. When the image in a particular group are produced, then the image has become a representation of a burden and burdensome particular group. The issue of representation raises questions such as : 1. What is the reality of actually presented in the media? What are the positive and negative image? 2. How to construct the character of the group if they do not appear in the media before. This means that they are currently being presented and a new image should be known label.

Representation and gender Gender is culturally formed and became the basis of the biology of "the body", as well as build a system of differences. Gender and sex differences lie in how the term is used. Sex is sex is not the same as sexual activity, sexual orintasi, imagination, and objects. Sex here is a divider in men and women on the side of biology such as gender and hormones. There is a difference between sex and gender. Sex leads to the characteristics of the men and women of physical and sex. While gender is culturally molded results. Gender differences in system building. Nature of women who gave birth to establish a different system that women should remain at home and take care of children. Then the media shaping it into a stereotype. Feminists develop key approaches and paradigms about representation in the media, including in advertising, programs, magazines, news, novels, radio and new media. The research method in the direction of stereotypes, women, and children can be done with a variety of content analysis and qualitative analysis methods on the image and text. Category stereotypes of women that have appeared in the media is 'the only woman in the kitchen', while 'the man is always stronger'. This labeling which always appears in the media to form a product of cultural stereotypes. In the late 1970s and early 1980s emerging category of stereotypes in the media that amounted to 13% in the UK advertising character centered on women while advertising employees or workers by 41% in men. Stereotypes in women repeatedly appeared in the media as 'housewives or workers' while he is positioned as a highly powerful and dominant, a man's voice is always heard. Other rules marked man as a scientist and an expert on the social, economic, political, health while women as consumers who enjoy the fruits or products produced men. To ward off the negative stereotypes, came the term post-feminism as a movement of women who need to voice their rights as women or gender equality known. The concept emerged as a postmodern response to gender issues. Post-feminism illustrate that women are always associated with the habit of make-up and shoes highheels. When in fact, in addition to nature into a

Categories negative image leads to the victim, sex, crime, body lean women, and black women. Such labeling media industry then formed into a discussion of certain groups. Dual Role of Women The role is a function or behavior that is expected of sexual individuals, as a single activity by purpose can be divided into two: First, the role of the public, that all human activity that is usually done dilluar home and aims to generate income. Second, the role of domestic, namely the

432

activities undertaken in the house and is usually not intended to generate income, but to perform housekeeping activities (www.kompasiana.com, articles Dinie Nastiti June 17, 2015) [4]. Another term that the dual role of women consists of traditional roles and role transitions. The role of tradition or domestic include women's roles as wives, mothers and household managers. While the transition involves understanding the role of women as workers, society and human development. At the transition the role of women as workers actively participate in economic activities (for a living) in a variety of activities in accordance with the skills and education that has owned and jobs available (Wibowo, 2011). The dual role of women to bring change of institution or social structure in the family. If the dual role of women accounted for the stability of the family or the community, then it is considered functional. The involvement of women diving dual role can not be separated from the factors that influence such as their motivation, a strong desire to actualize themselves, their beliefs and positive assessment of yourself will be the ability to carry on the success in the future. Shifting values in the family, requires women to be more independent, creative and can better allocate time again. Although there are some changes in the functional structure of the family as time use patterns and activities for the family, work, social, economic, self-development and use of free time, but do not make women lose nature and identity as women. Women have a social and moral responsibility as a form of accountability to Allah. who has created and glorify women. Economic progress and globalization make the labor market more complex. Another impact of these advances, seen from the improvement in the status of a job as well as for women. Although female labor force participation rates increased, but not a few women who work part time or work in the informal economy. This relates to the role - the dual role of women as mothers in charge of household affairs, including raising children, taking care of her husband, and employment of women. The participation of women at this time is not just demanding equal rights, but also expressed its functions have meaning for the development of Indonesian society. The participation of women regarding the role of tradition and role transitions, tradition or domestic roles include the role of women as wives, mothers, and the manager of the household (Wibowo, 2011). Mansour Fakih manifests itself in various forms such as marginalization orthe process of economic impoverishment, subordination or presumption of important political decisions, the formation of stereotypes or through negative labeling and so forth (Fakih) [5]. In general the dual role of women is defined as two or more roles to be played by a woman at the same time. As for the role of general regarding domestic role, as a housewife, and the role of the general public to the world of work. This concept seems to be able to solve the problems of standardizing roles as has been understood by some people as something that is not negotiable. With the concept of multiple roles like this, women are no longer exclusively be struggling in the

domestic sector but also can browse the public sector. In fact, statistical data around the world has always demonstrated that the participation of women in the labor market and politics is always smaller than the male. III. RESULT AND DISCUSION The findings show that 67% of women described as having two roles. Women have a function take on the role of tradition and role transitions. Women have a great responsibility in the domestic sphere and the public. A role can be an option for women themselves, but also as the demands on women. Both of these roles as a breakthrough of postfeminis, but is still undergoing structural traditionalists. On the site's content was found to be 71.7% of women get the stereotypical 'housewife'. Stereotypes of women discuss the issue of domestic and home affairs sphere that becomes a liability. Media constructed that women have multiple roles in the private sphere and the public. Women have the right to engage in the public sphere. Women are required for a good environment, career, education, economic, social, but do not forget about family affairs. The 28 articles category housewives and career are 57.1% on a female stereotypes about the 'housewives' negative tone in the media portal Dream.co.id Islam is 'housewives make a loss because it does not work and the purchase of foreign products' , 'father was a noncommissioned officer who just married housewife', 'housewife better than career', 'obligation Muslim to be a housewife', 'women should be more at home and be a housewife', 'a wife / mother perform all household tasks such as cooking, washing, embroidery, childcare, care of the home, children, husband ',' being a housewife into the nature of monthly expenditure ',' women: domestic servants work caring for children, can work under pressure, a little rest, good at cooking, washing, can take care of their own health ',' women should be housewives'. The division of labor of men and women can be seen in physical activity undertaken, where women are responsible for housework, while men are responsible for the work to earn a living. Housework rated non-productive, do not make money because it does not work. While the male job assessed productive because it deals with money (Wibowo, 2011). Money means power, great access to the source of production thus showing a high status in society. Women are different from men in certain things, so it would not be a women acting like men and vice versa. Women and men have created their respective natures. Islam is perfect not allow it to impede women outside the home. Sometimes a woman needs her presence outside. Or maybe they need something to be gained by way out of his house. Public ignorance of women's rights according to Islam, making the issue of subordination, domestication, objectification and stereotype grow and develop. The pressing problems of women to voice their rights. The portrayal of women in the article Dream.co.id done by content analysis method. There are two categories was observed that the position of roles and stereotypes. The position includes the dual role of women as housewives and as workers / entrepreneurs. The result of the position of women's roles that amounted to 67% of women have multiple roles, and the rest is pure housewife.

433

IV. CONCLUSIONS

earn a living. Housework rated non-productive, do not make money because it does not work. While the male job assessed productive because it deals with money (Wibowo, 2011). Money means power, great access to the source of production thus showing a high status in society. Women are different from men in certain things, so it would not be a women acting like men and vice versa. Women and men have created their respective natures. Islam is perfect not allow it to impede women outside the home. Sometimes a woman needs her presence outside. Or maybe they need something to be gained by way out of his house. Public ignorance of women's rights according to Islam, making the issue of subordination, domestication, objectification and stereotype grow and develop. The pressing problems of women to voice their rights. The portrayal of women in the article Dream.co.id done by content analysis method. There are two categories was observed that the position of roles and stereotypes. The position includes the dual role of women as housewives and as workers / entrepreneurs. The result of the position of women's roles that amounted to 67% of women have multiple roles, and the rest is pure housewife.

The findings show that 67% of women described as having two roles. Women have a function take on the role of tradition and role transitions. Women have a great responsibility in the domestic sphere and the public. A role can be an option for women themselves, but also as the demands on women. Both of these roles as a breakthrough of postfeminis, but is still undergoing structural traditionalists. On the site's content was found to be 71.7% of women get the stereotypical 'housewife'. Stereotypes of women discuss the issue of domestic and home affairs sphere that becomes a liability. Media constructed that women have multiple roles in the private sphere and the public. Women have the right to engage in the public sphere. Women are required for a good environment, career, education, economic, social, but do not forget about family affairs. The 28 articles category housewives and career are 57.1% on a female stereotypes about the 'housewives' negative tone in the media portal Dream.co.id Islam is 'housewives make a loss because it does not work and the purchase of foreign products' , 'father was a noncommissioned officer who just married housewife', 'housewife better than career', 'obligation Muslim to be a housewife', 'women should be more at home and be a housewife', 'a wife / mother perform all household tasks such as cooking, washing, embroidery, childcare, care of the home, children, husband ',' being a housewife into the nature of monthly expenditure ',' women: domestic servants work caring for children, can work under pressure, a little rest, good at cooking, washing, can take care of their own health ',' women should be housewives'. The division of labor of men and women can be seen in physical activity undertaken, where women are responsible for housework, while men are responsible for the work to

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

434

P.J. Shoemaker, & D. Stephen, Mediating The Message : Theories of Influences on Media Content. London : Pearson Longman, 1996. G. Branston, & R. Stafford, The Media Student’s Book, Edisi Ketiga. London and New York : Routledge, 2003. S. Hall, Representation’s Meaning. Jakarta : Gramedia, 1997 www.kompasiana.com, articles Dinie Nastiti June 17, 2015. M. Fakih, Analisis Gender dan Transformasi Sosial. Yogyakarta : Pustaka Pelajar Offset, 1996.

EFFECT OF AGING TIME AND MUSCLE POSITION ON ORGANOLEPTIC PROPERTIES OF ONGOLE CROSS BREED MEAT Harapin Hafid, Nuraini, Astriana Napirah, and Inderawati Faculty of Animal Science, Universitas Halu Oleo, Kendari Email: [email protected]

ABSTRACT. This research was aimed to study the tenderness of Ongole Cross beef with different aging time and muscle position. This research is expected to deliver information for the public regarding post slaughter meat handling, as an effort to improve the meat quality. Two hundred and fifty grams of ongole cross beef, derived from 3 years old ongole cross, were used in this research. This research using a 5x3 factorial completely randomized design with 4 replications. The treatments were consisted of 2 factors: A factor was aging time, and B factor was muscle position. A factor was consisted of A1 (0 day aging time), A2 (3 days aging time), A3 (4 days aging time), A4 (5 days aging time), and A5(7 days aging time). B factor was consisted of B1 (Longissimus dorsi=LD), B2 (Semitendinosus= ST), and B3 (Pectoralis propundus= PP). The measured physical quality were tenderness, color, aroma, flavor, and juiciness. The result showed that there were interactions between aging time and muscle position, especially on tenderness, color, flavor and juiciness. Aging time independently gave a very significant effect on tenderness, color, flavor, and juiciness, and also gave a significant effect on beef aroma. Muscle position independently gave a very significant effect on aroma, flavor, and juiciness, and also gave a significant effect on beef color. Therefore, we could draw a conclusion that combination of 6 days aging time and longissimus dorsi muscle showed a good organoleptic quality than other combination. Aging time until 6 days still gave a good organoleptic quality. In General, the quality of longissimus dorsi is still better than semitendenosus and pectoralis propundus muscle. Key words; aging time, muscle position, tenderness, beef

INTRODUCTION

quality factors is the most quality properties that determine the acceptance of consumers toward meat, especially the tenderness is depend on slaughtering method and carcass handling. Errors in handling since preparations will damage the beef quality (Hafid, 1998; 2005). Besides these factors, beef palatability also influenced by muscle types. Aging is one of the handling methods after slaughtering was done. The conditions during aging greatly affect organoleptic properties. During aging process, beef stored at cold temperatures. Muscle endogenous enzymes, such as CASF (CAF) and catepsin D as well as catepsin B will play a role in myofibrilar protein degradations (Abustam et al., 1993; Hafid et al., 2000). Tenderness improvement that occurs

The diversity of carcass and beef of ongole cross breed characteristic was affected by several factors, such as feed quality, maintenance and slaughtering methods, environmental sanitation, application of growth promoter, and beef tenderness promoter. In Southeast Sulawesi, cattle maintenance, especially ongole cross breed was done traditionally, which feeding is very dependent on natural grass availability or forage surrounding farmland. This matter indirectly affects the quality of carcass. Beef quality factor is determined by tenderness, color, flavor, or aroma, including smell and taste, as well as juiciness. Those meat

435

during aging process was depending on temperatures and storage time. At +10C tenderness improvement occurs during 15 days, especially on the second week (Dumont, 1952 cited by Abustam et al., 1993).

Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization (CSIRO), as well as Australia Meat Research Laboratory. Samples were boiled in a water bath at 80oC for 30 minutes. Then, samples were cooled until reaching the room temperature and stored at 05oC.

MATERIAL AND METHODS This research was conducted in Agricultural Technology Laboratory, Agricultural Faculty of Universitas Halu oleo, Kendari. The beef used was derived from 3 years old ongole cross breed cow, which was traditionally maintain, and slaughtered in slaughter house. Collected beef samples were derived from longissimus dorsi (LD), semitendinosus (ST), pectoralis propundus (PP), which respectively represent the muscles with low, medium and high meat hardness. This research also used refrigerator, thermometer, analytical scales, polyethylene plastic, knives, sink, stove and writing tools. This research was divided into two stages; preliminary and primary research. Preliminary research was done to conditioning panelist and to determine the boiling time and temperature. Boiling samples in right time and temperature was aimed to obtain samples with right level of hardness, so that those samples could be cut into sub sample in the next stage of research. Aging was done at 2oC using refrigerator. The samples used for testing should be separated from related connective and fat tissues. The weight of samples used was 250 grams. Each sample was put in the labeled polyethylene plastic. The given label was customized with applied combination treatments. The sample was inserted into the end of plastic bag, then folded lengthwise and clipped, so there was no any direct contact between meat and water, according to the instructions of Soeparno (1998). The methods used in this study in accordance with the instruction of

Experimental Design This research used 5x3 factorial completely randomized designs with 4 replications (Steel and Torrie, 1980). The treatments were aging time (A factor) and muscles location (B factor). A factor was consisting of five levels: A1= 0 days of aging period, A2= 3 days of aging period, A3= 4 days of aging period, A4= 5 days of aging period, and A5= 6 days of aging period. B factor was consisting of 3 levels: B1= longissimus dorsi (LD), B2= semitendinosus (ST), and B3= pectoralis propundus (PP). The mathematical model was as follows: Yijk = u + Ai + Bj + (AB)ij + ε ijk i = 1, 2, …5

j = 1, 2, 3

k = 1, 2, 3, 4

Which: Yijk = Observations results u = Average of overall observations Ai = Effect of chilling period Bj = Effect of muscles location (AB)ij = Effect of interaction between chilling period and muscles location ε ijk = Observational error If the treatments showed a significant effect, the analysis would be continued using Least Significant Test. The tenderness, color, aroma, flavor, and juiciness was done using organoleptic test (panel test) which was done by 5 – 15 trained panelist, according to Soekatro and Hubies (1992) instructions. The assessment criteria using hedonic scale, in each of the 5 points scale according to the instructions of Rahayu (1997).

436

Tabel 1. Hedonic Scale for Organoleptic quality test of meat Sensory Evaluation Tenderness

Color

Aroma

Hedonic Scale 1

Miller, 2014). Based on panelist test, the average of hedonic score on tenderness percentage of Ongole cross breed meat can be seen in Table 2. The result of statistical analysis showed that the interaction between aging period and muscle location, as well as aging period and muscle position independently gave a highly significant effect (P